English MASTER Catalogue-Low Voltage With Detaied Technical Information PDF

Low Voltage Master Catalogue
Low Voltage
Master Catalogue
ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD.

Add: No. 1, CHINT Road, CHINT Industrial Zone, North Baixiang,
Yueqing, Zhejiang, 325603, P.R.China
Tel: +86-577-61986198
Fax: +86-577-62775769 62871811
E-mail: global-sales@chint.com
Website: www.chint.net Nov 2012
EN x11
CHINT Electric All Rights Reserved Recycle Paper Printed Specifications and technical data are subject to change without notice. EN X11
Please contact us to confirm relevant information on ordering
“CHIN” indicates ”CHINA”,and ”T” represents “TOMORROW”,
proclaiming its signification-”Tomorrow of China”.
Zhejiang CHINT Electrics Co.,Ltd. (public company, SHA:601877) is

the largest-selling low-voltage electrics manufacturers in China. The company
mainly engages in the research & development, manufacturing and sales of over
100 series low-voltage products with over 10,000 specification, such as
modular Din-rail products, Moulded Case Circuit Breaker, Control products, Relays,
Inverters, Soft Starters, Transformers, Automatic Voltage Regulators, Capacitors,
Switch Disconnections, etc. and provides integrated electrical system solution
for the industries of electric power,machinery, building, communication, HVAC,
metallurgy, petrochemical, railway and etc.
With its worldwide presence of distrbution network,

CHINT is capable of delivering high quality and professional services
for its customers at home and abroad.
CHINT is consistently committed to developing itself into a world-class electric

supplier of integrated system solutions in this era of economic globalization.
By adhering to the development strategy of “internationalization,
High-Technology and Industr8ialization”, the company has persistently devoted
itself to the innovation measures in corporate system, technology, and
management with a vision of offering global customers with high-performance,
intelligent and energy-saving electric products, technologies and services.
CIS Region
Europe
Asia-Pacific
China
West Asia & Africa
Marketing Network
Chint not only has advanced production equipment, strict quality management and innovative research and
development team, but also a worldwide marketing network consisting of 5 international marketing areas,
13 domestic marketing offices, 12 logistics centers, more than 280 specialty stores and more than 1000 sales
companies, which are always ready to provide the users with high-quality professional services.
America
Europe America CIS Region West Asia & Africa Asia-Pacific

CHINT Electric Systems
Public Cable Net

KWH Meter Microcomputer Protection-
Control Device
Main Station Concentrator
Automatic Meter Reading System

Thermal power station
Prefabricated Substation
HV SF6 Circuit Breaker HV Switch-Disconnector HV Power Transformer HV Switchgear HV Switchgear Power Transformer
Hydraulic power station
GIS
Outdoor HV AC Switch-Disconnector
HV Power Factor Compensation HV Power Factor Compensation
HV Power Capicitor HV Power Transformer
Wind Power station Power Factor Compensation(Outdoor)

HV Current/Voltage Transforme
Surge Arrester Insulator Reactor

HV Capacitor
Solar power station KWH Meter
Power of Dedication has transformed CHINT from a simple electric component manufacturer
into a leading electric system solution provider, enabling all users from power transmission,
distribution and usage sectors to access more reliable, secure, energy-saving, precise,
eco-friendly, and intelligent electric products and services.
CHINT highly values all personalized demands of electric power, machinery, construction,
communications, HVAC, metallurgy, petrochemical, railway, and other industries all the time,
and devote itself to facilitating technical innovations and building a green future by
providing users with world-class tailor-made electric system solutions.
Automatic monitoring
and management power system
Intelligent Measurement-
Control Unit Modular Din-Rail Device DP Contactor
Intelligent Meter
Switch and socket
DCS
LV Switchgear
AVR
Switch Disconnector Power Distribution Apparatus
AC Contactor Control Transformer Thermal overload Relay
Inverter
Indoor LV AC Disconnector LV Power Factor Compensation
Power Factor Intelligent
Measurement-Control Device
Soft Starter
Motor
er Push-button/Indicator Light
LV Capacitor
Motor Starter Motor Protection Device
Measure LV Current
Transformer
Travel Switch
Change-over Switch
Panel Meter
Welding Machine Intelligent Motor Control and
Protection Device
Low Voltage Master Catalogue
Main catalogue
A Modular DIN Rail Product A-01~A-124
B MCCB B-01~B-139
C ACB C-01~C-136
D Contactor D-01~D-85
E Over-load Relay E-01~E-20
F Starter F-01~F-18
G Pushbutton G-01~G-50
H Inverter, Soft-starter H-01~H-12
I Relay I-01~I-122
J Capacitor J-01~J-13
K Transformer K-01~K-27
L Automatic Voltage Regulator L-01~L-15
M Switch Disconnector M-01~M-53
N Switch and Socket-outlet M-01~M-53
O Fuse and Muti-function Switch M-01~M-53
P Panel Meter M-01~M-53

Modular DIN Rail Products Modular DIN Rail Products
MCB RCBO
NB1 NB7 NBH8LE DZ158LE
In: 1~63A In: 63A Electronic
Electronic
Icn=6000A, type
type
10000A
Page A-01 Page A-07

Page A-37 Page A-39
UB DZ47LE
In: 1~63A In: 6~40A Electronic
Icn=3000A, Icn=6000A type
4500A
Page A-09 Page A-13

Page A-42
DZ158
In: 63A, 80A,
NBH8 Accessories for MCB, RCBO
In: 1~40A
100A, 125A Icn=4500A,
Icu=6kA, 10kA 6000A XF9 XF9J
Auxiliary Alarm
contact auxiliary
contact
Page A-15 Page A-18
Page A-45 Page A-47
DZ267
In:1-32A,
Icu=3kA S9 V9
Shunt Under-voltage
release release
Page A-20
Page A-49 Page A-51

RCCB
NL1 AX-1
Magnetic Auxiliary
type contact
Page A-23 Page A-53
RCBO Switch Disconnector
NB1L NB7LE NH2 NH4

Magnetic In=32A, In=32A,
type 63A, 100A 63A, 100A,
125A
Page A-25 Page A-29 Page A-55 Page A-57
Surge Arrester
NB3LE NB3LEU
Electronic Electronic
type type NU6
Page A-33 Page A-35 Page A-59

Modular DIN Rail Products Modular DIN Rail Products
Pushbutton & Indicator Bus Bar / Din Rail
NP9 ND9 Busbar for DIN rail

RCBO
Pushbutton Indicator
light
Page A-93 Page A-93

Page A-69 Page A-71
Consumer Unit Change-over Switch
NX8 NX6
NZK1 NZK2
Page A-75 Page A-77

Page A-94 Page A-97
NX9 NX2
Page A-80 Page A-83
NXW1
Page A-84
Wall Mounting Enclosure
NXW5
Page A-85
Bus Bar / Din Rail
MCB shield Busbar for

MCB & RCCB
Page A-91 Page A-92

Modular DIN Rail Products
MCB
NB1 Miniature Circuit Breaker
Color coded contact position indicator

1
provides visual indication of the device
status and insulation function
Magnetic trip elements provide
4
Type B, C and D trip characteristics
(IEC and EN 60898), while bimetallic
element protect against slight overload
Line and load side terminals accept bus bar

5 connections for reduced costs and more
efficient installation of multiple devices
2 Trip-free mechanism, device operation 6 Heat dissipation gap provides better cooling
can not be defeated by holding the
operator in the ON position
3 Breaking capacity up to 10000A 7 Extendable DIN-rail holder for easy installation
A-01 > >>

MCB
NB1 Miniature Circuit Breaker
A
1. General
1.1 Function
protection of circuits against short-circuit currents,
protection of circuits against overload currents,
switch,
isolation,
NB1 circuit-breakers are used in domestic installation,
as well as in commercial and industry electrical
distribution systems.
1.2 Selection
Technical data of the network at the point considered:
the earthing systems (TNS, TNC),
short-circuit current at the circuit-breaker installation point,
which must always be less than the breaking capacity of
this device,
Network normal voltage.
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
protection for people and big length cables in TN and IT
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
protection for resistive and inductive loads with low inrush
current.
D curve(10-14In)
protection for circuits which supply loads with high inrush
current at the circuit closing
(LV/LV transformers, breakdown lamps).
1.3 Approvals and certificates

Detailed information, please refer to Certificates Table
on the last page.
DNV
K
RTE
TE
IN
A A
> >> A-02

MCB
2. Technical data
2.1 curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type D curve
t(s) t(s) t(s)
10000 10000 10000
5000 5000 5000
1h 1h 1h
2000 2000 2000
1000 1000 1000
500 500 500
200 200 200
100 100 100
50 50 50
20 20 20
10 10 10
5 5 5
2 2 2
1 1 1
0.5 0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05 0.05

0.02 0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 34 5 7 10 20 30 5070100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 9.6-14.4In

10000 t(s)
10000
5000
1h 5000
2000 1h
2000
1000
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
20
20
10
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
1.05 2 3 45 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1.05 1.3 2 3 4 5 7 9.6 14.4 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
DC operation B curve DC operation C curve

t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
I/In
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
Let-through I 2t/A 2S I2t

10 5 63A
50A
32A 40A
25A
5 20A
16A
10A
6A
10 4
4A
5 3A
2A
3
10
1A
10 2 5 10 3 5 10 4
Shor t-c ircut cur rent ip/ A
A-03 > >>

MCB
2.2
Standard IEC/EN 60898-1 IEC/EN 60947-2 UL1077 UL1077
Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20,
A
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Poles 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400~240/415 277/480 110/125
Insulation voltage Ui V 500
Rated frequency 50/60Hz DC
Rated breaking capacity A 6000/10000 6k 5k 10k
Electrical Energy limiting class 3
features Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 4000
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2
Pollution degree 2
Rated current (A) Max power loss per pole (W)
Power loss per pole 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 2
13, 16, 20, 25, 32 3.5
40, 50, 63 5
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C, D 8-12In, 9.6-14.4In B, C, D 4-7In, 7-14In
Electrical life 4, 000
Mechanical life 20, 000
Contact position indicator Yes
Protection degree IP20
Mechanical
Reference temperature for setting
features ℃ 30
of thermal element
Ambient temperature (with -5...+40(Special application please refer to P14
℃
daily average≤35℃) for temperature compensation correction)
Storage temperation ℃ -25...+70
Terminal connection type Cable/U-type busbar/Pin-type busbar
mm
2
25
Terminal size top/bottom for cable
AWG 18-4
mm2 10
Terminal size top/bottom for busbar
Installation AWG 18-8
N*m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
Mounting On DIN rail EN 60715 (35mm) by means of fast clip device
Connection From top and bottom
Auxiliary contact Yes
Combination Shunt release Yes
with
Under voltage release Yes
accessories
Alarm contant Yes
> >> A-04

MCB
2.3 Selectivity
In Power supply side: RT36-00 (fuse)
(A) 20 25 36 50 63 80 100 125 160

Is (kA)
≤2 1.2 4 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12
3 0.7 1.2 3.8 5.3 6 6 6 6 6
Load side: NB1-63, 4 0.6 0.9 2.5 3.8 6 6 6 6 6
6 0.5 0.8 1.9 2.5 4.5 5 6 6 6
NB1-63H
10 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.2 3.6 6 6 6
Curve B, C
16 1.2 1.8 2.6 3 5.6 6 6
20 1.5 2.2 2.5 4.6 6 6
25 1.3 2 2.2 4.1 5.5 6
32 1.7 1.9 3.8 4.5 6
40 1.7 3 4 5
50 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.5
63 2.4 3.3 4.5
In Power supply side: NM8-100S/H/R
(A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Is (kA)
Load side: NB1-63, ≤10 0.19 0.19 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
NB1-63H
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Curve B, C 0.8
25 0.5 0.5 0.63
32 0.5 0.63 0.8
40 0.63 0.8
50 0.8
63
2.4 Backup protection
In Power supply side: RT16 series
(A) 40 50 63 80 100 125 160

Is (kA)
1~6 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Load side: NB1-63, 8~10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
13 40 40 40 40 35 35 35
NB1-63H
16 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
Curve B, C
20 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
25 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
32 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
40 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
50 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
63 20 20 20 20 15 15 15
In Power supply side: NM8
(A) NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R

Load side: NB1-63,
Is (kA)
NB1-63H
1~6 15 18 18 15 15 15
Curve B, C
10~20 12 15 15 12 12 12
32~40 12 15 15 12 12 12
50~60 12 15 15 12 12 12
A-05 > >>

MCB
2.5 Temperature derating
The maximum permissible current in a circuit breaker depends on the ambient temperature where the circuit breaker is
placed. Ambient temperature is the temperature inside the enclosure or switchboard in which the circuit breakers are installed. A
The reference temperature is 30℃
Ambient temperature
-35℃ -30℃ -20℃ -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃ 70℃
Rated current(A)
1 1.30 1.26 1.23 1.19 1.15 1.11 1.05 1.00 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83
2 2.60 2.52 2.46 2.38 2.28 2.20 2.08 2.00 1.92 1.86 1.76 1.66
3 3.90 3.78 3.69 3.57 3.42 3.30 3.12 3.00 2.88 2.79 2.64 2.49
4 5.20 5.04 4.92 4.76 4.56 4.40 4.16 4.00 3.84 3.76 3.52 3.32
6 7.80 7.56 7.38 7.14 6.84 6.60 6.24 6.00 5.76 5.64 5.28 4.98
10 13.20 12.70 12.50 12.00 11.50 11.10 10.60 10.00 9.60 9.30 8.90 8.40
16 21.12 20.48 20.00 19.20 18.40 17.76 16.96 16.00 15.36 14.88 14.24 13.44
20 26.40 25.60 25.00 24.00 23.00 22.20 21.20 20.00 19.20 18.60 17.80 16.8
25 33.00 32.00 31.25 30.00 28.75 27.75 26.50 25.00 24.00 23.25 22.25 21.00
32 42.56 41.28 40.00 38.72 37.12 35.52 33.92 32.00 30.72 29.76 28.16 26.88
40 53.20 51.20 50.00 48.00 46.40 44.80 42.40 40.00 38.40 37.20 35.60 33.6
50 67.00 65.50 63.00 60.50 58.00 56.00 53.00 50.00 48.00 46.50 44.00 41.50
63 83.79 81.90 80.01 76.86 73.71 70.56 66.78 63.00 60.48 58.90 55.44 52.29
When several simultaneously operating circuit breakers are mounted side by side in a small enclosure,
the temperature rise inside the enclosure causes a reduction in current rating.
You must then assign the rating (already derated if necessary according to ambient temperatuer) a downrating factor of 0.8.
3. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
86 -1.4
0
0 0 0 0
49.5±0.31 18 -0.43 36 -0.62 54 -1.2 72 -1.2
0
78 -1.2
1P 1P+N, 2P 3P 3P+N, 4P
> >> A-06

MCB
2. Type designation
N B7
Design number
Miniature circuit breaker
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Main specifications
3.1.1 Graded according to the rated current In: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A,
6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A;
3.1.2 Classified as follows according to the type of instantaneous
release: type B (3-5)In, type C (5-10)In, type D ((10-16)In;
3.1.3 Categorized as follows according to the number of poles:
a. Single pole
b. Two poles
c. Three poles
d. Four poles
3.2 Technical parameters
NB7 3.2.1 For the rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Table 1
Miniature Circuit Breaker Table 1
Rated current Number of Rated voltage Rated short circuit
1. General In (A) poles Ue (V) capacity Icn (A)
The NB7 series miniature circuit breaker is applicable to the 1 230/400
circuit with an alternating current of 50Hz, rated voltage of B、C type: 1~40 6000
2, 3, 4 400
230/400V, and rated current up to 63A for overload
1 230/400
protection and short circuit protection, and also for not- B、C type: 50 60
frequent operational transformation in the circuit under 2, 3, 4 400
4500
normal condition. 1 230/400
This product can be applied to various places such as D type: 1~63
2, 3, 4 400
industrial, commercial, and tall buildings, and residential
houses. 3.2.2 Mechanical/electrical Life
The product meets the standards of IEC60898-1.
a. Electrical life: not less than 4,000 times
b. Mechanical life: not less than 10,000 times
3.2.3 For the over current protection characteristics, see Table 2
Table 2
Test Initial Time limit for tripping Expected Test environment
Test Type Remarks
current state or not tripping result temperature
a B, C, D Cold state t≤1h Not tripping
b B, C, D Right after test number 1 t＜1h Tripping The current is
1s＜t＜60s (In≤32A) rising within 5s
c B, C, D Cold state Tripping
1s＜t＜120s (In＞32A)
B 3In 30℃~35℃
The power supply is turned on
d C 5In Cold state t≤0.1s Not tripping
by closing the auxiliary switch
D 10In
B 5In
e C 10In Cold state t＜0.1s Tripping
D 16In
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means that the test is performed at the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
A-07 > >>

MCB
2
3.2.4 For the tripping performance diagram, see Fig 1 3.2.5 Wiring: good for connection of leads of less than 25mm
(see Table 3); wiring method: screw hold-down with a toque
t(s) B Type
of 2N•m A
10000
5000
1h Rated current Nominal cross-sectional area
2000
1000
In (A) of the copper conductor (mm2)
500
200
1~6 1
100
50
10 1.5
20 16, 20 2.5
10
5 25 4
2
1 32 6
0.5
40, 50 10
0.2
0.1
0.05
63 16
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
0
72 -1.2
4P 0 Multi pole 80 -1.2
0
54 -1.2
C Type 3P
0
t(s) 2P
36 -0.62
0
0
Single pole 78 -1.2
10000 18 -0.43 67.3±0.37
5000 1P
1h
2000
1000
500
200
81.5±0.44
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
100
85.5 -1.4
0
50
20 .OFF .OFF .OFF .OFF
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2 50.3±0.37
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
I/In
5. Ordering information
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200
5.1 When ordering the goods, the user shall indicate the following
items:
5.1.1 Types and names of products, for example, NB7 miniature
D Type
t(s) circuit breaker;
10000
5000
1h
5.1.2 Instantaneous tripping type and rated current, for example,
2000
1000 C25;
500
5.1.3 Number of poles: for example, 2P;
200
100 5.1.4 Amount on order, for example, 50 units;
50
20
5.2 Example for ordering: 50 units of the NB7 series miniature
10
5
circuit breakers, 2P, C25.
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 16 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
> >> A-08

MCB
Miniature Circuit Breaker
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,
isolation.
1.2 Selection
this device,
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.
D curve(10-14In)
protection for circuits which supply loads with high inrush
current at the circuit closing
(LV/LV transformers, breakdown lamps).

on the last page.
A-09 > >>

MCB
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
is of high current limiting performance
A
to limit the destruction energy due to short circuit
to the greatest extent.
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve

t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20
20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type D curve IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In

t(s)
10000 t(s)
5000 10000
2000 5000
1h
1000 2000
500 1000
200 500
100 200
50 100
20 50
10 20
5 10
5
2
1 2
0.5 1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.01 0.02
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 1.05 2 3 45 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
> >> A-10

MCB
2.2
Standard IEC/EN 60898-1 IEC/EN 60947-2

Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 15, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Poles 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400~240/415
Electrical Rated frequency Hz 50/60

features 3/4.5(1-63A)
Rated breaking capacity kA
6 (1-40A)
Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 4000

Pollution degree 2
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C, D 8-12In
Mechanical
features ℃ 30
of thermal element

℃

Terminal connection type Cable/Pin-type busbar
mm2 1~25
AWG 17~3
mm 2
1~10
Installation AWG 17~7
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18

placed. Ambient temperature is the temperature inside the enclosure or switchboard in which the circuit breakers are installed.
Rated current Temperature compensation coefficient under various operational temperature

In (A)
-10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃
1~6 1.20 1.14 1.09 1.05 1.00 0.96 0.80 0.75 0.70
10~32 1.18 1.12 1.08 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84
40~60 1.16 1.12 1.07 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.87 0.83 0.80
A-11 > >>

MCB
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
80 -1.20
0
44±0.31 0 0 0 0
18 -0.43 36 -0.62 54 -1.20 72 -1.20
0
72 -1.20 (single pole)
0
77.8 -1.20 (multi poles)
1P 2P 3P 4P
> >> A-12

MCB
UB Miniature Circuit Breaker
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,
isolation.
1.2 Selection
this device,
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
UB MCB is of high current limiting performance to limit the
destruction energy due to short circuit to the greatest extent.
t(s) IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve t(s) IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve
10000 10000
5000 5000
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20
20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
A-13 > >>

MCB
2.2
Standard
Rated current In A
IEC/EN 60898-1
6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
A
Electrical Rated frequency 50/60Hz

features Rated breaking capacity A 6000
Pollution degree 2
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C
Mechanical
features ℃ 30
of thermal element

℃

mm
2
1~25
AWG 17~3
mm
2
1~10
Installation AWG 17~7
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18


In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃
6 1.20 1.14 1.09 1.05 1.00 0.96 0.80 0.75 0.70
10~32 1.18 1.12 1.08 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84
40 1.16 1.12 1.07 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.87 0.83 0.80
0
72 -1.20 (single pole)
0
77.8 -1.20 (multi poles)
0 0 0 0
18 -0.43 36 -0.62 54 -1.20 72 -1.20
44±0.31
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
80 -1.20
0
1P 2P 3P 4P
> >> A-14

MCCB
DZ158 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,
isolation.
1.2 Selection
this device,

on the last page.
TUV
A-15 > >>

MCCB
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
A
t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In
10000
8000
2(h)
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 I/Ie
2.2
Standard IEC/EN 60947-2

Rated current In A 63, 80, 100, 125
Electrical Rated frequency Hz 50

features Rated breaking capacity kA 6/10

Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2.0
Pollution degree 3
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic 8-12In
1,500 (In=63A, 80A, 100A)
Electrical life
1,000 (In=125A)
Mechanical 8,500 (In=63A, 80A, 100A)
Mechanical life
features 7,000 (In=125A)
of thermal element ℃ 30

℃

mm 2
16~50
AWG 6-1/0
2
mm 16~35
Installation Terminal size top/bottom for busbar
AWG 6-2
N*m 3.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 31
Connection From top
Combination
with accessories Auxiliary contact Yes
> >> A-16

MCCB

In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
63 1.275 1.215 1.15 1.075 1.00 0.915 0.825 0.735
80 1.27 1.205 1.135 1.07 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
100 1.275 1.21 1.135 1.075 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
125 1.25 1.19 1.125 1.08 1.00 0.93 0.86 0.78
0
108-1.4
4P
0
81-1.4 0 (2,3,4P)
78.5 -1.2
3P
0
54 -0.74 0
2P 73.5 -1.2 (1P)
0
27-0.52
50±0.31
1P
80.5±0.37
84.5±0.7
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
66.5±0.37
A-17 > >>

MCCB
NBH8 Miniature Circuit Breaker
A
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,
isolation.
1.2 Selection
this device,
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B Curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C Curve

t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
> >> A-18

MCB
2.2

Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 230/240
Electrical
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
features
Rated breaking capacity A 4500/6000
Pollution degree 2
Energy limiting class 3

Mechanical Reference temperature for setting
features of thermal element ℃ 30

daily average≤35℃) ℃ for temperature compensation correction)
mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
AWG 18-8
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Auxiliary contact Yes
Combination
Shunt release Yes
with
Under voltage release Yes
accessories
Alarm contant Yes

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃

Temperature compensation coefficient 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.875 0.85

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
86 -1.4
0
0
18 -0.43 5.5 44±0.31
60±0.37
0
76 -1.2
A-19 > >>

MCB
DZ267 Miniature Circuit Breaker
1. General
A
1.1 Application:
For protecting equipment against overload and short circuit.
1.2 General rules for choosing MCB.
a.Technical data of the network at the point considered:
The earthing systems (TNS, TNC),
Short-circuit current at the circuit-breaker installation point,
which must always be less than the breaking capacity of this
device,
b.There are 1 curve characteristics for DZ267 magnetic operation:
C curve (5-10 In) protection and control of the circuits against
overloads and short-circuits; protection for resistive and inductive
loads with low inrush current.
1.3 Detailed certificates information,please refer to Certificates
Table on P(A-138).
EU
Ukrain
Russia
> >> A-20

MCB
2. Technical Information
2.1 Curves
C curve
10000
5000
1h
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
t(s)
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200
I/In
2.2

Rated current In 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32
A
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue 230
V
Electrical Insulation voltage Ui 300
V
features Rated frequency 50/60
Hz
Rated breaking capacity A 3000
Pollution degree 2
Mechanical
features
℃ 30
of thermal element

℃
2
mm 16
AWG 18-5
Installation mm2 16
AWG 18-5
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From top
A-21 > >>

MCB

Please refer to table below for temperature compensation correction. A
In(A) 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
6 1.07 1.00 0.93 0.85 0.77
10 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.81
16 1.09 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.83
20 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.81
25 1.04 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.80
32 1.06 1.00 0.93 0.86 0.78
3. Overall and Mounting Dimensions (mm)

Overall and Mounting Dimensions
0
76 -0.74
45±0.31
35±0.5
80 -0.74
0
0
18 -0.43 5.5
44±0.31
66±0.37
> >> A-22

RCCB
NL1 Residual Current
Operated Circuit Breaker
without over-current
protection (Magnetic)
1. General
1.1 Function
Control electric circuits.
Protect people against indirect contacts and additional
protection against direct contacts.
Protect installations against fire hazard due to insulation faults.
Residual current circuit breakers are used in housing, tertiary
sector and industry.
1.2 Selection
Detectable wave form
AC class
Tripping is ensured for slowly increasing sinusoidal AC residual
currents.
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal AC residual currents and for
pulsed DC residual currents, whether applied suddenly or
increasing slowly.
Tripping sensitivity
30mA - additional protection against direct contact.
100mA - co-ordinated with the earth system according to the
formula IΔn <50/R, to provide protection against indirect
contacts;
300mA - protection against indirect contacts, as well as fire
harzard.
Tripping time
Instantaneous
It ensures instantaneous tripping (without time-delay).
Short time delay □ G
It ensures any tripping at least 10ms.
Selective □ S
It ensures total discrimination with a nonselective RCD placed
downstream.

on the last page.
A-23 > >>

RCCB
Main distribution board Sub- distribution board
RCCB A
RCCB □
S RCCB
RCCB □
G
Selective □
S Instantaneous, short time delay □
G
2. Technical data
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC, A, AC-G, A-G, AC-S, A-S
Rated current In A 25, 40, 63, 80, 100
Poles 2P, 4P
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03, 0.1, 0.3
Rated residual making and 500 (In=25A/40A), 1000(In=30A/100A)

Electrical A
breaking capacity I△m 630 (In=63A)
features
Short-circuit current Inc=I△c A 6000/10000
SCPD fuse A 10000

break time under I△n S ≤0.1(Normal type), 10ms~30ms(G type). 150ms~500ms(S type)

Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2.5
Pollution degree 2
Fault current indicator Yes
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature (with
℃ -5...+40
daily average≤35℃)
mm
2
25/35
AWG 18-3/18-2
mm
2
10/16
Installation AWG 18-8/18-5
N*m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22

0
78 -1.2
5.5
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
0
0
36 -0.62 72 -1.2 49.5±0.31
3.6
> >> A-24

RCBO
NB1L Residual Current
with over-current protection
(Magnetic)
1. General
1.1 Function
Personnel and fire protection: Cable and line protection against
overload and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
Rated residual operating current
I∆n ≤30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct
contact.
I∆n ≤300 mA: preventative fire protection in the case of
ground fault currents.
Tripping class
AC class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied or
slowly increase.
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating
residual currents as well as for pulsed DC residual
currents, whether they be quickly applied or slowly
increase.
Tripping curve
B curve (3-5 In) protection and control of the circuits against
overloads and short-circuits; protection for
people and big length cables in TN and IT systems.
C curve (5-10 In) protection and control of the circuits
against overloads and short-circuits; protection for
resistive and inductive loads with low inrush current.

on the last page.
A-25 > >>

RCBO
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
t(s)
A
10000
t(s) B Curve 10000
C Curve
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2

Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC, A
MCB+add-on RCCB block 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 50, 63
Rated current In A
Combined 1-25/6-40
MCB+add-on RCCB block 1P+N, 2P
Poles
Combined 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
Rated residual making 500 (In≤40A)

Electrical A
and breaking capacity I△m 630 (In＞40A)
features
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 6,000/10,000
Break time under I△n s ≤0.1
Rated impulse
V 6,000
withstand voltage (1.2/50)Uimp
Dielectric TEST voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min kV 2

Insulation voltage Ui 500
Pollution degree 2
Electrical life 2,000
Mechanical life 2,000

Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature -5...+40 (Special application please refer to P55
℃
(with daily average≤35℃) for temperature compensation correction)
Storage temperature ℃ -25...+70

mm
2
25
AWG 18-3
Installation 2
mm 10
AWG 18-8
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
From top and bottom (for combined type)
Connection
From top (MCB+add-on RCCB block)
> >> A-26

RCBO

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
Temperature compensation
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
coefficient of rated current
3.1 MCB+add-on RCCB block
0
78.5 -1.2
49.5±0.31
5.5
A
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
88
Overall dimensions A (mm)

Number of poles
1~40A 50~63A
0 0
1P+N 45 -0.62 54 -0.74
0 0
2P 63 -0.74 72 -0.74
0 0
3P 108 -1.4 117 -1.4
0 0
3P+N 108 -1.4 117 -1.4
0 0
4P 126 -1.6 135 -1.6
B(mm)
0 0
1P+N 27 -0.52 36 -0.62
0 0
2P 27 -0.52 36 -0.62
0 0
3P 54 -1.20 63 -1.2
0 0
3P+N 54 -1.20 63 -1.2
4P 0 0
54 -1.20 63 -1.2
A-27 > >>

RCBO
3.2
A
Combined 60±0.37
NB1L
C 40 I△n 0.03A test monthly
45±0.31
6000 t≤0.1s
N 1
85 -1.4
35 -0.5
230 V~
0
IEC/EN61009-1
982418 N 2
0 0
36 -0.62 77 -1.2
66.2±0.37
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
86 -1.4
35 -1.0
0
0 0
54-1.2 76.5 -1.2
> >> A-28

RCBO
2. Type designation
N B 7 LE - □
Frame size rated current (32A，63A)

Function code (LE: electronic type RCB0)
Design number
Miniature circuit breaker
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Main specifications
3.1.1 Graded as follows according to the rated current In:
NB7LE-32: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A;
NB7LE-63: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A
3.1.2 Classified as follows according to the type of
instantaneous release: C type (5-10) In, D type (10-16) In;
3.1.3 Categorized as follows according to the number of poles
and current circuit: Single pole and two lines (1P+N), two
poles (2P), three poles(3P), three poles and four lines (3P+N),
NB7LE Residual Current four poles (4P) for the NB7LE-32;
Single pole and two lines (1P+N), two poles (2P) for the
Operated Circuit Breaker NB7LE-63;
3.1.4 Graded as follows according to the rated residual
1. General operating current: 0.03A, 0.1A, 0.3A;
The NB7LE residual current operated circuit breaker is 3.2 Technical parameters
applicable to the circuit with an alternating current of 50Hz, 3.2.1 Rated short circuit breaking capacity (see Table 1)
rated-voltage single pole and two lines/two poles 230V, 3.2.2 Rated residual making and breaking capacity: 2,000A;
three poles/three poles and four lines/four poles 400V, and
3.2.3 Rated residual non-operating current: 0.5IΔn;
a rated current up to 63A; when the human body gets an
electric shock or the network leak current exceeds the 3.2.4 Breaking time of the residual current operating (see Table
specified value, the residual current operated circuit breaker 2)
can rapidly cut off the power supply in trouble within a very 3.2.5 Mechanical/Electrical Life
short time for the safety of the human body and the a. Electrical life: no less than 2,000 times
powered equipment. With the function of overload and
b. Mechanical life: no less than 2,000 times
short circuit protection, the residual current operated circuit
breaker can be used to protect the circuit or motor from 3.2.6 Insulation shock-resistance voltage performance
being damaged by overload and short circuit, and can also a. The impulse voltage with a peak value of 6,000V can be
be used for not-frequent operational transformation in the withstood between the various poles connected together and
circuit under normal condition. the neutral pole;
The product meets the standards of IEC 61009-1.
b. The impulse voltage with a peak value of 8,000V can be
withstood between the various poles connected with the neutral
pole and the metal support;
3.2.7 The residual current operated circuit breaker has the
capability of withstanding the impact of the surge current with a
peak current of 200A (0.5μs/100kHz) and 3,000A (8 /20μs)
without causing misoperation;
A-29 > >>

RCBO
Table 1 Rated short circuit capacity
Rated current Number of Rated voltage Rated short circuit A

In (A) poles Ue (V) capacity Icn (A)
C type: 6~40 1P+N,2P 230
C type: 6~40 3P, 3P+N, 4P 400 6000
C type: 50 63 1P+N,2P 230
D type: 6~63 1P+N,2P 230 4500
D type: 6~32 3P, 3P+N, 4P 400
Table 2 Maximum breaking time of the residual current operating
Breaking time when the residual current assumes the following values (s)
In A I△n A a
I△n 2 I△n 5 I△n 5A,10A,20A,50A,100A,200A,500A I△tb
6~63A 0.03,0.1,0.3 0.1 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04
a. The test of 5A,10A,20A,50A,100A,200A,500A is only performed for the verification of operation, and is not performed for the magnitude of
current greater than the lower limit of the over-current instantaneous tripping range.
b. The test is carried out for the current with the IΔn being equal to the lower limit of the over-current instantaneous tripping range for type C or D.
3.2.8 Over current protection characteristic (see Table 3)
Test Initial Time limit for tripping Expected Test environment

Test Type Remarks
current state or not tripping result temperature
a C, D 1.13In Cold state t≥1h No tripping
b C, D 1.45In Right after test a t＜1h Tripping The current is

rising within 5s
1s＜t＜60s (In≤32A)
c C, D 2.55In Cold state Tripping
1s＜t＜120s (In＞32A)
30℃~35℃
C 5In
d
Cold state t≥0.1s No tripping
D 10In
C 10In
e Cold state t＜0.1s Tripping
D 16In
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means that the test is performed at the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
> >> A-30

RCBO
3.2.9 For the tripping performance diagram, see Fig 1
10000
C Type D Type
10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10
t(s)
10
t(s)
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200
I/ln I/ln
3.2.10 Wiring: suitable for the connection of leads of less than

25mm2 (see Table 4); wiring method: screw hold-down
with a toque of:
Not less than 0.8N•m and not greater than 1.2N•m for
the M4 screw
Not less than 1.5N•m and not greater than 2.0N•m for
the M5 screw
Table 4 Nominal cross-sectional area of the copper conductor
Rated current Nominal cross-sectional area

In (A) of the copper conductor (mm2)
6 1
10 1.5
16, 20 2.5
25 4
32 6
40, 50 10
63 16
A-31 > >>

RCBO
H
50.3±0.31
34.5±0.5
87.5 -1.4
45±0.31
0
L(mm)
Poles H(mm)
NB7LE-32 NB7LE-63
0 0 0
1P+N 78 -1.2 45 -0.74 54 -0.74
0 0 0
2P 80 -1.2
63 -0.74
72 -0.74
0 0
3P 80 -1.2 90 -1.4 -
0 0
3P+N 80 -1.2 99 -1.4 -
0 0
4P 80 -1.2 117 -1.6 -
5.1 When ordering the goods, the user shall indicate the following items:
5.1.1 Types and names of products, for example, NB7LE series residual current operated circuit breaker
5.1.2 Instantaneous tripping type and rated current, for example, C25;
5.1.3 Number of poles: for example, 2P;
5.1.4 Rated residual operating current: for example, 0.03A;
5.1.5 Quantity on order, for example, 50 units;
5.2 Example for ordering: NB7LE-32 residual current operated circuit breaker, 2P，0.03A，C25, 50 units.
> >> A-32

RCBO
NB3LE Residual Current
with Over-current Protection
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Selection
I∆n = 30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct contact.
Tripping class
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating
currents, whether they be quickly applied or slowly increase.
Tripping curve
overloads and short-circuits; protection for people and big
length cables in TN and IT systems.
overloads and short-circuits; protection for resistive and
inductive loads with low inrush current.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve C Curve
t(s)
10000 t(s)
5000 10000
1h 5000
2000 1h
1000 2000
500 1000
500
200
200
100
50 100
50
20
20
10
10
5
5
2
2
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
A-33 > >>

RCBO
2.2
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 240
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03
Electrical Rated residual making

A 500
features and breaking capacity I△m
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 6,000

Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

Mechanical
features
℃

mm
2
16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
AWG 18-8
Installation
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From top

The reference temperature is 30℃ Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃.
Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85

0
76.5 -1.2
0
49.5 ± 0.32 18 -0.18
18
OPEN
45 ± 0.31
36 ± 0.5
7.5
111 ± 0.7
OFF 1
113.5-1.4
0
5.5
35
27
0
57 -0.74
66.2 ± 0.37
> >> A-34

RCBO
NB3LEU
Residual Current
with Over-current Protection
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Selection
I∆n = 30 mA:
additional protection in the case of direct contact.
Tripping class
Tripping curve
overloads and short-circuits; protection for people and big
length cables in TN and IT systems.
overloads and short-circuits; protection for resistive and

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve C Curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
A-35 > >>

RCBO
2.2
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N

A 500

Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

Mechanical
features
℃

mm
2
16
AWG 18-5
2
mm 10
AWG 18-8
Installation
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From bottom

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
0
77-1.2 7.5
57±0.37 1
35
27
115±0.44
119 -1.4
0
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
.
O OF F
49.5±0.31
0
18-0.43
66.2±0.37
> >> A-36

RCBO
NBH8LE
Residual Current
with over-current protection
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Function
Personnel and fire protection
Cable and line protection against overload
and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n = 30 mA: additional protection
in the case of direct contact.
against overloads and short-circuits; protection for
resistive and inductive loads with low inrush current.
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied
or slowly increase.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
C Curve
t(s)
10000
5000
1h
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In
A-37 > >>

RCBO
2.2
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC
A
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic C
Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N
Rated residual making

A 500
Electrical and breaking capacity I△m
features Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 4,500
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
Mechanical
features
℃

mm
2
16
AWG 18-5
2
mm 10
AWG 18-8
Installation
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 11
Connection From top

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
coefficient

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.4
0
86
0
36 -0.43 44±0.31
5.5
60.7±0.37
0
76.5 -1.2
> >> A-38

RCBO
DZ158LE
Residual Current
1. General
1.1 Function
Cable and line protection against overload and
short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n ≤ 30 mA: additional protection
in the case of direct contact.
I∆n ≤300 mA: preventative fire protection
in the case of ground fault currents.
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied
or slowly increase.

on the last page.
A-39 > >>

RCBO
2. Tenchnical data
2.1 Curves
A
C curve
t(s)
10000
8000
1h(or 2h)
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/Ie
2.2
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic 8-12In
Rated current In A 63, 80, 100
Electrical Poles 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P

features Rated voltage Ue V 230/400
Rated residual making

A 2,000
and breaking capacity I△m

Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Dielectric TEST voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min kV 2.0

Pollution degree 3
Mechanical
features
℃

mm
2
16~50
AWG 6-1/0
mm
2
16~35
AWG 6-2
Installation
N*m 3.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 31
On DIN rail EN 60715 (35mm) by means of fast clip device
Mounting Connection
From top
> >> A-40

RCBO

In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
63 1.275 1.215 1.15 1.075 1.00 0.915 0.825 0.735
80 1.27 1.205 1.135 1.27 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
100 1.275 1.21 1.135 1.075 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
H
65.5±0.37
L
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.40
108±0.70
0
113
Number
1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
of poles
0 0 0 0 0
L (mm) 54 -0.74 81 -0.87 108 -1.40 108 -1.40 135 -1.60
0 0 0 0 0
H (mm) 73.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2
A-41 > >>

MCBO
DZ47LE Residual Current Operated
Circuit Breaker with over-current A
protection (Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Application
Cable and line protection against overload and short-circuits
1.2 General rules for choosing RCBO:
a.Rated residual operating current
I∆n ≤ 30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct
contact I∆n ≤300 mA: preventative fire protection in the case
of ground fault currents
b.Tripping class
c.Tripping curve
against overloads and short-circuits; protection for resistive and
D curve (10-14 In) protection and control of the circuits
against overloads and short-circuits; protection for circuits which
supply loads with high inrush current at the circuit closing (LV/LV
transformers, breakdown lamps).
1.3 Detailed certificates information,please refer to Certificates
Table on P(A-138).
2. Technical Features
2.1 Curves
C curve D curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1Ir 1Ir
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
> >> A-42

MCBO
2.2

Thermo-magnetic release characteristic C, D
Rated current In A 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 60
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400

A 500
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 4,500/6,000
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Pollution degree 2
Mechanical Contact position indicator Yes
features
℃

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 25
AWG 18-3
N*m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From top

Please refer to table below for temperature compensation correction.
Temperature -15℃ -5℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 55℃

coefficient 1.19 1.15 1.13 1.06 1.05 1.00 0.96 0.89
A-43 > >>

MCBO
3. Overall and Mounting Dimensions (mm)
In=6~32A
A
H
L L
42.5±0.31
45±0.31
35±0.50
94.5 -1.40
94.5 -1.40
0
0
B B
Number of poles L (mm) H (mm) B (mm)

0 0 0
1P+N 45 -0.62 74 -1.20 27 -0.52
0 0 0
2P 63 -0.74 77.8 -1.20 27 -0.52
0 0 0
3P 90 -1.40 77.8 -1.20 36 -0.62
0 0 0
3P+N 99 -1.40 77.8 -1.20 45 -1.00
0 0 0
4P 117 -1.40 77.8 -1.20 45 -1.00
In=40~60A
H
42.5±0.31 L L
45±0.31
35±0.50
94.5 -1.40
94.5 -1.40
0
B
B
Number of poles L (mm) H (mm) B (mm)

0 0 0
1P+N 54 -0.74 74 -1.20 36 -0.62
0 0 0
2P 72 -0.74 77.8 -1.20 36 -0.62
0 0 0
3P 103.5 -1.40 77.8 -1.20 49.5 -0.62
0 0 0
3P+N 117 -1.40 77.8 -1.20 63 -1.20
0 0 0
4P 135 -1.60 77.8 -1.20 63 -1.20
> >> A-44

Accessories for MCB, RCBO
XF9 (Auxiliary Contact for
NB1, NBH8, NB1L, NB3LE, NBH8LE)
1.General
Indication of the position of the device's contacts.

To be mounted on the left side of the MCBs/RCBOs
thanks to the special pin.
A-45 > >>

2. Technical data
Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1

A
UN (V) In (A)
AC415 50/60Hz 3
AC240 50/60Hz 6
Rated value
DC130 1
DC48 2
Electrical DC24 6
features Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
Mechanical Protection degree IP20

features Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40
(with daily average≤35℃)

Terminal connection type Cable
mm
2
2.5
N*m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
9 -0.14
36±0.5
82 -1.4
45±0.31
0
49.5±0.31
0
77-1.2
> >> A-46

XF9J (Alarm Auxiliary Contact for
NB1, NBH8, NB1L, NB3LE, NBH8LE)
1.General
1.1 Indication of the position of the device's contacts only

after the automatic release of the MCBs and RCBOs
due to an overload or a short-circuit.
1.2 To be mounted on the left side of the MCBs/RCBOs

A-47 > >>

2. Technical data
Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1 A

UN (V) In (A)
AC415 50/60Hz 3
AC240 50/60Hz 6
Rated value
DC130 1
DC48 2
Electrical DC24 6
features Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm
2
2.5
N*m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
9 -0.14
36±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
82
49.5±0.31
0
77 -1.2
> >> A-48

S9
(Shunt Release for NB1,
NBH8, NB1L, NB3LE, NBH8LE)
1.General
1.1 Remote opening of the device when a voltage is applied.

A-49 > >>

2. Technical data

AC230/400 50/60Hz
DC24
Rated voltage Us V
DC48
Electrical
Rated impulse
features V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N*m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
18 -0.43
82 -1.4
0
45±0.31
36±0.5
49.5±0.31
0
77 -1.2
> >> A-50

V9
(Under Voltage Release
for NB1, NBH8, NB1L,
NB3LE, NBH8LE)
1.General
1.1 Protection of the load in the event of a voltage drop

(between 70% and 35% of its rated value)
1.2 Positive safety (device's tripping when the voltage is

disconnected) emergency stop by means of a button.
.
A-51 > >>

2. Technical data

Rated voltage Us V AC230 50/60Hz
70-35%Ue, reliable operation

Optional voltage of release <35%Ue, prevent breaker from making
Electrical 85~110%Ue, reliable operation

features Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm
2
2.5
N*m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
18 -0.43
45±0.31
82 -1.4
36±0.5
0
49.5±0.31
0
77-1.2
> >> A-52

AX-1
(Auxiliary Contact
for DZ158, DZ158LE)
1. General
1.1 Indication of the position of the device's contacts.

A-53 > >>

2. Technical data

A
Un (V) In (A)
Rated voltage Us V AC415 50/60Hz 3
DC125 1
Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Electrical Rated impulse

V 4,000
features withstand voltage (1.2/50)Uimp

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm
2
2.5
N*m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
9.3 -0.36
37.2±0.5
45±0.5
62±0.6
79±0.6
5.5
-0.43
0
15.8 73.7±0.6
> >> A-54

Switch Disconnector
NH2 Switch Disconnector
1. General
1. 1 In the open position, It complies with the requirements of

the isolating function.
1.2 It is designed match DZ series MCBs/RCBOs.

on the last page.
A-55 > >>

Switch Disconnector
2. Technical data
Standard IEC/EN 60947-3 A

Rated current le A 32, 63, 100
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Electrical Rated short-time withstand current lcw 12le, 1s

features Rated making and breaking capacity 3le, 1.05Ue, cosφ=0.65
Rated short circuit making capacity 20le, t=0.1s
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 5s kV 2
Pollution degree 2
Uilization category AC-22A
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature (with daily average≤35℃) ℃ -5...+40
mm
2
50
AWG 18-1/0
mm
2
25
AWG 18-3
N*m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
0
18 -0.43
1P
77±0.37
34.5±0.5
-0.12
45±0.31
0
79
0
36 -0.62 65.5±0.37
2P 0
75 -1.2
0
54 -1.2
3P
0
72 -1.2
4P
> >> A-56

Switch Disconnector
1. General
1. 1 In the open position, It complies with the

requirements of the isolating function.
1.2 It is designed match NB series MCBs/RCBOs.

on the last page.
A-57 > >>

Switch Disconnector
2. Technical features
Standard IEC/EN 60947-3 A

Rated current le A 32, 63, 100, 125
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Electrical Rated short-time withstand current lcw 12le, 1s

features Rated making and breaking capacity 3le, 1.05Ue, cosφ=0.65
Rated short circuit making capacity 20le, t=0.1s
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 5s kV 2
Pollution degree 2
Uilization category AC-22A
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature (with daily average≤35℃) ℃ -5...+40
Terminal connection type Cable/Pin-type busbar/U-type busbar
2
mm 50
AWG 18-1/0
2
mm 35
AWG 18-2
N*m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22

34.5±0.50
45±0.13
86-1.4
0
0 49.5±0.31
18 -0.43
0
36 -0.62 H
0
54-1.2
0
72 -1.2
Number
1P 2P~4P
of poles
0 0
H (mm) 74 -1.2 78 -1.2
> >> A-58

Surge Arrester
NU6 Low-voltage Surge Arrester
NU6-Ⅰ
1. General
1.1 Certificates: international certificates are under proceeding;

1.2 Electric ratings: 230/400V, AC50/60Hz, 3-phase;
1.3 Application: Protect electric system and on-loading electrical

apparatus from thunder and instantaneous over-voltage;
1.4 Standard: IEC/EN 61643-1
A-59 > >>

Surge Arrester
2. Technical data
Shock current Iimp Max. continuous Level of
A
Nominal discharge
Model Ipeak (10/350μs) Load Q operational protection current In
(kA) As voltage Uc (V~) Up (kV) (8/20μs) (kA)
275 4.0
320 4.0
NU6-Ⅰ 15 7.5 25
385 4.0
440 4.0
275 4.0
320 4.0
NU6-Ⅰ 25 12.5 25
385 4.0
440 4.0
275 4.0
320 4.0
NU6-Ⅰ 40 20 50
385 4.0
440 4.0
3. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) NU6-Ⅰ (15kA, 25kA)
65.5±0.37
49.5±0.31
0
18 -0.43
5.5±0.1
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
93 -1.4
0
NU6-Ⅰ (40kA)
65.5±0.37
0
49.5±0.31 36 -0.62
5.5±0.1
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.4
0
93
> >> A-60

Surge Arrester
NU6-Ⅱ
1. General
1.2 Number of poles: 1, 2,3, 4;
1.3 Electric ratings: 230/400V, AC50/60Hz;
apparatus from thunder and instantaneous over-voltage;
2. Technical data
Max. continuous Level of Nominal discharge Maximum discharge Mounting category

operational protection current In current Imax of protected
Model
voltage Uc (V~) Up (kV) (8/20μs) (kA) (8/20μs) (kA) apparatus
275 1.2 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ

320 1.5 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ
5 15
NU6-Ⅱ 460 2.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
510 2.5 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
550 3.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
275 1.2 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ
320 1.5 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
15 40
460 2.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
NU6-Ⅱ
510 2.5 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
550 3.0 Ⅲ
275 1.2 Ⅰ,Ⅱ, Ⅲ
320 1.5 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
25 60
460 2.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
NU6-Ⅱ
510 2.5 Ⅲ
550 3.0 Ⅲ
275 1.2 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
320 1.5 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
40 100
NU6-Ⅱ 460 2.0 Ⅲ
510 2.5 Ⅲ
550 3.0 Ⅲ
Auxiliary Configurations Rated voltage Un(V) Rated current In(A)
contact INO+INC AC125 3
A-61 > >>

Surge Arrester
3. How to select surge protectors
a. The voltage should be ≤Uc;
b. Up＜maximum impulse withstands; A
c. Different protectors should be selected
according to various grounding system and protection mode.
Max. continuous Applicable

operational grounding Protection Number of
Model mode Circuits poles
voltage Uc (V~) system
TT L-N 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1

TN-S L-PE, N-PE, L-N 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4
275
TN-C L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
TT L-N 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1
320 TN-C L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
TT L-PE, N-PE, L-N 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3,4
385 TN-C L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
TT L-PE, N-PE, L-N, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3,4
NU6-Ⅱ TN-S L-PE, N-PE, L-N, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4
TN-C L-PE, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
460
IT L-PE, N-PE, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 3 /4 wire 1,2,3,4
TN-S L-PE, N-PE, L-N, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4
TN-C L-PE, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
510
TN-S L-PE, N-PE, L-N, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4
550 TN-C L-PE, L-L 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
4. Functions
4.1 The product is composed of two independent components:
removable protective module 4 and base 2; 3
4
4.2 When the product is damaged, the part 3 will indicate;
please replace the removable protective module 4 at
once and there is no need to cutoff the circuits;
Plug in
t
Pull ou
R
4.3 The part 1 is for maximum continuous operational

voltage indication as well as avoiding replacement with
wrong module.
> >> A-62

Surge Arrester
NU6-II/F (5, 15, 25kA) with remote control port
Auxiliary contact
101.5 -1.4
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
0
0
5.5±0.1 18 -0.43
1P
49.5±0.31 0
36 -0.62
65.5±0.37 2P
0
54 -1.2
3P
NU6-II (5, 15, 25kA) without remote control port

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
93 -1.4
0
5.5±0.1 0
18 -0.43
49.5±0.31 1P
0
36 -0.62
65.5±0.37 2P
0
3P 54 -1.2
A-63 > >>

Surge Arrester
NU6-II/F (40kA) with remote control port A
Auxiliary contact
101.5 -1.4
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
5.5±0.1 0
36 -0.62
49.5±0.31 1P 0
72 -1.2
65.5±0.37 2P
0
108-1.4
3P
NU6-II/F (40kA) without remote control port

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
93 -1.4
0
5.5±0.1 0
36 -0.62
49.5±0.31 1P
0
65.5±0.37 72 -1.2
2P
0
108-1.4
3P
> >> A-64

Surge Arrester
NU6-Ⅲ
1. General
1.2 Electric ratings: Single phase power distribution and control
system of AC50/60Hz, 230V;
1.3 Short circuit current: up to 10kA (8/20μs);
apparatus from lightening and instantaneous over-voltage;
2. Technical data
Uoc (1.2/50μs) Short circuit current Max. continuous Level of

Model (kV) Isc (8/20us)(KA) operational voltage Uc (V~) protection Up (kV)
275 1.5
2 1 320 1.5
385 1.5
275 1.5
3 1.5 320 1.5
385 1.5
275 1.5
4 2 320 1.5
NU6-Ⅲ 385 1.5

275 1.5
6 3 320 1.5
385 1.5
275 1.5
10 5 320 1.5
385 1.5
275 1.5
20 10
320 1.5
Auxiliary Configurations Rated voltage Un(V) Rated current In(A)
contact INO+INC AC125 3
A-65 > >>

Surge Arrester
3. Type and circuit diagram

A
Model Type Circuit diagram
L(N)
L(N)
Voltage Limit Type U
PE
L/N-PE NU6-III
L(N)
U
Compound Type
PE GDT
PE
L PE
* *
NU6-Ⅲ NU6-III
L-N/N-PE
L PE
Compound Type U GDT

N
L N
L N
U U
Voltage Limit Type
PE
L-PE/N-PE NU6-III
L N
U U
Compound Type GDT GDT

PE
PE
4. Design type and protective mode of different surge protectors
Model Uoc (1.2/50μs) (kV) Uc (V~) Corresponding design type and protection mode
275
2 320
385 Compound type Compound type Voltage limit
Voltage limit
275 (with gas (with gas type (with
type (with
3 320 discharge discharge voltage
voltage
385 tube + voltage tube + voltage sensitive
sensitive
275 sensitive resi sensitive resistance)
resistance)
4 320 stance) resistance) L/N-PE
L-PE/N-PE
385 L-PE/N-PE L/N-PE
275
6 320
385
NU6-Ⅲ Voltage limit Compound type
275 Voltage limit
(with gas
10 320 type (with type (with
discharge tube
385 voltage voltage
+ voltage
sensitive sensitive
275 sensitive
20 resistance) resistance)
resistance)
320 L-PE/N-PE L/N-PE
L-N/N-PE
> >> A-66

Surge Arrester
5. Functions
5.1 The product is composed of two independent components: 3
removable protective module 4 and base 2; 4
5.2 When the product is damaged, the part 3 will indicate;
please replace the removable protective module 4 at once
and there is no need to cutoff the circuits;
Plug in
5.3 The part 1 is for maximum continuous operational voltage
t
Pull ou
indication as well as avoiding replacement with wrong module.

NU6-Ⅲ/F with remote control port
Auxiliary contact
-1.4
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
0
101.5
5.5±0.1
49.5±0.31
65.5±0.37 0
1P 18 -0.43
NU6-Ⅲ without remote control port

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
93 -1.4
0
5.5±0.1
49.5±0.31 0
65.5±0.37
1P 18 -0.43
A-67 > >>

Surge Arrester
NU6-Ⅰ series surge arrestor NU6-Ⅱ series surge arrestor NU6-Ⅲ series surge arrestor A
The boundary between lightning The boundary between lightning The boundary between lightning
protection areas of LPZ0 & LPZ1 protection areas of LPZ1 & LPZ2 protection areas of LPZ2 & LPZ3
Protection category: B Protection category: C Protection category: D

Over-voltage mounting category: Ⅲ Over-voltage mounting category: Ⅱ Over-voltage mounting category: Ⅰ
Rated impulse withstand voltage: 4000V Rated impulse withstand voltage: 2500V Rated impulse withstand voltage: 1500V
Parameters of discharge: limp and In Parameters of discharge: Imax and In Parameters of discharge: Uoc and Isc
Applicable to master power distribution Applicable to branch power distribution

Applicable to terminal of power distribution
switchgear switchgear
*Note: Fuse/Circuit breaker are strongly recommended to be installed upstream the surge protector.
8. Recommended circuit breaker selection
Surge protector Nominal discharge current (kA) Circuit breaker (upstream)

NU6-Ⅰ ALL NM8 100A
5 NB1 C10
15 NB1 C20
NU6-Ⅱ
25 NB1 C40
40 DZ158 C63
NU6-Ⅲ ALL NB1 C10
> >> A-68

Pushbutton & Indicator
NP9 Pushbutton
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: 230V, AC50/60Hz;

1.2 Utilization category: AC-14;
1.3 Rated conventional heating current lth: 16A;
1.4 Rated operational current Ie: 6A;
1.5 Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V;
1.6 Protection grade: IP20;
1.7 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-5-1;
2. Normal operational and mounting conditions

2.1 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃,
average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃;
2.2 Altitude: ≤ 2000m;
2.3 Air conditions:
At mounting site, relative humidity
not exceed 50% at the max temperature of +40℃,
higher relative humidity is allowable under lower
temperature. For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃.
Special measures should be taken to occurrence of dews;
2.4 Mounting category: Ⅱ, Ⅲ;
2.5 Pollution grade: Ⅱ;
2.6 Mounting mode: TH35-7.5 standard rail,
inclination between mounting and vertical plane
not exceed 5°.
3. Technical data
3.1 Life (operations):

a. Electric life : 100,000
b. Mechanical life : 250,000
3.3 Assembly of contact: 1NC+2NO, 2NC+1NO, 3NO,
2NC+2NO(Not available for illuminated type)
3.4 Technical data of signal lamp
a. Rated operational voltage: AC/DC6.3V, AC/DC12V,
AC/DC24V, AC/DC110V, AC/DC230V
b. Rated operational current: ≤20mA
3.5 Life: LED≥30000h
0
71 -0.43
0 66±0.37
18 -0.43
49.5±0.31
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
A-69 > >>

★ Illuminated type pushbutton
Operational Current Indicator Number of

A
voltage (V) (A) light type Color CTN
contact
AC230 ≤6 LED/230V 3NO, 0NC Red 192

AC230 ≤6 LED/230V 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/230V 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/230V 3NO, 0NC Green 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/110V 3NO, 0NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/110V 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/110V 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/24V 3NO, 0NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/24V 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/24V 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/12V 3NO, 0NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/12V 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/12V 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/6.3V 3NO, 0NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/6.3V 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/6.3V 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 LED/6.3V 3NO, 0NC Green 192
★ Non-illuminated type
Operational Current Indicator Number of

voltage (V) (A) light type Color CTN
contact
AC230 ≤6 - 3NO, 0NC Red 192

AC230 ≤6 - 2NO, 1NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 - 1NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 - 2NO, 2NC Red 192
AC230 ≤6 - 3NO, 0NC Green 192
AC230 ≤6 - 2NO, 1NC Green 192
AC230 ≤6 - 1NO, 2NC Green 192
AC230 ≤6 - 2NO, 2NC Green 192
> >> A-70

ND9 Indicator Light
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: 230V, AC50/60Hz;
1.2 Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V;
1.3 Protection grade: IP20
1.4 Rated operational current: ≤20mA
1.5 Life: LED≥30000h;
1.6 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-5-1
2. Normal operational and mounting conditions

average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃;
2.2 Altitude: ≤ 2000m;
2.3 Air conditions:
At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the
max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity is
allowable under lower temperature. For example,
RH could be 90% at +20℃. Special measures should be
taken to occurrence of dews;
2.4 Mounting category: Ⅱ, Ⅲ;
2.5 Pollution grade: Ⅱ;
2.6 Mounting mode: TH35-7.5 standard rail, inclination
between mounting and vertical plane not exceed 5°
A-71 > >>

★ Single lamp indicator light A

Operational Current Indicator
Color CTN
voltage (V) (mA) light type
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green 192

12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED White 192
> >> A-72

★ Dual-lamps indicator light
Color CTN
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Green 192

12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Green 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Red 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Red 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Yellow 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Yellow 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Blue 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+Blue 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Green+White 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Red 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Red 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Yellow 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Yellow 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Blue 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+Blue 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Red+White 192
A-73 > >>


Color CTN
A
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+Yellow 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+Yellow 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+Blue 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+Blue 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Yellow+White 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue+Blue 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue+Blue 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue+White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED Blue+White 192
6.3 AC/DC ≤20 LED White+White 192
12 AC/DC ≤20 LED White+White 192
4. Wirng
Cross section area of the conductor is 1.0mm2,
and tightening torque should be 0.8N•m
0
71 -0.43
0 66±0.37
18 -0.43
49.5±0.31
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
> >> A-74

Consumer Unit
NX8 Consumer Unit (Body)
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: up to 100A, 230V, AC50/60Hz;

1.2 No. Of mounted units: 5, 8, 12, 15, 20, 24;
1.3 On-load current (A): 100/1-phase;
1.4 Allowable temperature-rise of frame (k): 40;
1.5 Protection degree: IP30;
1.6 Standard: IEC/EN 60439-3 (IEC/EN 60670-24)
2. Features
2.1 The window of the consumer unit is designed with novel

appearance and convenient operation. Open and close
operation is flexible, and self-locking at the open status;
2.2 Inside the product, there is a neon indicator light to indicate
status of power supply; having a elegant appearance and clear
indication;
2.3 The interiorly mounted MCBs are all in compliance with
relative IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric components
are applicable, as well;
2.4 On request, various circuit combinations can be assembled;
and the mounting capacity of the product units can be taken to
5~24 units;
2.5 Convenient and reliable operation, having exposed handle,
and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box ;
2.6 The consumer unit is designed with internal terminal blocks
for connection of neutral line and protective grounding wire.
2.7 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material with
metal structure;
2.8 On request, specified colors are available.
A-75 > >>

Consumer Unit
A
A
E
4-φ5
H
B
24
Model A B C D E F H Remark
0
NX8-5 184±1.45 200±1.45 164±1.25 180±1.45 114±1.1 130±1.25 105 -2.2
Single-row
0
NX8-5J 184±1.45 200±1.45 164±1.25 180±1.45 114±1.1 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-8 238±1.45 200±1.45 218±1.45 180±1.45 168±1.25 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-8J 238±1.45 200±1.45 218±1.45 180±1.45 168±1.25 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-12 310±1.6 200±1.45 290±1.6 180±1.45 240±1.45 130±1.25 105 -2.2
Single-row
0
NX8-12J 310±1.6 200±1.45 290±1.6 180±1.45 240±1.45 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-15 364±1.8 200±1.45 344±1.8 180±1.45 294±1.6 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-15J 364±1.8 200±1.45 344±1.8 180±1.45 294±1.6 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-20 274±1.6 350±1.8 254±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2
Double-rows
0
NX8-20J 274±1.6 350±1.8 254±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
0
NX8-24 310±1.6 350±1.8 290±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
0
NX8-24J 310±1.6 350±1.8 290±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
> >> A-76

Consumer Unit
NX6 Consumer Unit
1. General
1.1 NX6 with hinged metal flap is designed for easy surface mounting
for indoor installations.
1.2 The standard DIN-rail is preassembled for mounting wide range of
CHINT Switch Disconnector, MCB, RCD, RCBO and Din-rail
components to different specific requirements.
1.3 NX6 is designed with neutral and PE terminals for single phase
circuit system.
1.4 NX6 is available in 5 sizes, suitable for different arrangements of
components from 10 up to 23 modules.
1.5 Easy installation ,distinct wiring zones and ample wiring space.
2. Type Designation
NX6－□
No. of mounted units: 6,8,10,12,14,15,

16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24
Design sequence number
Consumer units
Company code
3. Technical data 4. Terminals max. cable size
Standard IEC/EN 60439-3 Incoming terminals 50 mm2

2
Rated voltage 240/415V Outgoing terminals 16 mm
Frequency 50/60Hz
Max. incoming current(single phase) 125A
Max. outgoing current(single phase) 63A
Allowable temperature-rise of enclosure 40K
5.Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
A 81±1.5
65±1.5
250±2.5
200±2.5
A-77 > >>

Consumer Unit
Type Outline dimensions A B A

NX6-6 206×230×66 206 145
NX6-8 242×230×66 242 181
NX6-10 274×230×66 274 217
NX6-12 306×230×66 306 253
NX6-14 342×230×66 342 289
NX6-15 360×230×66 360 305
NX6-16 378×230×66 378 321
NX6-17 396×230×66 396 337
NX6-18 414×230×66 414 353
NX6-19 432×230×66 432 369
NX6-20 450×230×66 450 385
NX6-21 468×230×66 468 401
NX6-22 486×230×66 486 417
NX6-23 504×230×66 504 433
NX6-24 522×230×66 522 449
Other No. of mounted units is available and please specify when place the order.
> >> A-78

Consumer Unit
NX6 Consumer Unit
①
①
②
①-- - - Appearance: Compact design, flowing appearance ① ---- Label: Visible technical label
② ---- Bolts: Two bolts for fixing
① ②
③
⑥
⑤
① ---- N terminals: First N terminal and second
N terminal are separable
② ---- PE terminal: PE terminal for easy earthing
③ ---- U-type busbar: Additional for easy wiring
④ ---- Terminals: Top mounted for easy cable dressing
⑤ ---- Accessories: For limiting products' module range
⑥ ---- Fixing points: Fours for surface installation
⑦ ---- Din Rail: Full metal din rail for quick installation
⑦
of electrical products
① ①
① -- - - Handles: Convenience, safety ① ---- Close status: High protection degree
A-79 > >>

Consumer Unit
NX9 CONSUMER UNIT
1. General A
1.1 NX9 with hinged metal flap is designed for easy surface mounting
for indoor installations.
1.2 The standard mounting rail is preassembled for mounting wide
range of CHINT products.
NX9-□: Incoming DIN-rail fitted with Switch Disconnector.
NX9-□M: Incoming DIN-rail fitted with MCCB The outgoing DIN-
rail is fitted with MCB, RCD, RCBO and Din-rail components to
different specific requirements.
1.3 NX9 is designed with neutral and PE terminals for three phases
circuit system.
1.4 NX9 is available in 6 sizes, suitable for different arrangements of
components from 4 up to 20 modules.
1.5 Easy installation, distinct wiring zones and ample wiring space.
2. Type Designation
NX9－□ □
Incoming Products
Blank: fitted with Switch Disconnector
M: fitted with MCCB
No. of mounted units: 3,4,6,8,10,12,
14,16,18,20,22,24
Design Sequence number
Distribution Boards
Company code
3. Technical data 4. Terminals max. cable size
Standard IEC/EN 60439-3 Incoming terminals 50 mm2

2
Rated voltage 240/415V Outgoing terminals 16 mm
Frequency 50/60Hz
Max. incoming current(single phase) 200A
Max. outgoing current(single phase) 63A
398±2.5 C
A
B
298±2.5
> >> A-80

Consumer Unit
NX9-M Three-phase,fitted with NM1-250H MCCB
Type Outline dimensions A B C

NX9-4M 570×400×130 570 456 130
NX9-6M 624×400×130 624 510 130
NX9-8M 678×400×130 678 564 130
NX9-10M 732×400×130 732 618 130
NX9-12M 786×400×130 786 672 130
NX9-14M 840×400×130 840 726 130
NX9-16M 894×400×130 894 780 130
NX9-18M 948×400×130 948 834 130
NX9-20M 1002×400×130 1002 888 130
NX9-22M 1056×400×130 1056 942 130
NX9-24M 1110×400×130 1110 996 130
NX9-M Three-phase,fitted with NM1-125 MCCB

NX9-4M 570×400×110 570 456 110
NX9-6M 624×400×110 624 510 110
NX9-8M 678×400×110 678 564 110
NX9-10M 732×400×110 732 618 110
NX9-12M 786×400×110 786 672 110
NX9-14M 840×400×110 840 726 110
NX9-16M 894×400×110 894 780 110
NX9-18M 948×400×110 948 834 110
NX9-20M 1002×400×110 1002 888 110
NX9-22M 1056×400×110 1056 942 110
NX9-24M 1110×400×110 1110 996 110
NX9 Three-phase,fitted with NH4 switch disconnector

NX9-3 443×400×103 443 329 103
NX9-4 470×400×103 470 356 103
NX9-6 524×400×103 524 410 103
NX9-8 578×400×103 578 464 103
NX9-10 632×400×103 632 518 103
NX9-12 686×400×103 686 572 103
NX9-14 740×400×103 740 626 103
NX9-16 794×400×103 794 680 103
NX9-18 848×400×103 848 734 103
NX9-20 902×400×103 902 788 103
NX9-22 956×400×103 956 842 103
NX9-24 1010×400×103 1010 896 103
Other No. of mounted units is available and please specify when place the order.
A-81 > >>

Consumer Unit
NX9 Distribution Boards
A
①
①
②
②
① ---- Label: Visible technical label and other labels

① ---- Appearance: Compact design, flowing appearance ② ---- Door lock: For preventing unwanted operation
② ---- Door lock: For preventing unwanted operation ③ ---- Earthing line: Connect door and body together
for both reliable earthing.
①
⑥
⑦
③
⑤
① ---- Fix points: Fours for surface installation
② ---- Din rail: Metal din rail for quick installation
③ ---- N terminal: Connect N lines together
④ ⑧ ④ ---- PE terminal: For easy earthing
⑤ ---- N incoming terminal
⑥ ---- Connect points: Four bolts for connecting
front panel and body together
⑦ ---- NX9-□: Incoming switch disconnector
⑧ ---- NX9-□M: Incoming MCCB
①
①
① - -- - Handles: Convenience, safety ① ---- Close: protection degree
> >> A-82

Consumer Unit
NX2 Consumer Unit (Body)
1. General

1.2 No. Of mounted units: 8, 10, 14, 18, 28, 36;
1.3 On-load current (A): 100/1-phase;
1.4 Allowable temperature-rise of enclosure: 40k;
1.5 Protection degree: IP2XC;
2. Features
2.1 The product has appearance patent.

In addition to the standard mounting rail, a front panel for fixing
is supplied.
The shape fixing bolts are easy for fastening and loosening.
2.2 The interiorly mounted MCBs are in compliance with relative
IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric components are
available, as well.
2.3 On request, various circuits combinations can be assembled;
and the mounting capacity of the product units can be taken to
8~36 units.
and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box.
2.6 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material.

168±2.5
168±2.5
470±3
C
168±2.5
A 122±2.5
B
A 122±2.5
B
Model A B C Remark
NX2-8 194±2.5 218±2.5 230±2.5

NX2-10 232±2.5 256±2.5 230±2.5
Single-row
NX2-14 302±2.5 326±2.5 230±2.5
NX2-18 374±2.5 398±2.5 230±2.5
NX2-28 302±2.5 326±2.5 470±3

Double-rows
NX2-36 374±2.5 398±2.5 470±3
A-83 > >>

Consumer Unit
NXW1 Consumer Unit
(NXW1 Consumer Unit Body ) A
for Outdoor Application
1. General

1.2 No. of mounted units: 3, 5;
1.3 On-load current A: 63;
1.4 Allowable temperature-rise of enclosure: 40k;
1.5 Protection degree: IP65;
2. Features
2.1 Special designed with excellent enclosure capability;

with high protection degree up to IP65, applicable for
outdoor mounting.
2.2 The interiorly mounted MCBs are all in compliance
with relative IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric
components are applicable, as well;
2.3 On request, various circuit combinations can be assembled;
and the mounting capacity of the product units can be taken
to 3~ 5units;
and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box;
2.6 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material.
184±2.5
108±1.5
112.6±1.5
Model A B
NXW1-3 66.8±1.5 100±1.5
NXW1-5 102.8±1.5 136±2.5
> >> A-84

NXW5 Wall Mounting Enclosure
1. General
1.1 Function
The Wall Mounting Enclosure is designed to adopt all kind of
Electrical switch gear & control gear assemblies. It is suitable for
variety of Electrical installations in commercial & light industrial
premises. It is designed for indoor & outdoor applications.
1.2 Features
Made out of high quality Electro galvanized steel up to1.6mm
thickness.
Removable Gland plate at the Bottom.
Canopies can be fixed as optional.
Also double insulation; excellent out door performance.
Mounting plate made of 2mm GI steel or RAL 2000
Orange powder coated.
Complies with IEC & NEMA standards.
Available in Double door construction for width
more than 800mm.
Corner formed covers ensures better rain proof
protection & aesthetic look
3 point cam lock for higher sizes ensures uniform
locking over the entire length.
A-85 > >>

2. Technical data
Standard IEC 62208

A
Rated voltage 230V/400V
Frequency 50/60Hz
Max. incoming current(three phases) 250A
Protection degree IP54/IP65(optional)
3. Terminals max. cable size

2
Incoming terminals 2×185 mm
Additionalpanel
Enclosures W1
W1-74
H1-90
H1
8-8.5
R5
20 25
5×45°
10 3×45° 25 13
D
W-45
W
Wallfixingbrackets
I
D
W-76
> >> A-86

①
②
① ---- Internal hinges with duralumin hinge-pin.

② ---- Earthing connection between body and door.
③ ---- Detail of front-rim.
④ ---- Cable gland plate with rubber gasket.
⑤ ---- Wall fixing brackets.
A-87 > >>

Flange openings
A
208 208
158
57
57
90
90
A C
208 208 208 208

57
57
90
90
B D
Note: The thickness of installation panel could be changed

according to your specific requirement.
(Max. thickness 2.0mm). Drawing-bar lock is
available when the width of JXF is bigger than 800mm.
Standard type
Model No. Height(H)×Width(W)× Depth(D) No. of locks No. of higes Flange openings Thickness
NXW5-2520/15 250×200×150 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-3025/15 300×250×150 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-3025/20 300×250×200 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-3030/15 300×300×150 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-3030/20 300×300×200 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-3040/15 300×400×150 1 2 B 1.2
NXW5-3040/20 300×400×200 1 2 B 1.2
> >> A-88

Model No. Height(H)×Width(W)× Depth(D) No. of locks No. of higes Flange openings Thickness
NXW5-4030/15 400×300×150 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-4030/20 400×300×200 1 2 A 1.2
NXW5-4040/15 400×400×150 1 2 B 1.2
NXW5-4040/20 400×400×200 1 2 B 1.2
NXW5-4060/15 400×600×150 1 2 C 1.2
NXW5-4060/20 400×600×200 1 2 C 1.2
NXW5-4060/25 400×600×250 1 2 C 1.2
NXW5-5040/15 500×400×150 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-5040/20 500×400×200 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-5040/25 500×400×250 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-5050/15 500×500×150 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-5050/20 500×500×200 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-5050/25 500×500×250 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6040/15 600×400×150 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6040/20 600×400×200 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6040/25 600×400×250 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6050/15 600×500×150 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6050/20 600×500×200 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6050/25 600×500×250 2 2 B 1.2
NXW5-6060/20 600×600×200 2 2 C 1.2
NXW5-6060/25 600×600×250 2 2 C 1.2
NXW5-6060/30 600×600×300 2 2 C 1.2
NXW5-7050/15 700×500×150 2 2 B 1.5
NXW5-7050/20 700×500×200 2 2 B 1.5
NXW5-7050/25 700×500×250 2 2 B 1.5
NXW5-7050/30 700×500×300 2 2 B 1.5
NXW5-8060/20 800×600×200 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8060/25 800×600×250 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8060/30 800×600×300 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8060/38 800×600×380 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8080/20 800×800×200 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8080/25 800×800×250 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-8080/30 800×800×300 2 3 C 1.5
NXW5-10060/25 1000×600×250 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10060/30 1000×600×300 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10060/38 1000×600×380 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10060/45 1000×600×450 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10080/25 1000×800×250 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10080/30 1000×800×300 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10080/38 1000×800×380 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-10080/45 1000×800×450 2 4 C 1.5
NXW5-100100/25 1000×1000×250 2 4 D 1.5
NXW5-100100/30 1000×1000×300 2 4 D 1.5
NXW5-12080/25 1200×800×250 3 5 C 1.5
NXW5-12080/30 1200×800×300 3 5 C 1.5
NXW5-12080/38 1200×800×380 3 5 C 1.5
NXW5-12080/45 1200×800×450 3 5 C 1.5
NXW5-120100/25 1200×1000×250 3 5 D 1.5
NXW5-120100/30 1200×1000×300 3 5 D 1.5
A-89 > >>

Special tpye: The following products can be customized：
Model No. Height(H)×Width(W)× Depth(D) No. of locks No. of higes Flange openings Thickness A
G NXW5-2520/14 250×200×140 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-3025/14 300×250×140 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-3025/18 300×250×180 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-3030/14 300×300×140 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-3030/18 300×300×180 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-4030/14 400×300×140 2 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-4050/20 400×500×200 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-4050/26 400×500×260 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-4070/20 400×700×20 2 2 C 1.2
G NXW5-5040/14 500×400×240 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-5040/23 500×400×230 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-5040/26 500×400×260 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6040/14 600×400×140 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6040/23 600×400×230 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6040/26 600×400×260 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6050/14 600×500×140 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6050/23 600×500×230 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-6050/26 600×500×260 2 2 B 1.2
G NXW5-7050/16 700×500×160 2 2 B 1.5
G NXW5-7050/23 700×500×230 2 2 B 1.5
G NXW5-7050/26 700×500×260 2 2 B 1.5
G NXW5-7050/32 700×500×320 2 2 B 1.5
G NXW5-8060/32 800×600×320 2 3 C 1.5
G NXW5-10080/20 1000×800×200 2 4 C 1.5
G NXW5-10080/32 1000×800×320 2 4 C 1.5
G NXW5-12080/32 1200×800×320 3 5 C 2
G NXW5-12080/40 1200×800×400 3 5 C 2
G NXW5-140100/30 1400×1000×300 3 5 D 2
G NXW5-140100/40 1400×1000×400 3 5 D 2
G NXW5-3020/15 300×200×150 1 2 A 1.2
G NXW5-8060/40 800×600×400 2 3 C 1.5
G NXW5-8060/26 800×600×260 2 3 C 1.5
> >> A-90

Bus Bar / Din Rail
MCB Shield (For eB and NH2)
1. General
Guarantee MCBs’ wiring safety.
2. Features
Rated voltage: 220…240/380…415V

Rated current: up to 100A
Frequency: 50/60Hz
Poles of mounted units: 1P, 3P
59.5
43.4
35
45 +0.26
114
83
0
+0.26
114
83
45 0
77 +0.23
110
24
18+0.18
0
23.5
+0.18
54 0
A-91 > >>

Bus Bar / Din Rail
Busbar
1. Busbar for MCB & RCCB
A
Number of Cross section Length
Model poles (mm2) L (m)
L Fork Type 1P 12 1
L
Fork Type 2P 12 1
L Fork Type 3P 12 1
L
Fork Type 4P 12 1
L
Pin Type 1P 12 1
L
Pin Type 1P 16 1
L
Pin Type 2P 12 1
L
Pin Type 2P 16 1
L
Pin Type 3P 12 1
L
Pin Type 3P 16 1
L
Pin Type 4P 1
12
L
Pin Type 4P 1
16
> >> A-92

Bus Bar / DIN Rail
2. Busbar for RCBO

Number of Cross section Length
Model poles (mm )
2
L (m)
L Pin Type 2P 10 1
Pin Type 3P 10 1
L
1-phase 2, 3 and 4 phase
Feed-in from end

2 10 12 16 20 25 35 10 16 25 36
cross section (mm )
IE=Is
max. current (A) 63 65 80 90 100 130 63 80 100 130
Feed-in from the middle n 3 2 1 1 2 3 n

max. current (A) 100 110 130 150 180 220 100 130 180 220
Is Is
IE=∑Is
Max. feed-in current (A) Depends on the cross section for connection!
3. DIN rail
35 L
7.5
27
Model L(m)
DIN rail 1
A-93 > >>

Change-over Switch
NZK1-32 Change-over Switch

A
1. General
1.1 Certificates: KEMA;

1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz;
rated voltage up to 250V, rated current 32A;
1.3 Standard: IEC60669-1
2. Operation conditions
2.1 Temperature:-5℃~+40℃;
the average value shall not exceed +35℃
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m;
2.3 Air conditions: :
At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50%
at the max temperature of +40℃, higher relative
humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃, special
measures should be taken to occurrence of dews.
2.4 Mounting conditions:
Inclination between the mounting plane and the
vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
2.5 Assemble with TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail
3. Type designation
NZK1-32
Rated current of frame size (A)
Design SN (1: Three-way switch)
Change-over Switch
Corporate Characteristic Code
4. Technicall data
4.1 Poles: 1P, 2P
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
4.3 Rated operating current Ie: 32A;
4.4 Rated voltage Ue: 250V;
4.4 Rated making and breaking capacity:
1.1Ue; 1.25Ie; COSΦ=0.3±0.05; 200 times
4,5 Operational performance:
Ue 0+5%Ie; COSΦ=0.6±0.05; 10000 times
> >> A-94

Change-over Switch
5. Circuit diagram
2 4
2 4 6 8
1
1 5
NZK1-32/1 NZK1-32/2
2 4 6 8
1 5
NZK1-32/2
Mounting Rail Dimensions

34.5±0.5
82 -1.2
85.3 -1.4
45 -0.36
0
35 L
7.5
0
18 -0.43 29.5±0.31
1P
65.5±0.37
0
36 -0.62
2P 77.5 0
-1.2 27
A-95 > >>

Change-over Switch
Change-over Switch A
7. Installation and usage
7.1 Prior to installation, check whether the switch symbol complies with the operating conditions.
7.2 As shown, snap into the mounting rail.
Contact 1-2 is closed when the handle is at position I, contact 1-4 is closed when the handle is at position II,
and contact 1-2, 1-4 are closed when the handle is at position 0.
7.3 Before turning the power ON,
operate the switch several times to ensure that it is flexible and reliable, without any delay.
7.4 The switch must be protected against rain during usage, storage and transportation, etc.
8. Order Information
8.1 Indicate the following order information:
a) Product model and name, e.g. Change-over switch NZK1-32
b) Number of poles, e.g. 2P
c) Quantity of order, e.g. 100 units
8.2 Example:
e.g. Change-over switch NZK1-32/2 100 units
> >> A-96

Change-over Switch
NZK2-32 Change-over Switch

1. General
1.1 Certificates: KEMA;

1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz;
rated voltage up to 250V, rated current 32A;
1.3 Standard: IEC60669-1
2.1 Temperature:-5℃~+40℃;
the average value shall not exceed +35℃
2.3 Air conditions: :
at the max temperature of +40℃, higher relative
humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃, special
Inclination between the mounting plane and the
vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
2.5 Assemble with TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail
3. Type designation
NZK2-32
Rated current of frame size (A)
Design SN (1: Three-way switch)
Change-over Switch
Corporate Characteristic Code
4. Technicall data
4.1 Poles: 1P, 2P
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
4.3 Rated operating current Ie: 32A;
4.4 Rated voltage Ue: 250V;
4.4 Rated making and breaking capacity:
1.1Ue; 1.25Ie; COSΦ=0.3±0.05; 200 times
4,5 Operational performance:
Ue 0+5%Ie; COSΦ=0.6±0.05; 10000 times
A-97 > >>

Change-over Switch
5. Circuit diagram
A
2 4
2 4 6 8
1
1 5
NZK2-32/1 NZK2-32/2
Mounting Rail Dimensions

34.5±0.5
82 -1.2
85.3 -1.4
45 -0.36
0
35 L
7.5
0
18 -0.43 29.5±0.31
1P
65.5±0.37 27
0
36 -0.62
2P 77.5 0
-1.2
7. Installation and usage 8. Order Information
7.1 Prior to installation, check whether the switch symbol 8.1 Indicate the following order information:
complies with the operating conditions. a) Product model and name,
7.2 As shown, snap into the mounting rail. e.g. Change-over switch NZK2-32
Contact 1-2 is closed when the handle is at position I, b) Number of poles, e.g. 2P
contact 1-4 is closed when the handle is at position II, c) Quantity of order, e.g. 100 units
and contact 1-2 is broken. 8.2 Example:
7.3 Before turning the power ON, e.g. Change-over switch NZK2-32/2 100 units
operate the switch several times to ensure that it is
flexible and reliable, without any delay.
7.4 The switch must be protected against rain during usage,
storage and transportation, etc.
> >> A-98

Certificates Table
Technical features
Model
Application Standard Poles Designation Rated current Breaking capacity
6000A
1P/2P/3P/4P 1-63A
IEC/EN 60898-1 B/C/D 10000A
1P/2P/3P 6-63A 6000A
AC IEC/EN 60947-2
NB1 1P/2P/3P/4P 8-12In 1-63A 6KA
VC8036
1P/2P/3P/4P B/C/D 1-63A 5KA
UL1077
1P/3P C 1-63A 5KA
DC UL1077 1P/2P/3P/4P B/C 1-63A 10KA
3000A
B/C/D 1-63A
IEC/EN 60898-1 1P/2P/3P/4P 4500A
eB AC
B/C 1-40A 6000A
IEC/EN 60947-2 2P C 6-40A 6000A
UB AC IEC/EN 60898-1 1P/2P/3P/4P B/C 1-40A 6000A
63,80,100A 6KA
DZ158 AC IEC/EN 60947-2 1P/2P/3P/4P 8-12In
63,80,100,125A 10KA
4500A
NBH8 AC IEC/EN 60898-1 1P+N B/C 1-40A
6000A
2P AC/A 25,40,63A 6000A
4P AC/A 25,40,63A 6000A
IEC/EN 61008-1 2P AC/A 25,40,63A 10000A
NL1 AC
VC8035 4P AC/A 25,40,63A 10000A
2P/4P AC/A AC-S/A-S 63,80,100A 10000A
2P/4P AC 25,40,63A 6000/10000A
NB1L 2P/4P AC 1-40A 6000A
(MCB+RCD block) AC IEC/EN 61009-1
2P/4P AC/A 1-40A 10000A
1P+N/2P/3P/3P+N/4P AC 1-63A 6000A
NB1L 1P+N A 1-25A 6000A
(Combined) AC IEC/EN 61009-1
2P A 6-40A 10000A
NB3LE AC IEC/EN 61009-1 1P+N AC 6-32A 6000A
NBH8LE AC IEC/EN 61009-1 1P+N AC 1-40A 4500/6000A
DZ158LE AC IEC/EN 61009-1 1P+N/2P/3P/3P+N/4P AC 63,80,100A 6000A
NH2 AC IEC/EN 60947-3 1P/2P/3P/4P 32,63,100A 20Ie
NH4 AC IEC/EN 60947-3 1P/2P/3P/4P 32,63,100,125A 20Ie
NH9 AC IEC/EN 60947-3 1P/2P/3P/4P 16,32A 20Ie
A-99 > >>

Certificates Table
A
K
TE
ER
INT
A A C R US LISTED
R
DNV
> >> A-100

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
MCCB
NM8, NM8S
Page B-01
NM7
Page B-63
NM1
Page B-72
NM8L, NM8SL
Page B-101
NM8, NM8S
3. Type designation 4. Product overview
N M 8 □ －□ □ /□ / □ /□ NM8 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Application code 1 Body
Blank: for power distribution;
M: for motor protection 2 Thermo magnetic release
Number of poles: 2: 2-pole B
3: 3-pole 3 Electronic release
4: 4-pole B
4A: Without current release components, 4 Plug-in base
N-pole is always at making status
14
4B: Without current release components,
5 Rotary manual operating handle 15
N-pole makes with other three poles
(N-pole first makesthen breaks)
6 Motor driven operating mechanism
4C: With current release components, 10
N-pole makes and breaks with other
three poles, N-pole first makes then 7 Under-voltage release
breaks, N-pole operating value is 1.0In 9

4
of other three poles 8 Shunt release
4D: With current release components,
N-pole is always at making status, 9 Alarm contact 8
NM8, NM8S operating current is 1.0In 16
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker 7
Rated current : 10 Auxiliary contact
1. General 125: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125
1.1 Certificates: CE, DNV, KEMA, ESC, UKrSEPRO, GOST, RCC; 250: 100, 125, 160,180, 200, 225, 250 11 Front connection plate
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC220V~690V 400: 250, 315, 350, 400 18
16A~1600A; 630: 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 (for 12 Rear connection plate 13
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2.
thermo-magnetic breaker, the rated operational
current be up to 500A) Locking system(padlock)
13
800: 630, 700, 800 3
1250: 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250
2.1 Temperature: -5℃ ~+40℃ ; the average value within 14 Short terminal cover
24h shall not exceed +35℃ ; for the circuit breaker Breaking capacity code:
with thermo-magnetic release, +40℃ is set to be the S: Standard type; (current limiting technology utilised)
12
15 Extended terminal cover
standard temperature for ratings. Special utilization, H: Higher type; (current limiting technology utilised)
please refer to coefficients indicated on page 21 for
R: Current limiting type (current limiting technology 1
temperature compensation correction; ; 16 DIN rail adaptor
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m; ; utilised) 2
2.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3; ; Frame size rated current: 125, 250, 400,
2.4 Air conditions: : 17 Cage clamp terminal 11
630, 800, 1250
at the max temperature of +40℃ , higher relative Release type code:
18 Mechanical interlock 5
humidity is allowable under lower temperature. Blank: thermal-magnetic release;
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃ , special S: Electronic release;
M: Magnetic only 17
MCCB 17
Company code
17
17
DNV
14
6
5 15
B-01 > >> > >> B-02 > >> B-03 > >> B-04
NM8, NM8S
5. Technical data
5. 1 Parameters
NM8 circuit breaker Thermal-magnetic type NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8-400 NM8-630 NM8-800 NM8-1250 NM8S circuit breaker Electronic type NM8S-125 NM8S-250 NM8S-400 NM8S-630① NM8S-800 NM8S-1250 NM8S-1600
4 Frames Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4 3 Frames Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN60947-2 Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN60947-2
Rated current(A) In 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 Rated current(A) In 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 B
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 750 750 750 750 750 750 Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC 50/60Hz 690 690 690 690 690 690 AC 50/60Hz 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue Rated operational voltage (V) Ue
DC 500 500 500 500 500 500 DC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
H H
L L
W W
Breaking capacity code H S H R S H H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H Breaking capacity code S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H

_ _ _ _ _
Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 380V/400V/415V 100 50 100 150 50 100 100 50 100 150 50 100 70 100 150 70 100 70 100 150 70 100 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 380V/400V/415V 50 70 100 50 70 50 70 100 50 70 70 100 150 70 100 70 100 150 70 100 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
breaking capacity (kA RMS) Icu AC 660V/690V 6 5 6 8 5 6 8 6 8 10 6 8 10 12 15 10 12 10 12 15 10 12 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 breaking capacity (kA RMS) Icu AC 660V/690V 6 8 10 6 8 6 8 10 6 8 10 12 15 10 12 10 12 15 10 12
Rated service breaking capacity Ics= (%Icu) 100 100 100 ① 100 ① 50 50 Rated service breaking capacity Ics= (%Icu) 100 100 100 ① 100 ① 50 50 50
Suitability for isolation Suitability for isolation
Utilization category A A A A A A Utilization category A A A A A A A
Safety of insulation Safety of insulation
Mechanical 20,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 Mechanical 20,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Life(CO recycle) Life(CO recycle)
Electrical 20,000 20,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 Electrical 20,000 20,000 6,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
Protection Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Protection Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic
Release units Release units
Over-load protection Over-load protection
Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection
Added on residual _ _ _ _ _ _ Added on residual _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Residual current protection Residual current protection
current protection module current protection module
Mounting and connection Mounting and connection
Front connection Front connection
Fixed _ _ Fixed _ _ _
Rear connection Rear connection
Front connection _ _ _ _ Front connection _ _ _ _ _
DIN rail DIN rail
Front connection _ _ Front connection _ _ _
Plug-in _ _ Plug-in _ _ _
Rear connection Rear connection
Handle _ _ Handle
Manual Manual
Direct or extended rotary handle Direct or extended rotary handle
Motor-driven mechanism Motor-driven mechanism
Manual, remote operated automatic source changeover systems Manual, remote operated automatic source changeover systems
Shunt and under-voltage release Shunt and under-voltage release
Auxiliary and alarm contact Auxiliary and alarm contact
Pad locking system _ _ Pad locking system _ _ _
Mounting and connection accessories Mounting and connection accessories
Connection terminal Connection terminal
Front connection plate Front connection plate _ _ _
Rear connection plate _ _ Rear connection plate _ _ _
DIN rail adaptor _ _ _ _ DIN rail adaptor _ _ _ _ _
Plug-in type connection accessories _ _ Plug-in type connection accessories _ _ _
Terminal covers Terminal covers
Interphase barrier Interphase barrier
Dimension and weight Dimension and weight
Dimension(mm)W×H×L Fixed type-front connection 62×140×79 90×140×79 120×140×79 70×157×88 105×157×88 140×157×88 140×255×113 185×255×113 140×255×113 185×255×113 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×196 280×370×196 Dimension(mm)W×L×H Fixed type-front connection 105×157×88 140×157×88 105×157×88 140×157×88 140×255×113 185×255×113 140×255×113 185×255×113 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×201 280×370×201
Weight(kg) Fixed type-front connection 0.85 1.2 1.6 1.5 2.1 2.8 7.5 10 7.5 10 17.5 23 17.5 23 Weight(kg) Fixed type-front connection 2.1 2.8 2.1 2.8 8 11 8 11 17.5 23 17.5 23 17.5 23
Note: ① When Ue is ≥660V, Ics=50% Icu. Note: ① The rated current of NM8S-630 plug-in type up to 570A.
B-05 > >> > >> B-06 > >> B-07 > >> B-08
NM8, NM8S
NM8M circuit breaker Magnetic only NM8M-125 NM8M-250
4 Frame Frame 1 Frame 2
Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN60947-2
Rated current(A) In 16,20,25,32,40,50,63,80,100,125 16,20,25,32,40,50,63,80,100,125 125,160,180,200,250
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8 8 8
AC 50/60Hz 690 690 690
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue
DC 500 500 500
Number of poles 3 4 3
Breaking capacity code S H R S H S H R

Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 380V/415V 50 100 150 50 100 50 100 150
breaking capacity (kA RMS) Icu AC 660V/690V 8 10 20 8 10 8 10 20
Rated service breaking capacity Ics= (%Icu) 100 100 100
Suitability for isolation ■ ■ ■
Utilization category A A A
Safety of insulation ■ ■ ■
Mechanical 20,000 20,000 20,000
Life(CO recycle)
Electrical 20,000 20,000 20,000
Protection magnetic magnetic magnetic
Release units ■ ■ ■
Short-circuit protection ■ ■ ■
Added on residual _ _ _
Residual current protection
current protection module
Mounting and connection ■ ■ ■
Front connection ■ ■ ■
Fixed
Rear connection ■ ■ ■
DIN rail Front connection ■ ■ ■
Front connection ■ ■ ■
Plug-in
Rear connection ■ ■ ■
Auxiliaries for control and indication ■ ■ ■
Handle
Manual ■ ■ ■
Direct or extended rotary handle
Motor-driven mechanism ■ ■ ■
Manual, remote operated automatic source changeover systems ■ ■ ■
Shunt and under-voltage release ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary and alarm contact ■ ■ ■
Pad locking system ■ ■ ■
Mounting and connection accessories ■ ■ ■
Connection terminal ■ ■ ■
Front connection plate ■ ■ ■
Rear connection plate ■ ■ ■
DIN rail adaptor ■ ■ ■
Plug-in type connection accessories ■ ■ ■
Terminal covers ■ ■ ■
Interphase barrier ■ ■ ■
Dimension and weight ■ ■ ■
Dimension (mm)W×L×H 90×140×79 120×140×79 105×157×88
Weight (kg) 1.2 1.6 2.1
B-09 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8M-250 NM8M-400, 630 NM8M-800, 1250
Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
125,160,180,200,250 250,315,350,400,500 250,315,350,400,500 630,700,800,1000,1250 630,700,800,1000,1250

750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690 B
500 500 500 500 500
4 3 4 3 4
S H S H R S H S H R S H
50 100 70 100 150 70 100 50 70 - 50 70
8 10 10 20 35 10 20 - - - - -
100 100 100 50 50
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
A A A A A
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
20,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
20,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
_ _ _ _ _
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ _ _ _ _
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ ■ ■ _ _
■ _ _ _ _
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
140×157×88 140×255×133 185×255×133 210×370×196 280×370×196
2.8 7.5 10 17.5 23
> >> B-10

NM8, NM8S
5.2 Special applications .
Use of DC apparatus .
To obtain the number of poles in series needed to guarantee
the required breaking capacity at the various operating voltages,
suitable connection diagrams must be used. For the breaking
capacity (Icu), according to the voltage and the number of poles
connected in series with reference to the connection diagrams.
Protection and isolation of the circuit with three-pole circuit-
breakers Ics=Icu=10kA with any one connection in the
following diagrams.
Diagram A: Interruption with one pole for polarity Diagram B: Interruption with two poles in series for
one polarity and one pole for the other polarity.
+ - + -
load
load
Note: Without negative polarity connected to earth, the installation Note: Without negative polarity connected to earth, the installation
method must be such as to make the probability of a second method must be such as to make the probability of a second
earth fault negligible. earth fault negligible.
Diagram D: Interruption with four poles in series for one polarity

Diagram C: Interruption with three poles in series for polarity.
(4C, 4D)
+ -
+ -
load load
Diagram E: Interruption with three poles in series on

Diagram F: Interruption with two poles in series for polarity
one polarity and one pole on the other polarity
(4C, 4D)
(4C, 4D)
+ - + -
load
load
Note: Without negative polarity connected to earth, the installation
Note: Without negative polarity connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second
method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault negligible.
earth fault negligible.
B-11 > >>

NM8, NM8S
The following table shows which connection diagram to use according to the number of poles to be connected in series to obtain the
required breaking capacity, in relation to the type of distribution network:
protection Earth-insulated Network with one Network with a

Rated voltage V Isolation
function network polarity(1) earthed middle point earthed
≤250 ■ ■ A A A
■ - - - - B
≤500 ■ ■ A B A
■ - - C -
Note:
a The risk of double earth fault is nil, therefore the fault current only involves a part of the interruption poles.
b For connection with four poles in series, circuit-breakers with neutral at 100% of the phase settings must be used.
6. Release
6.1 Thermo-magnetic release
6.1.1 Thermo-magnetic release of NM8-125, 250, 400, 630, 800 and 1250 breakers can be set to meet protection requirements
t
a b
a
IR Ii 10 5 A 40℃
9 6
b
1 0.9 0.8 8 7
X A X A I R Ii
0 IR Ii 1
Adjustable setting of over-load protection a

Adjustable setting of short-circuit protection or fixed b
Thermo-magnetic
release NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8-400 NM8-630 NM8-800 NM8-1250
Rated value (A) 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 100, 125, 160, 180, 250,315, 250, 315, 350, 630, 700, 630, 700, 800,
In 40℃ 63, 80, 100, 125 200, 225, 250 350, 400 400, 500 800 1000, 1250
Over-load
Thermo protection
protection
Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping current IR (A)
0.8~1XIn 0.8~1XIn 0.8~1XIn 0.8~1XIn 0.8~1XIn 0.8~1XIn
N-pole protection (A) Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection
4A, 4B 1.0XIn 1.0XIn 1.0XIn 1.0XIn 1.0XIn 1.0XIn
0.5 XIn 0.5 XIn 0.5 XIn 0.5 XIn 0.5 XIn 0.5 XIn
4C, 4D
Short-circuit protection Magnetic protection
10In (for power Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
distribution protection) 5~10 XIn 5~10 XIn 5~10 XIn 5~10 XIn 5~10 XIn
Tripping current li (A)
12In (for motor 8~12In(for motor 8~12In(for motor 8~12In(for motor 8~12In(for motor 8~12In(for motor
protection) protection) protection) protection) protection) protection)
6.1.2 Characteristic of thermo protection operation of thermo-magnetic release for power distribution
Serial No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status

>1h (In≤63A)
1 Conventional non-tripping current 1.05 Cold status
>2h (In>63A)
≤1h (In≤63A)
2 Conventional tripping current 1.3 Right after test 1
≤2h (In>63A)
> >> B-12

NM8, NM8S
6.1.3 Characteristic of thermo protection operation of thermo-magnetic release for motor protection
Serial No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status

1 Conventional non-tripping current 1.0 >2h Cold status
1.2 ≤2h
2 Conventional tripping current 1.5 ≤4min Right after test 1
7.2 4s≤T≤10s
6.2 Electronic Release

6.2.1 NM8S-125, 250 electronic release is an universal module. It is of 11 current specifications: 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A, 100A, 125A, 160A,
180A, 200A, 225A and 250A to adjust setting values and to meet protection requirements.
.4 OFF 1.5
OFF
.5 1.5 2
0.9 I R .6 IR 2 I sd Ii .5 Ig
3
.7 3 4 1
1.2 I R
.8 4 6
.9 5 8
.95 X In 6 X In X In X In
10
Test/Com 1 8 12
The indicator light flashes, when single-phase operational current is ≤90% IR.
The indicator light is always lit, when single-phase operational current is ≥115% IR.
Electronic release NM8S-125 NM8S-250

Rated value In (A) 20~70℃ 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250
Over-load protection Thermal protection
Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
Tripping current IR
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn
1.05IR ＞2h non tripping ＞2h non tripping
1.3 IR ≤1h ≤1h
Tripping time
1.5 IR 96s 96s
6IR 6s 6s
N-line protection Adjustable rage Adjustable rage
tripping current Ig OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn
Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping current li
1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn
Short time-delay short current Adjustable range Adjustable range
protection tripping current lsd OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8XIn
6.2.2 NM8S-400, 630 electronic release is an universal module. It is of 6 current specifications: 250A, 315A, 350A, 400A, 500A, and
630A to adjust setting values and to meet protection requirements. The release is of wide setting range and multi-functional
modules can be selected. NM8S-400, 630 electronic release.
IR .4 OFF 1.5
1.5 OFF
.5 2
.6 IR 2 Isd 3 Ii .5 Ig
Ig .7 3 4 1
Isd .8 4
Ii 6
0.9 I R .9 5 8
1.2 I R .95 X In 6 X In 10 X In X In
1 8 12
3 TR .1 T sd .1 Tg
6 .2 .2
12 .3 .3
18 @6I R s .4 s .4 s
Test/Com
B-13 > >>

NM8, NM8S
6.2.3 NM8S-800, 1250 electronic release is an universal module. It is of 5 current specifications: 630A, 700A, 800A, 1000A,
and 1250A to adjust setting values and to meet protection requirements.
The release is of wide setting range and multi-functional modules can be selected.
IR .4 OFF 1.5
OFF
.5 1.5 2
Ig
Isd
.6
.7
.8
IR
2
3
4
Isd
3
4
6
Ii
.5
1 Ig B
Ii
.9 5 8
.95 6 10
1 X In 8 X In 12 X In X In
1.2 IR A/kA
Reset 3 TR .1 T sd .1 Tg
S 6 .2 .2
LN L1 L2 L3
12 .3 .3
Query 18 @6I R s .4 s .4 s
Test/Com
Tripping current IR, Isd, li should be set with three-digit switch or rotary knob as per current.
● IR, setting of over-load protection
IR could be adjusted as per customers' requirements,
and TR, tripping time at the status of 6IR can be set as per customers' requirements.
Model 1.05 IR 1.3 IR 1.5 IR (s) 2.0 IR (s) 6 IR (s)
＜1h tripping 48,96, 27, 54, 3, 6,

NM8S-400, 630 ＞2h non-tripping
192, 288 108, 162 12, 18
＜1h tripping 48, 96, 27, 54, 3, 6,

NM8S-800, 1250 ＞2h non-tripping
192, 288 108, 162 12, 18
●Ir, indicator light for over-load status indication

The indicator light flashes, when single-phase operational current is ＜90% IR
The indicator light is always lit, when single-phase operational current is ≥115% IR
● Isd, setting of short-circuit protection and tripping time

Setting value of current Isd could be adjusted as per customers' requirements and OFF stands for status without ST protection;
Tsd, the tripping time could be adjusted as per customers' requirements.
● Ii, setting of short-circuit protection

Value of setting current could be adjusted as per customers' requirements
●Ig, setting of protection operations

As a 4P circuit breaker with N-line protection, setting value of current Ig could be adjusted as per customers' requirements and OFF
stands for status without protection of N-pole; Tg, the operating time of N-pole could be adjusted as per customers' requirements.
Electronic release NM8S-400 NM8S-630 NM8S-800 NM8S-1250
Rated value A In 20~70℃ 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250
long time-delay over-load
protection (thermal protection)
Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5,
Tripping current IR (A)
0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn
Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping time 6IR (s)
3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18
short time-delay short-circuit protection

Tripping current Isd (A)
OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn
Tripping time Tsd (s)
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
(Instantaneous) short-circuit protection
Tripping current li (A) 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn
12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection)
(N-line) protection
Tripping current lg (A)
OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn
Tripping time Tg (s)
0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4
> >> B-14

NM8, NM8S
7. Curves
7.1 Tripping curve (ambient temperature +40℃)
NM8-125 (16A, 20A)
S
10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/In
NM8-125(25A, 32A)
S
10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/In
B-15 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8-125 (40A, 50A)
S
10000
7200
B
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/In
NM8-125 (63A, 80A, 100A)
S
10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/In
> >> B-16

NM8, NM8S
NM8-125 (125A)
S
10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/In
NM8-250 (100A)
S
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/In
B-17 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8-250 (160A )
S
10000
5000
2000
1000
B
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/In
NM8-250 (200A, 250A)
S
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/In
> >> B-18

NM8, NM8S
NM8-630 (250A~500A)
S
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
005
002
001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/In
NM8-1250(630A～800A) NM8-1250(1000A～1250A)
S
S
10000
10000
5000
5000
2000
2000
1000
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
20
20
10
10
5
5
2
2
1
1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
005
005
002
002
001
001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 400 600 I/In
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 400 600 I/In
B-19 > >>

NM8, NM8S
Motor protection release NM8-125, 250, 400, 630 (16A~500A)
S
10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
B
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
005
002
001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 I/In
Electronic type NM8S-125, 250(16A~250A)
10000
5000
IR=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
100
50
20 TR=6S
10
T(S) 5
2 Isd=1.5~8In
1
.5
.2 0.2
.1
.05 Ii=1.5~12In
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .1 .3 .5 1 2 3 4 56 8 10 30 50 80 200 300 I/In

.2 .4 40 60 100
I/In
> >> B-20

NM8, NM8S
Intelligent release NM8S-400, 630(250A~630A)
NM8S-800, 1250(630A~1250A)
10000
5000
IR=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
100
TR=3~18S
50
20
10
5 Isd=1.5~8In
T(S)
2
1
.5
0.4
.2 0.3
0.2
.1
0.1
.05 Ii=1.5~12In
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .1 .3 .5 1 2 3 4 56 8 10 30 50 80 200 300 I/In

.2 .4 40 60 100
I/In
7.2 Temperature compensation

When the ambient temperature slightly changes, tripping characteristics will change as well,
please refer to the table below for temperature compensation correction.
7.2.1 Temperature compensation coefficient of breaker with thermo-magnetic release as follows.
Ambient temperature 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
Temperature compensation coefficient 1.2 1.175 1.15 1.125 1.1 1.075 1.05 1.025 1.0 0.975 0.95 0.925 0.90 0.875 0.85
Note: For reference only
7.2.2 Temperature compensation coefficient of breaker with electronic release as follows
Frame Level rated current 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
NM8S-125S/H(40~125) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NM8S-250S/H(125~160) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NM8S-250S/H(200~250) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90
NM8S-630S/H/R(250~400) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.90
NM8S-630S/H/R(500~630) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.85
NM8S-1250S/H/R(630~800) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.975 0.975 0.95 0.95 0.925 0.925
NM8S-1250S/H/R(1000~1250) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.9 0.875 0.80 0.80 0.80
B-21 > >>

NM8, NM8S
8. Mounting of circuit breaker
8.1 Modes of down-lead .
Two modes of upper and lower down-lead are available;
adoption of different down-lead modes will not affect normal
operation of breaker, in addition, it is no need for derating.
8.2 Modes of mounting

Mounting modes following are available for fixed and plug-
in type breakers.
A B
C D E
8.3 Modes of fixing 8.3.2 Fixing mode following is available for NM8(S)-125, 250 for
8.3.1 Fixing modes following are available for fixed and plug-in fixed type breakers, which adopts DIN rail adaptor of front
type breakers. connection.
On bottom plate On hollow plate On Bus-bar

35
> >> B-22

NM8, NM8S
8.4 Secured distance 8.4.2 Min. distance between breaker and surface of switchgear
8.4.1 Min. Distance between breakers where the operation handle is exposed.
A B
T T
4 4
A=0 B=0
8.4.3 Min. distance between breaker and side of switchgear 8.4.4 Min. distance between top and bottom of breaker
D1
T
4
D2
White or colored metal plate

4
C Insulation plate or insulation
connection terminal
Insulation plate or insulation White or colored

NM8 Breaker Ue C connection terminal(mm) metal plate(mm)
D1 D2 D1 D2
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 35 35
NM8-125
Ue<600V 20 30 30 35 35
NM8S-125
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 35 35
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 35 35
NM8-250
Ue<600V 20 30 30 35 35
NM8S-250
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 35 35
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 60 60
NM8-400, 630,
Ue<600V 20 30 30 60 60
NM8S-400, 630
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 100 100
NM8-800, 1250,
Ue≤690V 50 130 100 70 70
NM8S-800, 1250
Note: when voltage is ≥500V, extended terminal cover should be mounted
B-23 > >>

NM8, NM8S
8.5 Modes of connection
8.5.1 Cable connection plug and Copper busbar
a. Screw is used to connect with copper (aluminum) cable
connection plug or copper busbar
Size of connection screw
NM8-125: M6
NM8S-125、NM8-250、NM8S-250：M8
NM8-400, 630、NM8S-400, 630：M10
B
NM8-800, 1250、NM8S-800, 1250：M10
φ
φ φ
32
D
D
D
D
L L
L
L
Copper cable Aluminum cable

Copper busbar Copper busbar [NM8(S)-1250]
connection plug connection plug
NM8S-125
NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250
NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250
NM8S-250
Distance between different poles(mm) 30 35 45 70

L(mm) ≤ 15 ≤ 25 ≤ 32 ≤ 50
D(mm) ≤ 7 ≤ 10 ≤ 16 ≤ 16
φ(mm) >6 >8 >10 >11
b. With front connection and use screw to connect

with copper (aluminum) cable connection plate or copper busbar
Size of connection screw
NM8-125: M6
NM8S-125, NM8-250、NM8S-250: M8
NM8-400, 630, NM8S-400, 630: M12
NM8-800, 1250, NM8S-800, 1250: M10
Front connection plate Front connection plate
φ
φ φ
32
D
D
D
L L
L
L
Copper cable Aluminum cable Copper Copper busbar

connection plug connection plug busbar [NM8(S)-1250]
> >> B-24

NM8, NM8S
NM8S-125
NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250
NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250
NM8S-250
Distance between different poles(mm) 30 35 52.5 70 70

L(mm) ≤ 15 ≤ 25 ≤ 40 ≤ 60 ≤ 50
D(mm) ≤ 7 ≤ 10 ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 16
φ(mm) >6 >8 >12 >12 >11
8.5.2 Connection of bare cable
Copper or aluminum cable
NM8S-125 NM8-400, 630

Dimension
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8S-400, 630
NM8S-250 Number of cable 1 2 4
L(mm) 16 20 L(mm) 26 30, 60 30
CSA(mm )
2
2.5~70 2.5~185 CSA(mm2) 35~370 35~185 35~125
Accessories
Model Specification Torque(N.m) CSA(mm 2)
Terminal
Built-in
8 4~95
（Single Hole）
NM8-125
Built-out
10 16~95
（Single Hole）
Built-in
25 10~120
（Single Hole）
Built-out
NM8-250 30 35~120
（Single Hole）
Built-out
30 2×(35~120)
（Double Hole）
B-25 > >>

NM8, NM8S
Accessories
Model Specification Torque(N.m) CSA(mm 2)
Terminal
Built-out
NM8-250
（Six Hole）
10 6×35
B
Built-in
35 120~240
（Single Hole）
Built-out
NM8-630 35 2×(120~240)
（Double Hole）
Built-out
20 4×( 35~95)
（Four Hole）
Built-out
50 3×( 185~240)
（Three Hole）
NM8-1250
Built-out
50 4×( 120~185)
（Four Hole）
8.5.3 Rear connection

For rear connection, cable connection plug should be
used for connection with copper busbar.
Rear connection
Accessories Frame size
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
Horizontal Vertical Rear connection plate
8.5.4 Plug-in type connection

Two modes of front and rear connection are available;
for rear connection, upper limit or lower limit connection
is used.
Plug-in type
Front connection
Lower limit connection
Upper limit connection
for rear connection
for rear connection
> >> B-26

NM8, NM8S
8.5.5 Standard CSA of copper cable
or busbar used for connection
Rated current(A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 1000 1250
Cross section Copper cable 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 185 185 240 2×150 2×185 2×240 2×240 - -
2
area (mm ) Copper busbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2×30×5 2×40×5 2×50×5 2×50×5 2×60×5 2×70×5
8.5.6 Usual cross sections for conductors according intensity
Copper conductors Copper bar

In(A)
2 2
Cross Section Area (mm ) Dimensions Area (mm )
10 1.5 —
16 2.5 —
20 2.5 —
25 4 —
32 6 —
40 10 —
63 16 —
80 25 —
100 35 —
125 50 —
160 70 —
200 95 —
250 120 —
315 185 —
400 240 —
500 2×150 2×30×5
630 2×185 2×40×5

800 2×240 2×50×5
1000 — 2×60×5
1250 — 2×80×5
8.6 Overall and Mounting Dimensions

8.6.1 Overall and mounting dimensions of fixed type for front
connection
H2
H1
2P 3P 4P H0
L1
G2
L2
L1
L2
L2
L1
T T
W3 W0 W0 W0 W0 W0
W1 W2
B-27 > >>

NM8, NM8S
Plate mount Bar mount DIN rail mount[NM8(S)-125,250]
3P 4P K2
K1
K 3P 4P
K 2×φd 4×φd
K2
K1
B
K
K
35
G2
G2
G1
G1
2×φd 4×φd
(mm)
Model L1 L2 H0 H1 H2 K K1 K2 G1 G2 W0 W1 W2 W3 d
NM8-125 140 240 72 79 103 15 30 60 56 112 30 90 120 62 6
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 157 357 82 88 126 17.5 35 70 62.5 125 35 105 140 70 6
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 255 474 95 113 168 22.5 45 90 100 200 45 140 185 - 6
NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250 370 570 132 144 206 35 70 140 120 240 70 210 280 - 7
8.6.2 Overall and mounting dimensions of fixed type for rear connection
Plate mount
3P K1 4P K2
K K
6×φD 8×φD
φd1
3P 4P
φd1
2×φd
H4
4×φd
H4
G2
G4
H3
H3
G1
G3
W0 W0 W0 W0 W0
W0 W0
W0 W0 W0
(mm)
Model H3 H4 W0 K K1 K2 G1 G2 G3 G4 d d1 D
NM8-125 47 87 30 15 30 60 56 112 62.5 125 6 6 15
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 57 97 35 17.5 35 70 62.5 125 72 144 6 8 20
NM8-400/NM8S-400 56 100 45 22.5 45 90 100 200 113.5 227 6 13 32
NM8-630/NM8S-630 56 100 45 22.5 45 90 100 200 113.5 227 6 13 32
> >> B-28

NM8, NM8S
8.6.3 Overall and mounting dimension of plug-in type
Plate mount
3P 4P N M
W0 W0 W0
L6
L4
TT T
L5
L3
H5
W0 W0 W0 W0 W0 H6
W1 W2 H7
Plate mount M Bar mount
3P 4P K2
K1 4×φd2 4×φd2 K 3P 4P
K
K8
K7
K6
K6
U
G8
G6
G10
G5
G7
G9
K3 2×φd2 4×φd2
K3
K4 K5
Plate mount N front connection Plate mount N rear connection

Insulation barrier must be mounted Insulation barrier must be mounted
between mounting plate and breaker base between mounting plate and breaker base
Lower limit
3P 4P 3P 4P
K1 2×φd2
K2 K1 2×φd2 K2
K 4×φd2
4×φd2 K K K
G12
G12
G14
G11
G13
G11
6×φD2
W0 W0 8×φD2 W0 W0 W0
B-29 > >>

NM8, NM8S
K2
3P Upper limit 4P
K1 K
4×φd2
K 2×φd2
G12
G16
G15
G11
W0 W0 W0
W0 W0 6×φD2
8×φD2
(mm)
Model W0 W1 W2 L5 L6 H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
NM8-125 30 90 120 90 180 24 40 67 15 30 60 47 94 124 30 60
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 35 105 140 102.5 205 27 45 75 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 35 70
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 45 140 185 157.5 315 27 45 45 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 45 90
Model K8 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 d2 D2 U

NM8-125 90 77 154 85.2 170.4 32.5 65 68 136 54.5 109 70.5 141 6 26 ≤32
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 105 87 174 95 190 37.5 75 77.5 155 61 122 79 158 6 30 ≤32
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 140 137 274 150 300 75 150 125 250 100 200 126 252 6 33 ≤32
8.6.4 Flush type (for fixed or plug-in type)
P2 Hole A Hole B Hole C

P1
C4
C4
C3
C3
C2
C1
R3
R4(3P)
R5(4P)
R6(3P)
R1
R2
B/C A
(mm)
Model P1 P2 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 C1 C2 C3 C4
NM8-125 73 80 13 26 46.5 93 123 65 26 68 50.5 101
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 83 90 14.5 29 54 108 143 73 33 78 56.5 113
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 109 114 26.5 53 71.5 143 188 - 41.5 116 108 205
> >> B-30

NM8, NM8S
9. Accessories
9.1 Inner accessories
9.1.1 Shunt release Accessories Frame size
Us=70~110%In, circuit breaker reliably operates
Long-time electrification is prohibited NM8-125
Time of response: pulsive type≥20ms, ≤60ms
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250/
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
Shunt release NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250
9.1.2 Under-voltage release

Us=35~70%Un, circuit breaker reliably breaks Accessories Frame size
Us≥85%Un, circuit breaker reliably closes
Us<35%Un, prevent circuit breaker from making NM8-125
Note: With under-voltage release, Us≥85%Un,
circuit breaker normally makes and breaks NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250/
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
Under-voltage release NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250
Shunt release Wiring diagram Under-voltage release Wiring diagram

<U
C1 C2 D1 D2
9.1.3 Auxiliary contact

Function: Indication of contacting status Accessories Frame size
Whole series
Auxiliary contact
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker is at F11 QF Power

F12 supply
F11 F14
breaking status F14 Making
circuit
Circuit breaker is at F12 Breaking
F11 F12 circuit
making status F14
9.1.4 Alarm contact

Function: indication of reason for circuit breaker releasing; Accessories Frame size
* Over-load
* Short-circuit
* Grounding fault
* Operation of under-voltage releasing or free tripping
When circuit breaker normally makes and breaks, Whole series
alarm contact not operates.
Alarm contact
After free tripping(or tripping due to failure),
alarm contact operates and after the circuit breaker again
normally operates, alarm contact recovers original status.
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker is at B11 QF Power supply

B12
B11 B14
breaking or making status B14
Circuit breaker is at free B12

B11 B12
release (or alarming)status B14
B-31 > >>

NM8, NM8S
Left ON
Right
Mounting and wiring mode
Handle OFF
Accessory Code
NM8-125, 250 NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
NM8S-125, 250 NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250
3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P B
No accessory
Alarm contact AL
SM: AC220V, SQ: AC380V

Shunt release
SB: DC24V
Auxiliary contact AX
UM: AC220V
Under-voltage release
UQ: AC380V
Shunt release SM: AC220V, SQ: AC380V, SB: DC24V
Two groups of
AX, AX
auxiliary contact
Under-voltage release UM: AC220V, UQ: AC380V
Shunt release SM: AC220V, SQ: AC380V, SB: DC24V

Alarm contact AL
Alarm contact AL
AL
Alarm contact
Shunt release SM:
SM: AC220V,
AC220V,SQ:
SQ:AC380V,
AC380V,SB:
SB:DC24V
DC24V
248 348
Auxiliary contact, alarm AX,
AX,ALAL
Two groups of AX, AX
auxiliary contact AL
Alarm contact AX, AL
Auxiliary contact, alarm contact
Under-voltage release (UM: AC220V, UQ: AC380V)
■-Shunt release ▲-Under-voltage release ○-Auxiliary contact ●-Alarm contact

Note: 1: For NM8-125, 250, 400, 630, NM8S-125, 250, 400, 630, under-voltage and shunt release couldn't be simultaneously
equipped on one breaker.
2: For NM8-800, 1250, NM8S-800, 1250, at most three auxiliary contacts could be equipped, under-voltage and shunt release
could be simultaneously equipped on one breaker, in addition, their positions could be exchanged.
> >> B-32

NM8, NM8S
9.2 External accessories

9.2.1 Economic extended rotary handle
Protection degree: IP30
Functions: Isolation function indication;
0(breaking), 1(making)and free tripping indication;
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1-3
padlocks with a diameter of 5-8mm(by customer),
This prevents the door of switchgear being opened
unwantedly.
circuit breaker P7
Accessories Frame size Y
P6
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250 X
NM8-400，630/NM8S-400，630
24
Economical extended
D
rotary handle NM8(S)-1250 MIN=50mm
(mm)
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8-400, NM8-630,

Dimension NM8-125 NM8(S)-800 NM8(S)-1250
NM8S-250 NM8S-400 NM8S-630
P6 14 14 20 20 21 21
P7 56 56 60 60 103 103
Handle mounting (mm)

NM8(S)-125,250,400,630 NM8(S)-800,1250
φ65 150
112 4×φ4.2
53
φ36
Chains
45 °
ON
112
150
Chains
φ16
OFF
2×φ5.5 ≥ 200
≥200
B-33 > >>

NM8, NM8S
9.2.2 Direct rotary handle

Protection degree：IP40
Functions:
Reliable insulation;
Isolation function indication;
0(breaking), 1(making) and free tripping indication;
Realize free tripping of circuit breaker; B
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1-3
padlocks with a diameter of
5~8mm (by customer).
NM8-125
NM8-250
NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8-400, 630
Direct rotary handle NM8S-400, 630
Direct rotary handle
3P 4P
W4
L9
L8
L7
T T
4 4
W3 W3
W1 W2 H8
H9
Front boring(fixed or plug-in circuit breaker)
R7
R6
C6
C5
P3
> >> B-34

NM8, NM8S
9.2.3 Extended rotary handle
Functions:
When the door is open, the release can be set
and the breaker will not make;
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1~3
padlocks with a diameter of 5~8mm (by customer).
Then door of the switchgear can be opened.
Front boring(fixed or plug-in circuit breaker)(mm)
45° Y
W4
φ50
L9
X
G
P4
G
18
17
2×φ4.2
(mm)
Model W1 W2 W3 W4 L7 L8 L9 H8 H9 P3 P4 R6 R7 C5 C6 G17 G18
≥175
NM8-125 30 90 76 15.25 37 70 13.3 114 148 80 39 78 38 72 36 72
≤600
NM8S-125
≥175
NM8-250 35 105 93 9.25 39 73 9 125 159 90 48 96 40.5 76 36 72
≤600
NM8S-250
NM8-400 ≥175
45 140 122 5 69 121 24.5 148 198 115 62 124 70.5 124 36 72
NM8S-400 ≤600
NM8-630 ≥175
45 140 122 5 69 121 24.5 148 198 115 62 124 70.5 124 36 72
NM8S-630 ≤600
NM8-125
NM8-250
NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8-400, 630
Extended rotary handle NM8S-400, 630
B-35 > >>

NM8, NM8S
9.2.4 Motor-driven mechanism
Functions:
Free releasing of circuit breaker;
Making and breaking the breaker manually or automatically
B
Manual operation
Turn "manual/auto" switch to "auto" position and then turn
the handle to make and break the breaker.
Automatic operation:
Turn "manual/auto" switch to "manual" position and then
push the button to make and break the breaker remotely.
The make/break operation is carried out via pulse or
self-retaining type signal control.
Operational range: 85%Un~110%Un.
NM8 circuit breaker Rated control voltage Electrical life Operational current Power consumption
100-240V AC 14VA
NM8-125 100-220V DC 10,000 operations ≤0.5 A 14W
24V DC 14W
NM8S-125 100-240V AC 14VA
NM8-250 100-220V DC 10,000 operations ≤0.5 A 14W
NM8S-250 24V DC 14W
230V AC 35VA
NM8-400
110V AC 35VA
NM8S-400
220V DC 5,000 operations ≤2 A 35W
NM8-630
110V DC 35W
NM8S-630
24V DC 35W
NM8-800
NM8S-800
230V/400V AC 3,000 operations ≤7.5 A 200W
NM8-1250
NM8S-1250
H11 3P 4P
H10 W5 W5
L10
L11
Operating
handle
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-125,250
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250

Motor
> >> B-36

NM8, NM8S
Front boring(fixed or plug-in circuit breaker) Wiring diagram
R9
P5
R8
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
C8
Power
supply
C7
ON OFF
Uc
(mm)
Model W5 H10 H11 L10 L11 R8 R9 P5 C7 C8

NM8-125 90 77 164 117 17.3 46.5 93 144 17.3 120
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8S-250 90 77 175 117 14.5 46.5 93 155 14.5 120
NM8-400, NM8S-400 107 115 250 174 19 64 128 225 19 177
NM8-630, NM8S-630 107 115 250 174 19 64 128 225 19 177
NM8-800, NM8S-800 - - - - - - - - - -
NM8-1250, NM8S-1250 - - - - - - - - - -
9.3 Locking system

Locking the breaker at status of making or breaking. Accessories Frame size
The system can be fitted with 1~3 padlocks
with a diameter of 5~8mm (by customer). NM8-125
9.4 Terminal cover
Protection degree: IP40 NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
Protect from being contacted with main circuit.
Selection of terminal cover: NM8-400，630/NM8S-400，630
Fixed breaker (front connection): Long terminal cover; Padlock NM8-800,1250/NM8S-800,1250
Fixed breaker (rear connection): Short terminal cover;
Plug-in breaker: short terminal cover;
When voltage is ≥500V, terminal cover selected for definite
connection mode
Locking system Long terminal cover Short terminal cover
B-37 > >>

NM8, NM8S
Accessories Frame size Accessories Frame size
NM8-125 NM8-125
NM8-250
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8S-125, NM8S-250
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
NM8-400/630 B
Front connection plate NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250 Plug-in base NM8S-400/630
NM8-125
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-250,125
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
Mechanical interlock
(Front connection) NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
NM8-400，630/NM8S-400，630
Plug-in base
NM8-125
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-250,125
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
DIN rail adaptor Mechanical interlock
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630
NM8-125 (new)
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8-400，630/NM8S-400，630
Long terminal cover NM8(S)-800,1250
NM8-125
NM8-250/NM8S-125/NM8S-250
NM8-400，630/NM8S-400，630
Short terminal cover NM8(S)-800,1250
10. Complementary technical information

10.1 Isolation function .
Isolation functions of all the circuit breakers as per
IEC60947/EN60947-2; Isolating position of contactors is at 0
(OFF) status. The operating handle will correctly indicate the
status of 0(OFF), only if the contactor breaks. .
Padlocks could be mounted after the contacts breaks;
Operation of isolation functions will realize following points:
■ Contacts operation correctly indicates: .
operating reliability of interior mechanism; ;
■ No residual current; ;
■ Higher impulse withstands voltage for terminals .
at the power supply side and on-load side. . a. Exceptional current-limiting capacity is able to greatly reduce
power caused by fault current so as to enhance breaking
10.2 Current-limiting . capacity of breaker to Ics=100%Icu; ;
10.2.1 Current-limiting capacity . b .The capacity has greatly released damages, which short-circuit
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its current lay to apparatus; ;
aptitude to limit short-circuits current. By occurring of c .The capacity has greatly lowered temperature-rise so as to
short-circuit, the breaker is able to limit I2t in time so as lengthen service life of the cable; ;
to protect circuits and switchgear at downstream. d. The capacity has greatly reduced power so as to lessen
The exceptional limiting capacity of NM8 series is due to the distortion of contacts and bus bar; ;
rotating double-break technique, which is characterized by very e. The capacity has greatly decreased interruptions to apparatus
rapid natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two nearby.
arc voltages in series with a very steep wave front.
> >> B-38

NM8, NM8S
10.2.2 Current-limiting curves
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed
by two curves which are the prospective current and the
actual short-circuit current.
Thermal stress (A2S), i.e. the energy dissipated by the
short-circuit current in a conductor with a resistance of 1Ω.
The table below indicates the maximum permissible
thermal stresses for cables depending on their insulation,
conductor (Cu or Al) and cross section area (CSA).
CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2S.
Pro spec tive

cur rent peak
Act ual
cur rent peak
CSA(mm2) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35

Cu K=115 2.97×10
4
8.26×10
4
2.12×10
5
4.76×10
5
1.32×106 3.40×106 8.26×106 1.62×10
7
PVC 6
4 4 5 5
Al K=76 1.30×10 3.61×10 9.26×10 2.08×10 5.78×10 6
1.48×10 6
3.16×10 7.08×107
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Cu K=131 3.86×10 1.07×10
5
2.75×10 6.18×10 1.72×10 4.39×10 1.07×10 2.10×10
Butyl 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Al K=87 1.70×10 4.73×10
4
1.21×10 2.72×10 7.57×10 1.94×10 4.73×10 9.27×10
Cu K=143 4.60×104 1.28×104 3.27×104 7.36×104 2.04×104 5.23×104 1.28×104 2.51×104
EPR 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Al K=94 1.99×10 5.52×10 1.41×10 3.18×10 8.84×10 2.26×10 5.52×10
4
1.08×10
CSA(mm2) 50 70 95 120 150 185 240

4 4 5 5
Cu K=115 3.31×10 6.48×10 1.19×10 1.90×10 2.98×106 4.53×106 7.62×106
PVC 4
Al K=76 1.44×104 2.83×10 5.21×105 8.32×105 1.30×106 1.98×106 3.33×106
4 4 4 4 4
Cu K=131 4.29×10 8.41×10 5
1.55×10 2.47×10 3.86×10 5.87×10 9.88×104
Butyl Al K=87 1.89×10
4 4
6.83×10
4
1.09×10
4
1.70×10
4
2.59×10
4
4.36×10
4
3.71×10
4 4 4 4 4 4
Cu K=143 5.11×10 1.00×10 1.85×10 2.94×10 4.60×10 7.00×10 1.18×104
EPR Al K=94 2.21×10
4
4.33×10
4
7.97×10
4
1.27×10
4
1.99×10
4
3.02×10
4
5.09×10
4
B-39 > >>

NM8, NM8S
K is quoted from GB-50054 code for design of low voltage electrical installations.
Example:
a.What is the actual current when a prospective short-circuit current of 125kA rms (peak value=275kA)
comes through the current-limiting operation circuit breaker at upstream of NM8-125R
Answer: the peak value=23kA; (for details, refer to current-limiting curves)
2
b.Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10mm adequately protected by a NM8-125S circuit breaker
6 2
Answer: the table above indicates that the permissible thermal stress is 1.32×10 A S
at the point where a NM8-125S (Icu=50kA) is installed, B
and the short-circuit current is limited within the range of 1.32×106 A2S, therefore the cable could be protected.
I2 t Curve
Ip [kA] 380V~415V AC
200
NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A)
100
80 NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
70
60
50
NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
40 NM8(S)-400(250A~400A)
30
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A)
NM8-125(40A~125A)
20
NM8-125(16A~32A)
10
7
5
4
3
3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Irms [kA]
A2s curve
2 2
I t [A s] 380V~415V AC
9
10
5
3
2
NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A)
8
10
5
3
2
NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
7
10
5 NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
3
NM8(S)-400(250A~400A)
2
6
10
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A)
5 NM8-125(40A~125A)
3
2
NM8-125(16A~32A)
5
10
2
3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Irms [kA]
> >> B-40

NM8, NM8S
2 2
I t Curve A s curve
Ip [kA] 690V AC
2
50 It 690V AC
8
10
5
40
NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A) 3
NM8(S)-800(630A~800A) 2
NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A)
7
30 10
NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
NM8(S)-630(250A~630A) 5
NM8(S)-400(250A~400A) 3 NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
2 NM8(S)-400(250A~400A)
20
6
10
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A)
5
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A) NM8-125(40A~125A)
3
NM8-125(16A~32A)
2
NM8-125(40A~125A)
10 NM8-125(16A~32A) 5
10
7
5 5
4
3
3
2
3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]
10.3 Power loss per pole
Resistance/ power
NM8-125 NM8S-125 NM8-250 NM8S-250 NM8-400 NM8S-400 NM8-630 NM8S-630 NM8-800 NM8S-800 NM8-1250 NM8S-1250
loss mΩ/W
16 7.1/1.8
20 6.2/2.5
25 4.8/3
32 3.7/3.8
40 2.6/4.2 0.85/1.4
50 2.7/6.8 0.7/1.8
63 1.7/6.7 0.7/2.8
80 1.3/8.3 0.7/4.5
100 0.85/8.5 0.5/5 1.0/10 0.5/5
125 0.71/11.1 0.5/7.8 1.0/15.6 0.5/7.8
160 0.55/14 0.36/9.2
180 0.55/17.8 0.36/11.7
200 0.55/22 0.36/14.4
225 0.55/27.8 0.28/14.2
250 0.55/34.4 0.28/17.5 0.3/18.8 0.15/9.4 0.3/18.8 0.13/8.1
315 0.28/27.8 0.15/14.9 0.28/27.8 0.13/12.9
350 0.28/34.3 0.15/18.4 0.28/34.3 0.13/15.9
400 0.24/38.4 0.15/24 0.24/38.4 0.13/20.8
500 0.2/50 0.13/32.5
630 0.13/51.6 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9
700 0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6
800 0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6
1000 0.04/40 0.04/40
1250 0.04/62.5 0.04/62.5
B-41 > >>

NM8, NM8S
10.4 Influences which altitude lay to tripping characteristics
To tripping characteristics of circuit breaker, it is no obvious influence, when the altitude does not exceed 2000m.
Once the altitude exceeds the level of 2000m, factors of dielectric stress lowering and cooled air should be
taken into consideration.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Dielectric stress (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800 B
Max. operational voltage (V) 690 550 480 420
Ratings at 40℃ (A) 1In 0.96In 0.93In 0.9In
10.5 Cascading .
Definition of Cascading .
Current-limiting technique has been adopted for cascading Application of cascading .
to install downstream circuit breaker with lower breaking Through the application of cascading, connected apparatuses
capacity (cheaper circuit breakers) at the given point of circuit, could be installed in different switchgears to realize normal
and upstream NM8(S) circuit breaker operates to limit short- operation. Therefore, cascading, in common, refers to various
circuit current. Under the operation of cascading combination of circuit breakers installed at the given point of
network, circuit breaker with lower breaking capacity which the breaking capacity is lower than prospective short-
compared with prospective short-circuit current at the given circuit current. And breaking capacity of upstream circuit
point could operate under normal short-circuit status. breakers should be equal to or higher than prospective short-
As the short-circuit current will be limited by upstream circuit current at the installed point to protect apparatus at
circuit breaker with current-limiting operation, cascading downstream. Cascading application is in conformity with
network is applicable to all the power distribution apparatus IEC60947-2 standards.
protection at downstream. .
In addition, cascading operation is not restricted to operation
of two switches in serial, but is applicable in various electric
networks, as well.
> >> B-42

NM8, NM8S
Cascading (220/230/240V)
Upstream: NM8-125~1250
Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM8 (S)-125~1250
Upstream
NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R NM8-400S
Breaking capacity
85 100 150 85 100 150 85
(kA rms)
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA rms)
DZ267 30 80 80 30 40 40
DZ47, eB, UB 30 80 80 30 40 40
NBH8 30 80 80 30 40 40
NB1(Icn=6000A) 40 100 100 40 50 50
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 50 100 100 50 65 65
DZ158-100 50 100 100 50 65 65 50
NM8-125S 100 150 100 150
NM8-125H 150 150
NM8-250S 100 150
NM8-250H 150
NM8-400S
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 150 100 150
NM8S-125H 150 150
NM8S-250S 100 150
NM8S-250H 150
NM8S-400S
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
B-43 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8-400H NM8-400R NM8-630S NM8-630H NM8-630R NM8-800S NM8-800H NM8-1250S NM8-1250H

100 150 85 100 150 65 100 65 100 B
65 65
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
> >> B-44

NM8, NM8S
Upstream: NM8S-125~1250
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158, NM8(S)-125~1250
Upstream
NM8S-125S NM8S-125H NM8S-250S NM8S-250H NM8S-400S NM8S-400H
Breaking capacity
85 100 85 100 85 100
(kA rms)
DZ267 30 80 30 40
DZ47, eB, UB 30 80 30 40
NBH8 30 80 30 40
NB1(Icn=6000A) 40 100 40 50
NB1(Icn=10000A) 50 100 50 65
DZ158-100 50 100 50 65 50 65
NM8-125S 100 100 100
NM8-125H
NM8-250S 100 100
NM8-250H
NM8-400S 100
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 100 100
NM8S-125H
NM8S-250S 100 100
NM8S-250H
NM8S-400S 100
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
B-45 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8S-400R NM8S-630S NM8S-630H NM8S-630R NM8S-800S NM8S-800H NM8S-1250S NM8S-1250H

150 85 100 150 65 100 65 100
B
65
150
150 100 150 100 100
150 150
150 100 150 100 100
150 150
150 100 150 100 100
150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
150
150 100 150 100 100
150 150
150 100 150 100 100
150 150
150 100 150 100 100
150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
> >> B-46

NM8, NM8S
Cascading (380/400/415V)
Upstream: NM8-125~1250;
Downstream: DZ47,eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM8(S)-125~1250
Upstream
NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R NM8-400S
Breaking capacity
50 100 150 50 100 150 70
(kA rms)
DZ47, eB, UB 15 20 20 15 20 20
NB1(Icn=6000A) 25 30 30 25 30 30
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 25 40 40 25 40 40
DZ158-100 25 40 40 25 40 40 25
NM8-125S 100 150 100 150 70
NM8-125H 150 150
NM8-250S 100 150 70
NM8-250H 150
NM8-400S
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 150 100 150 70
NM8S-125H 150 150
NM8S-250S 100 150 70
NM8S-250H 150
NM8S-400S
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
B-47 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8-400H NM8-400R NM8-630S NM8-630H NM8-630R NM8-800S NM8-800H NM8-1250S NM8-1250H

100 150 70 100 150 50 70 50 70 B
40 40
100 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 100 150 70 70
150
100 150 70 70
150
70 70
70 70
100 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 100 150 70 70
150
100 150 70 70
150
70 70
70 70
> >> B-48

NM8, NM8S
Upstream：NM8S-125~1250
Downstream：DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158, NM8（S）-125~1250
Upstream
NM8S-125S NM8S-125H NM8S-250S NM8S-250H NM8S-400S NM8S-400H
Breaking capacity
50 100 50 100 70 100
(kA rms)
DZ47, eB, UB 15 20 15 20
NB1(Icn=6000A) 25 30 25 30
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 25 40 25 40
DZ158 25 40 25 40 25 40
NM8-125S 100 100 100
NM8-125H 100 100
NM8-250S 100 100
NM8-250H 100
NM8-400S 100
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 100 100
NM8S-125H 100 100
NM8S-250S 100 100
NM8S-250H 100
NM8S-400S 100
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
B-49 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8S-400R NM8S-630S NM8S-630H NM8S-630R NM8S-800S NM8S-800H NM8S-1250S NM8S-1250H

150 70 100 150 50 70 50 70
B
40
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
100 150 70 70
150 70 70
70 70
70 70
70 70
70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
150 100 150 70 70
100 150 70 70
150 70 70
70 70
70 70
70 70
70 70
> >> B-50

NM8, NM8S
10.6 Protection discrimination(selectivity)
Protection discrimination is a must factor in low-voltage power distribution design so as to ensure reliability and continuity for users'
electricity utilization.
Whenever there is fault occurring in the electric network, the upstream breaker where the fault is occurring breaks.
Protection discrimination could be clarified into 3 kinds: Total protection discrimination, partial protection discrimination and no
protection discrimination(refer to fig aside):
Total protection discrimination: For all kinds of current where the faults occurred, including the overload current and nonresistance
current, breaker D2 breaks and breaker D1 keeps making status.
Partial protection discrimination: For a much lower current compared with where the fault occurred (the limit value of protection
discrimination), breaker D2 breaks and breaker D1 keeps making status (total protection discrimination).
When the fault current is lower than limit value of protection discrimination, the upstream and downstream breakers are applicable
to protection discrimination; when the fault current exceeds limit value of protection discrimination, the upstream and downstream
breakers are not applicable to protection discrimination (no protection discrimination). And both of the breakers of D1 and D2 break.
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158
Upstream NM8-125 S/H/R NM8-250 S/H/R

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ267
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
C Curves
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ47, eB, UB 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
C Curves 32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T
60 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
NBH8 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
B C Curves 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
NB1 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
B C D Curves 32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ158 80 1.0 T T T T
100 T T T
B-51 > >>

NM8, NM8S
D1
B
D2
NM8-400 S/H/R NM8-630 S/H/R NM8-800 S/H NM8-1250 S/H
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
> >> B-52

NM8, NM8S
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158
Upstream NM8S-125 S/H NM8S-250 S/H NM8S-400 S/H/R

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T

16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ267
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
C Curves
25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ47, eB, UB 25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
C Curves 32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
60 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
NBH8 20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
B C Curves 25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
NB1 25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
B C D Curves 32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ158 80 1.0 T T T T T T T T
100 T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
80 1.0 T T T T T T T T
100 T T T T T T T
125 T T T T T T T
B-53 > >>

NM8, NM8S
NM8S-630 S/H/R NM8S-800 S/H NM8S-1250 S/H
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
B
> >> B-54

NM8, NM8S
Downstream: NM8(S)-125~1250

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
16 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T

20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
NM8-125 S
50 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
63 1.0 2.0 T T T
80 1.25 T T
100 1.25 T T
125 T
16 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 3.6 3.6 3.6
NM8-125 H/R
50 0.8 1.0 2.0 3.6 3.6 3.6
63 1.0 2.0 3.6 3.6 3.6
80 3.6 3.6 3.6
100 3.6 3.6 3.6
125 3.6
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 1.25 T T T
NM8S-125 S/H 100 1.25 T T
125 2.5
100 3
160
NM8-250 S
200
250
100 3
160
NM8-250 H/R
200
250
100 1.6 2 2.5
160 2.5
NM8S-250 S/H
200
250
250
315
NM8-400 S/H/R
350
400
250
315
NM8S-400 S/H/R
350
400
250
315
NM8-630 S/H/R 350
400
500
B-55 > >>

NM8, NM8S
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250 B
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
5 T T T 3 T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 T T 5 T T T T T T T T T T T
5 T 5 T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 T T T T T T T T T
5 T T 3 T T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T T 5 T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 T 5 T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 5 T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 5 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 T T T T T T T T T T
5 T T T T T T T T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 T T
> >> B-56

NM8, NM8S
Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
250
315
350
NM8S-630 S/H/R
400
500
630
630
NM8-800 S/H 700
800
630
NM8S-800 S/H 700
800
630
700
NM8-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
630
700
NM8S-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
Downstream: NM8(S)-125~1250

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
16 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T

20 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
25 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
32 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
NM8-125 S
50 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
63 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
80 T T T T T T T
100 T T T T T T
125 T T T T T
16 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
20 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
25 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
32 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
NM8-125 H/R
50 1.2 1.2 1.2 2 36 36 T T T T
63 1.2 1.2 2 36 36 T T T T
80 2 36 36 T T T T
100 36 T T T T
125 36 T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 2 2 T T T T T T
NM8S-125 S/H 100 2 T T T T T T
125 T T T T T
B-57 > >>

NM8, NM8S
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 B
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 > >>
15 15050
15 15
15 15
15 15
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
> >> B-58

NM8, NM8S
Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
40 1.2 1.2 2 2 T T T T T T
100 2 T T T T T T
125 T T T T T
100 3 5 5 5 5
160 5 5
NM8-250 S
200
250
100 3 5 5 5 5
160 5 5
NM8-250 H/R
200
250
100 5 5 5 5 5
160 5 5 5 5 5
NM8S-250 S/H
200 5 5
250 5
250
315
NM8-400 S/H/R
350
400
250
NM8S-400 S/H/R 315
350
400
250
315
NM8-630 S/H/R 350
400
500
250
315
350
NM8S-630 S/H/R
400
500
630
630
NM8-800 S/H 700
800
630
NM8S-800 S/H 700
800
630
700
NM8-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
630
700
NM8S-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
Note:
a. The area with T indication clarifies total protection discrimination between upstream and downstream circuit breakers;
b. The area with numbers clarifies partial protection discrimination between upstream and downstream circuit breakers;
c. For partial protection discrimination, the Max. fault current values to ensure time discrimination performance are given in the
table; when fault current exceeds this value, upstream and downstream circuit breakers may operate at the same time.
B-59 > >>

NM8, NM8S
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T B
T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T
8 8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 15 15
20 20
15 15
20 20
15 15
> >> B-60

NM8, NM8S
10.7 Selection table of components for motor control or protection
400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB normal load start-up
Motor Circuit breaker Contactor Thermal relay
parameters parameters parameters parameters
Rated Rated Setting of Rated Rated
power current Model magnetic Model heating Model current
(kW) (A) protection (A) current (A) (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-12 20 NR2-25 9~13
7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-18 32 NR2-25 12~18
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-25 40 NR2-25 17~25
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-32 50 NR2-36 23~32
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-40 60 NR2-36 28~36
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-50 80 NR2-93 30~40
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-65 80 NR2-93 48~65
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-80 110 NR2-93 55~70
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC1-95 110 NR2-93 80~93
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC2-115 200 NR2-200 80~125
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC2-150 200 NR2-200 100~160
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-185 275 NR2-200 100~160
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-225 275 NR2-200 125~200
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-265 315 NR2-630 160~250
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-330 380 NR2-630 200~315
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-400 450 NR2-630 250~400
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-500 630 NR2-630 315~500
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
315 560 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
Note:
1. NM8 and NM8S breakers can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above .
2. NRE8 electronic relays and NR2 thermal relays can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above.
400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB heavy-load start-up

Rated Rated Setting of Rated Rated
power current Model magnetic Model heating Model current
(kW) (A) protection (A) current (A) (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-18 32 NR2-25 9~13
7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-25 40 NR2-25 12~18
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-32 50 NR2-25 17~25
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-40 60 NR2-36 23~32
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-50 80 NR2-36 28~36
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-65 80 NR2-93 30~40
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-80 110 NR2-93 48~65
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-95 110 NR2-93 55~70
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC2-115 200 NR2-93 80~93
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC2-150 200 NR2-200 80~125
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC2-185 275 NR2-200 100~160
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-225 275 NR2-200 100~160
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-265 315 NR2-200 125~200
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-330 380 NR2-630 160~250
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-400 450 NR2-630 200~315
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-500 630 NR2-630 250~400
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 315~500
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
Note:
B-61 > >>

NM8, NM8S
400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB star-delta start-up

Rated Rated Setting of Rated
Feedback Delta Star
power current Model magnetic Model current
contactor contactor contactor
(kW) (A) protection (A) (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-09 NC1-09 NC1-09 NR2-11.5 5.5~8 B
7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-12 NC1-12 NC1-09 NR2-11.5 7~10
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-18 NC1-18 NC1-09 NR2-25 9~13
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-25 NC1-25 NC1-12 NR2-25 12~18
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-25 NC1-25 NC1-18 NR2-25 17~25
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-32 NC1-32 NC1-18 NR2-36 23~32
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-40 NC1-40 NC1-25 NR2-36 28~36
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-50 NC1-50 NC1-32 NR2-93 30~40
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC1-65 NC1-65 NC1-32 NR2-93 37~50
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC1-80 NC1-80 NC1-40 NR2-93 48~65
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC1-95 NC1-95 NC1-50 NR2-93 63~80
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-115 NC2-115 NC2-65 NR2-93 80~93
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-150 NC2-150 NC2-80 NR2-200 80~125
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-150 NC2-150 NC2-95 NR2-200 80~125
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-185 NC2-185 NC2-115 NR2-200 100~160
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-225 NC2-225 NC2-150 NR2-200 125~200
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-330 NC2-330 NC2-185 NR2-630 200~315
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-400 NC2-400 NC2-185 NR2-630 200~315
315 560 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-400 NC2-400 NC2-225 NR2-630 250~400
Note:
3. Breaker is at the power supply side
4. In the delta connection circuit of thermal relay, the setting value is 0.58Ie;
5. The max. start-up time is 20s;
6. When Star type connection is changed into delta connection, the following connection modes of motor are recommended: L1, U1 to
V2; L2, V1 to W2; L3, W1 to U2 to lower the impulse current;
7. The interval of star type connection changing into delta connection is 0.1s.
> >> B-62

NM7
2. Type designation
N M 7－ □ □ /□ / □ □ □□□
Operation mode codes:

D for motor operation;
Z for operation by turning
the handle;
nothing for operation directly
by the handle.
Types of quadrupole circuit breakers:

4A-N pole with no over-current
release component,
N pole always on;
4B-N pole with no over-current
release component,
N pole to be closed and opened
together with the other three poles
(N pole closed first and then opened);
4C-N pole with over-current
release component,
N pole to be closed and opened
together with the other three poles
NM7 (N pole closed first and then opened)
4D-N pole with over-current
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker release component,
N pole always on.
1. General
After successively developing NM8 and NM6, our company Codes for applications: nothing for
launched another new product, the NM7 series moulded distribution; 2 for motor protection
case circuit breaker upgraded from the NM1 series, by
further taking the structural features and design style of the
NM1 series products, modifying the accessories, wiring Release (of a mechanical switching device)
mode, appearance and the like in an individualization way, mode and accessory code (see table 1)
allowing the product not only to be set by the manufacturer
before delivery but also replaced by users themselves, which Number of poles
is really an improvement, and integrating the up-to-date
design concept to make the product more people-oriented. Rated current
Certificate: KEMA, CE.
Rated operation range 10A~800A. Breaking capacity codes:
Several modes available: 3P, 4P, fixed type, C – economic type, S – standard type
plug-in type, H – relatively high type, R – current limiting type
front connection, rear connection.
The product can be installed vertically or horizontally. Frame size rated current
Isolating function is available.
This product meets the requirements in
Design serial number
IEC 60947-2.
Moulded case circuit breaker
Company code
B-63 > >>

NM7
3.1 Ambient air temperature
3.2 The upper limit for the ambient air temperature is+40℃,
lower limit -5℃, and the average temperature is not higher
than+35℃ within 24 hours. Ambient temperature
3.3 Altitude: not higher than 2000m for the installation site.
3.4 Atmospheric conditions:
When the ambient air temperature is +40℃, the relative
B
2000m
humidity of the air shall not be higher than 50%; a higher
relative humidity is allowed at a lower temperature; Altitude
for the wettest month, the maximum relative humidity
averaged shall be 90% while the lowest temperature
averaged in that month ＋25℃, and the condensation
produced due to temperature change shall be taken into
consideration.
3.5 Class of pollution: 3 No Pollution
Table 1
Accessory code Accessory installation and mode of wirings
Accessory name Compound release NM7-125 NM7-250 NM7-400, 630 NM7-800
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
No accessories 300
Alarm contact 308
Shunt release 310
Auxiliary contact 320
Under voltage release 330
Shunt release,
340
auxiliary contact
Shunt release,
350
under voltage release
Two groups of
360
auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact,
370
under voltage release
Shunt release,
318
alarm contact
Auxiliary contact,
328
alarm contact
Under voltage release,

338
alarm contact
Shunt release, auxiliary

348
contact, alarm contact
Two groups of auxiliary

368
contacts, alarm contact
Auxiliary contact, under

378
voltage release, alarm contact
Note: a. 200 for the breaker body only with the magnetic release;
300 for thermal release + magnetic release body;
000 for the breaker body with no release and inner accessory.
b. ●alarm contact; ○auxiliary contact; ■shunt release; ▲under voltage release.
> >> B-64

NM7
4. Technical data
NM7 NM7-125
Rated currentIn(A) 16,20,25,32,40,50,63,80,100,125
Rated insulation voltage Ui(V) 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 8
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 380/400/415/690
Appearance
Breaking capacity feature code S

Number of poles 3 4
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking AC380/400/415V 35 35
capacityIcu(kA) AC690V - -
Rated service short circuit breaking AC380/400/415V 17.5 17.5
capacityIcs(kA) - -
AC690V
Service life Mechanical 25000
(C-O cycle) Electric 8000
Usage category
Overall dimensions 3P(L×W×H) 155×90×74

(mm) 4P(L×W×H) 155×120×74
Isolating function ●
Front connection panel ▇
Rear connection panel ▇ *
Cage type connection terminal ▇ *
Plug-in type ▇ *
Draw-out type ▇ *
Rotary manual operating handle ▇
Motor driven operating handle ▇
Shunt, under voltage release ▇
Auxiliary, alarm contact ▇
Terminal cover ▇ *
Note: ●Standard configuration ■Selected configuration; the one with * is unconfiguration.
B-65 > >>

NM7
NM7-250
100,125,160,180,200,225,250
800
8
B
380/400/415/690
S
3 4
35 35
- -
17.5 17.5
- -
20000
2500
A
165×105×74
165×140×74
●
▇
▇ *
▇ *
▇ *
▇ *
▇
▇
▇
▇
▇ *
> >> B-66

NM7
NM7 NM7-400
Rated currentIn(A) 250,315,350,400
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 8
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 380/400/415/690
Appearance
Breaking capacity feature code S H

Number of poles 3 4 3 4
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking AC380/400/415V 50 50 65 65
capacityIcu(kA) AC690V - - 12 12
Rated service short circuit breaking AC380/400/415V 25 25 32.5 32.5
capacityIcs(kA) - - 6 6
AC690V
Service life Mechanical 4000
(C-O cycle) Electric 1000
Usage category A
Overall dimensions 3P(L×W×H) 257×150×107
(mm) 4P(L×W×H) 257×198×107
Isolating function ●
Front connection panel ●
Rear connection panel ▇ *
Cage type connection terminal ▇ *
Plug-in type ▇ *
Draw-out type
Rotary manual operating handle ▇
Motor driven operating handle ▇
Shunt, under voltage release ▇
Auxiliary, alarm contact ▇
Terminal cover ▇ *
Note: ●Standard configuration ■Selected configuration; the one with * is unconfiguration
B-67 > >>

NM7
NM7-630 NM7-800
400,500,630 500,630,700,800
800
8
800
8
B
380/400/415/690 380/400/415/690
S H S H
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
50 50 65 65 50 50 75 75
- - 15 15 - - 15 15
25 25 32.5 32.5 25 25 37.5 37.5
- - 7.5 7.5 - - 10 10
4000 2500
1000 500
A A
280×182×112 275×210×112
280×240×112 275×280×112
● ●
● ●
▇ * ▇*
▇ * ▇*
▇ *
▇*
▇ ▇
▇ ▇
▇ ▇
▇ ▇
▇ * ▇*
> >> B-68

NM7
5. Inverse-time overcurrent protection curve for the
breaker for distribution (see Fig. 1 – 10)
Fig.1 NM7-125(16A~32A) operation characteristic curve Fig.2 NM7-125(16A~32A) temperature compensation curve
10000
7200
3600 130
1200
600 120
300
Tripping time(S)
Rated current(%)
120
60 110
30
20
100
10
5
2 90
1
0.5
0.2 80
0.1
0.05
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20 Ambient temperature (℃)

Rated current times
Fig.2 NM7-125(40A~125A) operation characteristic curve Fig.4 NM7-125(40A~125A) temperature compensation curve
10000
7200
3600 130
1200
600 120
300
Tripping time(S)
Rated current(%)
120
60 110
30
20 100
10
5
2 90
1
0.5
0.2 80
0.1
0.05
0.02 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20 Ambient temperature (℃)

Rated current times
Fig.3 NM7-250 operation characteristic curve Fig.6 NM7-250 temperature compensation curve
10000
7200 130
3600
1200 120
600
Rated current(%)
300
Tripping time(S)
120 110
60
30
100
20
10
5 90
2
1
0.5 80
0.2
0.1
0.05
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.02
Ambient temperature (℃)

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
Rated current times
10000 130
7200
3600
1200 120
Rated current(%)
600
300
120 110
Tripping time(S)
60
30
20 100
10
5
2 90
1
0.5
0.2 80
0.1
0.05
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
Rated current times
B-69 > >>

NM7
10000
7200
3600 130
1200
600
300
120 B
120
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)
60 110
30
20
10 100
5
2 90
1
0.5
0.2
80
0.1
0.05
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
Rated current times
10000
7200 130
3600
1200
600 120
Tripping time(S)
Rated current(%)
300
120 110
60
20 100
10
5
2 90
1
0.5
0.2 80
0.1
0.05
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 57 8 12 20
Rated current times
6. Overall and mounting dimensions NM7-125

96
74
120(4P) 70
90(3P) 61.5
30 30 30 24.5
1 3 5 N
23
102
155
135
132
45
29
2 4 6 N
30(3P)
60(4P)
NM7-250
96
74
140(4P) 70
105(3P) 61.5
35 35 35 24.5
1 3 5 N
21
105
52
126
165
145
31
2 4 6 N
35(3P)
70(4P)
> >> B-70

NM7
NM7-400
160
198(4P) 107
106
150(3P)
98.5
52.5 48 52.5
48
1 3 5 N
150
90
225
257
194
311
50
2 4 6 N
28 44(3P)
45.5
94(4P)
NM7-630
165
112
240(4P)
182(3P)
110
103
58 58 58
52
1 3 5
160
92
210
280
245
405
50
2 4 6
50 58(3P)
116(4P)
NM7-800
169
112
280(4P) 105.5
210(3P) 95
70 70 70
41.5
1 3 5 N
243
329.5
240.5
221
275
88
67
2 4 6 N
70(3P)
140(4P)
Users shall order goods in the following way:
Product type + rated current + code of the inner accessory
(00 for no inner accessories) + application code + operation mode
+ (word description, accessory voltage, type and the like to be
described in detail).
Order Sample: 10 pcs of NM7－250S, 250A, three poles,
shunt release (AC230V), for motor protection, power operating
mechanism (DC220V), plug-in type.
10 pcs of NM7－250S/250/3310 2 D (shunt AC230V,
power operating mechanism DC220V, plug-in type).
B-71 > >>

NM1
2. Type designation
N M 1－ □ □ □ / □ □ □ □
Type of N-pole for 4-P breaker*

Application: Blank: for power
distribution;
2: for motor protection
B
Release type and accessory code
(please refer to table on page 94)
Number of poles
Operation mode: Blank: direct operation with
handle;
P: motor-driven operation;
Z: Operation with rotary handle
Code of Breaking capacity : S-standard type;
H-higher type;
R-current limiting type
Frame size rated current
MCCB code
NM1 Company code
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Note *: There are 4 types of N-pole for 4P breaker .
1. General
A: without current release components, N-Pole is always at
1.1 Certificates: KEMA, ESC, UKrSEPRO, GOST, RCC, KC; making status, not makes and breaks with other three poles;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 690V,50/60HZ, 10~1250A; B: Without current release components, N-Pole makes with the
1.3 Mounting mode: Vertical and horizontal; other three poles(N-pole first makes then breaks);
1.4 Standard: IEC/EN60947-2. C: With current release components, N-Pole makes and breaks
with other three poles(N-pole first makes then breaks);
D: With current release components, N-Pole is always at making
status, not makes and breaks with other three poles;
3. Classification
According to breaking capacity of breaker:
Standard type (S) Higher type (H)
S H
Current-limiting type (R)
> >> B-72

NM1
According to wiring mode:
Front connection Rear conection plug-in
According to operation mode:
Direct operation with handle Operation with rotary handle Motor-driven operation
According to number of poles:
2P 3P 4P
4.1 Temperature: -5℃ ~+40℃ ; the average value within 24h 4.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3 ;
shall not exceed +35℃.(please refer to coefficients on P107 4.4 Air conditions :
for temperature compensation correction); for the circuit At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the
breaker with thermo-magnetic release, +40℃ is set to be max temperature of +40℃ , higher relative humidity is
the standard temperature for ratings. For temperature not allowable under lower temperature. For example, RH could
between -5℃ ~+40℃ , please contact us for temperature be 90% at +20℃ , special measures should be taken to
compensation correction. ; occurrence of dews. .
4.2 Altitude: not exceed 2000m (Please contact with us for
reduction coefficient if altitude at the mounted site beyond
2000m). .
B-73 > >>

NM1
8. Curves (for power distribution, calibrated at 40℃)
8.1 The characteristic curve of anti-time limit and the correcting curve of temperature see fig.
Fig.1 NM1-63(10~32), NM1-125(25~32) Fig.2 NM1-63(10~32), NM1-125(25~32)

Characteristic Curve Adjustment curve of temperature
B
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)
Rated current times Ambient temperature (℃)
Fig.3 NM1-63(40~63), NM1-125(40~125) Fig.4 NM1-63(40~63), NM1-125(40~125)

Characteristic Curve Adjustment curve of temperature
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)
> >> B-80

NM1
5. Technical data
Frame size current 63 125 250 400 630 800 1250
Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40℃ 10, 16, 20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 50, 60, 63 25, 30, 32, 40, 50, 60, 63, 75, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 140, 150, 160, 175, 180, 200, 225, 250 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400 400, 450, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1250
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 500 800 800 800 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage(kV) Uimp 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
B
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60Hz 415 690 690 690 690 690 690
Arcing distance (mm) ≤50 ≤50 ≤50 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100
Breaking capacity code S H C* S H R S H R S H R S H R H R H
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 3 4 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 3
Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 220/230/240V 20 42 42 25 42 65 65 65 85 20 42 65 65 65 85 85 50 50 85 100 50 50 85 100 85 85 100 85
breaking capacity
AC 380/400/415V 15 35 35 20 25 50 50 50 65 _ 25 50 50 50 65 65 35 35 50 70 35 35 50 70 60 60 70 65
Icu (kA, rms)
AC 660/690V _ _ _ 3 3 _ 8 8 10 _ 5 _ 8 8 _ 10 10 10 12 15 12 12 15 15 20 20 20 20
Test sequence:O-t-CO
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (%Icu)
50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
Test sequence:O-t-CO-t-CO
Isolation function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Utilization class A A A A A A A
Front connection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Rear connection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Plug in type ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt release ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under-voltage release ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Note: “*” means this product is under development

The symbols O-t-Co, O-t-Co-t-Co are used for defining the sequence of operations.
O: breaking operation; t: the time interval between two successive short-circuit operations;
CO: a making operation followed, after the appropriate opening time, by a breaking operation.
B-74 > >> > >> B-75 > >> B-76

NM1
6. Release Inverse time-delay breaking operation property of the over 7. Product overview
Inverse time breaking action property of the over current current tripping of the breaker(for motor protection) at the NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
releasing of the breaker ( for power distribution) at the status status that all poles are electrified simultaneously(conforms to
that all poles are electrified simultaneously IEC60947-3) 1 MCCB (fixed type)
No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status Serial Setting Conventional Start-up
Remark 2 Plug-in type
Conventional 2h(In＞63A), No. current time status
1 1.05 Cold status
B
non-trip current Ih(In≤63A) 1 1.0In ＞2h Cold status
Conventional 2 1.2In ≤2h Right after test number 1 3 Rear connection
2h(In＞63A), Right after
2 1.30
trip current Ih(In≤63A) test no. 1 ≤4min Cold status 10≤In≤250
3 1.5In Under-voltage release
≤8min Cold status 250≤In≤630 4
4s≤t≤10s Cold status 10≤In≤250
4 7.2In
6s≤t≤20s Cold status 250≤In≤630 5 Shunt release
6 Alarm contact
7 Auxiliary contact
N-pole of 4P circuit breaker is at the right side, see table below 2
for rated current of N-pole release. Motor-driven operation mechanism
8
Frame size Rated Rated current

3
Frame size Rated Rated current
at N-pole (A) 9 Extended manual operation handle
rated current (A) current (A) rated current (A) current (A) at N-pole (A)
10 10 100 100
16 16 10 Mechanical interlock
125 100
20 20 140 100
12
25 25 11 Cage clamp terminal (Refer to P102)
150 100
30 30
63 160 100
32 32 250 12 Terminal cover
175 100 12
40 40
180 100
50 50 13 Front connection plate 4 1
200 100
60 60
225 125 5
63 63
250 125
25 25
225 225
30 30 6
250 225
32 32
125 300 225 7
40 40
400 315 225
50 50
350 225 11
60 60
400 225 13
63 63 8
400 400
75 63 450 400
80 63 630 500 400
100 63 9
630 400
125 63 630 500
800 700 500
800 500 10
Note: The rated current of N-pole can be made equal to the
other phases.
B-77 > >> > >> B-78 > >> B-79

NM1
Fig.5 NM1-250 Characteristic Curve Fig.6 NM1-250 Adjustment curve of temperature
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)

Rated current times

Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)
B-81 > >>

NM1
Fig.9 NM1-630, NM1-800 Characteristic Curve Fig.10 NM1-630, NM1-800 Adjustment curve of temperature
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)

Rated current(%)
Tripping time(S)
> >> B-82

NM1
8.2 Temperature compensation correction

NM1 series temperature compensation coefficient table (calibration at 40℃, for the calibration at other temperature standards
please contact with us)
Current Compensation coefficient

Type
range -5℃ 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃
NM1-63S, H 10~32A 1.18 1.17 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.95 0.92 0.87
NM1-63S, H 40~63A 1.16 1.16 1.15 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.82
NM1-125C, S, H, R 25~32A 1.18 1.17 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.95 0.92 0.87
NM1-125C, S, H, R 40~125A 1.16 1.16 1.15 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.82
NM1-250C, S, H, R 100~250A 1.14 1.13 1.13 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.86 0.76
NM1-400S, H, R 225~400A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-630S, H, R 400~630A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-800S,H, R 630~800A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-1250H 700~1250A 1.14 1.13 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.92 0.85 0.76
9. Wiring
Front connection(Fixed connection)
Extended connection terminals (for products 10~1250A, extended terminals are available) Connection screws
C B A
B-83 > >>

NM1
Front connection screw Front connection screw
Breaking Breaking
Frame Current Frame Current
capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross
level (A) level (A)
code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C) code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C)
S ■ C ■
10
H ■ S ■
80
16
S
H
■
■
H
R
■
■
B
S ■ C ■
20
H ■ S ■
125 100
63 S ■ H ■
25
H ■ R ■
S ■ C ■
30
H ■ S ■
125
S ■ H ■
32
H ■ R ■
S ■
40 S ■
H ■
S ■ 100 H ■
50
H ■ R ■
S ■
60 S ■
H ■
S ■ 125 H ■
63
H ■ R ■
C ■
S ■
S ■
25 140
H ■ H ■
R ■ R ■
C ■ ■
S
S ■
30 150 H ■
125 H ■
R ■ R ■
C ■
S ■
S ■
32 250 160 H ■
H ■
R ■ R ■
C ■ ■
S
S ■ 175
40 H ■
H ■
■ R ■
R
C ■ S ■
S ■ 180 ■
50 H
H ■
R ■
R ■
C ■
S ■ S ■
60 200
H ■ H ■
R ■ R ■
C ■ S ■
63 S ■ 225 H ■
H ■
R ■ R ■
C ■ S ■
S ■
75 H ■
H ■ 250
R ■ R ■
S ■ ■
225 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■
400 250 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■
300 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
> >> B-84

NM1
Front connection screw Cage clamp terminals (for products 16~630A, cage clamp
Breaking
Frame Current terminals are available)
capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross
level (A)
code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C)
S ■ ■
315 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■
400 350 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■ A ty pe B ty pe
400 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■
400 H ■
Rear connection
R ■
S ■
450 H ■
R ■
S ■ Rear connection is
630 500 H ■ applicable to 3P and
R ■ 4P products of
S ■ NM1-63~NM1-800
630 H ■
R ■
H ■
630
R ■ Plug-in connection
H ■
800 700
R ■
H ■
800
R ■
Plug-in connection is
applicable to 3P and
4Pproducts of
NM1-63~NM1-800
LINE LOAD LOAD
LOAD
LINE LINE
LOAD
LINE
OFF
LOAD
ON ON
LINE
OFF
ON
ON
OFF LINE OFF
LOAD LOAD
(2)
LOAD LINE LINE
(1) (3) (4)
Modes of down-lead (1) and (2) illustrated in the figure are

available for your wiring operation. For its breaking capacity may
be affected, mode of down-lead (3) is not recommended, before
reception of any authorized announcement from the
manufacturer; the mode of down-lead (4) is prohibited for your
wiring.
B-85 > >>

NM1
10. Overall and mounting dimensions
Fig.15a NM1-63, 125, 250 fixed connection
Barrier for Barrier for

arcing isolation arcing isolation
2×Φ d A
G
2×Φ d
A
G
A A
G
H2
B
G1
G1
G1
H4
F F
L1
L2
C
B
E
L
E
L2
C
B
E
L
22
22
H3
6×Φ d
4×φd H
H1(max)
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1
W4 W3 W W2
2P 3P 4P
(mm)
NM1-125C NM1-125H NM1-250C NM1-250H

Dimension NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-250S/1P
NM1-125S NM1-125R NM1-250S NM1-250R
C 85 85 84 84 102 102 102
E 48 48 50.5 50.5 51 50 50
F 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
G 14 14 17.5 17.5 17.5 23 23
G1 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 9 11.5 11.5
H 72 82 68 86 85 86 103
H1 90 100 86 104 109 110 127
H2 18 28 24 24 23 24 24
Overall
H3 4 4 4 4 4.5 4 4
dimensions
H4 6 6 7 7 6 5 5
L 135 135 155 155 165 165 165
L1 235 235 255 255 - 360 360
L2 117 117 136 136 144 144 144
W 76 76 90 90 105 105
W1 25 25 30 30 - 35 35
W2 - 102.5 - 120 - - 140
W3 - - - 65 - - 75
W4 - - - - 35 - -
A 25 25 30 30 28 35 35
Mounting
B 117 117 130.5 130.5 109 126 126
dimensions Φd 4.5 4.5 4.5× 6 4.5× 6 5 5 5
> >> B-86

NM1
Overall and mounting dimensions of NM1-400, 630, 800, 1250(Fixed type)
Barrier for Barrier for

A arcing isolation A A1 arcing isolation
G
G1
H5
H4
F F H3
C1
L1
L2
E
E
C
B
L
22 22
4×φd 6×φd H2
H
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 H1(max)
W W2
3P 4P
(mm)
NM1-400S NM1-630S
Dimension NM1-400H NM1-630H NM1-800H/R NM1-1250H
NM1-400R NM1-630R
C 127.5 134.5 136 265.5

C1 173.5 184.5 204 345.5
E 88.5 89 81 97
F 65 65.5 66 78
G 30.5 44 45 -
G1 11 13.5 12.5 -
H 107 112 116 141
H1 162 164.5 168 202
Overall
H2 40 42 41.5 58
dimensions
H3 6.5 7 4.5 16.5
H4 5 3.5 5 2
H5 5 4.5 8 4.5
L 257 270.5 280 406*
L1 457 470 485 715
L2 224 234 243 -
W 150 182 210 210
W1 48 58 70 70
W2 197.5 240 280 -
A 44 58 70 70
Mounting
A1 50 - - -
dimensions
B 194 200 243 375
φd 7 7 7 10
*Note: Lengh of NM1-1250H with the connection board, is 545mm
B-87 > >>

NM1
Overall and mounting dimensions of Overall and mounting dimensions of

NM1-63, 125, 250(rear connection) NM1-400, 630, 800(rear connection)
M M
φd1 φd1
H8
H8
B
H7
H7
H7
H7
H6
H6
H6
H6
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1
3P 4P
3P 4P
Boring diagram of rear connection
×φ
×φ
×φ
×φ
3P 4P
Plug-in type
H11
H10
H9 L6 L6
K
M1
K 4×φd 2 6×φd 2
H12 W2
L2
L5
L5
L4
L4
K1
Mounting plate
3P mounting diagram 3P boring diagram of mounting plate 4P boring diagram of mounting plate
> >> B-88

NM1
(mm)
NM1-125S NM1-250S NM1-400S NM1-630S

NM1-63S NM1-800H
Dimension NM1-125H NM1-250H NM1-400H NM1-630H
NM1-63H NM1-800R
NM1-125R NM1-250R NM1-400R NM1-630R
A 25 30 35 44 58 70
φd 4.5 4.5×6 5.5 7 7 7
φd1 - - - φ12 φ16 φ16
φd2 6 8 8 9 9 12
φD 8 10 12 33 37 37
φD1 8 10 12 33 37 37
H6 S:32 / H:23 63.5 67.5 39 45 64
H7 S:47 / H:38 96.5 118.5 74 79 64
H8 - - - 18 20 20
Dimensions
H9 28 50 50 60 60 87
of rear
H10 38 67.5 71.5 88 92 143.7
connection
H11 44.5 81 84.5 111 110 158.7
and plug-in
H12 10 18 18 21.5 21 27
type
L2 117 136 144 224 234 243
L3 117 130.5 126 194 200 243
L4 97 93 93 163 165 173
L5 138 180 190 285 302 305
L6 80/105* 95/125* 110/140* 150/198* 180/238* 215/285*
M M6 M8 M10 - - -
K 50 60 70 60 100 90
K1 25 30 35 66 66 95
J 60 58 54 130.4 124 146
M1 M5 M8 M8 M10 M12 M12
W1 25 30 35 48 58 70
W2 12.5 15 17.5 24 29 35
Note: With "*" stands for dimension of 4P circuit breaker
11. Accessories
Inner accessories
Auxiliary contact Shunt release Alarm contact Under-voltage release

Left Right
Handle
B-89 > >>

NM1
Accessory code Mounting and wiring mode
NM1-63S,H
NM1-63S NM1-125C,S,H,R
Accessory Magnetic Compound NM1-125C,S,H,R NM1-250S,H,R NM1-630S,H,R NM1-800H, R NM1-1250H
only release release NM1-250C,S,H,R NM1-400S,H,R
2P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P
No accessory 200 300

B
Alarm contact 208 308
Shunt release 210 310
Auxiliary contact 220 320
Under-voltage release 230 330
Shunt release,
240 340
auxiliary contact
Shunt release,
250 350
under-voltage release
Two groups of
260 360
auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact,
270 370
under-voltage release
Shunt release,
218 318
alarm contact
Auxiliary
228 328
alarm contact
Under-voltage release,
238 338
alarm contact
Shunt release, auxiliary
248 348
alarm contact
Two groups auxiliary contact
268 368
of auxiliary alarm contact
278 378
auxiliary alarm contact
> >> B-90

NM1
11.1 Under-voltage release
a. Un=70~35% Us, reliable operation
b. Un=<35% Us, prevent breaker from making
c. Un=>85% Us, guarantee the breaker making
The rated voltage of the under-voltage release is 50Hz,
230V and 400V.
Code of under-voltage release
code A2 A4 D1 D2
voltage AC 230V AC 400V DC 110V DC 220V
rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz - -
11.2 Shunt release

The rated control voltage of shunt release is 50Hz,
230V and 400V.
Un=70%~110% Us, reliable operation
Code of shunt release
code A1 A2 A4 D1 D2 D3
AC 110/
voltage AC 230V AC 400V DC 110V DC 220V DC 24V
127V
rated 50Hz/ 50Hz/
50Hz - - -
frequency 60Hz 60Hz
Note: when voltage is DC 24V, rated current should be up to 5A±10%
Wiring diagram of shunt release
11.3 Auxiliary contact and alarm contact
Rated parameter of auxiliary contact
Frame size Conventional heating current Ith (A) Rated current Ie (A) at AC 400 V Rated current Ie (A) at DC 220 V
Inm≤225A 3 0.26 0.14

Inm≥400A 6 3 0.2
B-91 > >>

NM1
a. Auxiliary contact
F12
Circuit breaker is at “breaking” status F11
F14
Circuit breaker is at “making” status

F12
F11
B
F14
b. Alarm contact
When circuit breaker normally makes and breaks, alarm contact
doesn't operate. After free release (or release due to failure)
alarm contact operate; and after the circuit breaker operates
again,alarm contact returns to the original status.
Circuit breaker is at "breaking" or B12

“making" status B11
B14
Circuit breaker is at free release B12

B11
(or alarming) status
B14
Wiring diagram of NM1 auxiliary contact

Power
Power supply
supply
Making
circuit
Breaking
circuit
External accessories
11.4 Motor-driven operation mechanism
Items Model NM1-63 NM1-125, NM1-250, NM1-400, NM1-630, NM1-800, NM1-1250
Structure form Electromagnet Motor

Code of AC/DC voltage A1/D1, A2/D2, A4, D3
Note: A1 AC 110V, A2 AC 230V, A4 AC 400V, D1 DC 110V, D2 DC 220V, D3 DC 24V,
> >> B-92

NM1
Making and breaking diagram of
motor-driven operation mechanism(AC/DC)
K2
M
1
K1 Y
X M
K2 K2 M
S3 Y
K1 K1
Making S1 2 S3
X 1 2 3 4
T S1 Making
S2 3
T S2 Breaking
Breaking
U~ Without self-locking relay
With self-locking relay Specification AC 50Hz 230V or 400V

Specification AC 50Hz 230V or 400V
Rotary manual operation mechanism
Making/breaking wiring diagram of manual operation mechanism

Circuit breaker H
Y 20
24
D
MIN=50mm
Mounting dimensions of manual operation mechanism
φ61
53
φ36
45°
chain
2×φ5.5
≥200
Boring diagram of
handle mounting
(mm)
NM1-800H
Model NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630
NM1-800R
Mounting
49 51 54 88 89 96
size H
Y value of the
handle related
0 0 0 0 0 0
to the center
of the breaker
B-93 > >>

NM1
Mounting and boring dimensions
A C A
B
B
F
8-φd
D
A breaker E B breaker
L
(mm)
Model A B C D E F L Φd
NM1-63 25 117 80 30 80 135 182 4.5
NM1-125 30 130.5 90 30 90 155 210 4.5×6*
NM1-250 35 126 100 30 100 165 240 5.5
NM1-400 44 194 136 30 40 257 330 7
NM1-630 58 200 172 48 62 270 412 7
NM1-800 70 243 167 28 40 280 448 7
Note: :
1. * stands for length of boring. .
2. Install the breaker on the frame first, then install the
mechanical interlock on the breaker. .
12. Complementary Technical Information

12.1 The customized products of NM1-225, of which the
capacity can be enriched to 250A is available. .
12.2 NM1-1250 products are equipped with connection plate For NM1-400~1250
when they are sold; if you need connection plate for

products of other model, the connection plate should be
ordered separately. . For NM1-63~250
12.3 Only H type breaker is applicable to manufacture NM1
series switch disconnector. .
12.4 Terminal covers of the whole series NM1 products are
available, and the protection degree can be up to IP40 .
after the breaker is equipped with terminal cover. .
.
12.5 Safe distance between other electric apparatuses for
mounting. . (mm)
Type NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630 NM1-800 NM1-1250

Distance(min)
Line side 50 50 50 100 100 100 100
Load side 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Right side 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Left side 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
> >> B-94

NM1
12.6 Tightening torque table
Wire size(copper) Rated current Tightening torque(N·m)

AWG/MCM mm
2
(A) Front connection plate Boxing terminal
16-6 1.5-16 10≤In≤63 5 3
4-3 25-35 63<In≤100 10 8
2-4/0 50-95 100<In≤225 14 10
300-500 120-240 225<In≤400 18 16
250×2 150×2 400<In≤500 22 18
350×2 185×2 500<In≤630 26 20
500×2 240×2 630<In≤800 28 -
350×4 185×4 800<In≤1250 30 -
12.7 Technical Data of NM1 series
Icu/Ics(kA)
Frame Number
Model Ui (V)
current (A) of poles 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 660V 690V
NM1-63S 3 500 20/10 15/7.5 -

63
NM1-63H 3/4 500 42/21 35/17.5 -
NM1-125C 3 800 25/12.5 20/10 3/1.5
NM1-125S 3 800 42/21 25/12.5 3/1.5
125 2 800 65/32.5 50/25 -

NM1-125H
3/4 800 65/32.5 50/25 8/4
NM1-125R 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 10/5
1 800 20/10 - -
NM1-250S
3 800 42/21 25/12.5 5/2.5
250 2 800 65/32.5 50/25 -
NM1-250H
3/4 800 65/32.5 50/25 8/4
NM1-250R 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 10/5
NM1-400S 3/4 800 50/25 35/17.5 10/5
400 NM1-400H 3 800 85/42.5 50/25 12/6
NM1-400R 3 800 100/50 70/35 15/7.5
NM1-630S 3/4 800 50/25 35/17.5 12/6
630 NM1-630H 3 800 85/42.5 50/25 15/7.5
NM1-630R 3 800 100/50 70/35 20/10
NM1-800H 3/4 800 85/42.5 60/30 20/10
800
NM1-800R 3 800 100/50 70/35 20/10
1250 NM1-1250H 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 20/10
B-95 > >>

NM1
Icu/Icm(kA)
Frame Number
Model Ui (V)
current (A) of poles 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 660V 690V
NM1-63S 3 500 20/40 15/30 -

63 NM1-63H 3/4 500 42/88.2 35/73.5 -
NM1-125C 3 800 25/52.5 20/40 - B
NM1-125S 3 800 42/88.2 25/52.5 -
125 2 800 65/43 50/105 -
NM1-125H
3/4 800 65/43 50/105 -
NM1-125R 3 800 85/187 65/143 -
1 800 20/40 - -
NM1-250S
3 800 42/88.2 25/52.5 -
250 2 800 65/43 50/105 -

NM1-250H
3/4 800 65/43 50/105 -
NM1-250R 3 800 85/187 65/143 -
NM1-400S 3/4 800 50/105 35/73.5 -
400 NM1-400H 3 800 85/187 50/105 -
NM1-400R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
NM1-630S 3/4 800 50/105 35/73.5 -
630 NM1-630H 3 800 85/187 50/105 -
NM1-630R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
NM1-800H 3/4 800 85/187 60/132 -
800
NM1-800R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
1250 NM1-1250H 3 800 85/187 65/143
Note: Parameters in black are only for your reference.
> >> B-96

NM1
Accessories
NM1-63S/H NM1-63S/H
NM1-100S/H/R NM1-100S/H/R
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-400S
NM1-400S 3P
NM1-400H/R
NM1-400H/R
NM1-630S/H
NM1-800H/R/630R NM1-630S/H
NM1-1250H NM1-630R
NM1-63S/H NM1-800H
Alarm contact NM1-800R
NM1-100S/H/R
NM1-1250H
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-63S/H
NM1-400S 3P
NM1-100S/R
NM1-400H/R
NM1-100H
NM1-630S/H
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-630R NM1-400S
NM1-800H NM1-400H/R
Shunt release
NM1-800R NM1-630H/R
NM1-1250H NM1-630S
NM1-800H
NM1-63S/H Manual operation
NM1-800R
NM1-100S/H/R mechanism
NM1-225S/H/R NM1-1250H
NM1-400S 3P NM1-63S/H
NM1-400H/R NM1-100S
NM1-630S/H NM1-100H/R
NM1-630R NM1-225S
NM1-800H NM1-225H/R
Shunt release NM1-800R NM1-400S
NM1-1250H NM1-400H/R
NM1-63S/H
NM1-630S/H
NM1-100S/H/R
NM1-800H/R/630R
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-1250H
NM1-400S
NM1-63S/H
NM1-400H/R
NM1-100S
NM1-630S/H
NM1-100H/R
NM1-630R
NM1-225S
NM1-800H Motor
NM1-225H/R
NM1-800R
NM1-400S
Auxiliary contact (Left) NM1-1250H
NM1-400H/R
NM1-63S/H NM1-630S/H
NM1-100S/H/R NM1-800H/R/630R
NM1-225S/H/R NM1-1250H
NM1-400S
NM1-400H/R
NM1-630S/H
NM1-630R
NM1-800H
NM1-800R
Auxiliary contact (Right)
NM1-1250H
B-97 > >>

NM1
NM1-63S NM1-100
NM1-63H NM1-225
NM1-100S/R NM1-400 B
NM1-100H NM1-630
NM1-225S/R NM1-800
Cage clamp terminal NM1-1250
NM1-225H
NM1-63
NM1-400S
NM1-100
NM1-400H/R 3P
NM1-225
NM1-630S
NM1-400
NM1-630H
NM1-630S/H
NM1-630R
Front connection plate NM1-800/630R
Plug-in base NM1-800H
NM1-800R NM1-63S
NM1-63H
NM1-63S
NM1-63R
NM1-63H
NM1-100S
NM1-100S/R
NM1-100H NM1-100H
NM1-225S/R 3P NM1-100R
NM1-225H NM1-225S
NM1-400S/3P NM1-225H
NM1-400H/R NM1-225R
NM1-630S NM1-400S
NM1-630H
NM1-400H
NM1-630R
Rear connection plate NM1-400R
NM1-800H/R
Terminal cover NM1-630S
NM1-63S/H
NM1-630H
NM1-100S/H/R
NM1-630R
NM1-225S/H/R
NM1-400S/H/R
Mechanical interlock NM1-630S/H
> >> B-98

NM1
12.8 Cascading
12.8.1 Cascading (220/230/240V)
Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM1-63~1250
Upstream
NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-125S NM1-125H NM1-125R NM1-250S NM1-250H
Breaking capacity
20 42 25 50 65 25 50
(kA RMS)
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA RMS)
DZ267 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
DZ47, eB, UB 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
NBH8 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
NB1(Icn=6000A) 20 42 25 35 50 25 35
NB1(Icn=10000A) 20 42 25 40 50 25 35
DZ158 25 40 50 25 40
NM1-63S 42 25 50 65 25 50
NM1-63H 65
NM1-125S 50 65 50
NM1-125H 65
NM1-250S 50
NM1-250H
NM1-400S
NM1-400H
NM1-630S
NM1-630H
NM1-800H
NM1-1250H
12.8.2 Cascading (380/400/415V)

Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM1-63~1250
Upstream
NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-125S NM1-125H NM1-125R NM1-250S NM1-250H
Breaking capacity
15 35 25 50 65 25 50
(kA RMS)
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA RMS)
DZ47, eB, UB 10 15 10 15 15 10 15
NB1(Icn=6000A) 15 20 15 20 20 15 20
NB1(Icn=10000A) 15 20 20 25 25 20 25
DZ158 20 25 35 20 25
NM1-63S 35 25 50 65 25 50
NM1-63H 65
NM1-125S 50 65 50
NM1-125H 65
NM1-250S 50
NM1-250H
NM1-400S
NM1-400H
NM1-630S
NM1-630H
NM1-800H
NM1-1250H
B-99 > >>

NM1
NM1-250R NM1-400S NM1-400H NM1-400R NM1-630S NM1-630H NM1-630R NM1-800H NM1-800R NM1-1250H
65 35 50 70 35 50 70 60 70 65 B
30
30
30
35
40
50 30 40 50
65
65
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
50 70 50 70 60 70 65
70 70 70
50 70
70
70
NM1-250R NM1-400S NM1-400H NM1-400R NM1-630S NM1-630H NM1-630R NM1-800H NM1-800R NM1-1250H
65 35 50 70 35 50 70 60 70 65
15
20
25
35 20 25 35
65
65
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
50 70 50 70 60 70 65
70 70 70
50 70
70
70
> >> B-100

NM8L, NM8SL
NM8L and NM8SL
Series Residual Current
1. Scope of application
NM8L or NM8SL residual current operated circuit breaker
is made of NM8 or NM8S combined with residual current
protection module, NM8Land NM8SL series residual
current operated circuit breakers ,mainly apply to the
circuits with alternating current of 50Hz, rated voltage of
400V and rated current up to 630A, and their main
function is to offer indirect contact protection for
personal electric shock and prevent fire caused by ground
fault current.it can also protect circuits from overload,
short circuit and under-voltage, and can be used for non-
frequent switch of circuits. They are in accordance with
the standards of IEC 60947-2.
2. Normal service and installation conditions
2.1 The altitude of the site of installation does not exceed

2000 m.
2.2 Foreign field of the installation site for residual current
operated circuit breaker should not exceed five times of
earth magnetic field in any direction.
2.3 Operating value of Electronic release will not be
affected by temperature variation; however, the maximum
permissible current of residual current operated circuit
breaker is related to ambient temperature.
NM8SL-100、250 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃

In：250A 250 250 250 240 230 220 210
Fixed value
Maximum value of Ir 250 250 250 220 210 195 175
NM8SL-630 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
In：630A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
Fixed value
Maximum value of Ir 630 584 558 526 502 468 444
2.4 Humidity: Relative humidity of atmosphere doesn’t exceed 50% at ambient temperature of +40℃. Higher relative
humidity may be permitted at lower temperature, and average maximum relative humidity for the wettest month can reach
90% ,at the same time, the average lowest temperature is +25℃ , and condensation produced on the surface of products
due to temperature change shall be taken into consideration.
2.5Pollution degree: pollution degree of residual current operated circuit breaker is Grade Ⅲ.
B-101 > >>

NM8L, NM8SL
3. Main technical parameters and configuration
Table 1
Type NM8L-100S NM8L-250S NM8L-630S
B
Appearance
Number of poles 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P

Rated current (A) ln 16,20,25,32,40,50,63,80,100 100,125,160,1 80,200,225,250 250,315,350,400,500
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue 400 400 400
Rated ultimate short-circuit Icu AC50Hz 50 50 70
breaking capacity (kA) 400V
Rated service short-circuit Ics AC50Hz 50 50 70
Rated residual making and 12.5 12.5 17.5
breaking capacity I△m is 25%Icu.
Isolation function ● ● ●
Life expectancy With load/No load/Total 3000/17000/20000 2000/14000/16000 2000/8000/10000
Protection
Types of release Thermo-magnetic type Thermo-magnetic type Thermo-magnetic type
Overload protection ● ● ●
Short circuit protection ● ● ●
Earth-fault protection ● ● ●
Residual operating current X1：0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5； X1：0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5；
(the fourth gear being adjustable) I△n(A) X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1
Break-time (the fourth

gear being adjustable) Total break-time (s) t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1
Installation and connection

Fixed/front connection plate(internal) ● ● ●
Fixed/rear connection plate (internal) ■ ■ ■
Indicating auxiliary devices (auxiliary switch) ■ ■ ■
Control auxiliary devices
Motor operating mechanism ■ ■ ■
Standard rotary operating handles ■ ■ ■
Extended rotary operating handles ■ ■ ■
Installation and connection accessories ■
Cage clamp terminals ■ ■ ■
DIN rail adapter ■ ■ —
Terminal shield ■ ■ ■
Inter-phase isolation board ● ● ●
Dimension Lx H x D(mm) 3P/4P 90×205×103/120×205×103 105×232×126/140×232×126 140×355×168/185×355×168
3P/4P Weight (Kg) 2/3.5 2.6/4 9.5/11.5
* with■ inside table 1 means you can configure ; ● means standard configuration.
* Accessories can be used interchangeably with NM8 series MCCB.
> >> B-102

NM8L, NM8SL
Table 2
Type NM8SL-100S NM8SL-250S NM8SL-630S
Appearance
Number of poles 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P

Rated current (A) ln 40,50,63,80,100 125,160,180,200,225,250 250,315,350,400,500,630
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue 400 400 400
Rated ultimate short-circuit Icu AC50Hz 50 50 70
Rated service short-circuit Ics AC50Hz 50 50 70
Rated residual making and 12.5 12.5 17.5
breaking capacity I△m is 25%Icu.
Isolation function ● ● ●
Life expectancy with load No-load Amount 1500/8500/10000 1500/8500/10000 2000/8000/10000
Protection
Types of release Electronic type Electronic type Electronic type
Overload protection ● ● ●
Short circuit protection ● ● ●
Earth-fault protection ● ● ●
Residual operating current X1：0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5； X1：0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5；
I△n(A) X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 X2：0.1/0.3/0.5/1
(the fourth gear being adjustable)
Break-time (the fourth
t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1 t1：0.1/0.3/0.5/1
gear being adjustable) Total break-time (s)
Fixed/front connection plate(internal) ■ ■ ■
Fixed/rear connection plate (internal) ■ ■ ■
Indicating auxiliary devices (auxiliary switch) ■ ■ ■
Control auxiliary devices
Motor operating mechanism ■ ■ ■
Standard rotary operating handles ■ ■ ■
Extended rotary operating handles ■ ■ ■
Installation and connection accessories
Cage clamp terminals ■ ■ ■
DIN rail adapter ■ ■ —
Terminal shield ■ ■ ■
Inter-phase isolation board ● ● ●
Dimension Lx H x D(mm) 3P/4P 10 5× 23 2× 12 6/140× 23 2× 12 6 105×232×126/140×232×126 140×355×168/185×355×168
3P/4P Weight (Kg) 2.6/4 2.6/4 10.5/12.5
* with■ inside table 2 means you can configure ; ● means standard configuration.
* Accessories can be used interchangeably with NM8 series MCCB.
B-103 > >>

NM8L, NM8SL
4. Others
4.1 Features
4.1.1 They adopt modular design, and users can install and maintain it by themselves, which will not affect characteristics of
circuit breaker.
4.1.2 With power indicating function;
4.1.3 Residual operated current and residual current break-time is adjustable, which offers convenience for users’ selecting.
4.1.4 They have residual current operated indicating button and reset button, thus users can quickly judge the operation B
reasons of residual current operating circuit breaker. What’s more, users cannot close residual current operating circuit
breaker before they remove current leakage fault (not pressing reset button).
4.1.5 When residual current operated circuit breaker provided with auxiliary contact, It can provide remote indication
function when there is current leakage fault.
4.1.6 High breaking capacity without arcover;
4.2 Being provided with isolation function and reliable contact indication
4.2.1 Isolation position is located at the location of “0”(OFF).
4.2.2 Only by completely opening of contact can operating handle indicate the position of “0”(OFF)
4.2.3 Users can install padlock only in opening status;
4.2.4 Rotary handles will not change the reliability of contact indication;
4.2.5 Isolation function should guarantee the reliability of contact indication mechanism, no residual current, and the source
side terminal should withstand higher impulse voltage.
4.2.6 Symbol for isolation function
5. Configurations and Installation Dimension
5.1 Configuration and Dimension
N 1 3 5
R
D9/2
D9/2
X D9
X X
D9
D3
D5
D10
D10
D7
D1
D8
D6
D4
D2
T R T R
2 4 6 N 2 4 6
。。
Short terminal
。。
shield 。
。
H1 Long terminal L1
Y L1 Y
H2 shield
L2 L3
H3 Inter-phase
isolation board
3P 4P
Overall dimension
Type
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 H1 H2 H3 L1 L2 L3 D10
NM8L-100 305 185 270 167.5 225 145 205 135 112 63 79 103 45 90 120 177
NM8SL-100 NM8(S)L-250 432 253.5 396 235.5 263 169 232 153.5 125 73 89 126 52.5 105 140 200
NM8(S)L-630 574 337 580 340 385 242.5 355 227.5 200 95 113 168 70 140 185 300
> >> B-104

NM8L, NM8SL
5.2 Connection Dimension (See Figure)
H5
H4
N 1 3 5
R
D11
X X
D12
D13
T R
N 2 4 6
K K K
Connection Dimension
Type
D11 D12 D13 H4 H5 K
NM8L-100 63 126 191 19 225 30
NM8SL-100 NM8(S)L-250 70 140 215 21.5 263 35
NM8(S)L-630 113.5 227 327 26 44 45
5.3 Mounting Dimension
Installed on guide rail Installed on base plate
L5 3P 4P
K1 K2
L4
H6
K 3×φd 6×φd K
H7
X
H8
G2
G22
H9
G1
G21
Mounting dimension
Type
L4 L5(3P/4P) H6 H7 H8 H9 φ
NM8L-100 15 30/60 ≤32 56 112 177 6
NM8SL-100
17.5 35/70 ≤32 62.5 125 200 6
NM8(S)L-250
NM8(S)L-630 22.5 45/90 ≤32 100 200 300 6.5
Mounting dimension
Type
K K1 K2 G1 G2 G21 G22 d
NM8L-100 15 30 60 56 112 121 177 6
NM8SL-100
17.5 35 70 62.5 125 137.5 200 6
NM8(S)L-250
NM8(S)L-630 22.5 45 90 100 200 200 300 6.5
B-105 > >>

NM8L, NM8SL
5.4 Front panel cut out
Fixed or plug-in residual current protection circuit breakers
Mode 1 Mode 2
L7 L11
L10
X
L6
B
X
D15
D19
D17
D18
D14
Mode 1 Mode 2
D16
H10
H11 Y L8
Y
L9
Dimension of front panel cut out

Type
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 H10 H11 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11(3P/4P)
NM8L-100 26 68 20 84 115 165 73 80 13 26 13 26 46.5 93/123
NM8SL-100、NM8(S)L-250 33 78 20 96 132 188 83 90 14.5 29 14.5 29 54 108/143
NM8(S)L-630 41.5 116 29 146.5 202 294 109 114 26.5 53 24 48 71.5 143/188
5.5 Connection
Dimension of connecting screws： φ
φ
φ
NM8L-100：M6
NM8SL-100、NM8SL-250、NM8L-250：M8
D
D
D
NM8(S)L-630：M10
L
L
L
Copper cable connection strap Aluminum cable connection strap Copper bar
NM8(S)L-250
NM8L-100 NM8(S)L-630
NM8SL-100
Pole distance (mm) 30 35 45
L(mm) ≤15 ≤25 ≤32
D(mm) ≤7 ≤10 ≤16
φ(mm) ＞6 ＞8 ＞10
To Be Indicated by Users While Ordering:

Name and type, rated current, rated residual operating current, break- time, types of protection, number of poles and
quantity of residual current operated circuit breakers , and types and rated value of internal and external accessories . For
example, ordering NM8L thermo-magnetic frame size rated current of 250A, standard type breaking capacity, 4 poles and N-
pole with protection, on-off with the other three poles; motor protection type, rated residual operating current (A):
0.1~0.3~0.5~1; rated residual current break-time time (s) : 0.1~0.3~0.5~1;equipped with rotary handle, and 100 sets of
residual current operated circuit breakers provided with AC220V under voltage releases and auxiliary contact.
Order code of residual current operated circuit breakers: NM8L-250S/250/4C/M, RCD24, 100 sets.
Order code of residual current operated circuit breakers with accessories: NM8L-250S/BM23 100 sets/RH22 100 sets/UM5
100 sets/AX 100 sets
Quick selection table for NM8(S) L series residual current operated circuit breakers
> >> B-106

NM8L, NM8SL
Quick selection table for NM8(S)L series

residual current operated circuit breaker
Feature code of
breaking capacity Number of poles Usage
S: Standard 3 means 3 poles M: Motor protection

4 means 4 poles No code: Power
4A : Without current release components, N-pole is always at making status; distribution
4B :Without current release components, N-pole make with other three poles (N- protection
pole first makes then breaks).
4C : With current release components, N-pole makes and breaks with other three
poles ,N-pole first makes then breaks; N-pole operating current is 1.0In.
4D With current release components, N-pole is always at making status; operating
current is 1.0In;
NM8L - 250 S / 250 / 4C / M RCD24
Product type Frame Rated current Rated residual operating current,

and release type size (A) Combined type of break time
3P RCD11 RCD12
NM8L: Thermo- 100A 16,20 NM8L-100
4P RCD13 RCD14
magnetic type 250A 32,40
Residual current NM8L-250 3P RCD21 RCD22
operating circuit 630A 50,63 NM8SL-250,100 4P RCD23 RCD24
breakers 80,100 3P RCD31
NM8SL: Electronic NM8(S)L-630
125,160 4P RCD32
type
Residual current 180,200 Remark: Rated residual operating current (A)
operating circuit X1：0.05~0.1~0.2~0.5
225,250
breakers X2：0.1~0.3~0.5~1
315,350 Break- time(s) of rated residual operating current
400,500 t1：0.1~0.3~0.5~1
RCD11、RCD13、RCD21、RCD23：X1，t1
630
RCD12、RCD14、RCD24、RCD31、RCD32：X2，t1
Note:
for thermo-
magnetic
type,the rated
operational
current is up to
500A
B-107 > >>

NM8L, NM8SL
Quick selection table for accessories of NM8(S) L series

residual current operated circuit breakers
B
NM8L-250S / BM23 / RH22 / UM5 / AX
Connection mode Control mechanism Type of internal accessories
FM13,FM14: front connection plate (NM8L- RH11,RH14:Economical Shunt release Under- voltage Auxiliary Alarm
SM6: system
100) extended rotary handle release contact AX
AC220V/230V AL
FM23,FM24: front connection plate(NM8(S)L- (NM8L-100) SQ6: UM6: Used for Used for
RH21,RH24:Economical AC380V/400V AC220V/230V the whole the whole
250,NM8SL-
(NM8L-100) series
100) extended rotary handle SM5: UQ6: series
FM33,FM34: front connection plate (NM8(S)L- (NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100) AC220V/230V AC380V/400V
SQ5:
630) Rh31:Economical extended AC380V/400V (NM8L-100)
BM13,BM14: Rear connection plate (NM8L- rotary handle (NM8(S)L-250, UM5:
630)
100) (NM8(S)L-630) AC220V/230V
BM23,BM24: Rear connection plate(NM8(S)L- Rh12:Standard rotary handle UQ5:
250,NM8SL-100) (NM8L-100) AC380V/400V
BM33,BM34: Rear connection plate (NM8(S)L- Rh22:Standard rotary handle (NM8(S)L-250,
630) (NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100) 630;
DIN13,DIN14:DIN Rail adaptor (NM8L-100) Rh32:Standard rotary handle
DIN23,DIN24:DIN Rail adaptor (NM8(S)L-630)
(NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100) Rh13:extended rotary handle
CT13,CT14: Cage connection terminal (NM8L- (NM8L-100)
100) Rh23:extended rotary handle
CT23,CT24: Cage connection terminal (NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100)
(NM8(S)L- Rh33:extended rotary handle
250,NM8SL-100) (NM8(S)L-630)
CT33,CT34,CT63,CT64,CT73,CT74: Cage M011,M012,M013:Electric
connection terminal operating mechanism
(NM8(S)L-630) (NM8L-100))
LT13,LT14: Long terminal shield (NM8L-100) M021,M022,M023:Electric
LT23,LT24: Long terminal shield (NM8(S)L- operating mechanism
250,NM8SL-100) (NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100)
LT33,LT23: Long terminal shield (NM8(S)L-630) M031,M032,M033:Electric
ST13,ST14:Short terminal shiel (NM8L-100) operating mechanism
ST23,ST24:Short terminal shiel (NM8(S)L- (NM8(S)L-630)
250,NM8SL-100) Pd1:Locking system
ST33,ST23:Short terminal shiel (NM8(S)L-630) (NM8L-100)
Pd2:Locking system
(NM8(S)L-250,NM8SL-100)
Pd3:Locking system
(NM8(S)L-630)
Note: 1. Please contact the sales department or technical department when your requirements are beyond the specification or sample
technical requirements, which will be treated as a special order.
2. Selection, installation and application should be in accordance with instructions of the products or requirements of relevant
national standards.
> >> B-108

Air Circuit Breaker
ACB
NA8
Page C-01
NA8G
Page C-37
NA1
Page C-71
Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
2. Type designation
N A 8 - □/ □
Number of poles in the breaker

(pole 3 may be omitted)
Shell grade rated current of the breaker
Enterprise design code
Enterprise’s air circuit breaker code
Enterprise feature code

NA8 Air Circuit Breaker
1. General
With a rated current from 200A to 6300A and a rated
operational voltage of AC 400V or 690V (specifications 3.1 When the ambient air tempeature is -5℃~+40℃, the mean
3200 and 6300 AC 690V in trial production), the NA8 value is no greater than +35℃ within 24 hours.
series air circuit breaker (hereinafter referred to as circuit Note: If the upper limit is higher than +40℃ or lower limit
breaker) and is mainly used in distribution networks with lower than -5℃ in work, discussions shall be made between the
an AC frequency of 50Hz to distribute electric energy and user and the manufacturer.
protect lines and power equipment from being damaged 3.2 Altitude: not higher than 2000m for the installation site.
by overload, under voltage, short cirucit, single-phase 3.3 When the ambient air temperature is +40℃, the relative
grounding and other failures. Having art-oriented humidity of the air shall not be higher than 50%; a higher
appearance, high breaking capacity, zero arcover and a relative humidity is allowed at a lower temperature; for example,
variety of intellectualized protection functions, the circuit for the wettest month, the maximum relative humidity averaged
breaker can be used for selective protection with accurate shall be 90% while the lowest temperature averaged in that
action, no unnecessary power cut, and better power supply month +20℃, and special measures shall be taken for the
reliability. condensation occasionally produced due to temperature
The circuit breaker can be widely used for power change.
stations, factories, mines and modern tall buildings, 3.4 Class of pollution: 3.
especially the distribution system in the intelligent building, 3.5 The installation category of the breaker’s main circuit is IV;
and also widely used in green projects such as wind and when the rated operational voltage of the main circuit is less
solar power generation. than or equal to AC400V, the installation category of the control
The product allows the wire to enter from the upper circuit and auxiliary circuit is III, apart from the similarity
or lower port, and the open frame (draw-out) circuit between the under voltage release coil and the intellectual
breaker has isolation function. controller’s power transormer primary coil and the breaker;
The product meets the standards GB 14048.2 and IEC When the rated operational voltage of the major loop is greater
60947-2 and has obtained the CCC certificate. than AC400V and less than or equal to AC690V, it is necessary
for the control circuit and auxiliary circuit to be isolated from the
major loop with an isolating transformer, and the highest
operational voltage of the control circuit and auxiliary circuit is
AC400V, the installation category of the control circuit and
auxiliary circuit being III.
C-01 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
4. Product structure Breaker off and no energy storage
Body structure
Wiring terminals of
the secondary circuit Shunt release Closing
electromagnet
Under voltage release
Press Press
Auxiliary contact
OFF pushbutton
Energy storage Can release
handle
ON/OFF indication
C
ON pushbutton
Energy storage motor
Breaker on and energy storage over
Intellectual controller
Energy storage Operating mechanism
indication
Press Press
Storage
Wiring terminals of
the secondary circuit Zero arcover hood
Fault-breaking indicator
reset button
Energy storage
OFF pushbutton handle
ON pushbutton Breaker on and no energy storage
ON/OFF indication Energy storage
indication
Data plate
Press Press
Fixed side panel
Mounting hole Can release
Breaker off and energy storage over
Drawout structure
Wiring terminals of
the secondary circuit
Press Press
Side panel
Storage
Safety separator
Baffle push rod
Guide rail Rocking handle

work hole
Extraction
draw plate
Rocking handle
deposit hole
Locking device Position indication
> >> C-02

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Connected
Test
Disconnected
Connected: both main circuit and secondary circuit are connected
(3) Place the breaker body on the guide rail
Connected
Test
Disconnected
Test: the main circuit is disconnected, the safety separator woks

well, and the secondary circuit is connected
Connected
(4) Move the breaker body onto the guide rail with a snap
Test
Disconnected
Disconnected: neither main circuit nor secondary circuit is

connected
(5) Push the breaker body in, and the turn the breaker body to
the working position
(1) Draw-out socket placed horizontally
(2) Pull out the guide rail
C-03 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
5. Main technical parameters
5.1 Main technical parameters
Type NA8-1600 NA8-3200 NA8-63 00
C
Shell grade rated current Inm A 1600 3200 6300
Rated current In A 200,400,630,800,
1600,2000,2500,3200 4000,5000,6300
1000,1250,1600
Nominal insulation voltage Ui V 1000 1000 1000
400,(690V In trial 400,(690V In trial
Rated operational voltage Ue V 400,690
production) production)
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu kA 55,30 100,75 125,85
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics kA 42,25 100,75 125,85
Rated short time withstand current Icw,1s kA 42,25 85,- 100,-
Frequency of operation (number of times/h) 20 10 10
Number of Mechanical life 3000 3000 2000
operations Electric life 1000 500 500
Flashover distance mm 0 0 0
Wire to enter from the Wire to enter from the Wire to enter from the
Line incoming pattern
upper or lower part upper or lower part upper or lower part
Weight Fixed type kg 22/26.5 52.5/66.5 -
(3P/4P) Draw-out type kg 38/55 98/121 200
Size (3P/4P) Fixed type kg 320×(254/324)×251 354×(422/537)×331 -
Height×width×depth Draw-out type kg 351×(282/352)×345 431×(435/550)×445 471×780×445
5.2 Capacity-reducing usage

5.2.1 Capacity-reducing at different temperatures
The following table shows the continual current-loading capacity of the circuit breakers and buses in each wiring mode at the corresponding
ambient environment temperatures and under the conditions of the satisfaction of conventional heating with a similarity in capacity reducing
between the breaker connected in a mixed way and the breaker connected horizontally.
Style Wiring Draw-out type

mode Ambient
Front/rear horizontal wiring mode Rear vertical wiring mode
temperature℃
-5~40 45 50 55 60 -5~40 45 50 55 60
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
630 630 630 630 550 630 630 630 630 580
1600 800 800 800 800 700 800 800 800 800 700
1000 1000 1000 950 900 1000 1000 1000 950 900
1250 1250 1250 1150 1050 1250 1250 1250 1200 1100
1600 1550 1500 1450 1350 1600 1600 1550 1500 1450
1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950
3200
2500 2500 2500 2450 2350 2500 2500 2500 2500 2400
3200 3200 3100 3000 2900 3200 3200 3200 3050 2900
4000 4000 4000 3900 3800 4000 4000 4000 3900 3800
6300 5000 5000 4700 4600 4400 5000 5000 4800 4650 4500
6300 6100 6000 5500 5200
> >> C-04

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
5.2.2 Capacity-reducing at different altitudes
When the altitude is higher than 2000m, there will appear changes in insulation property, cooling performance, pressure, and the
performance can be modified in reference to the following table.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Insulation withstand voltage (V) 3500 3000 2500 2000
Insulation voltage (V) 1000 800 700 600
Rated operational voltage (V) 690 580 500 400
Rated operational current (A) 1×In 0.96×In 0.92×In 0.87×In
5.3 Power loss

Power loss is the total loss measured when the breaker is charged with the rated current.
Power loss
Breaker type Rated current (A) Draw-out type (W) Fixed type (W)
200 115 45
400 140 80
630 161 100
800 215 110
NA8-1600
1000 230 120
1250 250 130
1600 460 220
1600 390 170
2000 470 250
NA8-3200
2500 600 260
3200 670 420
4000 550 -
NA8-6300 5000 590 -
6300 950 -
Note: The data and parameters in the above technical documentation result from tests and theoretical calculation, and can only be used
as a general type selection guide. They cannot replace industrial practical experience or proof test.
5.4 Recommended bus for the breaker and recommendation for users to install the buses
Inm(A) NA8-1600 NA8-3200 NA8-6300
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
Thickness (mm) 5 5 5 5 5 8 10 6 6 5 10 10 10 10
Busbar Width (mm) 20 50 40 50 60 60 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Number of buses 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 7 8
C-05 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
6. Dimensions and connection of the circuit breaker
NA8-1600(In=200A~1250A) Draw-out type
(horizontal connection is the default by the factory, vertical one to be made by users themselves)
4P central line
210 36 3P central line
a
12×φ11(3P) 60
275
16×φ11(4P) 25
15
149
310
N Pole
35
7
C
351
78.5
76 76 76
95 74 Drawing illustrating the distance

between mounting holes
345(Connecting position)
391(Separating position)
Wires connected horizontally
282(3P)
352(4P)
Separator between phases

(to be ordered separately)
2-φ8.5
149(3P)
155(4P)
In(A) a(mm)
95
2-φ8.5×10 200、400、630 5
7
800、1000 10
78.5(3P)
75.5(4P)
35
1250 15
95 74
145(3P) 63
215(4P)
Wires connected vertically
Note: If users intend to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, they need to replace the upper and lower
buses on both sides with the same one as the central bus.
NA8-1600(In=1600A) Draw-out type

Separator between phases 4P central line

210 36
(to be ordered separately) 3P central line
85
24×φ11(3P)
35
15
32×φ11(4P)
N Pole
15
35
80.5
275
310
179
7
351
101 101 101

63.5
95 74 Wires connected horizontally
282(3P)
352(4P) Wires connected horizontally

2-φ8.5
149(3P)
155(4P)
95
2-φ8.5×10
7
35
78.5(3P)
75.5(4P)
145(3P) 63 95 74
215(4P)
> >> C-06

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-1600(In=200A~1250A) Fixed type
210 22
(to be ordered separately) 4P central line
3P central line
a 12-φ11(3P)
16-φ11(4P) 60
35
15
N Pole 25
320
149
275
281
76 76 76
48.5
100 92
237(3P)
251
307(4P)
324(4P)

(to be ordered separately) In(A) a(mm)
4-φ8.5
200、400、630 5
100
800、1000 10
1250 15
149(3P)
155(4P)
237(3P)
307(4P)
48.5(3P)
45.5(4P)
Drawing illustrating the distance

between mounting holes
100 92
251
NA8-1600(In=1600A) Fixed type

210 22
4P central line
24-φ11(3P) 3P central line

32-φ11(4P) 85
15
N Pole 35
320
149(3P)
155(4P)
275
281
35
80.5
48.5(3P)
45.5(4P)
101 101 101

237(3P) 92
100
307(4P) 341 Wires connected horizontally
254(3P)
324(4P) Wires connected vertically

15
4-φ8.5
100
179
237(3P)
33.5
307(4P)
Maximum bottom surface 100 92
341
C-07 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-1600 Draw-out type Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel NA8-1600 Fixed type Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
220
220 8-φ5
10-φ5
118
322
285
120
320
Breaking mounting panel

Breaking mounting panel
6
118
118.5
78
From the center of the mounting From the center of the mounting
hole on the right side of the breaker hole on the right side of the breaker
258 258
NA8-3200 Draw-out type size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
217.5(3P) 217.5
332.5(4P)
42 385 18
232
N
Datum line 2
199
Datum line 1
Dimensions Dimensions
371
328
155
φ11
11×17
175
φ14
268
376
φ14
11×17
Datum line 2
18
145
21.5
97
47
10
162.5(3P) 162.5 10×φ6

277.5(4P)
Datum line 1 Datum line 1
Installation dimensions Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
> >> C-08

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-3200(In=1600A~2500A) Draw-out type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
42
78 50 φ11
25
14
29
133
115 115 115
Datum line 1
84
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, they only have to turn the bus by 90°.
NA8-3200(In=1600A~2500A) Draw-out type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
42
25
14
φ11
78
55
115 115 115
Datum line 1
25
57.5
Note: If users want to change the vertical connection into horizontal one on site, they only have to turn the bus by 90°.
NA8-3200(In=1600A~3200A) Draw-out type (front connection)
C 78 25 φ11
15
29
115 115 115
Datum line 1
301
In(A) C
1600,2000 20
2500 25
3200 30
29
16.5
C-09 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-3200(In=3200A) Draw-out type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
42
100 25
25
φ11
29
14
133
126 126 126 C

Datum line 1
84
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, it is necessary to replace the upper and lower
buses for the N and B phases with the same one as the A and C phases.
NA8-3200(In=3200A) Draw-out type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
42
14
φ11
25
100
57
115 115 115
Datum line 1
25
35.5
Note: If users want to change the vertical connection into horizontal one on site, it is necessary to replace the upper and lower
buses for the N and B phases with the different one from the A and C phases.
NA8-3200 Fixed type
N
191
基准线2
163
13
11 200(3P ) 200 11 246 44 8

315(4P )
基准线1
> >> C-10

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-3200 Fixed type Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
4×φ12 371
328
150
268
311
70.5
200(3P) 200
315(4P) 8×φ6
Datum line 1 Datum line 1
NA8-3200(In=1600A~2500A) Fixed type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
33
78 50 φ11
14
29
25
133
115 115 115
Datum line 1
47.5
NA8-3200(In=1600A~2500A) Fixed type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
33
25
14
φ11
78
55
115 115 115
基准线1
25
21
C-11 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-3200(In=1600A~3200A) Fixed type (front connection)
C
60
78 25 φ11
15
C
300
115 115 115
In(A) C Datum line 1
1600,2000 20
73
60
2500 25
3200 30
NA8-3200(In=3200A) Fixed type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
33
25
φ11 100 25
29
14
133
126 126 126
Datum line 1
47.5
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, it is necessary to replace the upper and lower
buses for the N and B phases with the same one as the A and C phases.
NA8-3200(In=3200A) Fixed type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
33
25
14
φ11
100
57
115 115 115

25
Datum line 1
49
Note: If users want to change the vertical connection into horizontal one on site, it is necessary to replace the upper and lower
buses for the N and B phases with the different one from the A and C phases.
> >> C-12

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-6300 Draw-out type size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
562.5 217.5 42 385 18

232
Datum line 2
199
Datum line 1
40
Dimensions Dimensions
371
328
φ14
155
175
11×17
268
376
Datum line 2
145
18
97
162.5
335 335
47
10×φ6
Datum line 1
Datum line 1
Installation dimensions Mounting dimension
NA8-6300(In=6300A) Draw-out type (vertical connection is the default by the factory)
φ11 14 Datum line 1
115 115 115 115 115

125
55
25
25
50.5
C-13 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8-6300(In=4000A~5000A) Draw-out type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
78 25 φ11
14
25
29
C
133
115 115 115 115 115
Datum line 1
124
NA8-6300(In=4000A~5000A) Draw-out type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
14 Datum line 1
φ11
115 115 115 115 115
78
55
25
97.5
25
NA8-6300(In=4000A~5000A) Draw-out type (front connection)
C
78 25 φ11
15
29
115 115 115 115 115

301
Datum line 1
In(A) C
4000 20
5000 25
29
23.5
> >> C-14

C-15
Fault indication
N A、B、C
> >>
SB2 SB1 HL2 HL3 HL4
HL1
XT 3 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55
FU
Breaker body
M L1
QF F DT Q/QY
SAL Intelligent controller AX Control power supply
SA L2(N)
TA
7. Connection diagram for the secondary circuit
FU
XT 1 2 5 7 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56 57
+ DC24V -
S
Under Energy storage Power-driven On OFF Auxiliary contact AC auxiliary contact

Main circuit Intelligent controller Open Close
voltage indication energy storage indication indication available for users for standby application
Dt——closing electromagnet F——shunt release Q/QY——under voltage release

SAL——sensitive switch SA——travel switch M——energy storage motor
AX——auxiliary contact Fu——fuse SB1——ON pushbutton
SB2——OFF pushbutton HL1~HL4——indicator light Type of AX auxiliary contact available for users
XT——connection terminal TA——current transformer
QF——breaker S——power module I. Four groups of changeover II. Five groups of changeover III. Six groups of changeover contacts IV. Three N.O. and
#1、#2：input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply contacts(default configuation) contacts three N.C. contacts
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8-1600 optional standard type intellectual controller
#4、#5、#6：faulty tripping contact output

(#5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A) 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point
available conventionally, two open and two close from DF9 to DF12 with a common
point available additionally for Inm=1600 when special order is made for alternating
current, four open and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point available
only for Inm=1600 in case of direct current, contact capacity (DC220V 0.5A).
2. Various control voltages of the 1600 has to be put to #1 and #2 after the
power module outputs DC24V.
3. The wiring for the part indicated by dashed lines shall be made by users.
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47
Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
NA8
Fault indication
N A、B、C
SB2 SB1 HL2 HL3 HL4

HL1
Air Circuit Breaker
XT 3 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54
FU
Breaker body
M L1
QF F DT Q/QY
SAL Intelligent controller AX Control power supply
SA L2(N)
TA
FU
XT 1 2 5 7 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52
3200 and 6300 shell controller power supply: AC230V and AC400V
+ DC24V -
S
3200 and 6300 shell controller power supply: DC220V and DC110V
Dt——closing electromagnet F——shunt release Q/QY——under voltage release

SAL——sensitive switch SA——travel switch M——energy storage motor
AX——auxiliary contact Fu——fuse SB1——ON pushbutton
SB2——OFF pushbutton HL1~HL4——indicator light Type of AX auxiliary contact available for users
XT——connection terminal TA——current transformer
QF——breaker S——power module I. Four groups of changeover II. Five groups of changeover IV. Three N.O. and V. Four N.O. and four
#1、#2：input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply contacts(default configuation) contacts three N.C. contacts N.C. contacts
#4、#5、#6：faulty tripping contact output
(#5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A) 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 38 40 42 44 46 48 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8-3200~6300 optional standard type intellectual controller
available conventionally, one open and one close from DF9 to DF10 with a common
point available additionally when special order is made for alternating current,
contact capacity (DC220V 0.5A).
2. When the controller voltage of 3200 and 6300 shells is AC230V/400V, it can
be directly put to #1 and #2; if the voltage is DC220V/110V, it has to be put to #1
and #2 after the power module outputs DC24V.
> >>
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
C-16
C
C-17
FU
L1
N
PE
L N PE
Profibus-DP
> >>
ST-4 power module
- + - + - + - +
ST-DP
Device
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
N A、B、C
Fault indication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ + COM D11 D12 D13
DC24V
ST201 SB2 SB1
D01 D02 D03
HL1 12 13 14 15 16 17 HL2 HL3 HL4
绿红
XT 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55
PE
M
QF D14 F DT Q/QY
7. Connection diagram for the secondary circuit
Intelligent controller AX
SAL D13 D15 D16
SA
TA
Breaker body
XT 1 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56 57
+ DC24V-
S

DT——closing electromagnet F——shunt release Q/QY——under voltage release

SAL——sensitive switch SA——travel switch M——energy storage motor #1、#2：Intelligent controller auxiliary supply input
AX——auxiliary contact Fu——fuse SB1——ON pushbutton #3：PE Type of AX auxiliary contact available for users
SB2——OFF pushbutton HL1~HL4——indicator light #4、# 5、# 6：Fault trip contact output
XT——connection terminal TA——current transformer (# 5 for the public side, AC250V 5A) I. Four groups of changeover II. Five groups of changeover IV. Three N.O. and
QF——breaker S——power module ST-DP——Device #7、#8、#9：Auxiliary contact output contacts(default configuation) contacts three N.C. contacts
ST201——Relay module(Optional) ST-4——Power module(Optional) (#8 for the public side, AC250V 5A)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 38 40 42 44 46 48
#14、#15：RS485 communication interface
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8-1600 optional type multifunctional intellectual controller
(communication type when)

Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close with a common point available
#16、#17：Sub-gate output
conventionally, two open and two close with a common point available additionally
#18、#19：Switch output
for Inm=1600 when special order is made for alternating current. Four open
#26、#27：Load 1 Alarm
(contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point available only for
1nm=1600 in case of direct current, contact capacity (AC250V 5A).
#20、#21、#22、#23：A、B、C、NVoltage signal input
(multi-functional time) (Maximum voltage AC400V)
#24、#25：External transformer input
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 37 39 41 43 45 47
Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
FU
L1
NA8
N
PE
L N PE
Profibus-DP
ST-4 power module
- + - + - + - +
ST-DP
Device
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Air Circuit Breaker
N A、B、C
+ + COM D11 D12 D13
DC24V
ST201 SB2 SB1
D01 D02 D03
HL1 12 13 14 15 16 17 HL2 HL3 HL4
绿红
XT 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54
PE
M
QF D14 F DT Q/QY
SAL D13 D15 D16

Intelligent controller AX
SA
TA
Breaker body
XT 1 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52
+ DC24V-
S
3200 and 6300 shell controller power supply: DC220V and DC110V

DT——closing electromagnet F——shunt release Q/QY——under voltage release

SAL——sensitive switch SA——travel switch M——energy storage motor #1、#2：Intelligent controller auxiliary supply input
AX——auxiliary contact Fu——fuse SB1——ON pushbutton #3：PE Type of AX auxiliary contact available for users
SB2——OFF pushbutton HL1~HL4——indicator light #4、# 5、# 6：Fault trip contact output
XT——connection terminal TA——current transformer (# 5 for the public side, AC250V 5A) I. Four groups of changeover II. Five groups of changeover IV. Three N.O. and
QF——breaker S——power module ST-DP——Device #7、#8、#9：Auxiliary contact output contacts(default configuation) contacts three N.C. contacts
ST201——Relay module(Optional) ST-4——Power module(Optional) (#8 for the public side, AC250V 5A)
#14、#15：RS485 communication interface 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 38 40 42 44 46 48
(communication type when)
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close with a common point available
#16、#17：Sub-gate output
conventionally, one open and one close with a common point available additionally
#18、#19：Switch output
for when special order is made for alternating current. Contact capacity AC250V 5A
2. When the controller voltage of the 3200 and 6300 shells is AC230V/400V, it
can be directly put to #1 and #2; if the voltage is DC220V/110V, it has to be put to
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8-3200 and 6300 optional type multifunctional intellectual controller
#20、#21、#22、#23：A、B、C、NVoltage signal input

#1 and #2 after the power module outputs DC24V.
(multi-functional time) (Maximum voltage AC400V)
> >>
#24、#25：External transformer input
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 37 39 41 43 45 47
C-18
C
Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Connection of the secondary circuit
(5-
7)m
m
Conductor cross-section S:
2
(0.5~1.2)mm
Connecting wire of Special screwdriver for the

secondary circuit connection of secondary circuit
Screwless terminal connection system is used for the secondary connection of the breaker. The connection is made by using special flat
blade screwdriver and single-core conductor by reference to the connectin diagram for the seondary circuit.
Screwless terminal system is used for the connection of the secondary circuit. Insert the special screwdriver into the terminal hole shown
in the figure to deform the clamp, insert the conductor into the corresponding terminal hole, and then take out the screwdriver.
C-19 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8. Intellectual controller and protective characteristics
8.1 User interface of the standard type (M type) and multifunctional type (H type) intellectual controllers.
C
1
5
3
6
8
10
11
13 12
⑴Brand “CHINT” brand

⑵LCD window LCD window capable of showing the current for each phase, various setting parameters, rated current,
fault current, tripping time, and the like
⑶SET key Switch to the set default menu (left arrow key, when it is necessary to move leftwards or rightwards for
the set interface).
⑷UP key Move the box select menu under the current menu to change the position of said box upwards, and
perform the setting of the parameter ADD in the parameter setup menu.
⑸RETURN key Exit the current menu and go to the previous menu, or cancel the value of the current setup parameter.
⑹ACK key Go to the next menu of the currently selected select box (go to the set state under the set interface, and
exit the set state by double pressing the key).
⑺DOWN key Move the box select menu under the current menu to change the position of said box downwards, and
perform the setting of the parameter SUBTRACT in the parameter setup menu.
⑻INQUIRY key Switch to the inquiry default menu (right arrow key, when it is necessary to move leftwards or rightwards
for the set interface).
⑼“IR” lamp Over current long time delay fault indication
⑽“Isd” lamp Short-circuit short-time delay fault indication
⑾“test” lamp Button for simulating instantaneous tripping test
⑿“Ii” lamp Short-circuit instantaneous fault indication
⒀“Ig” lamp Asymmetric grounding, neutral line fault indication
> >> C-20

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.2 Default interface and menu structure for the multifunctional Default interface for the multifunctional controller
controller
The multifunctional controller provides 4 title menus
(measurement menu, parameter setup menu, protection 1002 A
parameter setup menu, history record and maintenance menu) N A B C
and 1 default menu. 150
100
50
8.2.1 Structure of the measurement menu

1 menu 2 menu 3 menu 4 menu 5 menu
Ia= 1000A
Ia
Ib= 1001A
Ib
Ic= 998A
Ic
In= 0A
In
Ig= 0A or I△n=0.00A
Ia= 1300A
Ib= 1400A
Instantaneous value
Ic= 1380A
Maximum
In= 200A
Reset(+/-)
Ia=3%
Unbalance rate
Current I Ib=5%
100%
Ic=1%
Current thermal capacitance
15min
Real-time value Ia= 1000A
Ia,Ib, Ib= 1000A
Ic,In Ic= 998A
In= 0A
Required value
Ia= 1050A
Ib= 1040A
Maximum
Ic= 1010A
In= 0A
Reset(+/-)
Uab= 380V
Ubc= 380V
Uca= 380V
Instantaneous value
Uan= 220V
Voltage U Ubn= 220V
Ucn= 220V
Mean value Uav= 380V
Unbalance rate 0%
Phase sequence A,B,C
Frequency F 50Hz
EP= 200kWh
Total electric energy EQ= 10kvarh
ES= 200kVAh
EP= 200kWh
Electric energy E Input electric energy
EQ= 200kvarh
EP= 0kWh
Output electric energy
EQ= 0kvarh
Electric energy reset Reset
C-21 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8

P= 660kW
P，Q，S Q= 0kvar
S= 660kVA
-1.00
Inductive
Power factor PFa= 1.00
PFb= 1.00
Instantaneous value
PFc= 1.00 C
Pa= 220kW
Pa，Qa，Sa Qa= 0kvar
Sa= 220kVA
Pb= 220kW
Power P
Pb，Qb，Sb Qb= 0kvar
Sb= 220kVA
Pc= 220kW
Pc，Qc，Sc Qc= 0kvar
Sc= 220kVA
P= 660kW
P，Q，S Q= 0kvar
S= 660kVA
Required value
P= 661kW
Q= 2kvar
Maximum
S= 662kVA
Reset(+/-)
Ia
Ib
Ia，Ib
Ic，In Ic
In
Waveform
Uan
Uan，Ubn Ubn
Ucn
Ucn
Ia= 1000A
Ib= 1000A
I(A)
Ic= 1000A
In= 1000A
Base form
Harmonic H Uab= 380V
Ubc= 380V
Uca= 380V
U(V)
Uan= 220V
Ubn= 220V
Ucn= 220V
Ia= 0.0%
Ib= 0.0%
I(%)
Ic= 0.0%
In= 0.0%
THD Uab= 0.0%
Ubc= 0.0%
Uca= 0.0%
U(%) Uan= 0.0%
Ubn= 0.0%
Ucn= 0.0%
> >> C-22

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8

Ia= 0.0%
Ib= 0.0%
thd I(%)
Ic= 0.0%
In= 0.0%
Uab= 0.0%
Ubc= 0.0%
Uca= 0.0%
thd U(%)
Uan= 0.0%
Ubn= 0.0%
Ucn= 0.0%
Ia FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ia(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Ib FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ib(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Harmonic H I(3,5,7...31)
Ic FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ic(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
In FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
In(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
FFT
Uab FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Uab(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Ubc FFT THD=0.0%

0.0%
Ubc(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
U(3,5,7...31)
Ubc FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ubc(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Uca FFT THD=0.0%

0.0%
Uca(3,5,7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
8.2.2 Structure of the parameter setup menu
Setting of the System type =3φ4W 4CT

measurement meter Line incoming pattern =Wire to enter from the upper port
Test type =three section protection
Test tripping Test parameter =1:9999A
Test initiation =start
Test & lock Remote locking Remote locking =unlock
Parameter locking
Parameter locking
Parameter locking =locking
(Input) user password User password (change)
=0000 =0000
Address =3
Communication setting
Baud rate =9.6K
=Do1
Function setting
=Regional interlocking
=Do1
I/O setting Executive mode =N.O. pulse
=360s
I/O state
I/O state DO1 DO2 DO3 DI1
1 1 1 1
C-23 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.2.3 Structure of the protection parameter setup menu

IR e.g.：=1000A=100%In
Current protection e.g.：=ON
Current protection Long time delay
Delay time e.g.：=C1，Is@6IR
Cooling time e.g.：=3h
Definite-time limit e.g.：=5000A=5.0IR
Operating current
e.g.：=0.1s
Short-time delay
Inverse-time limit
Delay time
e.g.：=2000A=2.0IR C
e.g.：=C1，0.Is@6IR
Instantaneous Operating current e.g.：=10000A=10.0In
Neutral phase protection Neutral phase protection e.g.：=200%
Operating current e.g.：=800A
Ground protection Delay time e.g.：=0.4s
Coefficient of earthing e.g.：=6.0
Current protection Starting current e.g.：=600A

Starting time e.g.：=0.1s
Grounding alarm
Return current e.g.：=100A
Return time e.g.：=0.1s
Operating current e.g.：=8.0A
Leakage protection
Setup delay time e.g.：=0.75s
Starting current e.g.：=5.0A
Starting time e.g.：=0.1s
Electric leakage alarm
Return current e.g.：=4.0A
Executive mode e.g. =I the first method
Unloading value 1 e.g.=800A
Load monitoring Unloading time 1 e.g.=50%tR
Unloading value 2 e.g.=700A
Unloading time 2 e.g.=25%tR
Executive mode e.g.：=Alarm
Startup value e.g.：=200V
Under voltage Starting time e.g.：=0.2s
Return value e.g.：=320V
Startup value e.g.：=480V
Voltage protection Over voltage Starting time e.g.：=1s
Return value e.g.：=400V
Startup value e.g.：=10%
U unbalanced Starting time e.g.：=1s
Return value e.g.：=5%
> >> C-24

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.2.4 Structure of the history record and maintenance menu

e.g. phase sequence alarm,
Current alarm inverse power alarm,

over frequency alarm…
Total number of times e.g.:300
Number of operations
Number of operations e.g.:219(ACK key, Reset)
Total wear e.g.:120
Contact wear
Contact wear e.g.:20(ACK key, Reset)
Product information Zhejiang CHINT electrics co., LTD
Under voltage tripping
T=0.20s
Umax=0V
11:24:59
e.g.:
6/17
1 Under voltage tripping
F=0.00Hz
2004/06/17
Uab= 0V
Ubc= 0V
Uca= 0V
Tripping record …… ……
A phase short-circuit definite-time limit

T= 0.4s
I= 4300A
15 : 28 : 25
e.g.:
5/30
8 (for) short-circuit definite-time limit
Ia= 4300A
2004/05/03
Ib= 4200A
Ic= 4000A
In= 150A
Di input alarm
e.g.:
Di1
1 DI (for) DI input alarm
2004/07/16
2004/07/16
20 : 38 : 45
Alarm logging …… ……
e.g.: Under voltage alarm

8 Under voltage alarm Umax= 0V
2004/06/20 2004/06/20
Note: Up to 8 times of alarms can be recorded 22 : 29 : 40
e.g.: Local switch on

1 (for) local switch on 2002/06/18
2002/06/18 9 : 30 : 56
Position
…… ……
changing record
e.g.:
Test tripping
8 (for) testing tripping
2002/06/15
2002/06/15
10 : 30 : 20
Note: Up to 8 times can be recorded
Notes: a. The actual menu will vary depend on the function selected by the user.
b. The controller starts screensaver automatically 10min later.
C-25 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.3 List of controller functions
Standard configuration
Standard type (M type) Multifunction type (H type)
1. Quadruple over current protection (for overload, short-time delay time, 1. Quadruple over current protection (for overload, short-time delay time,
instantaneous, grounding); grounding corresponds to vector sum (T instantaneous, grounding); grounding corresponds to vector sum (T type);
type); 2. Parameter setup: fixed value keyboard setting function;
2. Parameter setup: fixed value keyboard setting function; 3. Current measurement function;
3. Current measurement function;
4. Current unbalance rate measurement function;
4. Current unbalance rate measurement function;
5. Two test functions:
C
5. Two test functions: (1) Instantaneous tripping test simulated on the panel;
(1) Instantaneous tripping test simulated on the panel; (2) Triple over current, grounding/leakage and operating time tests
(2) Triple over current, grounding/leakage and operating time tests simulated by software;
simulated by software; 6. Fault recording function: 8 times of failures can be recorded;
6. Fault recording function: 8 times of failures can be recorded; 7. Self-diagnostic function;
7. Self-diagnostic function; 8. MCRmake/break function;
8. MCRmake/break function; 9. Communication function: MODBUS protocol;
9. Alarm logging function; 10. Alarm logging function;
10. Recording number of operations; 11. Recording number of operations;
11. Contact wear; 12. Contact wear;
13. Position changing record; 13. Position changing record;
13. Human-machine interface: 28×43 LCD; 14. Human-machine interface: 28×43 LCD;
14. Heat capacity measurement 15. Heat capacity measurement
Selection of optional additional functions
P function H function
1. Voltage measurement; 1.Voltage measurement;

2. Voltage unbalance measurement; 2.Voltage unbalance measurement;
3. Frequency measurement; 3.Frequency measurement;
4. Phase sequence measurement; 4.Phase sequence measurement;
5. Electric energy measurement; 5.Electric energy measurement;
6. Power measurement; 6.Power measurement;
7. Power factor measurement; 7.Power factor measurement;
8. Earth-current grounding protection; 8.Earth-current grounding protection;
9. Leakage protection; 9.Leakage protection;
10. Load monitoring function; 10.Load monitoring function;
11. Quadruple D0 output function; 11.Quadruple DO output function;
12. DI input function; 12.DI input function;
13. Regional interlocking function; 13.Regional interlocking function;
14. Under and over voltage protection; 14.Under and over voltage protection;
15. Measurement of harmonic current;
16. Neutral phase protection
> >> C-26

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.4 Characteristic parameters of the standard type intellectual controller
Over current protection characteristics
10000
5000
IR=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
tR=(1~30)s
100
50
20
T(s) 10
I2t on
5
2 Isd=（1.5~10）IR
Isd=（1.5~10）IR
1
2
I t off
0.5
0.2
0.1
Ii=（2~15)In
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X IR
Neutral line (grounding) fault protection characteristic
10000
5000
Ig=(0.2-1)In
1000 MAX 1200A
MIN 120A
500
200
100
50
20
T(s) 10
I2t on
5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
I2 t off
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X In
C-27 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
8.4.1 Over current long time delay protection characteristic
Rated current Line current I

Error Operating time tR(s) Time error
range IR
≤1.05 IR No actuation within 2h

>1.30 IR <1h and then actuate
(0.4~1)In
±10% 1.5 IR 16 32 64 128 192 256 320 384 480 ±15%
+OFF(Power off)
2.0 IR 9 18 36 72 108 144 180 216 270
6.0 IR 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 30
Explanation for parameter setting: C

Long-time delay operating current continuously adjustable: IR=(0.4~1)×In.
The long-time delay tripping time represents the inverse-time limit characteristic, and nine optional settings are readily available for
tripping time in case of 6IR: tR=(1-2-4-8-12-16-20-24-30)s.
Example 1: If it is know that in conditions of I=6IR, the tripping time setting value is 2s, and now the line current I=1.5IR, then the
actual tripping time TR can be worked out by: (1.5IR)2×TR=(6IR)2×2. The answer is obtained as TR=32s.
8.4.2 Short-circuit short-time delay protection characteristic

Error Operating time tR(s) Time error
range IR
＜0.85 Isd No-action

＞1.15 Isd Time-delay action
Definite-time limit 0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1.0
(1.5~10)IR
±15% Inverse-time limit ±15%
+OFF(Power off) 0.1tR
I≤10IR
Definite-time limit
I＞10IR 0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1.0
Explanation for parameter setting:

The short-circuit short-time delay protection operating current continuously adjustable: Isd=(1.5~10)×IR.
The short-time delay tripping time can be selected as tsd=(0.1s~1s).
When the tripping time is set as inverse-time limit operating characteristic, there are two cases: ① the case of I＞1.15Isd and I＞10IR
represents the definite-time limit; ② the case of I＞1.15Isd and I≤10IR represents the inverse-time limit characteristic and the actual
tripping time is calculated according to the formula tsd=0.1tR, wherein tR is the long-time delay time, tsd is the short-time delay time.
The method for setting the current and time for the short-circuit short-time delay protection is similar to that for over current long time
delay protection.
8.4.3 Short-circuit instantaneous protection characteristic

Error Operating Characteristics
range Ii
(2~15)In ≤0.85Ii No-action

±15%
+OFF(Power off) >1.15Ii Action
Explanation for parameter setting:

The instantaneous protection operating current is continuously adjustable: Ii=(2~15)In.
The method for setting the current for the instantaneous protection is similar to that for over current long time delay protection setting.
8.4.4 Single-phase grounding fault protection characteristic
Rated current Line current I Inverse-time limt Setting Setting

Error Operating time tg(s) Time error
range IR shearing factor range step
＜0.9 Ig No-action
(1.5~10)IR ＞1.1 Ig Time-delay action
±10% ±15% k 1.5~6，OFF 0.5
+OFF(Power off) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5,
0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0
Note: k is the fault current multiple (I/Ig), I is the fault current, Ig is the setup operating current.
> >> C-28

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Explanation for parameter setting: 9. Accessories
The single-phase grounding protection operating current
can be adjusted and selected: Ig=(0.2~1)×In. 9.1 Under voltage release
The protection delay tripping time can be selected as When the under voltage release is not energized, neither
tg=(0.1s~1s). power-driven nor manual operation can make the breaker on.
① The case of I≥kIg or k set to OFF represents the definite- For the under voltage release, there are two varieties:
time limit characteristic, tg=0.1s-0.2s-0.3s-0.4s-0.5s-0.6s-0.7s - instantaneous and time delay operations.
0.8s-0.9s-1s； The time for the under voltage time delay release is
② The case of the current meeting the condition of 1.1Ig≤ Inm=1600A, the time can be selected from but not adjustable
I＜kIg represents the inverse-time limit characteristic and the in the range of (0~7)s; Inm=3200A or 6300A, the time can be
actual tripping time is calculated according to the formula selected from and adjusted among 0.5s, 1s, 3s and 5s.
t=Tg×k×Ig/I. When, within 1/2 delay time, the power voltage returns to
In the formula, I is the line current, Tg is the setup delay 85%Ue or above, the breaker will not get disconnected.
time, Ig is the setup operating current, t is the operating time, k Operating characteristic:
is the shearing factor.
The method for setting the parameter is similar to that for Rated operational voltage Ue(V) AC230 AC400
over current long time delay protection. Operating voltage (V) (0.35~0.7)Ue
Note: For the intellectual controller, the current settings for
Reliable switching voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Ue
the long- and the short-time delay and the instantaneous
protection should not come across each other, and the condition Reliable not-switching voltage (V) ≤0.35Ue
of IR＜Isd＜Ii must be ensured. Power consumption (W) 20VA
8.5 Explanation for auxiliary functions
a. Explanation for test conditions Under voltage release (Inm=1600A)
When onsite adjustment, periodical inspection or overhaul is
made with the controller supported by the breaker, breaking
several times is necessary by using the test functions of the
controller to check the cooperation of the controller and the
breaker. When the breaker on, press the “test” button, and the
intellectual controller will trip instantaneously to cut off the
breaker.
Note: ① This function can be used only when onsite
adjustment or overhaul for the breaker is made, and shall not be
used during the normal operation.
② Each time before the controller is switched on, it is
necessary to press the reset button in the upper position of the
Under voltage release (Inm=3200A、6300A)
controller panel so that the breaker can be switched on again
for operation.
b. Explanation for fault memory
The controller still has the function of fault memory after
reset or de-energized to keep a latest historical event for post
analysis. Only when there is a new fault again, the original
information is cleared with the current latest faulty data saved.
For the inquiry method, refer to the above explanation about
fault display.
8.6 Explanation for display function
When the rated current is greater than or equal to 400A, the
primary current shall not be lower than 0.4In for single phase,
and 0.2In for three phases for normal operation of the 9.2 Shunt release
controller. When the rated current is less than 400A, the primary After the shunt release is energized, the breaker is switched
current shall not be lower than 0.8In for single phase, and 0.4In off instantaneously to allow remote operation.
for three phases for normal operation of the controller.
Note: When the AC220V S power module is energized, and Operating characteristic:
the voltage falls to AC120V, there will be no display on the Rated control supply voltage Us(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110
controller
Operating voltage (V) (0.7~1.1)Us
When the AC380V S power module is energized, and
the voltage falls to AC200V, there will be no display on the Power consumption (W) 200VA 200W
controller Breaking time (50±10)ms
a. Current display
Error range for current display: ±5% Shunt releasee (Inm=1600A)
b. Voltage display
Error range for voltage display: ±1.5%
C-29 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Shunt release (Inm=3200A、6300A) Power operating mechanism (Inm=3200A、6300A)
9.3 Closing electromagnet

After the motor energy storage is ended, energizing the
9.5 Auxiliary contact (with a common point)
Standard type: 4 groups of changeover contacts (default
C
closing electromagnet will make the energy storage spring force configuration) are provided
of the operating mechanism to be released instantaneously to Special type: 5 groups of changeover contacts
rapidly switch the breaker on. 6 groups of changeover contacts (Inm=1600A provided, but
not available for DC)
Operating characteristic: 3 N.O. and 3 N.C.
Rated control supply voltage Us(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110 4 N.O. and 4 N.C. (Inm=3200A and 6300A provided)
Operating voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Us Technical parameters:
Power consumption (W) 200VA 200W
Rated Rated thermal Rated control
Closing time (50±10)ms
voltage (V) current Ith(A) capacity
Closing electromagnet (Inm=1600A) 230

AC 6 300VA
400
DC 220 0.5 60W
Auxiliary contact (Inm=1600A)
Closing electromagnet (Inm=3200A、6300A)
Auxiliary contact (Inm=3200A、6300A)
9.4 Power operating mechanism

The functions of motor energy storage and automatic energy
re-storage after the breaker comes on are available to ensure that
the breaker can come on immediately after it gets disconnected.
The breaker also allows manual energy pre-storage.
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110

Operating voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Ue 9.6 Separator between phases
Reliable switching voltage (V) 75/150VA 75/150W The separator is installed between the phases of the line
bank to improve the insulating ability between the phases of the
Energy storage time <4s
breaker.
Frequency of operation At most 3 times in a minute
Power operating mechanism (Inm=1600A)
> >> C-30

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
9.7 Key lock 9.11 The drawer type of air circuit breaker about any working
The OFF pushbutton of the breaker can be locked in the position position locking device
of depress, and at this time, the breaker cannot be closed for After the breaker body is locked automatically in any working
operation; after the user selects the option, the factory provides position, it is necessary to turn the key to unlock the matter so
locks and keys; one breaker is provided with one independent that the breaker body can be moved to the next working position
lock and one key for the one lock; two breakers, two by turning the handle. (This function available for 3200 to 6300).
independent locks and one key for the two locks; three breakers,
three same locks and two same keys for the three locks. 9.12 Mechanical interlock
Note: a. Steel cable interlock for two breakers placed horizontally can
a. For the air circuit breaker with key interlock, when the key has realize the interlock between circuit breakers of similar or
to be pulled out, it is necessary to first press the OFF key, turn the different shells.
key anticlockwise, and then pull out the key. b. Joint rod interlock for two superimposed brewakers.
b. The key for the 1600 does not work for the 3200 and 6300
shell breakers and vice versa, so be on guard against the
distinction between them.
9.8 Pushbutton lock b. Interlock with the door for the breaker position (only for the
It is used to lock the button for opening and closing the breaker 1600 shell)
with the padlock used for such a purpose. (Padlocks to be When the breaker is in the position of connection and test, the
provided by users themselves) cabinet door must not be opened; when the breaker is in the
separation position, the cabinet door is allowed to be opened.
9.9 Door frame and lining pad

They are installed on the door of the distribution cabinet room to 9.14 Counter
seal it with a protection level of up to IP40. The counter counts the number of mechanical operations of the
circuit breaker for the user.
9.10 Drawer type of air circuit breaker “separation” position
locking device
For the “separation” position of the open frame (draw-out)
circuit breaker, a lock rod can be pulled out to lock the matter,
and the breaker locked will be unable to be turned towards the
TEST or CONNECTION position.
Padlocks have to be provided by users themselves.
C-31 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
2m(max)
C
Circuit diagram Possible operating mode
1QF 2QF
0 0
1QF 2QF 0 1
1 0
Note: a. When it is necessary to bend the steel cable, the transition arc at the bend shall be larger than R120mm, in
order to ensure the flexible movement of the steel cable.
b. Check the steel cable to see if there is sufficient lubricating oil in it, in order to ensure the flexible movement of
the steel cable.
Mounting dimensions of the interlock with the door for the status of the NA8-1600 air circuit breaker (fixed type)
Reset
A direction
Right side panel of

the circuit breaker
Small mounting panel
Mounting panel
A direction
Gusset plate
OFF position
This panel is to be R60
designed by users
themselves
ON position
Right mounting Mounting hole

117.6
panel of the
Mounting circuit breaker
20.5
hole Mounting plane
59
> >> C-32

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Mounting panel
Small mounting panel

Mounting panel
Mounting panel
OFF position
Gusset plate 23° 0′

0″
R100
26° 0′
0″
ON position
10
182
96.21 Right mounting

panel of the
circuit breaker Mounting
Mounting
hole
hole
13.5
45 30.7
Mounting dimensions of the interlock with the door for the status of the NA8-1600 air circuit breaker (draw-out type)
Reset
A direction
A direction
Block breaker drawer right side plate
Gusset plate
Mounting panel
This panel is to be R60
designed by users
themselves
Bottom plate of the

draw-out socket of
150
the breaker
8.4
Mounting hole
14
Mounting plane
35
C-33 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
Block breaker drawer right side plate
Mounting panel
Mounting panel
OFF position
C
Gusset plate 23°0′0″
R100
26°
0′0″
ON position
14
10
15.5 18
26.21
185.8
218
96.21 Bottom plate of the

draw-out socket of
the breaker
Mounting hole
Mounting plane
80
10. Installation
10.1 Following items to be checked before installation
Check the label plate on the breaker panel to see if it conforms to the specifications of the ordered goods.
a. Rated current;
b. Under voltage release voltage and delay time;
c. Shunt release voltage;
d. Closing electromagnet voltage;
3. Motor voltage.
10.2 Before installation, operation, maintenance and inspection, you shall read this manual, and consult the manufacturer for questions,
if any.
10.3 Preparations before installation
Before the breaker is installed, check the insulation resistance of the breaker by using a 1000V megohmmeter according to
regulations; when the surrounding media temperature is 25℃±5℃ and the relative humidity is 50%~70%, the insulation resistance
shall not be less than 20 megohm.
The place with the insulation resistance to be tested includes: the place between various phases and between various phases and
the frame when the breaker is closed; the place between in- and out-lines of various phases when the breaker is switched off.
10.4 Installation of the fixed type breaker
Place the breaker into the distribution cabinet, and fasten it by using 4 pieces of M6(Inm=1600A) or M10(Inm=3200A or above)
bolts and washers.
The breaker shall be installed stably with no additional mechanical stress to avoid damage of the breaker or bad contact of the main
bus bar.
10.5 Installation of the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker
Take the breaker body out of the draw-out socket, and install the socket in the distribution cabinet, and fasten it by using 4 pieces of
M6(Inm=1600A) or M10 (Inm=3200A or above) bolts and washers; the breaker shall be installed stably with no additional mechanical
stress to avoid damage of the breaker or bad contact of the main bus bar and the secondary circuit. After the work is completed, mount
the body into the draw-out socket.
10.6 The specifications of the wiring copper bars for the primary circuit of the breaker shall meet the copper bar specifications used
under the conditions of conventional heating in GB14048.2.
10.7 The breaker shall be grounded substantially.
> >> C-34

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
11. Common faults and troubleshooting
Listed below are the problems which users may encounter during installation, adjustment, and operation of the breaker, and the possible
reasons and elimination methods.
No. Technical problems Possible causes Diagnosis and trouble shooting
1 Check the breaking current and operating time on the intellectual controller;
2 Analyze the operation of the load and power network;
3 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if overload is confirmed;
Overload fault tripping (long 4 For lack of match between the actual running current and the long time delay
time delay indicator on) operating current, please modify the long-time delay operating current setting
for a proper match and protection according to the actual running current;
5 Press the reset button to close the breaker again.
2 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if short circuit is confirmed;
Breaker tripping Short-circuit fault tripping
3 Check the setting value of the intellectual controller;
1 (fault indicator on) (short time delay or
4 Check to see whether the breaker is in good condition, and determine
instantaneous indicator on)
whether it can be closed for operation;
2 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if it is confirmed that there is a
grounding fault;
Grounding fault tripping (grounding 3 If no grounding fault is detected, please determine whether the grounding
fault indicator on) fault current setting is proper, and can be well matched with the actual
protection; if not, the setting shall be modified;
Under voltage release tripping 1 Check to see if the power voltage is lower than 70%Ue;
2 Check the under voltage release and control unit for fault;
Mechanical interlock action Check the working condition of two breakers equipped with mechanical interlock.
1 Whether the under voltage release has been energized;
Under voltage release no attracting 2 Whether the power voltage is lower than 85%Ue;
3 Whether the under voltage release or control unit malfunctions, if so, the
release shall be replaced.
Breaker fails to Reset button fails to reset Press the reset button to close the breaker again.
2
close Put the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker to the right position by rocking
Open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker fails
to be put to the right position by rocking (with it locked in the connection position)
Open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker Check the contact status of the secondary circuit, and shoot the trouble, if any
bad contact for the secondary circuit
1 Check the motor control power supply and see if it is well providing power,
Breaker fails to pre-store energy and the voltage must be ≥85%Us;
2 Check the status of the motor energy storage mechanism.
1 Check the power voltage of the closing electromagnet, and it must be ≥85%Us;
Closing electromagnet trouble 2 if there is any trouble in the closing electromagnet to enable the attracting,
it shall be replaced.
1 There may be short circuit current when the matter is switched on, and in this
case you shall find and shoot the trouble;
2 Check to see if there is any overload current in the circuit, find and shoot the
Breaker trips Tripping immediately trouble, if any;
3 after closed Delay tripping 3 Check to see whether the breaker mechanism is in good condition;
4 Check the setting value of the intellectual controller for reasonability, and a re-
setting process is necessary if not reasonable;
The breaker fails to open in power-
1 Check the shunt release circuit for reliable connection and the shunt release
Breaker fails driven mode
4 for trouble, and the release shall be replaced if the fault is confirmed;
to open The breaker fails to open in manual
2 Check the operating mechanism for mechanical fault.
mode
1 Check the motor energy storage mechanism control power voltage, and the
Energy failed to be stored in power- voltage shall be ≥85%Us; check the status of the circuit connection;
Breaker fails to driven mode
5 store energy 2 Check the motor;
Can’t achieve manual energy storage Energy storage mechanism malfunction.
Breaker fails to be
pulled out when the Rock rod fails to be pulled out; breaker
6 open frame (draw-out) fails to completely reach the Pull out the rock rod.
circuit breaker is in the SEPARATION position Put the breaker completely to the SEPARATION position by rocking.
SEPARATION position
The “drawer” has seized up for foreign
Open frame (draw-out) matters fall in it; damage in the Check it for foreign matters and for condition of the rack and gear.
circuit breaker fails to be mechanism for putting in by rocking or
7 Turn the key on the “drawer” to unlock the matter.
put to the CONNECTION the gear thereof; position locking device
position by rocking fails to be unlocked
Intellectual controller fails to be
energized by power supply; improper 1 Check to see if the intellectual controller power supply is well connected and
input voltage for the auxiliary power works well;
No display on the supply; improper secondary output
8 intellectual controller 2 Cut off the intellectual controller control power supply, and then connect the
voltage for the transmitter; unreliable power supply; If the fault is still present, there may be some troubles in the
screen connection between the secondary controller which has to be replaced.
output terminal of the transmitter and
the controller;
C-35 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8
12. Order specification
User Order amount Order date Tel

Type and size □ NA8-1600 □ NA8-3200 □ NA8-6300
Rated current □ 200 □ 400 □ 630 □ 800 □ 1600 □ 2000 □ 2500 □ 4000 □ 5000
(In)A □ 1000 □ 1250 □ 1600 □ 3200 □ 6300
Installation mode □ Draw-out type □ Fixed type (no such products for over 4000A)
Connection mode □ Horizontal connection □ Vertical connection □ Front connection □ Mixed connection (connection mode to be noted)
Number of poles □ 3P □ 4P
Factory’s setting values: IR=1In, 2s(6IR); definite-time limit Isd=8IR, 0.4s; inverse-time limit Isd=6IR, tsd=0.2s@6IR, Ii=12In; Ig is
off (if it is on, it shall be specially stated, the default value is Ig=0.5×In, the inverse-time limit shearing factor is k=OFF, thetime is
T=0.4s). If the user has some requirements different from the defaulting, please write the numerical values on the line below.
C
Long-time delay Operating current setting: In (0.4~1 ON/OFF)
protection IR Operating time setting (@6IR): s(1,2,4,8,12,16,20,24,30)
Setting of the
protection Operating current setting:□ Definite-time limit IR (1.5~10，OFF)；
parameter Short-circuit short-time □ Inverse-time limit IR (1.5~10，OFF)；
delayprotection Isd Operating time setting:□ Definite-time limit s (0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1.0);
□ Inverse-time limit:0.1tR
Short-circuit instantaneous
Operating current setting: In (1~15,OFF)
protection Ii
Operating current setting: IR

Ground protection Ig Operating time setting: s (0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1.0);
Inverse-time limt shearing factor k: (1.5~6,OFF)
Intellectual
Selecting the type □ Standard type □ Multifunctional type
controller
Power input □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V □ DC24V
Three-section protection against over current Neutral line or grounding fault protection Current measurement
Basic function Test function Fault inquiry/memory function Self-diagnostic function
□ Over voltage protection □ Under voltage protection □ Over frequency protection

Optional function □ Under frequency protection □ Voltage unbalance protection □ Phase sequence protection
(this function to be □ Voltage measurement □ Frequency measurement □ Measurement of harmonic current
added as required □ Power factor measurement □ Power measurement □ Phase sequence detection
by the user, and to □ Voltage unbalance rate measurement □ Electric energy measurement □ Contact equivalent
be matched with □ Power network history parameter recording function □ Leakage protection
the controller type) □ MCR make/break function □ Load monitoring function □ Signal contact output function
□ Communication function □ ZSI regional interlocking protection function
Note: When the product is a multifunctional controller as arranged by the user, the communication function and the like are the basic function configuration.
□ Instantaneous □ Time delay s (1-2-3-4-5-6-7s provided for the 1600 shell, optional but not adjustable;
Under voltage
0.5-1-3-5s for the 3200 shell, optional and adjustable)
release
□ AC400V □ AC230V
Accessories Shunt release □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V
for standard
configuration Closing electromagnet □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V
□ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V

□ 4 groups of changeover contacts □ 6 groups of changeover contacts (Inm=1600 not available for DC)
Auxiliary contact
□ 3 N.O. and 3 N.C. □ 4 N.O. and 4 N.C. (Inm=3200 and 6300 provided)
One breaker is provided with one independent lock and one key
Two breakers are provided with two independent locks and one key (the same key/lock not available for the 1600 and
Key lock 3200/6300 shell breakers)
Two breakers are provided with three independent locks and two keys (the same key/lock not available for the 1600 and
Optional 3200/6300 shell breakers)
accessories
Mechanical Two-breaker interlock solution □ Steel cable interlock (can realize the interlock between circuit breakers of similar or different shells)
interlock □ Joint rod interlock (can realize the interlock between similar shells)
□ Button locking device □ SEPARATION position locking device □ Door interlock

□ Counter □ Separator between phases
Note: Extra costs are needed for the optional functions, operational accessories and the like for the breaker.
NA8-1600 NA8-3200 NA8-6300
> >> C-36

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
2. Type designation
N A 8G - □/□
No. of poles
(pole 3 may be omitted)
Improved product code
ACB
Company code
3.1 When the ambient air temperature is -5℃ - +40℃ , the

mean value is no greater than +35℃ within 24 hours.
NA8G Air Circuit Breaker Note: If the upper limit is higher than +40℃ or lower limit
lower than -5℃ in work, discussions shall be made
1. General between the user and the manufacturer.
3.2 Altitude: not higher than 2000m for the installation site.
With a rated current from 200A to 6300A, and rated 3.3 When the ambient air temperature is +40℃ , the relative
operational voltage 415V, 690V, 50Hz, the NA8G series humidity of the air shall not be higher than 50%;
air circuit breaker (hereinafter referred to as “breaker”) a higher relative humidity is allowed at a lower
is mainly used in the distribution network to distribute temperature; for example, for the wettest month, the
electric energy and protect lines and power equipment maximum relative humidity averaged shall be 90% while
from being damaged by overload, under voltage, short the lowest temperature averaged in that month +20℃,
circuit, single-phase grounding and other failures. and special measures shall be taken for the condensation
occasionally produced due to temperature change.
Having art-oriented appearance, high breaking capacity, 3.4 Class of pollution: 3
zero arcover and varities of intellectualized protection 3.5 The installation category of the breaker’ main circuit is IV;
functions, that breaker can be used for selective protection when the rated operational voltage of the main circuit is
with accurate action, no unnecessary power cut, and less than or equal to AC400V, The installation category
better power supply reliability. of the control circuit and auxiliary circuit is Ⅲ, apart
from the similarity between the under voltage release
The product allows the wire to enter or enter from the coil and the intellectual controller’s power transformer
lower port, and the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker primary coil and the breaker;
has isolation function. When the rated operational voltage of the major loop is
greater than AC400V and less than or equal to AC690V, it is
That breaker can be widely used for power stations, necessary for the control circuit and auxiliary circuit to be
factories, mines and modern tall buildings, especially isolated from the major loop, and the highest operational
the distribution system in the intelligent building, voltage of the control circuit and auxiliary circuit is AC400V,
and also widely used in green projects such as wind the installation category of the control circuit and auxiliary
and solar power generation. circuit being Ⅲ.
This product meets the requirements in

IEC/EN 60947-2
C-37 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
4. Product structure
Body structure
Wiring terminals of the secondary circuit Shunt release

Closing electromagnet
Under voltage release
OFF pushbutton C
Energy storage handle
ON/OFF indication
ON pushbutton
Intellectual controller Energy storage indication Operating mechanism
Wiring terminals of the secondary circuit Zero arcover hood
Fault-breaking indicator reset button
Energy storage handle

Breaking button Making button
Breaking/Making indicator Energy storage &

release indicator
Intelligent controller
Data plate
> >> C-38

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Breaker off and energy storage over Breaker off and no energy storage Breaker off and energy storage over Breaker off and no energy storage
Depress Depress Depress Depress

Depress Depress Depress Depress
Energy Energy
storage storage Energy Energy
storage storage
Drawout structure
Wiring terminals of the secondary circuit
Side panel
Safety separator
Baffle push rod
Guide rail
Rocking handle work hole
Extraction draw plate
Rocking handle deposit hole
Position indication Locking device
C-39 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Connected Connected
Test Test
Disconnected Disconnected
Connected: both main circuit and secondary circuit are connected Test: the main circuit is disconnected,
the safety separator works well,
and the secondary circuit is connected.
Connected C
Test
Disconnected
Disconnected: neither main circuit nor secondary circuit is connected
(1)Draw-out socket placed horizontally (2)Pull out the guide rail
(3)Place the breaker body on the guide rail (4)Move the breaker body onto the guide rail with a snap
(5)Push the breaker body in, and turn the break body to the working position
> >> C-40

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
5.1 Main technical parameters
Shell grade rated current Inm A 1600 3200 6300
200,400,630,800, 1600,2000,2500,
Rated current In A 4000,5000,6300 6300
1000,1250,1600 2900,3200
Nominal insulation voltage Ui V 690 1000 1000
Rated operational voltage Ue V 415 690 415 690 415
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu kA 50 25 100 65 120
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics kA 40 20 80 65 100
Rated short time withstand current Icw,1s kA 40 20 80 65 100
Frequency of operation (number of times/h) 20 10 10
Mechanical life 3000 3000 2000

Electrical Life 1000 1000 500
Flashover distance mm 0 0 0
Wire to enter from the Wire to enter from the Wire to enter from the
Line incoming pattern
upper or lower port upper or lower port upper or lower port
fixed type kg 22/26.5 52.5/66.5 -

Weight (3 poles/4 poles)
draw-out type kg 38/55 98/121 210/233 233
Size(3 poles/4 poles) fixed type 320×(254/324)×258 406×(422/537)×329 -

Height × width × depth draw-out type 351×(282/352)×352 439×(435/550)×445 439×(835/928)×501 439×928×501
5.2 Capacity-reducing usage

5.2.1 Capacity-reducing at different temperatures
The following table shows the continual current-loading capacity of the circuit breakers and buses in each wiring mode
at the corresponding ambient environment temperatures and under the conditions of the satisfaction of conventional heating
with a similarity in capacity reducing between the breaker connected in a mixed way and the breaker connected horizontally.
Style wiring Draw-out type

mode ambient Front/rear horizontal wiring mode Rear vertical wiring mode
temperature℃ -5~40 45 50 55 60 -5~40 45 50 55 60
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
630 630 630 630 550 630 630 630 630 580
1600 800 800 800 800 700 800 800 800 800 700
1000 1000 1000 950 900 1000 1000 1000 950 900
1250 1250 1250 1150 1050 1250 1250 1250 1200 1100
1600 1550 1500 1450 1350 1600 1600 1550 1500 1450
1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950
3200 2500 2500 2500 2450 2350 2500 2500 2500 2500 2400
2900 2900 2900 2800 2700 2900 2900 2900 2900 2800
3200 3200 3100 3000 2900 3200 3200 3200 3050 2900
4000 4000 4000 3900 3800 4000 4000 4000 3900 3800
6300 5000 5000 4700 4600 4400 5000 5000 4800 4650 4500
6300 6100 6000 5500 5200 6300 6100 6000 5500 5200
C-41 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
5.2.2 Capacity-reducing at different altitudes
When the altitude is higher than 2000m, there will appear changes in insulation property, cooling performance, pressure,
and the performance can be modified in reference to the following table.
Altitude(m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Insulation withstand voltage(V) 3500 3000 2500 2000
Insulation voltage(V) 1000 800 700 600
Rated operational voltage(V) 690 580 500 400
Rated operational current(A) 1×In 0.96×In 0.92×In 0.87×In
5.3 Power loss

Power loss is the loss at each pole which is measured when the breaker is charged with the rated current. C
Power loss
Breaker type Rated current Draw-out type Fixed type
200 115 45
400 140 80
630 161 100
800 215 110
1000 230 120

NA8G-1600
1250 250 130
1600 460 220
1600 390 170
2000 470 250

NA8G-3200
2500 600 260
2900 600 260
3200 670 420

550
4000 -
NA8G-6300
5000 590 -
6300 950 -
Note: The data and parameters in the above technical documentation results from tests and theoretical calculation,
and can only be used as a general type selection guide.They cannot replace industrial practical experience or proof test.
5.4 Recommended bus for the breaker and recommendation for users to install the buses
Inm(A) NA8G-1600 NA8G-3200 NA8G-6300
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 2900 3200 4000 5000 6300
Thickness(mm) 5 5 5 5 5 8 10 6 6 5 10 10 10 10 10
Busbar Width(mm) 20 50 40 50 60 60 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Number of buses 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 3 4 5 7 8
> >> C-42

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
6. Dimensions and connection
NA8G-1600 (In=200A ~1250A) Draw-out type
(horizontal connection is the default by the factory, vertical one to be made by users themselves).
210 36
a
275
149
310
7
351
78.5 95 76

282(3P)
352(4P) (to be ordered separately)
2-φ6.5
149(3P)
155(4P)
95
2-φ6.5×10
7
35
75.5(4P)
78.5(3P)
95 76
145(3P) 63
215(4P) 345(Connecting position)
4P Central line 391(Separating position)
3P Central line Wires connected vertically
12×φ11(3P) 60
16×φ11(4P)
15
25
N Pole
In(A) a(mm) Note: If users intend to change the
35
200, 400, 630 5 horizontal connection into vertical one

76 76 76 800, 1000 10 on site, they need to replace the upper
1250 15
Drawing illustrating the distance between mounting holes and lower buses on both sides with
the same one as the central bus.
NA8G-1600 (In=1600A) Draw-out type

210 36 Separator between phases

15
275
310
179
7
351
63.5
95 76
282(3P)
352(4P)

2-φ6.5
95
2-φ6.5×10
35
149(3P)
155(4P)
145(3P) 63 7
215(4P)
78.5(3P)
75.5(4P)
4P Central line
3P Central line 95 76
24×φ11(3P) 85
15
32×φ11(4P) 35
N pole 435(Connecting position)
35
80.5

Note: If users intend to change the
horizontal connection into vertical one
on site, they need to replace the upper
101 101 101
Drawing illustrating the distance between mounting holes
and lower buses on both sides with
C-43 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-1600 (200A~1250A) Fixed type

210 22
a
320
149
281
275
7 C
48.5
100 92
237(3P) 251
307(4P)
324(4P)

4-φ7
100
149(3P)
155(4P)
237(3P)
307(4P)
7
48.5(3P)
45.5(4P)
100 92
4P Central line
251
12×φ11(3P) 3P Central line
16×φ11(4P) 60 Wires connected vertically
N Pole 25
15
Note: If users intend to change the

35
In(A) a(mm)
76 76 76
200, 400, 630 5 on site, they need to replace the upper
Drawing illustrating the distance between mounting holes 800, 1000 10 and lower buses on both sides with
1250 15 the same one as the central bus.
NA8G-1600 (In=1600A) Fixed type

210 22

320
275
149(3P)
155(4P)
281
7
48.5(3P)
45.5(4P)
237(3P) 100 92
307(4P) 341
254(3P)
324(4P) Wires connected vertically
4-φ7
100

237(3P)
307(4P)
15
4P Central line
3P Central line
179
24-φ11(3P)
32-φ11(4P) 85
15
N Pole 35
7
35
80.5
33.5
100 92 Note: If users intend to change the

341
101 101 101
on site, they need to replace the upper
Drawing illustrating the distance between mounting holes
and lower buses on both sides with
> >> C-44

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-1600 Draw-out type NA8G-1600 Fixed type
Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
220 220
10-φ5 8-φ5
118
120
322
285
320
Breaker mounting panel Breaker mounting panel

118
6
78 118.5
From the center of the mounting hole on the right side of the breaker From the center of the mounting hole on the right side of the breaker
258 258
NA8G-3200 Draw-out type

size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
217.5(3P) 217.5
332.5(4P) 52 386 7
385
240
Datum line 2
199
Datum line 1
371
328
155
11×17
φ11
175
Datum line 2
φ14
268
376
φ14
11×1 7
18
145
21.5
97
10
47
162.5(3P) 162.5 10×φ6

277.5(4P) Datum line 1
Datum line
Size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
C-45 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-3200(In=1600A~2500A) Draw-out type

(horizontal connection is the default by the factory).
52
78 50 φ11
C
25
14
29
133
115 115 115
Datum line
84
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, they only have to turn the bus by 90°

(vertical connection to be made by users themselves).
42
25
14
φ11
78
55
115 115 115
Datum line
25
57.5
Note: If users want to change the vertical connection into horizontal one on site, they only have to turn the bus by 90°
NA8G-3200 Draw-out type; Front connection
C 86 25 12-φ13
15
29
115 115 115

Datum line
301
In(A) C
1600, 2000, 2500 20
2900, 3200 30
29
16.5
> >> C-46

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-3200(In=2900, 3200A) Draw-out type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
52
25
φ11 100 25
29
14
133
126 126 126
Datum line
84
NA8G-3200(In=2900、 3200A) Draw-out type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
7
42
14
φ11
25
100
57
115 115 115
Datum line
25
35.5
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site,
it is necessary to replace the upper and lower buses for the N and B phases with the same one as the A and C phases.
NA8G-3200 Fixed type
N
402
Datum line 2
163
13
11 200(3P) 200 11 246 44 7

315(4P)
Datum line 1
C-47 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-3200 Fixed type, size of the hole to be drilled on the panel
4×φ 12 371
328
150
311
C
268
72.5
200(3P) 200
8×φ6
315(4P)
Datum line Datum line
NA8G-3200 Fixed type (horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
Ferrous materia l
32
a
86 50 12-φ13
18.5
112
In(A) a(mm)
115 115 115 1600~2500 20
Datum line 2900~3200 30
55
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, they only have to additionally install a vertical bus.
NA8G-3200 Fixed type (vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
Ferrous materia l
32
29
a
14
φ11
100
57
115 115 115

In(A) a(mm)
1600~2500 20
25
55
Datum line
2900~3200 30
45
Note: If users want to change the horizontal connection into vertical one on site, they only have to additionally install a vertical bus.
> >> C-48

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
NA8G-6300 In=(4000A~5000A) Draw-out type
710.5(4P)
617.5(3P) 217.5 391

232
Datum line 2
199
Datum line 1
371
328
φ14
155
175
268
11×17
376
Datum line 2
145
18
97
162.5
21.5
703(3P)
47
10×φ6
Datum line 1
Datum line 1
818(4P)
NA8G-6300 In=(6300A) Draw-out type

710.5 217.5 391 7

240
Datum line 2
199
Datum line 1
371
328
φ14
155
175
268
11×17
376
Datum line 2
145
18
97
162.5
21.5
818
47
10×φ6
Datum line 1
Datum line 1
C-49 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
(vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
29
115 N pole
φ11 103 129.5 105 142 105 142 105
30
125
25
57
C
14
10.5
they only have to additionally install a vertical bus.

(horizontal connection is the default by the factory)
N pole
28-Φ13
100 155 210
20
40
103
30
112
55
182 247 247 170.5
92
NA8G-6300(In=6300A) Draw-out type

(vertical connection to be made by users themselves)
14
115
φ11 103 130 207 130 207 130
30
125
25
57
29
10.5
NA8G-6300(In=63000A) Draw-out type

horizontal connection is the default by the factory
180 260
20
40
103
112 30
24-Φ13
80
320 320 140
92
> >> C-50

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
7. Secondary circuit wiring
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8G-1600 optional standard type intellectual controller
Fault indication
N A B C
HL2 HL3 HL4

HL1 SB2 SB1
XT 3 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55 FU
Breaker body
M L1
QF F DT Q/QY
SAL
DF1 DF2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 DF8 DF9 DF10 DF11 DF12 Control power supply
SA L2(N)
TA
FU
XT 1 2 5 7 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56
+DC24V -
S
Power
Energy -driven ON OFF
Main circuit Intellectual controller Open Close Under storage
energy indication indication Auxiliary contact available for users AC auxiliary contact for standby application
voltage indication storage
DT——closing electromagnet F——shunt release Q/QY—under voltage release SAL—sensitive switch

SA——travel switch M——energy storage motor DF1 - DF12—auxiliary contact FU—fuse
SB1~SB2——pushbutton HL1~HL4——indicator light XT—connection terminal TA—current transformer
QF——breaker S——power module
#
1 and #2: input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply
# # # #
4, 5 and 6: faulty tripping contact output ( 5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A)
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8
with a common point available conventionally, two open
and two close from DF9 to DF12 with a common point available
additionally for Inm = 1600 when special order is made
for alternating current, four open and four close from
DF1 to DF8 with a common point available only for
Inm = 1600 in case of direct current,
contact capacity (DC220V 0.5A).
2. Various control voltages of the 1600 has to be put
to #1 and #2 after the power module inputs DC24V.
C-51 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8G-3200 to 6300 optional standard type intellectual controller
Fault indication
N A B C
HL2 HL3 HL4

HL1 SB2 SB1
C
XT 3 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55
FU
Breaker body
M L1
QF F DT Q/QY
SAL Intellectual controller
DF1 DF2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 DF8 DF9 DF10 DF11 DF12 Control power supply
SA L2(N)
TA
FU
XT 1 2 5 7 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56
+DC24V -
S
3200, 6300 shell controller power supply: DC220V,DC110V; 1600 shell controller power supply
Power
Under Energy -driven ON OFF
Main circuit Intellectual controller Open Close storage
voltage indication energy indication indication
Auxiliary contact available for users AC auxiliary contact for standby application
storage

QF——breaker S——power module
#
1 and #2: input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply
# # # #
4, 5 and 6: faulty tripping contact output ( 5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A)
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8
with a common point available conventionally, one open and
one close from DF9 to DF10 with a common point available additionally,
contact capacity (DC220V 0.5A)
2. When the controller voltage of the 3200 and 6300 shells
is AC230V/400V, it can be directly put to #1 and #2; if the voltage
is DC220V/110V, it has to be put to #1 and #2 after the power module inputs DC24V.
3. The wiring of the part indicated by dashed lines shall be made by users.
> >> C-52

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8G-1600 optional type multifunctional controller
FU
L1
N
PE
L N PE
Profibus-DP
ST-4 power module
- + - + - + - +
ST-DP
Device
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
N A B C
+ + COM D11 D12 D13
DC24V
ST201 SB2 SB1
D01 D02 D03
HL1 12 13 14 15 16 17 HL2 HL3 HL4
Green Red
XT 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55
PE
QF M
D14 F DT Q/QY
SAL D13 D15 D16
DF1 DF2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 DF8 DF9 DF10 DF11 DF12
SA
TA
Breaker body
XT 1 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56
+DC24V-
S
Power
Under Energy -driven ON OFF
Main circuit Intellectual controller Open Close voltage
storage
energy indication indication
Auxiliary contact available for users AC auxiliary contact for standby application
indication
storage

QF——breaker S——power module ST-DP —communication module ST201—relay module (optional)
ST-4——power module (optional)
# #
1 and 2: input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply
#
3：PE
#
4, #5 and #6: faulty tripping contact output ( #5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A)
#
7, #8 and #9: auxiliary contact output ( #8 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A)
#
#
14 and #15：RS485 communication interfaces (in case of communication type)
#
16, #17, #18, #19, #26 and #27: programmable input/output points (DC110V 0.5A, AC250V，5A)
#
20, #21, #22, and #23: A, B, C, and N voltage signal output (in case of multifunction type) (maximum voltage AC400V)
#
24 and #25: to be externally connected to the mutual inductor input
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point available conventionally,
two open and two close from DF9 to DF12 with a common point available additionally for Inm = 1600 when
special order is made for alternating current. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a
common point available only for Inm = 1600 in case of direct current, contact capacity (AC250V 5A).
2. The wiring of the part indicated by dashed lines to be made by users.
C-53 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Connection diagram for the secondary circuit of the NA8G-3200 and 6300 optional type multifunctional intellectual controller
FU
L1
N
PE
L N PE
Profibus-DP
ST-4 power module
ST-DP
Device
-
12 13
+ -
14 15
+ -
16 17
+ - +
18 19
C
N A B C
+ + COM D11 D12 D13
DC24V
ST201 SB2 SB1
D01 D02 D03
HL1 12 13 14 15 16 17 HL2 HL3 HL4
Green Red
XT 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 55
PE
QF M
D14 F DT Q/QY
SAL D13 D15 D16
DF1 DF2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 DF8 DF9 DF10 DF11 DF12
SA
TA
Breaker body
XT 1 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 40 43 46 49 52 56
+ DC24V -
S
3200, 6300 shell controller power supply: DC220V,DC110V; 1600 shell controller power supply
Power
Under Energy -driven ON OFF Auxiliary contact
Main circuit Intellectual controller Open Close voltage
storage
energy indication indication available for users
AC auxiliary contact for standby application
indication
storage

QF——breaker S——power module ST-DP —communication module ST201—relay module (optional)
ST-4——power module (optional)
# #
1 and 2: input (terminals) for intellectual controller auxiliary power supply
#
3：PE
#
4, #5 and #6: faulty tripping contact output ( #5 is the common terminal, AC250V 5A)
#
#
#
14 and #15：RS485 communication interfaces (in case of communication type)
#
16, #17, #18, #19, #26 and #27: programmable input/output points (DC110V 0.5A, AC250V，5A)
#
20, #21, #22, and #23: A, B, C, and N voltage signal output (in case of multifunction type) (maximum voltage AC400V)
#
24 and #25: to be externally connected to the mutual inductor input
Notes: 1. Four open (contacts) and four close from DF1 to DF8 with a common point available conventionally,
one open and one close from DF9 to DF10 with a common point available additionally when special order is made
for alternating current. Contact capacity AC250V 5A
2. When the controller voltage of the 3200 and 6300 shells is AC230V/400V, it can be directly put to #1 and #2;
if the voltage is DC220V/110V, it has to be put to #1 and #2 after the power module inputs DC24V.
3. The wiring of the part indicated by the dashed lines shall be made by users.
> >> C-54

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8. Intelligent controller and protective characteristics
8.1 User interface of the standard type controller
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 LED window LCD window capable of showing the current for each phase, various setting parameters,
rated current, fault current, tripping time, and the like
2 “ Ig ” limp Asymmetric grounding, neutral line fault indication
Over current long time delay fault indication
3 “ IR ” limp
Short-circuit short-time delay fault indication
4 “ Isd ” limp Short-circuit instantaneous fault indication
5 “ Ii ” limp Successively access to submenus at various levels by pressing the MENU key
To inquire the current for each phase at present:
6 “ MENU ” Pushbutton recurrently select the contents in the menus at various levels
Return to previous menu; the intellectual controller software is reset;
7 “ “ Pushbutton
RESET key must be pressed after the encoder switch position is adjusted;
the intellectual controller faulty tripping results in fault memory which
8 “ RESET ” Pushbutton
can be cleared only by pressing the RESET key;
There are (0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 0.98, 1.0)In,
nine settings altogether, for the over current long time delay current multiple setting
9 “ IR ” Knob switch There are (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 30)s, nine settings altogether,
for the over current long time delay time setting in case of 6Ir
10 “ tR ” Knob switch
There are (1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10)Ir, nine settings altogether,
11 “ Isd ” Knob switch for the short-circuit short-time delay current multiple setting
For the short-circuit short-time delay time setting, there are nine settings:
12 “ tsd ” Knob switch the inverse time limit, i.e., I2t on(0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4)s, the definite-time limit,
i.e., I2t OFF (0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4)s and X, i.e., closing the short-time delay
13 “ Ig ” Knob switch There are (A, B, C, D, E, F G, H, J), nine settings altogether, for the asymmetric grounding
(neutral line) current multiple setting
For the typical numerical values thereof, see the characteristic parameter table
14 “ test ” Pushbutto n Button for simulating instantaneous tripping test
15 “ tg ” Knob switch For the asymmetric grounding (neutral line) time setting, there are nine settings: the inverse time limit,
i.e., I2t on(0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4)s, and the definite-time limit, i.e., I2t OFF(0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4)s, and X,
i.e., closing the asymmetric grounding (neutral line)
16 “ Ii ” Knob switch Short-circuit instantaneous current multiple setting.
C-55 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.2 Default interface and menu structure for the standard type controller
The default interface for the standard type controller is described as Default interface for the standard type controller
follows (the current for each phase to be selected by pressing “ ”)
Operation method: Press MENU to go to the primary menu,
then press “ ” selection menu, and than press MENU Go to the 158A
secondary menu, press “ ” selection menu or modify the parameter, 150 N A B C
press RESET to return to the previous menu
100
50
Primary menu Secondary menu Third menu

Ia= 1000A
Ib= 1001A
Instantaneous value Ic= 998A
In= 0A
Ig= 0A
Magnitude of current Ia= 1300A
Ib= 1400A Simultaneously press MENU
Ic= 1380A
Maximum and “ ” to reset
In= 200A
Ig= 0A
Current thermal capacitance 0%
Long time delay setting current
Ir=1600A
and long time delay setting time
tr=Is@6Ir
Short time delay setting current
Isd=9600A
short time delay setting time
tsd=0.4s
Instantaneous setting current
Ii=16000A
Grounding setting current
Ig=1600A
Protection parameter
grounding setting time
tg=OFF
Instantaneous
10min
20min
Long time delay thermal capacitance 30min
cooling time = instantaneous 45min
1h
2h
3h
Long time delay protection = open Open
Close
For example: Long time-lag tripping
Ib=2894A
For example, long time-lag tripping actuation time 12.06s
Fault recording
Note: Up to 8 times of failures can be recorded Ir=1600A
the event having taken place, the time being 0:21 on the date of 0
Self-diagnostic alarm Alarm free

Contrast adjustment 45 (default) note: adjustable range from 35 to 60
Notes: a. The actual menu will very depend on the function selected by a user.
b. The controller starts screensaver automatically 10min after it is energized.
> >> C-56

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.3 User interface of the multifunctional controller
5
3
6
10
11
13 12
1 Brand "CHINT" Brand

LCD window capable of showing the current for each phase, various setting parameters, rated current,
2 LED window fault current, tripping time and the like
Switch to the set default menu (left arrow key, when it is necessary to move leftwards or rightwards
3 SET key
for the set interface).
Move the box select menu under the current menu to change the position of said box upwards,
4 UP key
and perform the setting of the parameter ADD in the parameter setup menu.
5 RETURN key Exit the current menu and go to the previous menu, or cancel the value of the current setup parameter.
Go to the next menu of the currently selected select box (go to the set state under the set interface, a
6 ACK key
nd exit the set state by double pressing the key).
Move the box select menu under the current menu to change the position of said box downwards,
7 DOWN key
and perform the setting of the parameter SUBTRACT in the parameter setup menu.
Switch to the inquiry default menu (right arrow key, when it is necessary to move leftwards
8 INQUIRY key
or rightwards for the set interface).
9 “ IR “ limp Over current long time delay fault indication
10 “ Isd “ limp Short-circuit short-time delay fault indication
11 “ test ” Button for simulating instantaneous tripping test
12 “ Ii “ limp Short-circuit instantaneous fault indication
13 “ Ig “ limp Asymmetric grounding, neutral line fault indication
C-57 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.4 Default interface and menu structure for the multifunctional controller Default interface for the multifunctional controller
The multifunctional controller provides 4 title menus (measurement
menu, parameter setup menu, protection parameter setup menu, 1002A
N A B C
and history record and maintenance menu) and 1 default menu. 150
100
50
0
C
8.4.1 Structure of the measurement menu
Primary menu Secondary menu Third menu Fourth menu Fifth menu
Ia Ia= 1000A
Ib Ib= 1001A
Ic Ic= 998A
In In= 0A
Ia= 1300A
Ib= 1400A
Instantaneous value
Ic= 1380A
Maximum
In= 200A
Reset(+/-)
Ia= 3%
Magnitude of currentⅠ Ib= 5%
Unbalance rate
Ic= 1%
Current thermal capacitance 100%
15min
Ia= 1000A
Real-time value
Ib= 1000A
Ia,Ib,
Ic= 998A
Ic,In
In= 0A
Required value Ia= 1050A
Ib= 1040A
Maximum
Ic= 1010A
In= 0A
Reset(+/-)
Uab= 380V
Ubc= 380V
Instantaneous value Uca= 380V
Uan= 220V
Voltage U Ubn= 220V
Ucn= 220V
Mean value Uav= 380V
Unbalance rate 0%
Phase sequence A,B,C
FrequencyF 50Hz
EP= 200kWh
Total electric energy EQ= 10kvarh
ES= 200kVAh
EP= 200kWh
Electric energy E Input electric energy
EQ= 200kvarh
EP= 0kWh
Output electric energy
EQ= 0kvarh
Electric energy reset Reset
> >> C-58

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
P= 660kW
P, Q, S Q= 0kvar
S= 660kVA
-1.00
Perceptual
Power factor
PFa= 1.00
PFb= 1.00
PFc= 1.00
Instantaneous value Pa= 220kW
Pa, Qa, Sa Qa= 0kvar
Sa= 220kVA
Pb= 220kW
Power P
Pb, Qb, Sb Qb= 0kvar
Sb= 220kVA
Pc= 220kW
Pc, Qc, Sc Qc= 0kvar
Sc= 220kVA
P= 660kW
P, Q, S Q= 0kvar
S= 660kVA
Required value P= 661kW
Q= 2kvar
Maximum
S= 662kVA
Reset(+/-)
Ia
Ib
Ia，Ib
Harmonic H Ic，In Ic
In
Waveform
Uan
Uan，Ubn Ubn
Ucn
Ucn
Ia= 1000A
I(A) Ib= 1000A
Ic= 1000A
In= 1000A
Uab= 380V
Base form
Ubc= 380V
U(V) Uca= 380V
Uan= 220V
Ubn= 220V
Ucn= 220V
Ia= 0.0%
Ib= 0.0%
I(%)
Ic= 0.0%
In= 0.0%
Uab= 0.0%
THD
Ubc= 0.0%
Uca= 0.0%
U(%)
Uan= 0.0%
Ubn= 0.0%
Ucn= 0.0%
Ia= 0.0%
Ib= 0.0%
thd I(%)
Ic= 0.0%
In= 0.0%
C-59 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Uab= 0.0%
Ubc= 0.0%
Uca= 0.0%
thd
Uan= 0.0%
U(%)
Ubn= 0.0%
Ucn= 0.0%
Ia FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ia(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31) C
Ib FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ib(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
I(3, 5, 7...31)
Ic FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ic(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
In FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
In(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
FFT
Uab FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Uab(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Ubc FFT THD=0.0%

0.0%
Ubc(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
U(3, 5, 7...31)
Ubc FFT THD=0.0%
0.0%
Ubc(3, 5. 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
Uca FFT THD=0.0%

0.0%
Uca(3, 5, 7...31)
3 5 7 9 11...31)
8.4.2 Structure of the parameter setup menu

Setting of the System type =3Φ4W 4CT
measurement meter Line incoming pattern =Wire to enter from the upper port
Test type =three section protection
Test tripping Test parameter =I:9999A
Test initiation =start
Remote locking Remote locking =unlock
Test & lock
Parameter locking
Parameter locking =locking
Parameter locking
(input) user password User password (change)
=0000 =0000
Address =3
Communication setting
Baud rate =9.6K
=DO1
Function setting
=regional interlocking
=DO1
Executive mode =N.O. pulse
I/O setting
=360s
I/O state
I/O state DO1 DO2 DO3 DI1
1 1 1 1
8.4.3 Structure of the protection parameter setup menu

Ir e.g.: =1000A=100%In
Current protection e.g.: =ON
Current protection Long time delay
Delay time e.g.: =C1，Is@6Ir
Cooling time e.g.: =3h
> >> C-60

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
e.g. =5000A=5.0Ir
Definite-time limit Operating current
e.g. =0.1s
Short-time delay
e.g. =2000A=2.0Ir
Inverse-time limit Delay time
e.g. =C1，0.Is@6Ir
Instantaneous Operating current e.g. =10000A=10.0In
Neutral phase protection Neutral phase protection e.g. =200%
Operating current e.g. =800A
Ground protection Delay time e.g. =0.4s
Coefficient of earthing e.g. =6.0
Current protection Starting current e.g. =600A
Starting time e.g. =0.1s
Grounding alarm
Return current e.g. =100A
Return time e.g. =0.1s
Operating current e.g. =8.0A
Leakage protection
Setup delay time e.g. =0.75s
Starting current e.g. =5.0A
Starting time e.g. =0.1s
Electric leakage alarm
Return current e.g. =4.0A
Executive mode e.g. =I the first method
Unloading value 1 e.g. =800A
Load Monitoring Unloading time 1 e.g. =50%tr
Unloading value 2 e.g. =700A
Unloading time 2 e.g. =25%tr
Executive mode e.g. =Alarm
Startup value e.g. =200V
Under voltage Starting time e.g. =0.2s
Return value e.g. =320V
Startup value e.g. =480V
Voltage protection Over voltage Starting time e.g. =1s
Return value e.g. =400V
Startup value e.g. =10%
U unbalanced Starting time e.g. =1s
Return value e.g. =5%
8.4.4 Structure of the history record and maintenance menu

Current alarm e.g. phase sequence alarm, Inverse power alarm, over frequency alarm...
Total number of times e.g.: 300
Number of operations e.g.: 219(ACK key, reset)
Total wear e.g.: 120
Contact wear
lContact wear e.g.: 20(ACK key, reset)
Product information Zhejiang CHINT electrics co., LTD
Under voltage tripping
T=0.20s
Umax=0V
11:24:59
e.g.:
6/17
Tripping record 1 Under voltage tripping
F=0.00Hz
2004/06/17
Uab= 0V
Ubc= 0V
Uca= 0V
...... ......
C-61 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
A phase short-circuit definite-time limit
T= 0.4s
I= 4300A
e.g. 15:28:25
8 (for) short-circuit definite-time limit
Tripping record 5/30
2004/05/30
Ia= 4300A
Ib= 4200A
Ic= 4000A
In= 150A C
Di input alarm
e.g.
Di1
1 DI (for) DI input alarm 2004/07/16
2004/07/16 20:38:45
Alarm logging ...... ......
e.ge Under voltage alarm
8 Under voltage alarm Umax= 0V
2004/06/20 2004/06/20
Note: Up to 8 times of alarms can be recorded 22:29:40
e.g. local switch on
1 (for) local switch on 2002/06/18
2002/06/18 9:30:56
Position changing record ...... ......
e.g. Test tripping
8 (for) testing tripping
2002/06/15
2002/06/15
10:30:20
Note: Up to 8 times can be recorded
Notes: a. The actual menu will very depend on the function selected by the user.
b. The controller starts screensaver automatically 10min later.
8.5 List of the controller functions
Standard configuration
Standard type (M type) Multifunction type (H type)
1.Quadruple over current protection (for overload, 1.Quadruple over current protection (for overload, short-time delay time,
short-time delay time, instantaneous, grounding); instantaneous, grounding); grounding corresponds to vector sum (T type);
grounding corresponds to vector sum (T type); 2.Parameter setup: fixed value keyboard setting function;
2.Parameter setup: fixed value setting position setting function 3.Current measurement function;
3.Current measurement 4.Current unbalance rate measurement function;
4.Test function; 5.Two test functions:
5.Fault recording function: 8 times of failures can be recorded; (1)Instantaneous tripping test simulated on the panel;
6.Self-diagnostic function; (2)Triple over current, grounding/leakage and operating time tests
7.MCR make/break function; simulated by software;
8.Human-machine interface: 33×22 LCD; 6.Fault recording function: 8 times of failures can be recorded;
9.Heat capacity measurement 7.Self-diagnostic function
8.MCR make/break function
9.Communication function: MODBUS protocol;
10.Alarm logging function;
11.Recording number of operations;
12.Contact wear
13.Position changing record
14.Human-machine interface: 28×43 LCD;
15.Heat capacity measurement
> >> C-62

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
Heat capacity measurement
Multifunction type (H type)
Standard type (M type)
P Function H Function
1.Voltage measurement; 1.Voltage measurement;

2.Voltage unbalance measurement; 2.Voltage unbalance measurement;
3.Frequency measurement; 3.Frequency measurement;
4.Phase sequence measurement; 4.Phase sequence measurement;
5.Electric energy measurement; 5.Electric energy measurement;
6.Power measurement; 6.Power measurement;
None
7.Power factor measurement; 7.Power factor measurement;
8.Earth-current grounding protection; 8.Earth-current grounding protection;
9.Leakage protection; 9.Leakage protection;
10.Load monitoring function; 10.Load monitoring function;
11.Quadruple D0 output function; 11.Quadruple DO output function;
12.DI input function; 12.DI input function;
13.Regional interlocking function; 13.Regional interlocking function;
14.Under and over voltage protection; 14.Under and over voltage protection;
15.Measurement of harmonic current;
16.Neutral phase protection
8.6 Characteristic parameters of the standard type intelligent controller
Over current protection characteristics

10000
5000
IR=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
TR=(1~30)s
100
50
20
T(s) 10
I2t ON
5
2 Isd=（1.5~10）IR
Isd=（1.5~10）IR
1
I2t OFF
0.5
0.2
0.1
Ii=（2~15)In
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X IR
Neutral line (grounding) fault protection characteristic

10000
5000
Ig=(0.2-1)In
1000 MAX 1200A
MIN 120A
500
200
100
50
20
T(s) 10
I2 ON
5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
I2 t OFF
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X In
C-63 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.6.1 Over current long time delay characteristic
Rated current range IR Error Line current I Operating time tR(s) Time (delay) error
≤1.05IR No actuation within 2h
＞1.30IR ＜1h and then actuate
(0.4~1)In ±10% 1.5IR 16 32 64 128 192 256 320 384 480
2.0 IR 9 18 36 72 108 144 180 216 270 ±15%
6.0 IR 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 30
Explanation for parameter setting
Long-time delay operating current adjustable:

IR=(0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8-0.9-0.95-0.98-1)×In, IR tR
and there are nine settings for option. (s)
.7 .8 .9 8 12 16
The long-time delay tripping time represents the inverse-time limit

.6 .95 4 20 C
.5 .98 2 24
characteristic, and nine optional settings are readily available for .4 1 1 30
tripping time in case of 6IR: tR=(1-2-4-8-12-16-20-24-30)s. ×In a 6IR
For setting, insert a small slotted screwdriver to the knob groove

as shown in the right drawing, gently turn it to make the arrow
of the knob point at the current and time set as required. Example 1: If it is known that in condition of I=6IR,
As shown in the figure, the over current long time delay protection the tripping time setting value is 2s,
current setting value IR=0.6In，and the delay tripping time is 2s and now the line current I=1.5IR,
(in the condition of 6IR). then the actual tripping time TR can be worked out by:
(1.5IR)2×TR=(6IR)2×2. The answer is obtained as TR=32s.
8.6.2 Short-circuit short-time delay inverse-time or definite-time limit protection

Rated current range Isd Error Line current I Operating time tsd(s) Time (delay) error
＜0.85Isd No actuation
＞ 1.15Isd Time-delay action
I 2t OFF 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
(1.5~10)IR
±15% I 2t ON ±15%
+OFF(Power off) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I＞10IR
I 2t ON
anti-time-limit delay:I 2Tsd=(10IR) 2tsd
I≤10IR
The short-circuit short-time delay protection operating current adjustable: Isd tsd
3 4 5 (s)
Isd=(1.5-2-2.5-3-4-5-6-8-10)×IR, and there are nine settings for option. .4 .4 .3
2.5 6 .3 .2
There are nine settings for the short-time delay tripping time, wherein 4 2 8 .2 .1
1.5 10 .1 X
settings represent the definite-time limit characteristic (i.e., I2t OFF), ON 2
OFF
×IR It
4 settings the inverse-time limit characteristic, and 1 setting the function
of closing the short-time delay (X).
When the tripping time is set as definite-time limit operating characteristic

Example 2: If it is known that the short-time delay
(i.e., the arrow points at the off area), the tripping time can be selected as
setting current is Isd=3IR,
tsd=0.1s-0.2s-0.3s-0.4s-x (i.e., the function of closing the short-time delay).
then the tripping time is set as tsd=0.2s
in the setting position of inverse
When the tripping time is set as inverse-time limit operating characteristic
time limit (I2t ON). Now the current is 7IR
(i.e., I2t ON), there are two cases: ① the case of I＞1.15Isd and I＞10IR
in the line current, then the short-time delay tripping time
represents the definite-time limit; ② the case of I＞1.15Isd and I≤10IR
can be worked out by calculation:
represents the inverse-time limit characteristic and the actual tripping time
1.5Isd=1.15×3IR=3.45IR
is calculated according to the formula I2Tsd=(10IR)2tsd, wherein I is the
Then I=7IR＞1.15Isd
line current, Tsd the actual tripping time, and tsd the setting tripping time.
The method for setting the current and time for the short-circuit And because I=7IR＜10IR
short-time delay protection is similar to that for over current long time So according to I2×Tsd=(10I)2tsd
delay protection. As shown in the figure, the current for the short-circuit (7IR)2×Tsd=(10IR)2×0.2
short-time delay protection is 3IR, and the tripping time is set as tsd=0.2s Tsd=0.41s
in the setting position of inverse time limit (I2t ON).
> >> C-64

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.6.3 Short-circuit instantaneous protection
Rated current range Ii Error Line current I Operating Characteristics

(2~15)In ≤0.85Ii no-action
±15%
+OFF(Power off) ＞1.15Ii action
The instantaneous protection operating current is adjustable:

Ii
Ii=[2-3-4-6-8-10-12-15-OFF]×In, and there are nine settings
8
for option. 6 10
4 12
3 15
The method for setting the current for the instantaneous protection 2 Off
is similar to that for over current long time delay protection setting.
As shown in the figure, the instantaneous protection current
setting value is 8In.
8.6.4 Single-phase grounding fault protection
Rated current range Ig Error Line current I Operating time tg(s) Time (delay) error
＜0.9Ig no-action
＞1.1Ig time-delay action
2
I T OFF 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
(A~J)In 2
±10% I T ON
+OFF(Power off) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±15%
I＞J
I 2T ON
anti-time-limit delay I 2Tg= ( J) 2tg
I≤J
Meaning of each setting position for Ig
Rated current In A B C D E F G H J Note

In≤400A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 ×In
400A<In≤1200A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 ×In
1200A<In 500A 640A 720A 800A 880A 960A 1040A 1120A 1200A
The single-phase grounding protection operating current is adjustable: Ig Tg

(s)
Ig=(A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-J)×In, and there are nine settings for option. D
E F .4 .4 .3
C G .3 .2
B H .2 .1
There are nine setting positions for the protective delay tripping time, A J
.1 X
wherein 4 settings represent the definite-time limit characteristic ON 2 Off
×In It
(i.e., I2t OFF), 4 settings the inverse-time limit characteristic (I2t ON),
and 1 setting the function of closing the grounding protection (X).
When the tripping time is set as definite-time limit operating

characteristic (i.e., the arrow points at the OFF area), the tripping Example 3: If it is known that the grounding fault protection
time can be selected as tg=0.1s-0.2s—0.3s-0.4s-x (i.e., the function setting current for the intellectual controller with a rated current
of closing the grounding protection). of In=800A is as the setting position of C, the tripping time is set
as the inverse time limit 0.4s.
When the tripping time is set as inverse-time limit operating Now there is a failure in the circuit, the line current I=400A,
characteristic (i.e., I2t ON), there are two cases: then the actual tripping time can be worked out; it can be seen
① in the case of I＞1.1Ig and I＞J, the result of the automatic from the table that the result is
changeover process is the definite-time limit operating characteristic, C=0.4 Ig=C×In=0.4×800=320A
tg=0.1s-0.2s-0.3s-0.4s; So I=400A＞1.1Ig
② The case of the current meeting the condition of 1.1Ig＜I≤J According to the formula I2Tg=(J)2tg
represents the inverse-time limit characteristic and the actual (400)2×Tg=(1.0×800)2×0.4
tripping time is calculated according to the formula I2Tg=(J)2tg.
Tg=1.6s
In the formula, I is the line current, Tg the actual operating time,
J the setting current, and tg the setting tripping time. The method
Note: For the intellectual controller, the current settings for the
for setting the parameter is similar to that for over current long
long- and the short-time delay and the instantaneous protection
time delay protection. As shown in the figure, the grounding
should not come across each other, and the condition of
protection current is C×In，and the tripping time setting is
IR＜Isd＜Ii must be ensured.
tg=0.4s in the setting position of inverse time limit (I2t ON).
C-65 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
8.7 Explanation for auxiliary functions 8.8 Explanation for display function
a. Explanation for test functions When the rated current is greater than or equal to 400A,
When onsite adjustment, periodical inspection or overhaul is the primary current shall not be lower than 0.4In for single phase，
made with the controller supported by the breaker, breaking several and 0.2In for three phases for normal operation of the breaker.
times is necessary by using the test functions of the controller to
check the cooperation of the controller and the breaker. When the rated current is less than 400A, the primary current shall
With the breaker on, press the T key, and the intellectual controller not be lower than 0.8In for single phase，and 0.4In for three
will trip instantaneously to cut off the breaker. phases for normal operation of the breaker.
Note: ① This function can be used only when onsite adjustment
or overhaul for the breaker is made, and shall not be used during Note: When the AC220V ST power module is energized, and the
the normal operation. voltage falls to AC120V, there will be no display on the controller
② Each time before the controller is switched on, it is necessary When the AC380V ST power module is energized, and the
to press the reset button in the upper position of the controller voltage falls to AC200V, there will be no display on the controller
panel so that the breaker can be switched on again for operation. a. Current display
b. Explanation for fault memory

Error range for current display: ±5%
b. Voltage display
C
The controller still has the function of fault memory after reset Error range for voltage display: ±1.5%
or de-energized to keep a latest historical event for post analysis.
Only when there is a new fault again, the original information is
cleared with the current latest faulty data saved.
For the inquiry method, refer to the above explanation about fault
display
9. Accessories
9.1 Under voltage release
When the under voltage release is not energized, neither
power-driven nor manual operation can make the breaker on.
For the under voltage release, there are two varieties:
instantaneous and time delay operations.
The time for the under voltage time delay release is Inm=1600A,
the time can be selected from but not adjusted in the range of 0 – 7s;
Inm=3200A or 6300A, the time can be selected from and adjusted
among 0.5s, 1s, 3s, and 5s. When, within 1/2 delay time,
the power voltage returns to 85%Ue or above, the breaker will
not get disconnected.
Operating characteristic: Under-voltage release Under-voltage release

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) AC230 AC400 (Inm=1600A) (Inm=3200A, 6300A)
Operating voltage(V) (0.35~0.7)Ue
Reliable switching voltage(V) (0.85~1.1)Ue
Reliable not-switching voltage(V) ≤0.35Ue
Power consumption(W) 20VA
9.2 Shunt release

After the shunt release is energized, the breaker is switched off
instantaneously to allow remote operation.
Operating characteristic:
Rated control supply voltage Us(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110
(0.7~1.1)Us Shunt release Shunt release
Operating voltage (V)
(Inm=1600A) (Inm=3200A, 6300A)
Breaking time 50±10ms

After the motor energy storage is ended, energizing the closing
electromagnet will make the energy storage spring force of the
operating mechanism to be released instantaneously to rapidly
switch the breaker on.
Rated control supply voltage Us(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110 Closing electromagnet Closing electromagne
Operating voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Us (Inm=1600A) (Inm=3200A, 6300A)
Closing time 50±10ms
> >> C-66

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
9.4 Power operating mechanism
The functions of motor energy storage and automatic energy
re-storage after the breaker comes on are available to ensure that
the breaker can come on immediately after it gets disconnected.
Rated control supply voltage Us(V) AC230 AC400 DC220 DC110
Operating voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Us
Power consumption (W) 75/150VA 75/150W
Energy storage time ＜4s (Inm=1600A) (Inm=3200A, 6300A )
Frequency of operation At most 3 times in a minute
9.5 Auxiliary contact (with a common point)

4 groups of changeover contacts (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.) are provided
for the standard form of auxiliary contacts, and 6 groups of
changeover contacts (3 N.O. and 3 N.C.) for the special form
(Inm=1600A not available for DC).
(Inm=1600A) (Inm=3200A, 6300A )
Technical parameters:
Rated voltage(V) Rated thermal current Ith(A) Rated control capacity
230
AC 6 300VA
400
DC 220 6 60W
9.6 Separator between phases

The separator is installed between the phases of the line bank to
improve the insulating ability between the phases of the breaker.
9.7 Key lock

The OFF pushbutton of the breaker can be locked in the position of depress, and at this time,
the breaker cannot be closed for operation; after the user selects the option, the factory provides
locks and keys; one breaker is provided with one independent lock and one key for the one lock;
two breakers, two independent locks and one key for the two locks; three breakers, three same
locks and two same keys for the three locks.
Note:
a.For the air circuit breaker with key interlock, when the key has to be pulled out, it is necessary
to first press the OFF key, turn the key anticlockwise, and then pull out the key.
b.The key for the 1600 does not work for the 3200 and 6300 shell breakers and vise versa,
so be on guard against the distinction between them.
9.8 Pushbutton lock

It is used to lock the button for opening and closing the breaker with the padlock used for
such a purpose. (Padlocks to be provided by users themselves)
9.9 Door frame and lining pad

They are installed on the door of the distribution cabinet room to seal it with a protection
level of up to IP40.
9.10 Drawer type of air circuit breaker “separation” position locking device
For the “separation” position of the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker, a lock rod can be
pulled out to lock the matter, and the breaker locked will be unable to be turned towards
the TEST or CONNECTION position. Padlocks have to be provided by users themselves.
9.11 The drawer type of air circuit breaker about any working position locking device
After the breaker body is locked automatically in any working position, it is necessary to turn
the key to unlock the matter so that the break body can be moved to the next working position
by turning the handle. (this function available for 3200 to 6300).
9.12 Interlock with the door

Interlock with the door for the break status
When the breaker is closed, the cabinet door must not be opened; when the breaker is
switched off, the cabinet door is allowed to be opened.
Interlock with the door for the breaker position
When the breaker is in the position of connection and test, the cabinet door must not be
opened; when the breaker is the separation position, the cabinet door is allowed to be opened.
9.13 Mechanical interlock

Steel cable interlock for two breakers placed horizontally or joint rod interlock for two
superimposed breakers.
C-67 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
10. Installation 10.4 Installation of the fixed type breaker
10.1 Following items to be checked before installation Place the breaker into the distribution cabinet, and fasten it by
Check the label plate on the breaker panel to see if it is using 4 pieces of M6(In=1600A) or M10(In=3200A or more)
conform to the specifications of the ordered goods. bolts and washers. The breaker shall be installed stably with no
a.Rated current additional mechanical stress to avoid damage of the breaker or
b.Under voltage release voltage and delay time bad contact of the main bus bar.
c.Shunt release voltage
d.Closing electromagnet voltage 10.5 Installation of the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker
e.Motor voltage Take the breaker body out of the draw-out socket, and install
the socket in the distribution cabinet, and fasten it by using 4 pieces
10.2 Before installation, operation, maintenance and inspection, of M6(In=1600A) or M10(In=3200A or more) bolts and washers;
you shall read this manual, and consult the manufacturer for the breaker shall be installed stably with no additional mechanical
questions, if any. stress to avoid damage of the breaker or bad contact of the main
bus bar. After the work is completed, mount the body into the
10.3 Preparations before installation
Before the breaker is installed, check the insulation resistance
draw-out socket.
C
of the breaker by using a 1000V megohmmeter according to 10.6 The specifications of the wiring copper bars for the primary
regulations; when the surrounding media temperature is 25℃±5℃ circuit of the breaker shall meet the copper bar specifications used
and the relative humidity 50% - 70%, the insulation resistance under the conditions of conventional heating in IEC/EN 60947-2
shall not be less than 20 megohm.
The place with the insulation resistance to be tested includes: 10.7 The breaker shall be grounded substantially.
the place between various phases and between various phases
and the frame when the breaker is closed; the place between
in- and out- lines of various phases.
11. Common faults and troubleshooting

Listed below are the problems which users may encounter
during installation, adjustment, and operation of the breaker,
and the possible reasons and elimination methods.
No. Technical problems Possible causes

Diagnosis and trouble shooting
1 Check the breaking current and operating time on the intellectual controller
2 Analyze the operation of the load and power network
Overload fault tripping 3 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if overload is confirmed
(long time delay indicator on) 4 For lack of match between the actual running current and the long time delay
operating current, please modify the long-time delay operating current setting
for a proper match and protection according to the actual running current
5 Press the reset button to close the breaker again
1 Check the breaking current and operating time on the intellectual controlle
Breaker tripping Short-circuit fault tripping 2 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if overload is confirmed
(fault indicator on) (short time delay or 3 Check the setting value of the intellectual controller
1
instantaneous indicator on) 4 Check to see whether the breaker is in good condition, and determine whether
it can be closed for operation
1 Check the breaking current and operating time on the intellectual controller
Grounding fault tripping 2 Promptly find and shoot the trouble if it is confirmed that there is a grounding fault
(grounding fault indicator on) 3 If no grounding fault is detected, please determine whether the grounding
fault current setting is proper, and can be well matched with the actual protection;
if not, the setting shall be modified
Under voltage release 1 Check to see if the power voltage is lower than 70%Ue
Tripping 2 Check the under voltage release and control unit for fault
Mechanical interlock action Check the working condition of two breakers equipped with mechanical interlock.
1 Whether the under voltage release has been energized
Under voltage release 2 Whether the power voltage is lower than 85%Ue
No attracting 3 Whether the under voltage release or control unit malfunctions,
if so, the release shall be replaced.
Reset button fails to reset Press the reset button to close the breaker again.
Breaker fails Open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker f Check the contract status of the secondary circuit,
2 to close ails to be put to the right position by rocking and shoot the trouble, if any
1 Check the motor control power supply and see if it is well
Open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker
providing power, and the voltage must be ≥85%Us
Bad contact for the secondary circuit 2 Check the status of the motor energy storage mechanism.
Put the open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker to the right position
Breaker fails to pre-store energy
by rocking (with it locked in the connection position)
1 Check the power voltage of the closing electromagnet,
and it must be higher than or equal to 85%Us
Closing electromagnet trouble
2 If there is any trouble in the closing electromagnet to enable the attracting,
it shall be replaced.
> >> C-68

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
No. Technical problems Possible causes

1 There may be short circuit current when the matter is switched on,
and in this case you shall find and shoot the trouble
2 Check to see if there is any overload current in the circuit,
Breaker trips Tripping immediately
find and shoot the trouble, if any
3 after closed Delay tripping
3 Check the setting value of the intellectual controller for reasonability,
and a re-setting process is necessary if not reasonable
1 Check the shunt release circuit for reliable connection

Breaker fails The breaker fails to open in power-driven mode and the shunt release for trouble, and the release shall
4 to open be replaced if the fault is confirmed
The breaker fails to open in manual mode
2 Check he operating mechanism for mechanical fault.
1 Check the motor energy storage mechanism control

Energy failed to be stored in power-driven mode power voltage, and the voltage shall be ≥85%Us;
5 Breaker fails to store energy
check the status of the circuit connection
2 Check the motor
Can't achieve manual energy storage Energy storage mechanism malfunction
Breaker fails to be pulled out when the Pull out the rock rod
Rock rod fails to be pulled out
6 open frame (draw-out) circuit breaker is Put the breaker completely
Breaker fails to completely reach the SEPERATION position to the SEPERATION position by rocking
in the SEPARATION position
Open frame (draw-out) circuit The "drawer” has seized up for foreign matters fall in it; Check it for foreign matters and for condition
7 breaker fails to be put to the damage in the mechanism for putting in by rocking or the of the rack and gear
CONNECTION position by rocking gear thereof; Position locking device fails to be unlocked Turn the key on the “drawer” to unlock the matter
Intellectual controller fails to be energized by power supply: 1 Check to see if the intellectual controller
power supply is well be connected and works well
Improper input voltage for the auxiliary power supply
No display on the 2 Cut off the intellectual controller control
8 Improper secondary output voltage for the transmitter
intellectual controller screen power supply, and then connect the power supply;
Unreliable connection between the secondary output If the fault is still present, there may be some
terminal of the transmitter and the controller troubles in the controller which has to be replaced
C-69 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA8G
12. Specifications for ordering
User Order amount Order date Tel

Type and size □NA8G-1600 □NA8G-3200 □NA8G-6300
Rated current □200 □400 □630 □800 □1600 □2000 □2500 □4000 □5000
(In)A □1000 □1250 □1600 □2900 □3200 □6300(don’t have 4P)
Installation mode □draw-out type □Fixed type (no such products for over 4000A)
Connection mode □Horizontal connection □Vertical connection □Front connection □mixed connection (connection mode to be noted)
Number of poles □3P □4P
Factory’s setting values: IR=1In, 2s(6IR); Isd=8IR, inverse-time limit 0.4s; Ii=12In; In＞1200A Ig=800A; In≤1200A Ig=D×In, OFF
If the user has some requirements different from the defaulting, please write the numerical values on the line below C
Operating current setting______In (0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,0.95,0.98,1)
Long-time delay protectionIR
Operating time setting______s (1,2,4,8,12,16,20,24,30)
Setting of the Short-circuit short-time delay protectionIsd Operating current setting______IR (1.5,2,2.5,3,4,5,6,8,10)
protection Operating time setting □inverse time______s (0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,OFF)
parameter hort-circuit instantaneous protectionIi Operating current setting______In (2,3,4,6,8,10,12,15,OFF)
Operating current setting______In See Manual, p. 24

Ground protectionIg
Operating time setting □inverse time______s □Definite-time limit______s
Selecting the type □Standard type □Multifunctional type
Power input □AC400V □AC230V □DC220V □DC110V □DC24V
Three-section protection against over current Neutral line or grounding fault protection Voltage measurement
Basic function
Test function Fault inquiry/memory function Self-diagnostic function
Optional function □Over voltage protection □Under voltage protection □Over frequency protection □Under frequency protection
(this function to □Voltage unbalance measurement □Phase sequence protection □Voltage measurement □Frequency measurement
be added as □Measurement of harmonic current □Power factor measurement □Power measurement □Phase sequence detection
required by the
□Voltage unbalance rate measurement □Electric energy measurement □Contact equivalent
user, and to be
matched with the □Power network history parameter recording function □MCR make/break function □Load monitoring function
controller type) □Signal contact output function □Communication function □ZSI regional interlocking protection
Note: when the product is a multifunctional controller as arranged by the user,

the communication function and the like are the basic function configuration
Accessories for standard
Under voltage □Instantaneous □Time delay______s (1-2-3-4-5-6-7s provided for the 1600 shell, optional but not adjustable;
release 0.5-1-3-5s for the 3200 and 6300 shell, optional and adjustable) □AC400V □AC230V
Shunt release □AC400V □AC230V □DC220V □DC110V

configuration
Closing electromagnet □AC400V □AC230V □DC220V □DC110V

Energy storage motor □AC400V □AC230V □DC220V □DC110V
Auxiliary contact □2 NO and 2 NC □3 NO and 3 NC(Inm=1600not available for DC)
□One breaker is provided with one lock and one key

OFF locking
Accessories for optional
device □Two breakers is provided with two same locks and one key (the same key/lock not available
for the 1600 and 3200/6300 shell breakers)
□Three breakers is provided with three same locks and two keys (the same key/lock not available
configuration
for the 1600 and 3200/6300 shell breakers)

Mechanical
Two-breaker interlock solution □Steel cable interlock □Joint rod
interlock
□BUTTON locking device □Three-position locking device for the draw-out socket □Door interlock
□Separator between phases □Door frame □Auxiliary power module
Note: Extra costs are needed for the optional functions, optional accessories and the like for the breaker.
> >> C-70

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-1000
200A to 1000A
NA1-2000
630A to 2000A
Summary
5 basic frame sizes
For your various requirements, the Air Circuit Breaker NA1
includes 5 basic frame sizes as followed.
NA1-3200, 4000
2000A to 4000A
NA1-6300
4000A to 6300A
C-71 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
1. General 2.6 Type designation
1.1 Application scope NA1 - □-□□ / □-□-□-□-□
NA1 series air circuit breaker is suitable for the circuit of
AC 50Hz/60Hz with rated service voltage 400V, 690V and Voltage of secondary circuit
rated service current up to 6300A. It is mainly used to AC220V, AC380V,
distribute electric energy and protect circuits and electric AC230V, AC400V
equipment against over-load, under-voltage, short-circuit DC220V, DC110V
and single-phase earthing fault.
With intelligentized and selective protection functions, the Wiring of main circuit:
breaker can improve the reliability of power supply, and avoid H:Horizontal wiring of main circuit
unnecessary power failure. The breaker is applicable for power
stations, factories, mines (for 690V) and modern high-buildings,
V:Vertical wiring of main circuit
C
especially for the distribution system of intelligentized building. Mode of installation:
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2. F:Fixed type
D:Draweout type
2. Operation conditions Mode of operation:

2.1 Temperature condition: M:Manual
-5℃~40℃; the average value within 24h P: Power-driven
shall not exceed +35℃ (special situation excluded);
2.2 Altitude:≤2000m; No. of poles:
2.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3; 3:3-pole
2.4 Air conditions: 4:4-pole
at the max temperature of +40℃, higher relative Intelligent controller:
humidity is allowable under lower temperature, M: Standard type
RH could be 90% at +20℃, special measures 3M: Multifunctional type
should be taken to occurrence of dews; 3H: Communication type
2.5 Note: Without the intelligent controller,
the breaker functions as a switch-disconnector.
Rated current:
Frame size
Rated current
rated current
200A
400A
1000A 630A
800A
1000A
630A
800A
1000A
2000A
1250A
1600A
2000A
2000A
3200A
2500A
4000A
3200A
4000A 4000A
4000A
6300A 5000A
6300A
Frame size rated current:

1000A, 2000A, 3200A,4000A, 6300A
ACB
Company code
> >> C-72

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
11
7
12 8
13
14
15
3
C-73 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1 Air Circuit Breaker
1 Drawout type
2 Fixed type C
3 Intelligent controller
4 Operating mechanism
5 Auxiliary contact
9
6 Locking-device
10 7 Arcing chamber
8 Secondary connecting part
9 Wire-cable mechanical interlock
10 Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock
11 Shunt release
12 Closing electromagnet
13 Under-voltage release
14 Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism
15 Rotary handle
16 Fixed plate
2
16
6
> >> C-74

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
3. Structure
+ =
Body
Drawer seat
Drawout type breaker/switch-disconnector
Fixed plate for the fixed type breaker

Fixed type breaker/switch-disconnector
Fault-breaking indicator Enclosure

reset button Making button Under-voltage release
Energy storage &

Breaking button release indicator Shunt release
Breaking/making Closing electromagnet

Name plate
indicator
Auxiliary contact
Structure for in Motor-driven energy

and out storage mechanism
Rotary handle Locking device
Rotate out
Rotate in Intelligent controller
C-75 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
4. Main technical parameter
Type NA1-1000
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity Icu=42kA 400V 25kA 690V
C
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity Ics=30kA 400V 20kA 690V
Rated short-time withstand current Icw=30kA / 1s 400V 20kA / 1s 690V
Rated current In (A) 200 400 630 800 1000
Number of poles 3, 4
Rated voltage Ue (V) 400, 690
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 800
Rated current of N-pole In (A) 50%In
Fixed disconnection time (ms) 23~32
Intelligent Standard type (M)
controller Communication type (H)
Electric life 5000
Operation
Non-maintenance 10,000
performance Mechanical life
Maintenance 20,000
Connection pattern Horizontal, Vertical
Motor operational Drawout 3P/4P 38/55
standard configuration
weight (kg) Fixed 3P/4P 22/26.5
Standard configuration: M type intelligent controller; Under-voltage release; Shunt release; Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism
Type NA1-2000
Rated current In (A) 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
Number of poles 3, 4

Electric life 5000
Operation
Maintenance 20,000
Motor operational Drawout 3P/4P 67.5 / 79.8 69.6 / 83.65 78.6 / 90.5
weight (kg) Fixed 3P/4P 42.4 / 52 44 / 54 45 / 56
> >> C-76

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Type NA1-3200, NA1-4000
Rated current In (A) 2000 2500 3200 4000
Number of poles 3, 4 3

Electric life 5000
Operation
Maintenance 20,000
Motor operational Drawout 3P/4P 90.5 / 116 90.5 / 116 102.8 / 131 132 / 172
weight (kg) Fixed 3P/4P 54.8 / 68 54.8 / 68 56.5 / 86 85 / -
Standard configuration: M type intelligent controller; Under-voltage release; Shunt release; Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism
Type NA1-6300
rated current In (A) 4000 5000 6300
Number of poles 3, 4 3

Electric life 2500
Operation
Non-maintenance 5000
Maintenance 10,000
Motor operational Drawout 3P/4P 202 / 236 202 / 236 236 / -
weight (kg) Fixed 3P/4P -/- -/- -/-
C-77 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
5. Dimensions and connection
NA1-1000 Drawout-type
216 34 Boring dimension of doorcase
268
N 226
H
362
8×φ5
101.5
316
304
358
Installation panel
5
91.5
16
Disconnected
L1 45 position Installation hole on right side
105 158
L 65
A 323
N 27 Connected position
70 70 70
12
200,400A n×φ13
35
NA1-1000 L1 L
12
15
35
3P 194 284
18
n×φ10.5 4P 264 354

630,800,
1000A
In(A) A(mm) n(3P/4P) H(mm)
2×φ8.5 200, 400 32 3/4 6
158
630 50 6/8 8
2-11.5×8.5
800, 1000 50 6/8 10
L1(3P)
L1(4P)
NA1-1000 Fixed-type
Boring dimension of doorcase
268
H
N 226
315
259
101.5
8×φ5
312
270
Installation panel
46.5
216 15 A 9
N 239
3
70 70 70 Installation hole on right side

12
n×φ13
200,400A 35
15
35 53
n×φ10.5
12
18
630,800,
1000A NA1-1000 L1 L In(A) A(mm) n(3P/4P) H(mm)
12
3P 246 274 200, 400 32 3/4 6

4P 316 344 630 50 6/8 8
144
4-9×13
800, 1000 50 6/8 10
L1
> >> C-78

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
45(Disconnected position)
448(4P)
8×Φ13
a 353(3P) 60
N pole 28
37.5
a
14
95 95 95 92.5
112
258
439
horizontal connection(Default Configuration)
42.5
37
92
16×Φ13
30 60
70
N pole
14
23
10 97 175
67
187.5
383.5
30
292
465
375(3P) 95 95 95 92.5
470(4P) horizontal connection Lengthen busbar
21.5
155
Φ11
302
268
302
360(4P)
265(3P)
378
N pole
47 20
2×11×17 115
40
Φ14
17
172 28
Installation panel 32×Φ13
55
11×Φ5 60 a mm
In A
175 344
33 Right & outer 95 95 95 630 10
187.5 side of breaker
Right & outer side of breaker 800~1600 15
L type Horizontal Connection
Opening hole on panel 2000 20
NA1-2000 Drawout-type, vertical, rear connection
45(Disconnected position) 448(4P)

353(3P)
C Direction
4×Φ13
28
60
258
439
122.5
42.5
95.5
70
10
37
10 97 175 187.5
14
292
55 375(3P)
438.5
470(4P)
21.5
In A a mm
155
Φ11 630 10
302
268
302 800~1600 15
378
360(4P)
2000 20
265(3P)
47 20
2×11×17
Φ14
C Direction
172 N pole a
55
11×Φ5 Installation panel

175 344 Right & outer
33
Right & outer side of breaker
Opening hole on panel
95 95 95 92.5
C-79 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-2000 Drawout-type, horizontal, rear connection
448(4P)
C Direction
258
439
122.5
42.5
95.5 C
37
70
187.5
10 97 175 292
375(3P)
438.5 470(4P)
In A a mm
21.5
630 10
800~1600 15
155
2000 20
Φ11
302
268
360(4P)
302
378
265(3P)
C Direction
47 20
2×11×17
60
Φ14
14
N pole 28 8×Φ13
172
55
55
175
10
187.5 side of breaker 95 95 95 92.5
Right & outer side of breaker
NA1-2000 Fixed-type
18min 413(4P)
Zero arcing covering
ferreous material 318(3P)
8×Φ13
292 N pole
28 60
42
a
17
115
402
95 95 95 86
a
112
258
horizontal connection (Default Configuration)
16×Φ13
55
N pole 30 60 8×Φ13
28 60
14
21
N pole
60
50 150 69.5
67
11 11
32
b
13
30
290 181
359 340(3P)
95 95 95 86 95 95 95 86
435(4P)
horizontal connection Lengthen busbar horizontal connection shortened busbar
In A a mm b mm
311.2
269
N pole 630 10 17
4×Φ12
115
300 800~1600 15 17
40
2000 20 18.5
17
28.5
150
Installation 32×Φ13 28
Installation hole 60
8×Φ5 on Right & outer side 2 panel
of breaker 95 95 95
340(3P) Installation hole 342.2
435(4P) on Right & outer side
of breaker Opening hole on panel L type Horizontal Connection
> >> C-80

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
16×Φ13
100
25
528(4P) N Pole 50
100
413(3P)
a
50
125 125 125 92.5
a
258
439
112
42.5
100
37
92
16×Φ13
70
75 25
14
217.5
23
10 97 175
37.5
352
491
435(3P)
536
550(4P)
125 125 125 92.5
horizontal connection shorten busbar

21.5
155
302
268
Φ11
362
378
440(4P)
325(3P)
47 20
2×11×17 In A a mm
N Pole
Φ14 115
2000~2500 20
40
202 17 3200 30
55

175
33 404 40
Right & outer 32×Φ13
Right & outer side of breaker 217.5 side of breaker 100
115 125 125
L type vertical connection
528(4P)
413(3P)
C Direction
8×Φ13
50
258
439
126
42.5
100
100
70
37
10 97 175 20 217.5
40 352
435(3P)
94
495 550(4P)
In A a mm
21.5
2000~2500 20
3200 30
155
302
268
Φ11 N pole C Direction

362
440(4P)
378
a
325(3P)
47 20
2×11×17
Φ14
202
55

175
115 115 115 102.5
Right & outer side of breaker 217.5 side of breaker
C-81 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
528(4P)
413(3P)
C Direction
258
439
112
C
42.5
107.5
70
37
10 97 175
217.5
352
495 435(3P)
550(4P)
21.5
In A a mm
2000~2500 20
155
3200 30
302
268
Φ11
362
440(4P)
378
325(3P)
47 20
2×11×17 C Direction
Φ14
20
100
40
N pole 50
202
55
94
175
Right & outer side of breaker 217.5 side of breaker 16×Φ13
115 125 125 92.5

NA1-3200 Fixed-type
Zero arcing covering 493(4P)

18min
ferreous material 378(3P) 16×Φ13
86
15
352 N pole 40
72
40
a
115
115 115 115 96

402
a

112
258
12×Φ13
86
55
18.5
N pole 50
21
32
60
50 150 69.5
11 11
13
290 211 115 115 115 96

389 400(3P)
horizontal connection shorten busbar
515(4P)
N pole In A a mm
115
2000~2500 20
40
311
269
4×Φ12 3200 30
15
362
32×Φ13 40
86
28.5
150
Installation hole on 115 115 115

8×Φ5 Right & outer side of breaker 2 Installation panel
202
400(3P) Installation hole on 404 L type vertical connection
515(4P) Right & outer side of breaker
> >> C-82

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-4000 Fixed-type (3P)
18min 493 120 16×Φ13

15
15
Zero arcing covering 40
ferreous material 10
134
352
15
40
130
30
189.5 189.5 79
Horizontal
402
258
112
21
55
130
11 11
150 69.5
13
50
290 515
424
479
175
40
17
311
269
4×Φ12
362 50
24×Φ15
150
28.5
140
8×Φ5 202 2 Installation panel

207.5 207.5
404 Installation hole on
Installation hole on Right & outer side of breaker
515
Right & outer side of breaker Vertical
NA1-4000 Drawout-type (3P)
528
30
258
439
112
42.5
92
70
37
10 97 175
217.5
494 352
550
21.5
20
155
Φ11
40
302
268
103
362
378
440
20
12×Φ13
2×11×17
50
47
Φ14
140
202
55

175 197.5 197.5 77.5
33 404
Right & outer
C-83 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-4000 Drawout-type (4P)
756
C Direction
20
439
258
112
C
42.5
70
92
10 97 175
37
187.5
292
490
788
21.5
155
Φ11 302
268
C Direction
302
378
678
16×Φ13
20
N Pole 155
40
20
2×11×17
47
Φ14
103
172
55

175
33 344
Right & outer 80 50
142.5 206.5 206.5 140
NA1-6300 (In=4000A,5000A) Drawout-type
798(3P)
30
258
439
42.5
112
37
70
92
217.5
10 97 175 352
813(3P)
494
928(4P)
21.5
155
302
268
Φ11 362
378
818(4P)
N Pole 28×Φ15
703(3P)
20
100 155 220

20
2×11×17
47
Φ14
40
103
202
11×Φ5 Opening hole on panel
55
175 404
33 Right & outer
Right & outer side of breaker 55
178 247 247 164
> >> C-84

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-6300 (In=6300A) Drawout-type (3P)
903
30
258
439
112
42.5
37
92
70
10 97 175
217.5
494 352
928
21.5
155
Φ11
180 260
302
268
20
362
378
818
40
103
20
2×11×17
47
Φ14
24×Φ15
202 80
55

175 320 320 140
33 404
Right & outer
C-85 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
6. Secondary circuit wiring
6.1 NA1-1000 Standard type, type (M)
Emergency Motor-driven Motor-driven Motor-driven

Main circuit Intelligent controller Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact
break break make energy-storage
SB1 SB2 SB3

HL1 HL2 HL3 C
▲
3 5 7 9 14 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
FU
Intelligent Q F X M
controller
Power of
DF1 DF2 DF3 control circuit
DF4
SA
TA
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 13 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
DC24V
+ -
Power
module
Hl1: Failure indicator 8#,9#: Making indicator (capacity AC400V,1A)

HL2: Close indicator 10#: Over-current pre-alarm signal output (selective)
HL3: Energy storage indicator 11#: Short current trip signal output (selective)
SB1: Under-voltage button 12#: Earthing trip alarm output (selective)
SB2: Shunt button 13#: Self-checking alarm signal output (selective)
SB3: Close button 14#: Common line of different contacts
Q: Under-voltage release 15#: Earthing protection line
F: Shunt release 16#,17#: Normal contact of the controller
X: Close electromagnet (contact capacity AC400V 1A)
M: Energy storage motor 27#,28#: Under-voltage release
DF1-F4: Auxiliary switch 29#,30#: Shunt release
1#, 2#: Auxiliary power input(DC24V) 31#,32#: Closing electromagnet
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal, 33#,34#,35#: Energy storage motor
contact capacity AC230V,5A 18#~26#, 38#~40#: Auxiliary contact
6#,7#: To be connected with current transformer(selective) (auxiliary contact capacity: AC230V,5A)
Note:
Dashed is to be connected by users.
> >> C-86

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Communication type, type (H)
Emergenay Motor-driven Motor-driven

Main circuit Intelligent controller break break make Auxiliary switch
L1 FU
N
PE
Profibus-DP L N PE
ST-4 Power module

- + - + - + - + HL3
ST-DP
Device
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Fault indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+ + D11D12 D13
DC24V COM
Green ST201 SB1 SB2 SB3
D01 D02 D03
HL1 HL2 12 13 14 15 16 17
▲
Red
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
Intelligent Q F X M
controller
DF1 DF2 DF3

SA
TA
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
DC24V
+ -
Power
module
Hl1: Failure indicator

8#,9#: Making indicator(capacity AC400V,1A)
HL2: Close indicator
10#, 11#: communication output
HL3: Energy storage indicator
SB1: Under-voltage button 12#, 13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output
SB2: Shunt button 14#, 15#: Signal alarm of load 2 output
SB3: Close button 16#, 17#: Making signal output
Q: Under-voltage release 18#, 19#: Closing signal output
F: Shunt release 20#: Communication shield ground line
X: Close electromagnet 21#~24#: Voltage signal input of phase N,A,B,C
M: Energy storage motor 25#, 26#: Auxiliary contact (capacity:AC230V,5A)
DF1-F4: Auxiliary switch 27#,28#: Under-voltage release
1#, 2#: Auxiliary power input(DC24V) 29#,30#: Shunt release
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal, 31#,32#: Closing electromagnet
contact capacity AC230V,5A 33#,34#,35#: Energy storage motor
6#, 7#: To be connected with current transformer(N/O auxiliary 36#~40#: Auxiliary contact (capacity:AC230V,5A)
contact, capacity AC400V, 1A,when no current transformer)
Note:
C-87 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
3NO(normal open) 3NC (normal close) standard type (M)
Main Auxiliary Emergency Motor-driven Motor-driven Motor-driven

circuit Intelligent controller contact break break make energy-storage
Auxiliary contact
HL1 HL2
SB1 SB2 SB3
HL3
C
▲
3 5 7 9 14 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
FU
Q F X M
Intelligent Power of
controller control circuit
DF5 DF6 DF1 DF2 DF3
DF4
SA
TA
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 13 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
+ -
DC24V Power
module
Hl1: Failure indicator 8#,9#: Making indicator (capacity AC400V,1A)

HL2: Close indicator 12#~26#: Auxiliary contact(auxiliary
HL3: Energy storage indicator contact capacity: AC230V,5A)
SB1: Under-voltage button 27#,28#: Under-voltage release
SB2: Shunt button 29#,30#: Shunt release
SB3: Close button 31#,32#: Closing release
Q: Under-voltage release 33#,34#:Energy storage indicator
F: Shunt release 34#,35#: Energy storage motor
X: Close release 38#~40#: Auxiliary contact(auxiliary
M: Energy storage motor contact capacity: AC230V,5A)
DF1-DF4: Auxiliary switch
1#, 2#: Auxiliary power input(DC24V)
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common
terminal,contact capacity AC230V,5A
6#, 7#: to be connected with current
transformer(selective)
Note:
6NO(normal open) 6NC(normal close), without any additional function.
> >> C-88

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
6.2 NA1-2000~6300
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~3600 with standard type (M) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
Emergency
Main circuit Over-current release break
Motor-driven Motor-driven
make
Auxiliary contact
break
SB2
Failure Energy storage

SB1 SB3
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
FU
Q F X M
AX
Power
SA
Processing
unit
Intelligent Controller
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Open Close
_ 110V
~
_ 220V Intelligent release power ("1" connect positive pole, and "2" connect negative pole for direct current)
~
~380V
SB1: Shunt button
SB2: Under-voltage button
SB3: Making button
Q: Under-voltage release
F: Shunt release
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use
X: Closing electromagnet
Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence) Ⅱ Five switch contact M: Energy storage motor
XT: Connection terminal
36 38 40 42 44 46 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
SA: Position switch
Note: If control voltage of Q, F, X is different from each other,
they can be connected to different power.
# #
1 ,2 : Auxiliary power input
# # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal)
# # # #
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact, normal open,
# #
37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
10 ~24 : empty
# #
25 ,26 : to be connected with current transformer(selective)
# #
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release
# #
29 ,30 : Shunt release
# #
31 ,32 : Closing release
# #
33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
# #
34 ,35 : Energy storage motor
# #
36 ,51 : Auxiliary contact
Circuit explanation for signal output:
a. Broken-line parts shall be provided by customers.
# #
b. Terminals 6 ,7 can output NC (normal close) contact if that is required by users.
#
c. Terminal 35 can be directly connected to power (automatic pre-storing energy),
alternatively connect power after connecting NO button (manual-controlled
pre-storing energy).
d. Terminals 21#~24# is only for wiring with function meter display.
(excluding the special wiring)
C-89 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~6300 with type (3M) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
to the incoming-line side

C
PE Un U1 U2 U3 SB2 SB1 SB3
Transformer
connected
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
Q F X SA
AX
M
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Energy-
Fault storage Open Close
Main Shunt Closing Energy- Energy-

circuit
Intelligent controller Undervoltage storage storage Auxiliary switch
release release electromagnet indication motor
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button
SB2: Under-voltage button
Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence) Ⅱ Five switch contact
SB3: Making button
36 38 40 4 2 4 4 46 36 38 40 4 2 4 4 46 48 50 Q: Under-voltage release
F: Shunt release
X: Closing release
M: Energy storage motor
XT: connection terminal
SA: Position switch
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power input
37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 Note: When the power supply of the intelligent controller
is AC power, the 1#~2# connects to the AC power directly.
When the power supply is DC power, forbid connecting the
1#~2# to the DC power directly. Add a DC power supply
module, then the DC power connect to the input terminal
# # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4 common terminal)
# of the DC power supply module, and the 1#~2# connect to
# # # # the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact(normal open)
# # or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
10 ~11 : empty
# #
12 ~19 : The programmable output terminal. The normal products without these terminals,
but if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
3M type acquiescence output:

# # # #
12 ,13 : Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14 ,15 : Signal alarm of load2 output
# # # # # # #
16 ,17 : Self-diagnose alarm; 18 ,19 : Fault trip; 20 : PE line; 21 ~24 : Display the voltage of the signal input.
The normal products without these terminals,
if the customer special ordered the function meter, the cost extra added.
#
21 : N phase input terminal
# # #
22 ,23 ,24 : A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)
# #
25 ,26 : Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
The normal products without these terminals, if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
# # # # # # # #
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release; 29 ,30 : Shunt release; 31 ,32 : Closing release; 33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
# # # #
34 ,35 : Energy storage motor; 36 ~51 : Auxiliary contact
Note:
a. Red colored part is to be connected by users
b. When the power system is three phase three wire, directly connect the Un to U2.
( If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
> >> C-90

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~6300 with type (3H) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
To TO3 busbar 1 2 3 4 5
ST Power Supply
L N L N PE Modular IV
Profibus-DP - + - + -+ - +
ST-DP 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Device + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Special connecting wire
D11D12D13
To the inconnecting-line side DO24VDO24VCOM
Modbus-RTV PE Un U1 U2 U3 SB2 SB1 SB3 ST201
DO1 DO3
Transformer 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
connected
Red Green
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
Q F X SA
AX
M
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Energy
Fault
storage Open Close
Main Closing Energy-

circuit
Intelligent controller Undervoltage Shunt
release
Energy-
electromagnet storage storage Auxiliary switch
release indication motor
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button
SB3: Making button; Q: Under-voltage release
Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence) Ⅱ Five switch contact
F: Shunt release; X: Closing release
36 3 8 40 42 44 46 36 38 4 0 42 44 46 48 50 M: Energy storage motor; XT: connection terminal
SA: Position switch
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power input
Note: When the power supply of the intelligent controller
is AC power, the 1#~2# connects to the AC power directly.
37 39 41 4 3 4 5 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
1#~2# to the DC power directly. Add a DC power supply
# # # # of the DC power supply module, and the 1#~2# connect to
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4 common terminal)
# # # # the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact（normal open）
# # or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
10 ~11 : communication output
# # # #
12 ,13 : Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14 ,15 : Signal alarm of load2 output
# # # #
16 ,17 :Breaking signal output; 18 ,19 :Making signal output
# #
20 : PE line; 21 : N phase input terminal
# # #
22 ,23 ,24 : A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)
25#26#: Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
ST~DP: DP protocol module. There is no need for the ST-DP protocol module,
if the communication protocol is Modbus-RTV. But when the communication protocol is Profibus-DP,
the ST-DP protocol module is necessary, but the cost extra added.
ST power module IV: power converter (optional components)
ST201: Magnify the signal capacity of the controller. ( optional components) If the customer special ordered,
the cost extra added.
27#,28#: Under-voltage release; 29#,30#: Shunt release
31#,32#: Closing release; 33#,34#: Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor; 36#~51#: Auxiliary contact
Note:
(If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
C-91 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~6300 with standard type (M) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
Main Emergency Motor Motor Motor

driven Under-voltage
Over-current release driven driven energy time-delay Auxiliary switch
circuit disconnection break close storage release
SB2 SB1 SB3 Energy

storage
Failure Under-voltage
time-delay controller
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
C
FU
AX
Power
Processing
unit
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Open Close
~_ 110V
Intelligent release power(”1” connect positive pole, and “2” connect negative pole for direct current)
~_ 220V
~380V

Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence) SB1: Shunt button SB2: Under-voltage button SB3: Making button
Q: Under-voltage time-delay release F: Shunt release
38 40 42 44 46 48 50
X: Closing electromagnet M: Energy storage motor
XT: Connection terminal SA: Position switch
Note: If control voltage of Q, F, X is different from each other,
they can be connected to different power.
3 9 41 43 4 5 47 49
# #
1 ,2 : Auxiliary power input
# # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal)
# # # #
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact（normal open）
10 ~24 : empty
# #
# #
25 ,26 : to be connected with current transformer(selective)
# #
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release
# #
29 ,30 : Shunt release
# #
31 ,32 : Closing release
# #
33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
# #
34 ,35 : Energy storage motor
# #
36 ,37 : Under-voltage time delay release
38 ~51 : Auxiliary contact
# #
Circuit explanation for signal output:

a. Broken-line parts shall be provided by customers.
b. Terminals 6#,7# can output NC (normal close) contact if that is required by users.
c. Terminal 35# can be directly connected to power (automatic pre-storing energy),
alternatively connect power after connecting NO button (manual-controlled pre-storing energy).
d. The 21#~24# is only for wiring with function meter display. (Excluding the special wiring)
> >> C-92

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~6300 with type (3M) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
SB2 SB1 SB3
To the incoming-line side

PE Un U1 U2 U3
Transformer
Under-voltage
connected time-delay controller
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
F X SA Q
AX
M
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Energy
Fault storage Open Close
Energy- Energy-
Main Shunt Closing Under-voltage
circuit
Intelligent controller Emergency release electromagnet
storage storage time-delay
release
Auxiliary switch
break indication motor
SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button

Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence)
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 M: Energy storage motor; XT: Connection terminal
SA: Position switch
# #
1 , 2 : Intelligent controller power input
# #
is AC power, the 1 ~2 connects to the AC power directly.
# #
1 ~2 to the DC power directly. Add a DC power supply
3 9 41 4 3 4 5 47 49 module, then the DC power connect to the input terminal
# #
of the DC power supply module, and the 1 ~2 connect to
the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal); 6#,7#,8#,9#: Auxiliary contact（normal open）
10#~11#: empty; 12#~19# are the programmable output terminal. The normal products without these terminals,
but if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
3M type acquiescence output:

12#,13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14#,15#: Signal alarm of load2 output
16#,17#: Self-diagnose alarm; 18#,19#: Fault trip
20#: PE line; 21#~24#: Display the voltage of the signal input. The normal products without these terminals,
if the customer special ordered the function meter, the cost extra added.
21#: N phase input terminal; 22#,23#,24#: A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)
25#,26# Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
31#,32#: Closing release; 33#,34#: Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor; 36#,37#: Under-voltage time delay release
38#~51#: Auxiliary contact
Note:
b. When the power system is three phase three wire, directly connect the Un to U2. (If the voltage exceeds 400V,
special explanation when ordered)
C-93 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000~6300 with type (3H) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
To TO3 busbar 1 2 3 4 5
STPower Supply
L N L N PE Modular IV
Profibus-DP - + - + - + - +
ST-DP 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
+ -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Device
Special connecting wire
SB2 SB1 SB3
To the inconnecting-line side DO1

D11D12D13
DO24VDO24VCOM
DO3
ST201 C
Modbus-RTV PE Un U1 U2 U3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Transformer
Under-voltage
connected
Red Green time-delay controller
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
F X SA Q
AX
M
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Fault Energy
storage Open Close
Main Energy Energy

Shunt Under-voltage
circuit
Intelligent controller Emergency release
Closing
electromagnet
storage storage time-delay
release
Auxiliary switch
indication motor
break
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button
Ⅰ Four switch contact (acquiescence)
38 4 0 42 4 4 46 48 50 M: Energy storage motor; XT: Connection terminal
SA: Position switch
# #
1 , 2 : Intelligent controller power input
# #
is AC power, the 1 ~2 connects to the AC power directly.
# #
1 ~2 to the DC power directly. Add a DC power supply
39 41 43 45 47 49
# #
of the DC power supply module, and the 1 ~2 connect to
the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal) or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
6#,7#,8#,9#: Auxiliary contact（normal open）
10#~11#: Communication output; 12#,13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output
14#,15# : Signal alarm of load 2 output; 16#,17#: Breaking signal output; 18#,19#: Closing signal output
20#: PE line; 21#: N phase input terminal
22#,23#,24#: A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)
25#,26# Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
ST~DP: DP protocol module. There is no need for the ST-DP protocol module,
if the communication protocol is Modbus-RTV. But when the communication protocol is Profibus-DP,
the ST-DP protocol module is necessary, but the cost extra added.
ST power module IV: power converter (optional components)
ST201: Magnify the signal capacity of the controller. ( optional components)
If the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
# # # #
31 ,32 : Closing release; 33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor; 36#,37#: Under-voltage time delay release
38#~51#: Auxiliary contact
Note:
(If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
> >> C-94

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
7. Installation
7.1 Installation
7.1.1 Unload the breaker from the soleplate of package. When the guide rod points to separated position and handle
If it is drawout type, firstly pull out the handle under can't be rotated any longer, pull out the handle and firmly
the drawer-base of breaker, and plug it into the hole grasp the aluminum handle on drawer-base, pull out the
on central part of plastic cover under the drawer-base breaker body and remove it form the base, then move the
crossbeam, anticlockwise turns the handle, the body base from the sole plate and clean up the dirty things inside
will slowly slide along the outside of drawer-base. the drawer-base.
Possible positions
7.1.2 Check the insulation resistance with a 500V megger, 7.1.3 Power supply
resistance should not be less than 20M Ω when NA1 devices can be supplied either from the top or
ambient temperature is 20 ℃± 5 ℃ and relative from the bottom without reduction in performance,
humidity is 50%~70%. Otherwise dry it. in order to facilitate connection when installed in a
switchboard.
C-95 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
7.1.4 Put the breaker (fixed-type) or drawer-base (drawout-type) Mounting the circuit-breaker
into the installation-bracket, and make it fixed, directly It is important to distribute the weight of the device
connect the cable wire of main circuit to the bus wire of uniformily over a rigid mounting surface such as rails
fixed-type circuit breaker. Alternatively put breaker body or a base plate.
onto the slideway of drawer-base. Plug the handle into This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance
installation hole, clockwise turns it until the under-part of on support flatness: 2 mm).This eliminates any risk of
drawer-base points at the connection position and ”click” deformation which could interfere with correct
sound is heard. It indicates that breaker body has been operation of the circuit breaker.
connected to its place, then connect the cable of main NA1 devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane
circuit to drawer-base. using the special brackets.
Mounting with vertical brackets Mounting on rails C
7.1.5 Partitions
A:non magnetic material
Sufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure
good air circulation around the circuit breaker;
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections
of the device must be made of nonmagnetic material.
For high-currents, of 2500 A and upwards, the metal supports
or barriers in the immediate vicinity of a conductor must
be made of non-magnetic material A;Metal barriers through
which a conductor passes must not form a magnetic loop.
A
Busbars
The mechanical connection must be exclude the possibility non magnetic material
of formation of a magnetic loop around a conductor.
> >> C-96

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
7.1.6 Busbar connections
The busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure the
connection points are positioned on the terminals before
the bolts are inserted B The connections are held by the
supporter which is fixed to the framework of the
switchboard, in this way the circuit breaker terminals
do not have to support its weight C.
(This support should be placed close to the terminals).
B C B
7.1.7 Main circuit adopts cable connection

Users should not apply too strong mechanical strength on
the terminals of Air Circuit Breaker. Extend the bus-bar of
circuit breaker with connecting bus-bar, position the wiring
piece of cable before inserting bolts; the cable should be
fixed on the frame of distributing cabinet firmly.
18min 18min
C-97 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
7.1.8 Clamping 1 2 3 4
Correct clamping of busbars depends on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts,etc. Over-tightening
may have the same consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars to the circuit breaker, the tightening

torques to be used are shown in the table below. These
values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and 1 breaker terminal
bolts, class 8.8. 2 busbar
3 bolt
4 washer
5 nut C
5
Examples
Preferred tightening torque for NA1's tightening components
Type of screw Application Preferred tightening torque
M4 Screws for secondary terminals 11 Nm
M10 Installing bolts of Air Circuit Breaker 45 Nm
M12 Connection terminals 50 Nm
Connected position Test position Disconnected position Drawout position
1.Both main circuit and control 1.The main circuit is disconnected,

circuit are connected. and the control circuit is connected. Neither the main circuit Main body is out
2.Normal application conditions 2.Test application conditions. nor the control circuit is connected. of the drawer seat.
> >> C-98

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
7.2 Wiring the secondary circuit according to electric principle
diagram.
Note: Bolts, nuts, gaskets shouldn't be left inside the drawer
seat to avoid being blocked. Secondary connecting part
Arcing chamber
7.3 Operation
Check the rated voltage of the following components
Main body
whether conforms to the power voltage . Such as under
voltage release, shunt release, closing electromagnet,
motor-driven mechanism and intelligent controller. Drawer seat
7.4 Maintenance
Check the technical parameters in time or add some
lubricating oil, etc.
This breaker structure is arranged vertically and modularized
composition with each functioncell separated, which make
the maintenance easy.
It has compact structure, reliable operation and strong free Handle Slideway
maintenance capability. Please check the technical parameters

on the nameplate in accordance with the requirements of
order before installation.
Making the secondary circuit power, the motor-driven Manual energy-storage

mechanism can store energy automatically until hearing the click
and energy stored indicating on the panel.
Otherwise press the storage handle for 6 times until hearing

the click and the indicator display energy stored
And the closing operation can be realized either by closing

electromagnet or manual button.
Shake with the manual energy-storage handle

up and down about six times to "click".
8. Recommendation for user's connecting bus-bar

Inm(A) NA1-1000 NA1-2000 NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 2900 3200 4000/3P 4000/4P 4000 5000 6300
Thickness(mm) 5 5 5 6 8 5 6 8 10 12 10 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Busbar Width(mm) 30 30 40 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 100 100 100 100 120 120 120 100 100
Number 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 7 8
Note: the specifications in the table is obtained as the ambient temperature of air circuit breaker is 40℃, with open installation; this is in
compliance with the specification of copper busbars adopted under the heating conditions regulated in IEC/EN60947-2.
9. Power loss
Inm(A) NA1-1000 NA1-2000 NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000/3P 4000/4P 4000 5000 6300
Power Drawer type 40 101 123 110 177 70 110 172 268 440 530 384 600 737 921 900 575 898 1426
loss (W) Fixed type 33 85 107 94 476 34.4 50 78 122 200 262 200 312 307 - - - - -
C-99 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
10. A2S curve
2 2 6
I t（A s×10 ）
741
341
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
C
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 Is（kA）
Is: prospective symmetrical current(of an a.c. circuit)
11. Temperature compensation correction

Ambient NA1-3200
Standard NA1-1000 NA1-2000 NA1-6300
temperature NA1-4000
40℃ 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45℃ 195 395 623 790 985 630 800 1000 1250 1600 1900 2000 2400 3000 3800 4000 5000 6000
50℃ 192 384 605 768 960 630 800 1000 1250 1500 1900 2000 2300 3000 3600 4000 5000 5600
IEC/EN60947-2
55℃ 182 328 584 725 924 630 800 1000 1200 1500 1800 2000 2200 2800 3400 4000 4800 5400
60℃ 174 248 548 696 870 610 800 1000 1150 1300 1700 2000 2200 2800 3200 4000 4800 5200
65℃ 163 192 500 620 810 610 800 1000 1150 1300 1650 2000 2200 2600 3200 4000 4800 5100
Note: The ACB is to calibrated at 40℃, special application please refer to the table above and the curve below.
1200 5000
4800
1100
4600
1000 In=1000A 4400
Rated current （A）
4200
900
4000 In=4000A
800 In=800A 3800
3600
700
3400
In=630A
600 3200 In=3200A
3000
500
2800
400 In=400A 2600 In=2500A
2400
300
2200
In=200A In=2000A
200 2000
1800
100
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
0
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient temperature（℃）
Ambient temperature（℃） NA1-3200, NA1-4000
NA1-1000
2000 7000
In=2000A
1900 6800
1800 6600
1700 6400
In=1600A
1600 6200
1500 6000 In=6300A

1400 5800
In=1250A
1300 5600
1200 5400
1100 5200 In=5000A
In=1000A
1000 5000
900 4800
In=800A
800 4600
700 In=630A 4400
600 4200
In=4000A
500 4000
400 3800
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient temperature（℃） Ambient temperature（℃）

NA1-2000 NA1-6300
> >> C-100

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
12. Coordination recommendations
Capacity of transformer Breaking capacity of

Rated current Short circuit current
(kVA) & parallelly air circuit breaker for
of transformer In(A) of main circuit (kA)
connected number main circuit (kA)
1×250 360 9 9
2×250 360 9 9
3×250 360 9 18.5
1×315 455 11.4 11.4
2×315 455 11.4 11.4
3×315 455 11.4 22.7
1×400 578 14.4 14.4
2×400 578 14.4 14.4
3×400 578 14.4 28.8
1×500 722 18 18
2×500 722 18 18
3×500 722 18 36.1
1×630 910 22.7 22.7
2×630 910 22.7 22.7
3×630 910 22.7 44.5
1×800 1154 19.3 19.3
2×800 1154 19.3 19.3
3×800 1154 19.3 38.5
1×1000 1444 24 24
2×1000 1444 24 24
3×1000 1444 24 48.1
1×1250 1805 30 30
2×1250 1805 30 30
3×1250 1805 30 60.1
1×1600 2310 36.5 36.5
2×1600 2310 36.5 36.5
3×1600 2310 36.5 73
1×2000 2887 48.2 48.2
2×2000 2887 48.2 48.2
3×2000 2887 48.2 96.3
1×2500 3608 60 60
2×2500 3608 60 60
1×3150 4550 75.8 75.8
2×3150 4550 75.8 75.8
C-101 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Type of air circuit Number and area of the Breaking capacity of

busbar for main circuit Air circuit breaker
breaker for air circuit breaker
for branch circuit
main circuit (n×W×T) for branch circuit (kA)
NA1-1000-400 9
NA1-1000-400 2×(5×30) 18.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000-400 27.5
NA1-1000-630 11.4
NA1-1000-630
NA1-1000-630
2×(5×40) 22.7
34.1
NA1, NM8
C
NA1-1000-630 14.4
NA1-1000-630 2×(5×40) 28.8 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000-630 43.2
NA1-1000-800 18
NA1-1000-800 2×(6×50) 36.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000-800 54.1
NA1-1000-1000 22.7
NA1-1000-1000 2×(8×50) 44.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000-1000 67.2
NA1-2000-1250 19.3
NA1-2000-1250 2×(10×60) 38.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000-1250 57.8
NA1-2000-1600 24
NA1-2000-1600 2×(12×60) 48.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000-1600 72.1
NA1-2000-2000 30
NA1-2000-2000 3×(10×60) 60.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000-2000 90.1
NA1-3200-2500 36.5
NA1-3200-2500 2×(10×100) 73 NA1, NM8
NA1-3200-2500 109.5
NA1-3200-3200 48.2
NA1-3200-3200 4×(10×100) 96.3 NA1, NM8
NA1-3200-3200 144.5
NA1-6300-4000 60
4×(10×120) NA1, NM8
NA1-6300-4000 120
NA1-6300-5000 75.8
7×(10×100) NA1, NM8
NA1-6300-5000 151.6
> >> C-102

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
13. Selectivity protection
13.1 Selective protection between NM8 and NA1
Circuit breaker NA1-2000
Rated
400 630 800 1000 1250
current (A)
Default setting ratings
3.2 5.04 6.4 8 10
of short time-delay 8In (kA)
Downstream Upstream Setting

0.4~6 0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
Frame size Rated Instantaneous
rated current current (A) setting ratings (kA)
0.16 0.4~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

16
0.19(motor) 0.4~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.2 0.4~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

20
0.24(motor) 0.4~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.25 0.4~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

25
0.30(motor) 0.414~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.32 0.4416~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

32
0.38(motor) 0.5224~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.40 0.552~6 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

40
NM8-125 0.48(motor) 0.6624~6 0.6624~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
NM8S-125 0.50 0.69~6 0.69~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
50
0.60(motor) 0.828~6 0.828~9.45 0.828~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.63 0.8694~6 0.8694~9.45 0.8694~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

63
0.75(motor) 1.035~6 1.035~9.45 1.035~12 1.035~15 1.25~18.75
0.80 1.104~6 1.104~9.45 1.104~12 1.104~15 1.25~18.75

80
0.96(motor) 1.325~6 1.325~9.45 1.325~12 1.325~15 1.325~18.75
1.0 1.38~6 1.38~9.45 1.38~12 1.38~15 1.38~18.75

100 1.20(motor) 1.656~6 1.656~9.45 1.656~12 1.656~15 1.656~18.75
1.25 1.725 ~6 1.725~9.45 1.725~12 1.725~15 1.725~18.75

125 1.5(motor) 2.07~6 2.07~9.45 2.07~12 2.07~15 2.07~18.75
1.0 1.38~6 1.38~9.45 1.38~12 1.38~15 1.38~18.75

100
1.2(motor) 1.656~6 1.656~9.45 1.656~12 1.656~15 1.656~18.75
1.6 2.208~6 2.208~9.45 2.208~12 2.208~15 2.208~18.75

160
NM8-250 1.92(motor) 2.65~6 2.65~9.45 2.65~12 2.65~15 2.65~18.75
NM8S-250 2.0 2.76~6 2.76~9.45 2.76~12 2.76~15 2.76~18.75
200
2.4(motor) 3.312~6 3.312~9.45 3.312~12 3.312~15 3.312~18.75
2.5 3.45~6 3.45~9.45 3.45~12 3.45~15 3.45~18.75

250
3.0(motor) 4.14~6 4.14~9.45 4.14~12 4.14~15 4.14~18.75
C-103 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
16 16 20 25.6 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

C
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.656~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.725~24 1.725~30 1.725~30 1.725~37.7 1.725~48 1.725~48 1.725~60 1.725~60 1.725~75 1.725~94.5
2.07~24 2.07~30 2.07~30 2.07~37.7 2.07~48 2.07~48 2.07~60 2.07~60 2.07~75 2.07~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.656~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
2.208~24 2.208~30 2.208~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
2.65~24 2.65~30 2.65~30 2.65~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
2.76~24 2.76~30 2.76~30 2.76~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
3.312~24 3.312~30 3.312~30 3.312~37.7 3.312~48 3.312~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
3.45~24 3.45~30 3.45~30 3.45~37.7 3.45~48 3.45~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
4.14~24 4.14~30 4.14~30 4.14~37.7 4.14~48 4.14~48 4.14~60 4.14~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
> >> C-104

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Rated
400 630 800 1000 1250
current (A)
3.2 5.04 6.4 8 10
Setting
Downstream Upstream 0.4~6 0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
Frame size Rated Instantaneous
rated current current (A) setting ratings (kA)
2.5 3.45~6 3.45~9.45 3.45~12 3.45~15 3.45~18.75

250
3.0(motor) 4.14~6 4.14~9.45 4.14~12 4.14~15 4.14~18.75
3.15 4.347~6 4.347~9.45 4.347~12 4.347~15 4.347~18.75

315
3.78(motor) 5.216~6 5.216~9.45 5.216~12 5.216~15 5.216~18.75
NM8-630 3.5 4.83~6 4.83~9.45 4.83~12 4.83~15 4.83~18.75
350
NM8S-630 4.2(motor) 5.796~6 5.796~9.45 5.796~12 5.796~15 5.796~18.75
4.0 5.52~6 5.52~9.45 5.52~12 5.52~15 5.52~18.75

400
4.8(motor) 6.624~9.45 6.624~12 6.624~15 6.624~18.75
5.0 6.9~9.45 6.9~12 6.9~15 6.9~18.75

500
6.0(motor) 8.28~9.45 8.28~12 8.28~15 8.28~18.75
6.3 8.694~9.45 8.694~12 8.694~15 8.694~18.75

NM8S-630 630
7.56(motor) 10.44~12 10.44~15 10.44~18.75
6.3 8.694~9.45 8.694~12 8.694~15 8.694~18.75

630
7.56(motor) 10.44~12 10.44~15 10.44~18.75
7.0 9.66~12 9.66~15 9.66~18.75

700
8.4(motor) 11.59~12 11.59~15 11.59~18.75
NM8-1250 8.0 11.04~12 11.04~15 11.04~18.75
800
NM8S-1250 9.6(motor) 13.25~15 13.25~18.75
10 13.8~15 13.8~18.75
1000
12(motor) 16.56~18.75
12.5 17.25~18.75
1250
15.0(motor)
C-105 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
16 16 20 25.6 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 C

0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
3.45~24 3.45~30 3.45~30 3.45~37.7 3.45~48 3.45~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
4.14~24 4.14~30 4.14~30 4.14~37.7 4.14~48 4.14~48 4.14~60 4.14~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
4.347~24 4.347~30 4.347~30 4.347~37.7 4.347~48 4.347~48 4.347~60 4.347~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
5.216~24 5.216~30 5.216~30 5.216~37.7 5.216~48 5.216~48 5.216~60 5.216~60 5.216~75 6.3~94.5
4.83~24 4.83~30 4.83~30 4.83~37.7 4.83~48 4.83~48 4.83~60 4.83~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
5.796~24 5.796~30 5.796~30 5.796~37.7 5.796~48 5.796~48 5.796~60 5.796~60 5.796~75 6.3~94.5
5.52~24 5.52~30 5.52~30 5.52~37.7 5.52~48 5.52~48 5.52~60 5.52~60 5.52~75 6.3~94.5
6.624~24 6.624~30 6.624~30 6.624~37.7 6.624~48 6.624~48 6.624~60 6.624~60 6.624~75 6.624~94.5
6.9~24 6.9~30 6.9~30 6.9~37.7 6.9~48 6.9~48 6.9~60 6.9~60 6.9~75 6.9~94.5
8.28~24 8.28~30 8.28~30 8.28~37.7 8.28~48 8.28~48 8.28~60 8.28~60 8.28~75 8.28~94.5
8.694~24 8.694~30 8.694~30 8.694~37.7 8.694~48 8.694~48 8.694~60 8.694~60 8.694~75 8.694~94.5
10.44~24 10.44~30 10.44~30 10.44~37.7 10.44~48 10.44~48 10.44~60 10.44~60 10.44~75 10.44~94.5
8.694~24 8.694~30 8.694~30 8.694~37.7 8.694~48 8.694~48 8.694~60 8.694~60 8.694~75 8.694~94.5
10.44~24 10.44~30 10.44~30 10.44~37.7 10.44~48 10.44~48 10.44~60 10.44~60 10.44~75 10.44~94.5
9.66~24 9.66~30 9.66~30 9.66~37.7 9.66~48 9.66~48 9.66~60 9.66~60 9.66~75 9.66~94.5
11.59~24 11.59~30 11.59~30 11.59~37.7 11.59~48 11.59~48 11.59~60 11.59~60 11.59~75 11.59~94.5
11.04~24 11.04~30 11.04~30 11.04~37.7 11.04~48 11.04~48 11.04~60 11.04~60 11.04~75 11.04~94.5
13.25~24 13.25~30 13.25~30 13.25~37.7 13.25~48 13.25~48 13.25~60 13.25~60 13.25~75 13.25~94.5
13.8~24 13.8~30 13.8~30 13.8~37.7 13.8~48 13.8~48 13.8~60 13.8~60 13.8~75 13.8~94.5
16.56~24 16.56~30 16.56~30 16.56~37.7 16.56~48 16.56~48 16.56~60 16.56~60 16.56~75 16.56~94.5
17.25~24 17.25~30 17.25~30 17.25~37.7 17.25~48 17.25~48 17.25~60 17.25~60 17.25~75 17.25~94.5
20.7~24 20.7~30 20.7~30 20.7~37.7 20.7~48 20.7~48 20.7~60 20.7~60 20.7~75 20.7~94.5
> >> C-106

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
13.2 Selective protection in NA1
Rated
400 630 800 1000 1250
current (A)
3.2 5.04 6.4 8 10
Setting
Downstream Upstream 0.4~6 0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
Frame size Rated Default instantaneous
rated current current (A) setting ratings 12In (kA)
400 4.8 6.348~9.45 6.348~12 6.348~15 6.348~18.75
630 7.56 9.998~12 9.998~15 9.998~18.75
800 9.6 12.696~15 12.696~18.75
NA1-2000 1000 12 15.87~18.75
1250 15
1600 19.2
2000 24
2000 24
NA1-3200 2500 30
3200 38.4
3200 38.4
NA1-4000
4000 48
4000 48
NA1-6300 5000 60
6300 75
Note: It can satisfy the selective protection if only the short time-delay setting value of the superior breaker 1.32 times more than the
subordinate breaker, when the instantaneous setting value is adjustive.
C-107 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
16 16 20 25.6 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

C
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
6.348~24 6.348~30 6.348~30 6.348~37.7 6.348~48 6.348~48 6.348~60 6.348~60 6.348~75 6.348~94.5
9.998~24 9.998~30 9.998~30 9.998~37.7 9.998~48 9.998~48 9.998~60 9.998~60 9.998~75 9.998~94.5
12.696~24 12.696~30 12.696~30 12.696~37.7 12.696~48 12.696~48 12.696~60 12.696~60 12.696~75 12.696~94.5
15.87~24 15.87~30 15.87~30 15.87~37.7 15.87~48 15.87~48 15.87~60 15.87~60 15.87~75 15.87~94.5
19.837~24 19.837~30 19.837~30 19.837~37.7 19.837~48 19.837~48 19.837~60 19.837~60 19.837~75 19.837~94.5
25.392~30 25.392~30 25.392~37.7 25.392~48 25.392~48 25.392~60 25.392~60 25.392~75 25.392~94.5
31.74~37.7 31.74~48 31.74~48 31.74~60 31.74~60 31.74~75 31.74~94.5
31.74~37.7 31.74~48 31.74~48 31.74~60 31.74~60 31.74~75 31.74~94.5
39.675~48 39.675~48 39.675~60 39.675~60 39.675~75 39.675~94.5
50.784~60 50.784~60 50.784~75 50.784~94.5
50.784~60 50.784~60 50.784~75 50.784~94.5
63.48~75 63.48~94.5
63.48~75 63.48~94.5
79.35~94.5
> >> C-108

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
14. Intelligent controller
14.1 The intelligent controller of NA1-1000
a. The standard M type intelligent controller (NA1-1000)
1: Reset key
1 2: Rated current
3: MCU indicator( normal operation indicator)
4: Current indicator
2 3
5-Earthing fault indicator
4
7 6: Short circuit instantaneous fault indicator
5 8 7: Short circuit short time-delay fault indicator
6 8: Overload fault indicator
9: Time setting table
9 10: Current setting table
11: Overload long time-delay time setting key
10 12: Overload long time-delay current setting key
13: Fault cheking key
14: Short circuit short time-delay time setting key
15: Short circuit short time-delay current setting key
16: Test key
17: Short circuit instantaneous current setting key
18: Clear LED key
11
12 19: Earthing current setting key
13
14
15 16
20: Earthing time setting key
The function of keys show as followed:
17 18
“Fault checking“ key: After the breaker tripping,
19 20 press this key to indicate the kind of fault.
“Test key” key: used for checking the controller and the action of
the breaker.
“Clear LED” key: After the setting,testing and fault checking of the
controller, make the circuit breaker at normal operation.
b. The communication H type intelligent controller(NA1-1000)
2 1: Reset key
2: LCD display window
3: Fault and alarm reset key
4: Curve LED indication
3 5: ”Fault/alarm” LED
6: ”Normal” LED
4 5
7: ”Communication” indicator
6
7 8: Test key
9: Setting key
10: Message key
10 11: Protection key
12: Increasing key
8 11 13: Decreasing key
9 14: Choosing key
12 14
15: Exit key
15
13 16: Testing port
16
C-109 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
c. Basic functions
● stands for definite setting ■ stands for optional setting — stands for no funcion
Standard (M type) Communication (H type)
Controller type Three cascades Four cascades Three cascades Four cascades
protection protection protection protection
Long time-delay protection ● ● ● ●
Short time-delay protection ● ● ● ●
Instantaneous protection ● ● ● ●
Earthing fault protection
Load current display
—
●
●
● —
● ●
—
C
Load current digital display (Ampere Meter) — — ● ●
Test function ● ● ● ●
Basic Fault recall ● ● ● ●
function Self-diagnose function ● ● ● ●
MCR making and breaking function ● ● ● ●
Fault alarm ● ● ● ●
Fault breaking indication ● ● ● ●
Customer setting, testing ● ● ● ●
Load monitor — — — —
RS485 port MODBUS protocol — — — —
Voltage measuring — — — —
Frequency display — — — —
Active power measuring — — — —
Power factor measuring — — — —
Electric energy measuring — — — —
Over voltage protection — — — —
Under voltage protection — — — —
Optional Phase protection — — ● ●
auxiliary
Current transformer earthing protection ■ (3P+N model) ■ (3P+N model) ■ ■
function
Exceed breaking function ■ ■ ■ ■
Thermal recall fuction ■ ■ ■ ■
Four output contacts ■ ■ ■ ■
LED display, code switch and LCD display, LED indication,
Man-machine interface instruction
toggle switch setting keyboard operation
d. Operation instructions
Standard intelligent controller setting
According to the panel number 9 showed, dial the switch 11,14,20 to set the time you need.
According to the panel number 10 showed, dial the switch 12,15,17,19 to set the current you need.
Example 1: means that overload long time-delay current is 0.9In, overload long time-delay time is 60s.
Example 2: means that short circuit short time-delay current is 4In, short circuit short time-delay time is 0.4s.
> >> C-110

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Example 1 Example 2
tr tsd
Ir Isd
Communication intelligent controller setting and operation. 547 A

It provides 4 main menu and 1 default interface. N A B C
150
Default interface
Without other function action, it displays phases current column 100
chart.
50
1. “Testing” menu 2. “System data setting” menu
Current I Harmonic Clock setting

wave H
Voltage U Measure metre setting
Frequency F Testing lock
Power P Communication setting
Electric energe E I/O setting
Press or key to return default interface. Press or key to return default interface.
On other non-fault interface, press to skip to testing On other non-fault interface, press to skip to
menu. system data setting menu.
Without action for several minutes, Without action for several minutes,
it returns to the default interface. it returns to the default interface.
3. “Protection data setting” menu 4. “Historical record and maintain” menu
Current protection Present alarm Alarm record

Load monitor Operation times Shift record
Voltage protecting Contact wearing
Other protection Product information

Trip record
Press or key to return default interface. Press or key to return default interface..
On other non-fault interface, press to skip to On other non-fault interface, press to skip to
protection data setting menu. testing menu.
Without action for several minutes, Without action for several minutes,
it returns to the default interface. it returns to the default interface.
C-111 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
5. Submenu operation show:
overload longtime-delay protection setting
Long time-delay Long time-delay Long time-delay
Ir=400A Ir=1000A Ir=1000A

(40.0%In) (100%In) (100%In)
Curve type Curve type Curve type
= SI = SI = SI
▲
+
-
▲
then ▲
+
-
▲
Setting definite value Save definite value C
Note: communication controller actual menu will change as

customers' choice.
e. Over current protection characteristic

The characteristic of intelligent controller
10000
5000
I R =(0.4～1)In
2000
tl=(30～240)s
(M type)
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(a)
1
Isd=(3~10)IR(M type)
0.4s or(1.5~15)In(H type)
0.5
0.3s
0.2 ts=(0.2~0.4)s(M type)
0.2s
ts=(0.1~0.4)s(H type)
0.1
0.1s
0.05
0.02 Ii=(3~15)In+OFF(M type)

or(1~20)In+OFF(H type)
0.01
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100
xIn kA
> >> C-112

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Long time-delay overcurrent protection, inverse time characteristic.
Setting current
Error Current Tripping time (s) Time error
(IR)
1.05IR <2h Non-trip
1.3IR <1h trip
1.5IR(M) 30 60 120 240 ±10%
(0.4~1)In+OFF ±10%
2.0IR(M) 16.9 33.8 67.5 135 ±10%
1.5IR(H) 0.61~86 ±10%
6.0IR(H) 0.14~19.2 ±10%
Short time-delay overcurrent protection characteristic.
Setting current
Error Setting delay time (s) Time error
(IR)
Isd ts(s)
M (3~10)IR+OFF ±10% 0.2 0.4 ±15%
H OFF+(1.5~15)IR ±10% 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±15%
Instantaneous characteristic.
Type Setting current (Ii) Tripping Error
M (3~15)In+OFF ≤0.85Ii 30ms Non-trip；＞1.15Ii trip ±15%
H (1~20)In+OFF ≤0.85Ii 40ms Non-trip；＞1.15Ii trip ±15%
Earthing fault protection characteristic
Type Rated current (Ig) Error Rated delay time (Tg) Time error
M (0.2~0.8)In+OFF，min 100A ±10% 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 ±15%
H (0.2~1.0)In+OFF，min 100A ±10% (0.1~1.0)s ±15%
Single phase earthing protection curre (M type)
Ig=(0.2~0.8)In(M type)
min 100A
Ig=(0.2~1.0)In(H type)
min 100A
T(s)
0.05 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
XIn
C-113 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Wiring diagram of the earthing fault protection.
Transformer Current transformer Transformer Current transformer
Intelligent Intelligent
controller controller
C
Transformer Transformer Current transformer

Current transformer
N
N
Intelligent
Intelligent
controller
controller
PE
Load monitor characteristic.
10
×In ×In
> >> C-114

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
14.2 The intelligent controller of NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300
14.2.1 The standard M type intelligent controller (NA1-2000 3P 4P; NA1-3200 3P 4P; NA1 4000 3P)
The M type intelligent controller is the core part of the NA1 Air Circuit Breaker to protect the electric circuit and the power supply
against the dangers such as overload, short circuit and single-phase earthing fault. The controller adopts highly-integrated and high-
performance digital signal processor that featuring power functions and reliable performance to perform real-time processing to the
signal so as to achieve various protection function and numerous auxiliary functions.
Appearance and panel illustration
Reset button
Rated current
Ammeter display window
Select key
Clear key
Fault indicator
Protection indicator
Fault checking key
Function key
Program interface
Selectivity protection Earth fault protection
t t
IL IS II I IG I
C-115 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
a. Symbol designation table
Number Symbol Designation

1 Inm Frame size rated current of breaker
2 In Rated current
3 IL(Ir1),Is(Ir2),Ii(Ir3) Action current of long time-delay, short time-delay and instantaneous
4 IG(Ir4) Action current of earth fault or phase N
5 tL,ts,tG Action time of long time-delay, short time-delay and grounding
6 L1,L2,L3,G Phase A, B, C and N (or earth) C
7 Ic1,Ic2 Action current of load monitor 1 and load monitor 2
8 T,I Time, current
9 A,kA,s Unit Indicator: Ampere, kilo-Ampere, second
b.Operating power supply Step 6: Repeat step 3 ~ step 5 in case requiring changing
The operating power supply input to the intelligent controller: other parameters. If not, press “reset” key till the characteristic
AC 400V/380V, 230V/220V, AC 110V, 50Hz; curve indicator is off.
DC220V, 110V, 24V. Note: In case of occurrence of malfunction under setup status,
c. Basic functions of intelligent controller it will automatically exit the setup status and enter into
Main protection function malfunction status.
Query function During the adjustment of the parameters, the longer the time of
Parameter setting function pressing or holding the “+” or “-” key is, the faster the up or
Test function down speed is.
Load monitor function (optional)
Making current release (MCR) and High-Set Instantaneous Failure inquiry operation
Short Circuit (HSISC) function (optional) Query operation method
Signal alarm function (optional) Step 1: Make sure the controller is under reset status.
d. Operation instructions Step 2: Press “fault display” key till the ammeter display window
Parameter setting operation indicates the failure action value and the action time alternately.
Step 1: Setting right confirmation. The key must be switched Press “select” to inquiry relevant parameters.
to ”setting” position for type H. Step 3: Press “reset” key to exit the inquiry status.
This step is no necessary for type M.
Step 2: Make sure the controller is under reset status. If the Test operation method
controller isn't under reset status, press ”reset” key till the Step 1: Make sure the controller is under reset status.
ammeter displays operation current. Step 2: Press “set” key till the indicator of the short time-delay
Note: When the controller is under malfunction alarm status, characteristic curve current is on. Press “+””-” to adjust the
then the setup function is locked and the setup operation required current.
can't be conducted. Press “trip” key, then the breaker will trip. The ammeter display
Step 3: Press “set” key till the ammeter display window window will display the action current and action time in turn.
displays required action current or time setting. Step 3: Press “reset” key to exit the test status.
Step 4: Press ”+” and ”-” to set the items to be changed.
Step 5: Press “save” key. At that time, the “save“ indicator
will flash once to indicate that the parameters are saved.
If not desiring to save, then directly press “reset” key.
Then the parameters won't be changed and will remain the
original values.
> >> C-116

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
e. Characteristic
Over-current protection characteristic curve figure
10000
5000
Ir1=(0.4～1)In
2000
Tr=(15~480)s
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(a)
1
Ir2=(1.0~15)Ir1
0.5 0.4s
0.3s
0.2
I 2t 0.2s
OFF
0.1
0.1s
0.05
Ir3=1.0In～50kA/75kA/100kA
0.02
0.01
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100
xIn kA
Overload long time-delay protection
Current Ratings
Error Current Action Time Time Error
Range(lr1)
≤1.05Ir1 ＜2h Non-trip

＞1.30Ir1 ＜1h trip
(0.4~1) In ±10%
1.51Ir1(setting time) 15 30 60 120 240 480 ±10%
2.0Ir1 8.4 16.9 33.7 67.5 135 270 ±10%
Phase N Overload and
Over-Current Characteristic 100% or 50% (Applicable to 3P+N or 4P)
Short-circuit short-delay protection
Current Ratings
Range(lr2)
≤0.9Ir2 Non-trip
NA1-2000 1.3Ir1~15Ir1+OFF (OFF Position)
＞1.10Ir2 Delayed-trip
NA1-3200 1.3Ir1~15Ir1+OFF (OFF Position), Ir2≤40KA ±10%
Time setting (ts) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±25%
NA1-6300 1.3Ir1~15Ir1+OFF (OFF Position), Ir2≤50KA
Returnable Time 0.06 014 0.19 0.25 ±25%
Short circuit instantaneous protection

Current Ratings Range(lr3) Error Current Action Characteristic
NA1-2000 1.3In~50kA ≤0.85Ir3 Non-trip

NA1-3200 1.3In~65kA ±15%
NA1-6300 1.3In~75kA ＞1.15Ir3 trip
C-117 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
f. Earth fault protection
The earth fault protection has definite time-delay characteristic
with the failure delayed time no less than the definite time-delay time setting.
Earth fault Protection Characteristic Curve
1000
500
C
100
50
20
10 Ir4=(0.2~0.8)In
t(s) 5
2
1
0.5 0.4s 0.4s

0.3s 0.3s
0.2 0.2s 0.2s
0.1 0.1s 0.1s
0.05
0.02
0.01
.05 .06 .08 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
xIn
Single phase earth fault protection technical data:
Current Ratings
Range(lr4)
≤0.8 lr4 Non-tripping
(0.2~0.8)ln
>1.0 lr4 Tripping
+OFF (OFF position) ±10%
Setting time (Tg) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±25%
(NA1-2000, min160A)
Returnable time 0.06 014 0.19 0.25 ±25%
> >> C-118

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
14.3 NA1 Multifunctional Intelligent Controller
a. Menu Operation Explanation
Display operation kneading board
7 7
1 1
2
3 2
4 3
4
5
6 6
16 16
1: LCD interface display 6: curve LED

2: fault and warning Reset There is the red LED indicating lamp hiding in the curve.
3: fault/warning LED The corresponding LED lamp will flash to indicate the fault
The LED will not flash when it works normally; type when tripping at fault.
the red LED will flash fast when tripping at fault; The LED is on to indicate the project set at the moment
the red LED will on when warning occurs. when protective parameter is set.
4: “normal” LED 7: machinery reset button
The green LED will always flash if only the ST40-3 is The button will spring when fault trips or test trips.
powered and works stably. When not press down, the circuit breaker are not allowed
5: communication indicating lamp to shut off.
The communication condition is indicating as follows: When press down, fault indication will be reset
Profibus: off when no communication; at the same time.
on when communication.
Modbus: off when no communication;
flash when communication.
Device Net: Flash when no communication,
on when communication.
C-119 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
8 9 10 11 8: Measure— function key 1, switch to measure default theme

menu (the key in the password input interface is “left”)
9: Set— function key 2, switch to parameter set theme menu
(the key in the password input interface is “right”)
10: protection—function key 3, switch to protection parameter
set theme menu.
11: Information—function key 4, switch to history and
maintenance theme menu. C
12: Up—up to move the menu content under the current used
grade, or up to change the chose parameter.
13: Down—down to move the menu content under the current
used grade, or down to change the chose parameter.
14: Escape—to escape from this grade and return to upper
menu; or cancel the current parameter selected.
15: Select—enter into the next menu directed by the current
12 13 14 15 item, or for the current parameter selected and store
modifications.
16: Test port—The bottom of the front board has a 16 pin test
port, which can insert a inserted portable power supply or
inspection unit.
Selective protection Earth fault/residual current protection
t t
0 I 0 I
b. Panorama of intelligent controllers for NA1 series
Type Rated current (A) Number of poles M 3M 3H
NA1-2000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 Yes Yes Yes
NA1-3200 2000 2500 3200 3P, 4P Yes Yes Yes
4000 5000 Yes Yes Yes

NA1-6300
6300 3P Yes Yes Yes
> >> C-120

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
c. NA1 Multifunctional Intelligent Controller subject menu
NA1 Multifunctional Intelligent controller has provided
4 subject menu and 1 default interface
1. Default interface 2. “measure” menu
452 A 3H
150
A B C N current I
100 voltage U
50 frequency F
3H
energy E
power P
·The controller displays the default interface harmonic H
when on electiicity.
·Under each subject menu, press or the
corresponding subject key can return to default
interface.
·press to enter into measure main menu
·If don't press any keys in 5 minutes and then the
·press or to return to default interface
pane cursor will show the maximum phase
automatically. ·In other non-fault interface, press to jump to
·In the non-activated fault interface, measure menu
if don't press any key in 30 minutes
and then will automatically return to the
default interface.
3. “system parameter set”menu 4. “protection parameter set”menu
3H 3H
clock set current protection
measurement meter set load monitor
test & clock voltage protection
3H 3H
communication set other protection
I/O set
·Press or to return to default interface ·Press or to return to default interface

·In other non-fault interface, press to jump to ·In other non-fault interface, press to jump to
system parameter set menu protection parameter set menu
C-121 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
5. “history and maintenance”menu
3H 3H 3H
current warning production information Variable-record
operating time release record
contact wearout warning record
C
·Press or to return to default interface
·In other non-fault interface, press to jump to history and maintenance menu
6. Sub-menu operation example:

overload long delay protection set
Ir Ir Ir
=1000 A =40.4 %In 1200 A =48.0 %In =1200 A =48.0 %In
curve type curve type curve type
=VI =VI =VI
▲
+
-
▲
then adjust ▲
+
-
▲
fixed value save fixed value
d. Instruction to technical property
5000
2000
1000
500
Express inverse-time 1
(Ordinary use)
200
Express inverse-time 2
(Motor protection)
100
Express inverse-time
50
Standard
inverse-time
20
10
t(s)
5 High-voltage fuse
compatibility
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20
Xin1
> >> C-122

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Function of intelligent controller
● stands for definite setting ■ stands for optional setting — stands for no funcion
Type
Function configuration
M 3M 3H
Current display function ● ● ●

Overload long time delay protection(inverse) ● ● ●
Short circuit short time delay protection(inverse and definite) ● ● ●
Short circuit instantaneous protection ● ● ●
Single-phase earthing fault protection ● ● ●
Current imbalance protection caused by phase failure ● ● ●
Parameter setting function ● ● ●
Test(simulate trip）function ● ● ●
Inquiry function ● ● ●
Self-diagnose function — ● ●
Programing interface function — — —
Communication function — — ●
Contact abrasion extent record — ● ●
Operating times record — ● ●

Clock function — ● ●
Alarm record — ● ●
Position (making, energy storage or breaking) change record — ● ●

The history current peak value record — ● ●
MCR(Making current release) and HSISC(High-setting instantaneous short circuit) — ● ●
Current leakage protection(inverse and definite) — ■ ■
Neutral (N phase) protection — ● ●
Load monitor function (Modes 1 and Modes 2) — ■ ●
Voltage measurement display function — ■ ●
Frequency measurement display function — ■ ●
Voltage imbalance measurement display function — ■ ●
Power measurement display function — ■ ●
Power factor measurement display function — ■ ●
Electrical energy measurement display function — ■ ●
Fault clock function — ■ ■
History data record function — ■ ■

Phase sequence checking — ■ ■
Average value in a certain period of time measurement function (current and power) — ■ ■
Humorous-wave measurement — ■ ■
Over-voltage protection — ■ ■
Under-voltage protection — ■ ■
Voltage imbalance protection — ■ ■
Over-frequency protection — ■ ■
Under-frequency protection — ■ ■
Phase sequence protection — ■ ■
Inverse power potection — ■ ■
Position lock function — — —
C-123 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
e. Overload long time-delay protection
■Power distribution or motor protection

Ir1= (0.4~1.0)In + OFF (Exit position)
Setting current I≤1.05Ir1 without actions in 2h
Acting property
I＞1.3Ir1 with actions while it's less than 1h
Property curve Curve 1~curve 5, could be rectified, rectified as curve 3 for ex-factory
Inverse-time (s)
Curve speed IEC255 standard, 80 level points totally, could be rectified
(Corresponding 2Ir1)
Precision ±10% (intrinsic 40ms)
Note: When N-phase is 50%, protective settings are treated as 50% for N-phase. If long delay setting is 2000A, long delay setting for C
phase A, B and C is 2000A, and 1000A for phase N.
f. Instruction to short time-delay property

Ir2= (1.5~15) Ir1 + OFF (exit position)
Setting current ≤0.9Ir2 without actions
Acting property
＞1.1Ir2 delay action
Inverse-time delay (s) Ts= (0.1~0.4)s (0.1s level error)
(Corresponding 2Ir1) Precision ±10% (intrinsic 40ms)
Inverse-time property Curve is the same as overload long delay, but curve speed is 10 times faster
Short delay inverse-time thermal memory (15min) Standard + OFF
Note: When controller is frame I (Inm=2000A), rectified value of short time-delay protection is 1.5 Ir1~15 Ir1;
when controller is frame II (Inm=3200A, 4000A), rectified value of short time-delay protection is 1.5 Ir1~15 Ir1 and max is 40kA;
When controller is frame III (Inm=6300A), rectified value of short time-delay protection is 1.5 Ir1~15 Ir1 and max is 50kA.
g. Instruction to short circuit instantaneous property

Ir3= 1.01n~50kA/65kA/75kA+OFF (Exit position)
Setting current ≤0.85Ir3 without actions
Acting property
＞1.15Ir3 with actions
Note: When controller is frame I (Inm=2000A), rectified value of instantaneous protection is 1.0In~50kA+OFF;
when controller is frameII (Inm=3200A), rectified value of instantaneous protection is 1.0In~65kA+OFF;
When controller is frame III (Inm=6300A), rectified value of instantaneous protection is 1.01n~75kA+OFF.
h. Earth fault or residual current protective property: t=TG×KG×If /I

■Earth fault protection
(0.2~0.8)In + OFF (with 160A as the minimum and 1200A as the maximum.
If= OFF means it only alarms without tripping)
Setting current
＜0.8If without actions
Acting property
≥1.0 If delayed action
■Earth fault protection
TG = (0.1~1.0)s + OFF (Level difference 0.1s, OFF means it only alarms without tripping.)
Inverse-time (s) Inverse-time cutting
(1.5~6)s+OFF (Level difference 0.5, OFF means earth fault is definite-time)
(Corresponding 2Ir1) coefficient KG
Precision ±10% (intrinsic 40ms)
If= (0.1~1.0)Io + OFF (Level different 0.01A, OFF means exit position)
Setting current ＜0.8If without actions
Acting property
≥1.0 If delayed action
Property curve Curve 1~curve 5, could be rectified, rectified as curve 3 for ex-factory
Delay (s) TG = (1.5~6)s + OFF (Level difference 0.5s, OFF means is definite-time)
Precision ±15%
> >> C-124

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Wiring diagram of earth fault protection
3PT type 4PT type (3P+N) T method
CT CT L1 CT L1
L1
L2 L2
L2
L3 L3
L3
N
PEN intelligent
PE
intelligent controller
intelligent
controller
controller N
PE
externally connected zero sequence current externally connected zero sequence current externally connected zero sequence current
inductor type 1 applied(ZCT) inductor type 2 applied(ZCT) inductor type 3 applied(ZCT)
ZCT ZCT
CT CT CT
L1 L1 L1
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
N N
PEN
PE intelligent
intelligent ZT100
intelligent controller
controller
controller
PE or PEN
I. Load monitor protection property
load type method 1 property curve load monitor type 2 property curve
10000
10000
5000
5000
Ir1=(0.4~1)In
Ir1=(0.4~1)In
Ic1=(0.2~1)In
2000 Ic1=(0.2~1)In
2000
Ic2=(0.2~1)In Ic2=(0.2~1)In
1000
1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
t1=(15~480)S tr2=60s t1=(15~480)S
20 20
Tr1=(1/2)tL
10 Tr2=(1/4)tL 10 tr2=1/4tL
5 5
t(a) t(a)
2 2
tr1=1/2tL
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2
0.2
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01 30
0.010.02 0.03.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
0.01 0.02 0.03 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 xIn
xIn
C-125 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Technical parameter:
■Load monitor type 1

IC1= (0.2~1.0)In + OFF (OFF means exit position)
Rectified current ≤1.05Ic1 without action
Acting property
＞1.21c1 delay relay action
Property curve The same as overload long delay
Inverse-time (s)
Curve speed Could be set separately (Setting content is the same as that of overload long delay)
Ic2= (0.2~1.0)In + OFF (OFF means exit position)
Rectified current
Acting property
≤1.05Ic2 without action
＞1.21c2 delayed relay
C
Maximal inverse- Property curve The same as overload long delay
time delay (s) Curve speed Could be set separately (Setting content is the same as that of overload long delay)
■Load monitor type 2

Rectified current ≤1.05Ic1 without action
Acting property
＞1.21c1 delay relay action
Property curve The same as overload long delay
Inverse-time (s) Curve speed Could be set separately (Setting content is the same as that of overload long delay)
Rectified current Acting property ≤0.9Ic2 without action
Fixed delay (s) Fixed as 60s
Precision ±10% (Intrinsic 40ms)
Thermal memory (30min, could be eliminated while power-off) Standard + OFF
j. Protective property on unbalance current
δ= 40%~100% + OFF (Level difference 0.1, OFF means exit)

Rectified current ≤0.9δ without actions
Action or alarm property
＞1.1δ delay action
Delay time (s) Tδ= (0.1~1.0)s (Level difference 0.1, OFF means exit)
Precision ±10% (Intrinsic 40ms)
k. Communication networking
Make key-lock at “communication” position, connect to
secondary terminals “10#” and “11#” through cable to
achiveve the communication function.
Modbus protocol networking Profibus-DP protocal networking
Rt
Rt
ST-DP ST-DP ST-DP
CP5×11Main
RS232 RS485 station card r
Converter RS485
NA1 NA1 NA1
NA1 NA1 NA1
Monitor host Monitor host
Communication connection diagram (Modbus protocol)

Communication connection diagram (Profibus-DP protocol)
> >> C-126

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
15. Accessories
Without power supply, under-voltage release can't close.
It is classified into instantaneous and time-delay type.
Delay time 0, 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s are fixed for NA1-1000; 1s, 3s, 5s are fixed for NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300.
Within 1/2 time-delay range, circuit breaker does not trip when power voltage recovers and exceeds 85%Ue.
Characteristic
Type NA1-1000 NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300

Rated control power voltage Us(V) AC230, 400 AC400, 230, 127 DC220, 110
Action voltage(V) (0.35-0.7)Us
Reliable making voltage(V) (0.85-1.1)Us
Reliable non-making voltage(V) ≤0.35Us
Power loss(W) 20VA 48VA
Optional configure: Auto suction type under-voltage release, and this device can substitute normal one, it can prvent mechanism form
misoperation.
Make sure there is power supply on the under-voltage release, before making the circuit breaker.
15.2 Shunt release

Shunt release can realize the remote control to break the circuit breaker.
Characteristic
Type NA1-1000 NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300

Rated control power voltage Us(V) AC230, 400 DC220, 110 AC400, 230, 127 DC220, 110
Work voltage (0.7-1.1)Us
Power loss 56VA 250W 300VA 134W 75W
Breaking time (50±10)ms (30~50)ms
Forbid making the power for long time to avoid the shunt release being damaged.

After the motor finishing the energy storage, closing release can instantly close the circuit breaker.
Characteristic
Type NA1-1000 NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300

Work voltage (V) (0.85-1.1)Us
Power loss (W) 56VA 250W 300VA 134W 75W
Closing time (50±10)ms ≤70ms
Forbid making the power for long time to avoid the closing release being damaged.
C-127 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
15.4 Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism

With the function of motor-driven energy storing and auto restoring energy after closing the circuit breaker, the mechanism can
ensure closing the circuit breaker instantly after breaking the circuit breaker.
Manual energy-store is available.
Characteristic
C
Type NA1-1000 NA1-2000, 3200, 4000, 6300
Work voltage (V) (0.85-1.1)Us
Power loss (W) 75VA 75W 85/110/150W 192W
Energy-storage time <4s <5s
Operation frequency No more than 3 times per minute
15.5 Auxiliary contact NO

Standard model: 4NO(normal open)/4NC(normal close) and 6NC(normal close).
Characteristic
Type NA1-1000 NA1-2000~6300

Rated voltage (V) AC230 AC400 DC220 AC230 AC400 DC220
conventional free-air thermal current Ith (A) 6 6 0.5 6 6 6
Rated control capacity 300VA 100VA 60W 300VA 300VA 60W
15.6 Doorcase
Installed on the door of the distribution cubicle, for sealing 15.7 Phases barrier
the distribution cubicle and making the Installed between the busbars to increase the creepage
protection class to IP40( fixed type and drawout type). distance.
15.9 Transparent shield (NA1-2000)

15.8 Operation pushbutton lock Installed on the doorcase of the cubicle's small door,
Used for locking the break pushbutton and the close make the protection class to IP54. It is suitable for the
pushbutton. ( Padlock is prepared by users) fixed, drawout type circuit breaker and the load switch.
> >> C-128

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
15.10 Off position locking mechanism
When the circuit breaker is disconnected, padlock can be used to lock it after pulling out the lock lever, then the circuit breaker
can't be “Test” or “connected” position.( Padlock is prepared by users)
15.11 Key lock
Lock the circuit breaker on the OFF position, then the circuit breaker can't be closed.
Locks and keys will be provided by us.
Separate lock and key is matched with one set of the circuit breaker.
Three same locks and two same keys are matched with three circuit breaker.
Note: Before pulling out the key, the break pushbutton should be pressed first, rotate the key anticlockwise, then pull it out.
★ NA1Install the locking system

1. Components of the locking system:
lock washer key
2. Installation sequence:
1. Boring here, and 2. Put the into 3. Install the 4. Push the red button “ON”, and take the
polish the hole hole
make the hole lock here key out, then install the cover.
it smooth
15.12 Cable mechanical interlock

It can realize the interlock of two horizontal or vertical-installed, three poles or four poles ,
drawout type or fixed type circuit breaker.
a. If need bend the cable, make sure the radian is more than 120°.
b. Check and make sure enough lubricating oil of the cable.
c. The maximal distance between two interlock circuit breaker is 2m.
2m(max)
Circuit diagram Available running manner
1QF 2QF
1QF 2QF
0 0
0 1
1 0
Notes: a. when the steel cable needs to be bent, enough transition arc should be reserved to guarantee flexible movement of steel cable;
b. check the steel cable and make sure there is enough lubricant in the steel cable to guarantee flexible movement of steel cable.
C-129 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
15.13 Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock
Three vertical-installed three-poles or four-poles, drawout-type or fixed type circuit breakers realize the interlock between one
breaker with another two different-state breakers.
Circuit diagram Available running manner
Manner 1: three power supplies are provided

for one circuit breaker only
1QF 2QF
C
0 0
1QF 2QF
0 1
1 0
15.14 Drawer base misplug-proof device (NA1-1000)

Only the matched circuit breaker body could inserted to the drawer base. When not matched, it can't be inserted.
Bracket 2
Nameplate
Bracket 1
Body
Drawout base
Match Mis-match Mis-match
> >> C-130

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
16. Regular malfunction and solutions
Fault description Reasons analysis Maintenance method
1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release.
Over load tripping 2. Analyze the load and electric network, exclude the overload if it happens.
(IL indicator flashing) 3. Match the actual operating current with long time-delay current setting value.
4. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release.
2. Exclude the short circuit fault if it happens
Short circuit tripping
3. Check the setting value of intelligent release
(“Is”or“Ii”indicator flashing)
4. Check the normal state of breaker
5. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
Tripping of
circuit breaker
1. Check the breaking current value and acting time of intelligent release.
Earthing fault tripping 2. Exclude the earthing fault if that happens.
(IG indicator flashing) 3. Match the fault current setting value with the actual protection.
4. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker.
Under-voltage release fault: 1.Check the power is on or not

1. Rated working voltage is 2.Check the power voltage of under-voltage release, it shouldn't be less
less than 70%Ue than 85%Ue.
2. Fault of control unit 3.Replace the control unit of under-voltage release
Mechanical interlock acting Check the working state of two circuit breakers fixed with mechanical interlock
Intelligent release don't reset
Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
(panel is raised)
The breaker Secondary circuit of drawerout- Make the breaker to "making" position
can't be type breaker isn't connected ("click" sound will be heard)
closed
Check the secondary circuit:
Breaker hasn't stored energy 1. Power voltage of motor shouldn't less than 85%Ue.
2. Check the storage mechanism, replace it if necessary.
Mechanical interlock acting Check the working state of two circuit breakers
leads to locking of breaker fixed with mechanical interlock
The breaker Closing electromagnet:

can't be 1.Rated control voltage is 1. Power voltage of closing electromagnet
closed less than 85%Us; shouldn't less than 85%Us.
2.Closing electromagnet 2. Replace the electromagnet.
is damaged
Tripping immediately: 1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release;
Tripping after
1. Short circuit current is closed 2. Exclude the short circuit fault if it happens;
closing the
2.Delay tripping because of 3. Exclude overload fault
circuit breaker
(Fault indicator transient current is high 4. Check the normal state of breaker
flashing) when closing; 5. Modify the current setting value of intelligent release
3. Overload current is closed 6. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
The breaker can't be opened manually

1. There is fault with mechanical operating 1. Check the mechanism, if there is fault happened.
mechanism
The breaker can't be opened by

Circuit breaker motor remotely
can't be opened 1. Check the mechanism, if there is fault happened.
1. There is fault with mechanical
2. Check the Power voltage of shunt release is less
operating mechanism
than 70%Us or not
2. Power voltage of shunt
3. Replace shunt release
release is less than 70%Us;
3. Shunt release is damaged
C-131 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Fault description Reasons analysis Maintenance method
Manual storage can't be realized Mechanical fault with the energy-storage device
Motor storage can't be realized

Circuit breaker 1.Power voltage of motor 1. Power voltage of motor energy-stored device shouldn't less
can't store energy energy-stored device is less than 85%Us; than 85%Us
2.There is mechanical fault 2. Mechanical fault with the energy-storage device
with energy-storage device
Handle of drawerout-
type circuit breaker
1. There is padlock at the "opening" position
2. Slideway or breaker body
1.Take away the padlock
2.Pull the slideway or breaker body into its position
C
can't be drawn in or out isn't pulled into its position
Drawerout-type breaker
1.Handle isn't pulled out
can't be drawn out 1.Pull out the handle
2.Breaker is not totally at the
at the "opening" 2.Keep the circuit breaker totally at “opening” position
“opening" position
position
1. Something drop into the drawer base,

Drawerout-type breaker and lock the mechanism or mechanism
1. Check and clean the drawer base, or contact with manufacturer
can't reach the fault happens.
2. Match the body with relevant drawer base
"making" position 2. Breaker body not match with the frame-size
rated current of drawer base
1. Release isn't connected 1.Check the power is connected or not

with power 2.Cut off the power, then connect again. Otherwise contact
No display on 2.There is fault with release with manufacturer
intelligent release
panel Closing electromagnet: 1. Check the electromagnet power voltage shouldn't be less
1. Rated control voltage is less than 85%Us; than 85%Us.
2. Electromagnet is damaged 2. Replace the closing electromagnet.
Fault indicator still Fault happened with Cut off the power, then connect again. Otherwise contact
flashing after pressing
intelligent release with manufacturer
the clear button
> >> C-132

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-1000 Orde sheet
Customer: Tel: Date:
Quantity:
Model NA1-1000
Rated current In ( A ) □ 200 □ 4 00 □ 63 0 □ 8 00 □ 10 00
Installation mode □ Drawerout type □ Fixed type
Number of poles □ Three poles □ Four poles
Conventional setting before delivery: IR=1In, 30s, Isd=8In, Tsd 0.4s; Ii=12In; Ig=OFF tg=0.4s
Long time-delay Current setting: In (0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, OFF)
protection IR Time setting: s (30, 60, 120, 240)
Short circuit short time- Current setting: IR (3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,OFF)
□Standard delay protection Isd Time setting: s (0.2, 0.4)
M type Short circuit instantaneous
Current setting: In (3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, OFF)
protection Ii
Earthing Current setting: In (0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, OFF Min100A)
protection Ig Time setting: s (0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8)
Protection data setting: LED display; Test function; Fault recall; Self-diagnose function;
MCR and HSISC function; Fault breaking indication
Intelligent Optional □ Exceed skipping function □ Self-diagnose alarm □ Fault breaking alarm
controller function □ Overload alarm □ Earthing fault alarm
Conventional setting before delivery: IR=1In, 17.2s,; Is=6IR, Isd=8IR; Tsd 0.4s; Ii=12In; Ig=OFF tg=0.4s
Current setting:(0.4~1)In
Long time-delay
Time setting(1.5In): 0.61, 0.98, 1.47, 2.46, 3.68, 4.91, 6.14, 8.29,
protection IR
11.1, 17.2, 24.6, 36.8, 49.1, 61.4, 73.7, 86s
Short circuit short time- Current setting: (1.5~15)IR + OFF
delay protection Isd
□Comm- Time setting: (0.1~0.4)s
unication Instantaneous Current setting: (1.0~20)In+OFF

protection Ii
H type
Current setting: (0.2~1.0) In
Earthing protection Ig
Time setting: (0.1~1)s
LCD display; Code switch and toggle switch; Fault recall; Self-diagnose function; LED indication; Clock
Peak current recall;Test function: Earthing current measuring; Thermal recall fuction; Earthing fault alarm;
Phase protection; unbalanced current protection; MCR making and breaking function; Fault recall;
Optional □ Modbus communication □ Profibus-DP communication □ Display of voltage □ Display of frequency

function □ Display of power □ Over voltage/under voltage protection □ Phases protection
Other Power of controller: □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V □ DC24V
Under-voltage release: □ Instantaneous □ delay s(Delay of RC under-voltage release: (1~7)s )
□ AC400V □ AC230V
Shunt release: □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V
Electrical
Closing electromagnet: □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V
accessories
Motor for breaker: □ AC400V □ AC230V □ DC220V □ DC110V
Auxiliary contact: □ 2NO(normal open)and 2NC(normal close) □ 3NO(ornmal open)and 3NC(normal close)
Busbar □ Horizontal Connection □ Vertical Connection
Special □ Phases barrier □ Steel cable interlocking

requireme nts □ Off position locking device
Note: 1) Please mark “√” or fill figure in the relative ”□” if no mark, we will provide according to conventional.
NA1-1000
C-133 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1-2000~6300 Orde sheet
Customer: Tel: Date:
Quantity:
Model NA1-2000 NA1-3200 NA1-4000 NA1-6300

Rated current □630 □800□1000 □2000 □2500 □4000□5000
□4000
(In)A □1250 □1600 □2000 □3200 □6300(only 3 poles)
Installation mode □Drawerout type □Fixed type (note: =In 4000A fixed type is not available)
Number of poles □Three poles □Four poles
Protection function Others functions Optional function C
□M-typ e
1. □Ir1 protection for overload long time-delay, Ir2 inverse-time protection
sta ndard + definite time-delay protection for short-circuit short time-delay, Ir3 □ Display of voltage
typ e (default instantaneous protection for short-circuit, Ir4 4-section protection for □ Display of frequency
single-phrase earthing. 1. Function of current □ Display of power factor
configuration)
2. □Ir1 protection for overload long time-delay, Ir2 definite time-delay meter □ Display of power
protection for short-circuit short time-delay, Ir3 instantaneous protection 2. Function of □ Function of monitoring
for short-circuit, Ir4 4-section protection for single-phrase earthing. self-diagnosis load
3. Function of setting
1. Ir1 protection for overload long time-delay, Ir2 definite time-delay protection ! Not items to be selected
□H-type for short-circuit short-delay, Ir3 instantaneous protection for short-circuit, 4. Function of test necessarily, cost of the
Communication- 4-section protection for single-phrase earthing. 5. Function of display increased will be calculated
type (optional) 2. Ir1 protection for overload long time-delay, Ir2 inverse-time protection + additionally
definite time-delay protection for short-circuit short time-delay, Ir3 instantaneous
protection for short-circuit, 4-section protection for single-phrase earthing.
Available set range of Ir1 long-delay current:（0.4~1）In ！Conventional setting before delivery: overload long time-delay: 1.0In
Explanation:
Available set range of operating time with overload 1.5In: 15, 30, 60......480s ！Conventional setting before delivery: overload 1.5In, operating 15s
Available set
range of ! Conventional setting before delivery: short time-delay current 8Ir1
protection Available set range of current of Ir2 short-delay; Operating time of short-delay: 0.1~0.4s ! Conventional setting before delivery: operating time of short time-delay: 0.4s 0.1~0.4s
function and
conventional Available set range of Ir3 instantaneous current : 1.0 In~50kA/75kA/100kA
setting before ! Conventional setting before delivery: 12In
delivery Available set scope of Ir4 earthing protection current: 0.2~0.8 In; Available set scope of operating time of earthing protection: 0.1~0.4s
! Conventional setting before ex-factory: 0.5 In;OFF
Power supply of controller □AC380V, □AC220V, □DC220V, □DC110V (Optional)
Under-voltage □AC380V, □AC220V, □DC220V, □customize V (Optional)
Electrical accessories
release (default
configuration) □Instantaneous □Delay s; □ Time delay of R-C (Resistance-Capacity) type Undser-voltage release: (1~5)s (Optional)
Shunt release
(default □AC380V, □AC220V, □DC220V, □DC110V (Optional)
configuration)
Motor (default
□AC380V, □AC220V, □DC220V, □DC110V (Optional)
configuration)
Interlocking □ Connecting-rod interlocking (only provided for drawer-type)

requirements
device (cost will □ Steel cable interlocking :( for both types of drawer-type and fixed-type) □ Button lock (Optional)
be calculated □ Key lock: ( for both types of drawer-type and fixed-type) □ Door interlock (open or closed position)
Special
additionally) □ Door interlock（status of ON/OFF）

Others functions (cost will be calculated additionally) □ Function of earthing protection with external mutual-inductor (Mutual-inductor is prepared by the user)
Connection of main circuit □ Explanation of vertical connection (prepared with vertical bus-bar): conventional supply is horizontal connection
□ Revolving bus-bar (Drawerout type In≤3200) (cost of the increased will be burden by the user)
Remark: Current of frame size, rated current, and auxiliary control voltage must be indicated when ordering
Note: 1) Please mark “√”or fill figure in the relative“□”if no mark, we will provide according to conventional factory settings.
2) For ordering products with optional function or special requirements, please contact with us.
NA1-6300 NA1-4000 NA1-3200 NA1-2000
> >> C-134

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
Configurations explanation 2. NA1-1000 fundamental configurations
a. Motor-driven:
Under-voltage instantaneous release;
1. NA1-2000~6300 fundamental configurations
Shunt release;
a. Motor-driven:
Closing electromagnet;
Motor driven operating mechanism;
Shunt release;
4 normal open and 4 normal close auxiliary contacts;
Closing electromagnet;
M-type Intelligent Controller;
Motor driven operating mechanism;
Closing and breaking push button lock;
4 suits of transform contact;
Horizontal wiring of main circuit;
Doorcase;
Element of main circuit;
Doorcase;
Operating instructions of Air Circuit Breaker;
Element of main circiut;
Packing box;
Drawer seat(Drawout type)
Packing box;
Drawer seat (Drawout type)
b. Manual:
b. Manual:
4 normal open and 4 normal close auxiliary contacts;
4 suits of transform contact;
Closing and breaking push button lock;
Doorcase;
Doorcase;
Packing box;
Packing box;
C-135 > >>

Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
3. Additional selective configurations(need extra cost)
NA1-2000~6300 selective configurations explanation:
Under-voltage time release(1s, 3s, 5s).

Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock
(Drawerout type).
Cable mechanical interlock;
Operation pushbutton lock;
Key lock;
Door interlock;
Outer transformer with earthing protect function;
Vertical bus bar;
Rotating bus bar(In≤3200);
C
Indication mechanism;
Counter;
Shield;
5 suits of transform contact.
4. Additional selective configurations(need extra cost)

NA1-1000 selective configurations explanation:
Breaking button locking device;

Vertical bus bar;
Mechanical interlock;
Transparent cover;
Multifunctional intelligent controller;
Note: Please indicate the voltage when orderd

If there is additional function and special
requirement, please contact with the manufacturer.
> >> C-136

Contactors, Relays, Starters
Contactors
NC8 NC7
AC Contacteur AC Contacteur
Page D-01 Page D-32
NC6 NC1
Contactor Contactor
6~9A 9~95A
Page D-48 Page D-51
NC1-N NC2
Reversing & Contactor
change-over type 115~800A
9~95A
Page D-64 Page D-68
NC2-N NCK3
Reversing & Definite Purpose
change-over type Contactor
115~800A 25~90A
Page D-76 Page D-80
NCH8 CJ19
Modular AC for Power Factor
Contactor Correction
Page D-84 Page D-87

NC8 Series
Current range: 6~100A
(6A, 9A, 12A, 18A, 25A, 32A, 38A, 40A, 50A, 65A, 80A, 100A)
Poles: 3P, 4P
3-pole contactor
Frame size (A) 6, 9, 12 9, 12, 18 25, 32, 38

Mini type Normal type
Power (kW,400V) 2.2, 4, 5.5 4, 5.5, 7.5 11, 15, 18.5
4-pole contactor
D-01 > >>

D
40, 50, 65 80, 100
18.5, 22, 30 37, 45
> >> D-02

11
5
1
D-03 > >>

NC8 and Accessories
1 contactor
12 2 Mechanical interlock block

D
3 contactor
4 side mount aux
5 side mount aux
6 thermal relay
7 electronic relay
8 front mount aux

4
9 front mount aux

3
10 Pneumatic timers
13 11 surge arrester block
12 Bus bar
13 Bus bar
10
> >> D-04

2. Normal operation conditions,
mounting conditions
2.1 Certificates: CE,UL,KEMA;
2.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 100A;
2.3 Application: remotely makes and breaks circuit;
protect circuit from overload assembling
with proper thermal relay;
2.4 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-3, AC-4;
2.5 Mounting conditions: inclination between
mounting plane and vertical plane not
exceed ±22.5°
NC8 Series AC Contactor

1. General
NC8 series AC contactor is applied to circuits with AC
current frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, rated operational
voltage up to 690 V and rated operational current up
to 100 A. It is used for remote making & breaking circuits,
and can also be used with proper thermal overload relay
together as an electromagnetic starter to protect circuits
from overload.
This product conforms to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1.
C R US LISTED
D-05 > >>

3. Type Designation
3-pole contactor
NC8 - 06 M 01 /Z /N
NC8 series AC contactor Combination

Auxiliary contact
/N Reversing
Nominal rating Mini type 01 1NC
None Without additional device
06 6A 6A～12A 10 1NO
09 9A
Contactor type
Normal type None 1NO+1NC
Coil type
D
.. .. 9A～38A
. . 22 2NO+2NC
M Mini type (6A～12A) /Z DC operation coil
80 80A Normal type
None 1NO+1NC None AC operation coil
None Normal type(9A～100A) 40A～100A
100 100A
4-pole contactors
NC8 - 06 M /4 /Z /N
NC8 series AC contactor Combination

Number of main contact
/N Reversing
Nominal rating Mini type /4 4NO
None Without additional device
06 6A 6A～12A / 22 2NO+2NC
09 9A Nomal type /4 4NO
Contactor type Coil type
.. .. 9A～38A / 22
. . 2NO+2NC
M Mini type (6A～12A) /Z DC operation coil
Nomal type
80 80A /4 4NO
None Nomal type(9A～100A) 40A～100A None AC operation coil
100 100A
Accessories
F4 - 20 F5 -T 0 F8 - 20 NCF8 - 11
Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact Side auxiliary contact Contacts
11 1NO+1NC
Contacts Time-delay type Contacts
20
11
2NO
1NO+1NC
T
D
Making time-delay
Breaking time-delay
20
11
2NO
1NO+1NC
SR8 -A RV 48
02 2NC 02 2NC
Surge Arrester
40 4NO Time-delay range 40 4NO
31 3NO+1NC 31 3NO+1NC Matching contactor
0 0.1s~3s
22 22 A for mini type Type of element Voltage protection scope
2NO+2NC 2 0.1s~30s 2NO+2NC
13 1NO+3NC 13 B for normal 9A～38A RV Varistor 48 24V~48V AC/DC
4 10s~180s 1NO+3NC
04 C for normal 40A～100A RC Resistance + Capacitance 110V~250V AC/DC (for RV type)
4NC 04 4NC 250
127V~250V AC (for RC type)
440 380V~440V AC
> >> D-06

Quick selection table
Frame size 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A
3-pole
3-pole Contactors
contactors
1NO+1NC NC8-09 NC8-12 NC8-18 NC8-25 NC8-32 NC8-38

Auxiliary
contacts
2NO+2NC NC8-09/22 NC8-12/22 NC8-18/22 NC8-25/22 NC8-32/22 NC8-38/22
Ratings/IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 25 25 32 40 50 50
220V/230V/240V 2.2 9 4 12 4 18 5.5 25 7.5 32 9 38
380V/400V 4 9 5.5 12 7.5 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38

AC-3
415V 4 9 5.5 12 9 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38
660V/690V 5.5 6.7 7.5 9 9 10.6 15 17.3 18.5 21.9 18.5 21.9
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 25 25 32 40 50 50
Single 110V/120V 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 2

phase
230V/240V 1 2 3 3 5 5
200V/208V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
Three 230V/240V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10

phases
460V/480V 5 7.5 10 15 20 20
575V/600V 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Accessories
See page 07 for more details NCF8-11 F5 SR8-B/RC250

F4
D-07 > >>

Frame size 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
3-poleContactors
3-pole contactors
D
Auxiliary
1NO+1NC NC8-40 NC8-50 NC8-65 NC8-80 NC8-100
contacts
Ratings/IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 60 80 80 125 125
220V/230V/240V 11 40 15 50 18.5 65 22 80 25 100
380V/400V 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 100

AC-3
415V 22 40 25 50 37 65 45 80 45 100
660V/690V 30 34 33 39 37 42 45 49 45 49
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 60 80 80 125 125
Single 110V/120V 3 5 5 7.5 10

phase
230V/240V 5 7.5 10 20 20
200V/208V 10 15 20 30 30
Three 230V/240V 10 15 20 30 30
phases
460V/480V 30 40 50 60 60
575V/600V 30 40 50 60 60
Accessories
See page 08 for more details

NCF8-11 F4 F5 SR8-C/RC440
> >> D-08

4-pole Contactors
4NO NC8-09/4 NC8-12/4 NC8-18/4 NC8-25/4 NC8-32/4 NC8-38/4

Main
contacts
2NO+2NC NC8-09/22 NC8-12/22 NC8-18/22 NC8-25/22 NC8-32/22 NC8-38/22
AC-1 25 25 32 40 50 50
220V/230V/240V 2.2 9 4 12 4 18 5.5 25 7.5 32 9 38
380V/400V 4 9 5.5 12 7.5 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38

AC-3
415V 4 9 5.5 12 9 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38
660V/690V 5.5 6.7 7.5 9 9 10.6 15 17.3 18.5 21.9 18.5 21.9
Continuous current (FLA) 25 25 32 40 50 50
Single 110V/120V 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 2

phase
230V/240V 1 2 3 3 5 5
200V/208V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
Three 230V/240V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10

phases
460V/480V 5 7.5 10 15 20 20
575V/600V 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Accessories
See page 07 for more details NCF8-11 F4 F5 SR8-B/RC250
D-09 > >>

4-pole Contactors
Main
contacts
4NO NC8-40/4 NC8-50/4 NC8-65/4 NC8-80/4 NC8-100/4 D
Ratings/IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 60 80 80 125 125
220V/230V/240V 11 40 15 50 18.5 65 22 80 25 100
380V/400V 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 100

AC-3
415V 22 40 25 50 37 65 45 80 45 100
660V/690V 30 34 33 39 37 42 45 49 45 49
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 60 80 80 125 125
Single 110V/120V 3 5 5 7.5 10

phase
230V/240V 5 7.5 10 20 20
200V/208V 10 15 20 30 30
Three 230V/240V 10 15 20 30 30
phases
460V/480V 30 40 50 60 60
575V/600V 30 40 50 60 60
Accessories
See page 08 for more details NCF8-11 F4 F5 SR8-C/RC440
> >> D-10

Contactors
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4NO F4-40
3NO+1NC F4-31
2NO+2NC F4-22
F4
1NO+3NC F4-13
4-pole Front mount Contacts aux
4NC F4-04
2NO F4-20
1NO+1NC F4-11
F4
2NC F4-02
2-pole Ffront mount
Auxiliary contact block
0.1~3 F5-T0
Making time-delay
0.1~30 F5-T2
range (s)
10~180 F5-T4
0.1~3 F5-D0
F5 Breaking time-delay
1N/O+1N/C range (s) 0.1~30 F5-D2
Pneumatic timer
10~180 F5-D4
Contacts aux NCF8-11

1NO+1NC
NCF8
2-pole Side mount
Voltage AC: 127V~240V SR8-B/1

Surge arrester protection
scope
AC: 240V~400V SR8-B/2
SR8-B/RC250
Surge arrester
D-11 > >>

Contactors
4NO F4-40
3NO+1NC F4-31
D
2NO+2NC F4-22
F4
1NO+3NC F4-13
4-pole Front mount Contacts aux
4NC F4-04
2NO F4-20
1NO+1NC F4-11
F4
2NC F4-02
2-pole Front mount
Auxiliary contact block
0.1~3 F5-T0
Making time-delay
0.1~30 F5-T2
range (s)
10~180 F5-T4
0.1~3 F5-D0
F5 Breaking time-delay
1N/O+1N/C range (s) 0.1~30 F5-D2
Pneumatic timer
10~180 F5-D4
Contacts aux NCF8-11

1NO+1NC
NCF8
2-pole Side mount
Voltage AC:127V~240V SR8-C/1

Surge arrester protection
scope
AC:240V~400V SR8-C/2
SR8-C/RC440
Surge arrester
> >> D-12

Contactors
NR2-93
Rated current (A)
23～32
30～40
37～50
48～65
55～70
NR2-93
Bimetallic style 63～80
Overload relay
80～93
Overload relays
NRE8-100
Rated current (A)
65
100
NRE8-100
Electronic style
Overload relay
D-13 > >>

Contactors AC coil DC coil
1NO NC8-06M10 NC8-09M10 NC8-12M10 NC8-06M10/Z NC8-09M10/Z NC8-12M10/Z

Auxiliary
3-pole contacts D
1NC NC8-06M01 NC8-09M01 NC8-12M01 NC8-06M01/Z NC8-09M01/Z NC8-12M01/Z
Main 4NO NC8-06M/4 NC8-09M/4 NC8-12M/4 NC8-06M/4/Z NC8-09M/4/Z NC8-12M/4/Z

4-pole contacts
2NO+2NC NC8-06M/22 NC8-09M/22 NC8-12M/22 NC8-06M/22/Z NC8-09M/22/Z NC8-12M/22/Z
AC-1 20 20 20 20 20 20
220V/230V/240V 1.5 6 2.2 9 3 12 1.5 6 2.2 9 3 12
380V/400V 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12

AC-3
415V 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12
660V/690V 3 3.8 4 4.9 4 4.9 3 3.8 4 4.9 4 4.9
Continuous current 20 20 20 20 20 20
Single 110V/120V 0.3 0.5 0.75 0.3 0.5 0.75

phase
230V/240V 0.75 1.5 2 0.75 1.5 2
200V/208V 1.5 3 3 1.5 3 3
Three 230V/240V 1.5 3 3 1.5 3 3

phases
460V/480V 3 5 7.5 3 5 7.5
575V/600V 3 5 10 3 5 10
Accessories
F8 SR8-A NR8-11.5
See page 11 for more details
> >> D-14

AC coil DC coil
Contactors
4NO F8-40
3NO+1NC F8-31
2NO+2NC F8-22
Auxiliary
contacts 1NO+3NC F8-13
contact
number
block 4NC F8-04
F8
2NO F8-20
Front mount
1NO+1NC F8-11
2NC F8-02
AC127V~240V
Voltage SR8-A/1
DC150V~250V
Surge arrester
protection
scope
SR8-A AC240V~400V SR8-A/2
Surge arrester
NR8-11.5
Rated current (A)
0.1~0.16 1.6~2.5
0.16~0.25 2.5~4
0.25~0.4 4~6
Overload relays
0.4~0.63 5.5~8
NR8-11.5 0.63~1 7~10
Bimetallic style 1~1.6 9~13

Overload relay
D-15 > >>

4. Technical data
4.1 Working environment and technical index
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Pollution degree 3
Certificate CE, UL, KEMA
-5℃~+40℃, the average temperatuire during 24 hours should not exceed +35℃.
Ambient air being working
temperature More information refer to table 1 D
transportation or storage -25℃~+55℃,or can up to +70℃ for a shout time (in 24 hours)
Altitude(m) no exceeding 2000m, more information refer to table 2
At mounting side, relative humidity no exceeding 50%,

Atmosphere conditions at the max temperature of +40℃. Higher relative humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be +20℃, special measure should be taken to occurrence of dews.
Installation conditions the inclination between installation plane and vertical plane is within ± 22.5°
Impact and shake the product should be used in the places where there are no obvious impact and shake
Table 1
Altitude(m) 2000 3000 4000
Rated impulse withstand voltage

1 0.88 0.78
Correction coefficient
Rated operational current

1 0.92 0.9
Correction coefficient
Table 2
environment temperature(℃) 40 50 60 70
correction coefficient 1 0.875 0.75 0.625
> >> D-16

4.2 Main circuit parameter and technic capability

Rated conventional heating current(A) 20 20 20 25 25 32
Rated insulation voltage(V) 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage(kV) 6
Rated making capability making current: 10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
Rated breaking capability making-breaking current: 8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)
Short-time withstand current(A) 10s 48 72 96 72 96 144
AC-3
220V/230V/240V 6 9 12 9 12 18
AC-4
AC-3 12
380V/400V 6 9 9 12 18
Rated operational AC-4 9
current (A) AC-3 12
415V 6 9 9 12 18
AC-4 9
AC-3 3.8 4.9 4.9 6.7 9 10.6

660V/690V
AC-4 3.8 4.9 4.9 6.7 9 9
220V/230V/240V 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 4
380V/400V 2.2 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5

AC-3(kW)
415V 2.2 4 5.5 4 5.5 9
660V/690V 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9

Rated
110V/120V 0.3 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 1
control 1PH(HP)
230V/240V 0.75 1.5 2 1 2 3
power
200V/208V 1.5 3 3 3 3 5
230V/240V 1.5 3 3 3 3 5
3PH(HP)
460V/480V 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10
575V/600V 3 5 10 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 operations/h

Operating frequency(415V)
AC-4 300 operations/h
AC-3 1,200,000 Operations
Electrical life(415V)
AC-4 to see Electrical life curves, page 23
Mechanical life 10,000,000 Operations
Configuration of main contacts 3-pole:3NO; 4-pole:4NO or 2NO+2NC
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-25 RT16-32
Modle NR8-11.5 NR8-38
0.1~0.16 0.63~1 2.5~4 9~13 0.1~0.16 0.63~1 2.5~4 9~13 30~38

Matched thermal
over-load relay current 0.16~0.25 1~1.6 4~6 0.16~0.25 1~1.6 4~6 12~18
range
0.25~0.4 1.6~2.5 5.5~8 0.25~0.4 1.6~2.5 5.5~8 16~24
0.4~0.63 7~10 0.4~0.63 7~10 23~32
D-17 > >>

25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
Normal type
40 50 50 60 80 80 125 125
690
6 8
making current:10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
making-breaking current:8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)

200 256 304 320 400 520 640 800
25 32 38 40 50 65 80 100
25 32
38
40 50 65 80 100
D
32
38
25 32 40 50 65 80 100
32
17.3 21.9 21.9 34 39 42 49 49
17.3 21.9 21.9 34 39 42 49 49
5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25
11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45
11 15 18.5 22 25 37 45 45
15 18.5 18.5 30 33 37 45 45
1.5 2 2 3 5 5 7.5 10
3 5 5 5 7.5 10 20 20
7.5 10 10 10 15 20 30 30
7.5 10 0 10 15 20 30 30
15 20 20 30 40 50 60 60
20 25 25 30 40 50 60 60
1,200 operations/h
300 operations/h 120 operations/h
1,200,000 Operations
to see Electrical life curves, page 23
10,000,000 Operations
3-pole: 3NO; 4-pole: 4NO
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-63 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125

NR8-38 NR2-93 NRE8-100
0.1~0.16 0.63~1 2.5~4 9~13 30~38 23~32 55~70 65

0.16~0.25 1~1.6 4~6 12~18 100
30~40 63~80
0.25~0.4 1.25~2 5.5~8 16~24
37~50 80~93
0.4~0.63 1.6~2.5 7~10 23~32
48~65
> >> D-18

4.3 The connection capability of main control circuit
Connection 6A 9A 12A 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
circuit frame size
Main cable single
flexible cable 1~2.5 1~4 1.5~6 2.5~10 10~25 16~50
circuit connection cable
(with duad
connection (mm2) 1~1.5 1~2.5 1~4 2.5~6 4~16 10~35
cold-press terminal) cable
single 1~2.5 1~4 1.5~6 2.5~10 - -
cable
stiff cable
duad
1~2.5 1~4 1.5~6 2.5~10 - -
cable
screw size M3 M3.5 M4 M8
(N.m) 0.8 1.2 2 6

tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7 7 10 45
Control cable single

flexible cable 1~2.5 1~4
circuit connection cable
(with
duad
connection (mm2) 1~1.5 1~2.5
cold-press terminal) cable
single
1~2.5 1~4
cable
stiff cable
duad
1~2.5 1~4
cable
screw size M3 M3.5
(N.m) 0.8 1.2

tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7 7
4.4 The characteristic of AC control circuit
Connection 6A 9A 12A 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
frame size
circuit Mini type Normal type
AC 50Hz/60Hz 24~660
Coil voltage(V)
DC 12~250
attraction(hot) (85%~110%)Us; +40℃

Acting range
release(cold) AC: (20%~70%)Us, DC: (10%~60%)Us; -5℃
start 25~40 50~70 160~210 190~250

The average power
of AC coil(VA) holding 2~7 6~10 13~25 17~30
AC 1~4 2~4 4~7 5~8

Heat wastage(W)
DC
close 10~18 12~25 15~25 15~30

Main contact
action time(ms) 6~15 8~17
disconnection 4~16 5~20
D-19 > >>

4.5 Main technical data of accessories
matched contactor model of accessories F4-20 F4-11 F4-02 F4-40 F4-31 F4-22 F4-13 F4-04
F4,
front N/O 2 1 0 4 3 2 1 0
NC8-09~100 contacts
mount
N/C 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
matched contactor model of accessories F8-20 F8-11 F8-02 F8-40 F8-31 F8-22 F8-13 F8-04
F8,
front N/O 2 1 0 4 3 2 1 0
mount NC8-06M~12M contacts
N/C 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
matched contactor model of accessories NCF8-11

NCF8,
side N/O 1
mount NC8-09~100 contacts
N/C 1
matched contactor model of accessories F5-T0 F5-T2 F5-T4 F5-D0 F5-D2 F5-D4
D
F5,
Pneumatic N/O 1 1 1 1 1 1
timer contacts
NC8-09~100 N/C 1 1 1 1 1 1
time-delay range(s) 0.1~3 0.1~30 10~180 0.1~3 0.1~30 10~180
NC8-06M~12M SR8-A
SR8,
surge NC8-09~38 SR8-B
arrester
NC8-40~100 SR8-C
Rated operational voltage(V) up to 690
Rated insulation voltage(V) 690
Rated conventional current(A) 10
Rated making capability making current 10×Ie(AC-15) or 1×Ie(DC-13)
Short-circuit protection gG fuse: 10A
AC-15 360VA
Control capacity
AC-13 69W
Certificate CE, UL, KEMA
Protection degree Ip20

single
flexible cable (without 1~4
cable
cold-press terminal) duad
1~4
cable
Cable single
flexible cable (with cable
1~4
connection duad
cold-press terminal) 1~2.5
cable
(mm2) single
1~4
cable
inflexible cable duad
cable
1~4
screw size M3.5
(N.m) 1.2
tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7
Note: the requirement to the environment of accesseries is same with that of the contactors'.
You can order the product that you need or recognize your existing product
according to the above-mentioned number and the letter of alphabet code.
> >> D-20

5. Derived products
5.1 3-pole Reversing contactor
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
9A NC8-09/N NC8-0922/N
12A NC8-12/N NC8-1222/N
D=87 H=92 18A NC8-18/N NC8-1822/N
W=100
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
25A NC8-25/N NC8-2522/N
32A NC8-32/N NC8-3222/N
38A NC8-38/N NC8-3822/N

D=107 H=100
W=104
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO+1NC
40A NC8-40/N
50A NC8-50/N
65A NC8-65/N
D=139 H=157.5
W=188.5
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO+1NC
80A NC8-80/N
100A NC8-100/N
D=152 H=165
W=218.5
D-21 > >>

5.2 4-pole Reversing contactor
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
9A NC8-09/4/N
12A NC8-12/4/N
D=82 H=92
18A NC8-18/4/N D
W=100
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
25A NC8-25/4/N
32A NC8-32/4/N
38A NC8-38/4/N
D=90 H=100
W=122
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
40A NC8-40/4/N
50A NC8-50/4/N
65A NC8-65/4/N
D=118 H=164.5
W=188.5
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
80A NC8-80/4/N
100A NC8-100/4/N
D=152 H=176
W=218.5
> >> D-22

5.3 Mini type Reversing contactors/AC coil
3-pole
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO 1NC
6A NC8-06M10/N NC8-06M01/N
D=58 H=59 9A NC8-09M10/N NC8-09M01/N
12A NC8-12M10/N NC8-12M01/N

W=91
4-pole
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
6A NC8-06M/4/N
9A NC8-09M/4/N
D=58 H=59
12A NC8-12M/4/N
W=91
5.4 Mini type Reversing contactors/DC coil
3-pole
Aux. contacts
Frame
size
1NO 1NC
6A NC8-06M10/Z/N NC8-06M01/Z/N
9A NC8-09M10/Z/N NC8-09M01/Z/N
D=70 H=59
12A NC8-12M10/Z/N NC8-12M01/Z/N

W=91
4-pole
Main contacts
Frame
size
4NO
6A NC8-06M/4/Z/N
9A NC8-09M/4/Z/N
D=70 H=59
12A NC8-12M/4/Z/N
W=91
D-23 > >>

5.5 Magnetic starter
Mini type frame size from 6A to 12A
Normal type frame size from 40A to 100A

D
5.6 Star-delta starter
> >> D-24

6. Overall and mounting dimensions(mm)
Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax a b φ

NC8-06M~12M 46 59 58 94 35 50 4.0
NC8-06M/4~12M/4 46 59 58 94 35 50 4.0
NC8-06M/22~12M/22 46 59 58 94 35 50 4.0
NC8-06M/Z~12M/Z 46 59 70 106 35 50 4.0
NC8-06M~12M
NC8-06M/4~12M/4 NC8-06M/4/Z~12M/4/Z 46 59 70 106 35 50 4.0
NC8-06M/22~12M/22 NC8-06M/22/Z~12M/22/Z 46 59 70 106 35 50 4.0
D(F8) a
C φ
b
NC8-06M/Z~12M/Z
NC8-06M/4/Z~12M/4/Z
NC8-06M/22/Z~12M/22/Z
Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax Emax a b φ

NC8-09~18 45 87 88 120 142 35 55~63 4.5
NC8-0922~1822 45 87 88 120 142 35 55~63 4.5
NC8-25~38 45 97 106 139 160 35 60~70 4.5
NC8-2522~3822 45 97 106 139 160 35 60~70 4.5
NC8-09~18 D(F4)/E(F5)
NC8-0922~1822 C a
B
b
φ
A
NC8-25~38
NC8-2522~3822

NC8-09/4~18/4 45 87 82 115 136 35 55~63 4.5
NC8-09/22~18/22 45 87 82 115 136 35 55~63 4.5
NC8-25/4~38/4 57 97 90 122.5 144 35 60~70 4.5
NC8-25/22~38/22 57 97 90 122.5 144 35 60~70 4.5
D(F4)/E(F5)
NC8-09/4~18/4 C a
NC8-09/22~18/22
B
b
φ
NC8-25/4~38/4 A
NC8-25/22~38/22
D-25 > >>

NC8-40~65 77 122.5 118 150 172 64 100~110 6.0
NC8-80~100 87 130 127 159 180 74 105~116 5.5
D(F4)/E(F5)
C a
φ
NC8-40~65
D
b
A
NC8-80~100

NC8-40/4~65/4 84 122.5 118 150 172 71 100~110.5 6.0
NC8-80/4~100/4 99 130 127 158 180 86 105~118.5 5.5
D(F4)/E(F5) a
C φ
NC8-40/4~65/4
B
NC8-80/4~100/4
> >> D-26

7. Excursus
7.1 Electric life Curves
Electric life curves (AC-3 )
12A (Minitype)
6A (Minitype)
9A (Minitype)
32A, 38A
Electric life
100A
50A
18A
25A
65A
80A
12A
40A
6
×10
9A
10
8
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 18 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 Rated current(A)
18.5
0.75
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
22
25
11
15
220V~240V
3
kW
18.5
0.75
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
22
30
37
45
11
15
380V~415V
4
Rated outputs of three-phase motors (50Hz AC-3)
D-27 > >>

Electric life curves (AC-2, AC-4 Ue=400V/415V)
12A (Minitype)
6A (Minitype)
9A (Minitype)
32A, 38A
Electric life
100A
×106
50A
25A
65A
80A
12A
18A
40A
9A
1.0
D
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
0 5 10 20 36 54 72 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 600 Rated current(A)
Example:
Request to control the start of three-phase motors
main technical parameter of three-phase motors: P=11kW, Ue=380V, Ie=22.6A
usage category: AC-3, The electric life span of request: 1,000,000 operations
the contactor should be NC8-25 according to the curves above
> >> D-28

7.2 The application in illumination circuit
Model of contactor 06M, 09M, 12M 09, 12 18 25 32, 38 40 50, 65 80, 100
lamp technical data

(220V/240V) maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A μF
Incandescent lamp
60 0.27 - 35 59 77 92 129 163 207 296
75 0.34 - 28 47 61 73 103 129 164 235
100 0.45 - 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177
150 0.68 - 14 23 30 36 51 64 82 117
200 0.91 - 10 17 23 27 38 48 62 88
300 1.40 - 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57
500 2.30 - 4 7 8 11 15 19 24 34
750 3.40 - 2 4 6 7 10 13 16 23
1000 4.60 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17
-
Single fluorescent lamp ( with starter, without compensation)
20 0.39 - 24 41 53 66 89 112 143 205
40 0.45 - 21 35 46 57 77 97 124 177
65 0.70 - 12 22 50 62 80 114
30 37
0.80 -
80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100
-
110 1.15 8 12 15 20 26 35 46 66
Single fluorescent lamp ( with starter, with parallel compensation)
20 0.18 5 83 94 105 155 215 233 335 530
40 0.26 5 58 65 75 107 150 160 230 365
65 0.42 7 35 40 45 66 92 100 142 225
80 0.52 7 28 32 36 53 74 80 115 180
100 0.60 16 23 26 29 43 59 64 92 145
110 0.70 18 21 24 27 40 55 59 85 135
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (with starter, without compensation)
2×20 -2×0.22 - 21 36 46 58 78 100 126 180
2×40 -2×0.41 - 11 18 24 30 42 52 68 96
2×65 -2×0.67 - 7 10 14 18 26 32 40 58
2×80 -2×0.82 - 5 8 12 14 20 26 34 48
2×110 -2×1.10 - 4 6 8 10 14 18 24 36
...... to be continued
D-29 > >>

lamp technical data

W A μF
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (with starter, with compensation in series)
2×20 2×0.13 - 36 60 80 100 134 168 214 306
2×40 2×0.24 - 20 32 42 54 72 90 116 166
2×65 2×0.39 - 12 20 26 32 44 56 70 102
2×80 2×0.48 - 10 16 20 26 36 44 58 82
2×110 2×0.65 - 7 12 16 20 26 32 42 60
Single fluorescent lamp (without starter, without compensation) D

20 0.43 - 22 37 48 60 97 102 130 186
40 0.55 - 17 29 38 47 63 80 101 145
65 0.80 - 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100
80 0.95 - 10 16 22 27 36 46 58 84
110 0.40 - 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57
Single fluorescent lamp (with starter, with parallel compensation)

20 0.19 5 50 84 110 136 184 231 294 421
40 0.29 5 33 55 72 89 101 151 193 275
65 0.46 7 20 34 45 56 76 95 121 173
80 0.57 7 16 28 36 45 61 77 98 140
110 0.79 16 - 20 26 32 44 55 70 101
Fluorescent lamps (without starter, without compensation)
2×20 2×0.25 - 19 32 42 52 70 88 112 160
2×40 2×0.47 - 10 16 22 26 36 46 158 84
2×65 2×0.76 - 6 10 12 16 22 28 36 52
2×80 2×0.93 - 5 8 10 12 18 22 30 42
2×110 2×1.30 - 3 6 8 10 12 16 20 30
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (without starter, with compensation in series)
2×20 2×0.15 - 34 56 74 92 124 156 200 234
2×40 2×0.26 - 18 30 40 50 66 84 106 152
2×65 2×0.43 - 11 18 24 30 40 50 64 92
2×80 2×0.53 - 9 14 18 24 32 40 32 74
2×110 2×0.72 - 6 10 14 18 24 30 38 54
Low press sodium vapour lamps (with parallel compensation)

35 0.3 17 - 40 50 63 86 110 140 200
55 0.4 17 - 30 37 47 65 82 105 150
90 0.6 25 - - 25 31 43 55 70 100
135 0.9 36 - - - 21 28 36 46 66
150 1.0 36 - - - 19 26 33 42 60
180 1.2 36 - - - 15 21 27 35 50
200 1.3 36 - - - 14 20 25 32 46
> >> D-30

Contactors
lamp technical data

W A μF
High press sodium vapour lamps (without compensation)
150 1.9 - 7
4 6 10 13 17 22 31
250 3.2 - 4
2 3 5 8 10 13 18
400 5.0 - 3
1 2 3 5 6 8 12
700 8.8 - 2
- - 2 2 3 4 6
1000 12.4 - 1
- - 1 2 2 3 4
High press sodium vapour lamps (with parallel compensation)

150 0.84 20 - - 17 22 30 39 50 71
250 1.4 32 - - - 13 18 23 30 42
400 2.2 48 - - - 8 11 15 19 27
700 3.6 96 - - - - 6 8 10 15
1000 5.5 120 - - - - - 6 7 10
High press hydrargyrum lamps (without compensation)

50 0.54 - 14 22 27 35 48 64 77 111
80 0.81 - 9 14 18 23 32 40 51 74
125 1.20 - 6 9 12 15 21 27 34 49
250 2.30 - 3 5 6 8 11 14 17 26
400 4.10 - 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14
700 6.80 - - 1 2 2 3 4 6 8
1000 9.90 - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 6
High press hydrargyrum lamps (with parallel- compensation)

50 0.30 10 - 40 50 63 86 110 140 120
80 0.45 10 - 26 33 42 57 73 93 133
125 0.67 10 - 17 22 28 38 49 62 89
250 1.3 18 - 9 11 14 20 25 32 46
400 2.3 25 - - 6 8 11 14 18 26
700 3.8 40 - - - 5 6 8 11 15
1000 5.5 60 - - - 3 4 8 7 10
8. Ordering notice
8.1 The following items should be illustrated when ordering:
8.1.1 The full name and model of contactor;
8.1.2 Rated operational voltage and frequency of coil;
8.1.3 Ordering total pcs;
8.2 Ordering example:NC8-1822 AC contactor,coil voltage 220V,50Hz 10 pcs;
D-31 > >>

Contactors
2.1 Ambient air temperature:-5℃~+40℃,
its mean value not greater than +35℃
within 24 hours.
2.2 Atmospheric conditions: Ambient temperature
When the maximum temperature is +40℃,

the relative humidity of the air shall not be
higher than 50%; a higher relative humidity
is allowed at a lower temperature, e.g.,
up to 90% at 20℃. Special measures shall
be taken for the condensation occasionally
2000m
produced due to temperature change.
2.3 Altitude: not higher than 2000m. Altitude
2.4 Pollution grade: 3

2.5 Installation classification: III
2.6 Installation condition:
the installing surface shall be inclined
D
at not greater than ±5°to the vertical.
2.7 Impact vibration:
The product shall be installed in the place
free of remarkable shake, impact and vibration. No Pollution
NC7 Series AC Contactor
1. General
The NC7 series AC contactor (hereinafter referred to as
“contractor”) is mainly used in the circuit with an alternating
current of 50Hz (or 60Hz), rated operational voltage up to
690V, and rated operational current up to 620A under the
usage category of AC-3/400V; this contact is mainly used for
remotely closing and breaking circuits, and can be combined
with an appropriate thermal overload relay to form a
electromagnetic starter so as to protect the circuits likely
to be overloaded in operation; the contact is well suited for
frequently starting and controlling AC motors.
This product meets the standard of IEC60947-4-1
> >> D-32

Contactors
3. Type and meaning
3.1 Product type and meaning
NC7 - 09 01 /N
Main circuit current Number of auxiliary contacts An interlock product

AC Contactor
09 9A 01 1NC N Reversible product
9A~38A 9A~95A
12 12A 10 1NO omitted Single unit of the product
... ... 40A~95A 11 1NO+1NC 115A~170A N Reversible product
475 475A 115A~170A omitted 2NO+2NC omitted Single unit of the product
620 620A 205A~620A omitted 4NO+4NC Reversible product
/Nc
vertical installation
205A~620A Reversible product
/Ns
horizontal installation
omitted Single unit of the product
3.2 Accessory type and meaning
AX-3 / 20 F5 - T 0
Number of auxiliary contacts Time-delay type Time-delay range

Top Air
suspension 20 2NO time-delay T Making time-delay 0 0.1s~3s
auxiliary 11 1NO+1NC head Breaking time-delay 2 0.1s~30s
D
contactor 02 2NC 4 10s~180s
block 40 4NO
31 3NO+1NC
22 2NO+2NC
13 1NO+3NC
04 4NC
NCF1 - 11C NJL S-GG
Number of auxiliary contacts Mechanical Installation mode Size code

Side
suspension interlock GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
auxiliary 11C 1NO+1NC module HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units
s Horizontal
contactor KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two arbitrary units
installation
block LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
GH NC7-205 and NC7-250~300
GK NC7-205 and NC7-410~475
GL NC7-205 and NC7-620
Note: For the NC7 product, the 9A-95A mechanical interlock HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units
c Vertical
module can be directly purchased with an indication. HK NC7-250~300 and NC7-410~475
installation
HL NC7-250~300 and NC7-620
KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two arbitrary units
KL NC7-410~475 and NC7-620
LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
D-33 > >>

Contactors
4. Quick type selection table
Specified current 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A
1 NO
D
Number of
the auxiliary auxiliary contact NC7-0910 NC7-1210 NC7-1810 NC7-2510 NC7-3210 NC7-3810
contacts provided 1 NC
with the body itself auxiliary contact NC7-0901 NC7-1201 NC7-1801 NC7-2501 NC7-3201 NC7-3801
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
Appointed free air heat

20 20 32 40 50 50
generation current (A)
380V/400V(AC-3) 4 9 5.5 12 7.5 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38
Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 1.5 3.5 2.2 5 3 7.7 4 8.5 5.5 12 5.5 12
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 5.5 6.6 7.5 8.9 10 12 15 18 18.5 22 18.5 22
and power 660V/690V(AC-4) 1.1 1.5 1.5 2 3.7 3.8 4 4.4 5.5 7.5 5.5 7.5
Accessories which can be further attached
Side suspension Top suspension

Air delay head Mechanical interlock module
auxiliary contact auxiliary contact
Surge suppressor Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay
> >> D-34

Contactors
Specified current 40A 50A 65A 80A 95A
Number of 1NO+1NC
the auxiliary auxiliary contact NC7-4011 NC7-5011 NC7-6511 NC7-8011 NC7-9511
contacts provided
with the body itself
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 60 80 80 110 110
380V/400V(AC-3) 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 95
Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 7.5 18.5 11 24 15 28 18.5 37 22 44
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 30 34 37 39 37 42 45 49 45 49
and power 660V/690V(AC-4) 7.5 9 11 12 11 14 15 17.3 18.5 21.3
Side suspension Top suspension

Surge suppressor Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay
D-35 > >>

Contactors
Specified current 115A 150A 170A
D
Number of
the auxiliary
2 NO+2NC NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170
contacts provided
auxiliary contact
with the body itself
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A

200 200 275
380V/400V(AC-3) 55 115 75 150 90 170
Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 55 115 75 150 75 150
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 80 86 100 107 110 118
and power 660V/690V(AC-4) 80 86 100 107 100 107
Top suspension Side suspension

Air delay head
Mechanical interlock module
> >> D-36

Contactors
without auxiliary mount two

contacts, can mount AX-3/22 NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300
two Top suspension 4NO+4NC
auxiliary contacts
Other mode Note Note Note

275 315 380
Rated 380V/400V(AC-3) 110 205 132 250 160 300

current 660V/690V(AC-3) 129 137 160 170 220 235
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 129 137 160 170 220 235
Top suspension
auxiliary contact
Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay
D-37 > >>

Contactors
mount two
D
without auxiliary
AX-3/22 NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
contacts, can mount
two Top suspension 4NO+4NC
auxiliary contacts
Other mode Note Note Note

450 630 800
Rated 380V/400V(AC-3) 200 410 250 475 335 620

current 660V/690V(AC-3) 280 303 335 353 450 462
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 280 303 335 353 450 462
Top suspension
auxiliary contact
Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay
> >> D-38

Contactors
Modularized accessories which can be installed additionally
4NO AX-3/40
3NO+1NC AX-3/31
2NO+2NC AX-3/22
1NO+3NC AX-3/13
Number of Able to be used for
auxiliary contacts the whole series products
4NC AX-3/04
AX-3
Auxiliary contact 2NO AX-3/20
1NO+1NC AX-3/11
2NC AX-3/02
0.1~3 F5-T0
On-delay time (s) 0.1~30 F5-T2
10~180 F5-T4
Able to be used for
the whole series products
F5 0.1~3 F5-D0
1N/O+1N/C
Air delay head Off-delay time (s) F5-D2
0.1~30
10~180 F5-D4
Number of 1NO+1NC NCF1-11C Able to be used for

auxiliary contacts the products of
170A or lower
NCF1-11C
Secondary side suspension
auxiliary contact
AC 24V~48V SR1 24V~48V
AC 100V~250V SR1 100V~250V ble to be used for

the products of
9A~38A or lower
SR1
AC 380V~440V SR1 380V~440V
Surge suppressor
Suppression
voltage range
AC 24V~48V SR2-B 24V~48V
AC 100V~250V SR2-B 100V~250V ble to be used for

the products of
40A~95A or lower
SR2-B
AC 380V~440V SR2-B 380V~400V
Surge suppressor
D-39 > >>

Contactors
NR2-25 9A~32A
NR2-36 32A, 38A
NR2-93 40A~95A
NR2-150 115A~150A
NR2 NR2-200 115A~205A

Thermal overload relay
NR2-630 205A~620A
D
NRE8-25 9A~32A
NRE8-40 40A
NRE8-100 40A~95A
NRE8-200 115A~205A
NRE8
Electronic overload relay
NRE8-630 205A~620A
Purchase individually
Purchase it individually,
How to purchase and install it by yourself
How to purchase Reversible product without
connecting wire the products of
the products of Directly purchase the reversible products
205A or higher
95A or lower (specified current for two contactors
Reversible product with
connecting wire to be the same)
NJLs-GG NC7-205 Combination of two units

NJLs-HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units
Horizontal
NJLs-KK NC7-410~ 475 Combination of two arbitrary units
installation
NJLs-LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
NJLc-GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
NJLc-GH NC7-205 and NC7-250~ 300
NJLc-GK NC7-205 and NC7-410~475
NJLc-GL NC7-205 and NC7-620
Over 205A product NJLc-HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two units
Mechanical mechanical interlocking Vertical
NJLc-HK NC7-250~300 and NC7-410~ 475
interlock module mechanism code installation
NJLc-HL NC7-250~ 300 and NC7-620
NJLc-KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two units
NJLc-KL NC7-410~ 475 and NC7-620
NJLc-LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
> >> D-40

Contactors
5. Main parameters and technical performance
5.1 Main parameters and technical performance criteria for the NC7 product
Type NC7-09 NC7-12 NC7-18 NC7-25 NC7-32 NC7-38 NC7-40 NC7-50 NC7-65 NC7-80 NC7-95
AC-3 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95
Rated 380V/400V
AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 8.5 12 12 18.5 24 28 37 44
operational
AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 18 22 22 34 39 42 49 49
current (A) 660V/690V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 4.4 7.5 7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 20 20 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 110 110
Rated insulation voltage (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV)6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8
Rated making capacity Making current: 10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
Rated breaking capacity Making/breaking current: 8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)
Short time withstand current (10s) 72 96 144 200 256 304 320 400 520 640 760
Controllable three-phase 380V/400V 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45
squirrel-cage motor power(AC-3)kW 660V/690V 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 30 37 37 45 45
Intermittent-periodic-duty 380V/400V 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
motor power(AC-4)kW 600V/690V 1.1 1.5 3.7 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5
Frequency of AC-3 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
operation Electrical life AC-4 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 120 120
(times/h)
Mechanical life 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600
Electrical life AC-3 100 100 100 100 80 80 80 60 60 60 60
(ten thousand times) AC-4 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 10 10
Mechanical life(ten thousand times) 1000 1000 1000 1000 800 800 800 800 800 600 600
Type of the fuse adapted RT36-20 RT36-20 RT36-32 RT36-40 RT36-50 RT36-50 RT36-63 RT36-80 RT36-80 RT36-100 RT36-125
Piece (of string, etc) 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cold-pressed Non-prefabricated-tip cord 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/6 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
terminal Cord with the prefabricated tip mm2 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/2.5 1.5/6 1.5/4 1.5/10 1.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/6 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
Non-prefabricated-tip hard wire 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
Connection terminal screw size and M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10
tightening torque (N·m) 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.0 4.0
Attracting(VA) 70 70 70 110 110 110 200 200 200 200 200
AC coil 50Hz
Holding(VA) 9 9 9.5 14 19 19 57 57 57 57 57
power
Power(W) 1.8~2.7 1.8~2.7 3~4 3~4 3~4 3~4 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10
Action (actuating)range Pull-in voltage: 85%Us~110%Us; Release voltage: 20%Us~75%Us
Basic parameters of the auxiliary contact AC-15: 360VA DC-13: 33W Ith: 10A
5.2 Rated control source voltage Us and code for the NC7 ac contactor of 95A or lower
Coil voltage Us(V) 24 36 42 48 110 127 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 480 500 600 660
50Hz B5 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 T5 S5 X5 Y5
60Hz B6 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 M6 P6 U6 Q6 V6 N6 R6 T6 S6 X6 Y6
50/60Hz B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 X7 Y7
D-41 > >>

Contactors
Type NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170 NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300 NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
Rated AC-3 115 150 170 205 250 300 410 475 620
380V/400V
operational AC-4 115 150 150 205 250 300 410 475 620
AC-3 86 107 118 137 170 235 303 353 462
current (A) 660V/690V
AC-4 86 107 107 137 170 235 303 353 462
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 200 200 275 275 315 380 450 630 800
Rated insulation voltage (V) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rated making capacity Making current: 10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
Rated breaking capacity Making/breaking current: 8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)
Short time withstand current (10s) 920 1200 1360 1640 2000 2400 3280 3600 4960
Controllable three-phase 380V/400V
squirrel-cage motor power(AC-3)kW 660V/690V
55
80
75
100
90
110
110
129
132
160
160
220
200
280
250
335
335
450
D
Intermittent-periodic-duty 380V/400V 55 75 75 110 132 160 200 250 335
motor power(AC-4)kW 600V/690V 80 100 100 129 160 220 280 335 450
Frequency of AC-3 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
operation Electrical life AC-4 120 120 120 60 60 60 60 60 60
(times/h)
Mechanical life 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Electrical life AC-3 80 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
(ten thousand times) AC-4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 0.6 0.6
Mechanical life(ten thousand times) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Type of the fuse adapted NT3-225 NT3-225 NT3-315 RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-4 RT36-4
Action (actuating)range Pull-in voltage: 85%Us~110%Us; Release voltage: 20%Us~75%Us; NC7-250~620 Release voltage: 10%Us~75%Us
Basic parameters of the auxiliary contact AC-15: 360VA DC-13: 33W Ith: 10A
Type NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170 NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300 NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
Piece (of string, etc) 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 (2) 2 2
Cable (mm2) 10~90 10~90 10~90 95~150 120~185 185~240 240 (150) 150~185 185~240
Copper (mm) - - - - - - 30X5 40X5 50X5
Bolt M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12
Tightening torque(N·m) 4 4 4 10 10 10 10 10 14
5.3 Rated control source voltage Us and code for the NC7 ac contactor (205A - 620A) product coil
Coil code Control voltage (V) Power VA

110 127 220 380 Schematic drawing
Contactor type Start Hold
NC7-205 FG110 FG127 FG220 FG380 966 91.2
NC7-250 FI110 FI127 FI220 FI380 1500 34.2
NC7-300 FI110 FI127 FI220 FI380 1500 34.2
NC7-410 FJ110 FJ127 FJ220 FJ380 1500 34.2
NC7-475 FK110 FK127 FK220 FK380 1500 34.2
NC7-620 FL110 FL127 FL220 FL380 1700 34.2
Note: Products of NC7-250 or higher are duplex winding ones.
> >> D-42

Contactors
6. Derivative products
Derivative products Contactor Auxiliary module Schematic drawing
Reversing contactor
Mechanical interlocking mechanism
Timing-delay contactor
Air delay head
Star-delta
starter
Air delay head Auxiliary contactor block
Magnetic starter
Thermal relay
AC contactor
for capacitor switching
Current limiting contact block
D-43 > >>

Contactors
NC7 09~38
D(AX-3)/E(F5) A Φ
C
b
B
D
NC7 40~95
A
D(AX-3)/E(F5) Φ
C
b
B
> >> D-44

Contactors
NC7 115~170
D(AX-3)/E(F5)
C A
Φ
b
a
NC7 205~300
Φ
11.5
B
a
C
A
D-45 > >>

Contactors
NC7 410~475
13.5
B
b
D
a
C A
NC7 620
Φ
15.5
B
b
a
C A
> >> D-46

Contactors
mm
Type Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax Emax a b φ
NC7-09~12 47 76 86 124.5 144.5 34/35 50/60 4.5
NC7-18 47 76 91 129.5 149.5 34/35 50/60 4.5
NC7-25 57 86 98 136.5 156.5 40 48 4.5
NC7-32~38 57 86 102 140.5 160.5 40 48 4.5
NC7-40~65 77 129 119 157.5 177.5 64 100~110 6
NC7-80~95 87 129 127 165.5 185.5 64 100~110 6
NC7-115~170 120 156 155 193.5 213.5 96~110 130 7
NC7-205 171 197 186 80 110~120 6.5
NC7-250 202 203 215 96 110~120 6.5
NC7-300 213 206 220 96 110~120 6.5
NC7-410 213 206 221 80 170~180 8.5
NC7-475 233 238 233 80 170~180 8.5
NC7-620 309 304 256 180 180~190 10.5
8.5 Amount on order
The following to be indicated when ordering: 8.6 The 95A-or-lower derivative N conventional products triple
8.1 Full name and type of the contactor poles are provided in the mode of reversible wiring, so you
8.2 Rated control source voltage and frequency or size code of the coil must give clear indication for your special wiring mode.
8.3 If you need to order the F4 auxiliary contactor block, F5 air delay 8.7 The 205A-or-higher derivative NS conventional products triple
head or standard rail track for the product, you should further give poles are provided in the mode of reversible wiring, so you must
a clear indication; For products of 205A or higher, the auxiliary give clear indication for your special wiring mode.
contactor blocks will not be attached for lack of indication such as 8.8 Order Sample:
the number of those blocks and how they are combined. 10 units of NC7-0910 ac contacts, coil voltage 220V/50Hz,
8.4 When the NC7 9A-170A products leave the factory, the body with 5 pieces of F4-22
is not provided with the dust cap. It is hoped users will further 10 units of NC7-300 ac contacts, coil voltage 220V/50Hz,
give a clear indication when they need it. with 10 pieces of F4-22 further attached
Mechanical interlocking mechanism to be order Writing format for ordering
NC7-205 combined with NC7-620

NJLc-GL 30 sets
Aertical installation, Mechanical interlocking mechanism, 30 sets
Two NC7-250 combination in a mode of

NJLc-HH 30 sets
Horizontal installation, Mechanical interlocking mechanism, 30 sets
D-47 > >>

Contactors
2. Type designation
N C6-□ □ □ □ □
Blank: Screw-clamp connection

K: With solder “pins”
for direct connection
to printed circuit boards.
Number of contacts
D
10: 3N/O main contacts,
1N/O auxiliary contact
01: 3N/O main contacts.
1N/C auxiliary contact
04: 4N/O main contacts
08: 2N/O+2N/C main contacts
NC6 Contactor, 6~9A

1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, VDE, UKrSEPRO, GOST, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 9A;
1.3 Application: remotely makes and breaks circuit,
protect circuit from overload assembling . Rated operational current (AC-3, 380V)
with proper thermal relay; .
1.4 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-3, AC-4; .
1.5 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃; .
1.6 Altitude: ≤2000m; .;
1.7 Mounting category: Ⅲ .
1.8 Mounting conditions: .
inclination between mounting plane .
and vertical plane not exceed ±30° . Design sequence No.
1.9 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-4-1 .
Contactor
Company code
C R US LISTED
> >> D-48

Contactors
3. Technical data
3.1 Contactor
★ 3P contactor AC coil operation
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-06-K NC6-09 NC6-09-K
Rated cinventional
AC-1 20 20
heating current (A)
Rated operational 380/400V 6 9
AC-3/AC-4
current (A) 660/690V 3.8 5
220/230V 1.5 2.2
kW
380/400V 2.2 4
(AC-3)
660/690V 3 4
Power of motor
240V - 2
hp 400V - 3
600V - 3
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Operating cycles Electrical
AC-4 300 300
(operations/h)
Mechanical 3,600 3,600
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Electrical life (×103 operations)
AC-4 25 25
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10
Matching fuse model RT16-16 RT16-20
★ 4P contactor AC operation
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-09
AC-1 20 20
Rated operational
380/400V 6 9
current (A)
AC-3/AC-4
660/690V 3.8 5
220V/230V/240V 1.5 2.2
kW
380/400V 2.2 4
(AC-3)
660/690V 3 4
Power of motor
240V - 2
hp 400V - 3
600V - 3
AC-3 1,200 1,200

Operating cycles Electrical
(operations/h) AC-4 300 300
Mechanical 3,600 3,600
3
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Electrical life (×10 operations)
AC-4 25 25
6
Mechanical life (×10 operations) 10 10
Matching fuse model RT16-16 RT16-20
3.2 AC coil specifications
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-09

Rated control voltage (V AC) 24, 36, 48, 110, 127, 220, 230, 380, 400
In-rush 30 30
Coil power (VA)
Sealed 4.5 4.5
D-49 > >>

Contactors
4. Terminal connection
2
Model Number of piece Conductor (mm ) Screw size Tightening torque (N·m)
NC6-06 1 2.5 M3 0.5
NC6-09 1 2.5 M3 0.5
5. Accessories
5.1 Auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contact
Model
Model of assembled contact Conventional heating current (A) Control capacity D
NCF6-20; NCF6-02 AC-15: 360VA
NC6-06 NCF6-11; NCF6-40 10
NCF6-31; NCF6-22 DC-13: 33W
NCF6-13; NCF6-04
NCF6-20; NCF6-02
AC-15: 360VA
NCF6-11; NCF6-40
NC6-09 10
NCF6-31; NCF6-22
DC-13: 33W
NCF6-13; NCF6-04
5.2 Assembly with thermal over-load relay

Assembled thermal over-load relay
Model of
Recommended fuse type
contactor
Model Rated current (A)
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4
1.25~2 4 6
1.6~2.5 4 6
2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
NC6-09 NR2-11.5
9~13 16 25
46max 2-φ4.2
R 35±0.4 auxiliary contact 7.2
50±0.47
59max
35
33
5
4.2 36 58max
> >> D-50

Contactors
2. Type designation
N C 1-□ □ □ □ - □
Z: DC coil Blank: AC coil
Number of contacts
10: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O auxiliary
contact (9A,12A,18A,25A,32A)
01: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/C auxiliary
contact (9A,12A,18A,25A,32A)
11: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O
and 1N/C auxiliary contact
(40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
NC1 Contactor, 9~95A 04: 4 N/O main contacts
(9A,12A,25A,40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
1. General
08: 2 N/O and 2N/C main contacts
1.1 Certificates: CE, KEMA, VDE, EK, ESC, UKrSEPRO, GOST,
RCC, UL; (9A,12A,25A,40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, 690V, up to 95A;
1.3 Application: remote making & breaking circuits;
protect circuit from over-load when assembling
with thermal over-load relay;
Frequent start-up and control of AC contactor;
1.4 Utilization category: AC-3, AC-4;
1.5 Altitude: ≤2000m; Basic specification, expressed
1.6 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃;
1.7 Mounting category: Ⅲ with the rated operational current
1.8 Mounting conditions: (380V/400V, AC-3)
inclination between the mounting plane
and the vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
Design sequence No.
Contactor
Company code
C R US LISTED
D-51 > >>

Contactors
3. Curves
AC3 AC4 Load

Electric 106
life
09
12
18
25
32
40
50
65
80
95
AC2/AC3/AC4
10
8 D
Current breaking limits
4
2
AC2 1
Utilization categories AC3 0.8
AC4
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.04
0.02
0.01
2 4 8 10 20 40 80 100 200 400 800 2000 4000

Breaking current (A)
0.55
0.75
18.5
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
1.1
2.2
5.5
7.5
10
11
15
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
220/230V (kW)
3
4
0.75
18.5
110
132
160
200
250
315
335
400
1.1
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
10
11
15
22
30
75
45
55
75
90
3
4
380/400V (kW)
18.5
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
1.1
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
11
15
22
30
37
45
75
90
3
440V (kW)
> >> D-52

Contactors
4. Technical data
4.1 AC coil contactor
★ AC coil operation
Items Model NC1-09 NC1-12 NC1-18 NC1-25

Frame Frame 1 (3P, 4P) Frame 2 (3P) Frame 3 (3P, 4P)
Rated conventional heating current (A) AC-1 20 20 32 40

AC-3 9 12 18 25
380/400V
Rated operational AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
current (A) AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 18
660/690V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
Rated insulation voltage (V AC) 690 690 690 690
220/230V AC 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 380/400V AC 4 5.5 7.5 11
Power of controlled
660/690V AC 5.5 7.5 10 15
3-phase
200V AC 3 5 7.5 7.5
cage motor (AC-3)
240V AC 3 5 7.5 10
hp
460V AC 5 7.5 10 15
600V AC 5 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Operating frequency Electrical
AC-4 300 300 300 300
(operations/h)
Mechanical 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
Electrical life AC-3 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
3
(×10 operations) AC-4 200 200 200 200
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10 10 10
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-32 RT16-40
D-53 > >>

Contactors
NC1-32 NC1-40 NC1-50 NC1-65 NC1-80 NC1-95

Frame 4 (3P) Frame 5 (3P, 4P) Frame 6 (3P, 4P)
50 60 80 80 95 95
32 40 50 65 80 95
12 18.5 24 28 37 44
21 34 39 42 49 49
7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
690 690 690 690 690 690
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25
15 18.5 22 30 37 45
18.5 30 37 37 45 45
10 15 15 20 25 30
15 20 20 25 30 30
20 25 30 40 40 50
20 25 30 40 40 50
600 600 600 600 600 600
300 300 300 300 300 300
3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
800 800 600 600 600 600
200 150 150 150 100 100
8 8 8 8 6 6
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125
> >> D-54

Contactors
4.2 DC coil contactor

★ DC coil operation(24V,110V,220V)
Items Model NC1-09Z NC1-12Z NC1-18Z NC1-25Z


AC-3 9 12 18 25
380/400V
Rated operational AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
current (A) AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 18
660/690V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
Conventional heating current (A) 20 20 32 40
Rated insulation voltage (V AC) 690 690 690 690
220/230V AC 2.2 3 4 5.5
Power of controlled
3-phase kW 380/400V AC 4 5.5 7.5 11
cage motor (AC-3)
660/690V AC 5.5 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Operating frequency Electrical
AC-4 300 300 300 300
(operations/h)
Mechanical 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
Electrical life AC-3 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
(×103 operations) AC-4 200 200 200 200
6
Mechanical life (×10 operations) 10 10 10 10
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-32 RT16-40
D-55 > >>

Contactors
NC1-32Z NC1-40Z NC1-50Z NC1-65Z NC1-80Z NC1-95Z

50 60 80 80 95 95
32 40 50 65 80 95
12 18.5 24 28 37 44
21 34 39 42 49 49
7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
50 60 80 80 95 95
690 690 690 690 690 690
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25
15 18.5 22 30 37 45
18.5 30 37 37 45 45
600 600 600 600 600 600
300 300 300 300 300 300
3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
800 800 600 600 600 600
200 150 150 150 100 100
8 8 6 6 6 6
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125
> >> D-56

Contactors
5. Accessories
5.1 Accessories
Items Model NC1-09(Z) NC1-12(Z) NC1-18(Z) NC1-25(Z) NC1-32(Z

In-rush (VA) 70 70 70 110 110
Coil
Sealed (VA) 9 9 9.5 14 14
power
Power (W) 1.8~2.7 1.8~2.7 3~4 3~4 3~4
AC coil Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us

range Drop-out voltage (20%~75%) Us
Coil voltage(50Hz,60Hz,
24,36,48,110,127,220,240,380,415,440,480,500,600,660
50/60Hz)(V)
Coil power(W) 9 9 11 11 11
Operation Pick-up voltage (85%~110%) Us

DC coil
Coil voltage (V) 24,36,48,110,220
F4 - □ □
Number of N/C auxiliary contact
F4 auxiliary contact
Number of N/O auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contact assembly
F5 - □ □
0: time-delay range, 0.1s~3s
2: time-delay range, 0.1s~30s
4: time-delay range, 10s~180s
T: making time-delay; D: breaking time-delay
Time-delay module
NCF1-11C
Lateral side
1 N/C contact
1 N/O contact
NCF1-11C lateral side auxiliary contact
Design sequence No.
Auxiliary contact assembly
Contactor
Company code
D-57 > >>

Contactors
Z) NC1-40(Z) NC1-50(Z) NC1-65(Z) NC1-80(Z) NC1-95(Z)

200 200 200 200 200
57 57 57 57 57
6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10
(85%~110%) Us
(20%~75%) Us
24,36,48,110,127,220,240,380,415,440,480,500,600
20 20 20
(85%~110%) Us
20 20
D
(10%~75%) Us
Configuration of contacts
Picture Model
Number of N/O contact Number of N/C contact
F4-20 2 0
F4-11 1 1
F4-02 0 2
F4-40 4 0
F4-31 3 1
F4-22 2 2
F4-13 1 3
F4-04 0 4
Picture Model Time-delay range Number of time-delay contacts

F5-T0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-T2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-T4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
F5-D0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-D2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-D4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
> >> D-58

Contactors
5.2 Derived products when the contactor is assembled with following accessory module
Derived products Contactor Accessorial modular Picture
Time-delay contactor
Time-delay block
Reversing contactor
Magnetic starter
Thermal relay
AC contactor for
capacitor switching
Current-limiting
contact assembly
Star-delta starter
Auxiliary
Time-delay block
contact assembly
D-59 > >>

Contactors
5.3 Assembly with thermal over-load relay
Assembled thermal over-load relay

Model of
contactor Recommended fuse type
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
NC1-09
NC1-12 0.25~0.4 1 2
NC1-18 0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
NR2-11.5
1~1.6
1.25~2
2
4
4
6
D
1.6~2.5 4 6
NC1-09
NC1-12 2.5~4 6 10
NC1-18 4~6 8 16
5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
NR2-11.5 9~13 16 25
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
NC1-09 0.63~1 2 4
NC1-12 1~1.6 2 4
NC1-18 1.25~2 4 6
NC1-25 1.6~2.5 4 6
NC1-32 2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
5.5~8 12 20
NR2-25
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
12~18 20 35
17~25 25 50
23~32 40 63
NC1-32
28~36 40 80
NR2-36
23~32 40 63
NC1-40 30~40 40 100
NC1-50 37~50 63 100
NC1-65
48~65 63 100
NC1-80
NC1-95 55~70 80 125
63~80 80 125
NR2-93 80~93 100 160
> >> D-60

Contactors
5.4 Assembly with electronic overload relay

Rated Range of setting Recommended
Model of
contactor Assembled thermal Over-load relay
Model current (A) current (A) Fuse type
1.2 0.6~1.2 RT36-4 (NT00-4)

2.4 1.2~2.4 RT36-6 (NT00-6)
NC1-09
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)
10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
NC1-12
12 7~12 RT36-25 (NT00-25)
NC1-18 20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NC1-25 NRE8-25 25 20~25 RT36-50 (NT00-50)
NC1-32 32 22~32 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)
NC1-40 10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NRE8-40 40 20~40 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
NC1-40
NC1-50 65 30~65 RT36-160 (NT00-160)
NC1-65
NC1-80
100 50~100 RT36-200 (NT1-200)
NC1-95 NRE8-100
6. Technical information
6.1 Terminal connection
Cabling cross section(Cu)
Flexible cable Flexible cable Screw Tightening

Model Number with cold-pressed without cold- Inflexible size torque (N·m)
of piece socket (mm2) pressed socket (mm2) cable (mm2)
1 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 M3.5 0.8

NC1-09(Z)
2 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/4 M3.5 0.8
1 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 M3.5 0.8
NC1-12(Z)
2 1/2.5 1’2.5 1/4 M3.5 0.8
1 1.5/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 M3.5 0.8
NC1-18(Z)
2 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/6 M3.5 0.8
1 1.5/4 1.5/10 1.5/6 M4 1.2
NC1-25(Z)
2 1.5/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 M4 1.2
1 2.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/10 M4 1.2
NC1-32(Z)
2 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/10 M4 1.2
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M4 3.5
NC1-40(Z)
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 3.5
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M8 3.5
NC1-50(Z)
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 3.5
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M8 3.5
NC1-65(Z)
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 3.5
1 10/35 10/35 10/35 M10 4.0
NC1-80(Z)
2 6/16 6/16 6/16 M10 4.0
1 10/35 10/35 10/35 M10 4.0
NC1-95(Z)
2 6/16 6/16 6/16 M10 4.0
D-61 > >>

Contactors
7. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) NC1-09~32
A D(F 4)/E (F 5)
Φ
B
a
NC1-40~95
D(F4)/E(F5)
Φ
b
B
a
A C
NC1-09Z~32Z
A
D(F4)/E(F5)
S
φ C
P P
b
a L
> >> D-62

Contactors
NC1-40Z~95Z
P P φ
D(F4)/E(F5)
C
b
B
a
L
A
Model A max B max C max D max E max a b Φ L P S
NC1-09(Z)~12(Z) 47 76 86(116) 120.5(154.5) 140.5(174.5) 34/35 50/60 4.5 60(95) 10.5 8.6
NC1-18(Z) 47 76 87(122) 125.5(160.5) 145.5(180.5) 34/35 50/60 4.5 61(96) 11.3 10.4
NC1-25(Z) 57 86 95(131) 133.5(169.5) 153.5(189.5) 40 48 4.5 70(107) 13.2 11.7
NC1-32(Z) 57 86 100(138) 138.5(176.5) 158.5(196.5) 40 48 4.5 71.6(120) 14.5 13
NC1-4011(Z)~6511(Z) 77 129 116(173) 154.5(211.5) 174.5(231.5) 40 105 6.5 78(135) 20 8.6
NC1-4004~6504 84 129 116 154.5 174.5 40 105 6.5 78(135) 20 8.6
NC1-4008~6508 84 129 127 154.5 174.5 40 105 6.5 78 20 8.6
NC1-8011(Z)~9511(Z) 87 129 127(188) 165.5(226.5) 185.5(246.5) 40 105 6.5 83(140) 23.5 12
NC1-8004~9504 96 129 122 160.5 180.5 40 105 6.5 83 23.5 12
NC1-8008~9508 96 129 135 160.5 180.5 40 105 6.5 83 23.5 12
Note:
1. L: in main circuit, the distance between terminals and plate;
2. P: in main circuit, the distance between two phases;
3. S: in main circuit, the width of contacting plate.
D-63 > >>

Contactors
2. Type designation
N C 1- □□ □□ N
Reversing/change-over type contactor
Number of contacts
10: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O
auxiliary contact (9A,12A,18A,25A,32A)
01: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/C
11: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O 1N/C D
04: 4 N/O main contacts
(9A,12A,25A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
Basic specification, expressed with the rated

NC1-N Contactor operational current
Reversing & change-over type, (380V/400V, AC-3)
9~95A
1. General
1.1 Electrical ratings: AC50/60HZ, 690V, up to 95A; Design sequence No.
1.2 Application: reversing control of motor
and the mechanical interlock ensures operation
reliability for contactor change-over
of the two reversing contactors;
Contactor
1.4 Pollution degree: 3
1.5 Mounting category: Ⅲ
and the vertical plane not exceed ±5°
Company code
3. Structure
The contactors are composed of two horizontally mounted
contactors through mechanical interlock.
The lateral-side interlock is mounted between the two
contactors.
4. Wiring
Reversing Change-over
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2
> >> D-64

Contactors
5. Technical data
★ AC coil operation, reversing type
Items Model NC1-09N NC1-12N NC1-18N NC1-25N

380/400V 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
Ie(A)
660/690V 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
AC-4
380/400V 1.5 2.2 3 4
Pe(kW)
660/690V 1.1 1.5 3.7 4
200V 3 5 7.5 7.5
Power of controlled 240V 3 5 7.5 10
3-phase hp
cage motor (AC-3) 460V 5 7.5 10 15
600V 5 7.5 10 15
★AC coil operation, change-over type
Items Model NC1-09N NC1-12N NC1-25N

Frame Frame 1 (4P) Frame 2 (4P) Frame 3 (4P)
Rated conventional heating current (A) AC-1 20 20 40
380/400V 3.5 5 8.5
Ie(A)
660/690V 1.5 2 4.4
AC-4
380/400V 1.5 2.2 4
Pe(kW)
660/690V 1.1 1.5 4
200V 3 5 7.5
Power of controlled 240V 3 5 10
3-phase hp
cage motor (AC-3) 460V 5 7.5 15
600V 5 7.5 15
D-65 > >>

Contactors
NC1-32N NC1-40N NC1-50N NC1-65N NC1-80N NC1-95N

50 60 80 80 95 95
12 18.5 24 28 37 44
7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5
10 15 15 20 25 30 D
15 20 20 25 30 30
20 25 30 40 40 50
20 25 30 40 40 50
NC1-40N NC1-50N NC1-65N NC1-80N NC1-95N

Frame 4 (4P) Frame 5 (4P) Frame 6 (4P)
60 80 80 95 95
18.5 24 28 37 44
9 12 14 17.3 21.3
7.5 11 15 18.5 20
7.5 11 11 15 18.5
15 15 20 25 30
20 20 25 30 30
25 30 40 40 50
25 30 40 40 50
> >> D-66

Contactors
NC1-09~32N
50/60
a
g
b C
NC1-40~95N
h
φ
40 g 40
b C
Contactor model a b c g h φ
NC1-09N~12N 78 105 82 95 -- 4.5
NC1-18N 78 105 87 95 -- 4.5
NC1-25N 90 125 95 111 -- 4.5
NC1-32N 90 125 100 111 -- 4.5
NC1-40N~65N 129 165 116 50 90 6.5
NC1-80N~95N 129 165 127 57 96 6.5
D-67 > >>

Contactors
2. Type designation
N C 2- □□□ □ / □
Number of poles: 4P; Blank:3P
Derivation code :
Ns: horizontal mounting
Nc: vertical mounting
D
Rated operational current (A), AC-3 380/400V
NC2 Contactor, 115~800A

1. General
1.1 Certificates: NC2-115~630
Design sequence No.
CE, VDE, UKrSEPRO, GOST, RCC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 800A;
1.3 Application: remote making & breaking circuits;
protect circuit from overload when assembling
with thermal over-load relay;
Contactor
inclination between the mounting plane and
the vertical plane not exceed±5°
1.8 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Company code
The connection capability

Tightening
Model Cu busbar Screw torque
Number Cable Cross
2 Cross section size (N·m)
of piece section (mm )
(mm2)
NC2-115 1 70~95 - M6 3
NC2-150 1 70~95 - M8 6
NC2-185 1 95~150 - M8 6
NC2-225 1 95~150 - M10 10
NC2-265 1 120~185 - M10 10
NC2-330 1 185~240 - M10 10
NC2-400 1(2) 240(150) 30×5 M10 10
NC2-500 2 150~185 40×5 M10 10
NC2-630 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
NC2-800 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
C R US LISTED
> >> D-68

Contactors
4. Technical data
★ 3P contactors AC coil operation
Model NC2-115 NC2-150 NC2-185 NC2-225

Frame Frame 1 Frame 2
Rated Conventional heating current (A) AC-1 200 200 275 275
Rated operational AC-3 380/400V AC 115 150 185 225
current (A) AC-4 660/690V AC 86 108 118 137
380/400V AC 55 75 90 110
kW
660/690V AC 80 100 110 129
Power of controlled
240V AC 40 50 60 75
3-phase cage motor
415V AC 60 75 100 125
(AC-3) hp
480V AC 75 100 100 125
600V AC 75 100 100 125
Operating cycles
(operations /h) AC-3 1,200 1,200 600 600
Electrical life
1.2 1.2 1 1
(×106 operations) AC-3
Mechanical life
10 10 6 6
(×106 operations)
Matched fuse Model RT36-1 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-2

type Rated current A 250 250 315 315
★ 4P contactors AC coil operation
Model NC2-115/4 NC2-150/4 NC2-185/4 NC2-225/4

Frame Frame 1 Frame 2
Conventional heating current (A) AC-1 200 200 275 275
Rated operational AC-3 380/400V AC 115 150 185 225

current (A) AC-4 660/690V AC 86 108 118 137
380/400V AC 55 75 90 110
kW
Power of controlled 660/690V AC 80 100 110 129
3-phase cage motor 240V AC 40 50 60 75
(AC-3) 415V AC 60 75 100 125

hp
480V AC 75 100 100 125
600V AC 75 100 100 125
Operating cycles
1,200 1,200 600 600
(operations /h) AC-3
Electrical life
1.2 1.2 1 1
6
(×10 operations) AC-3
Mechanical life
10 10 6 6
(×106 operations)
Matched fuse Model RT36-1 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-2

type Rated current (A) 250 250 315 315
D-69 > >>

Contactors
NC2-265 NC2-330 NC2-400 NC2-500 NC2-630 NC2-800

Frame 3 Frame 4 Frame 5 Frame 6 Frame 7
315 380 450 630 800 800
265 330 400 500 630 800
170 235 303 353 462 486
132 160 200 250 335 450

160 220 280 335 450 475
100 125 150 200 250 350
150 150 200 250 350 600
150 200 250 350 400 600 D
150 200 300 350 500 650
600 600 600 600 600 600
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6
6 6 6 6 6 3
RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-4 RT36-4 RT36-4

355 500 630 800 1000 1000
NC2-265/4 NC2-330/4 NC2-400/4 NC2-630/4

Frame 3 Frame 4 Frame 5 Frame 6
315 380 450 800
265 330 400 630
170 235 303 462
132 160 200 335
160 220 280 450
100 125 150 250
150 150 200 350
150 200 250 400
150 200 300 500
600 600 600 600
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
6 6 6 6
RT36-3 RT36-3 RT16-3 RT36-4

355 500 630 1000
> >> D-70

Contactors
5. Accessories
Items Model NC2-115 NC2-150 NC2-185 NC2-225

Coil In-rush (VA) 660 966
power Sealed (VA) 85.5 91.2
AC coil Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us
range Drop-out voltage Common products; 20%~75%; electricity-saving products: 10%~75%Us
Coil code 3P FF XXX FG XXX

(XXX=coil voltage) 4P FF XXX/4 FG XXX/4
Coil voltage
110,127,220,230,380,400
(50Hz,60Hz,50/60Hz)(V AC)
F5 - □ □
F4 - □ □ 0: time-delay range, 0.1s~3s
Number of N/C auxiliary contacts 2: time-delay range, 0.1s~30s
F5 auxiliary contact Number of N/O auxiliary contacts 4: time-delay range, 10s~180s
Auxiliary contact assembly T: making time-delay;
D: breaking time-delay
Time-delay module
D-71 > >>

Contactors
NC2-265 NC2-330 NC2-400 NC2-500 NC2-630 NC2-800

840 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,700 1,700
150 34.2 34.2 34.2 34.2 34.2
(85%~110%) Us
Common products; 20%~75%; electricity-saving products: 10%~75%Us
FH XXX FI XXX FJ XXX FK XXX FL XXX FM XXX
FH XXX/4 FI XXX FJ XXX - FL XXX/4 -
110,127,220,230,380,400
Picture Model
Configuration of contacts
D
Number of NO contact Number of NC contact
F4-20 2 0
F4-11 1 1
F4-02 0 2
F4-40 4 0
F4-31 3 1
F4-22 2 2
F4-13 1 3
F4-04 0 4
Picture Model Time-delay range Configuration of time-delay contacts

F5-T0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-T2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-T4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
F5-D0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-D2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-D4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
> >> D-72

Contactors
6. Structure features
The contactor is composed of arc-extinguishing system, contact system, base frame and magnetic system (including iron core, coil)
The contact system of the contactor is of direct action type and double-breaking points allocation.
The lower base-frame of the contactor is made of shaped aluminum alloy and the coil is of plastic enclosed structure.
The coil is assembled with the amarture to be an integrated one. They can be directly taken out from or inserted into the contactor.
It is convenient for user's service and maintenance.
Scheme of NC2-115~265 structure
3 2
1
4
1: arc-extinguishing system 2: contact system 3: base frame 4: magnetic system
NC2 series contactor is of short arcing distance. For example,

the arcing distance of NC2-115~330 contactor is only 10mm (200~500V), which is about one sixth that of the previous contactor
of the same capacity. It is an excellent complementary element used for an electric control device and it occupies smaller space
in a complete set of equipment. The mechanical interlock can be added to the contactor in both horizontal direction
and vertical direction. Three sets of contactor can be interlocked in the vertical direction.
NC2-115 NC2-150 NC2-185 NC2-225

Model
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
A 167 204 167 204 171 211 171 211
B 163 163 171 171 174 174 197 197
C 172 172 172 172 183 183 183 183
P 37 37 40 40 40 40 48 48
S 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25
φ M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
f 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131
M 147 147 150 150 154 154 172 172
H 124 124 124 124 127 127 127 127
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5
X1 200~500V 10 10 10 10
X1 660~1000V 15 15 15 15
Ga 80 80 80 80
Ha 110~120 110~120 110~120 110~120
Note: a. f is the min distance needed to mount and dismount the coil.
b. X1: arcing distance is identified by operating voltage and breaking capacity.
D-73 > >>

Contactors
NC2-115~330 NC2-400~500 NC2-630~800
NC2-265 NC2-330 NC2-400 NC2-500 NC2-630 NC2-800

3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 3P 4P 3P
202 247 213 261 213 261 233 309 389 309
203 203 206 206 206 206 238 304 304 304
215 215 220 220 220 220 233 256 256 256
48 48 48 48 48 48 55 80 80 80
25 25 25 25 25 25 30 40 40 40
M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12 M12 M12
147 147 147 147 147 147 150 181 181 181
178 178 181 181 181 181 208 264 264 264
147 147 158 158 158 158 172 202 202 202
141 141 145 145 145 145 146 155 155 155
10 10 15 15 20 20
15 15 20 20 30 30
96 96 80 80 180 240 180
110~120 110~120 170~180 170~180 180~190 180~190
> >> D-74

Contactors
8. Assembly with overload relay
8.1 Assembly with thermal overload relay
Assembled thermal overload relay

Model of
contactor Recommended fuse type
aM gG
80~125 125 200

NC2-115
NC2-150
100~160 160 250
NC2-185
NC2-225
125~200 200 315
NR2-200
NC2-185
160~250 250 400
NC2-225
200~315 315 500
NC2-265
NC2-330 250~400 400 630
NC2-400
NC2-500 315~500 500 800
NC2-630~800 NR2-630
400~630 630 800
D-75 > >>

Contactors
2. Type designation of mechanical interlock
N C 2 - □□□ N
Reversing/change-over type contactor

Ns: horizontal mounting
Nc: vertical mounting (installed by users)
Rated operational current (A), AC-3 380/400V
Design sequence No.
Contactor
D
Company code
3. Technical data
NC2-N Contactor 3.1 Clearance between active and static contacts
Reversing & change-over type,
Models Distance between contacts
115~800A
NC2-115N/150N ≥5mm
1. General
NC2-185N/225N ≥5mm
1.1 Electric ratings; AC50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 800A;
1.2 Application: reversing control of motor and the NC2-265N/330N ≥6mm
mechanical interlock ensures operation reliability for NC2-400N/500N ≥6.5mm
contactor changeover of the two reversing contactors;
NC2-630N ≥7mm
1.4 Altitude: ≤2000m; NC2-800N ≥7mm
1.6 Mounting conditions: 3.2 Mechanical life
a. NJLC-FF and NJLS-FF: 3×106 operations
and the vertical plane not exceed±5°
1.7 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-4-1 b. Other model: 2×106 operations
(a) 3×106 NJLc-FF, NJLs-FF
NJLs-FF, NJLs-GG, NJLs-HH, NJLs-KK, NJLs-LL,

6 NJLc-FF, NJLc-FG, NJLc-FH, NJLc-FK, NJLc-FL,
(b) 2×10
NJLc-GG, NJLc-GH, NJLc-GK, NJLc-GL, NJLc-HH,
NJLc-HK, NJLc-HL, NJLc-KK, NJLc-KL, NJLc-LL
3.3 Terminal Connection
The connection capability

Tightening
Model Cu busbar Screw torque
Number Cable Cross
2 Cross section size (N·m)
of piece section (mm )
(mm2)
NC2-115 1 70~90 - M6 3
NC2-150 1 70~90 - M8 6
NC2-185 1 95~150 - M8 6
NC2-225 1 95~150 - M10 10
NC2-265 1 120~185 - M10 10
NC2-330 1 185~240 - M10 10
NC2-400 1(2) 240(150) 30×5 M10 10
NC2-500 2 150~185 40×5 M10 10

NC2-630 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
NC2-800 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
> >> D-76

Contactors
4.1 Refer to fig below for connection mode of connection plate, 4.2 For reversing type contactors assembled with
the interlocked contactors could be mounted horizontally NC2-115~225 and NC2-265~630,
or vertically. For vertical mounting, contactors with lower which will be mounted vertically, a padding plate
current mounted at the upper position. should be added at the bottom of NC2-115~225.
Connection of connection plate Rereising contactor mounted vertically

L1(A) L2(B) L3(C)
40
1 3 5
1 3 5
A1 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
U V W
H
3P pad
1N 1L2 2L1 2L3
1L3 1L1 2L2 2N
H+40
1 3 5 7
A1 8 6 4 2 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 8 A2
7 5 3 1
L1 L2 L3 N
4P
5. Accessories
Model of
Applicable assembly with contactors
mechanical interlock
NJLs-FF NC2-115+NC2-115; NC2-150+NC2-150; NC2-115+NC2-150

NJLs-GG NC2-185+NC2-185; NC2-225+NC2-225; NC2-185+NC2-225
NJLs-HH (Horizontal) NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-330+NC2-330; NC2-265+NC2-330
NJLs-KK NC2-400+NC2-400; NC2-500+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-500
NJLs-LL NC2-630+NC2-630; NC2-800+NC2-800
NJLc-FF NC2-115+NC2-115; NC2-150+NC2-150; NC2-115+NC2-150
NJLc-FG NC2-115+NC2-185; NC2-150+NC2-185; NC2-115+NC2-225; NC2-150+NC2-225
NJLc-FH NC2-115+NC2-265; NC2-115+NC2-330; NC2-150+NC2-265; NC2-150+NC2-330
NJLc-FK NC2-115+NC2-400; NC2-115+NC2-500; NC2-150+NC2-400; NC2-150+NC2-500
NJLc-FL NC2-115+NC2-800; NC2-115+NC2-630; NC2-150+NC2-630; NC2-150+NC2-800
NJLc-GG NC2-185+NC2-185; NC2-225+NC2-225; NC2-185+NC2-225
NJLc-GH NC2-185+NC2-265; NC2-185+NC2-330; NC2-225+NC2-265; NC2-225+NC2-330
NJLc-GK (Vertical) NC2-185+NC2-400; NC2-225+NC2-500; NC2-225+NC2-400; NC2-225+NC2-500
NJLc-GL NC2-185+NC2-800; NC2-185+NC2-630; NC2-225+NC2-630; NC2-225+NC2-800
NJLc-HH NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-330+NC2-330; NC2-265+NC2-330
NJLc-HK NC2-265+NC2-400; NC2-330+NC2-400; NC2-265+NC2-500; NC2-330+NC2-500
NJLc-HL NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-265+NC2-630; NC2-330+NC2-630; NC2-330+NC2-800
NJLc-KK NC2-400+NC2-400; NC2-500+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-800
NJLc-KL NC2-400+NC2-630; NC2-500+NC2-630; NC2-500+NC2-800
NJLc-LL NC2-630+NC2-630; NC2-630+NC2-800
NJLc-MM NC2-800+NC2-800
D-77 > >>

Contactors
NC2-115Ns~630Ns (Horizontal mounting)
φ φ
b max
d
J
a max
c
D
mm
Modle pole A max b max c d J
3 350 163 330 71
NC2-115Ns
4 425 208 370 108
3 350 171 330 71
NC2-150Ns
4 425 211 370 111
NC2-185Ns 3 350 174 330 78
4 430 223 370 118
110~120
3 350 197 330 78
NC2-225Ns
4 430 243 370 118
3 450 203 428 109
NC2-265Ns
4 546 249 485 157
3 450 206 428 124
NC2-330Ns
4 546 251 485 172
3 485 206 460 157
NC2-400Ns
4 595 251 485 170~180 157
NC2-500Ns 3 485 238 460 156
3 650 304 625 139
NC2-630Ns
4 810 364 785 180~190 139
NC2-800Ns 3 650 304 625 139
> >> D-78

Contactors
NC2-115Nc~630Nc (Vertical mounting)
H
H
H1
H1
9
12.5
a. NC2-115Nc~225Nc b. NC2-265Nc~800Nc
H H1
Model
Min Max Min Max
NC2-115Nc、NC2-150Nc 200 310 80 190
NC2-185Nc、NC2-225Nc 220 310 100 190
NC2-265Nc 250 380 130 260
NC2-330Nc 260 380 60 200
NC2-400Nc 280 380 100 200
NC2-500Nc 300 380 120 200
NC2-630Nc 380 380 200 200
NC2-800Nc 380 380 200 200
D-79 > >>

Contactors
2. Type designation
N C K 3 - □ /□□ □
Number of N/C auxiliary contacts
Number of N/O auxiliary contacts
Number of main contacts, blank: 3P
D
Full Load Amps
Design sequence No.
NCK3
For HVACR application
Definite Purpose Contactor,
25~90A
1. General Contactor
1.1 Certificates: VDE, UKrSEPRO, UL;
1.2 Application: HVACR;
1.3 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-7a, AC-8a; Company code
1.4 Rated insulation voltage: 630V;
1.5 Standard: UL508
3. Technical data
3.1 Contactor
★ NCK3, 1P+shunt
Conventional
Full Load Line Voltage Locked Rotor
Model free air
Amps (A) (V) Amps (A)
thermal current (A)
NCK3-20/1 20 277 150 32

NCK3-25/1 25 277 150 32
NCK3-30/1 30 277 200 40
NCK3-32/1 32 277 200 40
NCK3-40/1 40 277 240 50
★ NCK3, 1pole+1NC auxiliary contact
Conventional
Full Load Line Voltage Locked Rotor
Model free air
Amps (A) (V) Amps (A)
thermal current (A)
NCK3-20/101 20 277 150 32

NCK3-25/101 25 277 150 32
NCK3-30/101 30 277 200 40
NCK3-32/101 32 277 200 40
NCK3-40/101 40 277 240 50
> >> D-80

Contactors
3. Technical data
3.1 Contactor
★ NCK3, 2Pole
Full Load Amps Line Voltage Locked Rotor Conventional free air
Model
(A) (V) Amps(A) thermal current(A)
20 240/277 150
NCK3-20/2 20 480 120 32
15 600 90
25 240/277 150
NCK3-25/2 20 480 120 32
15 600 90
30 240/277 200
NCK3-30/2 25 480 150 40
20 600 120
32 240/277 200
NCK3-32/2 25 480 150 40
20 600 120
40 240/277 240
NCK3-40/2 32 480 200 50
25 600 160
★ NCK3, 3Pole
Full Load Line Voltage Locked Rotor Conventional free air

Model Horsepower
Amps(A) (V) Amps(A) thermal current(A)
20 240/277 150 7.5

NCK3-20 20 480 110 32 10
15 600 90 10
25 240/277 150 7.5
NCK3-25 20 480 110 32 10
15 600 90 10
32 240/277 200 10
NCK3-30 25 480 115 40 15
20 600 95 15
32 240/277 200 10
NCK3-32 25 480 115 40 15
20 600 95 15
40 240/277 240 10
NCK3-40 32 480 150 50 20
25 600 120 20
50 240/277 300 15
NCK3-50 40 480 215 60 30
32 600 175 30
60 240/277 360 20
NCK3-60 40 480 215 75 30
32 600 175 30
75 240/277 450 25
NCK3-75 60 480 375 90 50
50 600 300 50
90 240/277 540 30
NCK3-90 75 480 450 100 60
60 600 360 60
D-81 > >>

Contactors
3.2 Coil specifications
1Pole+shunt, 1Pole+1 NC, auxiliary contact, 2Pole
Model NCK3-25(20) NCK3-30(32) NCK3-40
Power In-rush (VA) 55 55 55
consumption Sealed (VA) 13 13 13
Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us

Power supply voltage Us AC50/60Hz, 24V, 110V/120V, 220V/240V
3Pole
Model NCK3-20~40 NCK3-50~60 NCK3-75~90

Power In-rush (VA) 51 83 165 D
consumption Sealed (VA) 12 14 30
Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us

Power supply voltage Us AC50/60Hz, 24V, 110V/120V, 220V/240V
3.3 Specifications of auxiliary contact

1Pole+1 NC auxiliary contact
Capacity of auxiliary contact

Ith (A) Ui (V)
AC (VA) DC (W)
10 600 300 30
3Pole, lateral auxiliary contact
Utilization Rated insulation Resistive amps Rated operational Rated operational Control
category voltage (V) (A) voltage (V) current (A) capacity
AC-15 660V 10 380/400 0.95 360VA

DC-13 660V 10 220/230 0.15 33W
Cabling(mm2) (Cu) Tightening torque (N·m)
Model Rigid wire Flexible Main

with single core stranded wire Coil circuit
NCK3-20 2.5~6 2.5~4 - 1.8~2
NCK3-25 2.5~6 2.5~4 - 1.8~2
NCK3-32 4~10 2.5~6 - 1.8~2
NCK3-40 4~10 2.5~6 - 1.8~2
NCK3-50 6~16 4~10 0.8~1.2 10~14
NCK3-60 6~16 4~10 0.8~1.2 10~14
NCK3-75 16~35 10~25 0.8~1.2 10~14
NCK3-90 25~35 16~25 0.8~1.2 10~14
> >> D-82

Contactors
NCK3-20/1~40/1
4-φ5.2
R
41.3±0.2
22±0.14
92max
5.2
41.3±0.2
45±0.2
55max 67max
NCK3-20/2~40/2 NCK3-20~40
67.5max
57±0.2
5
37.5±0.2
5.
C
Φ5.4 5.5
R
22±0.14
41.3±0.2
79.2±0.25
92max
82.5±0.25
95.2max
5.4
5.5
5.5
41.3±0.2
12.6
45±0.2 67max
55max
73max
37.5±0.2
51.7±0.2
NCK3-50~60 NCK3-75~90
67.5max
57±0. 2
37. 5±0. 2 74±0. 18
64±0. 18
5
5.
5
5.5
5.5
133max
117±0.18
82.5±0.25
79.2±0.25
115max
+0,14
Φ100
5.5
Φ5 +0,14
0
89max 115max
5.5
37. 5±0. 2
51. 7±0. 2 79max
D-83 > >>

Contactors
NCH8 Modular AC Contactor
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: up to 20A, 25A, 40A, 63A, 230V,

AC50/60Hz;
1.2 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-7a, AC-7b;
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 61095
2. Features
D
2.1 Compact design and modularization design;
2.2 Insulation material with excellent performances has been
adopted to enhance the operation security to a great extent;
2.3 Elegant appearance. A mounting instruction diagram is
appended for convenient operation;
2.4 No noise during operation.
> >> D-84

Contactor
3. Technical data
3.1 Ratings
Utilization Conventional Controlled

Model category Ui (V) Ue (V~) heating current (A) Ie (A) power (kW)
NCH8-20 AC-1,AC-7a 500 230 20 20 4

NCH8-20 AC-7b 500 230 20 9 1.2
NCH8-25 AC-1,AC-7a 500 400 25 25 16

NCH8-40 AC-1,AC-7a 500 400 40 40 40
NCH8-63 AC-1,AC-7a 500 400 63 63 40
3.2 Making and breaking capacity
Utilization Making and breaking conditions Electrification Interval Operating

Model category time (s) time (s) cycle times
Ic/Ie Ur/Ue COSφ
NCH8-20 AC-1,AC-7a 1.5 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 50
NCH8-20 AC-7b 8 1.05 0.45 0.05 10 50

NCH8-25 AC-1,AC-7a 1.5 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 50
NCH8-40 AC-1,AC-7a 1.5 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 50
NCH8-63 AC-1,AC-7a 1.5 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 50
3.3 Conventional Operating Performances

3.3.1 Conventional operating performances of NCH8-20~25
Utilization Making conditions Breaking conditions Electrification Interval Operating

category time (s) time (s) frequency
I/Ie U/Ue COSφ Ic/Ie Ur/Ue COSφ
AC-1 1.0 1.05 0.8 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 6000
AC-7a 1.0 1.05 0.8 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 30000
AC-7b 6.0 1.0 0.45 1.0 0.17 0.45 0.05 10 30000
3.3.2 Conventional operating performances of NCH8-40~63
Utilization Making and breaking conditions Electrification Interval Operating

category time (s) time (s) frequency
Ic/Ie Ur/Ue COSφ
AC-1 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 6000
AC-7a 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 30000
3.4 Conventional heating current under different ambient temperature
Rated current 40℃ 50℃ 60℃ 70℃

Ie=20A 20A 18A 16A 14A
Ie=25A 25A 22A 18A 16A
Ie=40A 40A 38A 36A 32A

Ie=63A 63A 57A 50A 46A
3.5 Number of appended lamps with voltage up to 230V
Tungsten filament and halogen 230V

Unit power
60W 100W 200W 300W 500W 1000W
20A 20 12 6 4 2 1
25A 36 20 11 7 4 2
40A 85 50 25 17 10 5
63A 115 70 35 23 14 7
D-85 > >>

Contactor
L2
H1
H
H2
D
L1
D
Model L L1 L2 H H1 H2
2P 4P
NCH8-20~25 18 36 85 35.5 45 65.5 60 44 D
NCH8-40~36 36 54 85 35.5 45 65.5 60 44
Model Number of contact Coil voltage CTN
NCH8-20 2NO 230V 50Hz 128

NCH8-20 2NO 24V 50Hz 128
NCH8-20 1NO+1NC 220/230V 128
NCH8-20 1NO+1NC 24V 50Hz 128
NCH8-20 2NC 220/230V 128
NCH8-20 2NC 24V 50Hz 128
NCH8-20 4NO 220/230V 96
NCH8-20 4NO 24V 50Hz 96
NCH8-20 2NO+2NC 220/230V 96
NCH8-20 2NO+2NC 24V 50Hz 96
NCH8-25 4NO 220/230V 96
NCH8-25 4NO 24V 50Hz 96
NCH8-25 2NO+2NC 220/230V 96
NCH8-25 2NO+2NC 24V 50Hz 96
NCH8-40 4NO 230V 64
NCH8-40 4NO 24V 64
NCH8-40* 2NO+2NC 230V 64
NCH8-40* 2NO+2NC 24V 64
NCH8-40 2NO 230V 64
NCH8-40 2NO 24V 64
NCH8-40 1NO+1NC 230V 64
NCH8-40 1NO+1NC 24V 64
NCH8-40* 3NO+1NC 220/230V 64
NCH8-40* 4NC 220/230V 64
NCH8-63 4NO 230V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63 4NO 24V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63* 2NO+2NC 230V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63* 2NO+2NC 24V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63 2NO 230V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63 2NO 24V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63 1NO+1NC 230V50Hz 64
NCH8-63 1NO+1NC 24V 50Hz 64
NCH8-63* 3NO+1NC 220/230V 64
NCH8-63* 4NC 220/230V 64
Note: “*” means the product is not available during current development
> >> D-86

Contactors
2. Type designation
C J 19 □ □
Number of auxiliary contacts

20: 2N/O, 11: 1N/O+1N/C
02: 2N/C (CJ19-25~43)
21: 2N/O+1N/C, 12: 1N/O+2N/C (CJ19-63~95)
10: 1N/O, 01: 1N/C (CJ19-115~170)
Basic model code
Design sequence No.
Contactor
3. Normal operation conditions

the average during 24 hours should not exceed +35℃;
3.2 Altitude:≤ 2000m;
CJ19 Contactor 3.3 Atmosphere conditions: At mounting site,
relative humidity not exceed 50% at the max temperature
for Power Factor Correction of +40℃, higher relative humidity is allowable
under lower temperature. For example,
1. General RH could be 90% at +20℃,
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 400V; special measures should be taken to occurrence of dews;
3.5 Installation category: Ⅲ
3.6 Installation conditions :
the inclination between installation plane
and vertical plane is within ±5 °
3.7 Impact and shake: the products should locate
in the places where there are no obvious impact and shake.
4. Technical data
Item CJ19-25 CJ19-32 CJ19-43 CJ19-63 CJ19-95 CJ19-115 CJ19-150 CJ19-170
Controllable capacitor 220V 6 9 10 15 28.8(240V) 34.5(240V) 46(240V) 52(240V)

Capacity 380V 12 18 20 30 50(400V) 60(400V) 80(400V) 90(400V)
Rated Isolation
500 690
Voltage Ui V
Rated Operational
220/240, 380/400
Voltage Ue V
Conventional thermal current Ith A 25 32 43 63 95 200 200 275
Rated Operational current Ie A (380V) 17 23 29 43 72.2 (400V) 87 (400V) 115 (400V) 130 (400V)
Restrained surge capacity 20 Ie

Controlled power voltage 110 127 220 380
Auxiliary contact AC-15: 360VA DC-13: 33W Ith:10A
Operating Frequency cycles/h 120

4
Electrical durability 10 10 2
4
Mechanical durability 10 100 300
D-87 > >>

Contactors
CJ19-25~ 43
B
C
F
A
D
+0.3
φ4.5 0
D
CJ19-63~ 95
B C
φ6.5
105±0.7
129max
40±0.5
CJ19-115~170
192max
110±0.6
96±0.5
1L1 3L2 5L3

200max
155max
130±0.8
R
CHNT
2T1 4T2 6T3
φ7
120max
Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax E F Note
CJ19-25 80 47 124 76 34/35 50/60

Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-32 90 58 132 86 40 48
be fixed with 35mm din rail
CJ19-43 90 58 136 86 40 48
CJ19-63 132 79 150 - - - Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-95 135 87 158 - - - be fixed with 35mm and 75mm din rail
CJ19-115 200 120 192 155
Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-150 200 120 192 155
be fixed with two 35mm din rail
CJ19-170 200 120 192 155
6. Wiring and installation

6.1 The connection terminals are protected through insulation cover, which is reliable and secure for installation and operation;
6.2 For CJ19-25~43, screws are available for installation, as well as the DIN rail;
for CJ19-63~95, 35mm or 75mm standard rail are available for installation.
for CJ19-115~170, screws are available for installation, as well as two 35mm DIN rail.
> >> D-88

Relays
NR8
Thermal
Overload Relay
Page E-01
NRE8
Electronic
Overload Relay
Page E-05
NR2
Thermal
Overload Relay
Page E-11
Relays
2. Usual service conditions and mounting conditions
2.1 Altitude: not higher than 2000m.
2.2 When the ambient tempeature is -5℃~+40℃, the mean
value is no greater than +35℃ within 24 hours.
2.3 Atmospheric conditions: When the ambient air temperature
is +40℃, the relative humidity of the air shall not be higher
than 50%; a higher relative humidity is allowed at a lower
temperature; for example, for the wettest month, the lowest
temperature averaged shall not be higher than +25℃, the
maximum relative humidity averaged shall be 90%, and special
measures shall be taken for the condensation occasionally
produced due to temperature change.
2.4 Class of pollution: 3.
2.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
plane shall not exceed 5°.
2.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
insulation failure.
2.7 In places with rain and snow protection equipment and not
full of vapor;
2.8 In places where there is no significant shake, impact or
vibration.
NR8 Thermal Overload Relay

1. General
Nr8 series thermal overload relay (hereinafter referred
to as thermal relay) is used to provide overload and phase
failure protection for AC motors with a frequency of AC
50Hz/60Hz, a voltage of up to 690V and a current of
0.1A~38A that operate continuously or intermittently.
The thermal relay also has temperature compensation,
operation indication, automatic and manual reset and stop
functions and stable and reliable performances.
The product meets the standards GB 14048.4 and IEC
60947-4-1.
Plug-in mounting is used between the thernal relay and
the contactor.
E-01 > >>

Relays
3. Main parameters and technical characteristics
Item NR8-11.5 NR8-38

Current class 13 38
Nominal insulation voltage V 690 690
Phase failure protection Have Have
Manual and automatic reset Have Have
Temperature compensation Have Have
Tripping indication Have Have
Test button Have Have
Stop button Have Have
Mounting type Plug-in type Plug-in type
Auxiliary contact 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC
AC-15 230V rated current A 2.61 2.61
AC-15 400V rated current A 1.5 1.5
DC-13 220V rated current A 0.2 0.2 E

Single-core or stranded conductor 1~2.5 1~10
Conductor Main circuit
Terminal screw M4 M4
cross-sectional
Single-core or stranded conductor 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5
area mm
2
Auxiliary circuit
Terminal screw M3.5 M3.5
4. Others
4.1 Structural features
4.1.1 Three-phase bimetal type, tripping class 10A.
4.1.2 Phase failure protection.
4.1.3 Setting curent continuously adjustable device.
4.1.4 Temperature compensation.
4.1.5 Operation indication.
4.1.6 Testing mechanism.
4.1.7 Stop button.
4.1.8 Manual and automatic reset button.
4.1.9 One N.O. contact and one N.C. contact, electrically separable.
4.1.10 Mounting type: plug-in mounting with the contactor.
4.2 Protection characteristics
Item No. Setting current multiple Operation time Test conditions
1 1.05 No operation within 2h Cold state start

Overload 2 1.2 Operation within 2h Hot state start (after No.1)
protection 3 1.5 Operation with 2min Start when thermal equilibrium is reached
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s after applying a 1 times setting current
Any two phases The other phase
Phase failure 5 No operation within 2h Cold state start
1.0 0.9
protection
6 1.15 0 Operation within 2h Hot state start (after No.5)
> >> E-02

Relays
4.3 Type selection and ordering data (see the table)
Specification of matching fuse(RT 36 is

Model of matching
Product appearance Rated current A recommended) A
contactor
gG
0.1~0.16 2
0.16~0.25 2
0.25~0.4 2
0.4~0.63 2
0.63~1 4
1~1.6 4
1.6~2.5 6
2.5~4 10
4~6 16 NC8-06M、NC8-06M/Z
5.5~8 20 NC8-09M、NC8-09M/Z
NR8-11.5 7~10 20 NC8-12M、NC8-12M/Z
9~13 25
0.1~0.16 2
0.16~0.25 2
0.25~0.4 2
0.4~0.63 2
0.63~1 4
1~1.6 4
1.6~2.5 6
2.5~4 10
4~6 16
5.5~8 20
7~10 20
9~13 25
12~18 35
NC8-09、NC8-12
16~24 50
NC8-18、NC8-25
23~32 63
NR8-38 NC8-32、NC8-38
30~38 80
4.4 Tripping characteristics
Time Class 10A
2
h
1
40
20
min
10
4
2
1
40
20
10
S
4
1
2 2
1 3
0.8
0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
Setting current multiple ×(Ir)
One Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.

Two Balanced operation, 2-phase, cold state start.
Three Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.
E-03 > >>

Relays
NR8-11.5
NR8-11.5
RESET TEST/STOP 38
34 36
32
30
57±0.5
45±0.2 65 max
NR8-38
E
NR8-38
RESET TEST/STOP 38
34 36
32
30
A H
57±0.5
98 NO 97 96 NC 95
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

45±0.2 65 max
> >> E-04

Relays
2. Type designation
N RE 8 - □ / □ □
Mounting version
(F: independent; blank: combined)
Tripping class (B: 10; blank: 10A)
Rated current class
Design sequence No.
NRE8 Electronic Overload Relay Electronic overload relay

1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, UKrSEPRO, UL;
1.2 Electrical ratings: AC50/60Hz, 690V;
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508 Company code
3. Features
3.1 Three-phase electronic type, tripping class10A and 10;
3.2 Energy saving up to 80%
compared with bimetallic type;
3.3 Phase-failure protection;
3.4 Current setting continuously adjustable;
3.5 Two indicator lights available for indicating normal,
overload time-delay, phase-failure and
phase-failure time-delay status respectively;
3.6 Manual test mechanism;
3.7 Manual reset button;
3.8 A pair of N/C and N/O contacts;
3.9 Two mounting versions:
independent or combined with a contactor.
4. Technical data
4.1 Main Circuit: Rated insulation;
Voltage: AC 690V;
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz;
4.2 Auxiliary Circuit: Rated insulation;
Voltage: AC 400V;
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz;
See table below for other ratings.
Utilization category AC-15 DC-13

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 230 400 220
Rated operational current Ie (A) 2.5 1.5 0.2
Conventional heating current (A) 5
C R US LISTED
E-05 > >>

Relays
4.3 Wiring. Connection of main circuit is PVC insulation copper conductor or cable. See table below for details:
Current range (A) Cross section area (mm )

2
Length (m) Number of piece
I≤8 1.0 1 1
8＜I≤12 1.5 1 1
12＜I≤20 2.5 1 1
20＜I≤25 4.0 1 1
25＜I≤32 6.0 1 1
32＜I≤50 10 1 1
50＜I≤65 16 1 1
65＜I≤85 25 1 1
85＜I≤115 35 1 1
115＜I≤150 50 2 1
150＜I≤175 75 2 1
175＜I≤225 95 2 1
225＜I≤250 120 2 1 E
250＜I≤275 150 2 1
275＜I≤350 185 2 1
350＜I≤400 240 2 1
400＜I≤500 150 2 2
500＜I≤630 185 2 2
4.4 Protection Characteristics

4.4.1 Operation characteristic under three-phase balanced-load status as per the table below.
Test Ambient
Series No. I/In Operating time condition temperature (℃)
1 1.05 <2h non-tripping Cold status

2 1.20 <2h tripping
Starts from hot status,
Class 10A ≤ 2 min
3 1.50 right after item no.1 (20±5)℃
Class 10 ≤ 4 min
Class 10A 2s＜Tp≤10s
4 7.20 Cold status
Class 10 4s＜Tp≤10s
Under three-phase operation, if relay current reaches and maintains 1.05 times of the current setting, the green lamp flashes and red
lamp does not light up, which indicates that the relay is not at over-load time-delay status, which equals to non-operation in 2 hours
in serial No. 1 of the table above. A current tolerance for serial No.1 is -3%, and a current tolerance for No.2 is +3% .
Cold status implies the status of the power re-energized of main circuit of relay 5 seconds after its power off.
4.4.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status as per the table below.
I/In
Series No. Operating time Tp Test condition Ambient temperature ℃
Any two phases The third phase
Starts from
1 1.0 0.9 <2h non-tripping
cold status
Starts from hot (20±5)℃
2 1.15 0 <2h tripping status, right after
item No.1
Under phase failure operation, if one phase has the current = 0, the other two phases have the current ≥1.15 times of the
current setting, then, the red lamp flashes, and green lamp lights up, which indicates that
the relay is at time-delay release status.
As to this table, the permissible error of the No.1 circuit is -3%, No.2 circuit +3%
> >> E-06

Relays
4.5 Tripping Curve
Tripping class 10A Tripping class 10A
t(s) t(s)
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
400 400
200 200
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
1
20 20
2 1
2
10 10
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2
1 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 I/Ie 1 2 4 6 8 10 I/Ie
1: Cold status 2: Hot status 1: Cold status 2: Hot status

5.1 For Combined Mounting
NRE8-25
81.5max
26.3/27.6
61.5
20
CHINT
NRE8-25
22 23
77.4max
21
24 Titp
20 25 Test Reset
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
46max
NRE8-25/F
45max
91max
35.5
1 L1 3 L2
CHINT
83
35
NRE8-25
66
22 23
21 Trip
24
20 25 Test Reset
NC NO
95 96 97 98
4 T2 6 T3
E-07 > >>

Relays
NRE8-40
93max
17 17 70
20
CHINT
NRE8-40
85max
22 23
21
24 Titp
20 25 Test Reset
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
55max
NRE8-40/F
55max 104max E
45
1 L1 3 L2
CHINT
94max
77
NRE8-40
35
32
28
24 36 Trip
20 40 Test RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
T1 4 T2 6 T3
NRE8-100
20/23.5 20/23.5 101max

74.6
22.8/27.1
CHINT
NRE8-100
70
80
60 Trip
90
50 100 Test RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
NRE8-200
40 40 81
M8
R
109
160
NRE8-200
100
90 110
Trip
Test RESET
80 120
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
8
40 56
126 181
> >> E-08

Relays
NRE8-630
171
215
48/55* 48/55* 12
180/194
R
NRE8-630
Trip
Test RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
44/45
50
115
Note:Dimension with ”*” for the product above 400A.
6. Applications
K K
K
L1 L2 L3 96 95
Manual reset 97
Test 98
95
Stop T1 T2 T3 96
Overload relay
M3~
7. Accessories
7.1 Mounting base
Mounting base Description Application
NRE8-25 Incorporates with NRE8-25 to form

mounting bracket an independently mounted product
NRE8-40 Incorporates with NRE8-40 to form

mounting bracket an independently mounted product
E-09 > >>

Relays
7.2 Assembly with contactors
Thermal Rated Current Model of Model of

overload current setting recommended recommended
Relay (A) range (A) contactor fuse
1.2 0.6~1.2 RT36-4 (NT00-4)

2.4 1.2~2.4 RT36-6 (NT00-6)
NC1-09
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)
10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
NC1-12
12 7~12 RT36-25 (NT00-25)
NRE8-25
20 10~20 NC1-18, NC1-25 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
25 20~25 NC1-25 RT36-50 (NT00-50)
32 22~32 NC1-32 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16) E
10 5~10 NC1-40 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NRE8-40 40 20~40 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
65 30~65 NC1-50, NC1-65 RT36-160 (NT00-160)
100 50~100 NC1-80, NC1-95 RT36-200 (NT1-200)

NRE8-100
120 85~120 RT36-250 (NT1-250)
NC2-115, NC2-150
160 110~160 RT36-315 (NT2-315)
NC2-185, NC2-225
200 140~200 RT36-400 (NT2-400)
NRE8-200
250 170~250 RT36-500 (NT3-500)
315 215~315 NC2-225, NC2-265 RT36-630 (NT3-630)
400 275~400 NC2-330, NC2-400 RT36-800 (NT4-800)
500 340~500 NC2-500, NC2-630 RT36-1000 (NT4-1000)
NRE8-630 630 430~630 RT36-1000 (NT4-1000)
> >> E-10

Relays
2. Type designation
N R 2-□
Current class
Design sequence No.
NR2 Thermal Overload Relay Thermal overload relay
1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, KEMA, UkrSEPRO, GOST, RCC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz, 690V, 0.1A~630A;
1.3 Tripping class: 10A;
1.4 Mounting version:
a. Plug-in: Available for NR2-11.5, 25, 36, 93, 150;
b. Independent: Available for NR2-200, 630; Company code
3. Features
3.1 3-phase bimetal
3.2 Continuously readjustable current settings
3.3 Temperature compensation
3.4 Tripping indicator
3.5 Test button
3.6 Stop button
3.7 Manual and automatic reset button
3.8 Electrically separated 1N/O plus 1N/C contact
C R US LISTED
E-11 > >>

Relays
4. Technical data
4.1 Protection properties
Item Series No. I/In Operating time Tp Test condition
1 1.05 >2 h Start from cold status
Start from heat status,

2 1.2 ≤2h
right after item No.1
Overload Start from heat status,

3 1.5 ≤2 min
protection
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s Start from cold status
5
Any two
phases
Another
phase >2 h Start from cold status
E
Phase
failure 1.0 0.9
protection
1.15 0 Start from heat status,
6 ≤2 h
Curves
120
100
80
60
40
20
min
10
8
6
4
2
cold status
1
40
three phase
20
three phase two phase
10
8 two phase
s
6
4
2
heat status
0.8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
Multiple of rectified current
> >> E-12

Relays
4.2 Main Technical Parameters
Model NR2-11.5
Picture
Current class(A) 13
Phase failure protection function Yes
Automatic & manual reset Yes
Temperature compensation Yes
Tripping indicator Yes
Test & stop pushbutton Yes
Mounting Plug-in Yes

mode Independent Yes
No. of contacts 1N/O+1N/C
Auxiliary Rated current (A) (AC-15 220V) 2.73

contacts Rated current (A) (AC-15 380V) 1.58
Rated current (A) (DC-13 220V) 0.2
Current setting range
Rated operational current(A) 0.1~0.16 0.16~0.25 0.25~0.40 0.40~0.63 0.63~1 1~1.6 1.25~2
Matched aM(A) 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4

fuse gG(A) 2 2 2 2 4 4 6
Model NR2-93
Picture
Current class(A) 93
Phase failure protection function Yes
Automatic & manual reset Yes
Temperature compensation Yes
Tripping indicator Yes
Test & stop pushbutton Yes
Mounting Plug-in Yes
mode
Independent Yes
Configuration of contacts 1N/O+1N/C
Auxiliary Rated current (A) (AC-15 220V) 2.73

contacts Rated current (A) (AC-15 380V) 1.58
Rated current (A) (DC-13 220V) 0.2
Current setting range
Rated operational current(A) 23~32 30~40 37~50 48~65 55~70 63~80 80~93
Matched aM(A) 40 40 63 63 80 80 100

fuse gG(A) 63 100 100 100 125 125 160
E-13 > >>

Relays
NR2-25 NR2-36
25 36
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes E
Yes Yes
1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C
2.73 2.73
1.58 1.58
0.2 0.2
Current setting range Current setting range
1.6~2.5 2.5~4 4~6 5.5~8 7~10 9~13 12~18 17~25 23~32 28~36
4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 40 40
6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 80
NR2-150 NR2-200 NR2-630
150 200 630

Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes No No
No Yes Yes
1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C
2.73 2.73 2.73
1.58 1.58 1.58
0.2 0.2 0.2
Current setting range Current setting range Current setting range
80~104 95~120 110~150 80~125 100~160 125~200 160~250 200~315 250~400 315~500 400~630
125 125 160 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630
200 224 250 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 800
> >> E-14

Relays

NR2-11.5
13 8.6
R
NR2-11.5
STOP RESET
75max TEST
NO NC
67.5max
45max
NR2-11.5 with Mounting Block
R
NR2-11.5
STOP RESET
83max
35
TEST
63
NO NC
98 97 95 96
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
34 75max
45max
NR2-25
23.4/26.2
10.7/13.1
R
NR2-25
66max
STOP RESET
A
H
TEST
48max
NO NC
98 97 96 95
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
45max 94max
E-15 > >>

Relays
NR2-25 with Mounting Block
35 4.5
R2
1 L1 3 L2 5
5
R
NR2-25
72max
STOP RESET
35
60
A
H
TEST
NO NC
97 96 95
1 4 T2 6 T3
45max
100max
E
NR2-36
13.5 13
R
NR2-36
78max
STOP RESET
A
60max
H
TEST
NO NC
98 97 96 95
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
55max 94max
40
4.5
R2
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
5
R
NR2-36
90max
STOP RESET
60
35
A
H
TEST
NO NC
96 97 96 95
T1 4 T2 6 T3
55max 100max
> >> E-16

Relays
NR2-93
21 21 117max
R
NR2-93
83max
STOP RESET
A
H
TEST
55
NO NC
96 97 96 95
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
72max
50
5 125max
6
1 L1 3 L2 5
R
NR2-93
105max
STOP RESET
35
A
87
H
TEST
NO NC
96 97 96 95
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
75max 5
NR2-150
102max
40 40
37 37
141max
R
NR2-25
STOP RESET
TEST
117 max
70max
E-17 > >>

Relays
NR2-200
181
40±0.16 20
M8 81
1 L1 3 L2 5
109±0.35
160
A
H
8
40 40 56
126
E
NR2-630
215
25/30* 50
M10 12
1 L1 3 L2 5
130±0.35
180/194*
A
H
48/55* 48/55*
44/45*
171 115
Note: Dimension with “*” for the product over 400A.
6. Wiring
Items NR2-11.5 NR2-25 NR2-36 NR2-93 NR2-150 NR2-200 NR2-630

Single core or
Main 1~4 1~4 4~10 4~35 25~95 25~95 70~2×240
stranded wire
circuit
Cross section Wiring screw M3.5 M4 M4 M10 M6/M8 M8 M10
area of
conductor mm
2 Single core or
Auxiliary 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5 0.5~2.5
stranded wire
circuit
Wiring screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
> >> E-18

Relays
7. Accessories
No. Description Application
Incorporate with NR2-11.5

Mounting block for
1 relay to form an independently
NR2-11.5
mounted product
Incorporate with NR2-25

Mounting block for
NR2-25
mounted product

Mounting block for
NR2-36
mounted product

Mounting block for
NR2-93
mounted product
8. Assembly with contactor

Model of Rated (RT16 is recommended) Model of
overload relay current (A) contactor
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4
NC6-09
1.25~2 4 6
NC1-09~18
1.6~2.5 4 6
2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
NR2-11.5
5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4 NC1-09
1.25~2 4 6 NC1-12
1.6~2.5 4 6 NC1-18
2.5~4 6 10 NC1-25
4~6 8 16 NC1-32
NR2-25 5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
12~18 20 35
17~25 25 50
E-19 > >>

Relays

Model of Rated (RT16 is recommended) Model of
overload relay current (A) contactor
aM gG
23~32 40 63
NC1-32
28~36 40 80
NR2-36
23~32 40 63
30~40 40 100 NC1-40
37~50 63 100 NC1-50 E
48~65 63 100 NC1-65
55~70 80 125 NC1-80
63~80 80 125 NC1-95
NR2-93
80~93 100 160
80~104 125 200
NC2-115
95~120 125 224
NC2-150
110~150 160 250

NR2-150
80~125 125 200

NC2-115
NC2-150
100~160 160 250
NC2-185
NC2-225
NR2-200 125~200 200 315
160~250 250 400 NC2-185

NC2-225
200~315 315 500
NC2-265
250~400 400 630 NC2-330
NC2-400
315~500 500 800
NC2-500
NR2-630
400~630 630 800 NC2-630
> >> E-20

Starters
NS2
Manual Motor Starter
Page F-01
NQ2
Direct On-line Starter
Page F-10
NQ3
DOL
Electromagnetic
Starter
Page F-15
Starters
2. Type designation
N S 2 - □ □ /□
Rated current of release
Code of structural modification
Frame size rated current (A)
NS2 Manual Motor Starter Design sequence No.

1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, ESC, UkrSEPRO, GOST, RCC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC690V, 25A, 80A;
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC60947-4-1
AC motor starter
Company code
3. Operating conditions
3.1 Temperature: -5℃～+40℃,
average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃
3.2 Altitude: not exceed 2000m
3.3 Air conditions:
At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the
max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity
is allowable under lower temperature,
for example, RH could be 90% at +20℃
3.4 Pollution grade: Grade Ⅲ
3.5 Release grade:
10A(NS2-25, NS2-25X)
10 (NS2-80B)
3.6 Rated operational system:
Continuous operational system
The inclination between the mounting plane
and the vertical plane shall not exceed 5°
The product shall be installed and operated at a place
without obvious shake, impact and vibration.
C R US LISTED
F-01 > >>

Starters
4. Technical data
4.1 Protection properties
Over-load Protection Properties
Multiple of Expected Ambient

Series No. Initial status Time
setting current results temperature
1 1.05 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +20℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.20 t＜2h Tripping +20℃±2℃
(right after test.1)
Heat status Tripping 10A t＜2min
3 1.50 Tripping +20℃±2℃
(right after test.1) class 10 t＜4min
Tripping 10A 2s＜t≤10s
4 7.20 Cold status Tripping +20℃±2℃
class 10 4s＜t≤10s
Phase failure protection properties
Multiple of setting current Expected Ambient

Series No. Initial status Time results temperature
Any 2 phase The other phase
F
1 1.0 0.9 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +20℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.15 0 t＜2h Tripping +20℃±2℃
Temperature compensation properties
Multiple of Expected Ambient

Series No. Initial status Time
setting current results temperature
1 1.0 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +40℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.2 t＜2h Tripping +40℃±2℃
3 1.05 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping -5℃±2℃
Heat status
4 1.3 t＜2h Tripping -5℃±2℃
> >> F-02

Starters
Model NS2-25, NS2-25X
Picture

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 230/240, 400/415, 440, 500, 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(V) 8000
Regulating rang of setting current (A) 0.1~0.16 0.16~0.25 0.25~0.4 0.4~0.63
Rated current of release 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63
230/240V 100 100 100 100
Rated ultimate 400/415V 100 100 100 100
short-circuit breaking
440V 100 100 100 100
capacity Icu(kA)
480/500V 100 100 100 100
660/690V 100 100 100 100
230/240V 100 100 100 100
400/415V 100 100 100 100
Rated service
short-circuit breaking 440V 100 100 100 100
capacity Ics(kA)
480/500V 100 100 100 100
660/690V 100 100 100 100
Arcing distance (mm) 40 40 40 40
230/240V - - - -
400V - - - -
Standard rated power 415V - - - -
of three-phase motor
(kW) 440V - - - -
500V - - - -
660/690V - - - 0.37
Current setting value of instantaneous
1.5 2.4 5 8
electromagnetic release Ir(A)
aM A ★ ★ ★ ★
230/240V
gl/gG A ★ ★ ★ ★
Current rating of
fuse-link of back-up aM A ★ ★ ★ ★
400/415V
fuse, which is only gl/gG A ★ ★ ★ ★
needed in case of
Icc＞Icu (Icc: prospective aM A ★ ★ ★ ★
440V
short-circuit breaking gl/gG A ★ ★ ★ ★
current)
aM A ★ ★ ★ ★
500V
gl/gG A ★ ★ ★ ★
aM A ★ ★ ★ ★
★: fuse is not required 690V
gl/gG A ★ ★ ★ ★
Degree of protection IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0
F-03 > >>

Starters
NS2-25, NS2-25X
690
230/240, 400/415, 440, 500, 690
8000
0.63~1 1~1.6 1.6~2.5 2.5~4 4~6.3 6~10
1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 50 15
100 100 100 100 50 10 F
100 100 3 3 3 3
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 50 15
100 100 100 100 50 10
100 100 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25
40 40 40 40 40 40
- - 0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2
- 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 4
- - 0.75 1.5 2.2 4
0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4
0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.7 5.5
0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5
13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138
★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★ ★ 50 50
★ ★ ★ ★ 63 63
★ ★ ★ ★ 50 50
★ ★ ★ ★ 63 63
★ ★ 16 25 32 32
★ ★ 20 32 40 40
IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0
> >> F-04

Starters
Model NS2-25, NS2-25X
Picture

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 230/240, 400/415, 440, 500, 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(V) 8000
Regulating rang of setting current (A) 9~14 13~18 17~23 20~25
Rated current of release 14 18 23 25
230/240V 100 100 50 50
Rated ultimate 400/415V 15 15 15 15
short-circuit breaking
440V 8 8 6 6
capacity Icu(kA)
480/500V 6 6 4 4
660/690V 3 3 3 3
230/240V 100 100 50 50
400/415V 7.5 7.5 6 6

Rated service
short-circuit breaking 440V 4 4 3 3
capacity Ics(kA) 3
500V 4.5 4.5 3
660/690V 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25
Arcing distance (mm) 40 40 40 40

230/240V 3 4 5.5 5.5
400V 5.5 7.5 11 11
Standard rated power 415V 5.5 9 11 11
of three-phase motor
(kW) 440V 7.5 9 11 11
500V 7.5 9 11 15
660/690V 9 11 15 18.5
Current setting value of instantaneous
170 223 327 327
electromagnetic release Ir(A)
aM A ★ ★ 80 80
230/240V
gl/gG A ★ ★ 100 100
Current rating of
fuse-link of back-up aM A 63 63 80 80
400/415V
fuse, which is only gl/gG A 80 80 100 100
needed in case of
Icc＞Icu (Icc: prospective aM A 50 50 63 63
440V
short-circuit breaking gl/gG A 63 63 80 80
current)
aM A 50 50 50 50
500V
gl/gG A 63 63 63 63
aM A 40 40 40 40
★: fuse is not required 690V
gl/gG A 50 50 50 50
Degree of Protection IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0
F-05 > >>

Starters
NS2-80B
690
230/240, 400/415
8000
16~25 25~40 40~63 56~80
25 40 63 80
- - - -
15 15 15 15
- - - -
- - - - F
- - - -
- - - -
7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
50 50 50 50
5.5 11 15 22
11 18.5 30 40
11 22 33 45
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
327 480 756 960
★ ★ ★ ★
★ ★ ★ ★
250 250 315 315
315 315 400 400
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0 IP2L0
> >> F-06

Starters
5. Accessories
Rated insulation Voltage range
voltage Ui(V) of operation Model Specification
690 35%~70%Ue NS2-UV110 110~115V 50Hz

690 35%~70%Ue NS2-UV110 127V 60Hz
690 35%~70%Ue NS2-UV220 220~240V 50Hz
690 35%~70%Ue NS2-UV380 380~400V 50Hz
690 35%~70%Ue NS2-UV380 440V 60Hz
5.2 Shunt release
Rated insulation Voltage range

voltage Ui(V) of operation Model Specification
690 70%~110%Ue NS2-SH110 110~115V 50Hz

690 70%~110%Ue NS2-SH110 127V 60Hz
690 70%~110%Ue NS2-SH220 220~240V 50Hz
690 70%~110%Ue NS2-SH380 380~400V 50Hz
690 70%~110%Ue NS2-SH380 440V 60Hz
5.3 Instantaneous auxiliary contact

5.3.1 NS2-AE20, NS2-AE11
Conventional
Rated insulation heating
voltage Ui(V) Model Configuration
current Ith(A)
250 2.5 NS2-AE20 2N/O

250 2.5 NS2-AE11 1N/O+1N/C
Application class, rated operational voltage and tated operational current of instantaneous auxiliary contact
Utilization category AC-15 DC-13
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 24 48 110/127 230/240 24 48 60
Rated operational current Ie(A) 2 1.25 1 0.5 1 0.3 0.15
Normal operational power P(W) 48 60 127 120 24 15 9
5.3.2 NS2-AU20, NS2-AU11

Rated insulation Conventional heating
voltage Ui(V) current Ith(A) Model Configuration
690 6 NS2-AU20 2N/O
690 6 NS2-AU11 1N/O+1N/C
Note: NS2-80B temporarily only has NS2-AU auxiliary contact, which is for NS2-80B special use.
Application class, rated operational voltage and rated operational current of instantaneous auxiliary contact
Utilization category AC-15

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 48 110/127 230/240 380/415 440 500 690
Rated operational current Ie(A) 6 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.5 1 0.6
Utilization category DC-13

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 24 48 60 110 220
Rated operational current Ie(A) 6 5 3 1.3 0.5
Normal operational power P(W) 140 240 180 140 120
F-07 > >>

Starters
5.4 Fault signal contact and instantaneous auxiliary contact
Conventional heating current Ith(A)

Rated insulation
voltage Ui(V) Instantaneous Fault signal Model Configuration
auxiliary contact contact
690 6 2.5 NS2-FA0110 1N/C+1N/O

690 6 2.5 NS2-FA0101 1N/C+1N/C
690 6 2.5 NSE-FA1010 1N/O+1N/O
690 6 2.5 NS2-FA1001 1N/O+1N/C
Application class, rated working voltage and rated operational current of fault signal contact
Application class AC-14 DC-13

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 24 48 110/127 230/240 24 48 60
Rated operational current Ie(A) 1.5 1 0.5 0.3 1 0.3 0.15
Operation features (times) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Capacity of abnormal connection and disconnection of fault signal contact and insrantaneous auxiliary contact
Connection Disconnection
Number of on/off operation cycles
and operation frequency F
Utilization
category
Number of Number of
Cosφ Cosφ On power
I/Ie U/Ue I/Ie U/Ue operation operation
or t0.95 or t0.95 time
cycles cycles per min.
AC-14 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7 10 2 0.05

AC-15 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 10 2 0.05
DC-13 1.1 1.1 6Pe 1.1 1.1 6Pe 10 2 0.05
Note: Pe≥50W, upper limit of T0.95≈6 Pe≤300ms.

5.5 Installation box for NS2-25
NS2-MC Installation box without pushbutton IP55
NS2-MC01 Installation box with emergency

IP55
pushbutton
6. Overall and mounting dimension (mm)
NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-AU20, AU11

NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-FA NS2-SH, UV NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-FA NS2-SH, UV
NS2-AE20, AE11
NS2-AE20, AE11
9.5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

11
9.5
11
25
23
|
NS2-25X
ON
20
20-25A
0 OFF
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 9.3

18
9.3
9.3 9.3 18
81.1
81.1
> >> F-08

Starters
NS2-25X
40
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
25
23 NS2-25X
35.5±0.28
46.5±0.32
|
45±0.32
91.3±0.7
ON
89±0.7
20
20-25A
0 OFF
Test
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

8±0.24
30.8±0.3 44.2±0.8 44.5±0.8
80.5±0.9
94.9±0.9
40
NS2-25 NS2-80B
35.7±0.28
112.5±0.57
14.8±0.35
5±0.12
72.5±0.43 63.5±0.37
14.8±0.55
78±0.43
NS2-MC
5.4
6.3
147.6
130mm
130
( 5.4)
89.3
92.2 93.8
NS2-MC01
5.4
φ6 . 3
147.6
130
(5.4)
89.3
92.2 152.3
F-09 > >>

Starters
2. Type designation
N Q 2 □ □/□
Rated control power code (AC-3, 380V): 1~4
Structure code:
Blank: non- reversing type without pushbutton
P: with pushbutton
N: reversing type
NB: reversing type without thermal relay
Frame level power code
NQ2 Direct On-line Starter F

1. General
1.1 NQ2 series electromagnetic starter Design sequence No.
( "starter" for short hereinafter) applies mainly to
circuit with AC current of 50Hz (or 60Hz),
rated operational voltage of 660V
and rated controlled power up to 33kW
(current up to 68A)
for using to control the direct start Starter
and halt of the electromotor to protect the motor
from overload and phase failure.
1.2 The starter conforms to standards IEC/EN60947-4-1
Company code
> >> F-10

Starters
3. Technical data
3.1 NQ2-15, 33
Conventional Rated Rated power (AC-3) Model of Model of Range of
heating operational (kW) matched matched setting
Model
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.63~1
NQ2-15/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25 1~1.6
1.25~2
1.6~2.5
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ2-15/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810 12~18
NQ2-15/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36
23~32
NQ2-33/1 52 52 33 25 15 NC1-6511 30~40
NR2-93 37~50
48~65
55~70
NQ2-33/2 68 68 37 33 25 NC1-9511
63~80
3.2 NQ2-15P, 33P

Conventional Rated Rated power (AC-3) Model of Model of Model of Range of
heating operational (kW) matched matched matched setting
Model
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay pushbutton current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.63~1
NQ2-15P/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25 Start: 1~1.6
NP2-EA31 1.25~2
1.6~2.5
Stop: 2.5~4
NP2-EA42 4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ2-15P/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810 12~18
NQ2-15P/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15P/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36
23~32
30~40
NQ2-33P/1 52 52 33 25 15 NC1-6511
37~50
NR2-93 48~65
55~70
NQ2-33P/2 68 68 37 33 25 NC1-9511
63~80
F-11 > >>

Starters
3.3 NQ2-15 N
Conventional Rated Rated power (AC-3) Model of Model of Range of
heating operational (kW) matched matched setting
Model
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.63~1
1~1.6
1.25~2
NQ2-15N/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25 1.6~2.5
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ2-15N/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810 12~18
NQ2-15N/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15N/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36 F
3.4 NQ2-15NB
Conventional Rated Rated power (AC-3) Model of
Model heating operational (kW) matched
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor
660V 380V 220V
NQ2-15NB/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1201N
NQ2-15NB/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1801N
NQ2-15NB/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2501N
NQ2-15NB/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3201N
Altitude: not exceeding 2000m; Temperature of ambient air: -5℃~+40℃

Rated control supply voltage (AC 50Hz): 24V, 36V, 48V, 110V, 127V, 220V, 380V, 415V
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 circles; Electric life: 500,000 circles; IP40

NQ2-15
3×φ6
> >> F-12

Starters
NQ2-15P
3×φ6
NQ2-15N
3×φ6
NQ2-15NB
3×φ6
NQ2-33
296max
205
162max 105 4×φ6.2
167max
F-13 > >>

Starters
NQ2-33P
296max
205
172max 105 4×φ6.2
167max
5. Wiring Diagram
L1 L3 L5 L1 L3 L5
F
FU1 FU1
connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR
KM FR KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM KM FR KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U V W U V W
M M
Control supply voltage is as the same as Control supply voltage is not as the same as
the main circuit voltage (three-phrase) the main circuit voltage (three-phrase)
L N L N
FU1 FU1
Connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR FR
KM KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM FR KM
KM KM
2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2
U1 U2 U1 U2
M M
the main circuit voltage (single-phrase) the main circuit voltage (single-phrase)
> >> F-14

Starters
2. Type designation
NQ3- □ P
Code of structure characteristic:

P means with buttons
Code of power grade of the bracket
NQ3 Series Design code name
DOL Electromagnetic Starter

1. General
1.1 NQ3 series electromagnetic starter
( "starter" for short hereinafter) applies mainly to
circuit with AC current of 50Hz (or 60Hz),
rated operational voltage of 660V
and rated controlled power up to 11kW
Electromagnetic starter
(current up to 22A)
for using to control the direct start
and halt of the electromotor to protect the motor
from overload and phase failure.
1.2 The starter conforms to standards IEC/EN60947-4-1
Characteristic code of the enterprise
3. Technical data
Altitude: not exceeding 2000m;
Temperature of ambient air: -5℃~+40℃
Rated control supply voltage (AC 50Hz):
24V, 36V, 48V, 110V, 127V, 220V, 380V, 415V
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 circles;
Electric life: 500,000 circles;
IP55
F-15 > >>

Starters
Table 1 Basic Model and main technical parameter of the starter
Maximum rated Power (kW) Model of Range of

Rated working
Model AC-3 equipped TOR matched setting current
current (A)
AC contactor A
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.4~0.63
0.63~1
NQ3-5.5P 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1810 NR2-25
1~1.6
1.25~2
1.6~2.5
F
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ3-11P 22 15 11 5.5 NC1-3210 12~18
17~25
4. Overall and mounting dimension (mm)
NQ3-5.5P
NQ3-5.5P
Ie A spec sign
0.1
0.1 60.2
60.2 5
5 0.6
0.63 1 START
31
1.2 2
5
4
4 6
8
166max
7 10
130
9 13
12 18
17 25 STOP
Rated Voltage V 50Hz spec sign
36
110
220
380
Standard EN60947-4-1
IEC60947-4-1
degree of protection IP55
ZHEJIANGCHINTELECTRICSCO.,LTD
125max 60
3×Φ6
96max
> >> F-16

Starters
NQ3-11P
NQ3-11P
Ie A specsign
0.6 1
31
1.2 2
5
4
196max
4 6
150
8
7 10
9 13
12 18
17 25
23 32
Rated Voltage V 50Hz specsign
36
110
220
380
Standard EN60947-4-1
IEC60947-4-1
degree of protection
IP55
ZHE JIANG CHINT ELECTRICSCO.,LTD
130max 60
116max 3×Φ6
5. Wiring Diagram
L1 L3 L5 L1 L3 L5
FU1 FU1
connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR
KM FR KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM KM FR KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U V W U V W
M M
the main circuit voltage (three-phrase) the main circuit voltage (three-phrase)
L N L N
FU1 FU1
Connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR FR
KM KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM FR KM
KM KM
2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2
U1 U2 U1 U2
M M
the main circuit voltage (single-phrase) the main circuit voltage (single-phrase)
F-17 > >>

Starters
6. Picture
NQ3-5.5P
NQ3-11P
> >> F-18

Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & Buzzers
Pushbuttons
NP8
Page G-02
NP2
Page G-15
NP6
Page G-33
NP3
Page G-38
NPH1
Page G-43
Indicator Lights / Buzzers
ND16
Page G-46
Drill Plan Picture Index Certificates IP Product Model
C US
(only for IP40 NP2 Series

compound type)
φ22.3mm
NP8 Series
IP54
NPH1 Pushbutton Box
φ16mm IP40 NP6 Series
R
IP40
C US ND16 Series
IP65
φ22.3mm
IP20 ND16 Buzzer

G
NP3 Series
IP65
Pendant Station
2 positions 2 positions
Selector Maintained Momentary Key-operated Maintained Maintained Momentary

Switches selector
Switches
Key Free
3 positions 3 positions
Maintained Momentary Maintained Maintained Momentary
Colors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
White Black Green Red Yellow Blue Orange

Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers
Pushbuttons
Mushroom button, Mushroom button, self-locking,

Flushbutton Projecting button
self-reset rotate to reset
NP8-□□BN/□ NP8-□□GN/□
NP8-□□M/□ NP8-□□ZS/□□
P03 P04 P05 P07
Illuminated mushroom Illuminated double- Selector switch Illuminated Selector Key switch
button, self-reset head button NP8-□□×/□□ switch NP8-□ Y/□□
NP8-□□MD/□□ NP8-□□SD NP8-□□×D/□
P06 P08 P09 P11 P11
Double-head button Illuminated flush button Illuminated projecting Indicator light

NP8-□□S NP8-□BND/□ button NP8-D/□
NP8-□□GND/□
P08 P03 P04 P09
G-01 > >>

Pushbuttons
2. Working & mounting conditions
2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃, the average

temperature during 24 hours couldn't exceed +35℃.
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m.
2.3 Atmosphere condition: Relative humidity of the atmosphere
couldn't exceed 50% when the highest temperature is
+40℃; much higher relative humidity is allowable under
the condition of lower temperature, for example,
when the temperature reaches +20℃, the relatice humidity
is up to 90%. As for dews,
which contingently appear due to change of temperature,
special steeps should be taken.
2.5 Installation category: Ⅱ
3. Technical data
3.1 Refer to table below for rated values
related to utilization category.
Rated operational voltage, V 415 240 120

AC-15
Rated operational current, A 1.9 3 6
NP8 22mm Pushbutton DC-13
Rated operational voltage, V 250 125 -
Compound Models Rated operational current, A 0.27 0.55 -
1. General information 3.2 Refer to table 3
Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC415V/DC250V;

for basic parameters of illuminated pushbutton. G
Degree of protection: IP54 Basic parameters LED lamp
Standard: IEC/EN60947-5-1
Rated operational current ≤20mA
Rated operational voltage AC/DC 6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
3.3 Durability
Mechanical life:
Flush, mushroom-headed and illuminated version:
3×106 operation circles.
Rotary, double-headed, self-locking and keyed version:
Electric life:
Flush, mushroom-headed and illuminated version:
AC 1×106 / DC 2.5×105 operation circles.
Rotary, double-headed, self-locking and key type button:
5
4. Features
4.1 Operating mechanism features
bright colors and streamline surface.
4.2 Modular design.
Operating system, adapter, contact system
and illuminating system can be freely combined
to realize different functions.
4.3 Convenient for mounting
and dismounting thanks to snap-on structure.
4.4 Automatic locking function of the central adaptor
makes it convenient and reliable
for mounting and connection.
4.5 The terminal screw is available
with anti-loosing mechanism to protect it
against loosening from the body during transportation.
4.6 LED lamp with high brightness and long service life
ensures reliable indication.
> >> G-02

Pushbuttons
5. NP8 pushbutton NP8-□□
Model Color
BN/ □□
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated) NP8-30BN/1 3 —
NP8-30BN/2 3 —
NP8-□□ NP8-30BN/3 3 —
Model Color
BN/ □□ NP8-30BN/4 3 —
NP8-10BN/1 1 — NP8-30BN/5 3 —
NP8-10BN/2 1 — NP8-30BN/6 3 —
NP8-10BN/3 1 — NP8-03BN/1 — 3
NP8-10BN/4 1 — NP8-03BN/2 — 3
NP8-10BN/5 1 — NP8-03BN/3 — 3
NP8-10BN/6 1 — NP8-03BN/4 — 3
NP8-01BN/1 — 1 NP8-03BN/5 — 3
NP8-01BN/2 — 1
NP8-03BN/6 — 3
NP8-01BN/3 — 1
NP8-12BN/1 1 2
NP8-01BN/4 — 1
NP8-01BN/5 — 1 NP8-12BN/2 1 2
NP8-01BN/6 — 1 NP8-12BN/3 1 2
NP8-20BN/1 2 — NP8-12BN/4 1 2
NP8-20BN/2 2 —
NP8-12BN/5 1 2
NP8-20BN/3 2 —
NP8-20BN/4 2 — NP8-12BN/6 1 2
NP8-20BN/5 2 — NP8-21BN/1 2 1
NP8-20BN/6 2 — NP8-21BN/2 2 1
NP8-02BN/1 — 2
NP8-21BN/3 2 1
NP8-02BN/2 — 2
NP8-02BN/3 — 2 NP8-21BN/4 2 1
NP8-02BN/4 — 2 NP8-21BN/5 2 1
NP8-02BN/5 — 2 NP8-21BN/6 2 1
NP8-02BN/6 — 2
NP8-11BN/1 1 1 Dimension (mm)
NP8-11BN/2 1 1 13
NP8-□□BN/□
NP8-11BN/3 1 1
NP8-11BN/4 1 1
NP8-11BN/5 1 1
31max
NP8-11BN/6 1 1
61max
46max
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-illuminated
AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-□□ NP8-□□
Model Color Model Color
BND/ □□ BND/ □□
NP8-10BND/1 1 — NP8-20BND/1 2 —
NP8-10BND/3 1 — NP8-20BND/3 2 —
NP8-10BND/4 1 — NP8-20BND/4 2 —
NP8-10BND/5 1 — NP8-20BND/5 2 —
NP8-10BND/6 1 — NP8-20BND/6 2 —
NP8-01BND/1 — 1 NP8-02BND/1 — 2
NP8-01BND/3 — 1 NP8-02BND/3 — 2
NP8-01BND/4 — 1 NP8-02BND/4 — 2
NP8-01BND/5 — 1 NP8-02BND/5 — 2
NP8-01BND/6 — 1 NP8-02BND/6 — 2
Dimension (mm) NP8-11BND/1 1 1
13 NP8-11BND/3 1 1
NP8-□□BND/□
NP8-11BND/4 1 1
NP8-11BND/5 1 1
NP8-11BND/6 1 1
31max
46max
61max
G-03 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated) NP8-□□
Model Color
GN/ □□
NP8-□□ NP8-30GN/1 3 —
Model Color
GN/ □□ NP8-30GN/2 3 —
NP8-10GN/1 1 — NP8-30GN/3 3 —
NP8-10GN/2 1 — NP8-30GN/4 3 —
NP8-10GN/3 1 — NP8-30GN/5 3 —
NP8-10GN/4 1 — NP8-30GN/6 3 —
NP8-10GN/5 1 — NP8-03GN/1 — 3
NP8-10GN/6 1 — NP8-03GN/2 — 3
NP8-01GN/1 — 1 NP8-03GN/3 — 3
NP8-30GN/4 3 —
NP8-01GN/2 — 1
NP8-30GN/5 3 —
NP8-01GN/3 — 1
NP8-30GN/6 3 —
NP8-01GN/4 — 1
NP8-03GN/1 — 3
NP8-01GN/5 — 1
NP8-03GN/2 — 3
NP8-01GN/6 — 1
NP8-03GN/3 — 3
NP8-20GN/1 2 —
NP8-03GN/4 — 3
NP8-20GN/2 2 —
NP8-03GN/5 — 3
NP8-20GN/3 2 —
NP8-03GN/6 — 3
NP8-20GN/4 2 —
NP8-12GN/1 1 2
NP8-20GN/5 2 —
NP8-12GN/2 1 2
NP8-20GN/6 2 —
NP8-12GN/3 1 2
NP8-02GN/1 — 2
NP8-12GN/4 1 2
NP8-02GN/2 — 2
NP8-12GN/5 1 2
NP8-02GN/3 — 2
NP8-12GN/6 1 2
NP8-02GN/4 — 2
NP8-21GN/1 2 1
NP8-02GN/5 — 2
NP8-21GN/2 2 1
NP8-02GN/6 — 2
NP8-11GN/1 1 1
NP8-21GN/3
NP8-21GN/4
2
2
1
1
G
NP8-11GN/2 1 1
NP8-21GN/5 2 1
NP8-11GN/3 1 1
NP8-21GN/6 2 1
NP8-11GN/4 1 1
NP8-11GN/5 1 1
NP8-11GN/6 1 1 Dimension (mm)
20
31max NP8-□□GN/□
46max
69max
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-illuminated

AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-□□ NP8-□□
GND/ □□ GND/ □□
NP8-10GND/1 1 — NP8-20GND/1 2 —
NP8-10GND/3 1 — NP8-20GND/3 2 —
NP8-10GND/4 1 — NP8-20GND/4 2 —
NP8-10GND/5 1 — NP8-20GND/5 2 —
NP8-10GND/6 1 — NP8-20GND/6 2 —
NP8-01GND/1 — 1 NP8-02GND/1 — 2
NP8-01GND/3 — 1 NP8-02GND/3 — 2
NP8-01GND/4 — 1 NP8-02GND/4 — 2
NP8-01GND/5 — 1 NP8-02GND/5 — 2
NP8-01GND/6 — 1 NP8-02GND/6 — 2
NP8-11GND/1 1 1
Dimension (mm) NP8-11GND/3 1 1
NP8-11GND/4 1 1
20
NP8-□□GND/□ NP8-11GND/5 1 1
NP8-11GND/6 1 1
31max
46max
69max
> >> G-04

Pushbuttons
★ φ40 Momentary Mushroom button-(Non illuminated) NP8-□□
Model Color
M/ □□
NP8-□□ NP8-03M/14 — 3
Model Color
M/ □□
NP8-03M/15 — 3
NP8-10M/11 1 —
NP8-03M/16 — 3
NP8-10M/12 1 —
NP8-12M/11 1 2
NP8-10M/13 1 —
NP8-12M/12 1 2
NP8-10M/14 1 —
NP8-12M/13 1 2
NP8-10M/15 1 —
NP8-12M/14 1 2
NP8-10M/16 1 —
NP8-12M/15 1 2
NP8-01M/11 — 1
NP8-12M/16 1 2
NP8-01M/12 — 1
NP8-21M/11 2 1
NP8-01M/13 — 1
NP8-21M/12 2 1
NP8-01M/14 — 1
NP8-21M/13 2 1
NP8-01M/15 — 1
NP8-21M/14 2 1
NP8-01M/16 — 1
NP8-21M/15 2 1
NP8-20M/11 2 —
NP8-21M/16 2 1
NP8-20M/12 2 —
NP8-20M/13 2 —
NP8-20M/14 2 — ★ φ60 Momentary Mushroom button-(Non illuminated)
NP8-20M/15 2 —
NP8-20M/16 2 — NP8-□□
Model Color
M/ □□
NP8-02M/11 — 2
NP8-10M/21 1 —
NP8-02M/12 — 2
NP8-10M/22 1 —
NP8-02M/13 — 2
NP8-10M/23 1 —
NP8-02M/14 — 2
NP8-10M/24 1 —
NP8-02M/15 — 2
NP8-10M/25 1 —
NP8-02M/16 — 2
NP8-10M/26 1 —
NP8-11M/11 1 1
NP8-01M/21 — 1
NP8-11M/12 1 1
NP8-01M/22 — 1
NP8-11M/13 1 1
NP8-01M/23 — 1
NP8-11M/14 1 1
NP8-01M/24 — 1
NP8-11M/15 1 1 1 CONTACT BLOCK
(Non-illuminated) NP8-01M/25 — 1
NP8-11M/16 1 1
NP8-01M/26 — 1
NP8-30M/11 3 —
NP8-20M/21 2 —
NP8-30M/12 3 —
NP8-20M/22 2 —
NP8-30M/13 3 —
NP8-20M/23 2 —
NP8-30M/14 3 —
NP8-20M/24 2 —
NP8-30M/15 3 —
NP8-20M/25 2 —
NP8-30M/16 3 —
NP8-20M/26 2 —
NP8-03M/11 — 3
NP8-02M/21 — 2
NP8-03M/12 — 3
NP8-02M/22 — 2
NP8-03M/13 — 3
G-05 > >>

Pushbuttons
NP8-□□ ★ φ40 Momentary Mushroom button-illuminated
Model Color AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
M/ □□
NP8-02M/23 — 2
NP8-□□
NP8-02M/24 — 2 Model Color
MD/ □□
NP8-02M/25 — 2
NP8-10MD/11 1 —
NP8-02M/26 — 2
NP8-10MD/13 1 —
NP8-11M/21 1 1
NP8-10MD/14 1 —
NP8-11M/22 1 1
NP8-10MD/15 1 —
NP8-11M/23 1 1
NP8-10MD/16 1 —
NP8-11M/24 1 1
NP8-01MD/11 — 1
NP8-11M/25 1 1
NP8-01MD/13 — 1
NP8-11M/26 1 1
NP8-01MD/14 — 1
NP8-30M/21 3 —
NP8-01MD/15 — 1
NP8-30M/22 3 —
NP8-01MD/16 — 1
NP8-30M/23 3 —
NP8-20MD/11 2 —
NP8-30M/24 3 —
NP8-20MD/13 2 —
NP8-30M/25 3 —
NP8-20MD/14 2 —
NP8-30M/26 3 —
NP8-20MD/15 2 —
NP8-03M/21 — 3
NP8-20MD/16 2 —
NP8-03M/22 — 3
NP8-02MD/11 — 2
NP8-03M/23 — 3
NP8-02MD/13 — 2
NP8-03M/24
NP8-03M/25
—
—
3
3
NP8-02MD/14 — 2 G
NP8-02MD/15 — 2
NP8-03M/26 — 3
NP8-02MD/16 — 2
NP8-12M/21 1 2
NP8-11MD/11 1 1
NP8-12M/22 1 2
NP8-11MD/13 1 1
NP8-12M/23 1 2
NP8-11MD/14 1 1
NP8-12M/24 1 2
NP8-11MD/15 1 1
NP8-12M/25 1 2
NP8-11MD/16 1 1
NP8-12M/26 1 2
NP8-21M/21 2 1
NP8-21M/22 2 1
NP8-21M/23 2 1 ★ φ60 Momentary Mushroom button-illuminated
AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-21M/24 2 1
NP8-21M/25 2 1
NP8-□□
NP8-21M/26 2 1 Model Color
MD/ □□
NP8-10MD/11 1 —
Dimension (mm) NP8-10MD/13 1 —

NP8-10MD/14 1 —
NP8-□□M/□ NP8-10MD/15 1 —
41(61)max
28 1 CONTACT BLOCK NP8-10MD/16 1 —

(Non-illuminated) NP8-01MD/11 — 1
NP8-01MD/13 — 1
NP8-01MD/14 — 1
31max
NP8-01MD/15 — 1
NP8-01MD/16 — 1
75max
46max
> >> G-06

Pushbuttons
★ φ40 Mushroom button-(Non illuminated) Maintained

NP8-□□
Model Color
MD/ □□
NP8-□□
NP8-20MD/11 2 — Model Color
ZS/ □□
NP8-20MD/13 2 —
NP8-20MD/14 2 — NP8-10ZS/14 1 —
NP8-20MD/15 2 —
NP8-20MD/16 2 — NP8-01ZS/14 — 1
NP8-02MD/11 — 2
NP8-02MD/13 — 2
2 CONTACT BLOCK
NP8-02MD/14 — 2 NP8-□□
(Non-illuminated) Model Color
NP8-02MD/15 — 2 ZS/ □□
NP8-02MD/16 — 2
NP8-20ZS/14 2 —
NP8-11MD/11 1 1
NP8-11MD/13 1 1
NP8-02ZS/14 — 2
NP8-11MD/14 1 1
NP8-11MD/15 1 1
NP8-11ZS/14 1 1
NP8-11MD/16 1 1
Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□MD/□
41(61)max
28
★ φ60 Mushroom button-(Non illuminated) Maintained
NP8-□□
31max
Model Color
ZS/ □□
75max
46max
NP8-10ZS/24 1 —
NP8-01ZS/24 — 1
NP8-20ZS/24 2 —
G-07 > >>

Pushbuttons
Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□ NP8-□□ZS/□
Model Color
ZS/ □□ 35
φ61(41)max
NP8-02ZS/24 — 2
NP8-11ZS/24 2 1
83max
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Non-illuminated)
NP8- □□ S Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP8-20S + 2 —
Non-illuminated NP8-02S + — 2
NP8-11S + 1 1
G
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated)
NP8- □□ SD Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP8-20SD + 2 —
LED: AC/DC 6V,

12V, 24V, 36V; NP8-02SD + — 2
AC 110V,230V
NP8-11SD + 1 1
Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□S/□ NP8-□□SD/□
31max
31max
61max 56max 61max 56max
> >> G-08

Pushbuttons
Dimension (mm)
★ Indicator
15 NP8-D/□
NP8-D/ □ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP8-D/1
31max
LED: AC/AD 6V, NP8-D/3
12V, 24V, 36V; NP8-D/4
AC110V, 230V NP8-D/5 46max
62max
NP8-D/6
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP8- □□ Selector NP8- □□ Selector

Metal Color Metal Color
X/ □ Switches X/22 □ Switches
NP8-10X/211 1 — NP8-20X/221 2 —
NP8-10X/212 1 — NP8-20X/222 2 —
NP8-10X/213 1 — NP8-20X/223 2 —
NP8-10X/214 1 — NP8-20X/224 2 —
NP8-10X/215 1 — NP8-20X/225 2 —
NP8-10X/216 1 — NP8-20X/226 2 —
NP8-01X/211 — 1 NP8-02X/221 — 2
NP8-01X/212 — 1 NP8-02X/222 — 2
NP8-01X/213 — 1 NP8-02X/223 — 2
NP8-01X/214 — 1 NP8-02X/224 — 2
NP8-01X/215 — 1 NP8-02X/225 — 2
NP8-01X/216 — 1 NP8-02X/226 — 2
NP8-11X/221 1 1
NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Color NP8-11X/222 1 1
X/22□ Switches
NP8-11X/223 1 1
NP8-10X/221 1 — NP8-11X/224 1 1
NP8-10X/222 1 — NP8-11X/225 1 1
NP8-10X/223 1 — NP8-11X/226 1 1
NP8-10X/224 1 —
NP8-10X/225 1 —
NP8-10X/226 1 —
NP8-01X/221 — 1
★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP8-01X/222 — 1
NP8-01X/223 — 1 NP8- □□ Selector
NP8-01X/224 — 1 Metal Color
X/ □ Switches
NP8-01X/225 — 1
— NP8-20X/311 2 —
NP8-01X/226 1
NP8-20X/312 2 —
Metal Color NP8-20X/313 2 —
X/ □ Switches
NP8-20X/314 2 —
NP8-20X/211 2 —
NP8-20X/315 2 —
NP8-20X/212 2 —
NP8-20X/213 2 — NP8-20X/316 2 —
NP8-20X/214 2 — NP8-02X/311 — 2
NP8-20X/215 2 — NP8-02X/312 — 2
NP8-20X/216 2 —
NP8-02X/313 — 2
NP8-02X/211 — 2
NP8-02X/212 — 2 NP8-02X/314 — 2
NP8-02X/213 — 2 NP8-02X/315 — 2
NP8-02X/214 — 2
NP8-02X/316 — 2
NP8-02X/215 — 2
NP8-11X/311 1 1
NP8-02X/216 — 2
NP8-11X/211 1 1 NP8-11X/312 1 1
NP8-11X/212 1 1 NP8-11X/313 1 1
NP8-11X/213 1 1
NP8-11X/314 1 1
NP8-11X/214 1 1
NP8-11X/215 1 1 NP8-11X/315 1 1
NP8-11X/216 1 1 NP8-11X/316 1 1
G-09 > >>

Pushbuttons
NP8- □□ Selector Dimension (mm)
Metal Color
X/33 □ Switches
NP8-□□X/□
NP8-20X/331 2 —
NP8-20X/332 2 —
NP8-20X/333 2 —
31max
NP8-20X/334 2 —
NP8-20X/335 2 —
NP8-20X/336 2 — 46max
75max
NP8-02X/331 — 2
NP8-02X/332 — 2
NP8-02X/333 — 2
NP8-02X/334 — 2
NP8-02X/335 — 2
NP8-02X/336 — 2
NP8-11X/331 1 1
NP8-11X/332 1 1
NP8-11X/333 1 1
NP8-11X/334 1 1
NP8-11X/335 1 1
NP8-11X/336 1 1
Metal Color
X/37 □ Switches
NP8-20X/371 2 —
NP8-20X/372 2 —
NP8-20X/373 2 —
NP8-20X/374 2 —
NP8-20X/375 2 —
NP8-20X/376 2 —
NP8-02X/371 — 2
NP8-02X/372 — 2
NP8-02X/373 — 2
NP8-02X/374 — 2 G
NP8-02X/375 — 2
NP8-02X/376 — 2
NP8-11X/371 1 1
NP8-11X/372 1 1
NP8-11X/373 1 1
NP8-11X/374 1 1
NP8-11X/375 1 1
NP8-11X/376 1 1
Metal Color
X/38 □ Switches
NP8-20X/381 2 —
NP8-20X/382 2 —
NP8-20X/383 2 —
NP8-20X/384 2 —
NP8-20X/385 2 —
NP8-20X/386 2 —
NP8-02X/381 — 2
NP8-02X/382 — 2
NP8-02X/383 — 2
NP8-02X/384 — 2
NP8-02X/385 — 2
NP8-02X/386 — 2
NP8-11X/381 1 1
NP8-11X/382 1 1
NP8-11X/383 1 1
NP8-11X/384 1 1
NP8-11X/385 1 1
NP8-11X/386 1 1
> >> G-10

Pushbuttons
★ Selector Switches (2 positions) -(Illuminated) ★ Selector Switches With key (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-□□ Selector
Metal
NP8- □□ Selector Y/□ Switches
Metal Color
XD/ □ Switches
NP8-10Y/21 1 —
NP8-10XD/211 1 —
NP8-10XD/213 1 —
NP8-10XD/214 1 — NP8-01Y/21 — 1
NP8-10XD/215 1 —
NP8-10XD/216 1 — NP8-□□ Selector
NP8-01XD/211 — 1 Metal
Y/22 Switches
NP8-01XD/213 — 1
NP8-01XD/214 — 1 NP8-10Y/22 1 —
NP8-01XD/215 — 1
NP8-01XD/216 — 1 NP8-01Y/22 — 1
Metal Color
XD/22□ Switches
NP8-□□ Selector
NP8-10XD/221 1 — Metal
Y/□ Switches
NP8-10XD/223 1 —
NP8-10XD/224 1 — NP8-20Y/21 2 —
NP8-10XD/225 1 —
NP8-10XD/226 1 — NP8-02Y/21 — 2
NP8-01XD/221 — 1
NP8-01XD/23 — 1 NP8-11Y/21 1 1
NP8-01XD/24 — 1
NP8-01XD/25 — 1 NP8-□□ Selector
— Metal
NP8-01XD/26 1 Y/22 Switches
Metal Color NP8-20Y/22 2 —
XD/ □ Switches
NP8-20XD/211 2 —
2 — NP8-02Y/22 — 2
NP8-20XD/213
NP8-20XD/214 2 —
NP8-20XD/215 2 — NP8-11Y/22 1 1
NP8-20XD/216 2 —
NP8-02XD/211 — 2
NP8-02XD/213 — 2 ★ Selector Switches (3 positions) -(Illuminated)
NP8-02XD/214 — 2 AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-02XD/215 — 2
NP8-02XD/216 — 2 NP8- □□ Selector
NP8-11XD/211 1 1 Metal Color
XD/ □ Switches
NP8-11XD/213 1 1
NP8-11XD/214 NP8-20XD/311 2 —
1 1
NP8-11XD/215 1 1 NP8-20XD/313 2 —
NP8-11XD/216 1 1 NP8-20XD/314 2 —
Metal Color NP8-20XD/315 2 —
XD/22□ Switches
NP8-20XD/316 2 —
NP8-20XD/221
NP8-20XD/223 NP8-02XD/311 — 2
NP8-20XD/224 NP8-02XD/313 — 2
NP8-20XD/225 NP8-02XD/314 — 2
NP8-20XD/226
NP8-02XD/315 — 2
NP8-02XD/221
NP8-02XD/316 — 2
NP8-02XD/223
NP8-02XD/224 NP8-11XD/311 1 1
NP8-02XD/225 NP8-11XD/313 1 1
NP8-02XD/226
NP8-11XD/314 1 1
NP8-11XD/221
NP8-11XD/315 1 1
NP8-11XD/223
NP8-11XD/224 NP8-11XD/316 1 1
NP8-11XD/225
NP8-11XD/226
G-11 > >>

Pushbuttons
Dimension (mm)
NP8- □□ Selector 30 NP8-□□XD/□

Metal Color
XD/33□ Switches
NP8-20XD/331 2 —
31max
NP8-20XD/333 2 —
NP8-20XD/334 2 —
NP8-20XD/335 2 —
2 46max
NP8-20XD/336 — 75max
NP8-02XD/331 — 2
NP8-02XD/333 — 2
NP8-02XD/334 — 2
NP8-02XD/335 — 2 ★ Selector Switches With key (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP8-02XD/336 — 2
NP8-11XD/331 1 1 NP8-□□ Selector
Metal
NP8-11XD/333 1 1 Y/□ Switches
NP8-11XD/334 1 1
NP8-11XD/335 1 1 NP8-20Y/31 2 —
NP8-11XD/336 1 1
NP8- □□ Selector NP8-02Y/31 — 2
Metal Color
XD/37□ Switches
NP8-20XD/371 2 —
NP8-20XD/373 2 — NP8-11Y/31 1 1
NP8-20XD/374 2 —
NP8-20XD/375 2 — NP8-□□ Selector
Metal
2 — Y/33 Switches
NP8-20XD/376
NP8-02XD/371 — 2 NP8-20Y/33 2 — G
NP8-02XD/373 — 2
NP8-02XD/374 — 2
NP8-02Y/33 — 2
NP8-02XD/375 — 2
NP8-02XD/376 — 2
NP8-11XD/371 1 1 NP8-11Y/33 1 1
NP8-11XD/373 1 1
NP8-□□ Selector
NP8-11XD/374 1 1 Metal
Y/37 Switches
NP8-11XD/375 1 1
NP8-11XD/376 1 1 NP8-20Y/37 2 —
Metal Color
XD/38□ Switches —
NP8-02Y/37 2
NP8-20XD/381 2 —
NP8-20XD/383 2 —
NP8-20XD/384 2 — NP8-11Y/37 1 1
NP8-20XD/385 2 —
— NP8-□□ Selector
NP8-20XD/386 2 Metal
— Y/38 Switches
NP8-02XD/381 2
NP8-02XD/383 — 2 NP8-20Y/38 2 —
NP8-02XD/384 — 2
NP8-02XD/385 — 2
NP8-02Y/38 — 2
NP8-02XD/386 — 2
NP8-11XD/381 1 1
NP8-11XD/383 1 1 NP8-11Y/38 1 1
NP8-11XD/384 1 1
NP8-11XD/385 1 1
NP8-11XD/386 1 1 Dimension (mm)
43 NP8-□□Y/□
17
31max
86max 46max
> >> G-12

Pushbuttons
★ Metal-headed
Flushbutton φ40mm φ60mm Mushroom button, Selector button with Selector button with
NP2-BA □□ mushroom button mushroom button stay-up,rotated to reset rotary knob rotary handle
NP2-BC □□ NP2-BR □□ NP2-BS □□ NP2-BD □□ NP2-BJ □□
P16 P19 P19 P20 P21 P21
Key switch Double-headed Illuminated button Illuminated double- Indicator light

NP2-BG □□ button NP2-BW3 □□□ headed button NP2-BV □□
NP2-BL8 □□□ NP2-BW8 □□□
P21 P29 P29 P29 P29
★ Plastic-headed
Flushbutton φ40mm φ60mm Mushroom button, stay-up, Selector button Selector button with
NP2-EA □□ mushroom button mushroom button rotated to reset with rotary knob rotary handle
NP2-EC □□ NP2-ER □□ NP2-ES □□ NP2-ED □□ NP2-EJ □□
P22 P24 P24 P26 P27 P27
Key switch Double-headed Illuminated Illuminated Indicator light Economic indicator

NP2-EG □□ button button double-headed button NP2-EV □□ light
NP2-EL8 □□□ NP2-EW3 □□□ NP2-EW8 □□□ NP2-EV1 □□
P28 P25 P23 P25 P26 P27
Seperated modulars Head

★ Head-metal
Flush button Illuminated button Illuminated button Selector switch Key switch
NP2-BA □ NP2-BW3 □ NP2-EW3 □ NP2-BD □ NP2-BG □
P29 P29 P29 P30 P30
G-13 > >>

Pushbuttons
Double-headed NP2-BL842 Illuminated Illuminated double- Indicator light

button button headed button NP2-BV/□
NP2-BL832 NP2-BW3 □ NP2-BW84
P29 P29 P29 P29 P29
★ Head-plastic
Flush button Selector switch Illuminated Indicator light

NP2-EA □ NP2-ED □ button NP2-EV/□
NP2-EW3□
P29 P30 P29 P29
G
Double- Double- Illuminated
headed button headed button double-headed button Key switch
NP2-EL832 NP2-EL842 NP2-EW84 NP2-EG □
P29 P29 P29 P30
Adaptor
Metal Plastic Base
NP2-BZ009 NP2-EZ009 NP2-EW4 NP2-EW6 NP2-EV4 NP2-EV6

P30 P30 P31 P31 P31 P31
Accessories
Bulbs Warning Label Water-proof enclosure
BA9s φ60 φ90 For NP2-BP For NP2-BA For NP2-BL832 For NP2-BL842
P31 P30 P30 P31 P31 P31 P31
> >> G-14

Pushbuttons
2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃,
the average temperature during 24 hours
couldn't exceed +35℃.
2.3 Atmosphere condition: Relative humidity of
the atmosphere couldn't exceed 50%
when the highest temperature is +40℃;
much higher relative humidity is allowable
under the condition of lower temperature,
for example, when the temperature reaches +20℃,
the relative humidity is up to 90%.
As for dews, which contingently appear due to
change of temperature,
special steps should be taken.
2.5 Overvoltage category: Ⅱ
3. Technical data
3.1 Rated insulation voltage Ui : 415V
3.2 Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Rated operational Rated operational current Ie (A)
NP2 Pilot Device voltage Ue (V) AC-15 DC-13

415 1.9 -
1. General information
240 3 0.27
Degree of protection: IP40 125 - 0.55
3.3 Durability
Electric life: Flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
AC 5×105 operation circles, DC 2×105 operation circles;
other type: 1×105 operation circles;
Mechanical life: flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
1 million operation circles, button with light:
5
3×10 operation circles;
other type: 1×105 operation circles.
4. Data of lamps of illuminated button

Direct type
Basic parameters
LED lamp
Rated operational current Ie Ie≤20mA
Rated operational voltage (V) AC/DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 110, 230
Transformer type
6V LED lamp
Power supply rated Ie≤20mA

operational current Ie
Rated operational voltage (V) AC/DC 230, 380
5. Features
5.1 No-dismounting of the button from the front side thanks to
anti-moving operating part of metal type button;
5.2 Reliable contacting could be ensured because of dual functions
of circuit switching and self-cleaning for all contacting points;
5.3 NC and NO contacting assemblies are independent to each other,
and could be freely combined for convenient replacement;
5.4 Concealed connection terminals make the operation safe and
reliable. Elegant appearance due to adoption of Aluminum
and Zinc alloy in metal type button operating parts and bases;
G-15 > >>

Pushbuttons
6. NP2 Pilot Device (Drill Plan φ22.3)
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Non-illuminated) NP2-BA □□ Model Color
NP2-BA13 2 —
NP2-BA □□ Model Color
NP2-BA23 2 —
NP2-BA11 1 —
NP2-BA21 1 — NP2-BA33 2 —
NP2-BA31 1 — NP2-BA43 2 —
NP2-BA41 1 —
NP2-BA53 2 —
NP2-BA51 1 —
NP2-BA61 1 — NP2-BA63 2 —
NP2-BA12 — 1 NP2-BA14 — 2
NP2-BA22 — 1
NP2-BA24 — 2
NP2-BA32 — 1
NP2-BA42 — 1 NP2-BA34 — 2
NP2-BA52 — 1 NP2-BA44 — 2
NP2-BA62 — 1
NP2-BA54 — 2
Dimensions (mm) NP2-BA64 — 2
13
NP2-BA □□ NP2-BA15 1 1
NP2-BA25 1 1
NP2-BA35 1 1
40
NP2-BA45 1 1
NP2-BA55 1 1
30
55 1 1
NP2-BA65
NP2-BA □□□□ Model Color NP2-BA □□□□

NP2-BA3311 1 —
G
NP2-BA2365 1 1
40
NP2-BA4322 — 1
NP2-BA2351 1 — 11.5
56 30
NP2-BA1345 1 1
NP2-BL □□ Model Color NP2-BL □□

NP2-BL42 — 1
NP2-BL31 1 —
NP2-BL55 1 1 40
NP2-BL65 1 1
NP2-BL15 1 1 18.5
30
83
NP2-BL21 1 —
NP2-BA □□ Model Color Note NP2-BW1 □□□

NP2-BW1161 6V 1 —
NP2-BW1361 6V 1 —
40
NP2-BW1462 6V — 1 Direct, 6V~380V

18.5
NP2-BW1561 6V 1 — 80 30
NP2-BW1661 6V 1 —
NP2-BA □□ Model Color Note NP2-BW4 □□□

NP2-BW4161 6V 1 —
NP2-BW4361 6V 1 —
41
40
NP2-BW4462 6V — 1 Direct, 6V~380V

24
NP2-BW4561 6V 1 — 87 30
NP2-BW4661 6V 1 —
NP2-BA □□ Model Color Note NP2-Bk1 □□ 65

NP2-BK12365 6V 1 1
NP2-BK12465 6V 1 1
40
NP2-BK12565 6V 1 1
Two-position locked
NP2-BK13365 6V 1 1 26
90 30
NP2-BK13465 6V 1 1
NP2-BK13565 6V 1 1
> >> G-16

Pushbuttons
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)
NP2-BW □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-BW3161 (LED) 1 —
NP2-BW3361 (LED) 1 —
NP2-BW3461 (LED) 1 —
NP2-BW3561 (LED) 1 —
NP2-BW3661 (LED) 1 —
NP2-BW3162 (LED) — 1
LED : AC 6V, 12V, —
NP2-BW3362 (LED) 1
24V, 36V, 48V,
NP2-BW3462 (LED) — 1
110V, 230V
NP2-BW3562 (LED) — 1
NP2-BW3662 (LED) — 1
NP2-BW3163 (LED) 2 —
NP2-BW3363 (LED) 2 —
NP2-BW3463 (LED) 2 —
NP2-BW3563 (LED) 2 —
LED : AC 6V, 12V,
NP2-BW3663 (LED) 2 —
24V, 36V, 48V,
NP2-BW3164 (LED) — 2
110V, 230V
NP2-BW3364 (LED) — 2
NP2-BW3464 (LED) — 2
NP2-BW3564 (LED) — 2
NP2-BW3664 (LED) — 2
NP2-BW3165 (LED) 1 1
LED : AC 6V, 12V, NP2-BW3365 (LED) 1 1
24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-BW3465 (LED) 1 1

110V, 230V NP2-BW3565 (LED) 1 1
NP2-BW3665 (LED) 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BW 3 □ 6 □
19
40
30
80
G-17 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)-(transformer type)Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)-(transformer type)
NP2-BW □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-BW3141 1 —
NP2-BW3341 1 —
NP2-BW3441 1 —
NP2-BW3541 1 —
NP2-BW3641 1 —
NP2-BW3142 — 1
NP2-BW3342 — 1
NP2-BW3442 — 1
NP2-BW3542 — 1
NP2-BW3642 — 1
NP2-BW3143 2 —
(Transformer Type)
NP2-BW3343 2 —
INCANDSCANCE:
NP2-BW3443 2 —
AC 230V &
NP2-BW3543 2 —
LED: AC 230V
NP2-BW3643 2 —
NP2-BW3144 — 2
NP2-BW3344 — 2
NP2-BW3444 — 2
NP2-BW3544 — 2
NP2-BW3644 — 2
G
NP2-BW3145 1 1
NP2-BW3345 1 1
NP2-BW3445 1 1
NP2-BW3545 1 1
NP2-BW3645 1 1
NP2-BW3151 1 —
NP2-BW3351 1 —
NP2-BW3451 1 —
(Transformer Type) NP2-BW3551 1 —
LED: AC 380V NP2-BW3651 1 —
NP2-BW3152 — 1
NP2-BW3352 — 1
NP2-BW3452 — 1
NP2-BW3552 — 1
NP2-BW3652 — 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BW 3 □ 4 □
19
40
102 30
> >> G-18

Pushbuttons
★ φ40 Momentary Mushroom head button(non-illuminated)
NP2-BC □□ Model Color NP2-BC □□ Model Color

NP2-BC11 1 — NP2-BC13 2 —
NP2-BC21 1 — NP2-BC23 2 —
NP2-BC31 1 — NP2-BC33 2 —
NP2-BC41 1 — NP2-BC43 2 —
NP2-BC51 1 — NP2-BC53 2 —
NP2-BC61 1 — NP2-BC63 2 —
NP2-BC12 — 1 NP2-BC14 — 2
NP2-BC22 — 1 NP2-BC24 — 2
NP2-BC32 — 1 NP2-BC34 — 2
NP2-BC42 — 1 NP2-BC44 — 2
NP2-BC52 — 1 NP2-BC54 — 2
NP2-BC62 — 1 NP2-BC64 — 2
NP2-BC15 1 1
★ φ60 Momentary Mushroom head button(non-illuminated) NP2-BC25 1 1
NP2-BC35 1 1
NP2-BR □□ Model Color
NP2-BC45 1 1
NP2-BR11 1 —
NP2-BC55 1 1
NP2-BR21 1 —
NP2-BC65 1 1
NP2-BR31 1 —
NP2-BR41 1 —
NP2-BR □□ Model Color
NP2-BR51 1 —
NP2-BR13 2 —
NP2-BR61 1 —
NP2-BR23 2 —
NP2-BR12 — 1
NP2-BR33 2 —
NP2-BR22 — 1
NP2-BR43 2 —
NP2-BR32 — 1
NP2-BR53 2 —
NP2-BR42 — 1
NP2-BR63 2 —
NP2-BR52 — 1
NP2-BR14 — 2
NP2-BR62 — 1
NP2-BR24 — 2
NP2-BR34 — 2
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BR44 — 2
NP2-BC □□ NP2-BR54 — 2
33 NP2-BR □□ NP2-BR64 — 2
NP2-BR15 1 1
φ 40/ φ 60
NP2-BR25 1 1
40
NP2-BR35 1 1
NP2-BR45 1 1
NP2-BR55 1 1
77
NP2-BR65 1 1
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Non-illuminated) Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BL8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-BL8325

12
-------- NP2-BL8325 + 1 1
42
-------- NP2-BL8425 + 1 1 30
55
G-19 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated) Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BW8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-BW 8 □ 4 □

LED : AC 6V, 12V,
NP2-BW8465 + 1 1 15
24V, 36V, 48V,
110V, 230V
55
AC 6V,
NP2-BW8465 + 1 1
12V, 24V, 36V, 48V
Transformer Type: 98 30
NP2-BW8445 + 1 1
LED: AC 230V
Transformer Type:
NP2-BW8455 + 1 1
LED: AC 380V
★ Mushroom button (Emergency Stop button)-(Non-illuminated) Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BS □□ Mushroom-Diameter Model Color NP2-BS □□□

NP2-BS441 1 —
φ30 33
NP2-BS442 — 1
φ30/ φ40/ φ60
φ40
NP2-BS541 1 —
G
NP2-BS542 — 1
40
NP2-BS641 1 —
φ60
NP2-BS642 — 1
NP2-BS443 2 —
φ30 NP2-BS444 — 2 77
NP2-BS445 1 1
NP2-BS543 2 —
φ40 NP2-BS544 — 2
NP2-BS545 1 1
NP2-BS643 2 —
φ60 NP2-BS644 — 2
NP2-BS645 1 1
★ Indicator Dimensions (mm)
14
NP2-BV □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-BV 6 □
NP2-BV61
LED: AC 6V, NP2-BV63
40
12V, 24V, 36V, NP2-BV64

48V, 110V, 230V NP2-BV65
56 30
NP2-BV66
NP2-BV41
LED: AC 6V NP2-BV43 14
NP2-BV4(5)□
Transformer NP2-BV44
230V NP2-BV45
40
NP2-BV46
NP2-BV51
LED: AC 6V NP2-BV53 79 30
Transformer NP2-BV54
380V NP2-BV55
NP2-BV56
> >> G-20

Pushbuttons
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated) ★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BD Selector NP2-BD Selector

Metal Metal
(J, G) □□ Switches (J, G) □□ Switches
NP2-BD21 1 — NP2-BD31 1 —
NP2-BD22 — 1 NP2-BD32 — 1
NP2-BD23 2 — NP2-BD33 2 —
NP2-BD24 — 2 NP2-BD34 — 2
NP2-BD25 1 1 NP2-BD35 1 1
NP2-BD41 1 — NP2-BD51 1 —
NP2-BD42 — 1 NP2-BD52 — 1
NP2-BD43 2 — NP2-BD53 2 —
NP2-BD44 — 2 NP2-BD54 — 2
NP2-BD45 1 1 NP2-BD55 1 1
NP2-BJ21 1 — NP2-BJ31 1 —
NP2-BJ22 — 1 NP2-BJ32 — 1
NP2-BJ23 2 — NP2-BJ33 2 —
NP2-BJ24 — 2 NP2-BJ34 — 2
NP2-BJ25 1 1 NP2-BJ35 1 1
NP2-BJ41 1 — NP2-BJ51 1 —
NP2-BJ42 — 1 NP2-BJ52 — 1
NP2-BJ43 2 — NP2-BJ53 2 —
NP2-BJ44 — 2 NP2-BJ54 — 2
NP2-BJ45 1 1 NP2-BJ55 1 1
NP2-BG21 1 — NP2-BG31 1 —
NP2-BG22 — 1 NP2-BG32 — 1
NP2-BG23 2 — NP2-BG33 2 —
NP2-BG24 — 2 NP2-BG34 — 2
NP2-BG25 1 1 NP2-BG35 1 1
NP2-BG21B 1 — NP2-BG51 1 —
NP2-BG22B — 1 NP2-BG52 — 1
NP2-BG23B 2 — NP2-BG53 2 —
NP2-BG24B — 2 NP2-BG54 — 2
NP2-BG25B 1 1 NP2-BG55 1 1
NP2-BG41 1 — NP2-BG31D 1 —
NP2-BG42 — 1 NP2-BG32D — 1
NP2-BG43 2 — NP2-BG33D 2 —
NP2-BG44 — 2 NP2-BG34D — 2
NP2-BG45 1 1 NP2-BG35D 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BD □□ NP2-BJ □□ NP2-BG □□

42
27
27 19
40
40
40
70
30 63
30
70 30
G-21 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Non-illuminated)
NP2-EA □□ Model Color NP2-EA □□ Model Color

NP2-EA11 1 — NP2-EA13 2 —
NP2-EA21 1 — NP2-EA23 2 —
NP2-EA31 1 — NP2-EA33 2 —
NP2-EA41 1 — NP2-EA43 2 —
NP2-EA51 1 — NP2-EA53 2 —
NP2-EA61 1 — NP2-EA63 2 —
NP2-EA12 — 1 NP2-EA14 — 2
NP2-EA22 — 1 NP2-EA24 — 2
NP2-EA32 — 1 NP2-EA34 — 2
NP2-EA42 — 1 NP2-EA44 — 2
NP2-EA52 — 1 NP2-EA54 — 2
NP2-EA62 — 1 NP2-EA64 — 2
NP2-EA15 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EA25 1 1
NP2-EA35 1 1
NP2-EA □□
12 NP2-EA45 1 1
NP2-EA55 1 1
NP2-EA65 1 1
42
G
55
30
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)
NP2-EW3 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-EW3 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-EW3161 1 — NP2-EW3165 1 1
NP2-EW3361 1 — NP2-EW3365 1 1
LED: AC 6V, 12V,
NP2-EW3461 1 — NP2-EW3465 1 1
24V, 36V, 48V,
NP2-EW3561 1 — NP2-EW3565 1 1
110V, 230V
LED: AC 6V, 12V, NP2-EW3661 1 — NP2-EW3665 1 1
24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-EW3162 — 1
110V, 230V NP2-EW3362 — 1 Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EW3462 — 1
NP2-EW3562 — 1 NP2-EW 3 □ 6 □
19
NP2-EW3662 — 1
NP2-EW3163 2 —
NP2-EW3363 2 —
42
NP2-EW3463 2 —
NP2-EW3563 2 —
LED: AC 6V, 12V, NP2-EW3663 2 — 30
24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-EW3164 — 2 80
110V, 230V NP2-EW3364 — 2

NP2-EW3464 — 2
NP2-EW3564 — 2
NP2-EW3664 — 2
> >> G-22

Pushbuttons
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (transformer type) (Illuminated)
NP2-EW3 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-EW3 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-EW3141 1 — NP2-EW3151 1 —
NP2-EW3341 1 — NP2-EW3351 1 —
NP2-EW3441 1 — NP2-EW3451 1 —
NP2-EW3541 1 — NP2-EW3551 1 —
NP2-EW3641 1 — NP2-EW3651 1 —
NP2-EW3142 — 1
Transformer Type: NP2-EW3152 — 1
Transformer Type:
NP2-EW3342 — 1
LED: AC 230V LED: AC 380V NP2-EW3352 — 1
NP2-EW3442 — 1
NP2-EW3542 — 1 NP2-EW3452 — 1
NP2-EW3642 — 1 NP2-EW3552 — 1
NP2-EW3143 2 — NP2-EW3652 — 1
NP2-EW3343 2 — NP2-EW3153 2 —
NP2-EW3443 2 — NP2-EW3353 2 —
NP2-EW3543 2 — NP2-EW3453 2 —
NP2-EW3643 2 — NP2-EW3553 2 —
NP2-EW3144 — 2 NP2-EW3653 2 —
NP2-EW3154 — 2
NP2-EW3344 — 2
NP2-EW3354 — 2
NP2-EW3444 — 2
NP2-EW3454 — 2
NP2-EW3544 — 2
NP2-EW3554 — 2
NP2-EW3644 — 2
NP2-EW3654 — 2
NP2-EW3145 1 1
NP2-EW3155 1 1
NP2-EW3345 1 1
NP2-EW3355 1 1
NP2-EW3445 1 1
NP2-EW3455 1 1
NP2-EW3545 1 1
NP2-EW3555 1 1
NP2-EW3645 1 1
NP2-EW3655 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EW 3 □ 4 □
19
42
102 30
G-23 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ φ40 Momentary Mushroom button -(Non-illuminated) ★ φ60 Momentary Mushroom button -(Non-illuminated)
NP2-EC □□ Model Color NP2-ER □□ Model Color

NP2-EC11 1 — NP2-ER11 1 —
NP2-EC21 1 — NP2-ER21 1 —
NP2-EC31 1 — NP2-ER31 1 —
NP2-EC41 1 — NP2-ER41 1 —
NP2-EC51 1 — NP2-ER51 1 —
NP2-EC61 1 — NP2-ER61 1 —
NP2-EC12 — 1 NP2-ER12 — 1
NP2-EC22 — 1 NP2-ER22 — 1
NP2-EC32 — 1 NP2-ER32 — 1
NP2-EC42 — 1 NP2-ER42 — 1
NP2-EC52 — 1 NP2-ER52 — 1
NP2-EC62 — 1 NP2-ER62 — 1
NP2-EC13 2 — NP2-ER13 2 —
NP2-EC23 2 — NP2-ER23 2 —
NP2-EC33 2 — NP2-ER33 2 —
NP2-EC43 2 — NP2-ER43 2 —
NP2-EC53 2 — NP2-ER53 2 —
NP2-EC63 2 — NP2-ER63 2 —
NP2-EC14 — 2 NP2-ER14 — 2
NP2-EC24 — 2 NP2-ER24 — 2 G
NP2-EC34 — 2 NP2-ER34 — 2
NP2-EC44 — 2 NP2-ER44 — 2
NP2-EC54 — 2 NP2-ER54 — 2
NP2-EC64 — 2 NP2-ER64 — 2
NP2-EC15 1 1 NP2-ER15 1 1
NP2-EC25 1 1 NP2-ER25 1 1
NP2-EC35 1 1 NP2-ER35 1 1
NP2-EC45 1 1 NP2-ER45 1 1
NP2-EC55 1 1 NP2-ER55 1 1
NP2-EC65 1 1 NP2-ER65 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EC □□
NP2-ER □□
33
φ 40/ φ 60
42
77
> >> G-24

Pushbuttons
★ Double-headed flush momentory button -(Non-illuminated)
NP2-EL8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
-------- NP2-EL8325 + 1 1
-------- NP2-EL8425 + 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EL8325
12
42
55 30
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated)
NP2-EW8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
LED: AC 6V, 12V,

NP2-EW8465 + 1 1
24V, 36V, 48V,
110V, 230V
INCANDESCENCE
LED: AC 6V
NP2-EW8445 + 1 1
Transformer: 230V
INCANDESCENCE
LED: AC 6V NP2-EW8455 + 1 1
Transformer: 380V
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EW 8 □ 6 □
15
55
78 30
G-25 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Mushroom button (Emergency Stop button)-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-ES □□ Mushroom-Diameter Model Color

NP2-ES441 1 —
φ30
NP2-ES442 — 1
NP2-ES541 1 —
φ40
NP2-ES542 — 1
NP2-ES641 1 —
φ60
NP2-ES642 — 1
NP2-ES443 2 —
φ30 NP2-ES444 — 2
NP2-ES445 1 1
NP2-ES543 2 —
φ40 NP2-ES544 — 2
NP2-ES545 1 1
NP2-ES643 2 —
φ60 NP2-ES644 — 2
NP2-ES645 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
33
NP2-ES □□□
G
φ30/ φ40/ φ60
42
77
★ Indicator Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EV □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-EV 6 □
NP2-EV61 17
LED: AC 6V, NP2-EV63

12V, 24V, 36V, NP2-EV64
42
48V, 110V, 230V NP2-EV65

NP2-EV66
NP2-EV41 56 30
INCANDESCENCE NP2-EV43
LED: AC 6V
NP2-EV44
Transformer:
230V NP2-EV45 NP2-EV 4□
17
NP2-EV46
NP2-EV51
INCANDESCENCE
42
NP2-EV53
LED: AC 6V
NP2-EV54
Transformer:
380V NP2-EV55
79 30
NP2-EV56
> >> G-26

Pushbuttons
★ Indicator (compact)
NP2-EV16 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-EV161
LED: AC 6V, NP2-EV163
12V, 24V, 36V, NP2-EV164
48V, 110V, 230V NP2-EV165
NP2-EV166
NP2-ED Selector NP2-ED Selector

Metal Metal
(J、G) □□ Switches (J、G) □□ Switches
NP2-ED21 1 — NP2-ED31 1 —
NP2-ED22 — 1 NP2-ED32 — 1
NP2-ED23 2 — NP2-ED33 2 —
NP2-ED24 — 2 NP2-ED34 — 2
NP2-ED25 1 1 NP2-ED35 1 1
NP2-ED41 1 — NP2-ED51 1 —
NP2-ED42 — 1 NP2-ED52 — 1
NP2-ED43 2 — NP2-ED53 2 —
NP2-ED44 — 2 NP2-ED54 — 2
NP2-ED45 1 1 NP2-ED55 1 1
NP2-EJ21 1 — NP2-EJ31 1 —
NP2-EJ22 — 1 NP2-EJ32 — 1
NP2-EJ23 2 — NP2-EJ33 2 —
NP2-EJ24 — 2 NP2-EJ34 — 2
NP2-EJ25 1 1 NP2-EJ35 1 1
NP2-EJ41 1 — NP2-EJ51 1 —
NP2-EJ42 — 1 NP2-EJ52 — 1
NP2-EJ43 2 — NP2-EJ53 2 —
NP2-EJ44 — 2 NP2-EJ54 — 2
NP2-EJ45 1 1 NP2-EJ55 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-ED □□
27
42
70
30
G-27 > >>

Pushbuttons
NP2-ED Selector NP2-ED Selector

Metal Metal
(J、G) □□ Switches (J、G) □□ Switches
NP2-EG21 1 — NP2-EG31 1 —
NP2-EG22 — 1 NP2-EG32 — 1
NP2-EG23 2 — NP2-EG33 2 —
NP2-EG24 — 2 NP2-EG34 — 2
NP2-EG25 1 1 NP2-EG35 1 1
NP2-EG41 1 — NP2-EG51 1 —
NP2-EG42 — 1 NP2-EG52 — 1
NP2-EG43 2 — NP2-EG53 2 —
NP2-EG44 — 2 NP2-EG54 — 2
NP2-EG45 1 1 NP2-EG55 1 1
NP2-EG21B 1 — NP2-EG31D 1 —
NP2-EG22B — 1 NP2-EG32D — 1
NP2-EG23B 2 — NP2-EG33D 2 —
NP2-EG24B — 2 NP2-EG34D — 2
NP2-EG25B 1 1 NP2-EG35D 1 1
NP2-EJ □□ G
27
42
30
70
NP2-EG □□
42
19
42
63
30
> >> G-28

Pushbuttons
Head
★ Flush Momentary button-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BA □ Metal Specifications NP2-EA □ Plastic Specifications

NP2-BA1 NP2-EA1
NP2-BA2 NP2-EA2
NP2-BA3 NP2-EA3
NP2-BA4 NP2-EA4
NP2-BA5 NP2-EA5
NP2-BA6 NP2-EA6
★ Flush Momentary button-(Illuminated)
NP2-BW3 □ Metal Specifications NP2-EW3 □ Plastic Specifications

NP2-BW31 NP2-EW31
NP2-BW33 NP2-EW33
NP2-BW34 NP2-EW34
NP2-BW35 NP2-EW35
NP2-BW36 NP2-EW36
★ Double head button-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BL □□□ Metal Specifications NP2-EL □□□ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BL832 Flush button NP2-EL832 Flush button
Flush button + Flush button +

NP2-BL842 NP2-EL842
projecting button projecting button
★ Double head button-(Illuminated)
NP2-BW □□ Metal Specifications NP2-EW □□ Plastic Specifications
Flush button + Flush button +

NP2-BW84 NP2-EW84
projecting button projecting button
★ Indicator light
NP2-BV/ □ Metal Specifications NP2-EV/ □ Plastic Specifications

NP2-BV/1 NP2-EV/1
NP2-BV/3 NP2-EV/3
NP2-BV/4 NP2-EV/4
NP2-BV/5 NP2-EV/5
NP2-BV/6 NP2-EV/6
G-29 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Head of Selector Switch-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BD/ □ Metal Specifications NP2-ED/ □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BD2 NP2-ED2
NP2-BD3 NP2-ED3
NP2-BD4 NP2-ED4
NP2-BD5 NP2-ED5
★ Head of Key Selected Switch-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BG □ Metal Specifications NP2-EG □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BG2 NP2-EG2
NP2-BG2B NP2-EG2B
G
NP2-BG3 NP2-EG3
NP2-BG3D NP2-EG3D
NP2-BG4 NP2-EG4
NP2-BG5 NP2-EG5
★ Holder
NP2-BZ009 Metal Specifications NP2-EZ009 Plastic Specifications
NP2-BZ009 For NP2-B □□ NP2-EZ009 For NP2-E □□
★ Waring label
NP2-BY Metal Specifications NP2-BZ Metal Specifications
NP2-BY9101 φ60 (printed)

NP2-BZ31 30mm(H)X45mm(L)
NP2-BY9330 φ60 (blank)
NP2-BY8101 φ90 (printed)

NP2-BY8330 φ90 (blank)
> >> G-30

Pushbuttons
★ Head-enclosure of Push-button- (Water proof)
Specifications Specifications
For NP2-BP For NP2-BL(EL)832
For NP2-BA(EA) For NP2-BL(EL)842
★ Contact block ★ Base for Illuminated (without bulb)
NP2-BE □□□ Metal Specifications NP2-EW □/EV □ Metal Specifications
NP2-BE101 NO Contact NP2-EW6/EV6 Direct type
NP2-EW4/EV4 220V
NP2-BE102 NC Contact Transformer type
NP2-EW5/EV5 380V
★ Lamp (LED)
BA9s Specifications BA9s Specifications

AC/DC 6V AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 12V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 48V
G-31 > >>

Pushbuttons
★ Enclosure ★ Enclosure ★ Enclosure
PIC Model PIC Model PIC Model
NP2-B01 NP2-B112
NP2-B211H29
NP2-B02 NP2-B114
NP2-B213
NP2-B132H29
NP2-B03
NP2-B142H29 NP2-B215
NP2-J01
NP2-B164H29
NP2-B222
NP2-B101H29
NP2-J174
NP2-B102
NP2-J174H29
NP2-B223
G
NP2-B103
NP2-B111H29
★ Enclosure ★ Enclosure ★ Enclosure
PIC Model PIC Model PIC Model
NP2-B311H29
(Forward, NP2-B334 NP2-B363
Stop, Reverse)
NP2-B321H29
NP2-B339 NP2-B366
(Up, Stop, Down)
NP2-B341H29
NP2-B324 (Close, Stop ,
Open)
NP2-B361H29
(Stop, Start)
> >> G-32

Pushbuttons
2.3 Atmosphere condition:
Relative humidity of the atmosphere
couldn't exceed 50% when the highest temperature
is +40℃; much higher relative humidity is allowable
the relative humidity is up to 90%.
As for dews, which contingently appear due to
change of temperature, special steps should be taken.
3. Technical data
Rated insulated voltage Ui: 250V
Conventional heating current Ith: 3A
NP6 Pushbutton
AC-15 - 0.7 0.5
Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC230V/DC220V; Rated operational current Ie (A)
Degree of protection: IP40 DC-13 0.7 - 0.1
Flush button, Flush button, Illuminated flush button, Illuminated flush Mushroom-headed
self-locking self-reset self-locking button, self-reset button, self-reset
NP6-□□ BS / □□ NP6-□□ B / □□ NP6-□□ DS / □□ NP6-□□ D / □□ NP6-□□ J / □
P34 P34 P35 P35 P36
Mushroom-headed Key switch Selector switch Indicator light

button, self-locking NP6-□□ Y / □□ NP6-□□ X / □□ NP6-XD / □□
NP6-□□ ZS / □
P37 P37 P36 P37
G-33 > >>

Pushbuttons
4. Data of lamps of illuminated button
Rated operational voltage (V) 6 12 24

Rated operational current (mA) ≤20 ≤20 ≤20
Color
Life (h) ≥30000
4.1 Contact
Contact resistance: ≤50mΩ
4.2 Durability
Electric life (operation circles) Instantaneous button: AC: 500×103 ,DC: 250×103 Selector switch: 100×103
6 3
Mechanical life (operation circles) Instantaneous button: 1×10 Selector switch: 100×10
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
B/ □ J B/ □ Y
NP6-11B/1J 1 NP6-11B/1Y 1
NP6-11B/2J 1 NP6-11B/2Y 1
NP6-11B/3J 1 NP6-11B/3Y 1
NP6-11B/4J 1 NP6-11B/4Y 1
NP6-11B/5J 1 NP6-11B/5Y 1
NP6-11B/6J 1 NP6-11B/6Y 1
NP6-11B/7J 1 NP6-11B/7Y 1
G
NP6-22B/1J 2 NP6-22B/1Y 2
NP6-22B/2J 2 NP6-22B/2Y 2
NP6-22B/3J 2 NP6-22B/3Y 2
NP6-22B/4J 2 NP6-22B/4Y 2
NP6-22B/5J 2 NP6-22B/5Y 2
NP6-22B/6J 2 NP6-22B/6Y 2
NP6-22B/7J 2 NP6-22B/7Y 2
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)(Maintained)
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
B/ □ F BS/ □ J
NP6-11B/1F 1 NP6-11BS/1J 1
NP6-11B/2F 1 NP6-11BS/2J 1
NP6-11B/3F 1 NP6-11BS/3J 1
NP6-11B/4F 1 NP6-11BS/4J 1
NP6-11B/5F 1 NP6-11BS/5J 1
NP6-11B/6F 1 NP6-11BS/6J 1
NP6-11B/7F 1 NP6-11BS/7J 1
NP6-22B/1F 2 NP6-22BS/1J 2
NP6-22B/2F 2 NP6-22BS/2J 2
NP6-22B/3F 2 NP6-22BS/3J 2
NP6-22B/4F 2 NP6-22BS/4J 2
NP6-22B/5F 2 NP6-22BS/5J 2
NP6-22B/6F 2 NP6-22BS/6J 2
NP6-22B/7F 2 NP6-22BS/7J 2
> >> G-34

Pushbuttons
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
BS/ □ F BS/ □ Y
NP6-11BS/1F 1 NP6-11BS/1Y 1
NP6-11BS/2F 1 NP6-11BS/2Y 1
NP6-11BS/3F 1 NP6-11BS/3Y 1
NP6-11BS/4F 1 NP6-11BS/4Y 1
NP6-11BS/5F 1 NP6-11BS/5Y 1
NP6-11BS/6F 1 NP6-11BS/6Y 1
NP6-11BS/7F 1 NP6-11BS/7Y 1
NP6-22BS/1F 2 NP6-22BS/1Y 2
NP6-22BS/2F 2 NP6-22BS/2Y 2
NP6-22BS/3F 2 NP6-22BS/3Y 2
NP6-22BS/4F 2 NP6-22BS/4Y 2
NP6-22BS/5F 2 NP6-22BS/5Y 2
NP6-22BS/6F 2 NP6-22BS/6Y 2
NP6-22BS/7F 2 NP6-22BS/7Y 2
Dimensions (mm)
NP6-□□B□/□J NP6- □□B□/□F NP6-□□B□ /□Y
9 9 22 8 φ18
22 8 18 9 22 8 18
0.6 1 0.6 1 5.7 0.6 1
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
24
Ie:0.5A
18
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Illuminated) (AC 6V,12V,24V) ★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Illuminated)

(AC 6V,12V,24V , Maintained
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
D/ □ J DS/ □ J
NP6-11D/1J 1 NP6-11DS/1J 1
NP6-11D/3J 1 NP6-11DS/3J 1
NP6-11D/4J 1 NP6-11DS/4J 1
NP6-11D/5J 1 NP6-11DS/5J 1
NP6-11D/6J 1 NP6-11DS/6J 1
NP6-11D/7J 1 NP6-11DS/7J 1
NP6-22D/1J 2 NP6-22DS/1J 2
NP6-22D/3J 2 NP6-22DS/3J 2
NP6-22D/4J 2 NP6-22DS/4J 2
NP6-22D/5J 2 NP6-22DS/5J 2
Rectangle 5PINS NP6-22D/6J 2 Rectangle 5PINS NP6-22DS/6J 2
NP6-22D/7J 2 NP6-22DS/7J 2
G-35 > >>

Pushbuttons
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
D/ □ F DS/ □ F
NP6-11D/1F 1 NP6-11DS/1F 1
NP6-11D/3F 1 NP6-11DS/3F 1
NP6-11D/4F 1 NP6-11DS/4F 1
NP6-11D/5F 1 NP6-11DS/5F 1
NP6-11D/6F 1 NP6-11DS/6F 1
NP6-11D/7F 1 NP6-11DS/7F 1
NP6-22D/1F 2 NP6-22DS/1F 2
NP6-22D/3F 2 NP6-22DS/3F 2
NP6-22D/4F 2 NP6-22DS/4F 2
NP6-22D/5F 2 NP6-22DS/5F 2
NP6-22D/6F 2 NP6-22DS/6F 2
NP6-22D/7F 2 NP6-22DS/7F 2
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
D/ □ Y DS/ □ Y
NP6-11D/1Y 1 NP6-11DS/1F 1
NP6-11D/3Y 1 NP6-11DS/3F 1
NP6-11D/4Y 1 NP6-11DS/4F 1
NP6-11D/5Y 1 NP6-11DS/5F 1
NP6-11DS/6F 1
NP6-11D/6Y
NP6-11D/7Y
1
1 NP6-11DS/7F 1
G
NP6-22D/1Y 2 NP6-22DS/1F 2
NP6-22D/3Y 2 NP6-22DS/3F 2
NP6-22D/4Y 2 NP6-22DS/4F 2
NP6-22D/5Y 2 NP6-22DS/5F 2
NP6-22D/6Y 2 NP6-22DS/6F 2
Round 5PINS Round 5PINS
NP6-22D/7Y 2 NP6-22DS/7F 2
Dimensions (mm)
NP6-□□D□/□J NP6- □□D□/□F NP6-□□D□ /□Y
9 9 22 8 φ18
22 8 18 9 22 8 18
0.6 1 0.6 1 5.7 0.6 1
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
24
Ie:0.5A
18
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
★ Mushroom head Pushbutton(Non illuminated) ★ Selector Switches (Non illuminated)
NP6-□□ Selector
NP6-□□J/ □ Model Color Model
X/ □ Y Switches
NP6-11J/3 1
NP6-11X/2Y 1
NP6-11J/4 1
NP6-11J/5 1
NP6-22X/2Y 2
NP6-22J/3 2
NP6-22J/4 2
NP6-22X/3Y 2
NP6-22J/5 2
> >> G-36

Pushbuttons
★ Mushroom head Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)-(Maintained) Dimensions (mm)
NP6-□□ ZS/4 Model Color NP6-□□X/□Y
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
φ18
NP6 -11X 按钮
NP6-11ZS/4 1
GB14048.5-93
φ18
9 0.6 1
NP6-22ZS/4 15.5 22 8
2
★ Indicator ★ Selector Switches With Key(Non illuminated)
NP6-XD/ □□ Model Color Voltage NP6-□□ Selector

Model
NP6-XD/1J Y/ □ Y Switches
NP6-XD/3J
DC 6V, NP6-11Y/2Y 1
NP6-XD/4J
DC 12V,
NP6-XD/5J
DC 24V NP6-22Y/2Y 2
NP6-XD/6J
NP6-XD/7J
NP6-22Y/3Y 2
NP6-XD/1F
NP6-XD/3F
DC 6V, Dimensions (mm)
NP6-XD/4F
DC 12V,
NP6-XD/5F NP6-□□Y/□Y
DC 24V
NP6-XD/6F
NP6-XD/7F
NP6-XD/1Y
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
φ18
NP6 -11Y 按钮
NP6-XD/3Y
GB14048.5-93
DC 6V,
NP6-XD/4Y
DC 12V, φ18
NP6-XD/5Y 9 0.6 1
DC 24V
NP6-XD/6Y 26 22 8
NP6-XD/7Y
★ Selector Switches With Key(Non illuminated) ★ Selector Switches With Key (Non illuminated)
NP6-□□ Selector NP6-□□ Selector

Model Model
Y/ □ F Switches Y/ □ J Switches
NP6-11Y/2F 1 NP6-11Y/2J 1
NP6-22Y/2F 2 NP6-22Y/2J 2
NP6-22Y/3F 2 NP6-22Y/3J 2
Dimensions (mm) Dimensions (mm)

NP6-□□Y/□F NP6-□□Y/□J
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
NP6 -11Y 按钮
NP6 -11Y 按钮
24
24
GB14048.5-93
GB14048.5-93
9 0.6 1 18 9 0.6 1
18
26 22 8 26 22 8
G-37 > >>

Pushbuttons
couldn't exceed 50%
the relatice humidity is up to 90%. As for dews,
which contingently appear
due to change of temperature,
3. Feature
With good capability of dust-proof and rain-proof application;

NP3 Pushbutton ensures reliable operation of circuit and equipments.
4. Technical data
Degree of protection: IP65;
andard: IEC/EN60947-5-1
G
4.1 Rated insulation voltage Ui : 380V
4.2 Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A

Rated operational AC-15 2.5 4.5 -
current le (A) DC-13 - 0.3 0.6
4.3 Durability
Electric life: instantaneous: AC 5×105 operation circles,
DC 2×105 operation circles;
5
Mechanical life: instantaneous:
1×106 operation circles,
Illuminated button: 3×105 operation circles;
4.4 Contact
Contact resistance≤50mΩ (initial value)
NP3-□A NP3-□B NP3-□K

NP3
with power on & off with power on & off with starting and
(mechanical interlock) (electrical interlock) emergency stop button
P39 P39 P41 P41
> >> G-38

Pushbuttons
5. NP3 series indicator
★ Momentary Flush button
NP3 □ Model Function
UP
NP3-1
DOWN
UP/LEFT
NP3-2
DOWN/RIGHT
UP/LEFT/FRONT
NP3-3
DOWN/RIGHT/BACK
UP/LEFT/FRONT/Anti-Clockwise
NP3-4
DOWN/RIGHT/BACK/Clockwise
UP/LEFT/FRONT/Anti-Clockwise/FAST
NP3-5
DOWN/RIGHT/BACK/Clockwise/SLOW
★ Momentary Flush button With Power Switching

("start" button Maintained)
NP3 □ A Model Function
(ON/OFF) UP
NP3-1A
(ON/OFF) DOWN
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT
NP3-2A
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT/FRONT
NP3-3A
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT/BACK
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT/FRONT/Anti-Clockwise
NP3-4A
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT/BACK/Clockwise
G-39 > >>

250
Dimension (mm)
310
Up
140
ON
Down
OFF
200
Pushbuttons
Up
ON
Up
Down 70 50
430
OFF Down
430
Left
Up 70 50
Right
320
NP3-1
Down
320
Front
Left
Back
Right
Anti-
clockwise
Front
Clockwise
Back
70 50
310
70 50
Up
Down
NP3-3A
NP3-1A
200
NP3-4
Left
Right
70 50
NP3-2
Up
ON
ON
370
Down
OFF
OFF
Left
490
Up
260
Up Right
490
Down
Down Front
380
Left Up
370
Back
Left
380
Right Down
Anti-
clockwise
Right
260
Clockwise Left
Front
70 50
Fast Right
Back
Slow
Front
Anti-
clockwise
> >>
70 50 Back
Clockwise
70 50
G-40
NP3-3
NP3-4A
NP3-2A
70 50
NP3-5
G
Pushbuttons
NP3 □ B Model Function
UP
NP3-1B
DOWN
UP/LEFT
NP3-2B
DOWN/RIGHT
UP/LEFT/FRONT
NP3-3B
DOWN/RIGHT/BACK
UP/LEFT/FRONT/Anti-Clockwise
NP3-4B
DOWN/RIGHT/BACK/Clockwise

("start" button Maintained)
NP3 □ K Model Function
(ON/OFF) UP
NP3-1K
(ON/OFF) DOWN
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT
NP3-2K
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT/FRONT
NP3-3K
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT/BACK
(ON/OFF) UP/LEFT/FRONT/Anti-Clockwise
NP3-4K
(ON/OFF) DOWN/RIGHT/BACK/Clockwise
G-41 > >>

310
ON ON
ON ON
Pushbuttons
370
OFF OFF
200
OFF OFF
430
Up Up
Up
490
Up
260
Down Down
Down
320
Down
Left
380
Left Left
70 50
Right
Right Right
Front
Front
Back
70 50
Back
Anti-
clockwise
Clockwise
70 50
70 50
NP3-4B
NP3-3B
NP3-2B
NP3-1B
> >>
G-42
G
Pushbuttons
couldn't exceed 50%
the relative humidity is up to 90%. As for dews,
which contingently appear
due to change of temperature,
2.5 Installation category: Ⅱ
3. Technical data
3.1 Conventional heating current Ith: 10A
3.2 Refer to table below, for ratings under different utilization
categories.
NPH1 Pushbutton Box AC-15

Rated operational voltage, V 415 240 120
Rated operational current, V 1.9 3 6
Rated operational voltage, V 250 125 -
Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC415V/DC250V; DC-13
Degree of protection: IP54/IP40 Rated operational current, V 0.27 0.55 -
Life
Electric life: Flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
5 5
AC 5×10 operations, DC2.5×10 operations;
5
other type: 1×10 operations;
Mechanical life: flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
1 million operations,
6
button with light: 3×10 operations;
5
other type: 1×10 operations
Rated operational voltage Rated operational current

AC/DC 6V, 12V, 24V, 36V ≤20mA
AC 110V~220V ≤20mA
4. NPH1 Enckosure Dimension (mm)
Bare box with one hole

Bare box with one hole
75max
Specifications
Model
Color Protection degree
NPH1-10J IP54
75max
NPH1-1J IP40
NPH1-10 IP54
61max
NPH1-1 IP40 57
Bare box with two hole Bare box with three hole
Model Model
Color Protection degree Color Protection degree
NPH1-20J IP54 NPH1-30J IP54
NPH1-2J IP40 NPH1-3J IP40
NPH1-20 IP54 NPH1-30 IP54
NPH1-2 IP40 NPH1-3 IP40
G-43 > >>

Pushbuttons
Dimension (mm)
Bare box with two hole Bare box with three hole
75max
75max
100
68
61max 107max 61max 139max 57
57
Box with one hole (with flush button) Dimension (mm)
Specifications NPH1-1001~1004
Model
Color
NPH1-1001 1 —
75max
NPH1-1002 1 —
NPH1-1003 — 1
71max 75max
NPH1-1004 — 1
G
Box with one hole (with mushroom-headed button) Dimension (mm)
Model
Color
—
75max
NPH1-1005 φ40 1
NPH1-1006 φ40 — 1
86max 75max
Box with one hole (with selector switch) Dimension (mm)
Model
Type of positions Color
—
75max
NPH1-1007 1
NPH1-1008 2 —
88max
75max
Box with one hole (with mushroom-headed button,self-locking) Dimension (mm)

Model
Color
NPH1-1009 φ40 — 1
75max
NPH1-1010 φ60 — 1
94max
75max
> >> G-44

Pushbuttons
Box with one hole (with key switch) Dimension (mm)
Specifications NPH1-1011
Model
Type of positions
75max
NPH1-1011 φ40 — 1
75max
74max
Box with two holes (with flush button) Dimension (mm)
Model
Color 71max
1 —
NPH1-2001
— 1
107max
1 — 1
NPH1-2002
— 1
↓
1 —
NPH1-2003
↓
— 1
↓ 75max
1 —
NPH1-2004
— 1 ↓
Box with three holes (with flush button)
Model Model
Color Color
1 — 1
NPH1-3001 — 1 1NC
— NPH1-3005
1 Indicator
AC/DC 24V
1 — 1 light
NPH1-3002 — 1 1 1
1 —
=
1
NPH1-3006
↓
1 — Indicator
AC/DC 24V
— 1 light
NPH1-3003
↓
1 —
—
↓
1
— 1
NPH1-3004
1 — ↓
Dimension (mm)
NPH1-3001~3004 NPH1-3005~3006
71max
139max
139max
73max
75max 75max
G-45 > >>

Indicator Lights
couldn't exceed 50%
the relative humidity is up to 90%. As for dews,
which contingently appear due to
change of temperature, special steps should be taken.
2.5 Overvoltage category: Ⅲ
ND16 Indicator Light

Degree of protection: IP65;
G
ND16-22A ND16-22AS ND16-22B ND16-22BS ND16-22C ND16-22CS ND16-22D ND16-22DS ND16-22F, ND16-22FS ND16-22BK ND16-22S
ND16-22L,ND16-22LC
P47 P47 P47 P47 P48 P48 P49 P49 P50 P50 P50
3. Technical data
Basic parameters
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) Rated operational 2
Service life (h) Brightness (cd/m ) Basic color
AC AC/DC current (mA)
400 400
230 230
110 110
- 48
Ie≤20 ≥30000 ≥60
- 24
- 12
- 36
- 6
Note: For AC power supply, the limit voltage range is 0.85Ue~1.1Ue between terminals.
> >> G-46

Indicator Lights
4. ND16 series indicator
★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22A/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22AS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
ND16-22A/2 (W) ND16-22AS/2 (W)
ND16-22A/2 (G) ND16-22AS/2 (G)

LED: AC/DC 6V,
LED: AC/DC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V,
12V, 24V, 36V,
48V, 110V, 230V, ND16-22A/2 (R) ND16-22AS/2 (R)
48V
400V
ND16-22A/2 (Y) ND16-22AS/2 (Y)
ND16-22A/2 (B) ND16-22AS/2 (B)
★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Capacitor type) ★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Capacitor type)
ND16-22A/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22AS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color

ND16-22A/4 (W)
ND16-22AS/4 (W)
ND16-22A/4 (G)
LED: AC 110V,
ND16-22A/4 (R)
230V, 400V ND16-22AS/4 (G)
ND16-22A/4 (Y)
ND16-22A/4 (B) LED: AC 110V,
ND16-22AS/4 (R)
ND16-22A/4 (W)-F 230V, 400V
LED: AC 230VF, ND16-22A/4 (G)-F
400VF; ND16-22AS/4 (Y)
ND16-22A/4 (R)-F
(to be used in
capacitor gear) ND16-22A/4 (Y)-F
ND16-22AS/4 (B)
ND16-22A/4 (B)-F
ND16-22A/□ ND16-22AS/□
φ 30 φ 30
15
13
50
64
★ Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22B/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22BS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
ND16-22B/2 (W) ND16-22BS/2 (W)
ND16-22B/2 (G) ND16-22BS/2 (G)

LED: AC/DC 6V,
LED: AC/DC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V,
12V, 24V, 36V,
48V, 110V, 230V, ND16-22B/2 (R) ND16-22BS/2 (R)
48V
400V
ND16-22B/2 (Y) ND16-22BS/2 (Y)
ND16-22B/2 (B) ND16-22BS/2 (B)
G-47 > >>

Indicator Lights
★ Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22B/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22BS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color

ND16-22B/4 (W)
ND16-22BS/4 (W)
LED: AC 110V, ND16-22B/4 (G)
230V, 400V ND16-22B/4 (R)
ND16-22BS/4 (G)
ND16-22B/4 (Y)
ND16-22B/4 (B) LED: AC 110V, ND16-22BS/4 (R)
ND16-22B/4 (W)-F 230V, 400V
LED: AC 230VF, ND16-22B/4 (G)-F
400VF; ND16-22BS/4 (Y)
ND16-22B/4 (R)-F
(to be used in
capacitor gear) ND16-22B/4 (Y)-F
ND16-22BS/4 (B)
ND16-22B/4 (B)-F
ND16-22B/□ ND16-22BS/□
φ 30 φ 30
15
13
64
50
★ Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22C/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22CS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
ND16-22C/2 (W) ND16-22CS/2 (W)
ND16-22C/2 (G) ND16-22CS/2 (G)

LED: AC/DC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V, LED: AC/DC 6V,
ND16-22C/2 (R) ND16-22CS/2 (R)
48V, 110V, 230V, 12V, 24V, 48V,
400V
ND16-22C/2 (Y) ND16-22CS/2 (Y)
ND16-22C/2 (B) ND16-22CS/2 (B)
★ Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22C/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22CS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color

ND16-22C/4 (W)
ND16-22CS/4 (W)
ND16-22C/4 (G)
LED: AC 110V, ND16-22C/4 (R)
230V, 400V ND16-22CS/4 (G)
ND16-22C/4 (Y)
ND16-22C/4 (B) LED: AC 110V,
230V, 400V ND16-22CS/4 (R)
ND16-22C/4 (W)-F
LED: AC 230VF, ND16-22C/4 (G)-F
400VF; ND16-22CS/4 (Y)
ND16-22C/4 (R)-F
(to be used in
capacitor gear) ND16-22C/4 (Y)-F
ND16-22CS/4 (B)
ND16-22C/4 (B)-F
> >> G-48

Indicator Lights
ND16-22C/□ ND16-22CS/□
φ 30
φ 30
12
12
62
50
★ Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22D/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22DS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
ND16-22D/2 (W) ND16-22DS/2 (W)
ND16-22D/2 (G) ND16-22DS/2 (G)

LED: AC/DC 6V,
LED: AC/DC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V, ND16-22D/2 (R) ND16-22DS/2 (R)
12V, 24V, 36V,
48V, 110V, 230V,
48V
400V
ND16-22D/2 (Y) ND16-22DS/2 (Y)
ND16-22D/2 (B) ND16-22DS/2 (B)
★ Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22D/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22DS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color

ND16-22D/4 (W)
ND16-22D/4 (G) ND16-22DS/4 (W)
LED: AC 110V,
ND16-22D/4 (R)
230V, 400V ND16-22DS/4 (G)
ND16-22D/4 (Y) LED: AC 110V,
ND16-22D/4 (B) 230V, 400V
ND16-22DS/4 (R)
ND16-22D/4 (W)-F
LED: AC 230VF, ND16-22D/4 (G)-F
400VF; ND16-22DS/4 (Y)
ND16-22D/4 (R)-F
(to be used in
capacitor gear) ND16-22D/4 (Y)-F
ND16-22DS/4 (B)
ND16-22D/4 (B)-F
ND16-22D/□ ND16-22DS/□
φ 30.5 φ 30.5
15
15
64
52
G-49 > >>

Buzzers
★ Interrupted type ★ Interrupted & flush type
ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage
AC/DC24~ AC/DC24~
ND16-22F 110V, ND16-22FS 110V,
AC230V, 400V AC230V, 400V
★ Continuous type ★ Continuous & lit type
ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage
AC/DC24~ AC/DC24~
ND16-22L 110V, ND16-22LC 110V,
AC230V,400V AC230V, 400V
Dimension (mm)
φ30max G
ND16-22BK/2 AC/DC 24V
13

ND16-22BK/4 AC 220V
64max
ND16-22BK/4 AC 380V
ND16-22BK/4 AC 220VF
ND16-22BK/4 AC 380VF
φ30.5max
13
ND16-22F
ND16-22FS
64max
ND16-22L
ND16-22LC
φ30.5max
ND16-22S/2 AC/DC 24V

13.5
ND16-22S/4 AC 220V
60.5max
ND16-22S/4 AC 380V
ND16-22S/4 AC 220VF
ND16-22S/4 AC 380VF
> >> G-50

Inverter & Soft-Starter
Inverter
NVF2
Inverter
Page H-01
Soft-Starter
NJR2
Soft-Starter
Page H-07
Inverter
2. Type designation
NVF2-□/□ □ □
Voltage class: 2: 200V series; 4: 400V series
Input voltage: D: single-phase input;

S: three-phase input
Type: T: constant torque type;

P: fan and pump type
Matching motor (kW)
Design sequence No.
Inverter
NVF2 Inverter
Company code
1. General
NVF2 series inverter is a high-performance open-loop
vector inverter developed by our company. It features high
starting torque (0.5Hz, 1.5 times rated torque), high overload 3. Operating conditions
capacity, convenient operation and forward and reverse PID
control. It has smaller volume and good environmental 3.1 Temperature
adaptability. The inverter should be used at an ambient Ambient temperature
This series includes two types of frequency conveters, temperature of -10℃~+40℃ and derated
constant torque type and fan and pump type, and features by 1% per 1℃ above 40℃.
good load adaptability, stable and reliable operation and 3.2 Humidity
2000m
automatic energy-saving operation. The products are widely The relative air humidity should be ≤95%,
used in electric drive and automation control fields, such as and no condensation should occur. Altitude
paper making, textile, water supply, municipal administration, 3.3 Altitude

food, cement, printing and dyeing and plastic machinery. The inverter can produce the rated power when
The products are designed and tested in accordance with I installed below the altitude of 1000m. It should
nternational standards and tested by simulating the actual be derated by 10% per 1000m above 1000m.
service conditions. 3.4 Impact and vibration No Radiation
The products comply with the standards IEC 61800-2. The inverter should not be dropped to the
ground or subjected to sudden impact. It should
not be installed in places where vibration may occur.
3.5 Electromagnetic radiation
The inverter should not be installed adjacent to
No Water spraying
electromagnetic radiation sources.
3.6 Water and vapor protection
The inverter should not be installed in places
where drenching or condensation occurs.
3.7 Air pollution
The inverter should not be installed in places No Pollution
with air pollution, such as dust or corrosive

gas atmosphere.
3.8 Storage environment
The inverter should not be stored in places with
direct sunlight, oil mist, steam or vibration. No Direct Sunshine
H-01 > >>

Inverter
4. Technical data
4.1 NVF2 Series Inverter - Specifications
Input voltage class three-phase 380V

Model NVF2-/T(P)S4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable motor power (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
T Type, Rated output current (A) 1.2 2.5 3.7 5 9 13 17 25 32 37 45 60 75
P Type, Rated output current (A) 1.2 2.5 3.7 5 9 11 17 22 32 37 45 60 75
Max. output voltage (V) Corresponding three-phase input voltage
Output frequency range (Hz) Constant torque type: (0~400)Hz; fan and pump type: (0~120)Hz
Carrier frequency kHz (1~15) 8 4
Cooling Forced air cooling
Input voltage class three-phase 380V

Model NVF2-/T(P)S4 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 200 220 245 280 315
Applicable motor power (kW) 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 200 220 245 280 315
T Type, Rated output current (A) 90 110 150 176 210 253 300 340 380 420 470 520 600
P Type, Rated output current (A) 90 110 140 176 210 253 300 340 380 420 470 520 600
Max. output voltage (V) Corresponding three-phase input voltage
Output frequency range (Hz) Constant torque type: (0~400)Hz; fan and pump type: (0~120)Hz
Carrier frequency kHz (1~15) 4 2
Cooling Forced air cooling
4.2 NVF2 Series Inverter - Standard Technical Characteristics
Input Voltage Range: 440V/380V/220V(±15%)

Input and Output Input Frequency Range: (47~63)Hz
Characteristics
Output Voltage Range: 0~Rated input voltage
Output Frequency Range: Constant torque: (0~400)Hz Fans, pump: (0~120)Hz
H
Programmable Digital Input: 6 inputs
Programmable Analog Input: AI1: (0~10)V input, AI2: (0~10)V or (0/4~20)mA input; A11+A12
Peripheral Interface
Characteristics Open Collector Output: 1 output
Relay Output: 2 outputs
Analog Output: 2 outputs, (0/4~20)mA or (0~10)V optional
Frequency Setting: digital setting, analog setting, serial communication setting, multi-speed, PID setting, etc.
Forward & Reverse PID Control Function
Functional Multi-speed Control Function: 8-speed control
Characteristics
Wobble frequency control function for textile machine
Auto Voltage Regulation Function: automatically maintain the constant output voltage when the grid voltage varies
Over 20 Failure Protection Functions: over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage, over-temperature, phase loss, overload,
PID wire breakage, etc.
Control Method: Non-PG vector control, V/F control
Overload Capacity: Constant torque, 60s at 150% rated current; Fans, pump: 60s at 120% rated current;
Starting Torque: Non-PG vector control: 0.5Hz 150% (starting torque)
Technical Speed Ratio: Non-PG vector control: 1:100: V/F 1:50
Characteristics
Speed Control Precision: Non-PG vector control: ±0.5% max. speed
Carrier Frequency: (1.0~15.0)kHz
> >> H-02

Inverter
5 Product features
5.l Open-loop vector technique with motor self-learning function,
which enables accurate and stable operation of the motor.
5.2 Large low-frequency torque (1.5 times rated torque at 0.5Hz)
and high overload capacity, suitable for low-speed high-load and
high-speed discontinuous load operation.
5.3 Independent air duct design, high heat dispersion performance, Removable
moulded case design, high dustproof performance, good
environmental adaptability.
keyboard
5.4 Low inductance structural design, high immunity.
5.5 Standard RS485 MODBUS communication.
5.6 Built-in simple PID and swing frequency control function, which
makes the machine suitable for various applications.
5.7 Operating time accumulation function, which enables switching
between display of relevant operating data.
5.8 Automatic energy-saving operation function, which achieves
significant energy-saving effect in specific light load applications.
5.9 Compact and smooth appearance, which meets the aesthetic
features of industrial products.
5.10 Detachable keyboard, which can be pulled out and realize
remote monitor.
5.11 Standard connection diagram
Braking unit Braking resistor
AC power supply QF
- + B
U
R
V M
S
Main circuit terminal W
T
Power ground E Motor ground
X1
X2 Control circuit terminal (0~10)V or
Programmable X3 {0(4)-20} mA output
multifunction X4 (0~10)V or
input terminal X5 {0(4)-20} mA output
X6
COM
R1A
+10V R1C Fault relay output
(0~10V) input R1B
A11
A12 R2A
(0~10)V or
GND
R2C Running relay output
{0(4)-20} mA input R2B
485+
BS485 Communication YI Programmable transistor output
485-
COM
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
J601 J602 J603 J604
J601 position (AI1 interface):1 connected to 2: 0V~10V analog voltage input;

2 connected to 3: 0 (4) mA~20mA analog current input
J602 position (AI2 interface):1 connected to 2: 0V~10V analog voltage input of AI1; 2 connected to 3: panel potentiometer input
J603 position (A01 interface):1 connected to 2: 0V~10V analog voltage output; 2 connected to 3: 0 (4) mA~20mA analog output
J604 position (A02 interface):1 connected to 2: 0V~10V analog voltage output; 2 connected to 3: 0 (4) mA~20mA analog output
H-03 > >>

Inverter
5.12 Description of control circuit terminals
Terminal marking Terminal name Description
R1A,R1B,R1C RB and RC are a group of N/O contacts, RA and RB are a group of N/C contacts,
Relay contact output whose functions are set via parameters F6.01 and F6.02.
R2A,R2B,R2C
The default value is fault state signal output.
Y1,CCOM Open collector output The function is set via parameter F6.00, the default value is forward rotation signal output.
485+,485- Serial communication terminal Terminal for serial communication with the outside.
+10V Power supply for frequency setting Connect to the potentiometer together with AI1, AI2, GND (4.7kΩ~10kΩ)
AI1,GND Analog signal input terminal Connect to the potentiometer or 0V~10V signal, as frequency setting,
PID setting or PID feedback
Input 0V~10V/0(4)mA~20mA signal, as frequency setting,
A01,A02,GND Analog signal output terminal PID setting or PID feedback
Connect to DC10V 0mA~20mA (4mA~20mA) voltmeter between AO and GND
AO,GND Multifunction input terminal
Can be used to indicate operating frequency, output current, output voltage, etc.
X1 Multifunction input terminal The default setting is forward rotation operation
X2 Multifunction input terminal The default setting is forward rotation inching
X3 Multifunction input terminal The default setting is fault reset
X4 Multifunction input terminal The default setting is no function
X5 Multifunction input terminal
X6 Multifunction input terminal
COM Multifunction input terminal common ground Common ground of X1-X6, the common ground is used in combination with X1-X6
24V,COM 24V auxiliary power supply output 24V DC power supply output (≤50mA)
5 Overall and mounting dimentions

Opening size of NVF2 display box
74.5
25
63
15.6
H
RUN/PRG F/R LOC/REM FAULT Hz A V
111.5
93
JOG - +
SHIFT
<
PRG SET
<
RUN STOP
NVF2-0.4/TS4~11/PS4
H1
H
W1 4Xd D1
W D
> >> H-04

Inverter
NVF2-11/TS4~220/PS4
H1
H
D1
W1 4Xd
W D
NVF2-220/TS4~355/PS4
H
W D
H-05 > >>

Inverter
Dimensions
Model
W H D W1 H1 D1 d
NVF2-0.4/TS4
NVF2-0.75/TS4
NVF2-1.5/TS4
118 187 173 107 175 110 5
NVF2-2.2/T(P)S4
NVF2-3.7/T(P)S4
NVF2-5.5/PS4
NVF2-5.5/TS4
NVF2-7.5/T(P)S4 155 247 189 140 232 125 6
NVF2-11/PS4
NVF2-11/TS4
194 381 270 140 366 150 7
NVF2-15/PS4
NVF2-15/TS4
NVF2-18.5/PS4
222 426 290 140 410 168 7
NVF2-18.5/TS4
NVF2-22/PS4
NVF2-22/TS4
NVF2-30/PS4
300 596 345 210 568 210 9
NVF2-30/TS4
NVF2-37/PS4
NVF2-37/TS4
NVF2-45/PS4
NVF2-45/TS4
355 701 395 280 664 220 9
NVF2-55/PS4
NVF2-55/TS4
NVF2-75/PS4
NVF2-75/TS4
NVF2-90/PS4
395 750 410 300 716 190 9
NVF2-90/TS4
NVF2-110/PS4 H
NVF2-110/TS4
NVF2-132/PS4
485 920 445 400 880 230 12
NVF2-132/TS4
NVF2-160/PS4
NVF2-160/TS4
NVF2-185/PS4
NVF2-185/TS4
590 1080 (475 450 1040 230 12
NVF2-200/PS4
NVF2-200/TS4
NVF2-220/PS4
NVF2-220/TS4
NVF2-245/PS4
NVF2-245/TS4
NVF2-280/PS4 850 1800 600 — — — —
NVF2-280/TS4
NVF2-315/PS4
NVF2-315/TS4
> >> H-06

Soft-Starter
2. Type Designation
NJR2-□ D
Control Unit
Power of Controlled Motor (kW)
Design No.
Soft-Starter
AC Motor
Company Code
NJR2 Series Soft-Starter

1. General 3. Technical data
With advanced double CPU control as its core technology,
NJR2 series soft-starter is especially designed to control 3.1 Power Voltage: 3-phase AC380V(±15%),
high-power thyristor modules and enable soft starting 50Hz/60Hz(±2%) Ambient temperature
& stopping of (squirrel cage) three-phase AC asynchronous 3.2 Starting Current: 0.5~ 5 times starting
motors. current limited.
It has optional protection functions such as overload, 3.3 Ramp Falling Time: (0~60)s
input phase loss, output phase loss, process over-current, 3.4 Soft starting Reference Voltage:
process under-current, over-voltage and under-voltage. 30%Ue~70%Ue
3.5 Kick Start Time: 0.1s
2000m
This product is mainly used with package control cabinet,
where an AC contactor of corresponding specifications 3.6 Environmental Requirements
must be connected during the operation. At an altitude above 1000m, the capacity Altitude
With specifications covering 7.5kW 500kW should be reduced, and the current will
(squirrel cage) three-phase AC asynchronous motors, decrease 0.5% for every increase of 100m;
and being extensively applied in motor transmission Ambient temperature is -10℃~40℃;
equipment in metallurgy, petroleum, fire control, mining, relative humidity is ≤ 95% (20℃~65℃);
petrochemical fields, this product is an ideal substitute for Well-ventilated indoor environment,
those with traditional star-delta starting mode and without dewing, flammable and
Well-designed
self-coupled reduced-voltage starting mode. explosive gas, conductive dust. ventilation
The performance indicators of this product fully comply

with the standard specifications of GB14048.6-2008.
H-07 > >>

Soft-Starter
4. Elementary wiring diagram
4.1 Elementary wiring diagram
three-phase 380V AC Input
QF
kM
R S T
K1
U1
V1
NJR2 se ries
sof t-st ar ter
W1
kM U V W
Bottom of NJR2 series

soft-starter 3M three-phase asyn
chronous motor
4.2 Schematic diagram of external terminals
B: 485 communication terminal

A: 485 communication terminal
Ammeter A
GND: +5V output ground
AO: (0~ 20)mA analog current output
H
A1: Spare terminal A1
24V: +24Voutput in the same group with COM
COM: Common terminal
X3: Instantaneous stop terminal
X2: Spare terminal X2
X1: Spare terminal X1
STOP: Stop terminal
RUN: Run terminal
K3: Malfunction output, normally open
K2: Programmable delay output, normally open
K1: Bypass output, normally open
5. Product characteristics
5.1 Intelligent optimized control by digital dual single-chip computer
5.2 Advanced varied soft starting modes
5.2.1 Voltage starting mode
5.2.2 Current-limiting starting mode
5.2.3 Kick voltage + current-limiting starting mode
5.2.4 Kick voltage + voltage starting mode
5.2.5 Current ramp starting mode
5.2.6 Dual-closed-loop starting mode
5.3 Built-in protection functions such as overload, input phase loss,
output phase loss, load short circuit, current-limiting start overtime
over-voltage, under-voltage and radiator overheating.
> >> H-08

Soft-Starter
5.4 More human-oriented large wide LCD display and operation,
easier and clearer operation and parameter setting, man-machine
dialogue (see ①, ②)
① ②
Removable
keyboard Large
widescreen
LCD
5.5 Display of operating voltage and current; display and 5.6 Patented design of full aluminum case (below 75kW),
memory of malfunction name and code (see ③) better radiation effect, natural air cooling, space saving (see ④)
③ ④
Patented design
of full-aluminum
Data display casing
and memory
H-09 > >>

Soft-Starter
5.7 RS485 communication function, facilitating networked control 5.8 Unique soft starting main/sub linkage function, facilitating
and automation engineering transformation; providing three relay the equipment manufacturing process control.
outputs, i.e. run, ramp to top and malfunction, for external
interlocking control (see ⑤, ⑥)
⑤ ⑥
Rs485
communication
function
Multi-functional
input and output
6. Overall and Installation Dimensions

NJR2-7.5D~45D
R3.5
H
145
128 190
Rated Power of Weight
Model Current Controlled (kg)
R
(A) Motor (kW)
NJR2-7.5D 15 7.5
NJR2-11D 22 11
5
READY RUN ERROR NJR2-15D 29 15
250
268
ENTER RUN
确定运行 NJR2-18.5D 36 18.5
SET STOP
设定停止
NJR2-22D 42 22
5
NJR2-30D 57 30
NJR2-37D 70 37
5
NJR2-45D 84 45
U V W
NJR2-55D~75D
200
R3.5 183 215

(A) Motor (kW)
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-55D 103 55
8
270
310
ENTER RUN
确定运行
SET STOP
NJR2-75D 140 75
设定停止
K1 K2 K3
U V W
> >> H-10

LV Capacitor
JKF8
5. Technical specifications
Parameters Technical Specifications
Sampling voltage 400VAC±10%

Sampling current 150mA~5 A
Rated frequency 50/60Hz±5%
Low-current capacitor
≤150 mA
connection prevention
Range of transformation ratio for sampling current transformer: 5~800,
Current transformation ratio
Preset value of the ratio (preset value in factory: 60, which means 300/5)
Time lag 5~120 seconds (preset value in factory: 30 seconds)
Full automation mode (displayed code F-0: 1): no need to set the capacitor connection threshold
or the capacitor disconnection threshold.
Preset mode
Manual setup mode(displayed code F-0: 0): need to set the capacitor connection threshold
and the capacitor disconnection threshold manually.
Capacitor connection Full automation mode: capacitor banks in the smallest step
threshold Manual mode: preset value for reactive power: 1~120 kvar (preset value in factory: 10 kvar)
Capacitor disconnection
Power factor, 0.85 ~ -0.95 continuously adjustable (preset value in factory: 1.00)
threshold
Over-voltage threshold 400 V~456 V (preset value in factory: 430 V)
JKF8-6 (loop number can be set between 1 and 6),

Loop number
JKF8-12(loop number can be set between 1 and 12)
Operation mode Automated cyclic opening/closing control & manual operation
Max. power consumption 15 W

Output contact point capacity 5A/230V(or 3A/400V)
Weighyt Approximately1.5 Kg
J-11 > >>

LV Capacitor
JKF8
6. Wiring diagram
High voltage side
10 Is1
9 Is2 Powter transformer
Total current transformer

8 JKF8 Rear View
A B C N
7 Us1
6 Us2
5 H
Low voltatge side

4
3 COM L
2 12 FU1 FU2 FU3
1 11
5A 1A 1A
P P
J1 J12
To load control panel
Note: If the coil voltage of the contactor is 230 V,

point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor is 400 V,
point P is connected to Phase B or C.
J
6.1 Connection terminal US1 and US2 are to be connected to the sampling voltage. AC 400 V shall be connected.
6.2 Terminal IS1 and IS2 are to be connected to the sampling current, which shall be sampled
from the transformed current generated by the current transformer for the load, and which shall not be in-phase with
US1 and US2 (if A is for current, then B and C are for voltage).
6.3 Terminal COM is the common shared terminal to be connected to number 1 to 12 relays in
the output lines of the controller, and each of the terminals 1~12 is to be connected to the output control line
to control the respective contactor in the respective compensation loop of the capacitor panel.
6.4 If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 230 V, then Point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 400 V, then Point P is connected to Phase C
(as long as it is not in-phase with terminal COM).
6.5 FU1~3 are to be connected to fusers which are supplied by the user.
> >> J-12

Soft-Starter
NJR2-90D~185D
253
220 241
φ9

(A) Motor (kW)
R
NJR2-90D 167 90
NJR2-110D 207 110

READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-132D 248 132
529
ENTER RUN
确定运行
426
SET
设定
STOP
停止 20
NJR2-150D 280 150
NJR2-160D 300 160
NJR2-185D 349 185

K1 K2 K3
NJR2-200D~315D
293
240 253
φ9

R
(A) Motor (kW)
NJR2-200D 375 200

READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-220D 404 220

564
ENTER RUN
确定运行
464
SET
设定
STOP
停止
NJR2-250D 459 250 25
NJR2-280D 514 280
NJR2-315D 579 315
K1 K2 K3
H-11 > >>

Soft-Starter
7. order information
Example 1:
the controlled motor has power of 45kW, used with soft start
cabinet or power distribution cabinet.
Order Model: NJR2-45D
Example 2:
the controlled motor has power of 90kW, used with soft start
cabinet or power distribution cabinet.
Model Selection Instructions
This soft starter is especially designed for four-pole

(squirrel-cage) 3-phase AC asynchronous motor.
a. For motors of other than 4 poles, it is recommended to

select a soft starter of one size larger.
Example: the controlled motor has power of 90kW,
used with soft start cabinet or power distribution cabinet.
b. When used for two-pole motors, since the starting
current is large, please set up the parameters correctly
according to Operating Instructions before use.
> >> H-12

Relay Relay
Protection Relay Protection Relay
NJB1-YW NJB1-X Relay NJYB1 XJ3
Liquid (Three-Phase Phase-Failure and Phase-Failure and
Floatless Relay Unbalance, Phase Phase-Sequence
Sequence, Lack-Phase Protection Relay Phase-Sequence
Protection) Protective Relay
Page I-01 Page I-02 Page I-40 Page I-41
NJB1-X1 Relay NJB1-Y Control Relay

(phase sequence, Single-Phase
phase failure Voltage Relay NJS6 NJS2
protection) Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
Page I-03 Page I-04

Page I-43 Page I-47
NJB1-S NJMC1
Time Delay Pulse Relay NJS1 NTE8
Relay Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
Page I-05 Page I-06 Page I-51 Page I-53
JSS48A JSS48B
NJBK2 NJBK5 Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
Motor Motor Controller
Protection
Relay
Page I-55 Page I-57

Page I-08 Page I-12
JSZ3 JSZ4
Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
NJBK5-5 NJBK6
Motor Controller Motor Protection
Relay
Page I-58 Page I-61
Page I-15 Page I-18

JSZ6 NJJ1
Time Delay Relay Counting Relay
NJBK7 NJBK9
Motor Protection Motor Protection
Relay Relay Page I-62 Page I-63
NJJ3 NJJ5-J
Counting Relay Electronic Counter
Page I-21 Page I-25
NJXB3 NJYB3
Relay Relay Page I-67 Page I-71
NJJ5-L NJJ6
Electronic Counting Relay
Time
Page I-29 Page I-32 Accumulator
Page I-73 Page I-75

JD-5A(NJBK3) JD-5
Integrated Integrated
Motor Protector Motor Protector
JDM15G JDM1-48
Counting Relay Counting Relay
Page I-35 Page I-37

Page I-79 Page I-82
Relay Relay
Control Relay General Purpose Relay
JDM3 SC3L
Microminiature Microminiature Power Relay
Electronic Electronic Time Socket Series
Counter Accumulator
Page I-84 Page I-86 Page I-119
NKG3 NKG2
Time Control Time Control
Switch Switch
Page I-88 Page I-90
NKG1 KG10D
Time Control Microcomputer
Switch Time Control Switch
Page I-92 Page I-94
KG10M KG316T
Microcomputer Microcomputer
Time-Controlling Time Control
Switch Switch
Page I-96 Page I-97
NJYW1 JYB-714
Liquid Liquid
Level Relay Floatless Relay
Page I-99 Page I-101
Time Relay
Socket Series
Page I-103
General Purpose Relay

NJX-13FW JQX-13F
Miniature Miniature
Power Relay High-power
Electromagnetic
Relay
JZX-22F JQX-10F
Miniature Miniature
Power Relay Power Relay
JTX JMK
Miniature Miniature
Power Relay Power Relay

Relay
Protection Relay
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-YW
Operating mode Continuous operating
Contact number 1 Switching
AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V,
Operating voltage
(other voltage may be custom made)
Voltage between electrodes AC9V
Power consumption Max value about 3VA
Operation resistance 5kΩ~100kΩ(adjustable)
Resetting resistance 250kΩmax
Response time 0.1s~10s(adjustable)
Cable length Max length 100m
Indication mode Green LED: power supply indication; red LED:relay operation indication
Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃
Installation mode Equipment or Track Type
4. Operation time-sequence diagram and wiring diagram

NJB1-YW operation time-sequence diagram
NJB1-YW Floatless Relay PWR
E 2 - E3
1. General
NJB1-YW Floatless Relay is applicable for water level automatic E 1- E2
control in industrial facilities & equipments, civil water tower,

high cistern, underground conservation pool, etc. 0N
RY: SW1
The control of automaitic water supply or drainage may be
achieved by a simgle operation of the function switch without 0FF
modifying the user's connectiong conditons.
This product is not applicable for water level control of NJB1-YW wiring diagram
flammable and explosive liquid, such as oil, chemical liquid, etc.
A1
2. Type designation ~ A2
N JB 1 - YW/□ E3
E2
E1
Rated voltage of control power supply 14 11
Function code: floatless relay E2

E1 12
E3
Design sequence No.
Relay
Company code 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
22.5max
102max
109max
I-01 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JB 1 - □/□
Rated voltage of control power supply
Function code: X: Three-Phase Unbalance,

Phase Sequence, Phase Failute Protection.
Design sequence No.
Relay
Company code
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-X
Three-phase, three-line mode: 380, 400, 415, 480VAC

Operating voltage
Three-phase, four-line mode: 220, 230, 240, 277VAC
Three-phase
Unbalance rate: 2%~22%
unbalance Operation
Unbalance
0.1~30s adjustable
NJB1-X Relay (Three-Phase Operation time

Unbalance, Phase Sequence, Contact capacity 3A 230VAC cosφ=1
Phase Failure Protection) Indication mode
Power supply: green LED, delay output:
yellow LED, alarm indication: red LED
1. General
NJB1-X relay (hereinafter called relay) are applied in
AC380V~480V control circuits at a frequency of Installation mode Equipment type or track type
50Hz/60Hz as protection elements of phase sequence,
phase failuire and phase unbalance,making or breaking
circuits.The relay with the true effective value of three 4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
phase AC voltatage provides more reliable operating NJB1-X
protection. The products meet the requirements of
standard IEC 60947-5-1.
22.5max
102 max
I
114max
5. Wiring diagram NJB1-X
N L1 L2 L 3
power supply
shares with
the rated input
voltage
Input
L1
L2 N
L3
18 15
Output
16
Load
> >> I-02

Relay
Protection Relay
3.1 Rated operational voltage: AC 200V~500V
3.2 Operation time: phase sequence, phase failure ≤ 0.1s
3.3 Contact capacity: Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; Ith: 3A
3.4 Mounting type: rail type, installation type
3.5 Power consumption: ≤3VA
3.6 Note: In normal operation, the N/O contact of the relay is closed,
the operation indicator is on.
4. Wiring diagram
Powersupply
L1 L2 L3 shareswith
theratedinput
voltage
Input
L1
L2
L3
18 15
Output
16
Load
NJB1-X1 Relay (Phase

Sequence, Phase Failure 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
Protection)
1. General
NJB1-X1 relay (phase sequence, phase failure protection) is
used as an phase sequence and phase failure protection device
in control circuits with an AC voltage of 200V~500V and a L1 L2 L3
114max
frequency of 50Hz to make and break the circuit. It cannot R
monitor the phase failure of motor load. 电源

102±0.50
The products meet the requirement of standard IEC 60947-5-1 动作
2. Type designation
NJB1-X1
N JB 1 - X1
102max
15 18 16
22.5max
Function code:
X1: phase sequence, phase failure relay
Design sequence No.
Protection and monitoring relay

Company code
I-03 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
Design Consequence number
Model Rated operation power supply Rated input voltage
DC24V
A: COM AC/DC 6mV~60mV
AC24V
NJB1-Y1 B: COM AC/DC 10mV~100mV
AC110V
C: COM AC/DC 30mV~300mV
AC220V
DC24V
A: COM AC/DC 1V~10V
AC24V
NJB1-Y2 B: COM AC/DC 3V~30V
AC110V
C: COM AC/DC 15V~150V
AC220V
DC24V
A: COM AC/DC 20V~200V
AC24V
NJB1-Y3 B: COM AC/DC 30V~300V
AC110V
C: COM AC/DC 60V~600V
AC220V
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-Y
Protection mode Over-voltage protection, under-voltage protection
DC24V; AC220V,
NJB1-Y Single-Phase Operating voltage
AC110V, AC24V, 50/60Hz
Voltage Relay Operation Setting Range 10%~100% of max rated input value
Operation time 0.1s~30s adjustable
1. General
NJB1-Y single phase voltage relays (hereinafter the relay for Repeating precision ±10% of operation value
short) are applied in AC 220V, 110V, 24V, frequency 50Hz Time error ±10% of set value
(or 60Hz) and DC 24V control circuits as single phase over- Input frequency 40~500Hz
voltage protection or under-voltage protection and indication
elements, making or breaking circuits as intended operating
values and time. Contact capacity 3A 230VAC cosφ=1
The product are in compliance with requirements of Mechanical Endurance ≤10,000,000 times
standard IEC 60947-5-1 Electrical Endurance Making 50,000times, breaking 30,000times
Installation mode Track and Bolts
2. Type designation
N JB 1- Y □/□ 4. Wiring diagram
NJB1-Y
Rated voltage of control power supply
Voltage specification (see table 1) Single-phase power supply
Function code Operation

power supply
A1
Y: voltage monitoring
A2
V1
I
Design sequence No. Input
V2 COM
V3
Relay Output
18 15
16
Company code
Load

NJB1-Y
22.5max
102max
114max
> >> I-04

Relay
Protection Relay
4. Wiring diagram
NJB1-S wiring diagram
A1 15
(-)
(+ ) (~)
(~)
16 18 A2

NJB1S
22.5max
102max
NJB1-S Time Delay Relay
114max
1. General
NJB1-S Series Monitoring Protection Relay is applicable for
controlling circuit @ A.C. 50Hz/ 60Hz, up to 380V rated NJB1-S
supply voltage and up to D.C.24V supply voltage as
monitoring protection element to make or break circuit
according to preset value.
NJBI-S time-delay relay is used in controlling circuit as time 35
7.5
delay element to make or break circuit according to preset

time. L
2. Type designation 27
N JB 1 - □/□
Use TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail for Installation
Rated supply voltage 6. Timing-sequence diagram

Feature code: S: Time-delay relay
Design sequence No. Mode 1: Delayed ON operation Mode 2: Interval operation
Monitoring protection relay

Source Source
Company code
T T
Output T T Output
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-S
Delayed ON operation/Interval
Operation mode
operation/Recycle operation
Mode 3: Symmetrical recycling OFF cycle first
Contact number Delay 1 Switching
Source
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A,Ith:3A
T T
Output T
AC220V AC380V 50Hz/60Hz T T
Operating voltage
(other size may be custom made)
Mode 4: Symmetrical recycling ON cycle first
Electrical Endurance 1×105
Mechanical Endurance 1×106 Source
T T T
Delay precision 5% Output T T T T

Installation mode Track mouning
Code name: 2 5 10 20 50 100 (time unit: s/min/h, optional)
Range: 0.2~2 0.5~5 1~10 2~20 5~50 10~100 12~120
Delay range
Note: delay range and time unit may be
selected through selection switch
I-05 > >>

Relay
2. Type designation
N JMC 1 - □ / □ □
Coil rated voltage :

AC:12~380V;
DC: 6~220V.
Number of poles: 1P,2P,3P,4P
Contact capacity: 16:16A 32:32A
Design sequence No.

Pulse relay
Company code
3. Normal operating conditions and mounting

conditions
Temperature range -25℃~+55℃
Pollution degree 1
Mounting position Any
Environmental protection category Dustproof type
NJMC1 pulse relay Overvoltage category Ⅱ
1. General
Contact switching current of up to 16A and 32A; a
4. Technical data
complete range of AC/DC specifications; in conformity with
GB/T 21711.1; NJMC1 pulse relay is a mechanical bistable 4.1 Contact data
relay that changes the contact state by inputting pulse
signals. Therefore, in comparison with common relays which Contact form 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
remain on when the armature is closed, pulse relay features Initial contact resistance 100mΩ
a low power consumption. Contact material Silver alloy
NJMC1-16:16A NJMC1-32:32A
Contact load (resistive)
250VC/28VDC 250VC/28VDC
Max. switching voltage 250VAC/125VDC NJMC1-32:32A
Max. switching current NJMC1-16:16A NJMC1-32:8000VA 896W
Max. switching power NJMC1-16:4000VA 448W
Electrical life (times) 1×105
Mechanical life (times) 1×106
4.2 Specification data

Coil rated voltage Coil resistance
VDC
6
(20℃)Ω ±10%
6
I
12 24
24 95
48 380
110 2000
127 2660
220 8000
Coil rated voltage Coil resistance

VAC (20℃)Ω ±10%
12 6
24 24
48 95
130 700
220 2000
230 2185
240 2380
380 6000
> >> I-06

Relay
4.3 Characteristics data
Insulation resistance 100MΩ(500VDC)
Dielectric strength Between contact & coil 4000VDC
Between open contacts 1500VDC
Operation time ≤20ms
2
Shock (resistance) Acceleration: 100m/s , pulse duration: 11ms
Vibration 1mm double amplitude, 10~55Hz
Mounting type Rail type
Overall dimensions (mm) 86×70
4.4 Coil data

Pulse voltage duration ≥50ms (200ms is recommended)
Voltage range 85%~110%
5. Wiring diagram
L
N

NJMC1-16
70
35.5
18 36
86
1P,2P 3P,4P
NJMC1-32
70
35.5
18 36 54 72
86
1P 2P 3P 4P
I-07 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 2 - □/□□
Supply voltage
Specification of rated current
Rated current of the casing

Design sequence No.
Motor protection relay
Company code
3.1 Altitude ≤2000m.
3.2 Ambient air temperature -5℃ ~ +40℃, with daily average
≤+35℃.
3.3 Atmospheric condition: when the highest temperature is
+40℃, relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
higher relative humidity shall be allowable at lower temperature.
The max monthly average relative humidity of the most humid
month shall be not more than 90% and the lowest monthly
average temperature of the same month should be no more
than +25 ℃, condensed dew on surface of the product due to
NJBK2 Motor the change of the temperature should be taken into account.
3.4 Pollution Level: Level 3.
Protection Relay 3.5 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
3.6 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane shall
1. General ≤±5°.
NJBK2 series motor protection relay (hereinafter referred to 3.7 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.
protector as simply) is applicable for overload, locked-rotor, 3.8 At places without explosive risk, without gases that may be
phase-failure, three phase current unbalance, earthing and corrosive to metal or gases that may cause damage to the
PTC temperature protection of AC motor @ A.C.50Hz, less insulation, and with little conducting dust
than 660V rated operating voltage and 2A ~ 800A rated 3.9 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
operating current for its continuous working or with and not being full of steam.
discontinuous working.
This product meets the requirements of IEC 60947- 4-1 4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage AC690V, rated frequency
50/60Hz.
Rated Setting current Suitable motor
Type
current (A) range (A) power (kW)
NJBK2-200/10 10 2~10 1~5
NJBK2-200/50 50 10~50 5~25
NJBK2-200/200 200 40~200 20~100
NJBK2-400/400 400 160~400 80~200
NJBK2-800/800 800 320~800 160~400 I
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated
frequency 50Hz/60Hz, Utility classes, rated operating voltage,
rated operating current and conventional heating current.
Utility classes AC-15
Rated operating voltage (V) 240 380
Rated operating current (A) 1.5 0.95
5. Design features
5.1 Equipped with functions of overload, locked-rotor, phase-
failure, three-phase unbalance, earthing and PTC temperature
protection etc.
5.2 Six indicators indicate status of power supply, operation,
phase-failure (three phase unbalance), overload, earthing and
temperature, respectively. Equipped with function of fault
memory.
5.3 four kinds of trip class
5.4 Digital dial-up settings with high precision.
5.5 Three kinds of reset modes: manual reset, remote manual
reset and automatic reset
> >> I-08

Relay
Protection Relay
5.6 Installation mode: installation in parts and integral installation. Transformer Installation: bolts installation and Track installation. Relay
Installation: Rapid Track installation through meter.
5.7 Equipped with function of six times of current to test [Test by 6 times of the current].
6. Protection features
6.1 Operation characteristics under three-phase balanced-load status
Times of Ambient
S.N. Trip class Operation time Test condition
setting current temperature℃
10A
10
1 1.05 <2h non-tripping Start from cold status
20
30
10A
10
2 1.2 <2h tripping Start right after Item No.1 20±2
20
30
10A <2min
10 <4min
3 1.5 Start right after Item No.1
20 <8min
30 <12min
10A 2s<tp≤10s
10 4s<tp≤10s
4 7.2 Start from cold status
20 6s<tp≤20s
30 9s<tp≤30s
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status
Times of setting current Ambient

S.N. Operation time Test condition
Any two phases The third phase temperature℃
1 1.0 0.9 <2h non-tripping

2 0.3~1.0 <Imax×40% ≤5s Start from cold status 20±2
3 0.3~1.0 0 ≤5s
6.3 Tripping feature 6.4 Performance feature of earthing protection

NJBK2 current-time characteristic curve Zero sequence current (A) Operation time (s)
≥0.5 ≤1
12 0min
100 min 6.5 Protection feature of pre-buried PTC thermistor in motor:
PTC thermistor protection is carried out by detecting resistance
50min value of thermistor output from PTC detector pre-buried in
stator winding or bearing of motor and taking it as protection
20min condition to judge whether motor is overheating, when PTC
reaching reacting resistance value, reacting delay<1s.
10min
PTC protection
5min
2min
1min
50s Ω Tripping delay PTC tripping
Tripping reset
20s 3000
30
10s 20 1650
1600
10
5s
10A
2s
t
1s PTC temperature alarm Alarm clearance
1 2 5 8
×Ｉe
I-09 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
6.6 Reset feature:Manual reset, automatic reset and remote 9. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
manual reset are available for option Resetting time varies 9.1 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-200 transformer
according to different trip class, among the range of 4min to
12min.
112.5 max
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V/AC230V voltage
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V/AC230V voltage
6 8 max
61.5 max
6/ T3 4/ T 2 2/T 1
L1
L2
L3
N
S1
66.4±0.32
S2
K1M K1M 2× φ5.5
Reset
A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
K1M
C1
C2 N J B K2- X
71.4±0.23
COM
8 6 . 5m a x
A
C B
COM
CT C
B
C
B CO M
A
A
T1 T2
M
3~ 2×φ2.75
97±0.26
Top view
7.2 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V/AC400V voltage
9.2 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-200 macropore
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V/AC400V voltage transformer
L1
L2
L3
N
26
S1
92max
S2
83max
K1M Reset
36
K1M
A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
K1M
C1
C2
COM
C
86
COM
CT C
B B
A
A 147max
T1 T2 118
M
3~
70max
60
8. Accessory instruction
S.N. Designation Quantity Remarks I
It is suggested to be used
1 NJBK2-200 conductive bar 3 when main circuit current is 9.3 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-400 transformer
within the range of 80A-200A.
2 NJBK2 wire holder 2 Instrument installation

3 NJBK2 clamp 1 Instrument installation 30
30
104max
128
193max
11.5
6.5
81max
60 ±0.3
64 ± 0.3
Top view
> >> I-10

Relay
Protection Relay
9.4 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-800 transformer 9.7 Overall and Amounting dimensions of relay of protector
79 ±0.5
40
121max
40
65 ±0.5
164
247max
11.5 6.5

10.1 Designation and specification of protector, select control
101max
80±0.3
current and voltage (AC220V, AC230V, AC380V,AC400V),

setting current range
(2A~10A, 10A~50A, 40A~200A, 160A~400A, 320A~800A),
82±0.3 accessories (NJBK2-20 conductive bar, NJBK2 wire holder, NJBK2
clamp) according to operating requirements.
Top view
10.2 Order Quantity.
9.5 Overall and Amounting dimensions of module sample

32max
35.5
95max
26max
Top view
9.6 Overall and Amounting dimensions of relay of protector
65max
A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
NJBK2-200
88±0.26
95max
35 0+0.19
Power supply Operation Phase failure Overload Earthing Temperature

+10
+20
+5
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
RESET TEST
CURRENTSETTING TRIP
T1 T2 C1 C2 COM C B A
71max
I-11 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 5 - □ □ / □ □

Rated control supply voltage
Function code
Blank: with liquid level relay
D: without liquid level relay
10: frame size code
Design sequence No.
Motor controller
Company code
3.1 Altitude: the altitude of the mounting location should not
exceed 2000m;
3.2 Ambient tempeature: -5℃~+40℃, and the average
NJBK5 Motor Controller temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃；
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity at the
mounting location should not exceed 50% at the maximum
1. General
temperature of +40℃. The relative humidity may be higher at
NJBK5 series motor controller (hereinafter referred to as
lower temperatures. Special measures should be taken if
controller) is mainly used in circuits with a frequency of AC
condensation occurs on the product occasionally due to
50Hz (or 60Hz), a rated operational voltage of up to 380V
temperature variation;
and a rated control power of up to 11kW (current up to
3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
22A) to control the direct start and stop of water pumps or
3.5 Mounting category: Ⅲ;
motors, provide motors with overload and phase failure
protection, and realize automatic liquid level control for 3.6 In places where there is no significant vibration or impact;
civil water towers and reservoirs. 3.7 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
This product is not applicable to the liquid level control amount of gas or dust to cause metal corrosion or insulation
of low-conductivity liquids, such as oil, purified water, failure;
inflammable and explosive chemical liquids and high- 3.8 In places where rain and snow protection is provided;
density sewage. 3.9 The inclination from the vertical plane should not exceed 5°.
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1.
> >> I-12

Relay
Protection Relay
4 Technical data
4.1 Main data and technical characteristics
Max. rated power (kW)

Conventional Model of Model of Setting Number of
Type heating AC-3 matching matching current turns of
current (A) 380V 220V AC contactor motor protector range (A) protector (turn)
NJBK5-10 0.72A~2.4A
2.4 1.1 0.55 CJX2-1210 JD-8/0.5A~5A 0.72~2.4 5
NJBK5-10D 0.72A~2.4A
NJBK5-10 3.5A~11A
12 5.5 3 CJX2-1210 JD-8/2A~20A 3.5~11 1
NJBK5-10D 3.5A~11A
NJBK5-10 10A~16A
16 7.5 4 CJX2-1810 JD-8/2A~20A 10~16 1
NJBK5-10D 10A~16A
NJBK5-10 20A~25A
25 11 5.5 CJX2-2510 JD-8/20A~80A 20~25 1
NJBK5-10D 20A~25A
4.2 Rated control supply voltage Us: AC220V, AC380V.

4.3 Degree of protection of enclosure: IP55.
4.4 Protection characteristics of the controller
4.4.1 Phase failure protection characteristics of the controller: In case of failure of any phase of the three-phase main circuit passing
through the center hole of the motor comprehensive protector in the controller, the motor comprehensive protector operates for a
period of ≤5s.
4.4.2 Overload protection characteristics of the controller under balanced three-phase load.
Setting current
No. Operation time Starting conditions
multiple
2 1.2 Operation within 2h Start after No.1
3 1.5 Tripping class 30 ≤12min Start after applying a 1.0 times setting current for 2h
4 7.2 Tripping class 30 9s<Tp≤30s Cold state start
4.5 Down-lead distance of liquid level control electrode: 200m max.

4.6 Mounting type: installation type.
5. Features
The controller consists of a CJX2 series AC contactor, a JD-8 series motor comprehensive protector and an NJB1-YW1 liquid level relay
in a protective enclosure and is divided into two types, with liquid level relay and without liquid level relay. Products with liquid level relay
are used to control the start and stop and automatic pumping and drainage of water pumps and provide overload and phase failure
protection. Products without liquid level relay are used to control the start and stop of motors and provide overload and phase failure
protection.
Setting of the motor comprehensive protector in the controller is required before it is connected and put into use.
6. Wiring diagram
a. Connection diagram of NJBK5-10 in case both the control b. Connection diagram of NJBK5-10 in case the main circuit
circuit voltage and the main circuit voltage are AC380V voltage is AC380V and the control circuit voltage is AC220V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
FU FU
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 A1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 A1

STP NJB1-YW1 STP NJB1-YW1
KM KM NJB1-YW1 KM KM NJB1-YW1
E1 E2 E3 E1 E2 E3
A2 A2 A2 A2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
High 96 High
96
JD-8 Medium JD-8 Medium
95 Pool Low 95 Pool Low
11 14NO 11 14NO
JD-8 JD-8
NJB1-YW1 ST NJB1-YW1 ST
14 13NO KM 14 13NO KM
U V W U V W
M M
3～ 3～
I-13 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
a.Connection diagram of NJBK5-10D in case both the control
circuit voltage and the main circuit voltage are AC380V
L1 L2 L3
FU
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1

STP
KM KM
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 A2
JD-8 96
JD-8 14NO
95 ST
13NO KM
U V W
M
3～
b.Connection diagram of NJBK5-10D in case the main circuit

voltage is AC380V and the control circuit voltage is AC220V
L1 L2 L3 N
FU
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1

STP
KM KM
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 A2
96 14NO
JD-8 JD-8
95 ST
13NO KM
U V W
M
3～
I
2×Φ6
START
PUMP
NJBK5-10
FULL MOTOR CONTROLLER R
NJBK5-10
162±0.5
198max
STOP Standard IEC60947-4-1

Rated operating current Ie
0.72A-2.4A
3.5A-11A
ZHEJIANGCHINTELECTRICSCO.,LTD.
10A-16A
20A-25A
Rated Control Supply Voltage Us
50HzAC220V
OVERLOAD
50HzAC380V
△
! Motor controller used for thefirst time,

motor intefrated protector should be setted!
Status Indication
red on-overload
green off-
phase failure
A B C
60.8±0.5
127max
118max
> >> I-14

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 5 - □ / □ □
5: frame size code
Design sequence No.
Motor controller
Company code
3.1 Altitude: the altitude of the mounting location should not
exceed 2000m;
NJBK5-5 Motor Controller temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃；
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity at the
mounting location should not exceed 50% at the maximum
1. General
temperature of +40℃. The relative humidity may be higher at
NJBK5-5 motor controller (hereinafter referred to as
lower temperatures. Special measures should be taken if
controller) is mainly used in circuits with a frequency of AC
condensation occurs on the product occasionally due to
50Hz/60Hz, a rated operational voltage of up to 220V and
temperature variation。
a rated control power of up to 2.2kW (current up to 20A)
3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
to control the direct start and stop of single-phase water
3.5 Mounting category: Ⅱ;
pumps, provide overload and underload protection (pump
3.6 In places where there is no significant vibration or impact;
runaway protection), and realize automatic liquid level
3.7 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
control for civil water towers and reservoirs.
amount of gas or dust to cause metal corrosion or insulation
This product is not applicable to the liquid level control
failure;
of oil, purified water, inflammable and explosive chemical
3.8 In places where rain and snow protection is provided;
liquids, corrosive liquids and high-density sewage.
3.9 The inclination from the vertical plane should not exceed 5°.
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1
I-15 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
4. Technical data
Conventional Rate power

Setting current Rated operational Rated operational
Model Type heating
range (A) voltage (V) current (A)
current (A) kW HP
2A~10A 2A~10A 0.25~1.1 1/3~1.5
NJBK5-5 20 ΑC220 AC-120
4A~20A 4A~20A 0.55~2.2 3/4~3
4.2 Rated control supply voltage Us: AC220V.

4.3 Rated control supply voltage fluctuation range: (85%~110%)Us.
4.5 Operating characteristics
4.5.1 When overload protection is active, the red “Fault” indicator of the controller lights up permanently, and overload protection
operates according to tripping class 10, see Table 2.
Table 2 Operating characteristics of overload protection
Setting current
No. Operation time Starting conditions
multiple
2 1.2 Operation within 2h Start after No.1
3 1.5 ≤4min Start after applying a 1.0 times setting current for 2h
4 7.2 4s<Tp≤10s Cold state start
4.5.2 Operating characteristics of underload protection (pump runaway protection): When the actual operational current of the pump
motor is less than 20%~100% of the rated current of the motor, the red “Fault” indicator of the controller flashes and, after a delay of
60s±10s, the controller stops operation.
4.5.3 Protection return characteristics: After the operation of the overload or underload protection (pump runaway protection) of the
controller, the controller restarts automatically after a delay of 30min±3min.
4.5.4 Reset characteristics: power-off reset, the reset time ≤ 1min.
4.6 Down-lead distance of liquid level control electrode: 500m max.
4.7 Requirements for the liquid under control: general domestic water or high-conductivity sewage.
4.8 Mounting type: installation type.
5. Structure and principle

The controller consists of four parts, enclosure, base, sealing ring and main control panel. The enclosure has a “Force Start” button,
which is used to start the pump motor forcibly to fill the pool when the highest water level has not been reached and becomes invalid
when the highest water level has been reached. It also has a “Power” switch, which is used to switch on or off the power supply of the
controller (position “I” is on, and position “0” is off).
There are three liquid level detection electrode wires in the controller, E1, E2 and E3, which should be connected and installed in
high, medium and low positions in the pool under control by the user. When the water level in the pool is lower than position E3, the
controller starts the pump motor to pump water and the yellow “Water Level” indicator on the controller panel flashes, until the water
level in the pool reaches position E1. At this time, the yellow “Water Level” indicator on the controller panel lights up permanently and
the pump stops pumping.
I
6. Installation and commissioning
6.1 Before installation, read the operating instructions carefully. Then, connect the wires in accordance with the connection diagram.
During connection, the live wire and neutral wire of the controller power supply should be distinguished from each other, the three
liquid level detection electrodes in the controller, E1, E2 and E3, should be installed in high, medium and low positions in the pool under
control by the user, the terminals should be highly conductive.
6.2 Before the controller is put into use, overload setting must be carried out. Otherwise, overload protection will be inactive. Overload
setting is accomplished by simply setting the current value on the overload dial of the controller to the rated current of the motor. The
underload setting value can generally be 50% of the rated current. The user may also carry out underload setting after detecting the no-
load current of the motor and calculating the percentage to the rated current.
6.3 After checking the connection and carrying out overload and underload setting, press the power switch on the controller panel to
switch on the power supply and carry out relevant overload and underload tests. The controller may be used only if it operates normally.
If a fault occurs, check the connection or the overload and underload setting.
> >> I-16

Relay
Protection Relay
7. Wiring diagram
Figure 1 Connection diagram
N L
Power Liquid level
Neutral Live supply Motor electrode
wire wire
L N N L E3 E2 E1
QF
High
Pool Medium
Low
M
～
Figure 2 Schematic diagram of setting knob
6 60
4 8 40 80
2 10 20 100
Overload setting (A) Underload setting (%)
8. Overall and mounting dimentions (mm)
4×Φ6
NJBK5-5
FORCED START
NJBK5-5 MOTOR CONTROLLER
Standard IEC60947-4-1
146max
111±0.29
Rated operating current Ie
2A～10A
4A～20A
Rated Power Pe
0.25kW～1.1kW
0.55kW～2.2kW
Rated Control Supply Voltage Us
50HzAC220V POWER
Motor controller used for thefirst time,

over load should be setting
Status Indication
Power Water level Failure
61±0.2
84max 96max
I-17 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 6 - 36 / □ / □ / □
Type of operation delay
Setting current code
Frame size
Design sequence No.
Company code
3.1 Altitude: should not exceed 2000m;
temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃；
NJBK6 3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity should not
exceed 50% at the maximum temperature of +40℃. The
Motor Protection Relay relative humidity may be higher at lower temperatures, for
example, the air humidity can be up to 90% at +20℃.
1. General Special measures should be taken if condensation occurs on the
NJBK6 series motor protection relay is used to provide product occasionally due to temperature variation;
overload, phase failure, three-phase current unbalance and 3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
locked rotor protection for AC motors with a frequency of 3.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
AC 50Hz, a rated insulation voltage of below 690V and a plane should not exceed ±5°；
rated operational current of 1A~36A that operate 3.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
continuously or intermittently. amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1 insulation failure;
full of vapor;
vibration;
> >> I-18

Relay
Protection Relay
4. Technical data
No. Setting current range Model of matching contactor Matching motor power
NJBK6-36/3/□/□ 1A~3A CJX2-25/NC1-25 0.5kW~1.5kW

NJBK6-36/9/□/□ 3A~9A CJX2-25/NC1-25 1.5kW~4.5kW
NJBK6-36/24/□/□ 8A~24A CJX2-25/NC1-25 4kW~12kW
NJBK6-36/36/□/□ 12A~36A CJX2-32/NC1-32 6kW~18kW
4.2 Technical data of main circuit

Rated operational current: 1A~36A, rated insulation voltage: 690V, rated frequency: 50Hz;
4.3 Technical data of control circuit
Number of contacts: 1 group of change-over contacts;
Contact capacity: Ue/Ie: AC-15 380V/0.95A, 240V/1.5A; Ith: 5A;
Rated frequency: 50Hz；
4.4 Technical data of auxiliary circuit
Control supply voltage: AC 220×(1±10%)V, AC 380×(1±10%)V;
Rated frequency: 50Hz；
4.5 Operating characteristics
4.5.1 The operating characteristics of overload protection are given in Table 2.
Setting current
No. Operation time Starting conditions Starting conditions
multiple
1 1.05 No operation within 2h Cold state +20℃
2 1.2 Operation within 2h Hot Start +20℃
3 1.5 Operation within 2min Hot Start +20℃
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s Cold state +20℃
4.5.2 Operating characteristics of phase failure protection

In case of failure of any phase of the three-phase current of the main circuit, the protector operates for a period of ≤5s.
4.5.3 Operating characteristics of three-phase current unbalance protection
When the three-phase current of the main circuit meets the following two formulas, the protector operates for a period of ≤5s.
Imax-Imin
×100%>30%
Iavr
Imax≥0.5×Iset
where: Imax: Max. current value of the three-phase current;
Imin: Min. current value of the three-phase current;
Iavr: average value of the three-phase current;
Iset: setting current value.
4.5.4 Operating characteristics of locked rotor protection
The locked rotor current is set to 6Ie in the protector. When the current of the main circuit is greater than the locked rotor current,
the protector operates for a period
of ≤10s after a delay.
4.6 Reset characteristics
After the operation of the protector, if the control supply voltage is normal, the protector can be reset manually; if the control supply
voltage is off, the protector resets immediately.
5. Connection diagram
The connection diagrams in case the control supply voltage is AC220V and AC380V are shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 FU1
QS QS
W1 V1 U1 W1 V1 U1
KM KM
FU2 FU2
95 A1 95 A1
W2 V2 U2 W2 V2 U2
KM QF1 KM QF1
W3 V3 U3 STP ST W3 V3 U3 STP ST
96 A2 96 A2
QF1 QF1
W4 V4 U4 KM W4 V4 U4 KM
M M
3~ 3~
I-19 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
6. Installation and commissioning 9. Environmental conditions for the storage of the
6.1 Before installation, read the operating instructions carefully.
protector
Then, connect the wires in accordance with the connection 9.1 Temperature: -25℃~+40℃
diagram. 9.2 Relative humidity (at 25℃): should not exceed 85%
6.1.1 Terminals A1 and A2 are the control power supply input 9.3 Protect from rain and snow
terminals of the protector; 95 and 96 are the output control 9.4 The guaranteed storage period of the product is 18 months.
terminals (N/C), 95 and 98 are N/O contacts. Products exceeding the storage period must be reinspected
6.1.2 Plug the protector into the outlet terminal of the contactor before being put into use.
and connect the control circuit in accordance with Figure 2 and
Figure 3.
6.2 Adjustment of setting current value
Adjust the setting value of the protector using the setting
knob with indicating arrow and the setting current value on the
label plate according to the rated current marked
on the motor nameplate and the load conditions of the motor.
Adjust the setting current value of the protector to the scale
equal to the rated current value marked on the motor
nameplate.
6.3 Commissioning: After checking the connection and setting,
switch on the power supply and operate the start button. The
motor should run normally and the (green) running
indicator on the protector panel should light up. If the red
indicator flashes, finely adjust the setting value until the red
indicator stops flashing.
7. Structure and principle
7.1 Operating principle: The protector detects the current of the
main circuit of the motor by means of the current transformer
and judge if overload or phase failure has occurred
in the motor. In case of overload, it simulates the heat
accumulation state of the motor by means of the singlechip and,
when the heat accumulation reaches the set limit,
disconnects the N/C contact of the built-in electromagnetic relay.
7.2.1 Has phase failure, overload, three-phase current unbalance
and locked rotor protection functions.
7.2.2 Has two indicators indicating running and fault states.
7.2.3 Has a setting curent quantified continuously adjustable
device.
7.2.4 The main circuit uses plug-in connection for use in
combination with the specified model of contactor.
54.5max 82max
I
R 24
18 30
/
T R
88max
12 36
FAULT RUN A
NJBK6-36
> >> I-20

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 7 - 800 / □

(AC220, AC380, AC/DC100V-240V)
Specification code
Design sequence No.
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Altitude: should not exceed 2000m;
temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃;
NJBK7 Motor protection relay 3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity should not
exceed 50% at the maximum temperature of +40℃. The
relative humidity may be higher at lower temperatures, for
1. General example, the air humidity can be up to 90% at +20℃. Special
NJBK7 series motor protection relay (hereinafter measures should be taken if condensation occurs on the product
referred to as protector) is used to provide overload, locked occasionally due to temperature variation;
rotor, phase failure, three-phase current unbalance, ground 3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
and PTC temperature protection for AC motors with a 3.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
frequency of AC 50Hz, a rated insulation voltage of up to plane should not exceed ±5°;
690V and a rated operational current of 80A-800A that 3.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
operate continuously or intermittently. The protector uses amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
flexible Rogowski coil to acquire current and features wide insulation failure;
setting current range, high accuracy and convenient 3.7 In places with rain and snow protection equipment and not
installation. The protector has RS485 interface and 4mA- full of vapor;
20mA analog transmission interface, permits network 3.8 In places where there is no significant shake, impact or
communication and can realize remote monitor and vibration;
control and fault inquiry of motors by means of upper 3.9 Mounting category: Ⅲ;
computer. The protector is genenrally used in combination 3.10 Degree of protection of enclosure: Ip20.
with AC contactor.
Standards: GB 14084.4, IEC 60947-4-1.
I-21 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
4. Main data and technical characteristics
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage: AC690V, rated frequency: 50Hz
Model Setting current (A) Setting current range (A) Matching motor power (kW)
NJBK7-800/□ 800 80~800 40~400
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: rated insulation voltage: AC380V, rated frequency: 50Hz, data of auxiliary contact
Usage category AC-15
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 240 380
Rated operational current Ie(A) 1.5 0.95
Conventional heating current Ith(A) 5

4.3.1 Split mounting;
4.3.2 LCD display, key setting;
4.3.3 Has start delay function;
4.3.4 Has fault memory function, permits inquiry of fault record;
4.3.5 Has RS485 interface, supports MODBUS protocol, permits network communication;
4.3.6 Has 4mA-20mA analog output interface;
4.3.7 Has two groups of output contacts, 1Z protection contact and 1H auxiliary contact, and permits autotransformer reduced voltage
starting and star-delta starting;
4.3.8 Power consumption: ≤3VA.
5. Protection charactersitics
5.1 Operating characteristics of overload protection
Overload multiple
Overload Operation 1.1 1.2 1.5 2 5 6 7.2 Note

curve time (s)
Kr=1 75 63 40 22 3.6 2.5 1.8
Kr=2 150 125 80 45 7.2 5 3.5 In conformity with Class 10A
Kr=3 298 250 160 90 14 10 6.9 In conformity with Class 10
Kr=4 595 500 320 180 29 20 14 In conformity with Class 20
5.2 Operating characteristics of phase failure protection Tripping characteristic curve

When the current of any phase of the three-phase current of
the main circuit is equal to zero, the protector operates for a
period of ≤5s.
5.3 Operating characteristics of three-phase current unbalance
100min
protection
When the three-phase current of the main circuit meets the
following formula, the protector operates for a period of ≤5s.
50min I
20min
Imax-Imin
×100% ≥ set current unbalance rate 10min
Imax
Imax: Max. phase current value 5min
Imin: Min. phase current value
2min
5.4 Operating characteristics of ground protection
When zero sequence current ≥ set ground protection 1min
Kr=5
current value, the protector operates for a period of ≤1s.
5.5 Operating characteristics of locked rotor protection Kr=4
When Max. phase current ≥ setting current value×set
locked rotor multiple, the protector operates for a period of ≤ Kr=3
Kr=2
1s.
5S Kr=1
5.6 Operating characteristics of temperature protection
The over-temperature protection function of the protector is
2S
accomplished by detecting the resistance of the PTC thermistor
preembedded in the motor stator widing. When the resistance 1S
1 2 5 8
of the PTC thermistor ≥2.5kΩ, the protector operates for a
×Iset
period of ≤1s.
5.7 Communication: The protector provides RS485 interface and
supports MODBUS protocol.
> >> I-22

Relay
Protection Relay
6. Connection diagram Figure 4 Star-delta starting connection diagram in case the
control supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational voltage
Figure 1 Direct starting connection diagram in case the control
is 220V
supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational voltage is 220V
L1 L2 L3 N
QF
L1 L2 L3 N SB1 KM2 KM3 KA
SB2
KM2
QF KA KM3KM2
SB2 SB1 KM1 KM1 KM2
KM1 KM1
KM1
KA KA
KM1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CT A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96
CT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 C1 NJBK7电动机保护继电器
A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96 11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
NJBK7 Motor protection delay
10 C1
KM3 M 4mA~20mA
θ
11 C2 T1 PE
T2 3~
12 13 8 9 14
M 4mA~20mA
θ
KM2
3~

Figure 2 Secondary current direct starting connection diagram in
case the control supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational
voltage is 220V
L1 L2 L3 N
48.5max
过载断相不平衡旋转
复位
160max
QF 设置
80A～800A NJBK7电动机保护继电器
SB2 SB1 KM1

96.5max
KM1
KM1 113max
CT 130.5max
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96 152±0.5
10 C1 175max
11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
M 4mA~20mA
θ
3~
Figure 3 Autotransformer reduced voltage starting connection

diagram in case the control supply voltage is 220V and the rated
operational voltage is 220V
115max
L1 L2 L3 N
93max
QF
SB2 SB1 KM2 KA
KM2
KA KM1 KM2
KM1 KM3 KM2 KM3
KA KA
KM2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CT A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96
NJBK7 Motor protection delay
10 C1
11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
M 4mA~20mA
θ
3~
I-23 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
Figure 6 Transformer mounting type 1
Figure 7 Transformer mounting type 2
Figure 8 Opening size of the main machine

45.5±0.5
92±0.5
> >> I-24

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JBK 9 - □ □ □/□/□
Control power supply voltage

(AC220V, AC380V, AC/DC100V~240V)
Rated current: 5, 10, 30, 50, 200
None: 4mA~20mA analog transformation

is not available
M: 4mA~20mA analog transmission
None: Communication interface is not available

T: RS485 communication interface
Enclosure grade: 50, 200
Design sequence No.

Company code
NJBK9 Motor protection relay

1. General
NJBK9 series motor protection relay (hereinafter 3. Operation conditions
referred to as “Pro-tecter”) is used for overload protection, 3.1 Altitude: should not exceed 2000m;
locked rotor protection, phase failure protection, three-phase 3.2 Ambient tempeature: -5℃~+40℃, and the average
unbalance protection, grounding protection and PTC temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃;
temperature protection for AC electromotors of a frequency 3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity should not
of 50Hz with a rated insulation voltage of up to 690V and a exceed 50% at the maximum temperature of +40℃. The
rated operating current of 1A-200A during long-term and relative humidity may be higher at lower temperatures, for
discontinuous operation. example, the air humidity can be up to 90% at +20℃. Special
This protector is provided with RS485 interface and 4-20mA measures should be taken if condensation occurs on the product
current loop transmitter interface for network communication occasionally due to temperature variation;
and performs remote monitor & control on the motor and 3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
fault query through opper computer. 3.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
This protecter is usually used to combine with AC contactor. plane should not exceed ±5°;
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1 3.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
insulation failure;
full of vapor;
vibration;
3.9 Mounting category: Ⅲ;
I-25 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage: AC690V, rated frequency: 50Hz
Model Setting current (A) Setting current range (A) Matching motor power (kW)
NJBK9-50□□/5/□ 5 1~5 0.5~2.5

NJBK9-50□□/10/□ 10 2~10 1~5
NJBK9-50□□/30/□ 30 6~30 3~15
NJBK9-50□□/50/□ 50 10~50 5~25
NJBK9-50□□/200/□ 200 40~200 20~100
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: rated insulation voltage: AC380V, rated frequency: 50Hz, data of auxiliary contact
Usage category AC-15
Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 240 380
Rated operational current Ie(A) 1.5 0.95
Conventional heating current Ith(A) 5
4.3 Product selection table
Locked
Model Overload Phase failure Ground PTC Communication 4mA~20mA Unbalance
rotor
NJBK9-50/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-50T/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-50M/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-50TM/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-200/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-200T/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-200M/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
NJBK9-200TM/□/□ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

4.4.1 Split mounting;
4.4.2 LCD display, key setting;
4.4.3 Has start delay function;
4.4.4 Has fault memory function, permits inquiry of fault record;
4.4.5 Has RS485 interface, supports MODBUS protocol, permits network communication;
4.4.6 With 4mA-20mA analog output interface;
4.4.7 Has two groups of output contacts, 1Z protection contact and 1H auxiliary contact, and permits autotransformer reduced voltage
starting and star-delta starting;
4.4.8 Power consumption: ≤3VA.
5. Protection charactersitics
I
5.1 Operating characteristics of overload protection
Overload multiple
Overload Operation 1.1 1.2 1.5 2 5 6 7.2 Note

curve time (s)
Kr=1 75 63 40 22 3.6 2.5 1.8
Kr=2 150 125 80 45 7.2 5 3.5 In conformity with Class 10A
Kr=3 298 250 160 90 14 10 6.9 In conformity with Class 10
> >> I-26

Relay
Protection Relay
5.2 Operating characteristics of phase failure protection Figure 2 Secondary current direct starting connection diagram in
When the current of any phase of the three-phase current of case the control supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational
the main circuit is equal to zero, the protector operates for a voltage is 220V
period of ≤5s.
5.3 Operating characteristics of three-phase current unbalance
protection L1 L2 L3 N
When the three-phase current of the main circuit meets the
following formula, the protector operates for a period of ≤5s. QF
SB2 SB1 KM1
Imax-Imin
×100% ≥ set current unbalance rate KM1
Imax
KM1
Imax: Max. phase current value
CT
Imin: Min. phase current value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96
5.4 Operating characteristics of ground protection
NJBK9电动机保护继电器
When zero sequence current ≥ set ground protection 10 C1
current value, the protector operates for a period of ≤1s. 11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
5.5 Operating characteristics of locked rotor protection
When Max. phase current ≥ setting current value×set
M 4mA~20mA
θ
locked rotor multiple, the protector operates for a period of ≤ 3~
1s.
5.6 Operating characteristics of temperature protection
The over-temperature protection function of the protector is
accomplished by detecting the resistance of the PTC thermistor
preembedded in the motor stator widing. When the resistance Figure 3 Autotransformer reduced voltage starting connection
of the PTC thermistor ≥2.5kΩ, the protector operates for a diagram in case the control supply voltage is 220V and the rated
period of ≤1s. operational voltage is 220V
5.7 Communication: The protector provides RS485 interface and
supports MODBUS protocol.
Tripping characteristic curve L1 L2 L3 N
QF
100min SB2 SB1 KM2 KA
KM2
50min
KA KM1 KM2
20min KM1 KM3 KM2 KM3
10min
KA KA
5min
KM 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CT A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96
2min
1min 10 C1
11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
Kr=5
M 4mA~20mA
θ
Kr=4 3~
5S Kr=3
Kr=2
2S
Kr=1
1S
1 2 5 8
×Iset
Figure 4 Star-delta starting connection diagram in case the
control supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational voltage
6. Connection diagram is 220V
Figure 1 Direct starting connection diagram in case the control

supply voltage is 220V and the rated operational voltage is 220V L1 L2 L3 N
QF
SB2 SB1 KM2 KM3 KA
L1 L2 L3 N
KM2
KA KM3 KM2
QF
KM1 KM2
SB2 SB1 KM1 KM1 KM1
KM1 KA KA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
KM1 CT A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96
CT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 C1 NJBK9电动机保护继电器
A1 A2 07 08 98 95 96 11 C2 T1 T2 PE
12 13 8 9 14
10 C1 KM3
M
θ
11 C2 T1 T2 PE 4mA~20mA
3~
12 13 8 9 14
M KM2
θ
4mA~20mA
3~
I-27 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
7. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) Opening size of the main machine
NJBK9-50 overall mounting dimensions
45.5±0.5
92±0.5
48.5max
83max
过载断相不平衡堵转
RST L2
MD
L3 L1
10A~50A NJBK9电动机保护继电器
96.5max
92.5max
113max
57.6±0.5
79.6±0.5
93max
PE T2 T1 C2 C1 4mA-20mA 96 95 98 08 07 A2 A1
θ
14 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
整定电流范围：10A～50A
额定控制电源电压：220V
符合标准：IEC60947-4-1GB14048.4
NJBK9-50
R
32.5max
62.5±0.5
NJBK9-200 overall mounting dimensions
I
48.5max
108max
过载断相不平衡堵转
RST L2
MD L3 L1
40A~200A NJBK9电动机保护继电器
96.5max
114.5max
113max
57.6±0.5
79.6±0.5
93max
PE T2 T1 C2 C1 4mA-20mA 96 95 98 08 07 A2 A1
θ
14 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
整定电流范围：10A～50A
额定控制电源电压：220V
符合标准：IEC60947-4-1GB14048.4
NJBK9-50
R
32.5max
84.5±0.5
> >> I-28

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N J XB 3 - □ □
P: PTC temperature protection, optional.

1~18 function code (see Table 1)
Design sequence No.

Phase protection
Relay
Company code
NJXB3 Relay
1. General
NJXB3 relay is used as an overvoltage, undervoltage,
phase failure, phase sequence, three-phase voltage
unbalance and PTC temperature protection device in three-
phase three-wire control circuits with an AC voltage of
380V and a frequency of 50Hz and three-phase four-wire
control circuits with an AC voltage of 220V and a
frequency of 50Hz to make and break the circuit.
I-29 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
Ph ase Ph ase PTC

Three-ph ase Three-ph ase Si ng le- ph ase/ Overvol tage Und ervol tage Unb al an ce
Model sequ en ce fai lure tem pe rat ure
three- wire four -wire tw o-ph ase protecti on protecti on protecti on
protecti on protecti on protecti on
NJXB3-1 ● ● ●
NJXB3-2 ● ● ●
NJXB3-3 ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-4 ● ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-5 ● ● ● Fixed ● ● ○
NJXB3-6 ● Fixed Fixed ● ● ● ○
NJXB3-7 ● ● ● ● ● ● ○
NJXB3-8 ● ●
NJXB3-9 ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-10 ● ● ●
NJXB3-11 ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-12 ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-13 ● ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-14 ● ● ● ● ●
NJXB3-15 ● ● ● Fixed ● ● ○
NJXB3-16 ● Fixed Fixed ● ● ● ○
NJXB3-17 ● ● ● ● ● ● ○
NJXB3-18 ● ● ● ○
Note: ● denotes available functions, ○ denotes optional functions.
3. Technical data
Protection Rated Conventional

Protection Contact Contact Usage Electrical Mechanical
Model operation operational heating
function capacity form category life life
time voltage current (Ith)
Overvoltage Three-phase
Undervoltage 0.1s~10s Resistive load:
three-wire system:
AC250V 6A
NJXB3 Three-phase AC 380V 50Hz
voltage unbalance cosφ=1 1 N/O,
AC-15 3A 105 106
Inductive load: 1 N/C
Phase failure, Three-phase
phase sequence AC250V 1A
four-wire system:
≤1s cosφ=0.4
PTC temperature AC 220V 50Hz
protection
4. Wiring diagram
NJXB3-01, NIXB3-02, NJXB3-03, NJXB3-04, NJXB3-10 NJXB3-05(P), NJXB3-06(P), NJXB3-07(P),NJXB3-08(P), NJXB3-09 I
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Three-phase
12 11 14 R1 R2 12 11 14 R1 R2
KM KM KM PTC
KM
L1 L1
L2 L2
M
L3 L3
> >> I-30

Relay
Protection Relay
NJXB3-11, NJXB3-12, NJXB3-13 Wiring diagram 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3 N R
断相
76max
动作过欠压错相不平衡
75.2±0.8
1.15 1.20 4 6
Three-phase 1.10 1.25 2 8
1.05 1.30
?áUe t(s)
0.80 0.85
0.75 0.90
0.70 0.95 5
?áUe Asm(%)
12 11 14 R1 R2 NJXB3-17
35±0.2
12 11 14 R1 R2
4
L1 70.4max
44.7max
83max
L2
L3
N
6. Installation and use
6.1 Connect the wires correctly in accordance with the
NJXB3 Wiring diagram connection diagram.
6.2 If the relay is of rail mounting type, use TH35-7.5 mounting
rail.
6.3 If the relay is of installation mounting type, remove the
Two-phase limiter.
L1 L2 L3 N
L1
L2
N
One-phase
L1 L2 L3 N
N
L1
NJXB3-14, NJXB3-15(P), NJXB3-16(P), NJXB3-17(P), NJXB3-18

Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 N
12 11 14 R1 R2
KM KM PTC
L1
L2
M
L3
N
I-31 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
N JYB 3 - □
1~16 function code

Design sequence No.
Relay
Company code
NJYB3 Relay
1. General
NJYB3 relay is used to provide overvoltage,
undervoltage, phase failure, phase sequence and three-
phase unbalance control in three-phase three-wire 380V
circuits and three-phase four-wire 220V circuits with a
frequency of AC 50Hz. For example, it is used for power
control systems, air conditioning systems and motors.
This relay is a voltage protection relay. After detecting
the voltage signal, the relay processes the input signal,
judges if there is an overvoltage, undervoltage, phase
failure, error-phase or unbalance and controls the
operation accurately and stably by means of the built-in
microprocessor.
3. Technical data I
Protection Rated Conventional
Protection Contact Contact Usage Electrical Mechanical
Model operation operational heating
function capacity form category life life
time voltage current (Ith)
Overvoltage Three-phase
Undervoltage 0.1s~10s Resistive load:
three-wire system:
AC250V 6A
NJYB3 Three-phase AC 380V 50Hz
voltage unbalance cosφ=1 1 N/O, 5 6
AC-15 3A 10 10
Inductive load: 1 N/C
Three-phase
AC250V 1A
Phase failure, four-wire system:
≤1s cosφ=0.4
phase sequence AC 220V 50Hz
> >> I-32

Relay
Protection Relay
Ph ase Ph ase
Three-ph ase Three-ph ase Si ng le- ph ase/ Overvol tage Und ervol tage Unb al an ce
Model sequ en ce fai lure
three- wire four -wire tw o-ph ase protecti on protecti on protecti on
protecti on protecti on
NJYB3-1 ● ● ●
NJYB3-2 ● ● ●
NJYB3-3 ● ● ●
NJYB3-4 ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-5 ● ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-6 ● ● ● Fixed ● ●
NJYB3-7 ● Fixed Fixed ● ● ●
NJYB3-8 ● ● ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-9 ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-10 ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-11 ● ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-12 ● ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-13 ● ● ● Fixed ● ●
NJYB3-14 ● Fixed Fixed ● ● ●
NJYB3-15 ● ● ● ● ● ●
NJYB3-16 ● ● ●
Note: ● denotes available functions, ○ denotes optional functions.
Basic data of auxuliary circuit
Conventional heating Usage Rated operational Rated operational

Contact form voltage Ue(V)
current Ith (A) category current Ue(A)
220 0.75
1 group of change-over contacts 3 AC-15
380 0.47
Immunity
Item Severity level
Electrostatic discharge immunity 8×(1±10%)kV (air discharge)

Radiated electromagnetic field immunity Test electric field strength: 10×(1±10%)V/m
Fast transient immunity For power line, 2×(1±10%)kV, duration: 1min
Surge (impact) immunity Open circuit test voltage: 2×(1±10%)kV
4. Wiring diagram
NJYB3-01, NJYB3-02, NJYB3-03, NJYB3-04, NJYB3-05, NJYB3-12, NJYB3-13, NJYB3-14, NJYB3-15, NJYB3-16
NJYB3-06,NJYB3-07, NJYB3-08 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
14 11 12 14 11 12
KM KM
KM KM L1
L1
L2
L2 L3
L3 N
I-33 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
NJYB3-9, NJYB3-10, NJYB3-11 Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 N
Three-phase
14 11 12
L1
L2
L3
N
Two-phase
L1 L2 L3 N
L1
L2
N
One-phase
L1 L2 L3 N
L1
N
45.5max
I
66.2max
35.8±0.3 35±0.2
91max
> >> I-34

Relay
Protection Relay
3.2 Ambient temperature Range:-15℃~ +55℃, with daily
average≤+50℃.
+40℃, relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
higher relative humidity shall be allowable at lower temperature,
for instance air humidity may reach 90% at +20℃. As for dews,
which contigently appear due to change of temperature, special
steps should be taken
3.5 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane
shall≤±5°.
3.6 At places without explosive risk, without gases that may be
corrosive to metal or gases that may cause damage to the
insulation, and with little conducting dust.
3.7 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
with and not being full of steam.
3.8 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.
3.9 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
4. Technical data
Table 1
JD-5A(NJBK3) Integrated Type

Setting current Voltage of control power Suitable motor
range (A) supply (Supply Voltage) (V) power (kW)
Motor Protector JD-5A/80 1~5 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 0.5~2.5
1. General JD-5A/80 5~20 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 2.5~10
JD-5A(NJBK3)Integrated Motor Protector (hereinafter JD-5A/80 20~80 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 10~40
referred to as protector) is applicable for overload, phase- JD-5A/400 80~200 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 40~100
failure and three-phase current unbalance protection of AC
JD-5A/400 160~400 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 80~200
motor @ A.C.50Hz, less than AC400V rated operating
voltage and 1A~400A rated operating Control circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated frequency
current for its continuous working or discontinuous working. 50Hz, contact parameters refer to Table 2.
Protector and AC contactor are generally used
Table 2
cooperatively.
This product meets the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1. Use type AC-15
2. Type designation Rated operating current (A) 1.5 0.95
JD－ 5 □ / □□□
Conventional thermal current (A) 5
Supply voltage
5. Design features
Code of trip class 5.1 Three-phase electronic type, trip class is level 10A, 10, 20
and 30.
Code of setting current
5.2 Equipped with function of phase-failure, overload and three-
Derived code phase unbalance protection.
5.3 Digital dial-up setting with high precision
Design consequence number
5.4 Digital current display.
Integrated motor protector 5.5 Three indicators indicate normal, overload and phase-failure
(three-phase current unbalance) status respectively.
5.6 Main circuit adopts feed-through wiring.
5.7 Installation mode: bolts
6. Protection features
6.1 Operation characteristics under phases balanced-load status
(see Table 3)
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status
Operation characteristic under phase-failure status should meet
the requirement: operation time of protector ≤5s
Imax-Imin
×100%＞40%
Imax
Where:
Imax---max current value among three phase current;
Imin---min current value among three phase current.
I-35 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
6.3 Tripping feature Figure 2
Figure 1
120min L3 L2 L1 N
100min
FU1 H3 H2 H1
50min
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
20min STP ST 96 95 A2 A1
10min
W2 V2 U2
5min KM
KM KM
W3 V3 U3
2min QF1
1min L1, L2, L3: Three-phase power supply

50s 30 W4 V4 U4 KM: Contactor
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
M STP: Stop button

ST: Test button
20s 3~ FU1, Fu2: Fuse protector
QF1: Motor protector
10s 20
5s 10 7.2 See Figure 3 for wiring diagram of control power supply @

10A
AC380V/AC400V voltage.
Figure 3
2s
L3 L2 L1 N
1s
1 2 5 8
× Ie
Fu1 H3 H2 H1
QS Protector
Fu2
Ambient W1 V1 U1
Trip Operation Test
S.N. I/In STP ST 96 95 A2 A1
class time condition temperature
10A
W2 V2 U2
10 <2h non- KM
start from KM KM
1 1.05
20 tripping cold status W3 V3 U3
30 QF1
10A L1, L2, L3: Three-phase power supply

KM: Contactor
W4 V4 U4
10 Right after A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
2 1.2 <2h tripping M

STP: Stop button
20 item No.1 20±2

ST: Test button
3 ~ FU1, Fu2: Fuse protector

30
10A <2min Start after putting
10 <4min
one time of setting
3 1.5 JD-5/80
20 <8min current through
30 <12min main circuit for 2h 95 96 A1 A2
10A 2s<Tp≤10s
I
1 0 9. 5 max
62±0 . 2
50±0 . 2
10 4s<Tp≤10s start from JD-5A Integrated motor protector

4 7.2
20 6s<Tp≤20s cold status 断相运行过载
整定电流20A~80A
30 8s<Tp≤30s 102±0.2 9
110±0.2 9
6.4 Reset mode: De-energizing reset 126±0 .5
JD-5/400
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 See Figure 2 for wiring diagram of control power supply @
AC220V/AC230V voltage. R
136max
48
JD-5A电动机综合保护器
断相运行过载整定电流80A～200A
143
156max
9.1 Designation and type-specification of protector, select
controlling current and voltage (AC220V, AC230V, AC380V,
AC400V ), setting current range (1A~5A, 5A~20A, 20A~80A,
80A~200A, 160A~400A), Trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
according to operating requirements. Trip class in routine order
is level 10.
9.2 Order Quantity.
> >> I-36

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
JD－ □ / □□□
Rated control power voltage
Release grade code
Rated current code
Design sequence No.
Motor Integrated Protector

3.2 Ambient temperature Range: -5℃ ~ +40℃, with daily
average ≤ +35℃.
+40℃, the relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
higher relative humidity shall be allowable at lower temperature,
for instance air humidity may reach 90% at +20 ℃. As for
dews, which contigently appear due to change of temperature,
JD-5 Motor Integrated 3.5 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane shall
≤±5°.
Protector 3.6 In the media without explosive risk, and no gases that may
1. General be corrosive to metal and damage insulation in the media
JD-5 Motor Integrated Protector (hereinafter referred to as together with at places where much conducting dust being in
protector) is applicable for overload and phase-failure existence.
protection of AC motor @ A.C.50Hz, less than AC400V 3.7 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
rated operating voltage and 0.5A~400A rated operating with and not being full of steam.
current for its continuous working or 3.8 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.
discontinuous working. Protector and AC contactor are 3.9 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
generally used cooperatively. 4. Technical data
This product meets the requirements of GB 14048.4 and IEC 4.1 Rated insulation voltage AC690V, rated frequency 50Hz,
60947- 4-1. rated operating current 0.5A ~ 400A.
Table 1
Setting current Voltage of control power Suitable motor
Type
range (A) supply (Supply Voltage) (V) power (kW)
JD-5/80 0.5~5 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 0.25~2.5
JD-5/80 2~20 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 1~10
JD-5/80 20~80 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 10~40
JD-5/400 80~200 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 40~100
JD-5/400 160~400 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V 80~200
4.2 Control circuit: rated insulation voltage Ac380v, rated

frequency 50Hz, contact parameters refer to Table 2.
Table 2
Use type AC-15
Rated operating current (A) 1.5 0.95
Conventional thermal current (A) 5
5. Design features
5.1 Three-phase electronic type, tripping grade (trip class): 10A.
5.2 Equipped with function of phase-failure and overload
protection.
5.3 Equipped with continuously adjustable device for setting
current.
5.4 Three indicators indicate normal, overload and phase-failure
status respectively.
5.5 Main circuit adopts feed through wiring.
5.6 Installation mode: use bolts for installation.
I-37 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
6. Protection features 6.3 Tripping feature
Figure 1
6.1 Operation characteristics under three-phase balanced-load
status (see Table 3) 120m in
100m in
Table 3 5 0min
2 0min
operating Test Ambient
S.N. I/In 1 0min
time Condition temperature
2 min
1 1.05 <2h non-tripping Cold Status
1 min
2 1.20 <2h tripping 5 0S
Hot Status +20℃ 4 0S
3 1.50 <2 min tripping
3 0S
4 7.20 2s<Tp≤10s Cold Status
2 0S
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status (see Table 4) 1 0S

Table 4 5S
Multiple of setting current 1S
operating Test Ambient 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
S.N. Any two The Third
time Condition temperature ×Ie
phases phases
1 1.0 0.9 <2h non-tripping Cold Status 6.4 Reset mode: de-energizing reset
+20℃
2 1.15 0 ≤5s Hot Status
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V/AC230V
voltage
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC230V voltage
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 H3 H2 H1
L3 L2 L1
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 95 96 A1 A2 Circles of the cable: once (more than 3A)
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM KM
W3 V3 U3 L3 L2 L1
L1, L2, L3: three-phase power supply
QF1 KM: Contactor
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
Circles of the cable: twice every phase
STP: Stop button
(less than 3A)
W4 V4 U4 ST: Start button
FU1, FU2: Fuse protector
M
3 ~
7.2 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V/AC400V

voltage
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC400V voltage
I
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 H3 H2 H1
L3 L2 L1
QS
FU2 Protector
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 95 96 A1 A2 Circles of the cable: once (more than 3A)
W2 V2 U2 KM
KM KM
W3 V3 U3
L3 L2 L1
QF1 L1, L2, L3: three-phase power supply
KM: Contactor
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal Circles of the cable: twice every phase
W4 V4 U4 STP: Stop button (less than 3A)
M ST: Start button

FU1, FU2: Fuse protector
3 ~
> >> I-38

Relay
Protection Relay
JD-5/80
110max
φ12
126.5max
95 96 A1 A2
64max
JD-5
MOTOR INTEGRATEDPROTECTOR
2s-30s X-Y
φ5.5
Start delay Current setting
Phase-failure Running Overload
113±0.29
JD-5/400
25max
133max
35max
155max
R
62max
JD-5
MOTOR INTEGRATEDPROTECTOR
2s-30s
Start delay
X-Y φ5.5
Current setting
Phase-failure RunningOverload
142.5±0.29
9. Ordering instructions
9.1 Designation, type and specification of protector, select
controlling current and voltage (AC220V, AC230V, AC380V,
AC400V ), setting current range (0.5A~5A, 2A~20A,
20A~80A, 80A~200A 160A~400A, etc) according to
operating requirements.
9.2 Order Quantity.
I-39 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
Reacting time Ambient air
S.N. Fault type
Specified time Inverse time humidity
1 Overvoltage protection 0.1~9.9s Tr = (Uon/Ur)2 ×Tn
2 Undervoltage protection 0.1~9.9s Tr = (Ur/Uun)2 ×Tn Room
3 Phase-Failure protection ≤0.1s temperature
4 Phase-sequence protection ≤0.1s
2.4 Time -voltage feature of voltage protector

Time-voltage feature of voltage protector
t(s)
OFF
9.9
7.6
5.6
3.9
2.5
NJYB1 Phase-Failure and

0.1
Phase-Sequence Protection Relay 0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
t(s)
Un
OFF
1. General
9.9
This product is applicable in operating console of facilities
8.4
for motor protection, circuit protection and controlling
7.3
large size motor. It can detect fault state as overvoltage,
6.3
undervoltage, phase-failure and phase-sequence through
advanced electronic circuit check, and provide reliable 5.6
protection. 4.9
4.4
2. Type designation 4.0
2.1 Model and meaning 3.6
N J YB 1
Design No.
Voltage protection
0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 Un
Corporation Code
Relay Note: 0.8Un is the preset normal voltage protection range, when delaying, it is 9.9s.

2.2.1 Fundamental parameter 3. Wiring diagram
a. Overvoltage protection: (1.0-1.3) Ue; undervoltage
protection: (0.7-1.0) Ue.
Wiring diagram for voltage protector I
b. Fault protection time: 0.1 9.9S. N A B C
A
c. Dielectric strength: there is no breakdown and flicker
appeared for alternating current (50Hz) lasting a period of
FUI
time of 1 s. under 2000V.
d. Insulation resistance: >100M (relative humidity at 20℃ QFI
KM STP
is 90%). C Ta
e. Contact capacity: AC-15 220V 1A. B Tb
A Tc
f. Contact resistance: 0.03Ω. R1
g. Contact life: life should ≥100, 000times. N R2
h. Ambient temperature: -10℃~ +50 ℃. KM Ta
i. Ambient humidity: ≤8% (20℃~+5℃). Tb
j. Installation mode: 35mmlC guide rail installation
2.3 Performance feature KM
4~ B
Of which N could be connected alternatively
> >> I-40

Relay
Protection Relay
2. Type designation
XJ 3 －□/ □
Rated power supply voltage
Remodel (derived model)

G: monochrome luminotron fault indication type;
S: two-color luminotron fault indication type;
D: multifunction protection, multimode indication type
Design sequence No.
Phase-failure and phase-sequence protective relay
XJ3 Phase-Failure and Phase-

Sequence Protective Relay
1. General
XJ3 series phase failure and phase sequence protection
relay is used to provide overvoltage, undervoltage and
phase failure protection in three-phase AC circuits and
phase sequence protection in irreversible transmission
devices and features reliable performance, wide application
and convenient use.
The protector starts to function when it is connected to the

power control circuit in accordance with the drawing.
When the fuse of any phase of the three-phase circuit is
open or when there is a phase failure in the power supply
circuit, the XJ3 operates immediately to control the contact
to cut off the power supply of the AC contactor coil of the
main circuit so that the main contact of the AC contactor
operates to provide the load with phase failure protection.
When the phases of a three-phase irreversible device with

predetermined phase sequence are connected incorrectly
due to maintenance or change of the power supply circuit,
the XJ3 series will identify the phase sequence, stop
supplying power to the power supply circuit and achieve
the goal of protecting the device.
I-41 > >>

Relay
Protection Relay
3. Technical data
Type XJ3-G XJ3-S XJ3-D
Phase-failure Phase-sequence error & Overvoltage Undervoltage
Protection function
Three phase voltage unbalance≥8%~13% Phase-failure Phase-sequence error
AC 380V: 380V~460V 1.5s~4s (adjustable)

300V~380V 2s~9s(adjustable)
Overvoltage protection
AC 400V: 320V~400V 1.5s~4s (adjustable)
400V~480V 2s~9s(adjustable)
Undervoltage protection
Operating voltage AC 380V 50Hz/60Hz, Allowable fluctuating range±10%
Contact number 1 normally open & 1 normally close 1 group changeover
Contact capacity 5A 230VAC cosφ=1 3A 230VAC cosφ=1
Phase-failure and
Reacting time≤2s
phase-sequence protection
Electrical life 1×105
6
Mechanical life 1×10
Ambient temperature -5℃~40℃
Ambient humidity -5℃~40℃
Installation mode Equipment type or Track type 35mm Track installation or punching installation
Note: in the example diagram for application circuit, protective relay can provide protection only under the condition of phase-failure
occurring at terminal 1, 2, 3 and among three phase of power supply A, B, C.
4. Wiring diagram
XJ3-G, S wiring diagram XJ3-D wiring diagram
A B C L1 L2 L3 L1
FU1
FU 4 5
3 6
XJ QF1 KM
2 7 ST
1 8 L3 Ta
Tb
Test Stop L2 Tc
XJ
STP
KM Power 7 8 L1
XJ supply KM Ta
KM
KM 5 6
Tc
KM
Load
Load L2

XJ3-G, S profile and installation dimension I
110max
2×φ4.5
54.5±0.4
≥90
85max
35.5
8×φ4
46max
9 15.5
XJ3-D profile and installation dimension
2×φ5
115max
70.5max
60.2
35.4
45.5max
> >> I-42

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JS 6/□

Design sequence No.
Time delay relay
Company code
NJS6 Time Delay Relay

1. General
NJS6 series time delay relay (hereinafter referred to as
relay) is used as a time control element in control circuits
with an AC voltage of 240V or below and a frequency of
50Hz and control circuits with a DC voltage of 240V or
below to make and break the circuit according to the
schedule.
I-43 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Mode NJS6
Operating mode On-delay (OND, OND1), trigger delay (OND2), On-off repetitive delay (FLY), interval delay (INT, INT1), optional
Number of contacts Delay 1 change-over
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Solid state output NPN solid state delay 1 ouptut
Solid state output capacity Max 30VDC Max 100mA
Operational voltage AC/DC100~240V 50Hz DC24V
Delay accuracy Start timing from power on: ±0.01%±0.05s, start timing from signal ON: ±0.01%±0.03s
Timing mode Addition or subtraction timing mode, optional
Contact output time The output contacts have automatic reset function.
The contact ouptut time is 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000 or Hold, optional. (in ms)
Mounting type Panel type
Delay range For single product, 99.99s/999.9s/9999s/99min59s/999.9min/9999min/99h99min/9999h, optional
4. Wiring diagram
Trigger Pause
Reset 0VDC 12VDC 100mA
6 7 8 9 10
Output
11 12
Output
30VDC 100mA
1 2 3 4 5
(+) (-)
(～) Power (～)

Profile and installation dimension Opening size I
55min
59max 97max
45.5 +0.5
-0
R
48.5max
65min
RESET
INT
PAUSE
LOCK OUT RUN
+0.5
复位设置 45.5 -0
NJS 6 时间继电器
> >> I-44

Relay
Control Relay
6. Profile and installation dimension
Output mode Timing-sequence diagram
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
t t t
On delay
OUT(output)
settime
0
Settime
0
POWER ON DELAY(countingresetswhenpowerOFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
t a
On delay OUT(output)
settime
0
Settime
0
POWER ON DELAY(countingcontinueswhenpowerOFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
OUT(output) t t t
Trigger delay settime
0
Settime
0
SIGNAL ON DELAY1(resetswhenpowerOFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Toff Ton Ta Tb Ton Toff Ton Toff Ton Toff
OUT(output)
Loop delay settime
Settime
0
Settime
Settime
0
FLICKER(resetswhenpowerOFF)
I-45 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Interval delay OUT(output)

settime
0
Settime
0
INTERVAL1(resetswhenpowerOFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Interval delay OUT(output)

settime
0
Settime
0
SIGNAL OFF DELAY(resetswhenpowerOFF)
One-shot Output (OUT)
Hold Output (OUT) Hold Output (OUT)

Note
> >> I-46

Relay
Control Relay
2. Model and meaning
N JS 2/□

Design S.N.
Time-delay relay
Enterprise feature code
Note: this product is applicable for wide range operating

voltage, for instance, operating voltage within AC/DC100V～
240V means it can operate normally within the voltage range of
AC/DC 100V to 240V.
NJS2 Time Delay Relay

1. Application scope
NJS2 Series Time Relay is applicable for controlling circuit
@ A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 240V rated supply voltage and
up to D.C. 240V rated supply voltage as delay element to
make or break circuit according to preset time.
I-47 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
(power) on delay (OND, OND1), trigger-delay (OND2), reciprocate-delay (FLY),

Operating mode
interval-delay (INT, INT1) are available for option
Contact number Delay 1 changeover
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Solid-state output NPN solid-state delay 1 output
Solid-state output capacity Max 30VDC max 100mA
Operating voltage AC36V, AC/DC100V~240V 50Hz/60Hz
Delay precision Power supply ON start timing: ≤±0.01%±50ms Signal ON start timing: ≤±0.01%±30ms
Timing mode Plus & minus timing mode are available for option
Contact output is equipped with function of automatic reset, contact output time 10,
Contact output time
50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, and Hlod are available for option (unit: ms)
Installation mode Panel type
Delay range
Type 99.99s, 999.9s, 9999s, 99min59s, 999.9min, 9999min, 99h59min, 9999h are optional for each product
4. Wiring diagram
NJS2 Wiring diagram
Trigger (INA) INB pause(INB)
Reset 0VDC 12VDC 100mA
6 7 8 9 10
Output (UP)
11 12
Output (OUT) 30VDC 100mA
1 2 3 4 5
( + ) ( - )
( ~ ) SOURCE ( ~ )

Profile and installation dimension Opening size
97max
46max
I
48.5max
46max
45
59max
> >> I-48

Relay
Control Relay
6. Profile and installation dimension
Power supply
INA
INB
Reset
t t t
(power) on delay Output (OUT)
POWER ON DELAY (Power supply OFF T1 Reset)
Power supply (SOURCE)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
t t a t-a
(power) on delay Output (OUT)
POWER ON DELAY (Power supply OFF T1 Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
t t t
Trigger-delay Output (OUT)
0
SIGNAL ON DELAY1(Power supply OFF Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset Ton Ta
Toff Tb Ton Toff Ton Toff Ton Toff
Output (OUT)
Circulation-delay
0
FLICKER(Power supply OFF Reset)
I-49 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
Interval-delay Output (OUT)
0
SIGNAL OFF DELAY(Power supply OFF Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
Output (OUT)
Interval-delay
INTERVAL1 (Power supply OFF Reset)
One-shot Output (OUT)
Hold Output (OUT) Hold Output (OUT)

Note
> >> I-50

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JS－ 1 □□ / □□

Contact mode
Nil: means delay one group changeover,
equipped with function of external reset
and pause;
2Z: means delay two group changeover;
11: means delay two group changeover,
equipped with function of external reset
and pause;
H: means delay one group changeover,
instantaneous one group changeover.
Operating mode:
No marking: means Power on delay type;
S: means circulation-delay type;
Code of installation shell frame
No marking: 48×48 installation profile.
NJS1 Time Delay Relay Design sequence No.
1. General Time delay relay
NJS1 Series Time-Delay Relay is applicable for controlling
circuit @ A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated voltage or up Company code
to D.C.220V rated voltage as delay element to make or Note: this product is applicable for wide range operating
break circuit according to preset time.
voltage, for instance, operating voltage within AC/DC24V～48V
means it can operate normally within the voltage range of
AC/DC 24V to 48V.
I-51 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Type NJS1 NJS1-2Z NJS1-11 NJS1-H NJS1-S
Operating power power power power Circulation-
mode on delay on delay on delay on delay delay
Contact Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 2 Delay 1 changeover Delay 1

number changeover changeover changeover Instantaneous 1 changeover changeover
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
m h
Turn-on (Power) on Time-base code 0.01s 0.1s s 10s s 0.1m m m 0.1h h
delay type Delay range Setting range 0.01S~99.99s 0.1S~999.9s 1S~9999s 10S~99990s 1S~99min99s 0.1min~999.9min 1min~9999min 1min~99h99min 0.1h~999.9h 1h~9999h
Circulation-delay Time-base code 0.1s 1s 0.1min 1min 0.1h 1h 10h
type Delay range Setting range 0.1S~9.9s S~99s 0.1min~9.9min 1min~99min 0.1h~9.9h 1h~99h 10h~990h
Operating voltage AC/DC: 24~48V,100V~240V, AC220V, AC380V
Repeat pause function Have N/A Have N/A Have
5
Delay precision ≤1%
Power consumption ≤3VA
Installation mode Panel type, Device type
Matched pedestal Panel type CZS08S, CZS11S, CZS08G, CZS11G, Device type CZS08C, CZS11C
4. Wiring diagram
NJS1-2Z Wiring diagram NJS1 Wiring diagram NJS1-S Wiring diagram
4 5 Pause Pause
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 3 6
Reset Reset
2 7 2 7 2 7
1 8 1 8 1 8
(-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+)
( ~) ( ~) ( ~) Power ( ~ ) ( ~) Power ( ~)
Power
supply supply supply
NJS1-11 Wiring diagram NJS1-H Wiring diagram
Pause
4 5
Reset 6
5 7
3 6
4 8
2 10
9 2
1 8
7
I
1 11 (-) (+)
(-) (+) ( ~) ( ~)
Power
( ~) Power ( ~ ) supply
supply

NJS1
46max
45.4±0.4
48.5max
OPEN
46max
123max
58max
> >> I-52

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N TE－ 8 □ □
Operating mode:
A: control-off delay; B: (power) on delay
Delay range
Timedelay relay
Company code
NTE8 Time Delay Relay

1. General
NTE8 Series time delay relay is applicable for controlling
circuit @AC 50Hz/60Hz, up to 230V rated voltage or up to
DC 24V rated voltage as delay element to make or break
circuit according to preset time.
This product meets the requirements of IEC60947-5-1.
I-53 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Type NTE8
Operating mode Control-off delay/(power) on delay
Delay range 0.1s~10s、10s~120s、30s~480s
Number of contacts Delay 1 N/O
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 230V/1A; DC-13 30V/1A; Ith:5A
Operational voltage AC230V、AC24V、DC24V
Mounting type Rail type
Figure 2 NTE8-□A Relay wiring diagram
L(+)
N(-)
N L
A B
Figure 3 NTE8-□B Relay wiring diagram
L(+)
N(-)
A2 B2
A1 B1
4. Overall and mounting dimentions (mm)

18max
I
35±0.5
86max
67max
35
7.5
27
Adopt TH35-7.5 sectional steel guide rail for installation
> >> I-54

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JSS 48 A － □ / □

Feature code
Nil: means 8-pin power delay one group
changeover, equipped with function
of reset, pause (multi-range
delay)
2Z: means 8-pin power delay two group
changeover (multi-range delay)
11: means 11-pin power delay two group
changeover, equipped with function of
reset, pause (multi-range delay)
S: means 8-pin circulation-delay one group
changeover, equipped with function of
reset, pause (multi-range delay)
P: means 8-pin indicator type power delay
two group changeover (multi-range delay)
P2: means 2 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
JSS48A Time Delay Relay 8-pin power delay two group changeover (single delay)
P3: means 3 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
1. General
JSS48A Time Delay Relay is applicable for controlling circuit 8-pin power delay two group changeover (single delay)
@ A.C. P4: means 4 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated control supply voltage and 8-pin power delay two group changeover (single delay)
up to D.C. 240V rated control supply voltage as delay G2: means 2 digit dial-up setting, 8-pin power
element to make/break circuit according to preset value. delay two group changeover (single delay)
G3: means 3 digit dial-up setting, 8-pin power
delay two group changeover (single delay)
G4: means 4 digit dial-up setting, 8-pin power
delay two group changeover (single delay)
Derived code
Design sequence No.
Time delay relay
Note: This product is applicable for wide range of operating
voltage, for instance, operating voltage within AC/DC24V~48V
AC/DC 24V to 48V.
I-55 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
3.1 Main specifications see Table
Type JSS48A JSS48A-2Z JSS48A-11 JSS48A-G JSS48A-P JSS48A-S

Operating mode Power on delay Power on delay Power on delay Power on delay Power on delay Circulation-delay
Contact number Delay 1 changerover Delay 2 changerover Delay 2 changerover Delay 2 changerover Delay 2 changerover Delay 1 changerover
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Operating voltage AC/DC: 24V~48V, 100V~240V, AC220V, AC380V, 50Hz/60Hz
6
Mechanical Endurance 1×10
Type Delay range

JSS48A
JSS48A-11 1s~99min99s, 1min~99h99min, 0.01s~99.99s
JSS48A-2Z
JSS48A-S 1s~99s, 1min~99min, 1h~99h
JSS48A-G2
0.1s~9.9s, 1s~99s, 0.1min~9.9min, 1min~99min
JSS48A-P2
JSS48A-G3 0.01s~9.99s, 0.1s~99.9s, 1s~999s,
JSS48A-P3 0.1min~99.9min, 1min~999min
JSS48A-G4 0.01s~99.99s, 0.1s~999.9s, 1s~9999s, 0.1min~999.9min,
JSS48A-P4 1min~9999min, 0.1h~999.9h
4. Wiring diagram
JSS48A Wiring diagram JSS48A-2Z, JSS48A-G, JSS48A-P Wiring diagram
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6
Pause Reset
2 7 2 7
1 8 1 8
（） Power （+）
（） Power （+）（～）（～）
（～）（～）
supply supply
JSS48A-11 Wiring diagram JSS48A-S Wiring diagram
Pause
I
4 5
Reset 6
5 7
3 6
4 8 Pause Reset
3 9
2 7
2 10
1 11 1 8
（-） Power （+）
（） Power （+）（～）（～）
（～）（～） supply
supply

58.5max 45.5
48.5max
JSS48A
45.5
8 8 S 8 8
124max
> >> I-55

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JSS 48 B
Derived code
Design sequence No.
Time Delay Relay
AC/DC 24V to 48V.
3. Technical data
Type JSS48B
Operating mode Power on delay
Contact number Delay 1 Switching
AC/DC: 24V~48V, 100V~240V, AC220V
Operating voltage
AC380V 50Hz/60Hz
5
JSS48B Time Delay Relay Mechanical Endurance 1×106

Delay precision ±0.05%±50ms
1. General Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃
JSS48B Time Delay Relay is applicable for controlling Delay range 0.01s~99.99s 1s~99min59s 1min~99h59min
circuit @ A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated supply
voltage and up to D.C. 240V rated supply voltage as delay
element to make or break circuit according to preset time.
4. Wiring diagram
JSS48B Wiring diagram
4 5
Pause Reset
3 6
2 7
1 8
~
-
- Power +

Profile and installation dimension of JSS48B series products
60max
52max
128max
Opening size
45.5 ± 0.3
45.5 ± 0.3
I-57 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JS Z 3 □ － □
Adopt A, B, C, D, E, F, G to represent delay rang

code (applicable for multi-range type)
A: basic type power on delay, multi-range type)
B: multi-function (multi-delay mode, with starting control),
multi-range type
C: instantaneously operation type power on
delay, multi-range type
F: turn-off power off delay type
H: instantaneously operation type power on
delay, single-range type
Y: delta start-delay type power on delay
K: control off-delay
R: repeat circulation-delay type power on delay
-2, 3: power on delay, single-range type
Design sequence No.
Integrative type
JSZ3 Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
1. General
JSZ3 Time Delay Relay is applicable for automatic control
system, such as machine automatic control, and complete
equipment automatic control, etc.
> >> I-58

Relay
Control Relay
3.Technical data
Type JSZ3A JSZ3C JSZ3F JSZ3K JSZ3Y JSZ3R

JSZ3C power on delay
power Signal breaking- Delta Reciprocating
Operating mode with instantaneously power off delay
on delay delay start-delay circulation-delay
operation contact
A: 0.05-0.5s/5s/30s/3min
0.1-1s 0.1-1s
B: 0.1-1s/10s/60s/6min 0.1-1s 0.5-6s/60s
0.5-5s 0.5-5s
C: 0.5-5s/50s/5min/30min 0.5-5s 1-10s/10min
1-10s 1-10s
Delay range D: 1-10s/100s/10min/60min 1-10s 2.5-30s/30min
2.5-30s 2.5-30s
E: 5-60s/10min/60min/6h 2.5-30s 5-60s/60min
5-60s 5-60s
F: 0.25-2min/2min/2h/12h 5-60s
10-180s 10-180s
G: 0.5-4min/40min/4h/24h
Set mode Potentiometer
AC50Hz/60Hz, 36V, 110V, 127V, AC50Hz/60Hz, 36V, AC50Hz/60Hz AC110V AC220V AC110V/220V 50Hz/60Hz AC110V/220V 50Hz/60Hz
Operating
AC220V AC230V AC380V AC400V 110V, 127V AC220V AC230V AC230V AC380V AC400V AC220V AC230V AC380V AC220V AC230V AC380V
voltage
DC24V AC380V AC400V DC24V DC24V AC400V DC24V AC400V DC24V
Delay precision ≤10% ≤10% ≤10% ≤10% ≤10%
Contact Delay 2 switching, delay 1 changeover, Delay 1 switching or Delay 1 Delay Delta 1 Delay 1
number instantaneous switching delay 2 switching switching switching switching
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A;Ith:5A
6

Installation mode Panel type, Equipment type
Matched Panel type: FM8858, FM8858X,
pedestal Equipment type, CZS08X, CZS08X-E
Continued
Type JSZS-2 JSZ3-3
Operating power
mode on delay
0.1-1s, 0.5-5s, 1-10s

3-30s, 6-60s, 0.3-3min,
Delay range 0.5-5min, 1-10min,
1.5-15min, 3-30min
0.1-1h

Operating voltage AC50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 127V, 220V, 230V, 380V, 400V DC24V(other voltage could be custom made)
Delay 1 switching,
Contact Delay 2
instantaneously
number switching
operation 1 switching
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A;Ith:5A
Ambient temperature -5 ℃ ~+40 ℃
Installation
Panel type, Equipment type, Track type
mode
Matched Panel type: FM8858, FM8858X;
pedestal Equipment type: CZS08X
I-59 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
4. Wiring diagram
JSZ3A JSZ3C JSZ3F
External reset signal
4 5 4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 6
3
(-) 2 7 (+) (-) 2 7 (+)

(-) 2 7 (+)
1 8 1 8
1 8
Power Power
Power
JSZ3Y JSZ3R JSZ3K

External control signal
4 5 4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 3 6
2 7 (-) 2 7 (+) ( ～- ) 2 7 +)
(～
1 8 1 8 1 8
AC220V DC24V AC110V
AC110V
AC220V AC110V AC220V DC24V
Power Power Power
JSZ3-2 JSZ3-3
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6
(-) 2 7 (+) (-) 2 7 (+)
1 8 1 8
Power Power

JSZ3A-C, F, K, Y Profile and installation dimension JSZ3R Profile and installation dimension
UP
55.5max
50.5
35
54max
50.5
ON
58.3 10 58.3 12.5

41max
41max
84max 86.5max
I
JSZ3-2, 3, Profile and installation dimension Opening size
34
ON UP
2×φ4
φ34
51max
52
58.5 10
41max
80max 41
> >> I-60

Relay
Control Relay
2. Technical data
Model JSZ4-YA JSZ4-NA
Operating mode On-delay or on-delay with instantaneous acting
Delay 2 change-over or delay
Number of contacts 1 change-over, instantaneous
1 change-over (optional by switch)
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;
DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
A: 1s/10s/1min/10min
B: 3s/30s/3min/30min
Delay range C: 6s/60s/6min/60min
D: 1min/10min/1h/10h
E: 3min/30min/3h/30h
F: 6min/60min/6h/60h
Operational voltage AC50Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V DC24V
(Other voltages available upon request)
5

Delay accuracy ≤10%
JSZ4 Time Relay Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃
Mounting type Panel type Installation type
1. Type designation
JS Z 4-□□/□□
3. Wiring diagram
Rated control supply voltage (V)

4 5
Delay range and code
3 6
Delay type: A: multi-position type
2 7
Mounting type: N: installation type; Y: panel type A B
1 8
Mode
Design sequence No.
( ) ( )
(～)
Power (～)
Comprehensive type
Time relay
4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) JSZ4-NA
2×φ4.5
UP
ON
78max
76±0.3
62
10 1
M S
50max
93max 50
JSZ4-YA
2×φ4.5
UP
ON
62max
88max
76 ±0.3
62
10 1
M S
59max
115max
50
I-61 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Type JSZ6-2 JSZ6-4
Operating mode power on delay power on delay
Contact number Delay 2 changeover Delay 4 changeover
Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A;
Contact capacity
DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
0.1-1s, 5-5s, 1-10s, 2.5-30s, 5-60s,15-180s,
Delay range
1-10min, 2.5-30min, 5-60min,
AC50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 127V, AC220V,
Operating voltage
DC24V
5
6
Repeat precision ≤10%
Interchangeability Can interchange with H3Y series for use
4. Wiring diagram JSZ6-2

JSZ6 Time Delay Relay
4 8 12 14 (+)
1. General (~)
JSZ6 Time Delay Relay is applicable for automatic control

system, such as machine tool automatic control, complete
equipment automatic control. Etc.
(-)
2. Type designation 1 5 9 13 (~)
JS Z 6 － □
JSZ6-4
2: Delay 2 changeover; 4: Delay 4 changeover

4 8 12 14
Design sequence No. (+)
(~)
Integrated type 3 7 11
Time delay Relay

2 6 10
(-)
13 (~)
1 5 9

JSZ6 Profile and installation dimension I
29max
22.5max 66max
Opening size
> >> I-62

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JJ 1 － □
Rated voltage of control power

Design squence No.
Counting relay
Enterprise symbol
Note: this product is applicable for wide range of operating
voltage, for instance, operating voltage within
AC/DC100V~240V means it can operate normally within the
voltage range of AC/DC 100V to 240V.
NJJ1 Counting Relay

1. General
NJJ1 Counting Relay is applicable for controlling circuit @
A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, 240V rated voltage of control power
supply and D.C. 240V rated voltage of control power
supply as counting or counting control element.
I-63 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Operating mode 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
Output mode 1group changeover contact, open-collector output (30VDC 100mA Max)
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
At CR mode: 4-digit counting relay (4-digit red LED is count value, 4 digit green LED is preset value)
Number of counting digits
At CT mode: 8 digit reversible summation counter (green LED is low 4-digit, red is high 4-digit)
Counting speed 1 time/s, 30 times/s, 1000times/s are provided for selection
Counting mode Plus, minus, plus minus inverse A, plus minus inverse B, plus minus inverse C
Input signal Contact input, sensor input (NPN type/ PNP type are provided for selection)
Magnitude setting With magnitude setting, range 0.01~9.99
Output mode N, F, C, R, K, P, Q, A
Output time Settable output time 0.01s~9.99s (when output mode is C, R, K, P, Q, A)
Power consumption ≤3W
External dimension W58×H48×L197 mm
Current failure memory >10 years
4. Wiring diagram 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Count wiring diagram External dimension
INA INB Reset 0VDC 12VDC 30mA 58max
6 7 8 9 10
output
11 12
Output
30VDC 100mA
48max
1 2 3 4 5 97max
(+ ) (- )
Power
(～) (～)
Opening size
45.5
45.5
6. Sequence diagram of counting mode I

Counting mode Timing-sequence diagram Remark
INA
INB
Count at INA rising edge,
5 stop counting at INB input.
4
3
Count value 2
1
0
V Addition counting mode

INA
INB
Count at INB input
5
4 falling edge at INA input.
Count value 3
2
1
0
> >> I-64

Relay
Control Relay
INA
INB
n Count at INA rising edge,
n-1
n-2 stop counting at INB input.
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
D Subtraction counting mode
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
n-1 falling edge at INA input.
n-2
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA
Reversible counting mode A:

INB
UD-A Reversible counting mode A Addition counting at INA input,
subtraction counting when
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
INB input is active.
1 1
0
INA
INB Reversible counting mode B:

UD-B Reversible counting mode B Addition counting at INA input,
subtraction counting at INB input.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA
Reversible counting mode C:

INB
Automatic recognition of positive
UD-C Reversible counting mode C
and reverse rotations, addition
Count value 3 3 and subtraction counting.
2 2 2
1 1
0
7. Sequence diagram of output mode
Output
Plus counting mode Minus counting mode Inverse counting mode A, B, C
mode
Reset Reset Reset

Preset value Preset value Preset value
(N) Count value Count value Count value

0 0 0
Output Output Output
Reset Reset Reset

Count value Count value Count value

(F)
0 0 0
I-65 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


(C)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(R)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(K)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(P)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t I
Reset Reset Reset

(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Note: t is the output time, which can be set by the user.
> >> I-66

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JJ 3 / □
Rated voltage of control power

Design sequence No.
Counting relay
Enterprise symbol
Note: this product is applicable for wide range of operating
AC/DC 100V to 240V.
NJJ3 Counting Relay

1. General
NJJ3 Counting Relay is applicable for controlling circuit @
A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, 240V rated voltage of control power
supply and D.C. 240V rated voltage of control power
supply as counting or counting control element.
I-67 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
3. Technical data
Operating mode 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
Output mode 1group changeover contact, open-collector output (30VDC 100mA Max), batch process output
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Number of counting digits 6-digit counting relay (6-digit red LED is count value, 6-digit green LED is preset value)
Counting speed 1 time/s, 30 times/s, 1000times/s are provided for selection
Counting mode Plus, minus, plus minus inverse A, plus minus inverse B, plus minus inverse C
Batch process Settable range 0~999999
Input signal Contact input, sensor input (NPN type/ PNP type are provided for selection)
Magnitude setting With magnitude setting, range 0.001~99.999
Output time Settable output time 0.01s~9.99s (when output mode is C, R, K, P, Q, A)
Power consumption 3W
External dimension W88×H72×L97 mm
Current failure memory >10 years

Count wiring diagram External dimension
12VDC
Reset 3 0m A Pause Batch reset 88m a x 97max
INA I NB OVDC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
output
3 0V D C 100mA
CO M OUT Batch output
Preset
15 16 17 18 Bath 72max
setting
Lock
Output Batch Reset Power
output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NJJ3 Counting Relay
Output
(+) Power (-)
(-) (-)
Opening size
69
6. Sequence diagram of counting mode 69 I

INA
INB
4
3
Count value 2
1
0

INA
INB
Count at INB input
5
Count value 3
2
1
0
> >> I-68

Relay
Control Relay
INA
INB
n-1
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
n-1 falling edge at INA input.
n-2
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA

INB
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
INA

Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA

INB
2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset


(F)
0 0 0
I-69 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


(C)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(R)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(K)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(P)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t I
Reset Reset Reset

(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
> >> I-70

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
NJJ5－J □□/□
Rated operational voltage

Nil: normal type; E: with extended panel type
L: low speed type 10 times/s
H: high speed type 1000 times/s
J: counter L: time accumulator
Product series model
3. Technical data
Operating voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
Counting range 0~999999
Counting speed 10 times/s or 1000 times/s
Input signal Contact input, relay input (NPN type)
NJJ5-J Electronic Counter Reset mode Panel button reset, external terminal reset
1. General Reset min pulse width 20ms
This product adopts microminiature design and is Counting error ±1 time
applicable for counting in various circuits. Current failure memory >10 years
Power consumption About 1.5VA
4. Wiring diagram
NJJ5-J contact signal input
0VDC CP
1 2 3 4 5
12VDC
( ) Power ( ) 30mA
( ～ ) ( ～ )
supply
NJJ5-J sensor signal input
12VDC
0VDC CP 30mA
1 2 3 4 5
( ) Power ( )
Blue(Blue) Black(Yellow) Brown (Red)
( ～ ) ( ～ )
supply
NPN type sensor
I-71 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
5. Overall dimensions
48max
22.2
24max
NJJ5-J
73max 45
6. Extended panel type

Profile and installation dimension of extended panel type Opening size of extended panel type
56max
25
42max
NJJ5-J
73max 50
7. Operating timing-sequence diagram

NJJ5-J operating timing-sequence diagram
Power supply
Reset
999999
Count value
> >> I-72

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
NJJ5－L □□/□
Rated operational voltage

Nil: normal type; E: with extended panel type
1: 99999.9h
2:99h59min59s
3:9999h59min
4:9999day23h
J: counter L: time accumulator
Product series model
Note: This product is applicable for wide range operating
3. Technical data
Operating voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
Accumulating time range 99999.9h, 99h59min59s, 9999h59min, 9999day23h
NJJ5-L Electronic Resetting mode Panel button resetting, external terminal resetting
Resetting min pulse width 20ms
Time Accumulator Accumulative error ≤0.02％
1. General
Current failure memory > 10 years
This product adopts microminiature design and is
applicable for accumulating time in various circuits. Power consumption 1.5VA approx.
Ambient temperature -5℃ ~+40℃
4. Wiring diagram
NJJ5-L contact signal input
Accumulating
0VDC time control Reset
1 2 3 4 5
( ) ( )
( ～ ) Power supply ( ～ )
Note: If is required to accumulate time as making,

please short connect a and 4.
NJJ5-L sensor signal input
Accumulating
0VDC time control Reset
1 2 3 4 5
( )
( )
Blue (blue) Black (yellow)
( ～ ) Power supply ( ～ )
12VDC
NPN type sensor
Brown (red)
NPN type sensor Blue (blue) Black (yellow)
12VDC
Brown (red)
I-73 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
48max
22.2
24max
NJJ5-L
73max 45
6. Extended panel type

Profile and installation dimension of extended panel type Opening size of extended panel type
56max
25
42max
NJJ5-L 50
73max
7. Operating timing-sequence diagram

NJJ5-L operating timing-sequence diagram
Power supply
Reset
TOP
Accumulative time
> >> I-74

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JJ 6 /□

Design sequence No.
Counting relay
Company feature code
Note: Some models of this product apply to a wide range of

operational voltage. For example, an operational voltage of
AC/DC100V～240V means that it can operate normally within
the voltage range of AC or DC 100V to 240V.
3. Technical data
Operational voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
6
Output mode 1 group of change-over contacts

Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;
Contact capacity
NJJ6 Counting Relay DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:0.5A
6-digit counting relay (the upper 6-digit
1. General Counting digits LCD is the count value, the lower 6-digit
NJJ6 counting relay is used to provide counting and
LCD is the preset value)
counting control in control circuits with an AC frequency
of 50Hz and a rated control voltage of up to 240V and 1 time/second, 30 times/second,
Counting rate
control circuits with a DC rated control supply voltage of 1000 times/second (can be set)
up to 240V. Addition, subtraction, reversible A,
Counting mode
reversible B, reversible C
Contact input, sensor input
Input signal
(NPN type/PNP type can be set)
Value setting Can be set within the range 0.001~99.999
The output time can be set
Output time within 0.01s~9.99s
(under output mode C, R, K, P ,Q or A)
Power consumption 3VA
Overall dimensions W58×H48×L97mm
Opening size W45.5×H45.5mm
Power-off memory More than 10 years (can be set)
4. Wiring diagram
INA INB Reset Pause 0VDC
6 7 8 9 10
12VDC 30mA
11 12
1 2 3 4 5
(+) Power (-) Output

(~) (~)
I-75 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
45.5
58max
97max
R
48max
45.5
复位设置
NJJ6 计数继电器
6. Sequence diagram of counting mode
INA
INB
4
3
Count value 2
1
0

INA
INB
Count at INB input
5
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB INA上升沿计数，
INB输入停止计数。
n-1
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5

*n Preset value
I
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
n-1
INA输入时，
n-2
falling edge at INA input.
INB输入下降沿计数。
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA

INB
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
> >> I-76

Relay
Control Relay
INA

Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA

INB
2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset


(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset


(C)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(R)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
I-77 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


(K)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(P)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
> >> I-78

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JDM 15 G / □

Derivative code
Design sequence No.
Counting relay
Note: Some models of this product apply to a wide range of
AC/DC100V~!240V means that it can operate normally within
the voltage range of AC or DC 100V to 240V.
3. Technical data
Operational voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz AC/DC100V-240V
6
2 groups of change-over contacts,

Output mode
open collector output (30VDC 100mA max)
JDM15G Counting Relay Contact capacity

Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;
DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:0.5A
1. General Counting digits 6-digit counting relay
JDM15G counting relay is used as a counting or
30 times/second, 1000 times/second,
counting control element in control circuits with an AC Counting rate
frequency of 50Hz and a rated control supply voltage of can be set by the user
up to 240V and control circuits with a DC rated control Addition, addition×10,
supply voltage of up to 240V. Counting mode addition×100, subtraction, reversible A,
reversible B, reversible C
Contact input, sensor input
Input signal
(NPN type/PNP type can be set)
Output mode N, F, C, R
The output time can be set within
Output time
0.01s~9.99s (under output mode C or R)
Opening size W69×H69mm
Power-off memory More than 10 years (can be set)
4. Wiring diagram
output
12VDC
INA INB Reset OVDC 30mA 30VDC 100mA NC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18
NO COM NC NO COM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(+) Power (-)

(~) (~)
I-79 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
88max
69
104max
76max PNP NPN
69
输出
复位
计数继电器 JDM 15G 输出时间
6. Sequence diagram of counting mode
INA
INB
4
3
Count value 2
1
0

INA
INB
Count at INB input
5
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB INA上升沿计数，
INB输入停止计数。
n-1
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5

*n Preset value
I
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
n-1
INA输入时，
n-2
falling edge at INA input.
INB输入下降沿计数。
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA

INB
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
> >> I-80

Relay
Control Relay
INA

Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA

INB
2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset


0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset


(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset


(C)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset


(R)
0 0 0

t t t t t t
I-81 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JDM 1 - 48 □ □ □ / □

(AC/DC24V~48V, AC/DC100V~240V,
AC220V, AC380V)
Blank: without power-off memory,
M: with power-off memory
Number of terminals: 8: 8 pins,
11: 11 pins (with 12V output for the sensor)
Counting rate:
L: low speed type, 30 times/second
H: high speed type, 200 times/second
Feature code: 6, 9, 14, 48

Design sequence No.
Counting relay
JDM1-48 Counting Relay Note: Some models of this product apply to a wide range of
1. General AC/DC24V~48V means that it can operate normally within the
JDM1 series counting relay is used as a counting or
voltage range of AC or DC 24V to 48V.
counting control element in control circuits with an AC
frequency of 50Hz and a rated control supply voltage of 3. Technical data
up to 380V and control circuits with a DC rated control
supply voltage of up to 240V. Operational voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz AC/DC100V-240V
5

Output mode 1 group of change-over contacts
Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;
Contact capacity
DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:3A
Counting digits 4-digit counting relay
Counting rate 30 times/second or 200 times/second
Addition, addition ×10,
Counting mode addition ×100 (subtraction counting
available upon request)
Contact input, NPN type sensor input
Input signal
Output mode
(PNP type available upon request)
I
N
Mounting type Panel type (with socket for rail mounting)
Opening size W45.5×H45.5mm
More than 10 years
Power-off memory
(power-off memory type)
> >> I-82

Relay
Control Relay
4. Wiring diagram 6. Sequence diagram of counting mode
JDM1-48 Timing Chart (No blackout memory)
Reset
Conut 4 5
Power
3 6
Reset
2 7 Settings
1 8
OV
NPN Sensors 0
Power
(-) (+)
(~) (~)
Output
JDM1-48 Timing Chart (With power and memory)

6
5 7 Reset
4 8
+12V Brown (Red)
Power
3 9
Conut Black (Yellow)
(-)
2 10 Reset
( )
~ 1 11
Power Blue (Blue) Settings
(+)
( ) OV
~ NPN Sensors
0
Output
58max 128max
52max
JDM1-48
RESET
8 8 8 8 1
45.5
45.5
I-83 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JDM 3 - □ □ □
L：low speed counting, 10 times/second;

H: high speed counting, 200 times/second.
Blank: without voltage input;

V: DC voltage input;
A: AC voltage input.
Counting digits: 6: 6-digit counting;

8: 8-digit counting.
Design sequence No.
Counter
3. Technical data
Power supply Internal power supply
JDM3 Microminiature Battery life Approximately 6 years (25℃)
Electronic Counter Display mode

LCD display, zero elimination type
(zero display type available upon request)
1. General Output mode Without output
JDM3 microminiature electronic counter has built-in Counting digits 6-digit counter or 8-digit counter
lithium battery and small overall dimensions and is used
to provide counting in various types of circuits. Counting rate 10 times/second or 200 times/second
Counting mode Addition counting
Maximum contact on resistance:
≤10kΩ (counting ON)
Without voltage input Minimum contact off resistance:
≥500kΩ (counting OFF)
Maximum input residual voltage: 0.5V
L：DC0V-2V H：4V-30V (H active)
DC voltage input
(input impedance: ≥4.7kΩ)
AC voltage input AC/DC 24V~240V
Panel push-button reset (6-digit),
Reset mode
external terminal reset (6-digit, 8-digit)
Minimum reset pulse width ≥0.2s
Counting error ≤±1 time I
Overall dimensions W48×H24×L52.9mm
Opening size W45×H22.5mm
> >> I-84

Relay
Control Relay
JDM3 (without voltage input)
48max
Input Reset
1 3
52.9max
24max
2 4
LOCK
2 and 4 connected internally
Input Reset
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
JDM3 (DC voltage input)
22.5
Input Reset 45
+V 1K 1K +V
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
Input Reset
+V 1 3 +V
0V 2 4 0V
JDM3 (AC voltage input)
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4 0V
I-85 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
S C 3 L - □ □
Input signal: Blank: without voltage input;

V: DC voltage input;
A: AC voltage input
Time accumulation range :

1: 99999.9h; 2: 99h59min59s;
3: 9999h59min; 4: 9999day23h;
5: 9999h59min59s; 6: 999999h59min59s;
Time accumulator
Design sequence No.
LCD display
Electronic type
3. Technical data
SC3L Microminiature Power supply Internal power supply
Electronic Time Accumulator Battery life Approximately 6 years (25℃)
1. General Display mode LCD display, zero elimination type

SC3L microminiature electronic time accumulator has (zero display type available upon request)
built-in lithium battery and small overall dimensions and is Output mode Without output
used to provide time accumulation in various types of 1: 99999.9h; 2: 99h59min59s;
circuits.
Time accumulation range 3: 9999h59min; 4: 9999day23h;
5: 9999h59min59s; 6: 999999h59min59s;
Maximum contact on resistance:
≤10kΩ (time accumulation ON);
Without voltage input minimum contact off resistance:
≥500kΩ (time accumulation OFF)
0.5V Maximum input residual voltage: 0.5V
DC voltage input L：DC0V-2V H：4V-30V (H active)
(input impedance : ≥4.7kΩ)
AC voltage input AC/DC 24V~240V
Reset mode Panel push-button reset (6-digit),
Minimum reset pulse width

external terminal reset (6-digit & 8-digit)
≥0.2s
I
Time accumulation error ≤0.01%
Overall dimensions W48×H24×L52.9mm
Opening size W45×H22.5mm
> >> I-86

Relay
Control Relay
4. Wiring diagram 5. Overall dimensions
SC3L (without voltage input)
48max
Input Reset
1 3
52.9max
24max
2 4
LOCK
Input Reset
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
SC3L (DC voltage input)
22.5
Input Reset
+V 1K 1K +V 45
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
Input Reset
+V 1 3 +V
0V 2 4 0V
SC3L (AC voltage input)
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4 0V
I-87 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N K G 3-□
Design sequence No.
Time switch
Company code
NKG3 Time Control Switch

3. Technical data
1. General
NKG3 time control switch (hereinafter referred to Rated control supply voltage AC(50Hz) 220V
as time control switch) is used in automatic control Conventional heating current 16A
circuits with a frequency of AC 50Hz, a rated control
Usage category of auxiliary circuit AC-15
supply voltage of up to 220V and a rated operational
current of 3A to provide timed on-off control for street Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15 220V 3A
lamps, advertising lamps and similar equipment. Timing error ≤2 seconds/day
Time control range 1min~24h
Mechanical life ≥30 thousand times
Electrical life ≥10 thousand times
Mounting type Installation type, rail type
Immunity See Table 2
Item Severity level

Electrostatic discharge
±8×(1±10%)kV (air discharge)
immunity
Radiated electromagnetic Test electric field strength:
field immunity
Fast transient
10×(1±10%)V/m
For power line, 2kV, for I/O signal and
I
immunity control circuits, 1kV, duration: 1min
Surge (impact) Open circuit test voltage:
immunity 2×(1±10%)kV
> >> I-88

Relay
Control Relay
4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) 4.2.2 Single expansion mode
If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase
4.1 Profile and installation dimension supplied and has an operational current greater than the rated
value of the switch, AC contactor expansion control mode
should be used, as shown in Figure 2.
R
Figure 2 Connection diagram of single-phase expansion control
(contactor coil: 220V)
82max
96max
NKG3
Power AC220V
36max 68.6max
R
Load AC220V
NKG3
KM
88.8max
4.2.3 Three-phase operating mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is three-phase
supplied, an external AC contactor is required.
a. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC220V 50Hz,
the connection mode shown in Figure 4 should be used.
Figure 4 Connection diagram of three-phase control (contactor

coil: 220V)
4.2 Connection mode

4.2.1 Direct control mode
Load AC380V
L1
If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase L2
L3
supplied and has an operational current not greater than the N KM
rated value of the switch, direct control mode can be used, as

shown in Figure 1. For lamp loads with a large starting impulse
current, AC contactor expansion control mode should be used. R
Figure 1 Connection diagram of single-phase direct control
NKG3
Power AC220V
b. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC380V 50Hz,


NKG3
coil: 380V)
Load AC220V
Load AC380V
L1
L2
L3
N KM
NKG3
I-89 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N KG 2 □
Design sequence No.
Time control switch
Company code
3. Technical data
Rated control supply voltage AC(50Hz) 220V
Conventional heating current 5A
Usage category of auxiliary circuit AC-15
Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15 220V 0.75A
Timing error ≤2 seconds/day
Time control range 1s~168h
Mechanical life ≥30 thousand times
NKG2 Time Control Switch Electrical life ≥10 thousand times

Mounting type Installation type, rail type
1. General
Immunity See Table 2
NKG2 time control switch (hereinafter referred to
as time control switch) is used in automatic control
circuits with a frequency of AC 50Hz, a rated control Item Severity level
supply voltage of up to 220V and a rated operational
Electrostatic discharge
current of 0.75A to provide timed on-off control for ±8×(1±10%)kV (air discharge)
street lamps, advertising lamps and similar equipment. immunity
Radiated electromagnetic Test electric field strength:
field immunity 10×(1±10%)V/m
Fast transient For power line, 2kV, for I/O signal and
immunity control circuits, 1kV, duration: 1min
Surge (impact) Open circuit test voltage:
immunity 2×(1±10%)kV
> >> I-90

Relay
Control Relay
4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) 4.2.2 Single expansion mode
If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase
4.1 Profile and installation dimension supplied and has an operational current greater than the rated
value of the switch, AC contactor expansion control mode
should be used, as shown in Figure 2.
R
Figure 2 Connection diagram of single-phase expansion control
(contactor coil: 220V)
82max
96max
Power AC220V
36max 68.6max
R
Load AC220V
KM
88.8max
4.2.3 Three-phase operating mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is three-phase
supplied, an external AC contactor is required.
a. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC220V 50Hz,

coil: 220V)
4.2 Connection mode

4.2.1 Direct control mode
Load AC380V
L1
If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase L2
L3
supplied and has an operational current not greater than the N KM
rated value of the switch, direct control mode can be used, as

shown in Figure 1. For lamp loads with a large starting impulse
current, AC contactor expansion control mode should be used. R
Figure 1 Connection diagram of single-phase direct control
Power AC220V
b. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC380V 50Hz,


coil: 380V)
Load AC220V
Load AC380V
L1
L2
L3
N KM
I-91 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Technical data
Operating mode Time automatic control
Rated operating current AC-15 3A
Rated operating voltage AC220V 50Hz/60Hz
5
Times of ON/OFF 16 opens & 16 closes
Battery AA size battery (replaceable)
Timing error ≤2s/day
Installation mode Guide rail type, wall-mounted type, unit style
External dimension 117.57×72.43×45.32
3. Wiring diagram
3.1 Wiring for direct control mode: direct control mode can be
used for electrical apparatus which is single-phase power supply
and its power consumption doesn't exceed rated value of this
switch. See Figure 1 for wiring method;
3.2 Wiring for single-phase dilatancy mode: it is required a AC
contactor with larger capacity than electrical apparatus power
consumption for dilatancy when the controlled electrical
NKG1 Time Switch apparatus is single-phase power supply, whereas its power
1. General consumption exceeds rated value of this switch. See Figure 2 for
NKG1 Time Switch is control element with time as wiring method;
control unit and can automatically turn on or turn off 3.1.3 Wiring for three-phase operation mode: if the controlled
power supply of various consumer equipments according electrical apparatus is three-phase power supply, it is required to
to preset time by user. The controlled objects are circuit externally connect three-phase AC contactor.
equipments and household appliances such as street a. See Figure 3 for wiring, control contactor @ AC220V coil
lamps, neon lamps, advertising lamps, manufacturing voltage, 50Hz;
equipments, broadcast & television equipments, etc., which b. See Figure 4 for wiring, control contactor @ AC380V coil
requires turning on and off at definite time. voltage, 50Hz
Figure 1
Power
Load
supply
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1
I
Figure 2
Power
Load
supply
KM
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1
> >> I-92

Relay
Control Relay
Figure 3
A
B Load
C
N KM
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1
Figure 4
A
B Load
C
N KM
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1

Profile installation dimensions
72.43
45.32max
3×φ1.4±0.10
107±0.29
117.57max
35.5±0.28
62.7±0.23
I-93 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Technical data
Applicable voltage range (85%~110%)Ue
Rated operating current AC-15 220V 3A
Contact number One group changeover or 1 ON
6
Battery Built-in rechargeable battery
Time control range 1 min~168h
Times of open/close 16 opens & 16 closes
Consumed power <4VA
Relative humidity ≤95%
Installation mode Guide rail type
3. Wiring diagram
KG10D Time Switch 3.1 KG10D-1H is 1 ON and see Figure 4 for wiring method;
3.2 KG10D-1Z is 1 ON/ 1 NC and see Figure 3 for wiring
1. General method;
KG10D Microcomputer Time Switch can automatically turn 3.3 Wiring for single-phase direct control mode: direct control
on or turn off power supply of various consumer mode can be used for electrical apparatus which is single-phase
equipments according to preset time by user. The power supply and its power consumption doesn't exceed rated
controlled objects are circuit equipments and household value of this switch. See Figure 1 for wiring method;
appliances such as street lamps, neon lamps, advertising 3.4 Wiring for three-phase operation mode: if the controlled
lamps, manufacturing equipments, broadcast & television electrical apparatus is three-phase power supply, it is required to
equipments, etc., which requires turning on and off at externally connect three-phase AC contactor. See Figure 2 for
wiring method for control contactor @ AC380V coil voltage,
50Hz.
Figure 1 single-phase load
KG10D-1H
Power AC220V
I
Load AC220V
Figure 2 three-phase load
KG10D-1H
N KM
Load AC380V
AC contactor
> >> I-94

Relay
Control Relay
Figure 3 KG10D-1Z
1 2 3 4 5
Power
Figure 4 KG10D-1H
1 2 3 4 5
Power

100.2max
35±0.3
68max
90.3
1 2 3 4 5
45max
49.8max
75.5max
I-95 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
2. Technical data
Rated operational current AC-15 220V 3A
Contact number 1 NO
Times of ON/OFF 16-opens & 16-closes
6
Battery Internal Rechargeable Battery
Time-controlling range 1 min~168h
Consumed power <4VA
3. Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
KG10M Time Switch
1. General
KG10M Time Switch can automatically turn on or turn off
power supply of various consumer equipments according 4 5
to preset time by user. The controlled objects are circuit
3 6
equipments and household appliances such as street
lamps, neon lamps, advertising lamps, manufacturing 2 7
equipments, broadcast & television devices etc. Which
1 8
requires turning on and off at definite time.
POWER

WED
I
52.4max
OFF
58.4max 124.6max
Opening size
45.5
45.5
> >> I-96

Relay
Control Relay
2.Technical data
Rated operating current AC-15 3A
Rated output voltage AC220V±1%
Times of ON/OFF 8 opens & 8 closes, 16 opens & 16 closes
3. Function features
3.1 "AA" size battery, replaceable;
3.2 Max set times per day (8 opens & 8 closes, 16 opens & 16
closes) and select according to requirements;
3.3 On-off time may cycle according to day or week;
3.4 Equipped with keyboard locking function for error operation
protection;
3.5 Adopt single key operation in all, easy to install and adjust;
3.6 Timing error ≤2s/day.
4. Wiring diagram
KG316T Time Switch
4.1 Wiring for direct control mode: direct control mode can be
1. General used for electrical apparatus which is single-phase power supply
KG316T Time Switch can automatically turn on or turn off and its power consumption doesn't exceed rated value of this
power supply of various consumer equipments according switch. See Figure 1 for wiring method;
to preset time by user. The controlled objects are circuit 4.2 Wiring for single-phase dilatancy mode: it is required a AC
equipments and household appliances such as street contactor with larger capacity than electrical apparatus power
lamps, neon lamps, advertising lamps, manufacturing consumption for dilatancy when the controlled electrical
equipments, broadcast & television equipments, apparatus is single-phase power supply, whereas its power
etc., which requires turning on and off at definite time. consumption exceeds rated value of this switch. See Figure 2 for
wiring method;
4.3 Wiring for three-phase operation mode: if the controlled
electrical apparatus is three-phase power supply, it is required to
externally connect three-phase AC contactor;
a. See Figure 3 for wiring, control contactor @ AC220V coil
voltage, 50Hz;
b. See Figure 4 for wiring, control contactor @ AC380V coil
voltage, 50Hz.
Figure 1
Power
Load
supply
T In T Out
KG316T
Figure 2
A
B Load
C
N KM
T In T Out
KG316T
I-97 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Figure 3
Power
Load
supply
KM
T In T Out
KG316T
Figure 4
A
B Load
C
N KM
T In T Out
KG316T

107.9±0.29
121
2×R2.1±0.1
63.4±0.37 50.77max
74.73max
> >> I-98

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
N JYW 1－□□/□
Rated power supply voltage

Length of electrode lead-wire:
L1: represents the max length of lead-wire is 1km
L2: represents the max length of lead-wire is 2km
Function code:
N: water supply, water drainage type
B: water supply and water drainage with
anti-exhausted of pump type
Design sequnce No.
Floatless relay
Company code
NJYW1 Floatless Relay

1. General
NJYW1 Series Floatless Relay is used in control circuit @
A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated supply voltage for liquid
level automatic control at places of civil water tower, high
cistern, and underground conservation pool, etc. It is
capable to realize automatic water supply control or water
drainage control according to wiring requirement
of user.
This product is not applicable for level control for liquid
with poor conductivity such as oil, pure water, flammable &
explosive chemical liquid and high density sewage, etc.
3. Technical data
Type NJYW1-NL1 NJYW1-NL2 NJYW1-BL1 NJYW1-BL2
Operating mode Continuous working
Contact number One group changeover contact
Operating voltage AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V/220V, 220V/380V AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V
Control electrode voltage 24V
Conductor length Max 1km Max 2km Max 1km Max 2km
Operating resistance ≤25kΩ
Releasing resistance ≥2kΩ
Response time Reacting: max 80ms; releasing: max 160ms
Power consumption <3VA
Installation mode Guide rail type or device type
I-99 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
4. Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2 Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2
water supply mode 110V/220V water drainage mode 220V/380V
N L L1 L2 L3 N
QS QS
S0 S1 S2 E1 S0 S1 S2 E1
AC110V AC220V
AC220V AC380V
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2 Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
KM KM
KM KM
M M
Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2 wiring diagram for NJYW1-BL1 and NJYW1-BL2
water drainage mode 110V/220V upper/lower water pool level control 220V
N L
N L
QS
QS
Upper water pool
S0 S1 E4 E5 E1
AC220V
S0 S1 S2 E1
AC110V
AC220V Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2 KM Lower water pool

KM
KM
KM
M
M Note: IN NJYW1-BL1 or NJYW1-BL2, Ta,Tc,Tb are not one group of changeover contacts, among which Ta
& Tc are one group of independent normally open contacts; Tc & Tb are one group of normally closed
contacts
Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2 wiring diagram for NJYW1-BL1 and
water supply mode 220V/380V NJYW1-BL2 upper/lower water pool level control 380V
L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3 N
QS
QS
Upper water pool
S0 S1 E4 E5 E1
S0 S1 S2 E1 AC380V
AC220V
AC380V
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2 KM
Lower water pool
KM
KM
KM
M
M
Note: In NJYW1-BL1 or NJYW1-BL2, Ta,Tc,Tb are not one group of changeover contacts, among which Ta &
Tc are one group of independent normally open contacts; Tc & Tb are one group of normally closed
I
contacts
Note: NJYW1-BL1 & NJYW1-BL2 can be used as water supply or

5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) water drainage control independently, its wiring diagram
referring to NJYW1-NL1.
Profile and installation dimensions for NJYW1-NL1,
NJYW1-NL2, NJYW1-BL1, and NJYW1-BL2
115max
70.5max
45.5max
60.2±0.37
35.4±0.28
> >> I-100

Relay
Control Relay
2. Type designation
JYB－714 □
Design sequence No.: Nil: Basic type

Type B: with reacting indicator;
Type C: with"water supply"; "drainage" reacting
indicator
Floatless Relay
3. Technical data
Type JYB-714 JYB-714B JYB-714C

Operating mode Continuous working
Contact number One group of changeover contact
AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V
Operating voltage
(other voltage can be custom made)
Control electrode
50μA
max current
Conductor length Max 1km
JYB-714 Floatless Relay Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃
1. General Power consumption <3VA
JYB-714 Series Floatless Relay is used in liquid level Installation mode Device type or guide rail type
automatic control circuit @ AC 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V
rated supply voltage for liquid level automatic control at 4. Wiring diagram
places of civil water tower, high cistern, and underground
conservation pool etc. Wiring diagram for JYB-714, JYB-714B, JYB-714C
220V water supply mode
N L
QS
1 8
2 7
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
Wiring diagram for JYB-714, JYB-714B, JYB-714C

380V water supply mode
L3 L2 L1
QS
1 8
2 7
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
M
3~
I-101 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
Wiring diagram for JYB-714, JYB-714B, JYB-714C JYB-714C profile and installation dimensions
220V water drainage mode
6 5 4 3
N L
2×φ4.4±0.2
QS
70max
1 8
2 7 7 8 1 2
KM 3 6 108max
KM 4 5
40±0.3
M 50max
Wiring diagram for JYB-714, JYB-714B, JYB-714C

380V water drainage mode
L3 L2 L1
QS
1 8
2 7
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
M
3~

JYB-714 profile and installation dimensions
6 5 4 3
2×φ4.4±0.2
70max
7 8 1 2
108max
40±0.3
50max
I
JYB-714B profile and installation dimensions
6 5 4 3
2×φ4.4±0.2
70max
7 8 1 2
108max
40±0.3
50max
> >> I-102

Relay
Control Relay
Time Relay Socket Series
CZS08C CZF11A-E (with finger safety protection)
70×50×20(mm) 52×44×31(mm)
6 5 4 3 4.2
2 1 11 10
CZS08C
70max
9
35.4
3
52max 34
35.4
4
2-M4×30
4
CZF11A-E
7 8 1 2
5 6 7 8
34 31max
44max
40max 20max
50max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, JDM1-48, KG10M, JYB-714 and NJS1 Applicable relay type: JS14S device type, and JDM1-14
CZS08G CZS08X-E (with finger safety protection)
48.8×40×20.1(mm) 72×43.6×21(mm)
32
40max 20.1max 6 5 4 3
4.2
2 1 B 7
6 5 4 3
72max
50max
35.4
48.8max
CZS08X-E
7 8 1 2
7 8 1
6 5 4 3
34max 21max
43.6max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, NJS1, Applicable relay type: JSZ3A, JSZ3C, JSZ3-2/3,
JDM1-48, KG10M, and JSZ3H-Y JSZ3K, JSZ3R, JSZ3F, and JSZ3Y
I-103 > >>

Relay
Control Relay
CZY08B-01 (wide type, copper strip connection) CZY14B (copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
8 5 8 7 6 5
4 1 4 3 2 1
63max
63max
35.4
35.4
4
4
1 1 1 1
4 3 4 3
1 1 1 1 9
2 9 2 1 0
25 26max 25 26max
30.5max 30.5max
Applicable relay type: JSZ6-2 Applicable relay type: JSZ6-4

CZS08S CZS11S FM8858
I
φ32.4×36.2(mm) φ32.4×36.2(mm)
36.2max φ32.4max 36.2max φ32.4max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, JDM1-6, Applicable relay type: JSS48A-11,

Applicable relay type: JSZ3
JSZ3H-Y, NJS1 JDM1-48, NJS1-11
> >> I-104

Relay
2. Type designation
NJX-13FW (D) / 006 - 2Z 1 1
Installation: 1=top flange type;

2=lateral flange type;
blank=standard type
Termination: 1=PCB 6=Plug-in
Contact arrangement:
2Z=2C(10A); 2ZS=2C(5A);
3ZS=3C; 4ZS=4C
Coil type: ~= AC; - = DC
Coil voltage : DC: 5V~220V;
Type: AC: 6V~380V
D=with LED indicator;
B=With LED indicator and surge withstand;
M=With arc suppression cover (only 4C);
Blank=Standard
Series
3. Technical data
NJX-13FW Miniature Power Relay
Contact Arrangement 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
1. General
1.1 3A, 5A, 10A switching capacity Initial contact resistance mΩ 100
1.2 Wide range of coil ratings Contact material Silver alloy
1.3 Fully sealed Rated load (resistive) A (220VAC/28VDC) 10 5 5 3
1.4 Certificate: CE, UL VAC 250
Max. switching voltage
VDC 125
Max. switching current A 10 5 5 3
VA 2200 1100 1100 660
Max. switching power
W 280 140 140 84
3
Electrical endurance Cycles(×10 ) 300
Machenical endurance Cycles(×106) 10
4. Coil specification
AC
Rated Holding Must drop- Operating Power
voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
6
12
24
36
48 (80%~110%)
80%Un 20%Un 1.2VA
110 Un
127
220
230
380
DC
5
6
12
24
(75%~110%)
36 75%Un 10%Un 0.9W
Un
48
110
127
220
I-105 > >>

Relay
5. Characteristics
Insulation resistance(at 500VDC) MΩ 100
Dielectric Between coil & contacts 1500VAC
strength Between open contacts 1000VAC
Operation time ms ≤25
Release time ms ≤25
Shock resistance m/s2 100
Vibration 10～55Hz,1mm double amplitude
Ambient temperature range ℃ -30～+60
Termination Plug-in, PCB
Dimension mm 27.5×21.5×35.5

Internal connection 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
Standard type 5 6 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
1 1 2 4 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 3 4 8 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
with indicator
13 14 13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
with indicator and diode
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
(+) (+) (+) (+)
10 13.2
13.2 13.2
4.4
3.8
4
4.6
4
6.4 4.1
6.4 4.1
6.4 4.1
6
18
16.9
16.9
PCB mounting holes
16.9
8×φ1.8
8×Φ1.3 11×Φ1.3
14×Φ1.3
14.2
I
> >> I-106

Relay
Dimensions 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
Plug-in type
7max
7max
7max
7max
5 2.6 2.6 2.6
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
PCB type
5max
5max
5max
5max
1.5 1 1 1
Installation 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
43max
43max
43max
43max
38
38
38
38
5 6 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
Top flange type 13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
Lateral flange type

7max
7max
7max
7max
5 2.6 2.6 2.6
I-107 > >>

Relay
2. Normal operating conditions and mounting
conditions
Temperature range -30℃~+60℃

Relative humidity +40℃ return 90%
Atmospheric pressure 86kPa~106kPa
Working position Any
3. Technical data
3.1 Contact data
Contact form 2Z(C)

Initial contact resistance 100mΩ
Contact material Silver alloy
Contact load (resistive) 10A/220VAC、10A/28VDC
Max. switching voltage 250VAC/125VDC
Max. switching current 10A
Max. switching power 2200VA 280W
5
Electrical life (times) 1×10
Mechanical life (times) 1×107
JQX-13F Miniature High-power

Electromagnetic relay
1. General
Contact switching capability of 10A; a complete range
of AC/DC specifications; enclosed in transparent dust cover,
a variety of mounting types; various sockets available;
Specifications with state indicators available;
certifictaion: CQC 03001003918, UL E205607, CE; models
of the same type: LY2(N), HH62P(-L).
3.2 Characteristics data

Insulation resistance 100MΩ(500VDC)
Between coil & yoke,
1500VAC
I
Dielectric strength between different groups of contacts
Between open contacts 1000VAC
Operation time ≤25ms
Release time ≤25ms
Shock (resistance) Acceleration: 100m/s2, pulse duration: 11ms
Vibration 1mm double amplitude, 10~55Hz
Outlet terminal type Plug-in type, PCB type
Overall dimensions (mm) 27.5×21.5×35.5
3.3 Coil data

Rate power consumption 0.9W、1.2VA
Pick-up voltage DC: ≤75% rated voltage; AC: ≤80% rated voltage
Release voltage DC: ≥10% rated voltage; AC: ≥20% rated voltage
Max. voltage 110% Rated voltage
> >> I-108

Relay
3.4 Specification data Connection diagram (bottom view) 2Z(B)
Rated Operation voltage Release voltage Coil resistance
voltage VDC(≤) VDC(≥) Ω±10% 1 2
3 4
5 3.75 0.5 28
6 4.5 0.6 44 5 6
12 9.0 1.2 160

24 18.0 2.4 640 7 8
(+)
36 27.0 3.6 1440

48 36.0 4.8 2560
110 82.5 11.0 14500 PCB opening drawing (2Z)
127 95.3 12.7 17000
10
220 165.0 22.0 39000
3.8
6 4.6
Rated Operation voltage Release voltage Coil resistance
18
voltage VDC(≤) VDC(≥) Ω±10%
8×φ1.8
6 4.8 1.2 10.5
12 9.6 2.4 44
24 19.2 4.8 180 14.2
36 28.8 7.2 380

48 38.4 9.6 650 Outline drawing (plug-in type)
110 88.0 22 3670
21.5max 27.5max
127 101.6 25.4 4100
220 176.0 44 14500
35.5max
380 304.0 76 39000

7.5max
4. Matching socket (optional)

5 5 0.5
Relay model JQX-13F(D)/2Z

Model of Outline drawing (PCB type)
CZT08A-01 CZT08A-02 CZT08B-01 CZT08B-01E
matching socket
Overall dimensions 21.5max 27.5max
72×30×31 72×23×31 68×30×28 68×30×28
of socket (mm)
35.5max
Type of
Screw terminal (installation type, rail type)
5max
socket lead
5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) 1.5 0.5
Connection diagram (bottom view) (2Z)

Outline drawing (lateral flange type)
1 2
43max
3 4 27.5max 21.5max
3.8
5 6
35.5max
7.5max
18.15
7 8
5 0.5 5
38
Connection diagram (bottom view) 2Z(D)

Outline drawing (top flange type)
1 2
3 4
0.5 5 5
5 6
7.5max
35.5max
7 8
27.5max 21.5max
8
3.5
2
4
6
3
5
1
38
43max
I-109 > >>

Relay
2. Type designation
JZX-22F (D) / 006 - 2Z 1 1
Installation: 1=top flange type;

2=lateral flange type;
blank=standard type
Termination: 1=PCB, 6=Plug-in
Contact arrangement 2Z=2C;
3Z=3C;
4Z=4C
Coil type: ~= AC;
- = DC
Coil voltage : DC: 5V~220V;
AC: 6V~380V
Type:
D=with LED indicator;
B=With LED indicator and surge withstand;
M=With arc suppression cover (only 4C);
Blank=Standard
JZX-22F Miniature Power Relay Series
1. General 3. Technical data
1.1 3A, 5A switching current
1.2 Various sockets available Contact Arrangement 2C 3C 4C
1.3 With indicator to be selected Initial contact resistance mΩ 100
1.4 Full range of AC and DC coil Contact material Silver alloy
1.5 Certificate: CE.
5A/220VAC 3A/220VAC
Rated load(resistive)
5A/28VDC 3A/28VDC
VAC 250
MAX. switching voltage
VDC 125
MAX. switching current A 5 3
VA 1100VA 660VA
Max. swithcing capacity
W 140 84
Electrical endurance Cycles(×103) 100
4. Coil specification
AC
Rated
voltage
Holding
voltage
Must drop-
out voltage
Operating
range
Power
consumption
I
6
12
24
36
48 80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 1.2VA
110
127
220
230
380
> >> I-110

Relay
DC
5
6
12
24
(75%~110%)
36 75%Un 10%Un 0.9W
Un
48
110
127
220
5. Characteristics
Humidity 90% RH at +40℃
Dimension mm 27.5×21.5×35.5
6. Overall mounting dimensions (mm)

Internal connection(bottom view)
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14 13 14 10 11 13 14
2C 3C 4C 2C, with indicator 3C, with indicator 4C, with indicator
Internal connection(botton view) PCB mounting poles
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 13.2
13.2 13.2
4.4
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
4
4
4.1
4.1
4.1
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
6.4
6.4
16.9
16.9
6.4
16.9
13 14 10 11 13 14
(+) (+) (+)
8×Φ1.3 11×Φ1.3
14×Φ1.3
2C with indicator 3C with indicator 4C with indicator

2C 3C 4C
and diode and diode and diode
I-111 > >>

Relay
Dimensions
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

27.5max
27.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
7max
7max
7max
2.6 2.6 2.6
0.5 0.5
Plug-in, 2C Plug-in, 3C Plug-in, 4C
Plug in PCB
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 43max

27.5max
3.8
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
27.5max
0.5
18.15
5max
5max
5max
2
35.5max 7max 0.5
38
1 1 1
top flange Lateral flange
PCB, 3C PCB, 4C PCB, 2C
Left view
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
43max
43max
43max
38
38
38
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14
7max
7max
7max
3.5 3.5 3.5
2.6 2.6 2.6
2C, front installation 3C, front installation 4C, front installation 2C, lateral flange 3C, lateral flange 4C, lateral flange
(top flange) (top flange) (top flange)
> >> I-112

Relay
2. Type designation
JQX-10F / 006 - 2Z
Contact arrangement: 2Z=2C; 3Z=3C

Coil type: ~= AC; - = DC
Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V; AC: 6V~380V
Series
3. Technical data
Contact Arrangement 2C, 3C
Initial contact resistance mΩ 100
Rated load (resistive) 10A/250VAC, 10A/28VDC
VAC 250
VDC 125
Max. switching current A 10
VA 2500
W 280
3
Electrical endurance Cycles(×10 ) 100
JQX-10F Miniature power relay
1. General 4. Coil specification
1.1 10A switching current AC
1.2 Various sockets available
1.3 Wide range of coil ratings Rated Holding Must drop- Operating Power
1.4 Certificate: UL, CE voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
6
12
24
36
48 80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3VA
110
127
220
230
380
DC
5
6
12
24
36 75%Un 10%Un (75%~110%)Un 2W
48
110
127
220
I-113 > >>

Relay
5. Characteristics
Dimension mm 35×35×52

Internal connection (bottom view) Dimensions
35max 35max
4 5
6 7 8 9
3 6
10
7
35max
35max
5
11 1
6
2 7
5
4
1
2 4 2
1 8 3 3
52max
52max
5 7
66.5max
66.5max
4 8
3 9
2 10
1 11 10
10
> >> I-114

Relay
2. Type designation
JTX - 2C / 006 / VDC
Coil type: VDC/VAC

Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V;
AC: 6V~380V
Contact configuration: 2C; 3C
Series
3. Technical data
VAC 250
VDC 125
VA 2500
W 280
JTX Miniature power relay Electrical endurance Cycles(×103)
6
100
1. General Machenical endurance Cycles(×10 ) 10

1.1 10A switching current
1.2 Various sockets available 4. Coil specification
1.3 Wide range of coil ratings AC
1.4 Certificate: UL, CE
6
12
24
36
48 80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3VA
110
127
220
230
380
DC
5
6
12
24
36 75%Un 10%Un (75%~110%)Un 2W
48
110
127
220
I-115 > >>

Relay
5. Characteristics
Termination Plug-in

35max 35max
4 5 6 7 8 9
10
7
35max
35max
5
8
3 6
11
65
4
1
2 7 3 2 4 3
2
1 8
JTX-2C
52max
52max
6
5 7
66.5max
66.5max
4 8
3 9
2 10
1 11
10
10
JTX-3C
JTX-2C JTX-3C
> >> I- 116

Relay
2. Type designation
JMK 2P-Ⅰ / 006 / VDC
VDC/VAC
Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V;
AC: 6V~380V
Contact configuration: 2P=2C;
3P=3C
Series
3. Technical data
VAC 250
VDC 125
VA 2500
JMK Miniature power relay Electrical endurance
W
Cycles(×103)
280
100
1. General
1.1 10A switching current
1.2 With indicator to be selected
1.3 Full range of AC and DC coil 4. Coil specification
1.4 Certificate: UL, CE AC
6
12
24
36
48 80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3.5VA
110
127
220
230
380
DC
5
6
12
24
36 75%Un 10%Un (75%~110%)Un 2W
48
110
127
220
I-117 > >>

Relay
5. Characteristics
Termination Plug-in

35max 35max
4 5
6 7 8 9
3 6
10
7
35max
35max
5
11
6
2 7
5
4
1
1 8 2 4 2
3 3
JMK2P-Ⅰ
53max
53max
67.5max
67.5max
6
5 7
4 8
3 9
2 10
1 11
10
10
JMK3P-Ⅰ
JMK2P-Ⅰ JMK3P-Ⅰ
> >> I-118

Relay
Power Relay Socket Series
CZF08A CZF08A-E(With finger safety protection)
52×41×21.5(mm) 52×41×21.5(mm)
2 1 8 7
2 1 8 7
CZF08A
52max
52max
35.4
35.4
33 33
2-M4×20 2-M4×20
2×φ4
2×φ4
CZF08A
CZF08A-E
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6
33 21.5max 33 21.5max
41max 41max
Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/2Z, JTX-2C, JMK2P-I Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/2Z, JTX-2C, JMK2P-I
CZF11A CZF11A-E(With finger safety protection)
52×44×31(mm) 52×44×31(mm)
2 1 11 10 2 1 11 10
3 9
3 9
52max
52max
34
35.4
35.4
33
4
2-M4×20 2-M4×30
4 4
2×φ4
CZF11A CZF11A-E
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
33 31max 34 31max
41max 44max
Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/3Z, JTX-3C, JMK3P-I Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/3Z, JTX-3C, JMK3P-I
I-119 > >>

Relay
CZT08A-E(With finger safety protection) CZT08B-01(Wide type, copper strip connection)
79×29×33(mm) 68×30×28(mm)
2 1
4 3
4 3
2 1
19
35.4
79max
68max
68
35.4
68
4
CZT08A-E
2-M4×12
6 5
8 7
8 7
6 5
4.4 33max 26 28max

19 30max
29max
Applicable relay type: JQX-13F(B)/2Z, Applicable relay type: JQX-13F(B)/2Z,

NJX-13FW(B)/2Z, HH62P(-L), LY2(N) NJX-13FW(B)/2Z, HH62P(-L), LY2(N)
CZY08A-E(With finger safety protection) CZY11A-E(With finger safety protection)
72×23×31(mm) 72×30×31(mm)
4 1
3 2 1
I
8 5
6 5 4
15
22
72max
72max
35.4
59
59
35.4
59
59
CZY08A-E
2-M4×10
CZY11A-E
2-M4×10
12 9
9 8 7
14 13
11 10
4 4
15 31max 22 31max
30max
23max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/2Z, Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/3Z, NJX-13FW(B)/3ZS,

NJX-13FW(B)/2ZS, HH52P(-L), MY2(N) HH53P(L),MY3(N)
> >> I-120

Relay
CZY14A-E(With finger safety protection) CZY08B-01(Wide type, copper strip connection)
72×30×31(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
3 2 1
8 5
8 7 6 5
4 1
22
72max
63max
35.4
59
59
35.4
4
CZY14A-E 2-M4×10
1 1
12 11 10 9 4 3
4 14 13 1
2 9
4
31max
22 25 26max
30max 30.5max
Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS, Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/2Z, NJX-13FW(B)/2ZS,

HH54P(L),MY4(N) JZX-18F(L)/2Z, HH52P(L),MY2(N)
CZY11B (Copper strip connection) CZY14B (Copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
6 5 4 8 7 6 5
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
63max
35.4
63max
35.4
4
1 1 1 1
1 0 4 3
1 1 1 9
9 8 7 2 1 0
25 26max 25 26max
30.5max 30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/3Z, NJX-13FW(B)/3ZS, Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,HH54P(L) ,
HH53P(L), MY3(N) JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
I-121 > >>

Relay
CZY14B-E (With finger safety protection, copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm)
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
35.4
63max
1 1
4 3
1 1 1 9
2 1 0
25 26max
30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,HH54P(L) ,

JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
NG102 NG103
Applicable relay type: CZT series、CZY series Applicable relay type: CZY□B series、CZT□B series
> >> I-122

Relay
CZY14A-E(With finger safety protection) CZY08B-01(Wide type, copper strip connection)
72×30×31(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
3 2 1
8 5
8 7 6 5
4 1
22
72max
63max
35.4
59
59
35.4
4
CZY14A-E 2-M4×10
1 1
12 11 10 9 4 3
4 14 13 1
2 9
4
31max
22 25 26max
30max 30.5max
Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS, Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/2Z, NJX-13FW(B)/2ZS,

HH54P(L),MY4(N) JZX-18F(L)/2Z, HH52P(L),MY2(N)
CZY11B (Copper strip connection) CZY14B (Copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
6 5 4 8 7 6 5
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
63max
35.4
63max
35.4
4
1 1 1 1
1 0 4 3
1 1 1 9
9 8 7 2 1 0
25 26max 25 26max
30.5max 30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/3Z, NJX-13FW(B)/3ZS, Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,HH54P(L) ,
HH53P(L), MY3(N) JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
I-123 > >>

Relay
CZY14B-E (With finger safety protection, copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm)
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
35.4
63max
1 1
4 3
1 1 1 9
2 1 0
25 26max
30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,HH54P(L) ,

JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
NG102 NG103
Applicable relay type: CZT series、CZY series Applicable relay type: CZY□B series、CZT□B series
> >> I-124

LV Capacitor
Self-heating Shunt Capacitor
BZMJ
Page J-01
NWC1
Page J-04
NWC5
Page J-07
Intelligent Reactive Power

Compensation Controller
JKF8
Page J-10
LV Capacitor
BZMJ
2. Type designation
B Z M J □-□-□
No. of phase
Rated capacity (kvar)
Rated voltage (kV)
BZMJ Self-healing Capacitor series

Shunt Capacitor
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: ≤AC1000V;
1.2 Application: For improvement of power factor 3. Normal operation & mounting conditions
and power quality 3.1 Ambient temperature: -25℃~+50℃
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1:2002 3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃, ≤90% at 20℃
3.3 Altitude: ≤2000m
3.4 Environmental conditions:
without dangerous gas & steam,
insulated and explosive dust
and dramatic mechanical vibration.
4. Technical data
4.1 Rated voltage: AC(0.23~1.0)kV
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz.
4.3 Rated capacity: 1~60Kvar
4.4 Capacity error: -5~+10%
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value:
≤30kvar tgs≤0.0012
＞30kvar tgs≤0.0015
at rated power frequecy voltage.
4.6 Max. Allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un
4.7 Max. Allowed over-current: 1.3In
4.8 Having Self-discharging property: power off,
voltage reduces from√2 Un to 75V and below within 3min.
4.9 Specific data
J-01 > >>

LV Capacitor
BZMJ
Serial Type and Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Enclosure
voltage capacity frequency capacitor current height Figure
number Specification (kV) (kvar) (Hz) (μF) (A) (mm)
1 BZMJ 0.23-5-3 0.23 5 50 301 12.5 140 Fig1

2 BZMJ 0.23-6-3 0.23 6 50 361 15.1 190 Fig1
3 BZMJ 0.23-7.5-3 0.23 7.5 50 451 18.8 190 Fig1

4 BZMJ 0.23-10-3 0.23 10 50 602 25.1 195 Fig2
5 BZMJ 0.23-12-3 0.23 12 50 722 30.1 220 Fig2

6 BZMJ 0.23-15-3 0.23 15 50 903 37.7 250 Fig2
7 BZMJ 0.23-20-3 0.23 20 50 1203 50.2 250 Fig3

8 BZMJ 0.4-3-3 0.4 3 50 60 4.3 95 Fig1
9 BZMJ 0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 95 Fig1
10 BZMJ 0.4-6-3 0.4 6 50 119 8.7 120 Fig1
11 BZMJ 0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 120 Fig1

12 BZMJ 0.4-8-3 0.4 8 50 159 11.5 120 Fig1
13 BZMJ 0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 140 Fig1

14 BZMJ 0.4-12-3 0.4 12 50 239 17.3 190 Fig1
15 BZMJ 0.4-14-3 0.4 14 50 279 20.2 190 Fig1
16 BZMJ 0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 190 Fig1
17 BZMJ 0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 190 Fig1

18 BZMJ 0.4-18-3 0.4 18 50 358 26.0 220 Fig1
19 BZMJ 0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 220 Fig1

20 BZMJ 0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 220 Fig2
21 BZMJ 0.4-30-3 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 250 Fig2

22 BZMJ 0.4-40-3 0.4 40 50 796 57.7 250 Fig3
23 BZMJ 0.4-50-3 0.4 50 50 995 72.2 315 Fig3
24 BZMJ 0.4-60-3 0.4 60 50 1194 86.6 315 Fig3
25 BZMJ 0.45-3-3 0.45 3 50 47 3.8 120 Fig1
26 BZMJ 0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 120 Fig1
27 BZMJ 0.45-6-3 0.45 6 50 94 7.7 120 Fig1
28 BZMJ 0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 120 Fig1
29 BZMJ 0.45-8-3 0.45 8 50 126 10.3 120 Fig1
30 BZMJ 0.45-10-3 0.45 10 50 157 12.8 140 Fig1
31 BZMJ 0.45-12-3 0.45 12 50 189 15.4 190 Fig1
J
32 BZMJ 0.45-14-3 0.45 14 50 220 18.0 190 Fig1
33 BZMJ 0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 190 Fig1
34 BZMJ 0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 190 Fig1
35 BZMJ 0.45-18-3 0.45 18 50 283 23.1 220 Fig1
36 BZMJ 0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 220 Fig1
37 BZMJ 0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 220 Fig2
38 BZMJ 0.45-30-3 0.45 30 50 472 38.5 250 Fig2
39 BZMJ 0.45-40-3 0.45 40 50 629 51.3 250 Fig3

40 BZMJ 0.45-50-3 0.45 50 50 786 64.2 315 Fig3
41 BZMJ 0.45-60-3 0.45 60 50 943 77.0 315 Fig3
42 BZMJ 0.525-5-3 0.525 5 50 58 5.5 120 Fig1
43 BZMJ 0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 140 Fig1
44 BZMJ 0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 190 Fig1
45 BZMJ 0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 220 Fig1

46 BZMJ 0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 220 Fig2
47 BZMJ 0.525-30-3 0.525 30 50 346 33.0 250 Fig2
48 BZMJ 0.525-40-3 0.525 40 50 462 44.0 250 Fig3
49 BZMJ 0.525-50-3 0.525 50 50 577 55.0 315 Fig3
50 BZMJ 0.525-60-3 0.525 60 50 693 66.0 315 Fig3
> >> J-02

LV Capacitor
BZMJ
51 BZMJ 0.69-5-3 0.69 5 50 33 4.2 95 Fig1

52 BZMJ 0.69-10-3 0.69 10 50 67 8.4 140 Fig1
53 BZMJ 0.69-15-3 0.69 15 50 100 12.6 190 Fig1
54 BZMJ 0.69-20-3 0.69 20 50 134 16.7 220 Fig1
55 BZMJ 0.69-25-3 0.69 25 50 167 20.9 220 Fig2
56 BZMJ 0.69-30-3 0.69 30 50 201 25.1 250 Fig2
57 BZMJ 0.69-40-3 0.69 40 50 267 33.5 250 Fig3
58 BZMJ 0.69-50-3 0.69 50 50 334 41.8 315 Fig3
59 BZMJ 0.69-60-3 0.69 60 50 401 50.2 315 Fig3
60 BZMJ 1.14-10-3 1.14 10 50 25 5.1 220 Fig1
61 BZMJ 1.14-15-3 1.14 15 50 37 7.6 250 Fig2
62 BZMJ 0.4-7.5-3YN 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 195 Fig2*
63 BZMJ 0.4-10-3YN 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 195 Fig2*
64 BZMJ 0.4-15-3YN 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 250 Fig2*
65 BZMJ 0.4-20-3YN 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 250 Fig3*
Note: The specifications marked with “* “ are used for compensating the individual phase,
the bigger one of the four terminals should be connected to the neutral line.
5. Features 6. Notices
5.1 Compact design and reliable quality thanks to advanced 6.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated
technology and excellent imported material; under specified conditions,
5.2 Available for use in places with higher ambient temperature including the proper temperature,
and voltage variation ; voltage and current, as over-voltage and over-current
5.3 Having good sealing properties; amd outgoing terminals for may shorten the life of the capacitor;
convenient wiring and reliable connection; 6.2 Please pay attention to the points following
5.4 Fixed type, convenient for mounting and elegant appearance when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
due to novel mounting pins; a. For the system of current regulating system
5.5 No painting thanks to coated metal Enclosure used ; and the electric equipments system,
the capacitor should not be directly connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less
than the off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load,
the capacitor should stop operating.
6.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays
should be adopted when the capacitor is
shuntly connected in the system.
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

28 28
25 25 25 25
37
30
30
H
H
7×10 boring
7×10 boring 7×10 boring
78
50
70
78
37
56
50
70
64
160 178 260

180 206 288
198
224 306
J-03 > >>

LV Capacitor
NWC1
2. Type designation
N W C 1 □-□-□ □
L: with inductor
Number of phase: 3: 3-ph; 1: 1-ph
Rated capacity Qn (kvar)
Rated voltage Un (kV)
Capacitor series
NWC1 Self-healing
Shunt Capacitor
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: ≤AC1000V; 3. Normal operation & mounting conditions
1.2 Application: For improvement of power factor 3.1 Ambient temperature: -25℃~+50℃
and power quality; 3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃, ≤90% at 20℃
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1: 2002 3.3 Altitude: ≤2000m
3.4 Environmental conditions:
without dangerous gas & steam,
insulated and explosive dust
and dramatic mechanical vibration.
4. Technical data
4.1 Rated voltage: 0.4, 0.415, 0.45, 0.525 and 0.69kV
J
4.4 Capacity error: -5~+10%;
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value:
≤30kvar tgs≤0.0012
＞30kvar tgs≤0.0015
at rated power frequency voltage
4.6 Max. allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un, not exceed 8h in 24h
4.7 Max. allowed over-current: 1.3In
voltage reduces from√2 Un (DC) to 75V
and below within 3min.
4.9 Model and Specifications
> >> J-04

LV Capacitor
NWC1
1 NWC1-0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 160 Fig1

2 NWC1-0.4-6-3 0.4 6 50 119 8.7 160 Fig1
3 NWC1-0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 160 Fig1
4 NWC1-0.4-8-3 0.4 8 50 159 11.5 160 Fig1
5 NWC1-0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 160 Fig1
6 NWC1-0.4-12-3 0.4 12 50 239 17.3 220 Fig1
7 NWC1-0.4-14-3 0.4 14 50 279 20.2 220 Fig1
8 NWC1-0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 220 Fig1
9 NWC1-0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 220 Fig1
10 NWC1-0.4-18-3 0.4 18 50 358 26.0 260 Fig1
11 NWC1-0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 260 Fig1
12 NWC1-0.4-24-3 0.4 24 50 477 34.6 230 Fig2
13 NWC1-0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 230 Fig2
14 NWC1-0.4-30-3 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 230 Fig2
15 NWC1-0.4-35-3 0.4 35 50 696 50.5 270 Fig2
16 NWC1-0.4-40-3 0.4 40 50 796 57.7 270 Fig2
17 NWC1-0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 160 Fig1
18 NWC1-0.45-6-3 0.45 6 50 94 7.7 160 Fig1
19 NWC1-0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 160 Fig1
20 NWC1-0.45-8-3 0.45 8 50 126 10.3 160 Fig1
21 NWC1-0.45-10-3 0.45 10 50 157 12.8 160 Fig1
22 NWC1-0.45-12-3 0.45 12 50 189 15.4 220 Fig1
23 NWC1-0.45-14-3 0.45 14 50 220 18.0 220 Fig1
24 NWC1-0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 220 Fig1
25 NWC1-0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 220 Fig1
26 NWC1-0.45-18-3 0.45 18 50 283 23.1 260 Fig1
27 NWC1-0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 260 Fig1
28 NWC1-0.45-24-3 0.45 24 50 377 30.8 230 Fig2
29 NWC1-0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 230 Fig2
30 NWC1-0.45-30-3 0.45 30 50 472 38.5 230 Fig2
31 NWC1-0.45-35-3 0.45 35 50 550 44.9 270 Fig2
32 NWC1-0.45-40-3 0.45 40 50 629 51.3 270 Fig2
33 NWC1-0.525-5-3 0.525 5 50 58 5.5 160 Fig1
34 NWC1-0.525-6-3 0.525 6 50 69 6.6 160 Fig1
35 NWC1-0.525-7.5-3 0.525 7.5 50 87 8.2 160 Fig1
36 NWC1-0.525-8-3 0.525 8 50 92 8.8 160 Fig1
37 NWC1-0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 160 Fig1
38 NWC1-0.525-12-3 0.525 12 50 139 13.2 220 Fig1
39 NWC1-0.525-14-3 0.525 14 50 162 15.4 220 Fig1
40 NWC1-0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 220 Fig1
41 NWC1-0.525-16-3 0.525 16 50 185 17.6 220 Fig1
42 NWC1-0.525-18-3 0.525 18 50 208 19.8 260 Fig1
43 NWC1-0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 260 Fig1
44 NWC1-0.525-24-3 0.525 24 50 277 26.4 230 Fig2
45 NWC1-0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 230 Fig2
46 NWC1-0.525-30-3 0.525 30 50 346 33.0 230 Fig2
47 NWC1-0.525-35-3 0.525 35 50 404 38.5 270 Fig2
48 NWC1-0.525-40-3 0.525 40 50 462 44.0 270 Fig2
49 NWC1-0.69-5-3 0.69 5 50 33 4.2 160 Fig1
50 NWC1-0.69-6-3 0.69 6 50 40 5.0 160 Fig1
J-05 > >>

LV Capacitor
NWC1
51 NWC1-0.69-7.5-3 0.69 7.5 50 50 6.3 160 Fig1
52 NWC1-0.69-8-3 0.69 8 50 53 6.7 160 Fig1
53 NWC1-0.69-10-3 0.69 10 50 67 8.4 160 Fig1

54 NWC1-0.69-12-3 0.69 12 50 80 10.0 220 Fig1
55 NWC1-0.69-14-3 0.69 14 50 94 11.7 220 Fig1

56 NWC1-0.69-15-3 0.69 15 50 100 12.6 220 Fig1
57 NWC1-0.69-16-3 0.69 16 50 107 13.4 220 Fig1

58 NWC1-0.69-18-3 0.69 18 50 120 15.1 260 Fig1
59 NWC1-0.69-20-3 0.69 20 50 134 16.7 260 Fig1

60 NWC1-0.69-24-3 0.69 24 50 160 20.1 230 Fig2
61 NWC1-0.69-25-3 0.69 25 50 167 20.9 230 Fig2

62 NWC1-0.69-30-3 0.69 30 50 201 25.1 230 Fig2
63 NWC1-0.69-35-3 0.69 35 50 234 29.3 270 Fig2

64 NWC1-0.69-40-3 0.69 40 50 267 33.5 270 Fig2
65 NWC1-0.4-50-3 0.4 50 50 995 72.2 350 Fig3

66 NWC1-0.4-60-3 0.4 60 50 1194 86.6 460 Fig3
67 NWC1-0.4-80-3 0.4 80 50 1591 115.5 460 Fig3

68 NWC1-0.4-100-3 0.4 100 50 1990 144.3 570 Fig3
5. Notices
5.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated under specified conditions, including the proper temperature,
voltage and current, as over- voltageand over-current may shorten the life of the capacitor;
5.2 Please pay attention to the points following when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
a. For the system of current regulating system and the electric equipments system,
the capacitor should not be directly connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less than the off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load, the capacitor should stop operating.
5.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays should be adopted when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system.

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
J
25 25 25 25
H+34.5
H+34.5
H
H
194 67 194 132

360 130
47
206
224
224 390
254 420
On ordering, please clarify rated voltage, capacity, number of phase, frequency, etc of the products;
and associated conditions at the mounting place.
> >> J-06

LV Capacitor
NWC5
2. Type designation
N W C 5 □-□-□
Number of phase: 3: 3-ph
Rated capacity Qn (kvar)
Rated voltage Un (kV)
NWC5 Self-healing Capacitor series
Shunt Capacitor
1. General
1.1 Edectric ratings: ≤AC1000V.
1.2 Application: Newly developed energy-saving product
3. Normal operation & mounting conditions
for improvement of power factor and power quality; 3.1 Ambient temperature: -25℃~+50℃
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1:2002 3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃, ≤90% at 20℃
3.4 Environmental conditions: without dangerous gas & steam,
insulated and explosive dust and dramatic mechanical
vibration.
4. Technical data
4.1 Rated voltage: 0.4, , 0.45, 0.525kV
4.4 Capacity error: -5~+10%;
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value: ≤0.0012,
at rated power frequency voltage
4.6 Max. allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un, not exceed 8h in 24h
4.7 Max. allowed over-current: 1.3In
voltage reduces from√2 Un (DC) to 75V
and below within 3min.
4.9 Model and Specifications
J-07 > >>

LV Capacitor
NWC5
Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Mounting
Serial Type and Dimensions
voltage capacity frequency capacitor current Dimensions
number Specification (kV) (kvar) (Hz) (μF) (A) D×H(mm)
(mm)
1 NWC5-0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 φ76×180
2 NWC5-0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 φ76×180
3 NWC5-0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 φ76×240
4 NWC5-0.4-12-3 0.4 12 50 239 17.3 φ76×240
5 NWC5-0.4-14-3 0.4 14 50 279 20.2 φ76×280 M12×16
6 NWC5-0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 φ76×280
7 NWC5-0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 φ76×280
8 NWC5-0.4-18-3 0.4 18 50 358 26.0 φ86×280
9 NWC5-0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 φ86×280

10 NWC5-0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 φ96×280 M16×25
11 NWC5-0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 φ76×180
12 NWC5-0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 φ76×180
13 NWC5-0.45-10-3 0.45 10 50 157 12.8 φ76×240
14 NWC5-0.45-12-3 0.45 12 50 189 15.4 φ76×240
15 NWC5-0.45-14-3 0.45 14 50 220 18.0 φ76×280 M12×16
16 NWC5-0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 φ76×280
17 NWC5-0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 φ76×280
18 NWC5-0.45-18-3 0.45 18 50 283 23.1 φ86×280

19 NWC5-0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 φ86×280
20 NWC5-0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 φ96×280 M16×25
21 NWC5-0.525-5-3 0.525 5 50 58 5.5 φ76×180
22 NWC5-0.525-7.5-3 0.525 7.5 50 87 8.2 φ76×180
23 NWC5-0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 φ76×240
24 NWC5-0.525-12-3 0.525 12 50 139 13.2 φ76×240

25 NWC5-0.525-14-3 0.525 14 50 162 15.4 φ76×280 M12×16
26 NWC5-0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 φ76×280
27 NWC5-0.525-16-3 0.525 16 50 185 17.6 φ76×280
28 NWC5-0.525-18-3 0.525 18 50 208 19.8 φ86×280
29 NWC5-0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 φ86×280
30 NWC5-0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 φ96×280 M16×25 J
31 NWC5H-0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 φ86×280 M12×16
32 NWC5H-0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 φ96×280 M16×25
33
34
NWC5H-0.45-20-3
NWC5H-0.45-25-3
0.45
0.45
20
25
50
50
314
393
25.7
32.1
φ86×280
φ96×280
M12×16
M16×25
I
35 NWC5H-0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 φ86×280 M12×16
36 NWC5H-0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 φ96×280 M16×25
5. Features
5.1 Safe and reliable operation because of the independent
protective enclosure;
5.2 With good sealing properties; and outgoing terminals for
convenient wiring and reliable connection;
5.3 Available for use in the places with higher ambient
temperature and voltage variation ;
5.4 Fixed type, convenient for mounting and elegant appearance
due o to novel mounting pins.
> >> J-08

LV Capacitor
NWC5
6. Notices
6.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated under
specified conditions, including the proper temperature,
voltage and current, as over-voltage and over-current may
shorten the life of the capacitor;
6.2 Please pay attention to the points following when the
capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
a. For the system of current regulating system and the electric
equipments system, the capacitor should not be directly
connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less than the
off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load, the capacitor should stop
operating.
6.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays should
be adopted when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the
system.
NWC5 NWC5H
15 15
35
35
H
D
D
J-09 > >>

LV Capacitor
JKF8
2. Type designation
JK F 8-□
Output loop specification
Low-Voltage
Reactive Power Compensation Controller Series
3. Features
3.1 With combined control on reactive power
and power factor, a reliable input can be ensured
under low load, and surge switching can be prevented.
3.2 Real-time display of the network status,
including parameters such as power factor,
voltage, current, active power, and reactive power, etc.
JKF8 Intelligent Low-Voltage 3.3 The polarity of the sampling signal can
be automatically identified. Therefore, there is no need
Reactive Power to worry about wrong connections with reversed polarity.
3.4 In case the voltage of the electrical power network
Compensation Controller is lower than 300 V, or exceeds
the preset over-voltage protection value,
1. General the connected capacitor banks will be
JKF8 Intelligent Low-Voltage automatically and rapidly(5 sec.)
Reactive Power Compensation Controller disconnected in steps, and the voltage value
(hereinafter referred to as ”controller”) is a dedicated will be displayed.
controller which can make compensations for the reactive 3.5 In case the signal from the secondary coil of
power of low voltage distribution system. the current transformer is smaller than 150 ｍA,
the controller will prevent any more capacitor
from being connected,
in the mean time, automatically and rapidly (5 sec.)
disconnect the connected capacitor banks step-wise.
3.6 Switching (opening/closing control
of the contactor) prevention time for the same group
of capacitors is 3 minutes J
(capacitor discharge duration)
3.7 The controller is with cyclic automated-self-test function,
which facilitates the factory acceptance test
for a capacitor panel.
4.1 Ambient temperature: -10℃~+40℃
4.2 Relative humidity: ≤50%, when 40℃, ≤90% when 20℃
4.3 Altitude: ≤2000 m
4.4 Operation environment: free of hazardous gas
and/or vapor, conductive or explosive dust,
or rigorous mechanical vibration.
4.5 Operation voltage: 400VAC±10%
> >> J-10

LV Capacitor
JKF8
5. Technical specifications
Parameters Technical Specifications
Sampling voltage 400VAC±10%

Sampling current 150mA~5 A
Rated frequency 50/60Hz±5%
Low-current capacitor
≤150 mA
connection prevention
Range of transformation ratio for sampling current transformer: 5~800,
Current transformation ratio
Preset value of the ratio (preset value in factory: 60, which means 300/5)
Time lag 5~120 seconds (preset value in factory: 30 seconds)
Full automation mode (displayed code F-0: 1): no need to set the capacitor connection threshold
or the capacitor disconnection threshold.
Preset mode
Manual setup mode(displayed code F-0: 0): need to set the capacitor connection threshold
and the capacitor disconnection threshold manually.
Capacitor connection Full automation mode: capacitor banks in the smallest step
threshold Manual mode: preset value for reactive power: 1~120 kvar (preset value in factory: 10 kvar)
Capacitor disconnection
Power factor, 0.85 ~ -0.95 continuously adjustable (preset value in factory: 1.00)
threshold
Over-voltage threshold 400 V~456 V (preset value in factory: 430 V)
JKF8-6 (loop number can be set between 1 and 6),

Loop number
JKF8-12(loop number can be set between 1 and 12)
Operation mode Automated cyclic opening/closing control & manual operation
Max. power consumption 15 W

Output contact point capacity 5A/230V(or 3A/400V)
Weighyt Approximately1.5 Kg
J-11 > >>

LV Capacitor
JKF8
6. Wiring diagram
High voltage side
10 Is1
9 Is2 Powter transformer
Total current transformer

8 JKF8 Rear View
A B C N
7 Us1
6 Us2
5 H
Low voltatge side

4
3 COM L
2 12 FU1 FU2 FU3
1 11
5A 1A 1A
P P
J1 J12
To load control panel
Note: If the coil voltage of the contactor is 230 V,

point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor is 400 V,
point P is connected to Phase B or C.
J
6.1 Connection terminal US1 and US2 are to be connected to the sampling voltage. AC 400 V shall be connected.
6.2 Terminal IS1 and IS2 are to be connected to the sampling current, which shall be sampled
from the transformed current generated by the current transformer for the load, and which shall not be in-phase with
US1 and US2 (if A is for current, then B and C are for voltage).
6.3 Terminal COM is the common shared terminal to be connected to number 1 to 12 relays in
the output lines of the controller, and each of the terminals 1~12 is to be connected to the output control line
to control the respective contactor in the respective compensation loop of the capacitor panel.
6.4 If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 230 V, then Point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 400 V, then Point P is connected to Phase C
(as long as it is not in-phase with terminal COM).
6.5 FU1~3 are to be connected to fusers which are supplied by the user.
> >> J-12

LV Capacitor
JKF8
7. Description of parameters
7.1 Description of dynamic parameters
Code Signification Unit Description

If the measured value is out of the display range,
I Current A
the approximate value will be displayed, e.g., 1260 A is displayed as E13
U Voltage V Display the measured voltage value

If the measured value is out of the display range, the approximate value
Q Reactive power Kvar
will be displayed, e.g., 1360 Kvar is displayed as E14.
If the measured value is out of the display range, the approximate value
P Active power KW
will be displayed, e.g., 1360 kW is displayed as E14.
7.2 Description of preset parameters (menu description)
Range of Factory Change

Code Description Remark
Settings Settings Step
1 full automation
F-0 Preset mode 1 or 0 1 —
0 manual setup
1~120 kvar 10 kvar 1 kvar This parameter is invalid

F-1 Capacitor connection threshold
under the full automation mode
F-2 Target power factor 0.85~-0.95 1.00 0.01 “-” stands for system capacity
F-3 Switching time lag 5~120 sec . 30 sec. 1 sec.
F-4 Over-voltage protection 400 V~456 V 430 V 2V Voltage difference: 8~10V
F-5 Number of control loop 1~6 or 1~12 6 or 12 1 Two types of specifications
Transformation ratio of the
F-6 5~800 60 5 (300: 5)
sampling current transformer
8. Overall and Mounting Dimension (mm)
120
113±0.5mm
120
130mm 113±0.5mm
Boring dimension
On ordering, please clarify rated voltage, number of phase, frequency, etc of the products;
and associated conditions at the mounting place.
J-13 > >>

Transformer
Control Transformer
NDK JBK5
Control Transformer Control Transformer
Page K-01 Page K-04
JBK6 SG
Control Transformer Series Three-phase
Air-immersed
Transformer
Page K-06 Page K-08
Current Transformer
BH-0.66Ⅰ BH(SDH)-0.66Ⅱ
Current Transformer Current Transformer
Page K-11 Page K-15
BH-0.66Ⅲ RCT
Current Transformer Current Transformer
Page K-17 Page K-22
MES
Current Transformer
Page K-25
Potential Transformer
JDZ-1 JDG4-0.5
Voltage Transformer Voltage Transformer
Page K-26 Page K-27

Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT
Transformer
2. Type designation
NDK-□
Rated output capacity (VA): 25VA~5000VA
Control
Single-phase
Corporation character
NDK Control Transformer 3. Operation conditions

1. General 3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃, the average value within
1.1 Frequency: AC 50Hz/60Hz; 1 month should not exceed +30℃ and not exceed
1.2 Application: for control power supply of apparatus, +20℃ within 1 year;
partial illumination and indicator light of machine tool 3.2 Altitude: ≤2000m;
3.3 Relative humidity: ≤95%
and other mechanic equipments.
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 61558, Q/ZT258.
4. Features
The transformer is characterized by excellent performances,
reliable operation, compact design, safe wiring, and wide
application, etc.
K-01 > >>

Transformer
5. Technical data
Capacity Rated Rated Frequency

Model (VA) input voltage(V) output voltage(V) (Hz)
NDK-25 25
NDK-50 50
NDK-100 100
NDK-150 150
NDK-200 200
NDK-250 250
NDK-300 300
6, 12, 24,
NDK-400 400
230, 400 36, 110, 127, 50/60
NDK-500 500
230, 400
NDK-700 700
NDK-1000 1000
NDK-1500 1500
NDK-2000 2000
NDK-3000 3000
NDK-4000 4000
NDK-5000 5000
Note: Customized products are available.

NDK-25~1000
Emax
F
K
C
A
Bmax Dmax K
F
NDK-1500~5000
Dmax
Emax
F
10
20
A C
Bmax
> >> K-02

Transformer
Mounting dimensions Mounting holes Overall dimensions
Model (A×C) (mm) (K×J) (mm) (B×D×E) (mm)
NDK-25 62.5×50 5×8 80×80×82

NDK-50 70×58 6×10 85×83×84
NDK-100 85×64 6×10 103×87×99
NDK-150 85×72 6×10 103×93×99
NDK-200 85×83 6×10 103×105×99
NDK-250 100×80 8×11 130×120×150
NDK-300 100×84 8×11 130×125×150
NDK-400 110×114 8×11 148×155×153
NDK-500 110×114 8×11 148×155×153
NDK-700 125×99 8×11 173×158×174
NDK-1000 125×123 8×11 173×186×174
NDK-1500 160×120 10×20 265×195×265
NDK-2000 160×130 10×20 265×205×275
NDK-3000 160×140 10×20 265×220×305
NDK-4000 190×180 10×20 315×260×305
NDK-5000 190×180 10×20 315×260×305
7. Wiring
7.1 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V 230V, 7.2 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V;
output 36V 24V 12V 6V capacity 60VA 12V; capacity 40VA
0 230V 400V 0 400V

Primary
Primary
Iron core Iron core
Secondary
Secondary
36V 24V 12V 6V 0 36V 60VA 0 12V 40VA 0
7.3 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V 12V 7.4 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V
0 400V 0 400V
Primary Primary
Iron core Iron core
Secondary Secondary
36V 12V 0 36V 0
K-03 > >>

Transformer
2. Type designation
JB K 5 - □ / □
Product code for the tropical zone:

"H" humid tropics, "A” dry tropical zone
Rated capacity: 40VA~2500VA
Control
Machine tool transformer

JBK5
Control Transformer
1. General
1.1 Application: JBK5 series control transformers are
suitable for AC circuit of 50Hz/60Hz, 3. Operating conditions
used as control sources for various mechanical equipment 3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃,
and general electrical appliances, and used as power should not exceed +35℃ the average value within 24 hours.
supplies for work lighting and signal lamps. If the lowest limit is -10℃ or -25℃, please declared.
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 61558, Q/ZT205 3.2 Altitude: ≤2000m;
3.3 Relative humidity ≤90%, when the average lower limit value
is under +25℃ within the month;
≤50% when the temperature is +40℃.
And when lower temperature;
the humidity could be relatively higher.
But the teaperature is lower, the humidity higher.
We always adopt gas argon arc welding for the connection
among iron cores and between iron core and clamping piece
K
(mounting piece) of JBK5 series control transformers,
which enables the product to be an entirety, so that the
structure is more reasonable and reliable.
The mounting piece adopts technique of casting at a time and

the earthing lugs are made of high quality corrosion protection
alloy material, which sharply improves the reliability of
grounding.
In addition, the products have advantages of reliable operation,

low dissipation of energy, compact volume, safe wiring,
wide applicability, etc.
> >> K-04

Transformer
JBK5-40~630 type
Dmax
F
Emax
A
K
A
C
Bmax
JBK5-1000~2500 type
Bmax
Dmax
Dimension (mm) Item

Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions (mm) Mounting holes (mm)
Capacity (VA) B max D max E max A C K

40~63 79 78 92 66 46 4.8
100 85 95 97 72 62 4.8
160 97 96 105 84 73.5 5.8
250 97 110 105 84 85 5.8
400 121 110 122 100 85 7
630 151 116 143 130 90 7
1000 230 170 156 160 142 7×14
1600 258 185 168 180 155 7×14
2500 285 210 175 210 175 7×14
K-05 > >>

Transformer
2. Type designation
JBK6-□
Rated capacity :40VA~3000VA
Control
Transformer
Machine tool
JBK6
Control Transformer
1. General 3. Operation conditions
1.1 Application: 3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃,
JBK6 series control transformers are suitable for AC the average value should not exceed +35℃ within 24 hours.
circuit of 50Hz/60Hz, used as control power for If the lowest limit is -10℃ or -25℃, declared.
machine tools and industrial mechanical equipment, 3.2 Altitude:≤2000m;
and used as power supplies for electronic equipment, 3.3 Relative humidity ≤90%, when the average value
work lighting and signal lamps. is under +25℃; ≤50% when the temperature is +40℃.
1.2 Standard: Q/ZT205. Put the temperature is lower, the humidity is higher.
This series transformer is the successor of other control
transformers, is made of imported material with advanced
technique, with advantages of reliable operation,
low loss of energy, compact volume, safe wiring,
wide applicability, etc.
K
We always adopt gas argon arc welding for the connection
among iron cores and between iron core and clamping piece
(mounting piece) of JBK6 series control transformers
(40~630VA), which enable the product to be an entirety,
so that the structure is more reasonable and reliable.
The mounting piece adopts technique of casting at a time,
The earthing are made of high quality corrosion protection alloy
material, which improves the reliability of grounding, with
advantages of reliable operation, low dissipation of energy,
compact volume, safe wiring, wide applicability, etc.
This series control transformers are embedded with overheated

protector (automatic reset) in the coil, and equipped with over-
current protection connection terminal at input end, and the
end of overheat protector and over-current protection
connection terminal are connected to the connection end of
input side of transformer winding in series. Consequently, this
series control transformer has functions of over-current
protection and overheat protection.
> >> K-06

Transformer
JBK6-40~630 type JBK6-1000~3000 type
Dmax
Emax
Emax
A C
Bmax
A C
Bmax
0 -5 % 380 +5%
-5% 380 +5% 0
Dmax
0 6 0 24 0 110
110 0 24 0 6 0
Dimension (mm) Item Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions (mm) Mounting holes (mm)
Capacity (VA) B max D max E max A C K

JBK6-40 79 78 97 66 46 4.8
JBK6-63 79 78 97 66 46 4.8
JBK6-100 85 94 102 72 62 4.8
JBK6-160 97 96 110 84 73.5 5.8
JBK6-250 97 110 110 84 85 5.8
JBK6-400 122 108 127 100 85 7
JBK6-630 152 116 148 130 90 7
JBK6-1000 152 165 168 125 123 8×11
JBK6-1600 194 155 200 160 123 8×11
JBK6-2500 194 200 200 160 168 8×11
JBK6-3000 194 200 200 160 168 8×11
K-07 > >>

Transformer
2. Type designation
S G - □/□
Voltage grade (kV)
Rated capacity(kVA)
Normal cooling type
Three-phase
SG Three-phase
3. Normal working and mounting conditions
Air-immersed Transformer
3.1 Altitude not exceed2000m.
1. Scope of application 3.2 Ambient temperature within-5℃~+40℃.
SG series Three-phase Air-immersed Transformer, is natural 3.3 Relative humidity: less than 95%.
cooling indoor, it is applicable to the circuit of AC 3.4 In the ambient, there should not has the gas that corroding metal,
50Hz~60Hz, 1000V and below. It can be used in control destroying insulation. The transformer should not be corroded by
power of machine tool and mechanical equipment small type water, rain or snow.
power as well as work lighting and signal lamp power.
4. Configuration and characters

The transformers have two body types: exposed and fence. It has the
advantage of low consumption、small noise、better performance
against fire and free of pollution etc. The shell of the protective type
is made of steel plate, the transformer is in the shell. There are
several holes outside the shell to installation the power lines In
addition, this type can add the monitor meter of the voltage and
current according to the customer request, And if the capacity is
K
above 80KVA, it can also add the axial flow fan or wheels for
moving.
> >> K-08

Transformer
5.Overall and mounting dimensions
5.1 The outline of SG series exposed dry cooling type transformer
(as sheet, fig.1)
5.2 The outline of SG series fence dry cooling type transformer
(as sheet, fig.2, fig.3, fig4, fig.5)
Exposed type Fence type (0.3kVA~3kVA)
Dmax
Bmax Dmax
Emax
Emax
A C
Bmax
Fence type (4kVA~20kVA) Fence type (30kVA~60kVA)
Bmax Dmax
Bmax Dmax
Emax
Emax
A A C
C
Fence type (80kVA~500kVA)
Bmax Dmax
铭牌
V V
A A A
Emax
K-09 > >>

Transformer
Voltage (V) Overall dimensions (mm)
Connecting
Model Capacity Exposed Fence Exposed Fence
Input Output mark Mounting holes
Bmax Dmax Emax Bmax Dmax Emax A±5 C±5 A±5 C±5
SG-0.15 0.15 200 120 140 220 240 185 125 77 - -
SG-0.3 0.3 200 120 140 220 240 185 125 77 - - 6×15
SG-0.5 0.5 200 125 140 220 240 185 125 82 - -
SG-0.75 0.75 250 146 220 330 315 265 150 95 - -
SG-1 1 250 156 220 330 315 265 150 106 - -

Yyno
SG-1.5 1.5 660 380 315 220 260 370 355 315 220 103 - -
(Y/Yo) 8×16
SG-2 2 315 220 260 370 355 315 220 103 - -
SG-2.5 2.5 315 240 260 370 355 315 220 120 - -
SG-3 3 315 240 260 370 355 315 220 120 - -
SG-4 4 360 320 330 510 400 550 280 125 415 170
Yd
400 220 415 170
SG-5 5 (Y/△) 360 320 330 510 400 550 280 125
10×20
SG-6 6 360 320 330 510 400 550 280 125 415 170
SG-8 8 400 320 350 560 430 600 280 130 465 200
SG-10 10 430 350 390 560 430 600 310 145 465 200
SG-15 15 Dy 480 355 410 600 440 620 310 155 515 210
380 110
SG-20 20 (△/Y) 520 360 430 650 440 650 310 160 545 210
SG-30 30 690 430 500 870 500 780 420 170 765 270 Φ10
SG-40 40 710 450 510 960 640 830 420 175 865 320
SG-50 50 770 470 570 960 640 830 420 190 865 320
SG-60 60 Dd 780 490 570 1000 640 860 420 200 895 320
220 36
(△/△)
SG-80 80 855 500 600 1060 830 1080 420 205 with weels
SG-100 100 870 520 620 1140 840 1140 420 220 with weels
SG-150 150 960 580 700 1180 980 1250 640 240 with weels Φ14
SG-200 200 1000 600 750 1260 1000 1300 680 245 with weels
SG-300 300 1150 750 1000 1480 1020 1480 750 460 with weels Φ14
SG-500 500 1350 920 1260 1700 1500 1700 820 510 with weels
Notice: 6. Order notice

1. The dimensions of the above only for reference, when 6.1 product designation: three-phase normal-type transformer
the input current is more than 300A, the customer need to 6.2 product type
order specially, and the size will change correspondingly. 6.3 output capacity: 20kVA
2. You can choose the rated input/output voltage in the
sheet arbitrarily according to the demand.
6.4 frequency: 50Hz
6.5 rated input voltage (line-to-line voltage):380V
K
3. The voltage and size out of the sheet, should confer 6.6 rated input voltage (line-to-line voltage):220V
with consumer on their demand. 6.7 connection mode: input is “Y”, output is “△” or Mark Y/△
4. SG-80kVA and above fence type transformer body 6.8 exposed or fence: exposed
have wheels and fan cooling system, with ammeter
and voltmeter, as fig.5.
5. SG-4kVA~60kVA fence type transformer only have
body, with one indicator light of power, as fig.3, fig.4.
6. SG-0.3kVA~3kVA fence type transformer’s wiring
terminals are outside, with an indicator light of power,
as fig.2.
> >> K-10

Current Transformer
3. Type designation
BH-0.66 -□Ⅰ
Category number
Width of window for bars
Current transformer series
BH-0.66 I
Current Transformer
1. Application
To be used in combination with measurement instruments:
ammeters, watt-hour meters, measurement units,
control relays, etc.
2. Technical data
2.1 Secondary current Isn: 5A
2.2 Rated voltage Ue:660 V
2.3 Frequency: 50/60 Hz
2.4 Instrument security factor (FS): 10
2.5 Operating temperature: -5°C to +40°C, humidity <80%
2.6 Standards: IEC 60044-1
2.7 Installation type: busbar or plate fixing
K-11 > >>

Current Transformer
4. Technical data
Power(VA)
Accuracy class Number of
Transformation Overall and installing
turns through
Model ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A) dimensions (mm)
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
5/5 5 2.5
10/5 5 2.5
15/5 5 2.5
20/5 5 2.5
86
25/5 5 2.5
30/5 5 2.5
P1
40/5 5 2.5
38 68
BH-0.66 Solid type 50/5 5 2.5 82
68
75/5 5 2.5
75/5 2.5 1
S1 S2
φ22
80
P1
100/5 2.5 1
38 34
61
BH-0.66 20Ⅰ
30/5 5 2.5 5
50/5 5 2.5 3
75/5 5 2.5 2
75/5 2.5 1 S1 S2
100/5 2.5 1
80
11
100/5 5 5 2
150/5 5 2.5 1 φ23
P1
200/5 5 5 1 30.5
33
32
250/5 5 5 1
60.5
300/5 5 5 1
BH-0.66 30Ⅰ 400/5
30/5
5 5
2.5 2.5
1
5
K
50/5 2.5 2.5 3
75/5 2.5 2.5 2 S1 S2
75/5
98
5 2.5 1
31
21
11
100/5 5 2.5 1
100/5 5 5 2 P1
150/5 2.5 2.5 1 11.5

21.5
200/5 5 5 1 31.5 42
250/5 5 5 1 44
75
BH-0.66 30ⅠB
300/5 5 5 1
> >> K-12

Current Transformer
Power(VA)
turns through
Model ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A) dimensions (mm)
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
30/5 5 2.5 5
50/5 5 2.5 3
75/5 5 2.5 2
75/5 2.5 1
100/5 2.5 1
φ31
S1 S2
100/5 5 5 2
98
150/5 5 2.5 1
42
11
200/5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1 P1
300/5 5 5 1 11
42
400/5 5 5 1 40
43
500/5 10 10 5 5 1 75
BH-0.66 40Ⅰ 600/5 10 10 5 5 1

150/5 2.5 1
200/5 2.5 2.5 1
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1 φ37
S1 S2
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 1 98
16
600/5 10 10 5 5 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1 P1
50
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
51
40
82
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
BH-0.66 50Ⅰ 1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
200/5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 1 S1 S2
500/5 10 10 5 5 1
126
600/5 10 10 5 5 1
21
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
P1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 φ46
50
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 62
102 40
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
BH-0.66 60Ⅰ 1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
K-13 > >>

Current Transformer
Power(VA)
Model turns through
ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A) dimensions (mm)
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
300/5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 1 S1 S2
600/5 10 10 1
30.5
138
11
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
P1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 50
60.5 φ52
81.5
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 46
118
BH-0.66 80Ⅰ 2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
600/5 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1 S1 S2
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
154
42
32
22
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
P1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 50
φ62
62
82
102
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
46
145
BH-0.66 100Ⅰ 2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
φ62
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
136
36
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
P1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
50
126
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1 190
3000/5 40 40 40 40 1
46
4000/5 40 40 40 40 1
BH-0.66 120Ⅰ
K
> >> K-14

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
2.2 Rated voltage Ue: 660 V
2.8 Installation type: Busbar or plate fixing
3. Type designation
BH(SDH)-0.66 - □ Ⅱ
Category number
BH(SDH)-0.66 II Current transformer series
Current Transformer
1. Application
ammeters, watt-hour meters,
measurement units, control relays, etc.
4. Technical data
Rated output(VA)
Model turns through
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
150/5 5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 1
S1 S2
250/5 5 5 1
104
300/5 5 5 1
31
400/5 5 5 1
P1
500/5 10 10 5 5 1
600/5 10 10 5 5 1 42
44
78.5 46
BH(SDH)-0.66 40 Ⅱ 750/5 10 10 10 10 1
K-15 > >>

Current Transformer
Rated output(VA)
Model turns through
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
150/5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1 S1 S2
400/5 5 5 1
106
31.5
500/5 10 10 5 5 1
600/5 10 10 5 5 1
P1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 52
54
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 87 46
BH(SDH)-0.66 50 Ⅱ
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
300/5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 1 S1 S2
600/5 10 10 5 5 1
110
31.5
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
P1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 53
62
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 102
48
BH(SDH)-0.66 60 Ⅱ 1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
600/5 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 1 S1 S2
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
32.5
118
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
P1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
60
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 82
122 47
BH(SDH)-0.66 80 Ⅱ 2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
122
32.5
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
P1
74
K
102
BH(SDH)-0.66 100 Ⅱ 2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
140 50
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 S1 S2
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
154
52
2000/5 20 20 20 20 1
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1 P1
3000/5 40 40 40 40 1 54
122
BH(SDH)-0.66 120 Ⅱ 4000/5 40 40 40 40 1 169 48
> >> K-16

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
3. Type designation
BH-0.66 - □ Ⅲ
Category number
BH-0.66 III
Current Transformer
1. Application
4. Technical data
Rated output(VA)
Model turns through
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
75/5 2.5 1
S1 S2
86
44.5
11
P1
100/5 5 1
φ20
22
41
150/5 10 5 1 64
45
54
36
200/5 10 5 1
BH-0.66 20 Ⅲ
K-17 > >>

Current Transformer
Rated output(VA)
Model turns through
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
150/5 10 5 5 5 1 68
S1 S2 59
200/5 10 5 5 5 1 50
92
P1
54
31
21
11
250/5 10 5 5 5 1
300/5 10 10 5 5 1
11
21
400/5 10 10 5 5 1 31
49
BH-0.66 30 Ⅲ 500/5 10 10 10 10 1 72
150/5 10 5 1
200/5 10 5 1 68
59
250/5 10 5 1 S1 S2 50
300/5 10 10 5 5 1
102
31
11
P1
62
42
400/5 10 10 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
11
750/5 10 10 10 10 1 31
42
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 59
84
BH-0.66 40 Ⅲ 1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
300/5 10 10 1
400/5 10 10 1 S1 S2
68
φ36 59
500/5 10 10 10 10 1 50
107
41
21
11
P1
65
52
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
11
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 21
41
52
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 61
88
BH-0.66 50 Ⅲ 1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
68
600/5 10 10 10 10 1 S1 S2 59
P1 50
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
123
86
34
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 62
K
90
BH-0.66 60 Ⅲ 1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 112
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1 68
S1 S2
59
750/5 10 10 10 10 1 P1 50
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
152
109
54
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 82
105
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1 132
BH-0.66 80 Ⅲ 2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
> >> K-18

Current Transformer
Rated output(VA)
Model turns through
iron core
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 P1
108
150
53
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
102
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 125
152
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
68
59
50
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
BH-0.66 100 Ⅲ
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 P1
151
109
52
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
122
147
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1 174
3000/5 40 40 40 40 1
61
52
70
4000/5 40 40 40 40 1
BH-0.66 120 Ⅲ
5. Features
5.1 The product is characterized by high accuracy, fewer accessories and easy mounting, etc.
5.2 Made of single or several pieces of enameled wire evenly distributed around the core, secondary winding is characterized by good
magnetic conductivity capability, low power consumption, small magnetic-flux-leakage and convenient compensation adjustment.
5.3 Encapsulated in fire-reatardant plastic, the enclosure is characterized by good insulation capacity, high intensity, elegant apperance,
light convenient mounting, ect.
K-19 > >>

Current Transformer
6. Installation
The fig below illustrates how the current transformer BH is mounted

Fixing through busbar
Screw M5
Busbar(one or several pcs)

Fixing plate
Insulation baffle
Insulation seat gasket
Base mounting
Busbar or cable
Screw M4 and washer
Mounting base
Surface of switchgear
> >> K-20

Current Transformer
The fig below illustrates how the current transfcrmer BH-0.66 is mounted
Fixing through busbar
Screw M5
Insulation seat gasket
Busbar(one or several pcs)
Insulation baffle
Base mounting
Busbar or cable
Mounting base
Surface of switchgear
Screw and washer
K-21 > >>

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
2.5 Operating temperature: -5℃+40℃, humidity＜80%
3. Type designation
RCT - □
Diameter of window for bars
RCT Current Transformer

1. Application Current transformer series
1.1 Application: to be used
in combination with measurement
instruments: ammeters, watt-hour meters,
4. Features
4.1 The product is characterized by compact design,
light weight, etc.
4.2 Made of single or several pieces of enameled wire evenly
distributed around the core, secondary winding is
characterized by good magnetic conductivity capability,
low power consumption, small magnetic-flux-leakage
and convenient compensation adjustment.
4.3 Encapsulated in fire-retardant plastic,
the enclosure is characterized by good insulation capacity,
high intensity, elegant appearance, light weight,
convenient mounting, etc.
> >> K-22

Current Transformer
5. Technical data
Rated output(VA)
Number of
Current Overall and installing
Model Accuracy class turns through
ratio (A) dimensions (mm)
iron core
0.5 1
75/5 2.5 2.5 1
94
φ25
φ78
100/5 2.5 2.5 1 76 8.5

94 55
RCT-25
75/5 2.5 2.5 1
100/5 2.5 2.5 1
150/5 5 5 1
94
φ35
φ78
200/5 5 5 1
76 8.5
94 55
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1
RCT-35
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 1
120
750/5 10 10 1
φ105 φ60
800/5 10 10 1 8.5
80 55
110
1000/5 10 10 1
RCT-60 1200/5 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 1
1000/5 10 10 1
153
1200/5 10 10 1
φ136 φ90
1500/5 10 10 1
80 8.5
RCT-90 1600/5 10 10 1 110 42
1500/5 10 10 1
1600/5 10 10 1
180
2000/5 20 20 1
φ110
2500/5 20 20 1 φ162
80
110 8.5
RCT-110 3000/5 20 20 1 42
K-23 > >>

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
2.5 Operating temperature: -5℃to +40℃,
the average value within 24h
shall not exceed +35℃, humidity <80%.
3. Type designation
MES - □
MES Current Transformer

1. Application
1.1 Application: to be used
in combination with measurement 4. Normal working conditions
instruments: ammeters, watt-hour meters, and mounting conditions
measurement units, control relays, etc. 4.1 Installation site: Indoors.
4.2 Ambient temperature: -5℃~40℃, temperature ≤30℃.
4.3 Ambient humidity: Relative humidity ≤80%.
4.5 Atmospheric condition: Be free from severe contamination.
> >> K-24

Current Transformer
Rated load (VA)

Model Current rate (A) Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
0.5 class
150/5 5 41
200/5 10
88
250/5 10
φ31
300/5 10
45
MES-30 400/5 10 80
52
300/5 5
400/5 5
88
11
41
500/5 10
45
MES-40 600/5 10 80
600/5 10 56
750/5 10
φ50
800/5 10
118
12
61
1000/5 10
1200/5 10
82
1500/5 10 101
MES-60
500/5 10
118 56
600/5 10
750/5 10
800/5 10
130
42
22
32
102
1000/5 10
60
φ62
1200/5 10 62
82
P1
126
1500/5 10 14
145
14
MES-100I 2000/5 10
125 53
2000/5 30
2500/5 30
148
53
102
3000/5 30
65
P1
2.2
1.4
4000/5 30 14 133 14
MES-100II 152
K-25 > >>

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
2.1 Rated voltage Ue: 1.14kV
2.2 Frequency: 50 Hz
2.3 Operating temperature: -5℃ to +40℃, humidity <80%
3. Type designation
JDZ - 1
Rated primary voltage Upn(kV)
Voltage transformer series
JDZ Voltage Transformer
1. Function
1.1Function: Adopting the value of voltage on the
primary to the characteristics of metering or
protection devices by supplying a secondary
voltage that is proportional and lower;
Used in combination with measurement instruments:
K
4. Technical data
Rated
Transformation ratio Accuracy Max. output
Model output Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
Upn/Usn (V) class (VA)
(VA)
380-690/100 5 3 30 A1 A2 B
95max
690-1140/100 5 3 30 62.5 65
110max 92
> >> K-26

Current Transformer
2. Technical data
2.1 Rated voltage Ue: 0.5kV
2.2 Frequency: 50 Hz
2.3 Operating temperature: -5℃ to +40℃, humidity <80%
3. Type designation
JDG4 - 0.5
Rated primary voltage Upn(kV)
Voltage transformer series
JDG4-0.5
Voltage Transformer
1.Function
1.1 Function: Adopting the value of voltage on the
primary to the characteristics of metering or
protection devices by supplying a secondary voltage
that is proportional and lower;
Used in combination with measurement instruments:
4. Technical data
Rated
Transformation ratio Accuracy Max. output
Model output Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
Upn/Usn (V/V) class (VA)
(VA)
200/100 15 0.5 100

a b
220/100 15 0.5 100

78±0.55
155max
96
380/100 15 0.5 100

65±0.49
125max
500/100 15 0.5 100
K-27 > >>

Automatic Voltage Regulator
TDGC2, TDGC2J TND1(SVC)

TSGC2, TSGC2J TNS1(SVC)
Contact Voltage Regulator Automatic Voltage
(Variable Transformer) Regulator
Page L-01 Page L-04
TND2 TZ
Single-phase Automatic AC Relay-type
Voltage Regulator Voltage Regulator
Page L- 07 Page L-09
TNDZ(DBW) TND3(TSD)
TNSZ(SBW) Wall-hung Type AC
Pillar Type AC Automatic Voltage
Automatic Regalator
Regulator with
Compensated
Page L-11 Page L-14

Contact Voltage Regulator
2. Type designation
T □ G C 2 (J)-□ □
Code of protection type

(humid tropics TH, dry torrid TA)
Rated capacity
Economical
Design serialnumber
Contact type
TDGC2, TDGC2J Single-phase

Contact Voltage Regulator Normal cooling
TSGC2, TSGC2J Three-phase

D: Single-phase, S: Three-phase
(Variable Transformer) Symbol of voltage regulator
1. General
1.1 Application:
TDGC2, TDGC2J、TSGC2,TSGC2J type contact voltage
regulators are normal cooling automatic coupling mode,
can be widely applied to industries (metallurgy, 3. Normal working conditions
chemical, instruments and meters, electromechanical
manufacturing, lighting industry, etc.),
and mounting conditions
scientific experiments, public facilities, household 3.1 Normal working conditions
electrical appliances and so on to regulate voltage 3.1.1 Altitude: ≤1000m.
regulation, temperature control, lighting adjustment, 3.1.2 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃, the overage value
power control, etc. should not exeed+30℃ within a month, and+20℃
with a year.
1.2 Standards: IEC/EN 61558, Q/ZT130.
3.1.3 Relative humidity
Average relative humidity of the dampest month shall be
≤90%, and the average minimum temperature of
the same month shall be 25℃;
3.1.4 Waveform of supply voltage
Waveform of supply voltage approximates to sine wave;
3.1.5 The three-phase supply voltage should be symmetrical
For three-phase voltage regulator, its three-phase
supply voltage should be symmetrical approximately.
3.1.6 Installation environment
a. It can not be used in parallel connection;
b. Indoors;
c. The installation site should be free from the air, steam,
dust, dirt or chemical deposition that will seriously
affect the insulation of voltage regulator,
also be far away from other explosive or corrosive medium.
d. The installation site should be
free from severe vibration or bump.
3.2 Special working conditions
In case of special working conditions that are beyond the
above-mentioned items, please give declaration to us.
L-01 > >>

4. Technical data
Rated Phase Rated Rated input Rated output Rated output
Model
capacity (S) frequency voltage voltage current
TDGC2-0.2 0.2kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 0.8A

TDGC2, TDGC2J-0.5 0.5kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 2A
TDGC2, TDGC2J-1 1kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 4A
TDGC2J-7 7kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 28A
TDGC2J-20 20kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 80A
TDGC2J-30 30kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 120A
TDGC2J-40 40kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 160A
TDGC2J-60 60kVA 1 50Hz 220V 0~250V 240A
TSGC2-1.5 1.5kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 2A
TSGC2, TSGC2J-3 3kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 4A
TSGC2J-20 20kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 27A
TSGC2J-30 30kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 40A
TSGC2J-40 40kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 54A
TSGC2J-60 60kVA 3 50Hz 380V 0~430V 80A
5. Others 6. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Features: 6.1 Overall dimensions of TDGC2 (refer to fig.1).
This product has advantages like no waveform distortion, 6.2 Overall dimensions of TDGC2J (refer to fig.2 and 3).
compact design, light weight, high efficiency, 6.3 Overall dimensions of TSGC2 (refer to fig.4).
convenient operation, safe and reliable, 6.4 Overall dimensions of TSGC2J (refer to fig.5 and 6)
running for long period and so on,
so it is an ideal AC voltage regulation power supply.
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
D
D
L
B B
B
E
E
H
H
E
H
Fig.4 Fig.5 Fig.6

E
H
H
E
H
D
B B B
> >> L-02

Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
Model Fig.
B max D max E max H max
TDGC2-0.2 116 130 130 100

TDGC2-0.5 135 156 142 112
TDGC2-1 182 207 172 135 Fig.1
TDGC2-2 182 207 200 155 Fig.1
TDGC2-3 210 235 210 155 Fig.1
TDGC2-5 265 330 270 210 Fig.1
TDGC2-10 265 345 430 350
TDGC2-15 265 345 590 525
TDGC2J-0.5 132 140 150 120 Fig.2
TDGC2J-1 186 205 215 165 Fig.2
TDGC2J-2 230 245 215 165 Fig.2
TDGC2J-3 266 285 215 165 Fig.3
TDGC2J-5 350 390 265 200 Fig.3
TDGC2J-7 350 390 275 210
TDGC2J-10 350 430 420 360 Fig.3
TDGC2J-10Y 420 460 290 230
TDGC2J-15 350 430 585 520
TDGC2J-20 350 430 615 550
TDGC2J-30 362 460 1100 1000
TDGC2J-40 362 460 1140 1080
TDGC2J-60 560 500 1310 1240
TSGC2-1.5 135 180 340 310 Fig.4
TSGC2-3 182 245 440 390 Fig.4
TSGC2-6 182 245 480 430 Fig.4
TSGC2-9 210 280 480 430 Fig.4
TSGC2-15 265 345 590 530 Fig.5
TSGC2J-3 186 220 520 460 Fig.5
TSGC2J-6 230 260 520 460 Fig.5
TSGC2J-9 266 285 530 460
TSGC2J-15 350 430 585 520
TSGC2J-20 350 430 615 550
TSGC2J-30 362 460 1100 1020 Fig.6
TSGC2J-40 362 460 1140 1080 Fig.6
TSGC2J-60 560 500 1310 1240 Fig.6
L-03 > >>

2. Type designation
TN□1 (SVC)-□/□
Cooling type. AN means: convective cooling

(AN will be omitted in model description);
AF means: draw out the hot-air with fan or
blow on the product direct.
Rated capacity of regulator (kVA)
Servo AC voltage stabilizer (Foreign model)
D: single-phase, S: three-phase
Automatic voltage regulator

(high precise automatic AC voltage regulator)
TND1(SVC) Single-phase
TNS1(SVC) Three-phase
Automatic Voltage Regulator 3. Operation conditions
1. General 3.1 Ambient temperature: -15℃~+45℃.
1.1 Application: 3.2 Relative humidity ≤90%(at +25℃).
TND/TNS(SVC) series full-automatic AC voltage 3.3 Altitude: ≤1000m.
regulator collects sample and amplifies it 3.4 Working environment: Indoors,
and automaticly control circuit, and drives the be free from chemical deposition, dirt,
servomotor to rotate the rocker arm and brush in harmful corrosive medium, or flammable or explosive gas.
required direction, and finally adjusts the output
voltage to the rated value,
finally reaches the aim of stabilizing the voltage.
It can be widely used in areas,
where the mains voltage often comes across sharp
fluctuation or sharp seasonal variation,
such as industrial production, scientific research
medical treatment & hygiene,
household electrical appliances,
it can provide any loads with excellent power supply.
1.2 Features: Elegant appearance, compact structure,
light weight, low power waste,
complete protection functions, stable and reliable,
low output waveform distortion and so on. L
> >> L-04

4. Technical data
Model TND TNS
No. of phase single three

Input voltage (V) 160V~250V 280V~430V(3-phase, 4-lines)
Output voltage (V) 220V±4% 380V±4%(3-phase, 4-lines)
Frequency (Hz) 50-60
Adjusting time(s) ≤3s when the input voltage changes within the range of 20V
harmonic distortion No additional distortion
Output over-voltage protection setting value 246±4V Phase voltage 246±4V
Output under-voltage protection setting value 180±8V Phase voltage 180±8V
5. Technical characteristics
5.1 Output capacity Fig. 1
P————— Outp ut capacity
The relation between output capacity and input voltage P/Pe Pe———— Rate d o utp ut capacity
refer to as fig. 1
When input voltage less than 198V, the output capacity of product 100%
will decrease, the working capacity of stabilizer shall come down;
when you choose output voltage of 110V, the out put capacity
shall be not more than 50% rated capacity,to prevent overload. 50%
5.2 Overload capacity
The stabilizer is not allowed for working overloading long time,
when the input phase voltage fluctuate In put vo ltag e V
within 198V ~ 250V (line voltage from 342V ~ 430V), 160 198 250 Phase volta ge
at emergent case, it is allowed towork as specified in sheet 1. 280 342 430 Time volta ge
L-05 > >>

6. Overall dimensions and weights
Phase Weight Gross

Model & Spec. Overall dimensions (mm) Packing dimensions (mm) Pcs
number (kg) weight (kg)
TND1(SVC)-0.5 195×205×150 235×215×175 1 4.5 4.8

TND1(SVC)-1 215×235×165 260×250×200 1 6.1 6.8
TND1(SVC)-1.5 215×235×165 260×250×200 1 6.8 7.5
TND1(SVC)-2 225×285×220 330×260×260 1 9.5 10
Single- TND1(SVC)-3 245×305×240 360×300×270 1 12.5 13
phase TND1(SVC)-5 225×350×285 385×265×310 1 16.5 17
TND1(SVC)-10/AF(vertical) 285×320×520 390×410×610 1 38.5 47
TND1(SVC)-10(horizontal) 245×430×370 310×475×410 1 33 35.5
TND1(SVC)-15/AF 325×430×620 415×550×720 1 58.5 68.5
TND1(SVC)-20/AF 325×430×620 415×550×720 1 71.5 81.5
TND1(SVC)-30/AF 405×730×805 510×830×965 1 140 156
TNS1(SVC)-1.5 490×325×160 525×375×200 1 16 16.5
TNS1(SVC)-3 490×325×160 525×375×200 1 19.5 20
TNS1(SVC)-4.5 490×325×160 525×375×200 1 20.5 22
TNS1(SVC)-6 275×345×615 360×475×715 1 33.5 37
Three- TNS1(SVC)-9 330×360×730 420×475×825 1 46 50
phase TNS1(SVC)-15 360×385×855 440×510×945 1 60.5 66
TNS1(SVC)-20 475×460×920 590×580×1020 1 135 155
TNS1(SVC)-30/AF 475×460×920 590×580×1020 1 139.5 160
TNS1(SVC)-45/AF 480×780×1050 600×850×1200 1 191 213
TNS1(SVC)-60/AF 480×780×1050 600×850×1200 1 230 250
7. Selection notice
a. Input and output of three-phase products of this series are of three-phase four-wire connected,
please wire them with neutral line before using.
Example of type selection: Three-phase motor 2.2kW 1pcs, 5.5kW 1pcs, when selecting the voltage regulator,
its capacity should be ≥(2.2kW+5.5kW)×2.5=19.25kVA, so,
the selected product should be three-phase SVC-20kVA at least.
b. When the three-phase voltage regalator is applied to single-phase or three-phase ,
max capacity of each phase should be one third of rated capacity.
c. When the input phase voltage is lower than 198V, the output capacity of voltage regulator will be reduced,
then the loads should be reduced correspondingly, otherwise, it may be overloaded; when the output voltage is 110V,
then the output capacity should not be beyond 50% of rated capacity, otherwise, it may be overloaded.
Please refer to fig.1 for detail characters.
Sheet 1 Safe consult coefficient of choosing regulator capacity

L
Load kind Consumer samples Safe coefficient Chosen capacity rate
Incandescent lamp,
＞1.1~1.3 times of
Complete resistive loads resistant coil, electric 1.1~1.3
total rated capacity
cooker
Fluorescent lamp, fan,

＞2.5~3 times of
Inductive, capacitive loads pump, air-conditioner, 2.5~3
total rated capacity
refrigerator and etc.
> >> L-06

2. Type designation
TND2 (SVC) - □
Rated Capacity
Overseas mockl
Single-phase Automatic Voltage Regulator
TND2 Single-phase
3.1 Ambient temperature: -15℃~+45℃.
1. General 3.2 Relative humidity≤90%(at +25℃).
1.1 Application: 3.3 Atluosp heric pressure: 86KPa-106KPa.
When the mains voltage is unstable or when the load 3.4 Working environment: Indoors,
changes, the AVR will automatically sample and be free from chemical deposition, dirt,
amplify the control circuit, and drive the servomotor harmful corrosive medium, or flammable or explosive gas.
to rotate the rocker arm and brush in required
direction, and adjust the output voltage to the
rated value level to stabilize the voltage.
1.2 Features:
This type of voltage stabilizer has advantages of
elegant appearance, compact structure, thin thickness,
light weight, low power waste, stable and reliable,
low output waveform distortion and so on.
It can be widely used in areas where the mains voltage
has sharp fluctuation or has sharp seasonal variation,
such as industrial production, scientific research,
medical treatment & hygiene, household electrical
appliances, it can provide any loads with excellent
power supply.
L-07 > >>

4. Main teehnical performance and parameters
Model TND2
No. of phase Single phase

Input voltage (V) 160-250
220V±4%
Output voltage (V)
110V±6%
Frequency (Hz) 50-60
Adjusting time(S) ≤1(When the input voltage changes within the range of 10%)
Distortion No additional distortion
Efficiency >90%
Delay time 5±2minuts, 5±2seconds
Over-voltage 246±4V
Under-voltage 180±8V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 1500V (in cold status, I min)
Insulation resistance ≥5MΩ
5. Features Curve of rated output capacity

Output capacity
P(Output capacity)
Please refer to fig.1 for the relationship between output capacity and
input voltage. When the input voltage is lower than 198V, the capacity
100%
should be reduced, when the output voltage is 110V, then the output
capacity should not be beyond 50% of rated capacity, otherwise,
it may be over.
50%
V(Input voltage)
150 198 250
Overall dimensions Packing dimension Net weight Gross weight

Phase(S) Model & Spec. (mm) (mm) Pcs (kg) (kg)
TND2-0.5 kVA 230×220×85 260×250×120 2 3.5 4.0

TND2-1 kVA 280×240×140 320×280×180 2 5.5 6
TND2-1.5 kVA 280×240×140 320×280×180 2 6 6.5
L
Single-
TND2-2 kVA 280×240×140 320×280×180 1 9 9.5
phase
TND2-3 kVA 280×240×140 320×280×180 1 11.5 12
TND2-5 kVA 350×320×165 400×365×210 1 17 18
TND2-7 kVA 350×320×165 400×365×210 1 22 23
7. Selection notice
When the load is capacitive or inductive (such as motor, computer), as
the load has heavy pickup current,please select the voltage regulator
whose capacity is 2.5~3 times of load capacity.
> >> L-08

2. Type designation
T Z-□
Rated capacity (VA)
Relay control
Regulator (auto- regulator)
3. Normal working and mounting conditions

The conditions of Normal working and installation.
3.1 Ambient temperature: -15℃~+45℃; The average value within
24h shall not exceed +35℃
3.2 Relative humidity: less than 90% (25℃).
TZ AC Relay-type Voltage 3.3 Atmospheric pressure: 86kPa~106kPa.
3.4 Rated frequency: 50Hz.
Regulator 3.5 Working environment: No chemical precipitate and dirt, no
1. Scope of application harmful erosion medium and inflammable and explosive gas indoor
3.6 Indoor use.
TZ series AC Relay-type Voltage Regulator adopts electronic
3.7 It can not be used in parallel connection.
circuitry and control relay to change the transformer tap to
adjust the output voltageThe product of series has various
functions of protecting for over-voltage and short circuit and
so on. It is small volume, elegant appearance and has been
widely used in the area where the mains voltage has sharp
fluctuation or has sharp seasonal variation. It is the ideal
protective device for a great variety of instrument.
L-09 > >>

4. Main technical performance and parameters
Basic technical performance and parameters as sheet 1
Rated Rated Range of Rated output The value of output Rated output
Model capability Phase frequency input voltage voltage over-voltage protection current
TZ-500 500 2.3

TZ-1000 1000 4.5
TZ-1500 1500 6.8
1 50 160~260 220(1±8%) 246±4
TZ-2000 2000 9.1
TZ-3000 3000 13.6
TZ-5000 5000 22.7

Fig 1 The outline of TZ series regulator
Overall dimensions(mm)
Model
B D E
TZ-500 195 205 150
VAC
TZ-1000 215 235 165

E
TZ-1500 215 235 165

TZ-2000 225 285 220
TZ-3000 225 285 220
B D
TZ-5000 245 305 240
6. Other Pe
When the input voltage is less than 198V, the product output must 100%
drop the capacity to use, the product’s output capacity curve as

figure 2
50%
U1
160 198 220 250
L
7. Order notice
When ordering the regulator, please according to the rated
capability、starting surge current、 inductive load or capacitive load
to choose the correct type. And the output capacity should have
certain surplus capacity, when used for impact load, the surplus
capacity should be larger.
The specific selection safety coefficient as sheet 3. When ordering
you should also consider the factor of when the input voltage is less
than 198V, the product's output must drop the capacity to use, the
product's output capacity curve as figure 2
> >> L-10

2. Type designation
TN □ Z(□BW)-□
Rated capacity kVA
DBW is originally model of single-phase

SBW is originally model of three-phase
Pillar iron core
Phases: D means single-phase S means three-phase
Auto-regulator
TNDZ(DBW), TNSZ(SBW)
Pillar Type AC Automatic
3.1 Temperature: -15℃~+45℃;
Regulator with Compensated 3.2 Altitude:≤1000m;
3.3 Relative humidity: 15%~90%(20℃).
1. General
Application: used in the application requiring stable
voltage, such as telecommunication, broadcasting & TV,
elevator, silicone controlled apparatus, numerical control
machine tool, and various production lines, etc.
L-11 > >>

4. Technical parameter and performance
Rated Input Rated Accuracy The protect The protect Rated output
Frequency of value of value of Response
Model capacity Phase voltage output current
(Hz) regulate output over- output under- time
(kVA) range voltage voltage voltage voltage (A)
TNDZ(DBW)-20 20 91
TNDZ(DBW)-30 30 136
When input
TNDZ(DBW)-50 50 50 176 242 198 voltage steps 227
1 ~ ~ 220 ±(1±5)% ± ± 15V,the output
TNDZ(DBW)-75 75 341
60 264 2.2 2.2 response
TNDZ(DBW)-100 100 time≤1.5s 455
TNDZ(DBW)-150 150 682
TNDZ(DBW)-200 200 909
TNSZ(SBW)-30 30 46
TNSZ(SBW)-50 50 76
TNSZ(SBW)-75 75 114
TNSZ(SBW)-100 100 152
TNSZ(SBW)-150 150 228
TNSZ(SBW)-180 180 273
TNSZ(SBW)-200 200 When 304

input
TNSZ(SBW)-225 225 342
voltage
50 304 418 342
TNSZ(SBW)-250 250 steps 380
3 ~ ~ 380 ±(1±5)% ± ±
25V,the
TNSZ(SBW)-300 300 60 456 3.8 3.8 456
output
TNSZ(SBW)-320 320 response 486
time≤1.5s
TNSZ(SBW)-350 350 532
TNSZ(SBW)-400 400 608
TNSZ(SBW)-450 450 684
TNSZ(SBW)-500 500 760
TNSZ(SBW)-600 600 912
TNSZ(SBW)-800 800 1216
TNSZ(SBW)-1000 1000 1519
TNSZ(SBW)-1200 1200 1823
Note1: It is no the functi on of output under volt age what eigibility item when normal re gulations prod uct
ex-facture, unless the customer request.
Note2: If have other requires you can discuss with manufacture.Such as output voltage is 400V, or output
voltage three-phase 220V, and the range of regulate voltage between ±3% can negotiate to order. L
> >> L-12

5. Functions and features
5.1 When fault of phase sequence by power supply or maintenance of transformer, the voltage regulator will automatically check and adjust to
ensure the normal working of the regulator.
5.2 Adoption of new technology can reduce contactors to increase the reliability of voltage regulator.
5.3 With over-voltage protection and alarming
When the voltage is stable, the input voltage is beyond the threshold(456V) or output voltage beyond the threshold(426V±7V),the voltage
regulator will cut the power supply and alarm until the input and output voltage reduce to the normal value.
5.4 With the function of automatic start when power supply resumes.
5.5 With starting delay.
6. Specifications, overall dimensions and weights
Model Rated capacity Overall dimensions (mm) Net weight (kg)

20kVA 800×610×1380 200
30kVA 800×610×1380 230
50kVA 850×690×1450 305
TNDZ(DBW) 75kVA 850×690×1450 350
single-phase 100kVA 1000×800×1850 400
150kVA 1100×800×1900 450
200kVA 1250×1020×2050 500
30kVA 750×610×1250 230
50kVA 800×610×1375 285
75kVA 850×690×1450 355
100kVA 850×690×1450 408
150kVA 1150×970×1900 630
180kVA 1150×970×1900 665
200kVA 1150×970×1900 700
225kVA 1150×970×1900 750
TNSZ(SBW) 250kVA 1150×970×1900 870
three-phase 300kVA 1250×1020×2050 1010
320kVA 1250×1020×2050 1050

350kVA 1400×1070×2250 1100
400kVA 1400×1070×2250 1200
450kVA 1400×1070×2250 1550
500kVA 1400×1070×2250 1600
600kVA 1400×1070×2250×2 950×2
800kVA 1150×970×2250×3 1100×3
1000kVA 1150×970×2250×3 1150×3
1200kVA 1150×970×2250×4 1150×4
7. Selection notice
7.1 Considering impact by inrush current, the safety coefficient should be 1.5-3 times. The safety coefficient is determined by the load.
7.2 This product should be connected to the natural line when the input and output circuit is three phase four line.
7.3 The capacity of single phase should be less than 1/3 of the product.
L-13 > >>

2. Type designation
TN D 3(TSD)-□
Rated capacity
Wall-hung type
Design number
Single-phase
Automatic voltage regulator
3. Normal working conditions

TND3(TSD) and mounting conditions
Wall-hung Type AC 3.1 Ambient temperature: -15℃~+45℃.
3.2 Relative humidity≤90%(at +25℃).
Automatic Voltage Regalator 3.3 Atmospheric pressure: 86kPa~106 kPa.
3.4 Working environment: Indoors,
1. General be free from chemical deposition, dirt,
Application: TSD series wall-mounted AC voltage harmful corrosive medium, or flammable or explosive gas.
regulator supplys power for equipment such as
computers, duplicating machines,
industrial precision equipment, medical apparatuses,
household electrical appliances, etc.
> >> L-14

Current Transformer
4. Technical data and technical performance
Model TND3(TSD)-3 TND3(TSD)-5 TND3(TSD)-7

Rated output capacity (kVA) 3 5 7
Range of rated input voltage (V) 160~250 160~250 160~250
Over load protective current (input) (A) 15 25 32
220V Voltage stabilizing accuracy ±4% ±4% ±4%
Rated
output 110V Voltage stabilizing accuracy ±8% ±8% ±8%
voltage (V)
Over-voltage protection 246±4V 246±4V 246±4V
Under-voltage protection 180±8V 180±8V 180±8V
Short delay 5±2s 5±2s 5±2s
Delay time
Long delay 5±2min 5±2min 5±2min
5. Others
Features: c. Wide range of input voltage, strong load characteristic.
a. The voltage stabilizer can work uninterruptedly, with d. Complete functions such as over-voltage and under-voltage
advantages of low waveform distortion, stable voltage indication and protection, long time delay, short time delay, etc.
regulation, no instantaneous power failure, it guarantees the e. Utility power/ voltage stabilization switching function, direct
safety and normal operation of top-grade household appliances utility power also is available if it is necessary.
and computers that with memory function, its accuracy of f. There are 220V and 110V two circuits for rated output voltage;
output voltage stabilization is 220V±1~3% adjustable. g. Indication of input and output voltage.
b. Novel style, elegant appearance: h. Carbon brush: It adopts the latest developed carbon brush.
The product adopts wall-mounted structure, which enables it to that has high performance, which sharply prolongs the service
possess convenient installation and small space occupying area. life of voltage stabilizer.
The soft color and streamline outline seem to melt into modern
room decoration, let you enjoy the graceful life.
6. Outline & installation size

shown as fig.1 and table1
Fig.1 Outline & installation size diagram Table 1 Outline & installation size
Installation
A Outline size (mm) size (mm) Net weight
Model & spec.
Bmax Dmax Emax A±3 (kg)
I
I
8 TND3(TSD)-3 265 155 400 135 11.7
E TND3(TSD)-5 285 170 440 165 15.5
24
TND3(TSD)-7 285 170 440 165 22.5

Φ16
B D
7. Selection notice
7.1 When the loads are capacitive or inductive, as the load has
Fig. 2 Curve of rated output capacity
heavy pickup current, please select the voltage stabilizer
whose capacity is 2.5~3 times of load power.
P———— Output capacity
7.2 When the input phase voltage is lower than 198V, P/Pe
Pe———— Rated output capacity
the output capacity of voltage stabilizer will be reduced,
then the loads should be reduced correspondingly, Single output phase voltage (line voltage 380V)
100%
otherwise, it may be overloaded;
when the output voltage is 110V, then the output capacity
should not be beyond 50% of rated capacity, 50%
otherwise, it may be overloaded.
Refer to fig. 2 for specific characteristics. Input
160 198 250 voltage (V)
L-15 > >>

Switch Disconnector, Fuse-switch
Disconnector, Changeover Switch
Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA HH15-QP
Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector
Page M-03 Page M-06
NH40
Switch Disconnector
Page M-09
Fuse-switch Disconnector
HH15/QSA NHR17
Fuse-switch Fuse-switch
Disconnector Disconnector
Page M-18 Page M-21
NHR40 NHRT40
Fuse-switch Vertical
Disconnector Fuse-switch
Disconnector
Page M-23 Page M-28
Changeover Switch
NZ7 HH15/QAS/
Automatic QPS/QSS
Transfer Switching Changeover Switch
Equipment
Page M-33 Page M-44
NH40S NH40SZ
Changeover Switch Automatic
Changeover Switch
Page M-47 Page M-51

Switch Disconnector
Switch Disconnector
Switch Disconnector
Thermal 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

current
HH15-125/ HH15-160/
HH15/QA HH15-200/QA
QA QA
HH15/QP HH15-250/QP
NH40 NH40-16 NH40-32 NH40-40 NH40-63 NH40-80 NH40-100 NH40-125 NH40-160 NH40-200 NH40-250
HH15-/QA
HH15-/QP
NH40
M-01 > >>

Switch Disconnector
Switch Disconnector
315 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
HH15-400/ HH15-630/ HH15-1000/ HH15-1250/ HH15-1600/

QA QA QA QA QA
HH15-630/ HH15-1000/ HH15-1250/ HH15-1600/ HH15-2500/ HH15-3150/

QP QP QP QP QP QP
NH40-315 NH40-400 NH40-630 NH40-1000 NH40-1250 NH40-1600 NH40-2000 NH40-2500 NH40-3150
> >> M-02

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA
1. General
1.1 Application
Mainly used in the distributing and motor circuit
which has high short-circuit current,
and acted as main switch or master switch
infrequently operated by hand,
it is particularly suitable in the relative high class
with drawable low voltage complete equipment.
They provide safety isolation and protection
against overcurrent for any low voltage electrical circuit.
1.3 General characteristic
Full-enclosed structure
Unique rolling insert type contact system.
2. Switch disconnector, with connection contact in series

2.1 Ordering information
HH15 - □ / □ □ QA
No fuse,
with connection contacts in series
HH15-QA Switch Disconnector
No. of auxiliary contacts
0: no auxiliary contact
1: 1 pair of auxiliary contact
2: 2 pairs of auxiliary contact
No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Rated operating current
Series No.
Note: This switch may only be operated outside the cabinet.
2.2 Property
Specification 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600

No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 4
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V, Ui=690V. Ue=690V, Ui=1000V. 800
AC400 AC415
Rated operating voltage Ue(V)
AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
400V:AC-22B;415V:AC22B 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
Rated operating
690V: AC-21B 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
current(A)
690V: AC-22B 125 160 160 315 425 630 800 1000
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 20 20 20 50 50 50 65 85
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 8 8 8 12.8 22.5 32 50 50
Mechanical life 15000 15000 15000 12000 12000 3000 1000 1000
Electric Life 1000 1000 1000 300 300 150 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 7.5 16 16 30 30 30
Conventional thermal current of auxiliary contact
5 5 -
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
M-03 > >>

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA
2.3 Dimension (mm)
HH15-125/QA, 160/QA, 200/QA
57.5 Earth bolt 36

C
Panel of switchgear cubicle
G □ 8 Operating 2×M6
P 6.5
square shaft 110 1.5
37.5
16
94
D
B
F
63
Auxiliary
switch
H I M
If N pole is 4max
E available 150
65
A +45
165~260
HH15-400/QA, 630/QA
10 Operating
60 square shaft 160
55 Panel of switchgear cubicle
G 45 E 2×M 8
C
50
ON
24
138
D
B
OFF
F
Auxiliary
140
switch
7 M
P
If N pole is 115
available 4max
wiring bolt H I
A +55 175~330 87.5
HH15-1000/QA
□12 Operating
square shaft P 62 C
2×M8
40

available,length=252
50
ON
If N pole is
26
D
B
F
OFF
Earth bolt
35
200
40
5.5
4max
G H I M
E 87.5
A 280~375
HH15-1250，1600/QA
facade operation reverse operation

4max 4max
Panel of
switchgear Panel of switchgear
cubicle cubicle
350~500
350~500
230
230
M
500
485 80 40
M12
20
35
Ⅰ合 Ⅰ合
25
220
286
250
350
310
O O
分分
11
R5.5 M12 M12 M12

91.5 100 100 N pole=134 65
> >> M-04

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA
Specification A B C D E F G H I M P
HH15-125/QA 155 116 133 90 135 101 21.5 69 41 6 15
HH15-160/QA 155 127 133 90 135 107 22.5 65 45 10 25
HH15-200/QA 155 127 133 90 135 107 22.5 65 45 10 25
HH15-400/QA 240 160 142 130 100 135 27 106 65 10 25
HH15-630/QA 240 200 142 130 100 135 27 106 65 12 40
HH15-1000/QA 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 50
2.4 Boring dimension (mm)
50
4×φ4.5
D
A
50
4-d
φ30
A HH15-1250, 1600/QA
Openingsizeofthehandlemountingpanel
Specification A D d
HH15-125~200/QA +4 +0.5
65±0.2 φ42 φ4.5
HH15-250/QP 0 0
+2 +0.5
HH15-400~1000/QA 88±0.2 φ63 φ5.5
0 0
M-05 > >>

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QP
3. Switch disconnector,
with connection contact in parallel
HH15 - □ / □ □ QP
No fuse,
with connection contacts in parallel

HH15-QP Switch Disconnector

No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Series No.
3.2 Property
Specification 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150

No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 3+N
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V.
AC400
Conventional thermal current(A) 250 400 630 1000

AC690
1250 1600 2500 3150
M
400V:AC-22B 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
Rated operating current(A) 690V:AC-21B 250 400 630 1000 1250 1470 2500 2500
690V:AC-22B 250 400 500 630 800 800 - -
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 39 50 60 60 85 85 130 130
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 8 12.8 25 32 50 50 80 80
Mechanical life 15000 12000 12000 12000 1000 1000 500 300
Electric Life 1000 1000 300 150 100 100 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 16 30 30 40 45 60 75 90
5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
> >> M-06

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QP
3.3 Dimension (mm)

HH15-250/QP
57.5 Earth bolt 36 C

G □8 Operating 6.5 1.5
P square shaft
2×M 6
110 Panel of switchgear cubicle
37.5
16
D
B
94
F
63
Auxiliary
switch
H I If N pole M
150 4max
E is available
A +45 165~260 65
HH15P-400~1000/QP
60 □10 Operating square shaft 160

2×M8 Panel of switchgear cubicle
G 45 E 55 C
ON
24
138
D
B
OFF
Auxiliary
140
switch
7 M
P
If N pole 115 4max
Wiring bolt H I is available
+55
A 175~330 87.5
HH15P-1250/QP, 1600/QP
□12 Operating square shaft P 62 C
2×M8
M
40

50
If N pole is available
ON
26
D
B
F
OFF
=252
200
Earth bolt
35
40
R5.5
4max
165
G H I
E 87.5
A 280~375
M-07 > >>

Switch Disconnector
HH15-QP
Overall＆ Installation Dimension of HH15P-2500/QP、3150/QP
switchgear cubicle
C
G P 102
55 130
Panel of
12 Operating
□ square shaft
40
62 O
200
9
Only for 3150A,

ON B pole
26
D
280
B
F
OFF
Only for 3150A,
Earth bolt
B pole
200
40
H I If N pole 180 130 4max

E is available
A +35 420~510 90
Specification A B C D E F G H I M O P
HH15-250/QP 155 143 133 90 135 118 22.5 65 45 10 - 25
HH15-400/QP 240 170 142 130 100 140 27 106 65 10 - 25
HH15-630/QP 240 170 142 130 100 140 27 106 65 10 - 25
HH15-1000/QP 240 218 142 130 100 178 27 106 80 12 - 40
HH15-1250/QP 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 - 40
HH15-1600/QP 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 - 50
HH15-2500/QP 395 440 342 152 372 390 115 97 97 12 40 80
HH15-3150/QP 395 470 342 152 372 420 115 97 97 12 50 100
3.4 Boring dimension (mm)
D
A
4-d
A
M
Specification A D d
HH15-250/QP 65±0.2 φ42 +4 φ4.5+0.5

0 0
HH15-630~1000/QP
88±0.2 φ63 +2 φ5.5+0.5
HH15P-1250~3150/QP 0 0
> >> M-08

Series Isolating Switch
Category of switch and electric apparatus
1. Range of Application
NH40 series switch disconnector applies to such condition as
50Hz alternating current, 660V or below alternating current
rated voltage and 440V or below direct current rated voltage
and rated current up to 3,150A.
It can be used for realizing infrequent manual making,
breaking circuit and isolating power supply in switch gears of
industrial enterprise. Products under 1,000A can be used as load
break switch
This product conforms to such standards as IEC60947-3
2. Type and definition

N H 40 - □/□□ □□ F H
With "H" means fitted with metal enclosure

With” F” means terminals protective type
With ”W” means handles to be operated

outside the Enclosure
Without ”W” means handles to be operated
inside the Enclosure
With “S” means Double-throw Transfer Switch
Without “S” means Single-throw Switch
With “C” means lateral operation

Without “C” means front operation
3 means3 poles
4 means 4 poles
ConventionalHeating Current(A)
Design Code
Isolating Switch
Corporate code
3. Normal operating conditions and installation

conditions
3.1 Ambient air temperature shall not be more than +40℃ or less
than -5℃.
3.2 Altitude of installation location should not exceed 2,000m.
3.3 Humidity:When maximum temperature reaches +40℃, the
relative humidity of air should not exceed 50%; at lower
temperatures, the relative humidity is allowed to be higher.
For example it can reach 90% at the temperature of 20℃. Special
measures should be taken against occasional condensation caused
by temperature changes.
3.4 Ambient pollution level is 3.
3.5 Switch should be installed on the location without prominent
shake, attack and vibration, and incursion of rain or snow as well
as explosion hazard medium. And there should be no gas and dust
which are sufficient to corrupt metals and damage insulation in
existing mediums.
M-09 > >>

4. Main Parameters and Technical Performance
NH40-16~250
Conventional thermal current Ith (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Rated Isolation voltage 800
Dielectric Strength(V) 6200
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Uimp(KV) 6 8
380, AC21 (DC21, 220V) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

400V AC22 (DC22, 220V) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
AC23 (DC23, 220V) 16 32 40 63 80 80 125 125 200 200
Rated Operating Current Ie(A)
660, AC21 (DC21, 440V) 16 32 40 63 80 80 125 125 200 200
690V AC22 (DC22, 440V) 16 32 40 50 50 50 100 100 160 160
AC23 (DC23A, 440V) 16 32 40 40 40 40 50 63 70 80
380, 400V 7.6 15 18.5 25 40 40 63 80 100 132
Power of Motor(kW)
660, 690V 15 22 22 22 33 33 75 75 90 110
Rated Short time withstand CurrentIcw(KA) 380, 400V 2 2 2 2 5 5 10 10 12 12
Rated Making Capacity(A) 380, 400V 160 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
Rated Breaking Capacity Icn(A) 128 256 320 504 640 800 1000 1280 1600 2000
Mechanical Life 12000
Electric life 1000
Operating Force(N) 30~ 50 40~60
NH40-315~3150
Conventional thermal current Ith (A) 315 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Rated Isolation voltage 800
Dielectric Strength(V) 6200
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Uimp(KV) 12

380, AC21 (DC21, 220V) 315 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
400V AC22 (DC22, 220V) 315 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
AC23 (DC23, 220V) 315 315 500 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000
Rated Operating Current Ie(A) AC21 (DC21, 440V) 315 315 500 800 800 1000 1600 1600 2000
660,
690V AC22 (DC22, 440V) 200 250 315 800 800 800 1000 1000 1250
AC23 (DC23A, 440V) 125 160 200 315 400 400 500 500 630
380V 160 220 315 450 450 450 450 450 450
Power of Motor(kW)
660V 185 185 185 475 475 475 475 475 475
Rated Short time withstand CurrentIcw(KA) 380V 20 20 25 50 50 50 50 50 50
Rated Making Capacity(A) 380V 3150 4000 6300 3000 3750 4800 6000 7500 9450
Rated Breaking Capacity Icn(A) 2520 3200 5040 3000 3750 4800 6000 7500 9450
Mechanical Life 12000 4000 2500
Electric life 1000 200
Operating Force(N) 65~100 200~300
M
> >> A-10

5 Installation Method
Installation Method as shown inthe figure, outside operations need install long axle additionally. It is required that the handle (axle) installed on the Panel
and the long axle should be coaxial (alignment). Otherwise, the cabinet door is difficult to open or close or it will take great effort to operate, and it will
lead to the damage of operation institution. The length of the axle should be confirmed according to the installation distance of the product to Panel and
adding the length of shaft extension handle (about 30mm).
Installation Base Plate for

Outside Cabinet Operation
Set Screw for Outside

Cabinet Operation
Direct Operation
125A~630A or Below Outside
Cabinet Operation
Lengthening Axle
Outside Cabinet
Operation Handle
Auxiliary Contact
Direct Operation Handle
Set Screw
Cabinet Door
Clamping Plate
Sturdy Screw
Extended Axle
Handle
Linking Sleeve
Bracket
PanelComponents
1,000A or Above Outside

Cabinet Operation
Auxiliary Contact
Linking Sleeve
Clamping Plate
Linking Sleeve
Bracket
Cabinet Door
Gasket
PanelComponents
Nameplate
Handle
1,000A or Above Outside

Cabinet Operation
M-11 > >>

6 Outline and Installation Dimension
6.1 Outline and Installation Dimension of 63A~100A Isolating Switch
105
20 54
21.5 3 92
O 50
123
70
92
58
60° 3 ×φ4.5
R
隔离开关 NH40-100/4
Ue
380/660V 50Hz AC-21B
25
Ie
100 A
生产日期
:200 年月
GB14048.3
φ30
27 27 27 34
107 51
Installation Dimensional Drawing of Outside
Cabinet Operation Handle Faceplate
NH40-63A~100A
6.2 Outline and Installation Dimension of 125A~630A Isolating Switch
J Y
N
R 4Xφ4.5
φX V
4Xφ
8.5
φ30
D
M
B
U
K
I
50
Z
Q
W
90° t3.0
90° 50
P E
0 32.5
A C
Installation Dimension of Installation Base Platefor

125A~630A Inside Cabinet Operation
Outside CabinetHandle Outside Cabinet Operation
J
N
R Installation Base Platefor
φX
φL
Standards Dimension of Base Plate

90°
125A~630A I M Z W Q V
D1
28-30(Withdraw the handle,
Exposing the axle to 28-30)
125A,160A 30 5.5 65 160 188 42 M
200A,250A 30 5.5 90 180 208 42
315A,400A,630A 40 6.5 140 240 268 42
70
125A~630A/W Outside Cabinet Operation
> >> M-12

Nh40 Inside Enclosure Operation and NH40 Installation Dimension of Outside Enclosure Isolating Switch
Standards NH40-XX NH40-XX/W Outline and Installation Dimension(mm)

Electric Current A B C D E φ J K N P R U φX Y Z
125A/3 140 135 125 27 73 5.5 120 65 85 36 18 85 9 25 355
160A/3 140 135 125 27 73 5.5 120 65 85 36 20 85 9 25 355
125A/4 170 135 125 27 73 5.5 150 65 85 36 18 85 9 25 355
160A/4 170 135 125 27 73 5.5 150 65 85 36 20 85 9 25 355
200A/3 180 170 150 35 86 6.5 160 90 115 50 25 110 11 25 365
250A/3 180 170 150 35 86 6.5 160 90 115 50 25 110 11 25 365
200A/4 230 170 150 35 86 6.5 210 90 115 50 25 110 11 25 365
250A/4 230 170 150 35 86 6.5 210 90 115 50 25 110 11 25 365
315A/3 230 240 180 50 113 7 210 140 145 65 32 160 11 37 440
400A/3 230 240 180 50 113 7 210 140 145 65 35 160 11 37 440
630A/3 230 260 180 50 113 7 210 140 145 65 40 160 13 37 440
315A/4 290 240 180 50 113 7 270 140 145 56 32 160 11 37 440
400A/4 290 240 180 50 113 7 270 140 145 65 35 160 11 37 440
630A/4 290 260 180 50 113 7 270 140 145 65 40 160 13 37 440
6.3Outline and Installation Dimension of 1,000A~1,600A Isolating Switch
J
K N Y
I
Enlargement
2Xφ12.5
72
175
20
U
B
35
18
16
4XΦ9 4Xφ13
Enlargement 40
140 35
120
A C 1000A 1250A～1600A
1,000A~1,600A Inside Cabinet Operation
55
Installation Base Plate for 32
8.5
50 172 81
t 4.0
3Xφ5.5
25
170
311
280
8.5
62
φ30
Installation Dimension of Installation Base Plate for
Outside Cabinet Handle Seat Z
1,000A~1,600A Inside Cabinet Operation
Installation Dimension of NH40 Inside Enclosure Operation and NH40 Outside Enclosure Isolating Switch

Electric Current A B C J N K U Y Z
1000A/3 378 310 240 353 174 60 200 48 630
1250A/3 378 360 240 353 174 70 200 48 630
1600A/3 378 360 240 353 174 80 200 48 630
1000A/4 498 312 240 473 234 60 200 48 630
1250A/4 498 360 240 473 234 70 200 48 630
1600A/4 498 360 240 473 234 80 200 48 630
M-13 > >>

6.4 Outline and Installation Dimension of 2,000A~3,150A Isolating Switch
J Y1
N
Y
204020 80
1-5 3-7
40
φ13
330
28
220
B
°
90
11
I
4-8 2-6
287
V P P P
A C
NH40-2000A 5 1
8 4
J Y1
N 6 2
Y 7 3
35 50 35 120
100
50
7 5 3 1 1-5 3-7
330
28
220
B
°
90
11
I
8 6 4 2 4-8 2-6
287
V P P P
A C
NH40-3150A
Note: Maximum length of Outside Cabinet Operation Dimension C:630mm
Installation Dimension of NH40 Inside and Outside Enclosure Isolating Switches

Electric Current A B C J N P V Y Y1
2000A/3 378 510 374 353 234 120 60 80 230
2500A/3 378 510 374 353 234 120 60 80 230
3150A/3 378 510 374 353 234 120 60 80 230
2000A/4 498 510 374 473 234 120 60 80 230
2500A/4 498 510 374 473 234 120 60 80 230
3150A/4 498 510 374 473 234 120 60 80 230
6.5NH40-125~1,600/C and NH40-125~1,600/CS Installation Dimension
A
A1 Y1
J J1 Y Y
R φX
L
M
U
B
Ⅱ Ⅰ
G
V P P P N C1 20 C 20
125A~1,600A/CS 125A~1,600A/C
Lateral Double-throw Operation Lateral Operation
28
4Xφ6
50
125A~1,600A/CSW Lateral
65×65Plate
Double-throw outside cabinet operation

64
50
φ31 Z±1
D1
4Xφ4.5 50
Minimum length of lengthening Connecting Rod
门孔 125-630A:Z+27±1
1,000-1,600A: Z﹢35±1
> >> M-14

Installation Dimension of NH40 Lateral Operation and NH40 Double-throw Transfer Isolating Switch
Standards NH40-XX/C NH40-XX/CS Outline and Installation Dimension (mm)

Electric Current A A1 B C C1 D1 J K L N P R U V X Y Y1 Z
16~100A/3 260 168 107 110 162 53 120 84 7 29.5 30 14 105 15 6 40 91 232
125A/3 267 196 135 152 212 60 120 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 20 9 55 120 232
160A/3 267 196 135 152 212 60 120 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 20 9 55 120 232
16~100A/4 260 168 107 110 162 53 120 84 7 29.5 30 14 105 15 6 40 90 232
125A/4 297 296 135 152 212 60 150 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 20 9 55 120 232
160A/4 297 296 135 152. 212 60 150 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 20 9 55 120 232
200A/3 307 236 170 147 229 60 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 140 27 11 65 145 249
250A/3 307 236 170 147 229 60 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 140 27 11 65 145 249
200A/4 357 286 170 147 229 60 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 140 27 11 65 145 249
250A/4 357 286 170 147 229 60 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 140 27 11 65 145 249
315A/3 372 301 240 184 297 60 210 180 9 45 65 32 205 37.5 11 84 198 317
400A/3 372 301 240 184 297 60 210 180 9 45 65 35 205 37.5 11 84 198 317
630A/3 372 301 260 184 297 60 210 180 9 45 65 40 205 37.5 13 84 198 317
315A/4 432 361 240 184 297 60 270 180 9 45 65 32 205 37.5 11 84 198 317
400A/4 732 361 240 184 297 60 270 180 9 45 65 35 205 37.5 11 84 198 317
630A/4 732 361 260 184 297 60 270 180 9 45 65 40 205 37.5 13 84 198 317
1000A/3 621 472 310 230 374 81 3535 220 11 51.5 120 60 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
1250A/3 621 472 360 230 374 81 353 220 11 51.5 120 80 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
1600A/3 621 472 360 230 374 81 353 220 11 51.5 120 80 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
1000A/4 741 592 310 230 374 81 473 220 11 51.5 120 60 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
1250A/4 741 592 360 230 374 81 473 220 11 51.5 120 80 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
600A/4 741 592 360 230 374 81 473 220 11 51.5 120 80 250 60.5 13 108 253 374
6.6 NH40-2,000~3,150/C and NH40-2,000~3,150/CS Installation Dimension
A Y3
A1 Y2
J Y1 Y1
Y T T Y T
1-5 3-7 1-5 3-7
11
7-7＇ 5-5＇ 3-3＇ 1-1＇

K
B
I I
8-8＇ 6-6＇ 4-4＇ 2-2＇
4-8 2-6 4-8 2-6

12.5 V P 51.5 C C1
2000A~3150A/CS 2000A~3150A/C
Connecting Terminal
φ13
50
20 40
40 20
80
65X65
50
4φ4.5 φ30
φ13
50
100
25
Without ExtendedConnecting Rod 81 50 35

Minimum length including Extended Connecting Rod isZ+35:1
Installation Dimension of NH40lateral operation and NH40Double-throw Transfer Isolating Switch

Electric Current A A1 B C C1 J K P V Y Y1 Y2 Y3 Z
2000A/3 576 472 510 603 374 353 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
2500A/3 576 472 510 603 374 353 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
3150A/3 576 472 510 603 374 353 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
2000A/4 696 592 510 603 374 473 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
2500A/4 696 592 510 603 374 473 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
3150A/4 696 592 510 603 374 473 220 120 60 80 230 420 465 603
M-15 > >>

6.7 Minimum length including Extended Connecting Rod isZ+35:1
6.7: 16A～630AMetalclad Outline and Installation Dimension
-315/4CSWH
-16/4CSWH -125/4CSWH -200/4CSWH
NH40
-100/4CSWH
NH40
-160/4CSWH
NH40
-250/4CSWH NH40 -400/4CSWH
-630/4CSWH
C D
A
B E
Specifications of Switch A B C D E Ф
NHR40-16/32 270±1.25 250±1.25 185±1.25 162±1.25 170±1.25 9

NHR40-40/63 270±1.25 250±1.25 185±1.25 162±1.25 170±1.25 9
NHR40-80/100 270±1.25 250±1.25 185±1.25 162±1.25 170±1.25 9
NHR40-125/160 328±1.25 322±1.25 305±1.25 260±1.25 250±1.25 9
NHR40-200/250 320±1.25 357±1.25 320±1.25 290±1.25 290±1.25 9
NHR40-315/400/630 460±1.25 407±1.25 375±1.25 330±1.25 310±1.25 9
7 Ordering Instructions
model, voltage class, electric current class, number of poles and quantity when ordering; if needing special ordering, please contact
technical division of our company.
For example, NH40-400/4CSWH 666V 20 sets
> >> M-16

Fuse-Switch Disconnector
Thermal 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250

current
HH15-63/ HH15-125/ HH15-160/ HH15-250/ HH15-400/ HH15-630/ HH15-800/ HH15-1000/ HH15-12500/

HH15/QSA
QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA
NHR17 NHR17-160 NHR17-250 NHR17-400 NHR17-630
NHR40 NHR40-160 NHR40-250 NHR40-400 NHR40-630
NHRT40 NHRT40-160 NHRT40-250 NHRT40-400 NHRT40-630
HH15/QSA
NHR17
NHR40
NHRT40
M-17 > >>

HH15/QSA
2. Switch disconnector (with fuse)
HH15 - □ / □ □ □
QSA: Switch-disconnector fuse

(to be matched with fuse)

No. of poles
2: 2 poles
HH15/QSA Fuse-switch Disconnector 3: 3 poles
1. General 4: 4 poles
1.1 Application
which has high short-circuit current, and acted as
main switch or master switch infrequently Rated operating current
operated by hand, it is particularly suitable in the
relative high class with drawable low voltage
complete equipment. They provide safety isolation
and protection against overcurrent for any low voltage
Series No.
electrical circuit.
Note: User should order RT(NT) series additional
to assemble a switch-disconnector fuse
Note: This switch should be used with RT36 (NT,RT16) or RT20 series fuses provided by the user. This switch may only be operated
outside the cabinet.
2.2 Property
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630 HH15-800 HH15-1000 HH15-1250
No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 4
Rated insulating voltage Ui(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V.
AC400
800V
AC415
M
AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250
Rated operating 400V:AC-23B/415V:AC-22B 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250
current(A) 690V:AC-23B/690V:AC22B 63 100 160 250 315 425 500 500 500
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current 400:V/H(kA) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current when 690V(kA) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Mechanical life 15000 15000 12000 12000 12000 3000 500 500 500
Electric Life 1000 1000 300 300 300 200 100 100 100
Rated current of fuse 400V/690V(A) 63/63 125/100 160/160 250/250 400/315 630/425 800/500 1000/630 1250/800
> >> M-18

HH15/QSA
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630 HH15-800, 1000, 1250
RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-1 RT16-2 RT16-3
400V/415V RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 HDLRS3
Model of fuse NT00 NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-1 RT16-2 RT16-3
690V HDLRS3
NT00 NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 16 16 16 30 40
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
2.3 Dimension (mm)

HH15-63, 125/QSA
57.5 Earth bolt 36 C

G Operating
□ 8square 2×M6 Panel of switchgear cubicle
shaft 6.5
P 110 1.5
37.5
熔断体
熔断体
熔断体
16
94
D
B
F
63
H I M
4max
E If N pole is
available 200~260 65
A +45
HH15-160, 250, 400/QSA
60 □10 Operating square shaft

C Panel of switchgear cubicle
G 45 E 55 2×M8
50
ON
24
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
138
D
B
OFF
140
7 M
P
If N pole is 115 4max
Wiring bolt H I
available
A +55 220~330 87.5
HH15-630/QSA
□12 Operating square shaft 62

2×M8 C
available=252
50
ON
If N pole is
熔断体
熔断体
熔断体
26
D
B
F
OFF
Earth bolt
35
200
M
P 4max
G H I
R4.5
E 280~375 87.5
A
M-19 > >>

HH15/QSA
HH15-800~1250/QSA
facade operation reverse operation
4max
4max
Panel of
switchgear Panel of switchgear
cubicle cubicle
350~500
400~500
295
295
500
485
80 40
32 60 M12
20
35
22
25
Ⅰ合 Ⅰ合
RS0 Fuse
RS0 Fuse
RS0 Fuse
275
286
250
220
310
350
310
O O
分分
11
M12
M12 M12
R5.5 91.5 100 100 N pole=134 65
800~1000A 1250A
Specification A B C D E F G L1 L2
HH15-63 155±1.25 100±1.10 175±1.25 90±0.75 135±1.25 88±1.10 M5 165~225 165~385
HH15-125 155±1.25 116±1.10 175±1.25 90±0.75 135±1.25 101±1.10 M6 165~225 160~385
HH15-160 240±1.45 146±1.25 178±2.0 130±1.25 100±1.1 126±1.25 M8 220~270 220~390
HH15-250 240±1.45 160±1.25 198±2.3 130±1.25 100±1.1 135±2.0 M10 220~270 220~390
HH15-400 240±1.45 160±1.25 198±2.3 130±1.25 100±1.1 135±2.0 M10 220~270 220~390
HH15-630 345±1.8 270±2.6 242±2.6 208±1.6 315±1.6 230±2.3 M12 250~265 250~529
2.4 Boring dimension
50
4×φ4.5
D
A
50
4-d
φ30 M
HH15-800~1250/QSA
A Opening size of the handle mounting panel
Specification A D d
+4 +0.5
HH15-63, 125/QSA 65±0.2 φ42 φ4.5
0 0
+2 +0.5
HH15-160~630/QSA 88±0.2 φ63 φ5.5
0 0
> >> M-20

NHR17
2. Type designation
N HR 17 - □ / □ □
1: With micro-gap switch

0: Without micro-gap switch
No. of poles
NHR17 Fuse-Switch Disconnector
1. General
1.1 NHR17 series fuse-swith disconnector
is a new product developed by our company.
Rated insulation voltage up to 800V.
rated operational voltage up to 690V.
rated operational current up to 630A,
rated frequency 50Hz,
in the distribution circuit and motor circuit
which has high short-circuit current Conventional thermal current
as the power switch, isolating switch,
emergency switch as well as circuit protection,
but normally it is not used
to make and break a single motor directly.
Series No.
M-21 > >>

NHR17
3. Primary parameters
Conventional thermal current(A) 63(32) 160 250 400 630

Rated insulation voltage V 800
690V 32、63 160 250 400 630

AC21
400V
32、63 160 250 400 630
AC22
400V
- 160 250 400 630
AC23
Rated current A
690V
- 160 250 400 630
AC21
690V
- 100 200 315 425
AC22
690V
- 100 160 315 315
AC23
Operating force N ≤120 ≤250 ≤350 ≤350 ≤450
Model RT19-125 NT00、RT16-00 NT1、RT16-1 NT2、RT16-2 NT3、RT16-3
20, 25, 32, 20, 25, 32, 35, 80, 100, 125, 125,160, 200, 315, 355, 400,
Rated current of matched
35,40, 50, 63 40, 50, 63, 80, 160,200, 224, 224, 250, 300, 425, 500, 630
fuse in 400V (breaking
(≥20kA) 100, 125,160 250 315, 355,400 (≥100kA)
capacity)
Associated fuse (≥100kA) (≥100kA) (≥100kA)
Rated current of matched 20, 25, 32, 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200, 315, 355,
fuse in 690V (breaking 35, 40, 50, 160, 200 224, 250, 300, 400, 425
-
capacity) 63, 80,100 (≥50kA) 315(≥50kA) (≥50kA)
(≥50kA)
A D
B E
I I
F 4-φ
L
K
J
J
C
M
Specification A B C D E F G H I J K L φ
63(32)/2 - 75 135 165 77 70° 120 72 - 104 - - 6
63(32)/3 - 105 135 165 77 70° 120 72 31 104 - - 6
63(32)/3 - 150 135 165 77 70° 120 72 75 104 - - 6

160/3 123 106 186 215 90 66° 160 86 74 25 9.5 6.5 -
250/3 196 184 266 240 118 70° 230 125 114 50 25 9 -
400/3 260 250 330 390 145 72° 295 155 150 50 - - 9
630/3 260 250 330 390 145 72° 295 155 150 50 - - 9
> >> M-22

Figure 2 Front Operation Outside Cabinet
50
Ф30
50
30 L
Arrow 4-Ф4.5
Square Shaft 100-400A Panel Cut Out Size
50
Lock Ф30
3-Ф5.5
K
630A Panel Cut Out Size
Outline and Installation Dimension

Specification
A B C D E F H I J L M N W P K
63/2 140 120 32 115 100 70 - 4.5 100 - - 25 - 32 -
63/4 172 120 32 115 100 70 - 4.5 100 - - 25 - 32 -
100/3 140 120 32 115 100 70 - 4.5 100 - - 25 - 32 -
100/4 172 120 32 115 100 70 - 4.5 100 - - 25 - 32 -
160/3 165 162 36 120 142 67.5 190 5.5 115 205~325 8 19 21 36 126
160/4 202 162 36 120 142 67.5 190 5.5 115 205~325 8 19 21 36 126
250/3 240 195 60 160 166 91.5 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 19 21 60 126
250/4 300 195 60 160 166 91.5 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 19 21 60 126
400/3 280 205 66 170 176 122 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 25 21 66 126
400/4 346 205 66 170 176 122 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 25 21 66 126
630/3 346 300 250 250 268 39 350 Ф9 190 330~440 12 72 37 80 190
630/4 426 300 250 250 268 39 350 Ф9 190 330~440 12 72 37 80 190
Orderers should give such clear indications as type characteristics, voltage class, electric current class, number of poles, operation
mode and quantity of switch; if need special ordering, please contact technical division of our company.
For example, NHR40-250/3WFusing current: 200A660V 10 sets
M-25 > >>

8 Main Parameters and Technical Performance of Switch fitted with metal-enclosure
Conventional Thermal Current A 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
gG Fuse Link Rated Current A 20 32 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
RatedInsulation Voltage V V690 800
380V AC21 20 32 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
380V AC22 20 32 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
660V AC21 20 32 63 100 100 200 250 315 315 425
Rated Working
660V AC22 20 32 63 100 100 200 250 315 315 425
Current (A)
220V DC21 20 32 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
220V DC22 20 32 63 125 160 200 250 215 400 630
440V DC21 20 32 63 100 100 200 250 315 315 425
440V DC22 20 32 63 100 100 200 250 315 315 425
60~80 65~100 80~120 100~150 150~230
Operating Physical Force (N) NT00C, RT16-00C NT00, RT16-00 NT1, RT16-1 NT2, RT16-2 NT3, RT16-3
Rated Current 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 20, 25, 32, 35, 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200, 315, 355, 400,
Aof Fusant (380V) 32, 3640, 50, 63 40, 50, 63, 80, 160, 200, 224, 250, 300, 425, 500,
Model
(Rated limit short (≥100kA) 100, 125, 160 224, 500 315, 355, 400 (≥100kA)
circuit current) (≥100kA) (≥100kA) (≥100kA)
Rated Current 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 20, 25, 32, 35, 80, 100, 125, 123, 160, 200, 315, 355,
Aof Fuse (660V) 32, 36, 40, 50, 63 40, 50, 63, 80, 160, 200 224, 250, 300, 400, 425
Fuse body
(Rated limit short (≥50kA) 100 (≥50kA) 315 (≥50kA)
circuit current) (≥50kA) (≥50kA)
9 Outline and Installation Dimension
-20/3H -100/3H
NHR40 -32/3H NHR40 -160/3H
-63/3H
M
NHR40 -630/3H
-200/3H -315/3H
NHR40 -250/3H NHR40 -400/3H
> >> M-26

C D
A
B E
Specifications of Switch A B C D E Ф
NHR40-20-63/3 270±1.25 250±1.25 185±1.25 162±1.25 170±1.25 9

NHR40-100/160/3 270±1.25 250±1.25 200±1.25 200±1.25 186±1.25 9
NHR40-200/250/3 328±1.25 322±1.25 305±1.25 260±1.25 250±1.25 9
NHR40-315/400/630/3 460±1.25 407±1.25 375±1.25 330±1.25 310±1.25 9
Orderers should give such clear indications as type characteristics, voltage class, electric current class, number of poles, operation
mode and quantity of switch; if need special ordering, please contact technical division of our company.
For example, NHR40-200/3H 660V 20 sets
M-27 > >>

NHRT40
2. Type designation
N HRT 40 - □ / □ □
L: Three phases breaking

and making simultaneously;
Blank: independent operation
phase to phase
No. of poles
NHRT40 Vertical
Fuse-switch Disconnector
1. General
1.1 Application
NHRT40 series vertical fuse-switch disconnector
is applicable in the circuit of rated voltage AC690V Conventional thermal current
and below, rated current AC 160A-630A,
rated frequency of 50Hz.
NHRT40 series are infrequently manually operated
multipolar fuse combination switches.
They break or switch off on load and provide
safely isolation and protection against overcurrent
for any voltage electrical circuit.
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-3.
Series No.
3. Structure and feature

3.1 Structure: The switch is consisted of underpan,
base, cover, handle and shield.
3.2 NT series fuse link is installed in the cover
to act as knife of active contact.
3.3 The handle moves fan-shapely
based on the pivot of underpan,
makes the cover and fuse make and break together,
it is with enough space and
remarkable disconnection point M
which meets the requirement of disconnector switch.
3.4 It is convenient to dismount the base and underpan,
which is easy to mount the base to the busbar safely
and reliably.
3.5 There is arc extinguisher on the underpan,
which ensures breaking capacity of the switch.
> >> M-28

NHRT40
4. Primary parameter
Conventional thermal current (A) 160 250 400 630

Rated insulation voltage (V) 800
400V
160 250 400 630
AC20
400V
160 250 400 630
AC21
400V
160 250 400 630
AC22
Rated current (A)
690V
160 250 400 630
AC20
690V
100 200 315 425
AC21
690V
100 160 315 315
AC22
Model 00 1 2 3
20, 25, 32, 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200,
400V Rated current 315, 355, 400,
35, 40, 50, 160, 200, 224, 224, 250, 315,
of fuse 425, 500, 630
63, 80, 100, 125, 250 355, 400
Specification of (Breaking capactiy) A ( ≥100kA)
160 ( ≥100kA) ( ≥100kA) ( ≥100kA)
associated fuse
20, 25, 32,
690V Rated current 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200,
35, 40, 50, 315, 355, 400, 425
of fuse 160, 200 224, 250, 300, 315
63, 80, 100 ( ≥50kA)
(Breaking capactiy) A ( ≥50kA) ( ≥50kA)
( ≥50kA)
NHRT40-160 Independent operation phase to phase NHRT40-160 Simuitaneous operation of three phases
D
C
C 145
B
110
13
83
21
275
185
E
F
13
27
A
590
289
M8
F
E
185
A
E
275
33 33
max.322
B 26.5
29.5
145
162
M-29 > >>

NHRT40
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Independent operation phase to phase NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Simuitaneous operation of three phases
C C
B
146 B 146
max 300
290
E
max.457
A
E
14.2 14.5
57
57
58 58
50
Model A B C D E F
NHRT40-160 Independent operation phase to phase 650 49 150 230 185
NHRT40-160 Simuitaneous operation of three phases 590 49 198 322 185 100
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Independent operation phase to phase 764 99 195 300 185
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Simuitaneous operation of three phases 764 99 195 457 185
> >> M-30

Changeover Switch
Changeover Switch
Changeover Switch
Thermal 16, 32, 40,

current 125 160 200 250 315 400
63, 80, 100
HH15/QAS HH15-125/QAS HH15-160/QAS HH15-400/QAS
HH15/QPS HH15-250/QPS
HH15/QSS HH15-63/QSS HH15-125/QSS HH15-160/QSS HH15-250/QSS HH15-400/QSS
NH40S NH40-125S NH40-160S NH40-200S NH40-250S NH40-315S NH40-400S
NH40-16, 32, 40,

NH40SZ 63, 80, 100SZ NH40-125SZ NH40-160SZ NH40-200SZ NH40-250SZ NH40-315SZ NH40-400SZ
HH15/QAS
HH15/QPS
HH15/QSS
NH40S
NH40SZ
M-31 > >>

Changeover Switch
Changeover Switch
630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
HH15-630/QAS HH15-1000/QAS
HH15-630/QPS HH15-1000/QPS HH15-1250/QPS HH15-1600/QPS HH15-2500/QPS HH15-3150/QPS
HH15-630/QSS
NH40-630S NH40-1000S NH40-1250S NH40-1600S NH40-2000S NH40-2500S NH40-3150S
NH40-630SZ NH40-1000SZ NH40-1250SZ NH40-1600SZ
> >> M-32

Changeover Switch
NZ7
2. Type designation
N Z 7－□□/□□□□□□□
Transfer mode without code:

Users can set the matter
R: self-throwing and self-reset
(power network to power network)
S: self-throwing and not self-reset
(power network to power network)
F: self-throwing and self-reset
(power network to power generation)
Controller type
A: basic type
Structure
NZ7 Automatic Transfer Y: integrated (type)
Without code: separated (type)
Switching Equipment
Actuator circuit breaker type
1. General Without code: NM1
Applicable to the three-phase four-line two-circuit power Rated current (Arabic numerals)
supply network with an AC power frequency of 50Hz,
rated operational voltage of AC400V, and rated operational Release with nothing as its code: NM1
current of up to 630A, the NZ7 series automatic transfer
switching equipment can automatically connect one or Number of poles: 3, 4
several loads from one power source to another to ensure
the normal power supply of the load circuit. Breaking capacity code: S, H, R
This product is applicable to the important places such as Frame size rated current (Arabic numerals)
industrial, commercial, and storied buildings,
and residential houses. Design serial number
Certificate: KEMA Automatic transfer switching equipment

Execution standard: IEC/EN 60947-6-1
Company code
3.1 Ambient air temperature
The upper limit for the ambient air
temperature is +40℃, lower limit -5℃,
and the mean value of the temperature is Ambient temperature
not greater than ＋35℃ within 24 hours;

3.2 Altitude
Altitude: not higher than 2,000m for the
installation site.
3.3 Atmospheric conditions:
2000m
When the ambient air temperature is +40℃,

the relative humidity of the air shall not be Altitude
higher than 50%, a higher relative humidity

is allowed at a lower temperature, e.g. 90%
at +20℃, and special measures shall be
taken for the condensation occasionally
produced due to temperature changes.
3.4 Class of pollution:
Class of pollution: 3 No Pollution
M-22 > >>

Changeover Switch
NZ7
4. Technical data
Product type NZ7-63 NZ7-125 NZ7-250 NZ7-400 NZ7-630

Up to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-1
Actuator circuit breaker NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630
Parameters of electrical characteristics
Operating environment temperature -5℃~+40℃
Altitude 2000m
Class of pollution 3
Specification for current 10,16,20,25, 16,20,25,32,40, 100,125,160, 250,315, 400,500,
32,40,50,63A 50,63,80,100A 180,200,225A 350,400A 630A
Rated operational voltage(Ue) 400V 50Hz

Nominal insulation voltage(Ui) AC500V AC800V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 6kV 8kV
Number of poles 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
Short circuit breaking capacity codes S H H S H R H S H R H S H R S H R
Rated short circuit making capacity(Icm) 31.5 73.5 73.5 52.5 105 143 105 52.5 105 143 105 73.5 110 154 73.5 110 154
Rated short circuit breaking capacity(Icn) 15 35 35 25 50 65 50 25 50 65 50 35 50 70 35 50 70
Service life 6000 times 6000 times 6000 times 4000 times 3000 times
Usage category AC-33B
Electric equipment grade CB Class
Protection level IP30(except the main circuit terminal)
Protection Overload protection/short circuit protection
Controller characteristic
Controller Type A(basic type)
Rated control supply voltage Us 230V 50Hz
Installation mode for the controller Integrated/separated (as installed on the surface of the cabinet)
Operating transfer time (no time delay) ≤3.2s ≤3.5s ≤3.6s ≤4s ≤5s
Power consumption ≤10W
Installation mode Fixed type
Connection mode Front connection
5. Characteristics and functions

The NZ7 series automatic transfer switching equipment
(hereinafter referred to as automatic transfer switch) is the
CB class product of a new generation combined with the
advanced digital electronic control technique. The product
features compactness, energy conservation, convenient
installation, reliable dual-interlock protection, etc., and is
advanced and complete in terms of function.
M
Single motor structure, compact
AUTO
ON
N
R
OFF
AU TO QU ER Y
SE T
MA NU
N R OF F
Visualized management
> >> M-34

Changeover Switch
NZ7
5.1 Compactness
The transfer function is achieved via using the forward and
backward rotation of the only one motor which allows for reducing
the product’s height and room for its installation.
5.2 Energy saving
The driving mechanism works in the mode of motor drive with less
power consumption and noise.
Transmission mechanism (short-term service)

Type A controller (long-term service)
Type 63/Type 100 Type 225 Type 400/Type 630
≤10W 20W 40W 20W
5.3 Advanced and multipurpose functions
Auto
ON
N
R
OFF
Settable transfer parameter Visualized management Multi auxiliary functions

Under voltage transfer value three-phase voltage Off/on indication external-terminal Integrated controller in the
Delay time transfer magnitude display Fire control linkage modes of integrated and
Power network to power network Off/on state display Generator signal separated configurations easy
self-throwing and self-reset/power External power source
network to power network for installation
self-throwing and not self-reset/
power network to power generation
Self-throwing and self-reset
M-35 > >>

Changeover Switch
NZ7
5.4 Dual-interlock protection
The mechanical-electrical interlock duplex protection is used to
prevent two power sources from being connected simultaneously
to the load, wherein the electrical interlock works in the breaker
contact position mode for directly indicating the automatic transfer
switch to perform the genuine electrical interlock so that the
automatic transfer does not take place automatically in such cases
as contact fusion welding, breaker handle damage, and circuit
fault breaker tripping.
6. Controller
Type and function Type A (basic type)
Modes of manual and automatic transfer ■

Working position of the main contact (actuator circuit breaker)
Prime power turned on ■
Standby power turned on ■
OFF ■
Automatic control
Monitoring the prime power Failures such as loss of phase/voltage, under and over voltage for any of three phases of the power supply
Monitoring the standby power Failures such as loss of phase/voltage, under and over voltage for any of three phases of the power supply
Self-throwing and self-reset ■
Self-throwing and not self-reset ■
Power network to power network ■
Power network to power generation ■
No-voltage transfer ■
Under voltage transfer ■
Over voltage transfer ■
Adjustable delay time ■
Transfer delay a Continuously adjustable in the range of 0s~180s
Return c Continuously adjustable in the range of 0s~180s
Generator control ■
Fire control linkage (inactive contact) ■
Indication
Indication for on, off, and double-break ■
Prime power indication ■(Displaying voltage magnitude)
Standby power indication ■(Displaying voltage magnitude)
Fault tripping indication ■
External indication signal terminal ■
Parameter setting indication ■
Interlock protection
Mechanical interlock ■
Electrical interlock ■(not transfer automatically with faulty tripping)
6.1 The Type A integrated controller works in the modes of integrated or separated configurations,
and is installed in the cabinet or on the panel to allow operation outside the cabinet.
Whether to transfer from one power source to another depends on the state of the operational power supply.
Generating set control
Press-key manually forced transfer operating
6.2 Control voltage
AC230V 50Hz
6.3 Operation: automatic operation, manual operation
6.4 Setting delay
M
Transfer delay: adjustable in the range of 0s - 180s, prime power failure,
time before off for QN
Return delay: continuously adjustable within the range of 0s - 180s,
prime power recovery, time before off for QR
> >> M-36

Changeover Switch
NZ7
6.5 Interface for display and operation
LED digital display
1 2 3
AUTO MANU ERR

4
ON
5 N 9
OFF
6 SET 10
ON
7 R 11
OFF
12
STOP GENERATOR
8 13
19
AUTO QUERY
SET
14 MANU 18
N R OFF
15 17
16
1. Indication of automatic working mode; 15. Button for compulsorily turn off the normal power
2. Indication of manual working mode; Under the manual control mode, if this button is pressed, it can
3. Failure indication compulsorily switch to the normal power; if it is setting condition,
When the breaker is disengaged due to the failure or short-circuit this button is the “scroll up” button of setting programs;
of the switch, this lamp will be on; 16. Button for compulsorily turn off the alternative power
4. Display area of normal power voltage parameters Under the manual control mode, if this button is pressed, it can
It displays normal power voltage parameters and changeover compulsorily switch to the alternative power; if it is setting
delay time under the working condition, and setting items under condition, this button is the “scroll up” button of setting
the setting condition; programs;
5. Indication of the on or off of breaker on the normal power side 17. Off button
6. Indication of setting condition Under the manual control mode, if either line of both power
7. Indication of the on or off of breaker on the alternative power side lines are normal and this button is pressed, it will switch to
8. Indication of the start of stop function; the disengagement position; this button is the minus button
9. Units of voltage, time, and frequency of the normal power; for setting parameters when it is under setting condition;
10. Phases A, B, and C; 18. Failure inquiry button
11. Units of voltage, time, and frequency of the alternative power; When the switch fails and malfunction lamp on the failure
12. Display area of alternative power voltage parameters; screen is on, the detail malfunction code can be inquired if it
It displays alternative power voltage parameters and transfer is pressed; this button is the plus button if it is under the
delay time under the working condition, and setting items under setting condition;
the setting condition; 19. Setting button
13. Indication of the start signal of generator When this button is pressed, it may enter into the parameter
14. Selection button of automatic/manual transfer setting menu of the controller.
When it is regularly used, it can be used for selecting the
automatic or manual mode; it saves and exits the functions
when it is under the setting condition.
M-37 > >>

Changeover Switch
NZ7
6.6 Operation description on parameter setting
AUTO
N
ON
R
OFF
Setting
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of under-voltage ofnormal power, press
SET
to increase and to decrease. 160V to 200V
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of over-voltage of normal power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set transfer delay time, press
SET
to increase and to decrease. 0s to 180s
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of under-voltage of alternative power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of over-voltage of alternative power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set return delay time, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set start delay time of generator, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set shut-down delay time of generator,press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
SET
Set transfer mode, press button to change the mode
(when the last digit is 0, it is grid-grid self-throw and self-reset mode;
when the value is 1, it is mutual alternative mode, when it is 2, it is
grid-generator. self-throw and self-reset mode.)
Note for keys

Button Description:
Press the Setting Button when the controller is working, LED will display
the parameter setting menu interface displayed in Figure ; press “ ”
and “ ” buttons in the setting menu to scroll up the setting options;
if the automatic/ manual button is pressed, it will exit the setting menu;
M
press “ ” or “ ” to change parameters.
> >> M-38

Changeover Switch
NZ7
Working processes of typy A controller
Grid – Grid
Grid – Grid mutual alternative operation
self-throw and self-reset operation
QN QR
QN QR UN is normal
UN is normal
UN fails
UN fails T1 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
T1 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
QN QR
QN QR UN is disconnected
UN is disconnected
UR is put into use
UR is put into use
QN QR
QN QR UR supplies
UR supplies
UN resumes to normal
QN QR
QN QR UR supplies
UR is disconnected
UR fails
UN is put into use T2 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
QN QR
QN QR UR is disconnected
UN supplies
UN is put into use

QN QR
UN supplies
Grid-Power Generation
self-throw and self-reset operation
QN QR
UN is normal
UN fails
Generator starts
Output of generator reaches set value

QN QR
UN is disconnected
UR is put into use
QN QR T1: Transfer delay can be adjusted from 0s to 180s

UR supplies
Failure of UN , time before disconnecting QN
T2: Return delay time can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
Normal of UN , time before disconnecting QR
T2 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s T3: Delay time in starting generator can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
QN QR
UR is disconnected
T4: Delay time in shutting-down generator can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
UN is put into use QN: Operating breaker on the frequently used side
QR: Operating breaker on the stand-by side
QN QR UN : Normal power supply
UN supplies
UR : Alternative power supply
UN is put into use
Generator shuts down
M-39 > >>

Changeover Switch
NZ7
7. NZ7 external connection diagram
7.1 product connection diagram
N standby power
N Prime power
Prime power UN standby power UR
1 3 5 1 3 5
QN QR
N N
7.2 4P product connection diagram
Prime power UN standby power UR

1 3 5 N 1 3 5 N
QN QR
Note：
M
QN actuator circuit breaker on the prime (normal) side
QR actuator circuit breaker on the standby (reserve) side
> >> M-40

Changeover Switch
NZ7
7.3 Wiring diagram of external terminals of the controller
Indication of UN status Indication of UR status

Auxiliary power Stop signal
101 102 103 104 201 202 203 204
301 302 401 402 403 404 501 502 503
Passive contact point

+ -
Passive contact point
Feedback signal
Tripping signal
Tripping signal
Power signal
Power signal
On signal
On signal
Zero line
Zero line
DC24V/0.5A
Start control of generator
Output is AC230V/0.5A Note: the hidden line is the internal wiring of the controller.
7.4 Application
Terminals 401 and 402 can only connect to

passive signal; otherwise, the controller will
be burnt! Passive signals may be inputted
through relay. Product after receiving the
stop signal off, 403 and 404 will be
connected.
After removing stop signals, this product will
restore to normal working status by pressing
any key of the controller.
UN normal
To control center
401 101
402 102 UN
403 103 QN on
Internal contact
terminal of the
404 104 QN tripped

controller
To the remote port of the generator

501 201
502 202 UR
503 203 QR on
204 QR tripped
301 +
DC24V
302 -
This terminal is used under the
Grid-Power Generation; it must
be connected to the generator
if required; and it does not affect
its use if it is not connected. It is used under the Grid-Power
When the UN fails Generation mode and it is
allowed not to connect it, but
501 the default start delay of the
502 generator is 0 second.
503
M-41 > >>

Changeover Switch
NZ7
8. Line incoming pattern
8.1 Connecting bus-bar type
Normal power bus-bar Alternative power bus-bar
Line voltage signal sampling
Power bus-bar
Load bus-bar
8.2 Installation mode: vertical installation or horizontal installation

9.1 Outline dimension & Installation dimension
Wiring terminal of zero line

(Only three pole products)
J
H
M K L
H2 H3
① Outline dimension
O
N
B
H1
F G
A
M
Dimension A F G K
B E J L M N O H H1 H2 H3
Modle 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
NZ7-63 355 380 240 200 40 52.5 132.5 145 178 24 11.5 25 40 200 117 150 170 25 18/28
NZ7-125 390 420 240 200 43 58 148 163 194 24 9 30 43 200 136 150 180 25 24
NZ7-250 435 470 240 200 41.5 59 170.5 188 225 36 18.5 35 41.5 200 144 160 190 25 24
NZ7-400 565 615 330 225 43.5 68.5 232.5 257.5 304 61.5 36.5 48 43.5 265 224 200 227 24 40
NZ7-630 680 740 330 225 45.5 74.5 291 320 385 89 60 58 45.5 270 234 200 232 24 42
> >> M-42

Changeover Switch
NZ7
9.2 Installation dimension
4×φP
Dimension C
D P
Modle 3P 4P
NZ7-63 322 347 220 φ8
NZ7-100 357 387 220 φ8
D
NZ7-225 402 437 220 φ8

NZ7-400 505 555 300 φ10
NZ7-630 622 680 300 φ10
9.3 Controller Module
nstallation dimension of the controller

when it is installed by split type
84 42 14
144
140
140
50
80
80

The user shall indicate such items as the type,
current specification, number of poles.
Example: If you order an auto transfer switch equipment,

shell current 100A, rated current 100A，breaking capacity
of Type H, 4 poles, Type A controller, you can write it as
NZ7-100H/4100YA.
M-43 > >>

Changeover Switch
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS
2. Switch disconnector,
with connection contact in series
HH15 - □ / □ □ □ S
Changeover switch
QA: No fuse,
with series connection contacts
QP: No fuse,
with parallel connection contacts
QS: Switch-disconnector fuse
(associated with fuse)
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS No. of auxiliary contacts

Changeover Switch 1: 1 pair of auxiliary contact
1. General 2: 2 pairs of auxiliary contact
1.1 Application
which has high short-circuit current, and acted No. of poles
as main switch or master switch infrequently operated 2: 2 poles
by hand, it is particularly suitable in the
3: 3 poles
relative high class
4: 4 poles
with drawable low voltage complete equipment.
They provide safety isolation
and protection against overcurrent
for any low voltage electrical circuit.
Unique rolling insert type contact system. Series No.

QSS series switch should be used with RT36 (NT,RT16) or
Rt20 series fuses provided by the user.
> >> M-44

Changeover Switch
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS
2.2 Property
HH15/QAS
Specification 125 160 200 400 630 1000

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V, Ui=690V. Ue=690V, Ui=1000V.
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 125 160 200 400 630 1000
400V: AC-21B 125 160 200 400 630 1000
Rated operating current(A) 400V: AC-22B 125 160 160 315 400 630
690V: AC-23B 125 160 160 400 400 800
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 20 20 20 50 50 50
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 1.5 1.6 2.4 4.8 8 12
Mechanical life 1400 1400 1400 800 800 500
Electric Life 200 200 200 200 200 100

Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 16 16 16 30 40
5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
HH15/QPS
Specification 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V.
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
400V:AC-21B 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
Rated operating current(A) 400V:AC-22B 250 630 630 630 800 - -
690V:AC-21B 250 630 1000 1250 1470 2500 2500
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 39 60 60 85 85 130 130
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 3 8 12 15 20 30 38
Mechanical life 1400 800 500 500 500 500 300
Electric Life 200 200 100 100 100 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 16 30 40 45 60 75 90
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
HH15/QSS
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage Ui(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V.
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 63 125 160 250 400 630
400V:AC-23B 63 125 160 250 400 630
Rated operating current(A)
690V:AC-23B 63 100 160 250 315 425
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current 400:V/H(kA) 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current when 690V(kA) 50 50 50 50 50 50
Mechanical life 1700 1400 1400 1400 800 800
M-45 > >>

Changeover Switch
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630
Electric Life 300 200 200 200 200 200
Rated current of fuse 400V/690V(A) 63/63 125/100 160/160 250/250 400/315 630/425
RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16
400V RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20
Model of fuse NT00 NT00 NT00 NT2 NT2 NT3
RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16
690V
NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 16 16 16 30
5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
2.3 Mounting dimension(mm)
62×6 F
88+10.2
φ63+0.3
D
50
88+10.2
B
E
φ5.5+0.5
M
C C×C
A
≤4 87.5
Model A B C D E F G L M
HH15-63/QSS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-125/QSS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300? 140
HH15-125/QAS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-160/QAS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-250/QPS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-160/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-250/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25? 12 300 200
HH15-400/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12? 300 200
HH15-400/QAS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-630/QAS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-630/QPS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-1000/QPS
HH15-630/QSS
630
950
190
250
590
906
120
180
25
28
25
28
12
12
300
400
200
200
M
HH15-1000/QAS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 200
HH15-1250/QPS 950 250 906 180 28? 28 12 400 200
HH15-1600/QPS 950 250 906? 180 28 28 12 400 200
HH15-2500/QPS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 400
HH15-3150/QPS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 400
> >> M-46

Changeover Switch
NH40S
2. Changeover switch
NH40 - □ / □ C S □ □
With “F”: terminal protection type

(only for 125~250A)
Without “F”: without terminal protection
With “W”: the handle is operated outside the

cabinet
Without “W”: the handle is operated inside the
cabinet
S: Changeover switch
NH40S Changeover Switch C: lateral operation

Blank: front operation
1. General
1.1 Application
Mainly used in the distributing
and motor circuit which has 3 represents three poles: 31 represents three poles
high short-circuit current,
with auxiliary, one open and one closed
and acted as main switch or master switch
infrequently operated by hand, 32 represents three poles with auxiliary, two open
it is particularly suitable in the relative high class and two closed
with drawable low voltage complete equipment. 4 represents four poles: 41 represents four poles
They provide safety isolation and protection with auxiliary, one open and one closed
against overcurrent for any
42 represents four poles with auxiliary, two open
low voltage electrical circuit.
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-3. and two closed
Conventional thermal current
Series No.
M-47 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40S
2.2 Property
Conventional thermal current 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Associated fuse rating (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Rated insulation voltage(V) Ui 800
400V AC21B 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC22B - - - - - - 125 125 200 250 315 400 630
Rated current (A)
400V AC23A - - - - - - 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
690V AC21B 16 32 40 63 80 80 125 160 200 200 315 400 500
690V AC22B - - - - - - 100 100 160 160 200 250 315

690V AC23A - - - - - - 50 63 70 80 125 160 200
Operation force (N) 30~50 40~60 65~100
Conventional thermal current 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150

Associated fuse rating (A) 1000 1250 2×800 2×1000 2×1250
Rated insulation voltage(V) Ui 800
400V AC21B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
400V AC22B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Rated current (A)
690V AC21B 800 800 1000 1600 1600 2000
690V AC22B 800 800 800 1000 1000 1250
Operation force (N) 200~300
Mounting dimensions of NH40-16~1600/C and NH40-16~1600/CS
A
A1
J N Y1 Operation inside the switchger
R 32 Y
M Y
L
U
B
V P P P 16~1600/CS 16~1600/C
C1 C
Panel of switchgear cubicle Panel of switchgear cubicle Operation outside the switchger
D 50
4×φ4.5 M
50
φ30
16~1600/CSW 16~1600/CW Mounting dimension of externally mounted handle

Z1 Z
> >> M-48

Changeover Switch
NH40S
Mounting dimension of NH40 lateral operation and NH40 changeover switch disconnector
Specification NH40-XX/C NH40-XX/CS Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
Current A A1 B C C1 D F J K L N P R U V M Y Y1 Z Z1
16~100A/3 290 170 107 135 185 85 135 116 84 7 25 30 14 90 20 6 39 90 360~465 440~545
16~100A/4 290 170 107 135 185 85 135 116 84 7 25 30 14 90 20 6 39 90 360~465 440~545
125A/3 295 192 135 155 235 85 135 120 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 31 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
160A/3 295 192 135 155 235 85 135 120 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 29 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
125A/4 325 222 135 155 235 85 135 150 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 31 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
160A/4 325 222 135 155 235 85 135 150 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 29 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
200A/3 335 232 170 176 260 85 135 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
250A/3 335 232 170 176 260 85 135 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
200A/4 385 282 170 176 260 85 135 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
250A/4 385 282 170 176 260 85 135 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
315A/3 430 298 240 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 32 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
400A/3 430 298 240 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 35 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
630A/3 430 298 260 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 40 220 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
315A/4 490 358 240 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 32 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
400A/4 490 358 240 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 35 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
630A/4 490 358 260 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 40 220 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
1000A/3 580 472 316 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 60 240 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1250A/3 580 472 356 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 70 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1600A/3 580 472 356 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 80 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1000A/4 700 592 316 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 60 240 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1250A/4 700 592 356 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 70 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1600A/4 700 592 356 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 80 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
M-49 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40S
Mounting dimensions of NH40-2000~3150/C and NH40-2000~3150/CS
78 120 120 2000、 2500A 2000、 2500A
M12 Wiring Wiring

N
11
330
220
U
B
Y 2000~3150/CS 2000~3150/C
O R Y
J 50 56 Y1
A1 570 425
A
Operation inside the switchger
990~1155 750~865
Y1
Y Y2 Y2 2000~31500/CSW Y Y2 2000~31500/CW
Panel of 25 80 Panel of 25 80
switchgear cubicle switchgear cubicle 50
4× φ4.5
50
φ30
connecting panel of connecting panel of Mounting dimension of externally mounted handle

3150A, B pole & N pole 3150A, B pole & N pole
570 340
Operation outside the switchger
Mounting dimension of NH40 changeover switch disconnect
Specification NH40-XX/C NH40-XX/CS Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Current A A1 B R J U O N Y Y1 Y2
2000A/3 580 472 440 80 353 325 40 40 80 420 -
2500A/3 580 472 440 80 353 325 40 40 80 420 -
3150A/3 580 472 510 120 353 360 50 50 80 420 230
2000A/4 700 592 440 80 473 325 40 40 80 420 -
2500A/4
3150A/4
700
700
592
592
440
510
80 473
473
325
360
40
50
40
50
80
80
420
420
-
230
M
120
> >> M-50

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
2. Switch Disconnector
N H 40 - □ / □ SZ □
Blank: common type

Main power supply —— standby power
supply, automatic change and automatic
recovery;
Ⅰ: mains supply-mains supply, mutual
standby, phase loss protection;
Ⅱ: mains supply-mains supply, automatic
change and automatic recovery, phase
loss protection, overvoltage and
undervoltage protection;
Ⅲ: mains supply-oil engine, automatic
change and automatic recovery, phase
loss protection, overvoltage and
undervoltage protection;
Dual-power supply automatic transfer

NH40SZ
Automatic Changeover Switch “3” represents three poles
1. General “4” represents four poles
NH40SZ automatic changeover switch disconnector
integrates electrical and mechanical interlocking systems
to guarantee safe transfer operation.
It is applicable for the three-phase four-wire power supply
system of AC 50Hz, rated voltage AC 380V and below, Design sequence No.
DC 440V and below, rated current up to 3200A.
It can realize automatic and manual changeover between
normal and back up power supply power, Isolating switch
and stop power supplying to load when changeover
process of power supply is carried out. Company code
The switch is applicable for two circuits power supply
and in the condition which requires
high quality power supply.
Standard: IEC/EN 60947-3, 60947-6-1
3. Povrameter
Conventional
16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 1000 1250 1600
thermal current (A)
Rated current of fuse (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 1000 1250 2×800
Rated insulation voltage (V) 800
400V AC-33iB 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 1000 1250 1600
Rated
current(V)
Operation force (N) 30~50 40~60 65~100 75~120 200~300
M-51 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
4. Control characteristics and product structure Control characteristics of type II switch:
a. This switch applies to the automatic change and automatic
4.1 Control characteristics:
recovery of mains supply-mains supply systems. Power supply I
There are two types of switch products, three-pole and four-pole
precedes. When power supply I is normal, it is switched on;
(three poles + switchable neutral pole).
when power supply I fails and power supply II is normal, the
Four control types (common type, I, II, III).
switch changes to power supply II; when power supply I resumes,
a. Common type: Main power supply-standby power supply,
the switch automatically changes to power supply I. The main
automatic change and automatic recovery.
power supply changes to the standby power supply (the delay
b.Ⅰ: mains supply-mains supply, mutual standby, phase loss protection.
continuously adjustable between 1～999s), the standby power
c. Ⅱ：mains supply-mains supply, automatic change and
automatic recovery, overvoltage and undervoltage protection, supply changes to the main power supply (the delay continuously
phase loss protection. adjustable between 1～999s).
d. Ⅲ：mains supply-oil generator, automatic change and b. Three-phase overvoltage, undervoltage and phase loss detection
automatic recovery, overvoltage and undervoltage detection. protection functions.
The automatic change-over control mechanism uses a key switch
for the selection of operation mode. Control characteristics of type III switch:
The position can be maintained by padlock. a. This switch applies to the mutual standby or automatic change
and automatic recovery of mains supply-oil generator (automatic
Control characteristics of common type switch: oil generator with signals) systems. Power supply I (the mains
a. This switch applies to the automatic change and automatic supply) precedes. When power supply I fails, the switch gives a
recovery of main power supply-standby power supply (including signal to start the oil generator. The oil generator has warm-up
manual oil generator; Note: Manual oil generator does not have delay (continuously adjustable between 0～180s) function.
to be used with type III switches) systems. Power supply I precedes. After the oil generator has started, the switch changes to power
When power supply I is normal, it is switched on; supply II (the oil generator). When power supply I resumes, the
when power supply I fails and power supply II is normal, switch automatically changes to power supply I, the oil generator
the switch changes to power supply II; when power supply I automatically stops after a cooling delay (continuously adjustable
resumes, the switch automatically changes to power supply I. between 0～180s).
b. Three-phase overvoltage and undervoltage protection functions
Control characteristics of type I switch: for mains supply and oil generator.
a. This switch applies to the mutual standby of mains supply-mains
supply systems. When the switch is in the “0” position, power Type I, type II and type III switches have:
supply I precedes. When power supply I fails and power supply II 1) Automatic, remote and manual control functions
is normal, the switch changes to power supply II; when power 2) A 0.5s delay of the detection signal, to prevent misoperation.
supply II is on and power supply I resumes, the switch does not 3) A remote control “0” position in automatic state.
automatically change to power supply I, it will change to power 4) A key switch for the selection of operation mode.
supply I only when power supply II fails. The main power supply
changes to the standby power supply (the delay continuously
adjustable between 1～999s), the standby power supply changes
to the main power supply (the delay continuously adjustble
between 1～999s).
b. Phase loss detection protection function.
4.2 Product structure

16A-100A/4(Common type)
Model and specification
Control voltage
Position indication
Electrical key lock

Mechanical padlock
Switch body
M
Line II connected to the standby power supply
Line I connected to the standby power supply

302~305 switch
state indicating
terminals
Operating handle
> >> M-52

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
100A/3 common type; 100A/3, 4 typeⅠ, type II, type III; 125A-3200A/3, 4 common type, type I, type II, type III
Model and specification
Control voltage
Position indication
Electrical key lock
Mechanical padlock
Switch body
Line I connected to the standby power supply

Line II connected to the standby power supply
101~106 control power supply input and output terminals
201~206 switch control terminals
301~306 switch operating state indicating terminals
401~406 switch operating state indicating terminals (reserved) (only for 315A and above)
501~506 electrical key lock, mechanical padlock state indicating terminals (only for 315A and above)
Operating handle
a. Electrical key lock: It controls the power supply of the internal

control circuit of the switch. When the electrical lock is in the
“Automatic” position, the switch can be operated automatically
or remotely. When the electrical lock is in the “Manual” position,
the switch can only be operated manually;
b. Operating handle: When operating the switch with the operating
handle, the elctrical lock must be in the “Manual” position;
c. Mechanical padlock: Before maintenance, put the switch to the
0 position with the operating handle, pull up the padlock structure
and lock the padlock. (Pulling up the mechanical padlock switches
off the internal control power supply of the switch so that it
cannot be operated electrically or manually);
d. Position indication: It indicates the operating position (I; 0; II)
of the switch;
e. Control voltage: The control voltage class of the switch is 220VAC;
f. Switch body: The front part is line I, which is connected to the
“Normal power supply”; the rear part is line II, which is connected
to the “Standby power supply”.
M-53 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
4.3 Connection terminal of control circuit
Common type
Remote & Automatic Remote control at Automatic control at

Engine control option breaking status making status
Connection SUPPLY output VOLTAGE Connection
terminal 1 Normal powerⅠ Backup powerⅡ terminal 2
220VAC OV 220VAC OV
101 102 103 104 105 106 201 202 203 204 205 206
POSITION POSITION
Connection Connection
terminal 3 terminal 3
301 302 303 304 305 306 302 303 304 305
(16A~100A common type only)
MANU-PADLOCK
PREBREAK
terminal 4 terminal 5 501 502 503 504 505 506
Manual operation With padlock
401 402 403 404 405 406 Automatic operation at breaking status
at making status Without padlock
at making state
Type I and type II

Communication control option breaking status making status
Connection Connection Control

101 102 103 104 105 106 201 202 203 204 205 206
I II type 3P only
PREBREAK
301 302 303 304 305 306 401 402 403 404 405 406
Connection
501 502 503 504 505 506
terminal 5
Manual operation
Automatic operation
With padlock
at breaking status
M
at making state
> >> M-54

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
Type III

control option breaking status making status
Generator Communication Control/Auto Selection
201 202 203 204 205 206
101 102 103 104 105 106
III type 3P only Predict

301 302 303 304 305 306 401 402 403 404 405 406
Generator
Starting
terminal 5 501 502 503 504 505 306 terminal 6
Manual operation With padlock
at breaking status
Automatic operation 601 602 603 604 605 606
at making state
Terminal 1, main options Terminal 4, pre-breaking auxiliary contact

101, 106-AC220V output terminals of engine (only for common type) 306-Type I, II, switch II controls zero-line “N2”; type III,
102, 103-Power control terminal of circuit Ⅰ(only for common type) switch II controls zero-line “N(G)”
104, 105-Power control terminal of circuit Ⅱ(only for common type) 402, 403, Pre-breaking position of indication switchⅠ.
101, 102-Generator starting signal input (for type III) 404, 405, Pre-breaking position of indication switchⅡ.
103, 104-Firefighting +24V input, enforce "0", both switches breaks Terminal 5 Manual
(for type I, II, III) and automatic operation mode
105, 106-Communication Interface (Reserved) and whether locking the switch
502, 503, Automatic and manual control indication
Terminal 2, remote control 504, 505, Indcation of whether locking
201, 206-Terminal of remote controlling, the switch Terminal 6 Start-up terminals
automatic controlling functions, for diesel generator
Remote control at breaking status and automatic control
at making status. Terminal 6, control generator
202, 203-Making switch I. 602, 603, Generator starting terminal. (Only for type III).
202, 204-At “0” position, both switches breaks (for type I, II, III) Two zero-lines of 3-poles switch
(include preferring position “0”) should be connected to the terminal 305, 306
202, 205-Making switch II. (1~1.5mm2 copper), at right side switch.
(for Type III ≥800A)
Terminal 3, position indication and zero-line terminal
301, 302-Switch I position
301, 303-At “0” position, all swithes breaks
301, 304-Switch II position, (301~304 for I II III, 4 poles switch)
302, 303-Switch I position
302, 304-”0” position
302, 305-Switch II position (302~305 for common type)
305-Type I, II, switch I controls zero-line “N1”; type III switch I
controls zero-line “N” (only for 3 poles)
M-55 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
5 Connection diagram
5.1 16A~100A 4 poles main switch wiring diagram
Normal power supply Standby power supply
Load output terminal

(Special attention should be paid to the sequence of connection.)
Secondary connection diagram

Normal Standby
A phase B phase C phase N phase power supply power supply
Connected to load output terminal
HL1 and HL2 are respectively the resumption indicators of the

normal and standby power supplies;
HD1 and Hd2 are respectively the service indicators of the normal
and standby power supplies;
302~305 are switch terminals.
5.2 125A~3200A main switch wiring diagram
Normal power supply Normal power supply

125A~3200A
Note: Secondary connection of terminal 1 is required

Load output terminal (for 16A~100A with forced reset, the connection mode
is the same as above).
> >> M-56

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
5.3 125A~3200A Secondary wiring diagram (3P, 4P)
Normal Standby
power supply power supply

125A~3200A
HL1 and HL2 are respectively the resumption indicators of the

normal and standby power supplies;
HD1 and Hd2 are respectively the service indicators of the normal
and standby power supplies;
FU1 and FU2 are 5A fuses;
101~106, 201~206, 301~306 are switch terminals.
5.4 Depending on the operating mode, the following connection modes can be used for terminal 2:
a. Fully automatic connection mode
201 202 203 204 205 206
201 and 206 short connected
Note: Secondary connection of terminal 1 is required.
b. Remote reset (the two power supplies are disconnected)

connection mode
201 202 203 204 205 206
Forced reset contact (passive)
Only for 16A~3200A ( Type I II III )
M-57 > >>

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
d. Fully automatic + manual (remote) connection mode
c. Remote connection mode (Note: SB1 and SB2 are
(Note: SB1 and SB2 are external push-button switches)
external push-button switches)
Automatic
Remote
Manual
201 202 203 204 205 206
201
202
203
204
Note: When switch SA is in the automatic position,① and ②
are connected.
205
When switch SA is in the manual position, ④ and ③
are connected.
206
5.5 Connection diagram

NH40-16~100
16~100A 3P connection chart 16~100A 4P connection chart
A A
B B
C C
N
N
C C
B B
A A
A B C A B C N
16~100A 3P connection chart 16~100A 4P connection chart
Correct mounting of the switch:

a. Copper busbars I and II are respectively connected to phases A, B, C, N
of the normal (front) and standby (rear) power supplies from left to right.
b. The control power supplies are obtained respectively from phases C and N
of the normal and standby power supplies.
c. AC220V control power supplies I and II are respectively connected to
terminals 102~103 and 104~105, among which 102 and 104 are M
respectively the live wires of the normal and standby power supplies.
d. Terminals 1.1 and 106 are only used as the control power supplies of
the signal lamps. Note: They should not be connected to any other lines.
e. When upper (lower) incoming line is used, phases A, B, C, N of the lower
(upper) lines I and II are respectively connected with copper busbars or
conductors as the output.
> >> M-58

Changeover Switch
NH40SZ
6. Mounting dimension of NH40SZ automatic changeover switch disconnector

≤ 1600A
Electric ware controlling connecting area J
r
ete
N
Maxim rotation scope of handle
am
E R
du
φX
nu
L
Se
G
35
20
B1
B
K
18
16
35 40
60 80
Y V P P P
Y1 1000A 1250A 1600A
A1
C
A
≥ 2000A
J 142
2000
φX N
L
50
40
220
250
K
B
400
25
20
40 50
80 120
P Y R 120 120 120
V
Y1 A1 2000A 2500A 3150A
C A
Specification NH40SZ Mounting dimensions

Ith/Poles A A1 B C E J K L N P R V φX Y Y1
16A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
32A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
40A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
63A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
80A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
100A/3、4 380 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
125A/3 405 270 135 240 208 255 95/110 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
160A/3 405 270 135 240 208 255 95/110 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
125A/4 435 300 135 240 208 285 95/110 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
160A/4 435 300 135 240 208 285 95/110 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
200A/3 416 310 170 240 208 293 95/110 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
250A/3 416 310 170 240 208 293 95/110 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
200A/4 466 360 170 240 208 343 95/110 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
250A/4 466 360 170 240 208 343 95/110 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
315A/3 465 375 240 315 270 355 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
400A/3 465 375 240 315 270 355 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
630A/3 465 375 260 315 270 355 180 11 95 65 40 37.5 13 84 195
315A/4 525 435 240 315 270 415 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
400A/4 525 435 240 315 270 415 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
630A/4 525 435 260 315 270 415 180 11 95 65 40 37.5 13 84 195
1000A/3 887 515 310 368 320 490 220 13 88 120 60 198 13 108 252
1250A/3 887 515 360 368 320 490 220 13 88 120 70 198 13 108 252
1600A/3 887 515 360 368 320 490 220 13 88 120 80 198 13 108 252
1000A/4 1007 635 310 368 320 610 220 13 88 120 60 198 13 108 252
1250A/4 1007 635 360 368 320 610 220 13 88 120 70 198 13 108 252
1600A/4 1007 635 360 368 320 610 220 13 88 120 80 198 13 108 252
2000A/4 1007 633 455 562 495 467 220 11 85 147 80 33 13 226 457
2500A/4 1007 633 455 562 495 467 220 11 85 152 120 33 13 230 462
3200A/4 1007 633 505 562 495 467 220 11 85 152 120 33 13 230 462
M-59 > >>

Switch and Socket-outlet Switch and Socket-outlet
NEW7 NE2
NEW7 NE2
British ranges British ranges
switch and switch and
socket-outlet socket-outlet
Page N-01 Page N-33
NEW7G NEG1
NEW7G NEG1
British ranges Hotel ranges
switch and switch and
socket-outlet socket-outlet
Page N-06 Page N-34
NEW9E
AC30
European ranges
socket
NEW9E
European ranges
switch and
socket-outlet Page N-35
Page N-11
NEH1
NEW9
NEH1
Accessories
NEW9
American ranges
switch and
socket-outlet Page N-36
Page N-18
NEF1
NEW5F
NEF1
Exhaust fan
NEW5F
European ranges
switch and
socket-outlet
Page N-37
Page N-25
British ranges
NEW 7 Series
A slim, trim profile, pleasing to the eye, clean and refined, NEW7 and NEW7G series is a concise movement that perfectly
complements the modern lifestyle. Inspired by the simple, elegant minimalism of the supremely influential primitive simplicity
movement, every piece in this robustly constructed range expresses a pleasing form following function.
Unmarred by visible fastenings, the sleek clean fluent lines present a cool refined touch of style to almost any interior.
Makes the word of Central Asia and Arabia known so much.
Standard switches Technical Specifications

Standard(s): IEC60669
Rating: 250V AC, 50HZ, 10A
Switch type: Single pole (Cat.027, 029 DP switch 20A)
Fixing centers: 60mm
Working temperature: -20°C~50°C
Applies: Suits Cat. NEH1-001A Flush box.
Standard sockets Technical Specifications

Standard(s): BS1363
Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,13A,5A,15A
socket type: Single pole
Switch and Socket-outlet
NEW7
NEW7-001B NEW7-005B
1-gang 1-way switch 2-gang 1-way switch
10A 250V 10A 250V
NEW7-003B NEW7-007B
1-gang 2-way switch 2-gang 2-way switch
10A 250V 10A 250V
NEW7-001 NEW7-005 NEW7-013 NEW7-029

1-gang 1-way switch 2-gang 1-way switch 4-gang 1-way switch DP Switch with Indication
10A 250V 10A 250V 10A 250V Lamp 20A 250V
NEW7-003 NEW7-007 NEW7-015

1-gang 2-way switch 2-gang 2-way switch 4-gang 2-way switch
10A 250V 10A 250V 10A 250V
NEW7-401K NEW7-123
1-gang 2-pin Switched 1-gang 3-pin Multi-functional
Socket 10A 250V Socket
NEW7-423K NEW7-427KL NEW7-429KL

1-gang 3-pin Switched 1-gang 3-pin Switched Socket 1-gang 3-pin Switched Socket
Socket 5A 250V with Indication Lamp with Indication Lamp
13A 250V 15A 250V
N
NEW7-41910
2-gang 3-pin Switched
Socket 13A 250V
> >> N-02

NEW7
NEW 7 - 001B NEW7-005B NEW7-001 NEW7-009

N EW 7-003B NEW7-007B NEW7-003 NEW7-011
Switches 10A 250V~ CE Certificated

Fully Assembled Light Switch Single Pole
Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, vertical mounting size: 60mm
Pack Colour Cat No. Wall Switch 10A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Wall Switch 10A 250V~
10*10 ●white New7-001B 1 gang 1 way switch 15*10 ●white 15*10 1 gang 1 way switch
Pack Colour Cat No. DP Switch 20A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Doorbell Pushbutton Switch
10A 250V~
12*10 ●white New7-027 DP switch 20A 250V

10*10 ●white New7-302B Doorbell pushbutton switch
DP switch with neon

12*10 ●white New7-029 Doorbell pushbutton switch+
12*10 ●white New7-323
20A 250V
"please do not disturb" switch
Pack Colour Cat No. Blank Plate
40*10 ●white New7-951 blank plate
N-03 > >>

NEW7
NEW7- 102 NEW7-401KL NEW 7-423K NEW7-427K
Fully Assembled socket Fully Assembled socket

Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, mounting size: 60mm Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, mounting size: 60mm
comform to BS 1363: part .2
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet Pack Colour Cat No. Switch mechanisms
Euro-US type socket outlet 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-925 10*12 ●white New7-423K 2 pin+N 5A 250V~
2 pin 10A 250V~
Euro-US type switched socket 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-926 outlet 10*12 ●white New7-423KL with neon
2 pin 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 5A 250V~
Euro-US type switched socket 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-92610 outlet with neon 10*12 ●white New7-429K
2 pin+N 15A 250V~
2 pin 10A 250V~
2 gang Euro-US type socket 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-927 outlet 10*12 ●white New7-429KL with neon
2 pin+N 15A 250V~
2 pin 10A 250V~
Universal socket outlet 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-92710 10*12 ●white New7-427K 2 pin+N 13A 250V~
2P+N 10A 250V~
Universal socket outlet with 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 New9-928 2 pin socket 10*12 New7-427KL with neon
●white ●white 2 pin+N 13A 250V~
2P+N 10A 250V~
Switched universal socket Double Switched socket

10*12 ●white New9-929 outlet 6*10 ●white New7-41910 2 pin+N 13A 250V~
86mm*146mm
2P+N 10A 250V~
socket outlet 4 Pin, three shaver socket 110V/240V

15*10 ●white New9-930 1*24 ●white New7-300
phase, 16A 250V 86mm*146mm
New9-931 socket outlet 4 Pin, three

15*10 ●white 1*36 ●white New7-301
phase, 25A 250V Shaver socket 110V/240V
New9-932
> >> N-04

NEW7
NEW 7 - 305 NEW7-319 NEW7-201 NEW7-203
Fully Assembled Switch Single Pole Fully Assembled socket outlet

Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm,
vertical mounting size: 60mm vertical mounting size: 60mm
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Pack Colour Cat No. Communication switch
8*10 ●white New7-305 Light dimmer 400W 10*12 ●white New7-201 TV terminal socket outlet
Broadband TV terminal
New7-314 Light dimmer with Switch socket outlet
8*10 ●white 10*10 ●white New7-210
100W
Broadband TV terminal
Fan speed control switch
New7-306 socket with distributor
8*10 ●white 250W 10*10 ●white New7-211
1 gang Telephone outlet

4 pin RJ11
8*10 ●white New7-315 with Switch 100W 10*12 ●white New7-203
sound & light control time 2 gang Telephone outlet

delay switch 100W 4 pin RJ11
1 gang Computer outlet

Touching time delay switch
New7-307 8 pin Rj45
10*10 ●white 100W 10*12 ●white New7-204

Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch 8 pin RJ45
10*12 ●white New7-205
10*10 ●white New7-319 Gallery LED lamp
TV terminal socket +
10*10 New7-207 telephonel socket 2 pin
●white
Computer outlet 8 pin
10*10 ●white New7-212
N-05 > >>

British ranges
NEW 7G Series
A slim, trim profile, pleasing to the eye, clean and refined, NEW7 and NEW7G series is a concise movement that perfectly
complements the modern lifestyle. Inspired by the simple, elegant minimalism of the supremely influential primitive simplicity
movement, every piece in this robustly constructed range expresses a pleasing form following function.
Unmarred by visible fastenings, the sleek clean fluent lines present a cool refined touch of style to almost any interior.
Makes the word of Central Asia and Arabia known so much.

Standard(s): IEC60669
Switch type: Single pole (Cat.027, 029 DP switch 20A)

Standard(s): BS1363
Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,13A,5A,15A
NEW7G
NEW7-G001 NEW7-G005 NEW7-G009

10A 250V 10A 250V 10A 250V

10A 250V 10A 250V 10A 250V

DP Switch with Indication 1-gang 2-pin Socket 2-gang 2-pin Socket
lamp 20A 250V 10A 250V 10A 250V
NEW7-G423K NEW7-G423KL
1-gang 3-pin Switched 1-gang 3-pin Switched Socket
Socket 5A 250V with Indication Lamp
5A 250V
NEW7-G427K NEW7-G427KL
1-gang 3-pin Switched 1-gang 3-pin Switched Socket
Socket 13A 250V with Indication Lamp
13A 250V
N-07 > >>

NEW7G
NEW 7 - G001B NEW7-G005B NEW7-G001 NEW7-G00900

NEW7-G003B NEW7-G007B NEW7-G003 NEW7-G01000
Switches 10A 250V~ CE Certificated

Fully Assembled Light Switch Single Pole
Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, vertical mounting size: 60mm
10*10 ●white New7-G001B 1 gang 1 way switch 15*10 ●white New7-G001 1 gang 1 way switch
10*10 ●white New7-G011B 15*10 ●white New7-G011 3 gang 2 way switch

3 gang 2 way switch
15*10 ●white New7-G00900 5 gang 1 way switch

Pack Colour Cat No. DP Switch 20A 250V~
15*10 ●white New7-G01000 5 gang 2 way switch
12*10 ●white New7-G027 DP switch 20A 250V
Cat No. Doorbell Pushbutton Switch

Pack Colour
10A 250V~
DP switch with neon

12*10 ●white New7-G029 10*10 ●white New7-G302B Doorbell pushbutton switch
20A 250V
N
Pack Colour Cat No. Blank Plate Doorbell pushbutton switch+
12*10 ●white New7-G323 "please do not disturb" switch
40*10 ●white New7-G951
> >> N-08

NEW7G
NEW7- G102 NEW7-G401KL NEW 7-G423K NEW7-G427KL
Fully Assembledsocket Fully Assembled socket

Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, mounting size: 60mm Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, mounting size: 60mm
comform to BS 1363: part .2
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet 10A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet
●white New7-G102 Euro-US type socket outlet ●white New7-G423K 1 gang Switched socket
10*12 10*12
2 pin 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 5A 250V~
Euro-US type switched 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New7-G401K socket outlet 10*12 ●white New7-G423KL with neon
2 pin 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 5A 250V~
Euro-US type switched 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New7-G401KL socket outlet with neon 10*12 ●white New7-G429K
2 pin+N 15A 250V~
2 pin 10A 250V~
2 gang Euro-US type 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New7-G104 socket outlet 10*12 ●white New7-G429KL with neon
2 pin 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 15A 250V~
New7-G123 Universal socket outlet New7-G427K 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white 10*12 ●white
2P+N 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 13A 250V~
Universal socket outlet with 1 gang Switched socket

10*12 ●white New7-G123 2 pin socket 10*12 ●white New7-G427K with neon
2P+N 10A 250V~ 2 pin+N 13A 250V~
Switched universal socket

10*12 ●white New7-G442 outlet
2P+N 10A 250V~
N-09 > >>

NEW7G
NEW7-G305 NEW7-G45000 NEW7-G201 NEW7-G203
Fully Assembled Electronic Switch Fully Assembled socket

Complete with surrounds 86mm*86mm Complete with surrounds 86mm*86mm
mounting size: 60mm mounting size: 60mm
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Pack Colour Cat No. Communication Socket Outlet
8*10 ●white New7-G305 Light dimmer 400W 10*12 ●white New7-G201 TV terminal socket outlet
Switched Light dimmer Broadband TV terminal

8*10 ●white New7-G45000 10*10 ●white New7-G210
100W socket outlet
Fan speed control switch Broadband TV terminal

250W socket with distributor
Switched Fan speed control 1 gang Telephone outlet

switch 250W 4 pin RJ11
sound & light control time 2 gang Telephone outlet

delay switch 100W 4 pin RJ11
Touching time delay switch 1 gang Computer outlet

100W 8 pin RJ45

8 pin RJ45
telephonel socket 2 pin
Computer outlet 8 pin
> >> N-10

NEW 9E Series
The aesthetic and decent appearance with elegant border, is both classics and contemporary, so it looks at home anywhere,
in almost any kind of environment where style and quality are important, as well as stylish.
In addition to impressive looks, it inherits traditional size of 120mm. It offers the users the peace mind and comfort that they have
safest range of wiring devices available installed in their surroundings.

Standard(s): IEC
Switch type: Single pole
Fixing centers: 83.5mm
Applies: Vertical or horizontal mounting. Suits Cat. NEH1-004A Flush box.

Standard(s): IEC (Cat. F11400 & F11500 suits CEE )
Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,10A 15A
White Silver Champagne Black

Code “/S” Code “/X” Code “/B”
NEW9E
NEW9-E940B NEW9-E902001 NEW9-E942B NEW9-E946B NEW9-E947B NEW9-E948B
Front plates: white pure, matt silver, gold and black Front plates: white pure, matt silver, gold and black
For vertical mounting plate size: 70*120mm For vertical mounting plate size: 86*86mm
Mounting size: 83.5mm Mounting size: 60mm
Pack Colour Cat No. plates: 120*72mm Pack Colour Cat No. plates: 86*86mm
25*12 ●white New9-E940B 30*12 ●white New9-E946B

1 gang plate 1 gang plate
25*12 ●silver New9-E940B/S 30*12 ●silver New9-E946B/S
Space: 1*24mm high Space: 1*24mm high
25*12 gold New9-E940B/X 30*12 gold New9-E946B/X
25*12 ●black New9-E940B/B 30*12 ●black New9-E946B/B
25*12 ●white New9-E902001 30*12 ●white New9-E947B

25*12 ●silver New9-E902001/S 2 gang plate 30*12 ●silver New9-E947B/S 2 gang plate
25*12 gold New9-E902001/X Space: 1*48mm high 30*12 gold New9-E947B/X Space: 2*24mm high
25*12 ●black New9-E902001/B 30*12 ●black New9-E947B/B
25*12 ●white New9-E941B 30*12 ●white New9-E948B

25*12 ●silver New9-E941B/S 2 gang plate 30*12 ●silver New9-E948B/S
3 gang plate
25*12 gold New9-E941B/X Space: 2*24mm high 30*12 gold New9-E948B/X
Space: 3*24mm high
25*12 ●black New9-E941B/B 30*12 ●black New9-E948B/B
25*12 ●white New9-E942B

25*12 ●silver New9-E942B/S
3 gang plate
25*12 gold New9-E942B/X Space: 3*24mm high
25*12 ●black New9-E942B/B
12*12 ●white New9-E945B

12*12 ●silver New9-E945B/S
6 gang plate
12*12 gold New9-E945B/X Space: 2*3*24mm high
12*12 ●black New9-E945B/B
N-13 > >>

NEW9E
NEW9-E902 NEW9-E902B NEW9-E902C NEW9-E902E NEW9-E905
Switches 10A 250V~ CE Certificated Switches 10A 250V~ CE Certificated

Colours are available as in white pure, matt silver and gold Colours are available as in white pure, matt silver and gold
Pack Colour Cat No. Switch Module 10A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Switch Module 10A 250V~
48*12 ●white New9-E902 32*12 ●white New9-E902C

48*12 ●silver New9-E902/S 1 way switch module 32*12 ●silver New9-E902C/S 1 way switch module
48*12 gold New9-E902/X (24mm high) 32*12 gold New9-E902C/X (complete 36mm high)
48*12 ●black New9-E902/B 32*12 ●black New9-E902C/B
48*12 ●white New9-E904 32*12 ●white New9-E904C

48*12 ●silver New9-E904/S 2 way switch module 32*12 ●silver New9-E904C/S 2 way switch module
48*12 gold New9-E904/X (24mm high) 32*12 gold New9-E904C/X (complete 36mm high)
48*12 ●black New9-E904/B 32*12 ●black New9-E904C/B
16*12 ●white New9-E902B 32*12 ●white New9-E902E

16*12 ●silver New9-E902B/S 32*12 ●silver New9-E902E/S 1 way switch module
1 way switch module
16*12 gold 32*12 gold completed
New9-E902B/X (72mm high) New9-E902E/X
(36mm high)
16*12 ●black New9-E902B/B 32*12 ●black New9-E902E/B
16*12 ●white New9-E904B 32*12 ●white New9-E904E

16*12 ●silver New9-E904B/S 32*12 ●silver New9-E904E/S 2 way switch module
2 way switch module
16*12 gold 32*12 gold completed
New9-E904B/X (72mm high) New9-E904E/X
(36mm high)
16*12 ●black New9-E904B/B 32*12 ●black New9-E904E/B
48*12 ●white New9-E908 48*12 ●white New9-E905

Doorbell pushbutton
48*12 ●silver New9-E908/S 48*12 ●silver New9-E905/S
Multi way switch module switch Module
48*12 gold New9-E908/X 48*12 gold New9-E905/X
(24mm high) (24mm high)
48*12 ●black New9-E908/B 48*12 ●black New9-E905/B
> >> N-14

NEW9E
NEW9-E911 NEW9-E915 NEW9-E926 NEW9-E927
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket outlet Module Pack Colour Cat No. Blank Module
25*12 ●white New9-E911 Euro-US type socket 48*12 ●white New9-E934

25*12 ●silver New9-E911/S outlet Module 48*12 ●silver New9-E934/S blank plate module
25*12 gold New9-E911/X 2 pin 10A 250V 48*12 gold New9-E934/X (24mm high)
25*12 ●black New9-E911/B (24mm high) 48*12 ●black New9-E934/B
48*12 ●white New9-E915 Universal socket outlet

48*12 ●silver New9-E915/S module Communication Socket Outlet
Pack Colour Cat No.
48*12 gold New9-E915/X 2P+N 10A 250V Module
48*12 ●black New9-E915/B (48mm high)
12*12 ●white New9-E962
Broadband TV socket
12*12 ●silver New9-E962/S
with distributor Module
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Module 12*12 gold New9-E962/X
(72mm high)
12*12 ●white New9-E925 12*12 ●black New9-E962/B
12*12 ●silver New9-E925/S Air-conditioning switch
12*12 gold New9-E925/X module
●black New9-E925/B 3A (72mm high)
12*12 broadband TV outlet
12*12 gold New9-E924/X module
Light dimmer switch
12*12 ●silver New9-E926/S 12*12 ●black New9-E924/B (72mm high)
module
12*12 gold New9-E926/X 500W (72mm high)
12*12 ●black New9-E926/B
24*12 ●white New9-E92610 48*12 ●silver New9-E920/S TV terminal socket
Light dimmer switch
24*12 ●silver New9-E92610/S module
module 48*12 gold New9-E920/X
24*12 gold New9-E92610/X
100W (24mm high ) 48*12 ●black New9-E920/B (24mm high)
24*12 ●black New9-E92610/B
12*12 ●white New9-E927 48*12

Fan speed control ●white New9-E922
switch Module 48*12 ●silver New9-E922/S Telephone outlet module
12*12 gold New9-E927/X
12*12 ●black New9-E927/B 250W (72mm high) 48*12 gold 4 pin, RJ11 (24mm high)
New9-E922/X
24*12 ●white New9-E92710
24*12 ●silver New9-E92710/S Fan speed control
24*12 gold New9-E92710/X switch Module 48*12 ●white New9-E923
24*12 ●black New9-E92710/B 100W (24mm high)
48*12 ●silver New9-E923/S Computer outlet Module
12*12 ●white New9-E928 48*12 gold New9-E923/X 8 pin, RJ45 (24mm high)
12*12 ●silver New9-E928/S Touching time delay
12*12 gold New9-E928/X switch module
12*12 ●black New9-E928/B 100W (72mm high)

infrared Sensor time
delay switch module
12*12 gold New9-E929/X
100W (72mm high)

●silver sound & light control time
12*12 New9-E930/S
gold delay switch module
12*12 New9-E930/X
●black 100W (72mm high)
12*12 New9-E930/B
"please do not disturb"

24*12 New9-E931 switch module
-----
24*12 ----- New9-E932
"please clean up" switch
module (24mm high)
N-15 > >>

NEW9E
NEW9-E002A NEW9-E006A NEW9-E018A NEW9-E022A

Fully Assembled Light Switch Single Pole Fully Assembled Light Switch Single Pole
vertical mounting size: 83.5mm vertical mounting size: 83.5mm
Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver, gold and black Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver, gold and black
10*12 ●white New9-E002A 5*12 ●white New9-E014A

4 gang 1 way switch
10*12 ●silver New9-E002A/S 1 gang 1 way switch 5*12 ●silver New9-E014A/S
(1 *72mm high module) (2*2 *36mm high module)
10*12 gold New9-E002A/X 5*12 gold New9-E014A/X
10*12 ●black New9-E002A/B 5*12 ●black New9-E014A/B

10*12 ●silver New9-E004A/S 1 gang 2 way switch 5*12 ●silver New9-E016A/S 4 gang 2 way switch
10*12 gold New9-E004A/X (1 *72mm high module) 5*12 gold New9-E016A/X (2*2 *36mm high module)

10*12 gold New9-E006A/X (2 *36mm high module) 5*12 gold New9-E018A/X (1*2 *36mm+1*3*24 high
10*12 ●black New9-E006A/B 5*12 ●black New9-E018A/B module)

10*12 gold New9-E008A/X (2 *36mm high module) 5*12 gold New9-E020A/X (1*2 *36mm+1*3*24 high
10*12 ●black 5*12 ●black
New9-E008A/B New9-E020A/B module)

6 gang 1 way switch
10*12 gold New9-E010A/X (3 *24mm high module) 5*12 gold New9-E022A/X
(2*3 *24mm high module)

6 gang 2 way switch
10*12 gold New9-E012A/X (3 *24mm high module) 5*12 gold New9-E024A/X
(2*3 *24mm high module)
Pack Colour Cat No.

Doorbell Pushbutton Switch N
10A 250V~
10*12 ●white New9-E302A

10*12 ●silver New9-E302A/S Doorbell pushbutton
New9-E302A/X switch
10*12 gold
(1 *24mm high module)
10*12 ●black New9-E302A/B
> >> N-16

NEW9E
NEW9-E102A NEW9-E305A NEW9-E114001 NEW9-115001 NEW9-E201A
Fully Assembled Socket Fully Assembled Socket

Complete with surrounds, 120mm*70mm, vertical mounting size: Complete with surrounds, 120mm*70mm, vertical mounting size:
83.5mm 83.5mm
Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver, gold and black Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver, gold and black
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet 10A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet 16A 250V~
10*12 ●white New9-E102A Euro-US type socket 8*12 ●white New9-E114001

Schuko socket outlet
10*12 ●silver New9-E102A/S outlet 8*12 ●silver New9-E114001/S
German Standard
10*12 gold New9-E102A/X 2 pin 10A 250V~ 8*12 gold New9-E114001/X
2P+N 16A 250V~
10*12 ●black New9-E102A/B (1 *24mm high module) 8*12 ●black New9-E114001/B
10*12 ●white New9-E104A 2 gang Euro-US type 8*12 ●white New9-E115001

European socket outlet
10*12 ●silver New9-E104A/S socket outlet 8*12 ●silver New9-E115001/S
French Standard
10*12 gold New9-E104A/X 2 pin 10A 250V~ 8*12 gold New9-E115001/X
2P+N 16A 250V~
10*12 ●black New9-E104A/B (2*24mm high module) 8*12 ●black New9-E115001/B
10*12 ●white New9-E106A 3 gang Euro-US type

10*12 ●silver New9-E106A/S Pack Colour Cat No. Communication Socket Outlet
socket outlet
10*12 gold New9-E106A/X 2 pin 10A 250V~ 10*12 ●white New9-E201A
10*12 ●black New9-E106A/B (3*24mm high module) 10*12 ●silver New9-E201A/S TV terminal socket outlet
10*12 gold New9-E201A/X (1 *24mm high module)
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch

8*12 ●silver New9-E210A/S Broadband TV terminal
6*12 ●silver New9-E305A/S Light dimmer 500W
gold (1 *72mm high module) 8*12 gold New9-E210A/X socket outlet
6*12 New9-E305A/X
8*12 ●black New9-E210A/B (1 *72mm high module)

8*12 New9-E30510A/S Light dimmer 100W 8*12 ●silver New9-E211A/S Broadband TV terminal
●silver
(1 *24mm high module) 8*12 gold New9-E211A/X socket with distributor
8*12 gold New9-E30510A/X

Telephone outlet
6*12 ●silver New9-E306A/S Fan speed control switch 12*12 ●silver New9-E203A/S
250W 4 pin RJ11 (1 *24mm
6*12 gold New9-E306A/X 12*12 gold New9-E203A/X
(1 *72mm high module) high module)

8*12 ●silver New9-E30610A/S Fan speed control switch 10*12 ●silver New9-E204A/S
Computer outlet
100W 10*12 gold New9-E204A/X
8*12 gold New9-E30610A/X 8 pin RJ45 (1 *24mm
8*12 ●black New9-E30610A/B 10*12 ●black New9-E204A/B high module)
N-18 > >>

NEW 9 Series
No tie of border, free and generous! Nothing brightens you universe like these simple pleasures from this range.
With a perfect and balance of design and function, it includes Philippines a/c socket and traditional appreciation of America.
Created to achieve Variety, quality and choice, NEW9 series brightens your life and day and night.

Standard(s): IEC

Standard(s): IEC
Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,10A,15A,
White
17
NEW9
NEW9-940B NEW9-941B NEW9-945B NEW9-946B NEW9-947B NEW9-948B
For vertical mounting plate size: 70*120mm For vertical mounting plate size: 86*86mm
Mounting size: 83.5mm Mounting size: 60mm
Pack Colour Cat No. Plates: 120*72mm Pack Colour Cat No. plates: 86*86mm

30*12 ●white New9-940B Space: 1*24mm high 30*12 ●white New9-946B Space: 1*24mm high

30*12 ●white New9-902001 30*12 ●white New9-947B
Space: 1*48mm high Space: 2*24mm high
3 gang plate
2 gang plate
30*12 ●white New9-941B 30*12 ●white New9-948B Space: 3*24mm high
Space: 2*24mm high
30*12 ●white New9-942B 3 gang plate

Space: 3*24mm high
6gang plate
15*12 ●white New9-945B Space: 2*3*24mm high
> >> N-20

NEW9
NEW9-902 NEW9-902B NEW9-902C NEW9-902E
1 way switch module 1 way switch module

48*12 ●white New9-902 32*12 ●white New9-902C
(24mm high) (complete 36mm high)

48*12 ●white New9-904 32*12 ●white New9-904C
(24mm high) (complete 36mm high)
1 way switch module

1 way switch module
16*12 ●white New9-902B 32*12 ●white New9-902E completed
(72mm high)
(36mm high)
2 way switch module

2 way switch module
16*12 ●white New9-904B 32*12 ●white New9-904E completed
(72mm high)
(36mm high)
Doorbell pushbutton
Multi way switch module
switch Module
(24mm high)
(24mm high)
N-21 > >>

NEW9
NEW9-911 NEW9-925 NEW9-962 NEW9-922
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket outlet Module Pack Colour Cat No. Blank Module
Euro-US type socket

blank plate module
48*12 ●white New9-911 outlet Module 48*12 ●white New9-934
(24mm high)
2 pin 10A 250V
(24mm high)
2P+N 10A 250V Communication Socket Outlet

48*12 ●white New9-915 Pack Colour Cat No.
(48mm high) Module
Broadband TV socket
12*12 ●white New9-962
with distributor Module
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Module
(72mm high)
Air-conditioning switch
12*12 ●white New9-925 module
broadband TV outlet
3A (72mm high)
Light dimmer switch (72mm high)
New9-926 module
12*12 ●white
500W (72mm high)
TV terminal socket
Light dimmer switch 48*12 ●white New9-920
module
100W (24mm high ) (24mm high)
Fan speed control

12*12 ●white New9-927 switch Module Telephone outlet module
250W (72mm high) 48*12 ●white New9-922 4 pin, RJ11
(24mm high)
Fan speed control
24*12 ●white New9-92710 switch Module
100W (24mm high)
Computer outlet Module
48*12 ●white New9-923 8 pin, RJ45

Touching time delay
12*12 ●white New9-928 switch module (24mm high)
100W (72mm high)
infrared Sensor time

12*12 ●white New9-929 delay switch module N
100W (72mm high)
sound & light control time

12*12 ●white New9-930 delay switch module
100W (72mm high)
"please do not disturb"

24*12 New9-931 switch module
●white "please clean up" switch
24*12 New9-932
module (24mm high)
> >> N-22

NEW9
NEW9-002A NEW9-006A NEW9-014A NEW9-018A NEW9-022A

Complete with surrounds, 70*120mm, Complete with surrounds, 116*120mm
10*12 ●white New9-002A 1 gang 1 way switch 5*12 ●white New9-014A 4 gang 1 way switch
1 gang 2 way switch 4 gang 2 way switch
10*12 ●white New9-004A
(1 *72mm high module) 5*12 ●white New9-016A (2*2 *36mm high module)

10*12 ●white New9-006A 5*12 ●white New9-018A
10*12 ●white New9-008A (2 *36mm high module) 5*12 ●white New9-020A (1*2 *36mm+1*3*24
high module)

10*12 ●white New9-010A 5*12 ●white New9-022A
6 gang 2 way switch
3 gang 2 way switch
10*12 ●white New9-012A 5*12 ●white New9-024A (2*3 *24mm high
module)
Doorbell Pushbutton Switch

Pack Colour Cat No.
10a 250v~
Doorbell pushbutton
10*12 ●white New9-302A switch
N-23 > >>

NEW9
NEW9-102A NEW9-104A NEW9-106A NEW9-201A NEW9-210A NEW9-203A
Fully Assembled Socket Fully Assembled Socket

Complete with surrounds, 70*120mmmm, Complete with surrounds, 70*120mmmm,
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket Outlet 10A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Communication Socket Outlet
Euro-US type socket

outlet TV terminal socket outlet
2 pin 10A 250V~
2 gang Euro-US type Broadband TV terminal

socket outlet
10*12 ●white ●white
8*12 New9-210A socket outlet
New9-104A 2 pin 10A 250V~
(2*24mm high module) (1 *72mm high module)
3 gang Euro-US type Broadband TV terminal

socket outlet
10*12 ●white New9-106A 8*12 ●white New9-211A socket with distributor
2 pin 10A 250V~
(3*24mm high module) (1 *72mm high module)
Telephone outlet
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch 12*12 ●white New9-203A 4 pin RJ11 (1 *24mm high
module)
Light dimmer 500W
Computer outlet
10*12 ●white New9-204A 8 pin RJ45 (1 *24mm high
module)
Light dimmer 100W

8*12 ●white New9-30510A

6*12 ●white New9-306A 250W
(1 *72mm high module) N

8*12 ●white New9-30610A 100W
> >> N-24

NEW 5F Series
The aesthetic and decent appearance with elegant border, is both classics and contemporary, so it looks at home anywhere,
in almost any kind of environment where style and quality are important, as well as stylish.
In addition to impressive looks, it inherits traditional size of 118mm. It offers the users the peace mind and comfort that they have
safest range of wiring devices available installed in their surroundings.

Standard(s): IEC

Standard(s): IEC (Cat. F11400 & F11500 suits CEE )
Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,10A 16A
Applies:Vertical or horizontal mounting. Suits Cat. NEH1-004A Flush box.
White Silver Gold

Code “/S” Code “/X”
NEW7
NEW5-F001D/X NEW5-F005 NEW5-F009D

1-gang 1-way Switch 2-gang 1-way Switch 3-gang 1-way Switch
(button, 72mm)16A 250V 16A 250V (button, 90mm)16A 250V
NEW5-F003D/X NEW5-F007 NEW5-F011D

1-gang 2-way Switch 2-gang 2-way Switch 3-gang 2-way Switch
(button, 72mm)16A 250V 16A 250V (button, 90mm)16A 250V
NEW5-F11400 NEW5-F11500
1-gang 3-pin German-style 1-gang 3-pin French-style
Socket 16A 250V Socket 16A 250V
NEW5-F123 NEW5-F125
1-gang 3-pin Multi-functional 2-gang 3-pin Multi-functional
Socket 10A 250V Socket 10A 250V
NEW5-F001B/S NEW5-F306
1-gang 1-way Switch 1-gang Fan Speed Control
(button, 90mm)16A 250V Switch 250W
> >> N-26

NEW5F
Front plates: white pure, matt silver and gold

For horizontal mounting plate size: 118mm*72mm
Pack Colour Cat No. Plates
20*10 ●white New5-F940 1 gang plate

20*10 ●silver New5-F940/S Space: 1*36mm wide,
high 43mm
20*10 gold New5-F940/X
20*10 ●white New5-F941

2 gang plate
20*10 ●silver New5-F941/S Space: 2*36mm wide,
high 43mm

6 gang plate
10*12 ●silver New5-F945/S Space: 2*2*36mm wide,
10*12 high 43mm
gold New5-F945/X
socket outlet 10A 250V~

colours as white pure, matt silver and gold
Pack Colour Cat No. Socket outlet Module

Euro-US type socket outlet
12*20 ●silver New5-F911/S Module 2 pin 10A 250V
(36mm wide)
NEW5-F940 12*20 gold New5-F911/X

Universal socket outlet module
12*20 ●silver New5-F915/S 2P+N 10A 250V
(36mm wide)
NEW5-F941
NEW5-F945
NEW5-F911
NEW5-F915
N-27 > >>

NEW5F
NEW5-F902D NEW5-F902F NEW5-F905 NEW5-F908

NEW5-F904D NEW5-F904F
Switch module 16A 250V~

colours as white pure, matt silver and gold
12*20 ●white New5-F902 1 way switch module 6*20 ●white New5-F902G

1 way switch module
12*20 ●silver New5-F902/S (36mm wide) 6*20 ●silver New5-F902G/S completed
(complete 72mm wide)
12*20 gold New5-F902/X 6*20 gold New5-F902G/X
12*20 ●white New5-F904 6*20 ●white New5-F904G

12*20 ●silver New5-F904/S 6*20 ●silver New5-F904G/S completed
(36mm wide)
gold New5-F904/X gold New5-F904G/X (complete 72mm wide)
12*20 6*20
6*20 ●white New5-F902D 12*20 ●white New5-F905

1 way switch module Doorbell pushbutton
6*20 ●silver New5-F902D/S 12*20 ●silver New5-F905/S switch Module
(72mm wide)
gold New5-F902D/X gold New5-F905/X (36mm wide)
6*20 12*20
6*20 ●white New5-F904D 6*20 ●white New5-F905B Doorbell pushbutton

2 way switch module
6*20 ●silver New5-F904D/S 6*20 ●silver New5-F905B/S switch Module
(72mm wide)
gold New5-F904D/X gold New5-F905B/X (72mm wide)
6*20 6*20
12*20 ●white New5-F902E 1 way switch module 12*20 ●white New5-F908

Multi way switch module
●silver completed 12*20 ●silver
12*20 New5-F902E/S New5-F908/S
(complete 36mm wide) (36mm wide)
12*20 gold New5-F902E/X 12*20 gold New5-F908/X
12*20 ●white New5-F904E 2 way switch module

12*20 ●silver New5-F904E/S completed
gold New5-F904E/X (complete 36mm wide)

12*20
6*20 ●white New5-F902F 1 way switch module

6*20 ●silver New5-F902F/S completed
6*20 gold New5-F902F/X (complete 72mm wide)
6*20 ●white
New5-F904F 2 way switch module
6*20 ●silver New5-F904F/S completed
6*20 gold New5-F904F/X (complete 72mm wide) N
> >> N-28

NEW5F
NEW 5-F925 NEW 5-F92710 NEW5-F928 NEW5-F931 New5-F920 New5-F923
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Module Communication Socket Outlet
Pack Colour Cat No.
Module
10*18 ●white New5-F925 M Air-conditioning switch
6*20
L
●white New5-F962
F
OF
10*18 ●silver module Broadband TV socket

New5-F925/S
6*20 ●silver New5-F962/S with distributor Module
10*18 gold New5-F925/X 3A (36mm wide)
gold (72mm wide)
6*20 New5-F962/X
4*20 ●white New5-F926 Light dimmer switch
4*20 ●silver New5-F926/S module broadband TV outlet
6*20 ●silver New5-F924/S module
gold New5-F926/X 500W (72mm wide)
4*20 New5-F924/X (72mm wide)
6*20 gold
10*20 ●white New5-F92610 Light dimmer switch
10*20 ●silver New5-F92610/S module
12*20 New5-F920/S TV terminal socket module
●silver
10*20 gold New5-F92610/X 100W (36mm wide ) (36mm wide)
4*20 ●white New5-F927 Fan speed control
12*20 ●white New5-F922 Telephone outlet module
4*20 ●silver New5-F927/S switch Module
12*20 ●silver New5-F922/S 4 pin, Rj11
4*20 gold New5-F927/X 250W (72mm wide) (36mm wide)
10*20 ●white New5-F92710 Fan speed control 12*20 ●white New5-F923
10*20 ●silver New5-F92710/S switch Module Computer outlet Module
12*20 ●silver New5-F923/S
10*20 gold New5-F92710/X 100W (36mm wide) 8 pin, RJ45
12*20 gold New5-F923/X (36mm wide)
5*20 ●white New5-F928 Touching time delay
5*20 ●silver New5-F928/S switch module
5*20 gold New5-F928/X 100W (72mm wide)
5*20 ●white New5-F929 infrared Sensor time

5*20 ●silver delay switch module
New5-F929/S
5*20 gold New5-F929/X 100W (72mm wide)
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch Module

sound & light control time
5*20 ●silver New5-F930/S delay switch module
gold New5-F930/X 100W (72mm wide)
5*20
----- New5-F931 "please do not disturb"

12*20
switch module
"please clean up" switch

module
12*20 ----- New5-F932 (36mm wide)
N-29 > >>

NEW5F
NEW 5-F001 NEW 5-F001B NEW5-F005B NEW5-F009D

NEW5-F003 NEW5-F003B NEW5-F007B NEW5-F011D

horizontal mounting size: 83.5mm horizontal mounting size: 83.5mm
Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver and gold Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver and gold
Pack Colour Cat No. Wall switches 16A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Wall switches 16A 250V~
●white New5-F001 8*10 ●white New5-F007

10*10
10*10
●silver New5-F001/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F007/S
(1 *36mm wide module) (2 *36mm wide module)
10*10 gold New5-F001/X 8*10 gold New5-F007/X
10*10 ●white New5-F003 8*10 ●white New5-F005B

10*10 ●silver New5-F003/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F005B/S
10*10 gold New5-F003/X 8*10 gold New5-F005B/X
10*10 ●white New5-F001B 8*10 ●white New5-F007B

10*10 ●silver New5-F001B/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F007B/S
10*10 gold New5-F001B/X 8*10 gold New5-F007B/X
10*10 ●white New5-F003B 8*10 ●white New5-F009

10*10 ●silver New5-F003B/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F009/S
10*10 gold New5-F003B/X 8*10 gold New5-F009/X
10*10 ●white New5-F001D 8*10 ●white New5-F011

10*10 ●silver New5-F001D/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F011/S
10*10 gold New5-F001D/X 8*10 gold New5-F011/X
10*10 ●white New5-F003D 8*10 ●white New5-F009D

10*10 ●silver New5-F003D/S 8*10 ●silver New5-F009D/S
10*10 gold New5-F003D/X 8*10 gold New5-F009D/X
8*10 ●white New5-F005 8*10 ●white New5-F011D

8*10 ●silver 2 gang 1 way switch 8*10 ●silver 3 gang 2 way switch
New5-F005/S New5-F011D/S
8*10 gold New5-F005/X (2 *36mm wide module) 8*10 gold New5-F011D/X (3 *30mm wide module)
> >> N-30

NEW5F
NEW5-F302 NEW5-F305 NEW5-F201 NEW5-F203
Fully Assembled Switch Fully Assembled socket outlet

Doorbell pushbutton switch

Pack Colour Cat No. 16A 250V~ Pack Colour Cat No. Communication Socket Outlet
10*10 ●white New5-F302 Doorbell pushbutton 12*10 ●white New5-F201

10*10 ●silver New5-F302/S switch 12*10 TV terminal socket outlet
●silver New5-F201/S
10*10 gold New5-F302/X (1 *36mm wide module) (1 *36mm wide module)
10*10 New5-F302B 8*10 ●white New5-F210 Broadband TV terminal

Doorbell pushbutton
10*10 ----- New5-F302B/S switch 8*10 ●silver New5-F210/S socket outlet
10*10 New5-F302B/X (1 *72mm wide module) 8*10 New5-F211/X (1 *72mm wide module)
gold
10*10 ●white New5-F203 Telephone outle

10*10 ●silver New5-F203/S 4 pin RJ11
Pack Colour Cat No. Electronic Switch
10*10 gold New5-F203/X (1 *36mm wide module)
●white New5-F305
6*10 Light dimmer 500W
●silver New5-F305/S 10*10 ●white New5-F204 Computer outlet
6*10 (1 *72mm wide module)
gold New5-F305/X 10*10 ●silver New5-F204/S
6*10 8 pin RJ45
8*10 ●white New5-F30510
8*10 ●silver New5-F30510/S Light dimmer 100W
6*10 ●white New5-F306 Fan speed control switch

6*10 ●silver New5-F306/S 250W
8*10 ●white New5-F30610 Fan speed control switch

8*10 ●silver New5-F30610/S 100W
N-31 > >>

NEW5F
NEW5-F102 NEW5-F123 NEW5-F11400 New5-F11500
Socket- outlet Socket- outlet

Fully Assembled socket-outlet Single Pole Fully Assembled socket-outlet Single Pole
Pack Colour Cat No. socket-outlet Pack Colour Cat No. socket-outlet
●white New5-F102 Euro-US type socket outlet 8*10 ●white New5-F11400 Schuko socket outlet
12*20
12*20
●silver New5-F102/S 2 pin 10A 250V~ 8*10 ●silver New5-F11400/S German Standard
gold New5-F102/X (1 *36mm wide module) 8*10 gold New5-F11400/X 2P+N 16A 250V~
12*20
10*10 ●white New5-F123 Universal socket outlet 8*10 ●white New5-F11500 European socket outlet
10*10 ●silver New5-F123/S 2P+N 10A 250V~ 8*10 ●silver New5-F11500/S French Standard
10*10 gold New5-F123/X (1 *36mm wide module) 8*10 gold New5-F11500/X 2P+N 16A 250V~
10*10 2 gang universal socket

●white New5-F125
10*10 outlet
●silver New5-F125/S
2P+N 10A 250V~
(2 *36mm wide module)
> >> N-32

NE2
NE2-RCD 13A NE2-RCD 13A(M)
Tripping Indication:
This will be in response to both positive and negative cycles.
If the wiring of live and neutral reversed or, neutral or earth connection lost, unit trip happens.
It reacts to dc earth fault currents sensitively.
Please do this simple test prior to using by each time

1. Press the green reset (R) button, then the window indicator will turn on.
2. And press the white test button (T), while window indicator will be off. It means the RCD has operated successfully.
3. Re-press the reset (R) button and it can be used.
Note: If the window indicator returns to be white when the socket has been reset and plugged into by something,
it means the appliance or the cable lead may be faulty, and should be checked by a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT TO YOUR PROTECTION

Electricity is dangerous and any precautionary measures of RCD would never be replaced. Always inspection or repair to equipment
will be done before unplugging from mains supply.
It is forbidden that electrical devices will be tampered with by children.
If you want to replace a general socket by this safety socket, please switch off the power source, in order to isolate the existing socket.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated Voltage: 240V 50Hz
Maximum Operating Current: 13A
Tripping Current: 30mA
Tripping Time: 40mS (typical)
RCD Contact Break: Double Pole
Cable Capacity: 6mm2
Pack Colour Cat No. RCD Socket 13A 250V~
Double RCD protected

20 ●white NE2-RCD 13A socket/plastic
2 pin+N 13A 250V~
Double RCD protected

20 metal NE2-RCD 13A(M) socket/matel cord
2 pin+N 13A 250V~
N-33 > >>

NEG1
NEG1-0310 NEG1-0320 NEG1-0330
Fully Assembled IC Card Operated Switch

Rating: 30A,6600W
Complete with surrounds, 86mm*86mm, mounting size: 60mm
Plates are available as in white pure, matt silver and gold
Pack Colour Cat No. DIN-rail socket
6*10 ●white NEG1-0310 IC Card Operated switch

6*10 ●silver NEG1-0310/S 插卡取电
INSERT CARD FOR POWER
(general type)
6*10 gold NEG1-0310/X Max.30A, 6600W

(contacting type)
6*10 gold NEG1-0320/X Max.30A, 6600W

(inductive type)
6*10 gold NEG1-0330/X Max.30A 6600W, 125Khz
> >> N-34

AC30
AC30-103 AC30-111 AC30-112
AC30 modular socket can be used together with our other modular
products for Connection of mobile devices, tools or electric and electronic
non-modular equipments directly inside civil and industrial switchboards.
Standard(s): IEC 60884-1

Rating: 250VAC,50HZ ,16A
Pack Colour Cat No. DIN-rail socket
12*15 ----- AC30-103 Modular DIN-rail socket

2P 10A 250V~
Modular DIN-rail socket

5*20 ----- AC30-111 German standard
2P+N 16A 250V~
Modular DIN-rail socket

5*20 ----- AC30-112 French standard
2P+N 16A 250V~
N-35 > >>

NEH1
NEH1-004A NEH1-201 NEH1-103 NEH1-105
Pack Cat No. mounting box Pack Cat No. weatherproof box
flush type mounting box

mounting size: 60mm weatherproof box
200 NEH1-001A suitable for NEW7,NEW7G, 60 NEH1-103 suitable for NEW7,NEW7G,
NEG1 series NEG1 series

mounting size: 116mm weatherproof box
128 NEH1-002 suitable for NEW7-41910, 50 NEH1-105 suitable for NEW5F, NEW9E
NE2-RCD and NEW9 series

mounting size: 83.5mm
120 NEH1-003A suitable for plate NEW9-E945B
and plate NEW9-945B

mounting size: 83.5mm
200 NEH1-004A
suitable for NEW5F, NEW9E
and NEW9 series
flush type mounting box for

shaver socket only
160 NEH1-007 mounting size: 60mm
suitable for NEW7-300,
NEW7-G300, NEW9-300
flush type mounting box for

shaver socket only
140 NEH1-008 mounting size: 83.5mm
suitable for NEW7-301,
NEW7-G301, NEW9-301
surface-mounting box
250 NEH1-201 mounting size: 60mm
suitable for NEW7,NEW7G,
NEG1 series
> >> N-36

NEF1
NEF1-100 NEF1-125 NEF1-125C NEF1-260

NEF1-101
NEF1-103
Pack Cat No. exhaust fan Pack Cat No. exhaust fan
6 NEF1-100 Square ducted exhaust fan 6 NEF1-125 Circular ducted exhaust fan
6 NEF1-101 Square ducted exhaust fan 6 NEF1-125C Circular ducted exhaust fan
4 NEF1-103 Square ducted exhaust fan 6 NEF1-260 Square straight line exhaust fan
Rated Rated Rated Exhaust Plate Mounting holes

Noise Rpm
Type voltage frequency Input capacity size dimensions
(dB) （R/min)
(V ) (Hz) power(W) (m3/min) (mm) (mm)
NEF1-100 220 50 25 2.3 45 250×250 210×210 1200

NEF1-101 220 50 30 3 45 300×300 230×230 1200
NEF1-103 220 50 35 7.8 48 365×365 315×315 1200
NEF1-125 220 50 25 2.3 5 250×250 210×210 1200
NEF1-125C 220 50 25 2.3 45 250×250 210×210 1200
NEF1-260 200 50 35 11 48 365×366 315×315 1200
N-37 > >>

Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches Connection Terminals
Fuses
RT14 Cylinder RT28 Fuse RT29 Cylinder

Cap Fuse Disconnector Cap Fuse
Page 01 Page 03 Page 05
RT36 Enclosed HDLRT0 Enclosed RL1 Screw

Tube Type Fuse Tube Type Fuse Type Fuse
with Knife Contacts
HDLRS0 Fuse HDLRS3 Fuse RS1 Hi-rap Fuse
RGS□ Fuse RO21、RO22、 R019 Fuse

RO24、RO26
Spire Type Fuse
RT12 RT15 RS71 (NGT) type

Bolt-Linked Bolt-linked Fuse for Protection
Fuse Fuse of Semiconductor
Parts
Fuse Carrier
Page 28
Travel Switches
YBLX-ME8000 YBLX-WL YBLX-HL/5000

Travel Switch Travel Switch Travel Switch
YBLX-CK YBLX-P1 YBLX-K1

YBLX-1
YBLX-K2 YBLX-K3 Travel Switch
Travel Switch Travel Switch
Page 55
Page 51 Page 53
YBLX-2 YBLX-3 YBLX-4


Travel Switches


Page 66 Page 68
Page 65

YBLX-33 YBLX-44 YBLX-JW2、

Travel Switch Breaking Limitator JBLW-JW2B
Travel Switch
YBLX-X2
Travel Switch
Page 78
Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-2 YBLXW-3 YBLXW-5/11

Micro-gap Micro-gap Micro-gap
Switch Switch Switch

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-6/11 YBLXW-18 YBLXW-028、

(ZL15G、D4MC) Arc-extinguishing 028A、029、
Micro-gap Switch Micro-gap Switch 029A
Micro-gap Switch
YBLXW-JLXK1/11 YBLXW-N/A(D2F) YBLXW-N/B

Micro-gap Switch Micro-gap Switch Micro-gap Switch
YBLXW-N/C YBLXW-N/D
Micro-gap Boat-shaped
Switch Micro-gap
Switch
Page 98 Page 99
Limit Switches
YBLX-11/2
Dual-Circuits
Limit Switch
Page 100
Foot Pedal Switches
YBLT-1 YBLT-2, YBLT-3, YBLT-EKW/5A/B

Foot Pedal YBLT-4 Foot Pedal Switch
Switch Foot Pedal
Switch
YBLT-YDT1 YBLT-FS/1, YBLT-JDK Foot YBLT-FS/201

Foot Pedal YBLT-FS/2, Pedal Switch Foot Pedal Switch
Switch YBLT-FS/3
Foot Pedal Switch
Page 104 Page 105 Page 106 Page 107

Pull-cord Switches
YBLX-KLT2/Ⅱ
Pull-cord Switch
Page 108
Universal Change-over Switchs
LW2B Universal LW5D Universal LW6 Universal LW8 Universal

Change-over Change-over Change-over Change-over
Switch Switch Switch Switch
LW112 (LW12) LW15-16 LW32 Universal

Universal Universal Change-over
Change-over Change-over Switch
Switch Switch
Combination Switches
HZ5 HZ5B HZ10 HZ12

Combination Combination Combination Combination
Switch Switch Switch Switch
HZ12A
Combination
Switch
Page 141
Tow-directions Switch
HY23
Two-directions
Switch
Page 144
Switches for Welding Machine
KDH Switch for

Welding Machine
Page 146
CZ0 DC Contactor
CZ0 DC contactor
Page 148
Connection Terminals
JF5 SAK JXB JCUK

Connection Connecion Connection Connection
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
JH1 JH5 JH6 TD, JH9

Connection Connection Connection Connection
JH10 NJD TK TB
Terminals Terminal Terminal Terminal
TC TZ1 D1 JX2
JD0 MJ mini busbar

Connection
Terminal
Page 174 Page 174

Fuses
RT14 Cylinder Cap Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric rating: AC380V, up to 63A;
1.2 Application: for protection of the power distribution
apparatus against over-load and short circuit;
1.3 The combination of the fuse with impinger and the fuse
type disconnector can be used for phase-failure protection
of motors.
1.4 stand: IEC 60269.
2. Type Designation
RT 14 -□ / □ □
Rated current of fuse body (A)
Number. of poles
Rated current of fuse (A)
Fuse code
3. Basic Parameters and Dimensions

3.1 Accessories of the fuses
Rated Rated Dimension

Modle voltage (V) current (A) Poles Mounting type
A B C L H
RT14-20 380 20 Single - 20 - 69 46 Screw, guide rail mounting
RT14-32 380 32 Single 166 26 55 104 56 Screw mounting
RT14-63 380 63 Single 196 33.5 64 124 65 Screw mounting
RT14-32/3P 380 3×32 Three - 78 55 104 100 Screw mounting
RT14-63/3P 380 3×63 Three - 100.5 64 124 110 Screw mounting
3.2 Fuse body
Matched Rated Rated Dissipated Rated breaking

Modle Dimension(G×K) fuse holder voltage (V) current (A) power Impinger Weight
capacity (kA)
RT14-20 10×38 RT28-32, RT14-20 380 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 20 ≤3 100 No 0.009

RT14-32 14×51 RT14-32, RT28-63 380 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 ≤5 100 No 0.022
RT14-63 22×58 RT14-63, RT29-125 380 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 ≤9.5 100 No 0.06
O-01 > >>

Fuses
3.3 Over vier of fue body matched with fuse holder RT14, RT28, RT29
Model of Matched fuse

fuse holder Rated voltage (V)
Dimension Model of fuse Phase Current (A)
RT14-20 10×38 380 RT14-20 Single 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 20
RT14-32 14×51 380 RT14-32, RT28-63 Single 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
RT14-63 22×58 380 RT14-63, RT29-125 Single 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
RT29-16 8.5×31.5 380 RT29-16 Single 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16
RT28-32
10×38 380 RT14-20, RT28-32 Single 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
RT29-32
RT28-63
14×51 380 RT14-32, RT28-63, RT29-63 Single 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
RT29-63
RT29-125 22×58 380 RT14-63, RT29-125 Single 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125
RT14-20 RT14-32, RT14-63
C
H
H
L B
L B A
RT14-20 fuse base RT14-32, RT14-63 fuse base
RT14-32/3P, RT14-63/3P Fuse size G×K

K
H
C
3.5
26.5 36 36
G
L B
RT14-32/3P, RT14-63/3P fuse base Rt14 fuse base
> >> O-02

Fuses
RT28 Fuse Disconnector
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC380V/500V, up to 125A;
1.2 Application: for protection of power distribution apparatus
against over-load and short circuit;
1.3 The fusing indication device (code "X") of the fuse
disconnector is composed of Neon lamp and resistance;
1.4 Standard: IEC 60269.
2. Type Designation
RT 28 □ □/□ □
Rated current of fuse body
Poles number (no indication for single pole)

No. of poles (blank: 1P)
Signal device (Code "X")
Rated current of fuse
EU Fuse code
3. Overall and Mounting Dimensions

RT28-32
L1
L1
L2
L2
L5
L5
L4
L3
L6
L6
L4
L3
RT28-32(X) NRT28-32
O-03 > >>

Fuses
E
D
K
35
B F G
A RT28-32
RT28-63
NRT28-63 RT28 fase link
Matched Rated current Dimension (mm)

Model Phase
fuse holder of fuse (A) L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
RT28-32(X) RT14-20(≤20), RT28-32 2,4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 1P/2P/3P 77 61.5 83 79 35 18 38 10
RT28-63(X) RT14-32(≤32), RT28-63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 1P/2P/3P 110 80 106 103 35 26 51 14
NRT28-32 RT14-20(≤20), RT28-32 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 1P/2P/3P 79 62 80 78 35 18 38 10
RT28-63 RT28-63≤63A 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 1P/2P/3P 100 78 115 108 35 26 51 14
NRT28-63 NRT28-63≤63A 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 1P/2P/3P 100 78 115 108 35 26 51 14
NRT28-125 RT28-125≤125A 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 1P/2P/3P 104 78 134 125 35 36 58 22
> >> O-04

Fuses
RT29 Cylinder Cap Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC500V, up to 125A;
1.3 The combination of the fuse with impinger and fuse type
disconnector can be used for phase-failure protection of
motors. Time delay fuse (aM) can be used for protection of
motor starting;
1.4 standard: IEC 60269.
2. Type Designation
RT 29 -□ / □
Fuse code
3. Main Technical Parameters and Dimensions

3.1 Fuse body
Rated Rated Power Breaking Dimension(mm)
Model consumption capacity Weight (Kg)
voltage (V) current (A) (W) (kA) B×A
RT29-16 500V 2，4，6，8，10，16 ≤2.5 100 8.5×31.5 0.0045
RT28-32 500V 2，4，6，8，10，16，20，25，32 ≤3 100 10×38 0.009
RT28-63 500V 10，16，20，25，32，40，50，63 ≤5 100 14×51 0.022
RT29-125 500V 25，32，40，50，63，80，100，125 ≤9.5 100 22×58 0.06
2.1 Fuse holder
Model Matched fuse holder Rated current (A) Weight (Kg)

RT29-16 RT29-16 16 0.035
RT29-16D RT29-16D 16 0.040
RT29-32 RT14-20, RT28-32 32 0.06
RT29-63 RT28-63 63 0.07
RT29-125 RT14-63(≤63A), RT29-125 125 0.13
RT29-32
56
A
35
M5 φB
22.5
80 RT29-16, RT28-32
RT28-63,RT29-125
O-05 > >>

Fuses
RT29-63
37
M5
90 28
RT29-16
47
32
M4
18
71
RT29-16D
47
32
10.5
71 18
RT29-125
50
M6
108 35
O
> >> O-06

Fuses
RT36 Enclosed Tube Type Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC690V, up to 1000A;
1.2 Application: For protection of electric apparatus against
over-load and short circuit;
1.3 Features: Compact design, light weight, low power
consumption and high breaking capacity;
2. Type Designation
RT 36 -□□/□
Size
Fuse code
EU
3. Technical Data
Specifications Rated current (A) Rated voltage (V) Rated power (W) Weight (kg) Breaking capacity (kA)
4 500 1.5 0.12 120
6 500 1.6 0.12 120
10 500 1.7 0.12 120
16 500 2.0 0.12 120
20 500 2.5 0.12 120
25 500 3.1 0.12 120
32 500 3.5 0.12 120
36 500 3.8 0.12 120
40 500 4.0 0.12 120
50 500 5.3 0.12 120
63 500 6.1 0.12 120
80 500 6.9 0.12 120
RT36-00C, NT00C, R030A
(Base: RT36-00) 100 500 10.0 0.12 120
4 500/690 1.5 0.15 120/50
6 500/690 1.6 0.15 120/50
10 500/690 1.7 0.15 120/50
16 500/690 2.0 0.15 120/50
20 500/690 2.5 0.15 120/50
25 500/690 3.1 0.15 120/50
32 500/690 3.5 0.15 120/50
36 500/690 3.8 0.15 120/50
RT36-00, RT16-00(NT00) 40 500/690 4.0 0.15 120/50
O-07 > >>

Fuses
Specifications Rated current (A) Rated voltage (V) Rated power (W) Weight (kg) Breaking capacity (kA)
50 500/690 5.3 0.15 120/50
63 500/690 6.1 0.15 120/50
80 500/690 6.9 0.15 120/50
100 500/690 10.0 0.15 120/50
125 500/690 9.6 0.15 120/50
RT36-00, RT16-00(NT00) 160 500/690 12.0 0.15 120/50
4 500/690 1.7 0.2 120/50
6 500/690 2.0 0.2 120/50
10 500/690 1.8 0.2 120/50
20 500/690 3.0 0.2 120/50
25 500/690 3.5 0.2 120/50
32 500/690 4.05 0.2 120/50
36 500/690 4.0 0.2 120/50
40 500/690 5.1 0.2 120/50
50 500/690 7.25 0.2 120/50
63 500/690 8.1 0.2 120/50
80 500/600 10.26 0.2 120/50
100 500/690 12.58 0.2 120/50
125 500/690 15.62 0.2 120/50
RT36-0, RT16-0(NT0) 160 500/690 16.0 0.2 120/50
80 500/690 8.35 0.36 120/50
100 500/690 12.05 0.36 120/50
125 500/690 13.46 0.36 120/50
160 500/690 16.53 0.36 120/50
200 500/690 20.8 0.36 120/50
224 500/690 22.69 0.36 120/50
RT36-1, RT16-1(NT1) 250 500/690 23.0 0.36 120/50
125 500/690 21.7 0.85 120/50
160 500/690 22.7 0.85 120/50
200 500/690 26.8 0.85 120/50
224 500/690 28.9 0.85 120/50
250 500/690 28.9 0.85 120/50
300 500/690 32.0 0.85 120/50
315 500/690 32.45 0.85 120/50
RT36-2, RT16-2(NT2) 355 500/690 33.66 120/50
400 500/690 34.0 120/50
315 500/690 34.45 0.85 120/50
355 500/690 35.96 0.85 120/50
400 500/690 38.09 0.85 120/50
425 500/690 40.20 0.85 120/50
500 500/690 45.23 0.85 120/50
RT36-3, RT16-3(NT3) 630 500/690 48.0 0.85 120/50
800 500/690 75.08 1.95 120
1000 500/690 90.0 1.95 120

RT36-4,RT16-4(NT4)
160 500/690 12 0.15 120/50

O
NRT36-00, NH00
> >> O-08

Fuses
4.1 Dimension of fuse body
a
f
10
e2
b
e1
c
2.5
o
10 n
g
m
Dimension RT36-00C RT36-00 RT36-0 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-3 RT36-4 NRT36-00

a 78.5 78.5 125 135 150 150 200 78.5
b 35 35 35 40 48 60 83 35
c 15 15 15 21 27 33 50 15
e1 45 45 45 48 58 67 96 45
e2 20 29 29 48 58 67 88 29
f 49 49 68 68 68 68 79 49
g 10 10 11.5 12 13 14 20 11.5
m - - - - - - 150 -
n - - - - - - 16 -
o - - - - - - 32 -
4.2 Dimension of fuse holder
s
v
c2
c1
m
d
a
g2
g2 g1
e
i
b
Dimension RT36-00 RT36-0 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-3 RT36-4 NRT36-00

a 30 33 58 64 64 96 30
b 118 170 200 225 250 304 120
c1 60 73 82 98 105 145 60
c2 85 93 96 112 120 165 85
d 0 0 30 30 30 45 0
e 25 25 25 25 25 30 25
g1 8 16 15 17 17 4 8
g2 8.3 7.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 13 7.5
i 100 150 175 200 210 260 100
m 25 38 38 40 45 47.5 25
s M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16 M8
u 25 25 25 30 40 45 25
O-09 > >>

Fuses
HDLRT0 Enclosed Tube Type
Fuse with Knife Contacts
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, AC380V/DC400V, up to 1000A;
2. Type Designation
HDL RT0 -□/□
Packing full-sealed tube type fuse
Company code
3. Technical Data
Rated current (A) Rated breaking capacity Rated power (W)

Rated
Model voltage(V) Fuse Rated received Rated dissipated
holder Fuse body I1 (kA) COSφ powerof fuse holder power of fuse body
HDLRT0-100 100 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100 50 0.1~0.2 ≥12 ≤12
HDLRT0-200 200 80, 100, 120, 150, 200 50 0.1~0.2 ≥32 ≤23
HDLRT0-400 400(380) 400 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 50 0.1~0.2 ≥45 ≤34
HDLRT0-600 600 300, 400, 500, 600 50 0.1~0.2 ≥60 ≤48
HDLRT0-1000 1000 700, 800, 1000 50 0.1~0.2 ≥90 ≤90

4.1 Overall dimension of fuse body
F
G
B
E
A
C
O
> >> O-10

Fuses
Rated current of Dimension(mm)
Model fuse body
A B C D E F G
HDLRT0-100 100 124 67 41.5 41.5 6 52 18
HDLRT0-200 200 135 67 46 46 6 57 22.5
HDLRT0-400 400 143 67 56 56 6 67 29.5
HDLRT0-600 600 160 67 66 66 6 77 36
HDLRT0-1000 1000 280 90 88 88 6 102 47
4.2 Overall dimension of fuse holder
K
H
φ
E
D
C
B
A
F I
G J
Rated current of Dimension(mm)

Model
fuse body φ
A B C D E F G H I J K
HDLRT0-100 100 180 160 80 20 30 20 55 15 32 73 M8 φ10
HDLRT0-200 200 200 175 80 20 30 25 60 15 33 85 M10 φ10
HDLRT0-400 400 215 185 80 20 30 30 70 15 33 92 M12 φ10
HDLRT0-600 600 254 220 80 20 30 38 80 20 38 118 M16 φ10
HDLRT0-1000 1000 350 300 88 50 40 48 90 15 42 148 M20 φ13
O-11 > >>

Fuses
RL1 Screw Type Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC400V (380V), up to 200A;
1.2 Application: for protection of electric circuits;
2. Type Designation
R L 1-□/□
Rated current of fuse holder (A)
Spire type
Fuse
3. Technical Data
Fusing rated current ≤6 10 15 20 25 32 50 60 80 100 200

Fusing dissipated power 2.3 2.6 2.8 3.3 4.0 5.2 6.5 7.0 8.0 9.0 13.6
Note: The situation is allowed that the value doesn't exceed 1.2 times of these data.
Rated Rated current of Rated current Rated breaking

Model voltage (V) fuse accessories (A) of fuse (A) capacity (kA) COSφ
RL1-15 15 2, 4, 6, 10, 15 50 0.1~0.2

RL1-60 380 60 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60 50 0.1~0.2
RL1-100 100 60, 80, 100 50 0.1~0.2
400
RL1-200 200 100, 150, 200 50 0.1~0.2

E C
M
A
Rated current of
Model A B C D E φ
fuse accessories(A)
＋0.55
O
RL1-15 15 63±2.4 39±2 62±2.4 28±0.8 24±0.8 5 －0.2
＋0.5
RL1-60 60 78±2.5 55±2.4 77±2.5 40±1.0 34±1.0 6 －0.4
＋0.5
RL1-100 100 118±2.5 82±2.8 113±2.5 54±1.2 46±1.0 8 －0.4
RL1-200 200 155±2.4 105±2 107±2.4 60±1 60±1 10±0.75
> >> O-12

Fuses
HDLRS0 Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, up to 500V, up to 1200A;
1.2 Application: protect semiconductor apparatus and other
devices from short-circuit;
1.3 Standard: IEC 60269
2. Type Designation
HDL RS -□ - □ /□
0: protect
Fast fuse
Company code
3. Thechnicaal Data
Rated Rated Rated dissipated Rated breaking Weight

Model Specification
current (A) voltage (V) power(W) capacity (kA) (kg)
HDLRS0-50 30 250，500 ≤15 50 0.2

HDLRS0-50 50 250，500 ≤15 50 0.2
HDLRS0-100 80 250，500 ≤35 50 0.27, 0.34
HDLRS0-100 100 250，500 ≤35 50 0.27, 0.34
HDLRS0-150 150 250，500 ≤50 50 0.37, 0.47
RS0 HDLRS0-200 200 500 ≤50 50 0.37, 0.47
HDLRS0-350 200 500 ≤85 50 0.65
HDLRS0-350 250 500，750 ≤85 50 0.65
HDLRS0-400 320 500，750 ≤85 50 0.65
HDLRS0-400 350 250 ≤85 50 0.65
HDLRS0-480 480 250，500 ≤100 50 1.08
O-13 > >>

Fuses

(30~50A) (80~480A)
φ φ
A
B
A
B
D
D C C
Rated Rated Rated breaking Dimension

Model voltage (V) current (A) capacity (kA)
A B C D φ
HDLRS0-50 250 30, 50 50 115 100 25 45 7
HDLRS0-50 500 30, 50 50 135 120 25 45 7.5
HDLRS0-100 250 50, 80, 100 50 120 100 40 42.5 7×10.5
HDLRS0-100 500 50, 80, 100 50 140 120 40 42.5 7×10.5
HDLRS0-200 250 80, 150, 200 50 125 100 46 50 9×13.5
HDLRS0-200 500 80, 150, 200 50 145 120 46 50 9×13.5
HDLRS0-400 250 250, 350, 400 50 130 100 55 61 9×13.5
HDLRS0-400 500 200, 250, 320, 400 50 150 120 55 61 9×13.5
HDLRS0-400 750 250, 320, 400 50 150 120 55 61 9×13.5
HDLRS0-600 250 480, 600 50 135 100 66 72.5 13×19.5
HDLRS0-600 500 480, 600 50 155 120 66 72.5 13×19.5
> >> O-14

Fuses
HDLRS3 Fuse
1. General
2. Type Designation
HDL RS -□ - □ /□
S: protect controllable silicone components
Fast fuse
Company code
3. Technical Data
Rated Rated voltage Rated current of Max. Dissipated Rated breaking

voltage (V) of fuse (A) fuse body (A) power (W) capacity (kA)
50 10, 15, 30, 50 20 50

100 80, 100 50 50
150 150 60 50
500 200 200 70 50
300 250 85 50
500 300 85 50
500 500 100 50
250 200, 250 85 50
750 600 600 140 50
1200 700, 750, 300, 1000, 1200 170 50
Rated Rated current of

Model A B C D φ
voltage (V) fuse body (A)
HDLRS3-50 135±2.8 120±2.3 25±1.1 45±2.6 7±1.1
HDLRS3-100 10，15，30， 140±2.8 120±2.3 40±1.3 43±2.6 7±1.1×10.5±1.35
HDLRS-200 50，80，100 145±3.2 120±2.3 46±1.6 50±2.6 9±1.1×13.5±1.35
HDLRS3-350 500 150，200， 150±3.2 120±2.3 55±2.0 60±3.3 9±1.1×13.5±1.35
HDLRS3-480 250，300， 155±3.2 120±2.3 66±2.5 72±4.1 13±1.35×19.5±1.65
HDLRS3-600 500 172±3.6 146±3.2 66±2.5 66±3.3 13±1.35
HDLRS3-1000 173±3.6 136±2.8 85±3.1 91±5.0 17±1.35
O-15 > >>

Fuses
RS1 Hi-rap Fuse
1. General
2. Type Designation
RS 1 - □ / □
Size
Fast fuse
3. Technical Data
Model Rated voltage (V) Rated current (A) Weight (Kg)
RS14 500, 690(660) 0.5，1，2，3，4，6，8，10，16，20 0.0045

RS15 500, 690(660) 0.5，1，2，3，4，5，6，8，10，16，25，30，35 0.009
RS16 500, 690(660) 1，2，3，4，5，6，8，10，16，20，25，30，32，40，50，63 0.022
RS17 500, 690(660) 2，4，6，8，10，12，16，20，25，32，40，50，63，80，100 0.06

Fuse body Holder Model A B
RS14 RT29-16 RS14 31.5 8.5
RS15 RT14-20, RT28-32 RS15 38 10.3
RS16 RT14-32, RT28-63 RS16 51 14.3
RS17 RT14-63, RT29-125 RS17 58 22
B
O
A
> >> O-16

Fuses
RGS□ Fuse
1. General
2. Type Designation
RGS □□ / □
Fast fuse
3. Technical Data
Model Rated voltage(V) Rated current(A)
RGS11 500，690(660) 16，20，25，32，40，50，63，75
RGS12 500，690(660) 80，1000
RGS14 500，690(660) 5，10，15，20
RGS14B 500，690(660) 10，15，20，25
RGS16 500，690(660) 25，32，40
RGS17 500，690(660) 40，50，63，80，100
RGS4 690(660)，1000 10，16，25，35，55，75
RGS44 690(660)，1000 55，75，90，110，150
RGS7 690(660)，1000 80，100，150，200
RGS77 690(660)，1000 175，200，235，315，400
Note: If the fuse is equipped with an impinging device, append "Z" behind model.
O-17 > >>

Fuses
RGS4 RGS11、RGS12、RGS14、RGS17
RGS14、RGS14B、RGS16、RGS7
76.5 18
43.5 1.5
9
φ14.5
H
61
G
RGS44
20.5
A
C
94
B
46 12
12
φ16.5 φ16.5
32
21
6
71
E
RGS77
110
J
85
F
φ38.5
25.5
11
D
50.5 14 49
55.5
Dimension RGS11 RGS12 RGS14 RGS14B RGS16 RGS17 RGS7

A 54 80 46 72 75 97 115
B 38 56 32 63 82 77 90
C 22 23 25.5 54 51 58 63
D 16.5 26 8.5 8.5 14 22 37.6
E 12 19 6.5 6.5 12.5 20 25.5
F 18.5 31 10.5 10.5 15.5 25 42
G 9.5 12 6 6 9 13 15.8
H 7 9.5 4.5 4.5 6 9 10
J 1.5 3 1 1 1.5 2.5 3
> >> O-18

Fuses
RO21、RO22、RO24、RO26
Spire Type Fuse
1. General
1.1 Application: For protection of components of power distribution,
cables and conductors against over-load and short circuit;
1.2 Standard:IEC60269
2. Type Designation
RO □□ / □ □
Number of poles
Size
Spire type fuse
3. Technical Data
Model E16/RO24(27、28、29) E27/RO21(RL6-25) E33/RO22(RL6-63)
Rated voltage ~500V ~500V ~500V
Rated current of fuse 25A 25A 25A
Rated current of fuse body 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25A 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25A 35, 40, 50, 63A
Rated making & breaking capacity 50kA cosφ=0.1~0.2 50kA cosφ=0.1~0.2 50kA cosφ=0.1~0.2
Weight 0.15kg 0.20kg 0.35kg
3.1 3P
Specifications FB21(3J) FB22(3J)

Rated voltage ~500V ~500V
Rated current of fuse 3×25A 3×63A
Rated current of fuse body 2，4，6，10，16，20，25A 35，40，50，63A
Rated making & breaking capacity 50kA 50kA
Power factor cosφ 0.1~0.2 0.1~0.2
Weight 0.61kg 0.85kg
3.2 E18/R026
Specifications D01 D02

Rated voltage 400(380)V 400(380)V
Rated current of fuse 16A 63A
Rated current of fuse body 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 63A
Rated making & breaking capacity 50kA cosφ=0.1~0.2 50kA cosφ=0.1~0.2
Weight 0.11kg 0.15kg
O-19 > >>

Fuses
4.1 Fuse body dimension
Model A φⅠ φⅡ φⅢ
φⅠ
RO21-2，4，6A 50 21 14 6
φⅡ
RO21-8，10A 50 21 13 8
RO21-16A 50 21 13 10
A
RO21-20A 50 21 13 12
RO21-25A 50 21 13 14
φⅢ
RO22-35，40A 50 26 20 16
φⅣ RO22-50A 50 26 20 18
RO22-63A 50 26 20 20
φⅠ Model A φⅠ φⅡ φⅢ φⅣ
φⅡ RO26-2~10A 35 12 10 5 7
RO26-16A 38 12 10 5 9
RO26-20A 38 15 13.5 9 11
A
RO26-25A 38 15 13.5 9 12
RO26-35A 38 15 13.5 9 13
RO26-50A 38 15 13.5 9 14
φⅢ
RO26-63A 38 15 13.5 9 16
Model A φⅠ φⅡ φⅢ
φⅠ
RO24-2A 50 12.5 11.3 6
φⅡ RO24-4A 50 12.5 11.3 6
RO24-6A 50 12.5 11.3 6
RO24-10A 50 12.5 11.3 8
RO24-16A 50 12.5 11.3 10
A
RO24-20A 50 12.5 11.3 12

RO24-25A 50 12.5 11.3 12
RO27 50 12.5 11.5 8
φⅢ RO28 50 12.5 11.5 10
RO29 50 12.5 14 11.5
4.2 Dimension of fuse holder

E16/RO24(27、28、29)
26
φ26
55
33
22
> >> O-20

Fuses
E17/RO21
4.5
6.5
65
30
27
45
39
E33/RO22
34
80
88
37 44
48
A
E18/RO26-2~63A(D01、D02)
a 60
27
34
b
72
64
A 35
a b
FB21(3J)3×25 90 86
FB22(3J)3×63 105 100
O-21 > >>

Fuses
R019 Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, up to 60A;
1.2 Application: protect electric circuits from over-load and
short-circuit;
2. Type Designation
R0 19 -□ / □
Size
Fuse code
Model Rated voltage(V) Rated current(A)

RO19A 250 600 0.5，1，2，4，6，10，16，20，25，30
RO19B 250 600 0.5，1，2，4，6，10，16，20，25，30
RO19 250 600 0.5，1，2，4，6，10，16，20，25，30
RO19C 250 600 0.5，1，2，4，6，10，16，20，25，30，40，50，60
RO19D 250 600 0.5，1，2，4，6，10，16，20，25，30，40，50，60

B
Model A B
RO19A 78 21
RO19B 114 21
RO19 124 21 O
RO19C 140 27
RO19D 147 27
> >> O-22

Fuses
RT12 Bolt-Linked Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electrical ratings: AC415V, up to 100A;
1.2 Application: Protec power distribution apparatus from
over-load and short circuit;
2. Type Designation
RT 12-□ □ □
Code of fusing indicator

0: with indicator
1: without indicator
Fuse code
3. Main Technical Parameters
Rated Rated Rated dissipated Weight

Model
current(A) voltage(V) power(W) (kg)
RT12-20 2，4，6，10，16，20 415 <8 0.015

RT12-32 20，25，32 415 <4.75 0.06
RT12-63 32，40，50，63 415 <7.75 0.08
RT12-100 63，80，100 415 <10.5 0.14
4. Overall and Mounting Dimensions Fig 1
d
f
j g
k
b
h
e
Model a b d e f g h j k
RT12-20 36.5 14.5 56 9.2 1.5 44.5 4.2 5.5 14.5
RT12-32 57 24 86 11.2 1.5 73 5.5 7 25.5
RT12-63 58 27 91 13 1.6 73 5.5 7 28
RT12-100 70 37 111 20 3.2 94 8.7 9.5 38.5
O-23 > >>

Fuses
Fig 2
H
B
L
Model L B H
RT12-20 80 38 58
RT12-32 105 35 72
RT12-63 105 35 72
RT12-100 140 50 103
> >> O-24

Fuses
RT15 Bolt-linked Fuse
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: up to AC415V, up to 400A;
1.2 Application: Protect LV power distribution and transmission
system circuits of factories and power supply plants from
overload and short-circuit;
2. Type Designation
RT 15-□ □ □
Code of fusing indicator

0: without indicator
1: with indicator on its front side
2: on its side face
3: on its back side
Fuse code
3. Main Technical Parameters
Rated Rated Rated dissipated Weight

Model current(A) voltage(V) power(W) (kg)
RT15-100 40，50，63，80，100 415 ≤10.5 0.15

RT15-200 125，160，200 415 ≤22 0.25
RT15-315 250，315 415 ≤32 0.46
RT15-400 350，400 415 ≤40 －

As for fuse dimension, please see in fig1; for fuse base dimension, please see in fig2,
i f
h
a
g
c
Model a b c e f g h i
RT15-100 70 37 133 20 4 111 8.7 11
RT15-200 77 42 133 20 4 111 8.7 11
RT15-315 77 61 133 26 4.8 111 8.7 11
RT15-400 83 66 133 26 6.6 111 8.7 11
O-25 > >>

Fuses
RS71 (NGT) type Fuse for
Protection of Semiconductor Parts
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC380V~1000V and complete range
of current specifications;
1.2 Features: high breaking capacity, good current-limiting
property, stable operation and low power consumption;
1.3 RX1-1000 fusing indication device can be appended to
the fuse link for fusing indication and automatic alarm.
2. Type Designation
RS 711/□
Fast fuse
3. Feature
The fuse is characterised by high breaking capacity, good
current-limiting capability, low power consumption, etc. and
is an ideal back-up protection of semiconductor
components in switchgear .
4. Main Technical Parameters RS71, NGT

Similar Rated power
Pic Specifications Rated current (A) Rated voltage (V) Weight (Kg)
models consumption (W)
25 400(380), 690(660), 800 8.6 0.18
32 400(380), 690(660), 800 9.9 0.18
40 400(380), 690(660), 800 11.3 0.18
RS31 50 400(380), 690(660), 800 13.2 0.18
RS711B
HLS00 63 400(380), 690(660), 800 15.7 0.18
(NGT00)
80 400(380), 690(660), 800 18.7 0.18
100 400(380), 690(660), 800 22.6 0.18
125 400(380), 690(660), 800 27 0.18
160 400(380), 690(660), 800 40 0.18
100 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 34 0.47
RS711 RS32 125 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 36 0.47
(NGT1) RS6-1 160 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 40 0.47
200 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 46 0.47
250 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 55 0.47
200 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 47 0.69
250 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 53 0.69
RS712 RS33 280 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 56 0.69
(NGT2) RS6-2 315 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 62 0.69
355 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 67 0.69
400 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 75 0.69
355 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 65 0.92
400 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 72 0.92
RS713 RS34 450 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 75 0.92
(NGT3) RS6-3 500 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 83 0.92
560 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 92 0.92
630 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 105 0.92
RS714
700
800
400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000
400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000
120
145
1.95
1.95
O
(NGT4) RS39 900 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 160 1.95
1000 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 195 1.95
RS711BC (NGTC00) 1250 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 255 1.95

RT36-00
body RX1 body - 1000 - 0.015
holder
RX1 holder - 1000 - 0.04
> >> O-26

Fuses
RS71C, NGTC
Similar Rated power
Pic Specifications Rated current (A) Rated voltage (V) Weight (Kg)
models consumption (W)
25 400(380), 690(660), 800 8.6 0.18

32 400(380), 690(660), 800 9.9 0.18
40 400(380), 690(660), 800 11.3 0.18
RS711BC RT36-00 50 400(380), 690(660), 800 13.2 0.18
(NGTC00) (NT00) RS31 63 400(380), 690(660), 800 15.7 0.18
80 400(380), 690(660), 800 18.7 0.18
100 400(380), 690(660), 800 22.6 0.18
125 400(380), 690(660), 800 27 0.18
160 400(380), 690(660), 800 40 0.18
100 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 34 0.47
RS711C RT36-1 125 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 36 0.47
RS711C (NGTC1) RT36-1 (NT1) RS32
(NGTC1) 160 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 40 0.47
body holder
200 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 46 0.47
250 400(380), 690(660), 800, 1000 55 0.47
80 10.6
50
A
29
20
68 6
2.5 B
9 110
100 47.5
140
RS711B RS711, RS712, RS71
RS713C (NGTC3) RT36-3
body holder
Model A B
RS711 48 48
RS712 58 58
RS713 67 67
10 0-0.3
6 0-0.3
10 -1.0
2.5 0.5
0
0
95±1.75
112±1.75
50±0.6
32±0.6
15±0.5
RT36-4 79±1.5
RS714 (NGT4) 8±0.2
151±2
RS714C (NGTC4) holder 86.5±1.75
203±2.3
body RS714(NGT4)
O-27 > >>

Fuses
Fuse Carrier
1. General
It is mainly available for removing and replacement of RT36
series low-voltage fuses with high making & breaking capacity
in the circuit of rated voltage up to 1000V.
> >> O-28

Travel Switches
A glimpse of the category and code for domestic and foreign
commonly utilized limit switch's actuating head
Actuating
Rotating arm Adjustable
head type Free- Fork type
with adjustable metal
Plunger type Rotating arm divections (double roller)
Code Plunger type roller oscillating
with roller type with roller type 21、22、21S、22S
block type
Travel
switch
model
8166、
YBLX-ME8000 8111 8112、8122 8104 8108 8107
8169、8101
D、D1D、AD、 AD2、01D2、 CA2、01CA2、 CA12、ACA12、 NJ、 CL、 CA32、01CA32、
YBLX-WL
SD、D1SD、ASD WL-D2 ACA2 01CA12-2N 01NJ、ANJ ACL、HAL ACA32
YBLX-WLF5 D D2、D28 H2 H12 NJ HL
YBLX-HL/5000 5100 5200 5000 5030 5300A、5500 5050
YBLX-CK/S S101 S102 S131、S139 S141 S159
YBLX-CK/M M110 M102、M121 M115 M106
YBLX-CK/J J161 J167 J10511 J10541 J10559
P102、P121、
YBLX-CK/P P110 P118 P145 P106 P155
P128、P127
YBLX-CK/T T110 T102、T121 T118
YBLX-P1 B、C D、E、F G、H、J、K N、U R P、Q、V、W
YBLX-K3 20S/Z、21S/Z 20S/L、21S/L 20S/B、21S/B 20S/T、21S/T 20S/W 20S/J 20S/H1、H2、H3
YBLX-K1 311、311M 411、411M 111、111M 511、511M 211、211M
YBLX-19 001 111、121、131 212、222、232
YBLX-2 111、121、131 212、222、232
YBLX-4 11、12、11S、12S 511 21、22、21S、22S
YBLX-K2 001、311 101、411 M111、131 211、222
O-29 > >>

Travel Switches
Limit switch operating performances symbol and definitions
Operating force (OF) Force made on actuating head to activate switch contact
Reset force (RF) Force made on actuating head to make contact back to normal position
Travel force (TF) Force made to make actuating head move from free position to the limit.
Free position (FP) Actuating head's initial position without external force applied
Operating position (OP) Actuating head's position when contact rapidly moves to action contacting position
Actuating head's position when contact rapidly moves back to normal position
Reset position (RP)
from action contacting position
Total travel position (TTP) Actuating head's position at threshold
Passage travel (PT) Distance or angle passed by actuating head from free position to stop position
Over travel (OT) Distance or angle passed by actuating head beyond the action position
Margin distance (MD) Distance or angle from action position to reset position
Total travel (TT) Total distance or total angle of actuating head's action travel
RF FP PT
OF
MD R OF OT RP MD
RF TT
TT
PT
OT
FP OP TF TTP
OP
OP PT RP
TTP
> >> O-30

Travel Switches
YBLX-ME8000 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NO NO
NC NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX -ME / □
Ukraine
Operating mode
C R US LISTED USA Design sequence number
Travel switch
Improved product
Protection level IP52

Operating frequency Mechanical 120
(operations / minute) Electric 30
4
Mechanical life(operations) 60×10
4
Electrical life(operations) 30×10
Insulation resistance ≥5MΩ(DC500V)
Contact resistance ≤200mΩ (initial value)
Environmental temperature -5℃~+40℃

Between terminals of the same polarity (1140V)
Voltage withstand Between electrified components and earth (1890V)

Between terminals and un-electrified metal components (2500V)
Rated voltage(V) AC 380V DC220V
Rated current AC0.8A DC0.16A
Model Substituted model

(Recommended) Operating mode (production stopped)
YBLX-ME/8104 Rotating arm with roller YBLX-AZ/8104 YBLX-TZ/8104

YBLX-ME/8107 Adjustable rotating lever YBLX-AZ/8107 YBLX-TZ/8107
YBLX-ME/8108 Adjustable rolling pivoted arm YBLX-AZ/8108 YBLX-TZ/8108
YBLX-ME/8111 Vertical compression plunger type YBLX-AZ/8111 YBLX-TZ/8111
Vertical compression plunger type
YBLX-ME/8112 YBLX-AZ/8112 YBLX-TZ/8112
with horizontal roller
O-31 > >>

Travel Switches

(Recommended) Operating mode (production stopped)
Vertical compression plunger type

YBLX-ME/8122 YBLX-AZ/8122 YBLX-TZ/8122
with roller which at right awgles to the fix board
YBLX-ME/8166 Free-directions type I YBLX-AZ/8166 YBLX-TZ/8166
YBLX-ME/8169 Free-directions type II YBLX-AZ/8169 YBLX-TZ/8169
YBLX-AZ/8101 YBLX-TZ/8101
YBLX-ME/8101 Free-directions type III YBLX-ME/9101
YBLX-AZ/9101 YBLX-TZ/8101
Model Operating mode OF(max) RF(min) PT(max) OT(min) MD(max) TT

YBLX-ME/8104 Rotating arm with roller 12N 0.5N 35° 70° 10° 105°
YBLX-ME/8107 Adjustable rotating lever 12N 0.2-.5N 35° 70° 10° 105°
YBLX-ME/8108 Adjustable rotating arm with roller 12N 1.5N 35° 70° 10° 105°
YBLX-ME/8111 Vertical compression plunger type 12N 0.1-5N 5mm 2mm 0.7mm 7mm
Vertical compression plunger
YBLX-ME/8112 15N 1-5N 5mm 2mm 0.7mm 7mm
type with horizontal roller
Vertical compression plunger
YBLX-ME/8122
type with roller which at right 15N 1.5N 5mm 2mm 0.7mm 7mm
awgles to the fix board
BLX-ME/8166 Free-directions type I 12N -N 35° - - -
YBLX-ME/8169 Free-directions type II 12N -N 35° - - -
YBLX-ME/8101 Free-directions type III 12N -N 35° - - -
YBLX-ME/8104 YBLX-ME/8108
41.2±0.8 47.7±0.8
36.2±0.8 42.7±0.8
P30 33.5±0.8
φ18×7 φ18×7
20.5±0.8
L=30-70
10.2 M4 M4
10.2
2-M5
18.5
18.5
12.5
2.41±0.2 2.41±0.2
12.3
20.4 M3×6 M6
M3×6
±0.3 2·M3×23 2-M5
36.2±0.8
56±0.31
56±0.3
2·M3×23
64
2·M5
2.0 2-M5
14
14
7.5±0.2 21±0.2
7.5±0.2 21±0.2 15.1
15.1 28
28
25 20.4±0.3
38.1 (46.4)
> >> O-32

Travel Switches
5.5
36.3±0.8 10.2
φ2.6
3
(30~118)
M4
2-M5
26.5
10.2
+0.2
2-4.1_ 0
4
18.5 +0.2
2-4.1_ 0
12.5
20.4 M3×6
M6 2-M5
M3×6
56±0.3
2-M3×23
64
56±0.3
64
2-M3×23
2-M5
2-M5
14
14
7.5±0.2 21±0.2
21±0.2
15.1 28 7.5±0.2
20.4±0.3 15.1 28
25 25
(44.9)
10.2 φ12.5×3.8
10.2
φ12.5×3.8
14.8
14.8
38
38
2-M5 2-M5
+0.2
2-4.1_ 0 +0.2
2-4.1_ 0
4
±0.3 M3×6 ±0.3

20.4
20.4
M3×6
56±0.3
56±0.3
64
64
2-M3×23
2-M5 2-M3×23
2-M5
14
14
7.5±0.2 21±0.2
15.1 7.5±0.2 21±0.2
28 15.1 28
25
25
YBLX-ME/8166 YBLX-ME/8101 YBLX-ME/8169
10.2
φ3 10.2
10.2
41.5
φ1.2
51.5
51.5
φ5.8
100±1.5
100±0.3
100
2-M5
2-M5 2-M5
2-φ4.1+0.2
+0.2
2-4.1_ 0
+0.2
2-4.1_ 0 4
20.4±0.1
M3×6
20.4±0.3
M3×6 M3×6
56±0.3
56±0.3
64
20.4
56±0.3
64
64
±0.3
2-M3×23 2-M3×23
2-M3×23 2-MS
2-M5
14
14
14
21±0.2
15.1
7.5±0.2 21±0.2
7.5±0.2 21±0.2 15.1 7.5±0.2 28
28 15.1 25
25
25 28
O-33 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-WL Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NC) 2(NC)
2. Type Designation
YB LX -WL / □
Ukraine
Operating mode
Travel switch
Improved product

Operating frequency Mechanical: 120
(operations/minute) Electric: 30
Operating speed 0.001~1m/s
Mechanical life (operations) 60×104
Electric life (operations) 30×104
Contact resistance ≤200MΩ
Voltage withstands Between terminals of same polarity (1140V)
Between electric components and earth (1890V)
Rated voltage Between terminals and non-electric metalparts (2500V)
AC 380V DC220V

Operating mode
(Recommended) (production stopped)
YBLX-WL/01CA2 YBLX-WL/ACA2
YBLX-WL/CA2 Rotating arm with single roller TZ-5104
YBLX-WK/CA2/2 YBLX-WL/CA12/2
YBLX-WL/CA12 Adjustable rotating arm with single roller YBLX-WL/01CA12 YBLX-WL/ACA12 TZ-5108
YBLX-WL/D Compression plunger type YBLX-WL/01D YBLX-WL/AD TZ-5101 O
YBLX-WL/D2 Plunger type with roller YBLX-WL/01D2 YBLX-WL/AD2 TZ-5102
YBLX-WL/D3 Compression plunger type with round cap YBLX-WL/01D3 YBLX-WL/AD3 TZ-5109
> >> O-34

Travel Switches

Operating mode
(Recommended) (production stopped)
YBLX-WL/NJ Free-directions type I YBLX-WL/01NJ YBLX-WL/ANJ TZ-5106

YBLX-WL/NJ/2 Free-directions type II YBLX-WL/01NJ/2 YBLX-WL/ANJ/2
YBLX-WL/NJ/S2 Free-directions type III YBLX-WL/01NJ/S2 YBLX-WL/ANJ/S2 TZ-5169
YBLX-WL/CL Adjustable straight lever type YBLX-WL/01CL YBLX-WL/ACL TZ-5107
YBLX-WL/HAL4 Adjustable curved lever type YBLX-WL/01HAL4 YBLX-WL/AHAL4
Adjustable spring type
YBLX-WL/HAL5 YBLX-WL/01HAL5 YBLX-WL/AHAL5
(free-directions type IV)
YBLX-WL/ACA32/41 TZ-5105
YBLX-WL/01CA32/41
YBLX-WL/CA32/41 Rotating arm with two rollers YBLX-WL/CA32/43 TZ-5125
YBLX-WL/01CA32/43
YBLX-WL/ACA32/43 TZ-5135
Model Arm with roller
Operating
performance YBLX-WL/CA2 YBLX-WL/CA2/7 YBLX-WL/CA2/2N YBLX-WL/CA2/8
OF(max) 20
RF(min) 2.27N
PT(max) 45°
OT(min) 15°
MD(max) 12°
Model Arm with roller
Operating
performance YBLX-WL/CA2/31 YBLX-WL/GCA2 YBLX-WL/CA12 YBLX-WL/CA12/2N
OF(max) 20N
RF(min) 2.27N
PT(max) 45°
OT(min) 15°
MD(max) 12°
Model Flexible spring densely wound coil(free directions type)
Operating
performance YBLX-WL/NJ YBLX-WL/NJ30 YBLX-WL/NJ/2 YBLX-WL/NJ/S2
OF(max) 16N 16N 16N

RF(min) 0.28N
PT(max) 45° 45° 45°
OT(min)
MD(max)
O-35 > >>

Travel Switches
Model Adjustable level
Operating
performance YBLX-WL/CL YBLX-WL/CL/2N YBLX-WL/HAL4 YBLX-WL/HAL5
OF(max) 20N 20N 20N 20N

RF(min) 0.28N 0.28N 0.28N 0.28N
PT(max) 45° 45° 45° 45°
OT(min) 15° 15° 15° 15°
MD(max) 12° 10° 10° 10°
Plunger with Plunger with

Model Arm with two rollers Plunger single roller round cap
Operating YBLX-WL/CA32/41/43 YBLX-WL/D YBLX-WL/D2 YBLX-WL/D3

performance
OF(max) 25N 30 30N 30N

RF(min) - 9.1N 9.1N 9.1N
PT(max) 60° 7.5mm 7.5mm 7.5mm
OT(min) 10° 2mm 2mm 2mm
MD(max) - 1mm 1mm 1mm
OP(max) - 34±0.8mm 44±0.8mm 44.5±0.8mm
TTP(max) - 29.5° 39.5° 39.5°
> >> O-36

Travel Switches
YBLX-WL/CA2 YBLX-WL/CA12
max59
max67
53±1.5
60±15 φ17.5×7
41±1.5
13.1 φ17.5×7 13.1
4-M3.5×26.5
25.4 25.4
12.7 12.7 25~89 M5×16 internal

26.5 R38 4-M3.5×26.5 adjustable length senary-angle
25.4
25.4
14.7
+0.2
14.7 4-φ5.2_ 0
M5×12
(25)
internal
senary-
+0.2
4-φ5.2_ 0
58.7±0.2
angle
58.7±0.2
68.7
68.7
3-M4×13 3-M4×13
5
21.6 21.6 4-M6×15 (15.1)
±1.2 4-M6×15 ±1.2 ±0.2
±0.2
(4.9)
29.2 30.2
(4.9)
29.2 30.2
35 40±0.7
35 40±0.7 max42
max42
YBLX-WL/D2 YBLX-WL/D
13.1
12.7 PT
φ17×5
13.1
12.7 φ9
PT
R1
OP
4-M3.5×10
28
4-M3.5×10
19.9
OP
4-φ5.2+0.2
58.7±0.2
_
0
4-φ5.2+0.2
_
68.7
58.7±0.2
68.7
3-M4×13
M4×13
5
5
21.6 (15.1)
4-M6×15
±1.2 ±0.2 (15.1)
21.6
±1.2 4-M6
(4.9)
29.2 30.2 (4.9) ±0.2

29.2 30.2
35 40±0.7
35 40±0.7
max42
max42
YBLX-WL/NJ YBLX-WL/NJ/S2
φ
φ6.5 PT
13.1 M3×3 senary-angle

193±2.5
140±2.5
13.1
4-φ5.2+0.2
_
0
4-φ5.2+0.2
58.7±0.2
_
58.7±0.2
0
68.7
68.7
3-M4×13
3-M4×13
5
21.6 (15.1) 21.6

4-M6×15 4-M6×15 (15.1)
±1.2 ±0.2
(4.9)
29.2 30.2 ±1.2 ±0.2

(4.9)
29.2 30.2
35 40±0.7
35 40±0.7
max42
max42
O-37 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-WL/CL YBLX-WL/HAL4
最大55
46±1.5 9 φ3.2
54.5±1.5 8
350~380
Adjustable
13.1 φ3×160±0.2 12.8
Adjustable length
13.1
25~140
M8×12 25.4 25.4
internal 12.7
4-M3.5 12.7
senary-
(Length 26.5) M5×16
angle
internal
65
25.4
M5×12 senary-
25.4
internal 4-φ5.2+0.2
_ angle
14.7
0
14.7
senary-
angle
+0.2
4-φ5.2 _ 0
58.7±0.2
58.7±0.2
68.7
68.7
3-M4×13 3-M4×13
5
5
21.6 (15.1) 21.6 (15.1)
4-M6×15
±1.2 ±0.2 ±1.2 ±0.2
4-M6
(4.9)
29.2 30.2 30.2

29.2 (4.9)
35 40±0.7 35
max42 max42 40±0.7
YBLX-WL/NJ/2 YBLX-WL/HAL5
7.7
φ8 PT
φ2.3
54±1.5
412.5±2
13.1
140±2.5
13.1 26φ 25.4
76
12.7
M5×16
14.6±0.8
internal
25.4
senary-
angle
14.7
4-φ5.2+0.2
_
0
+0.2
4-φ5.2 _ 0
58.7±0.2
58.7±0.2
68.7
68.7
3-M4×13
3-M4×13
5
21.6 5
4-M6×15 (15.1) 21.6 4-M6×15 (15.1)
±1.2 ±0.2 ±1.2
29.2 ±0.2
30.2
(4.9)
29.2 30.2
(4.9)
35 40±0.7 35 40±0.7
max42 max42
YBLX-WL/D3 YBLX-WL/CA32/41
13.1
Max62.5
12.7 φ15.5 φ1/2
PT 56.4±3.5
42.8±3.5
13.1
2-φ17.5×7
25.4
OP
4-M3.5×10
90±3°
12.7
19.9
R38
4-M3.5×26.5
34.1
4-φ5.2+0.2
14.7
_
0
58.7±0.2
M5×16
(125)
68.7
internal
4-φ5.2+0.2
_
0
senary-
58.7±0.2
3-M4×13
68.7
angle
3-M4×13
5
5
±0.2
21.6 (15.1) 21.6

4-M6×15 4-M6×15
±1.2 ±0.2 (15.1)
±1.2
(4.9)
29.2 (4.9) 30.2 29.2 30.2
35 40±0.7 35 40±0.7
max42
max42
> >> O-38

Travel Switches
YBLX-HL/5000 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NC) 2(NC)
2. Type Designation
YB LX -HL / □
Ukraine
Operating mode
Travel switch
Improved product

Operating frequency Mechanical 120
(operations minute) Electric 30
Operating speed 0.005~0.5m/s
4
Electrical life(operations) 30×10
Contact resistance ≤200MΩ (initial value)
Between terminals of same polarity (1140V)
Between terminals and non-electrifed metal components (2500V)
Rated voltage (V) AC380V DC220V
YBLX- YBLX- YBLX- YBLX- YBLX- YBLX-

Operating Model
performances HL/5000 HL/5030 HL/5050 HL/5100 HL/5200 HL/5500
OF(max) 16N 16N 16N 20N 20°

RF(min) 1N 1N 1.5N 1.5N -
PT(max) 45° 45° 45° 5mm 5mm
OT(min) 20° 20° 20° 2mm 2mm
MD(max) 12° 12° 1mm 1mm -
OP - - 30±0.8mm 40±0.8mm -
O-39 > >>

Travel Switches
Model Operating mode

YBLX-HL/5000 Rotating arm with roller
YBLX-HL/5030 Rotating adjustable arm with roller
YBLX-HL/5050 Adjustable rotating lever
YBLX-HL/5100 Vertical compressed plunger type
YBLX-HL/5200 Vertical compressed plunge type with roller
YBLX-HL/5300 Free-directions type flexible lever with spring
YBLX-HL/5050 YBLX-HL/5300
φ6.6
φ3.2 PT
62.8±0.8
5.4
53.4±0.8
38±0.2
φ3×160
30
39.5±0.8
max145
32
110±2.5
16.5 2-M3
42±0.2
21.4
21.8
M5×16
15.5
internal
20.2
senary-
angle
(82.4)
50±0.2
M5×12
60.6
internal
senary-
50±0.2
60.6
angle 3-M3
4.1
(21.2)
(21.2)
4.1
58±0.8
φ17.5×6.6
53±0.8 65.7±0.8
41±0.8 60.3±0.8
39.5±0.8 51.3±0.8 φ17.5×6.6
16.5 R31.5 39.5±0.8
32 R30~75
adjustable 16.5 adjustable
21.8
21.4
15.5
M5×12
(110)
21.8
21.4
internal M5×16
senary- internal
15.5
(82.4)
angle senary-
50±0.2
angle
60.6
(82.4)
3-M3
50±0.2
M5×12
60.6
internal
senary-
4.1
angle
(21.2)
4.1
+0.2 3-M3
(21.2)
18.5 2-M5×0.8 2-φ5.2 0 24±0.2

33 33
34
> >> O-40

Travel Switches
φ12.7×4.8
16.5
PT PT
16.5 φ8
2-M3 2-M3
20.2
OP
20.2
OP
60.6
60.6
50±0.2
50±0.2
3-M3
4.1
4.1
(21.2)
(21.2)
YBLX-HL/5500
φ12
φ6
M12
6.5
(8.5)
(25)
55
11
1000±5
(1075.3)
2-M3
44.5
50±0.2
60.6
4.1
(21.2)
O-41 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-CK Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
13 11 12 14
NO NC NC NO
2. Type Designation
YB LX CK / □ □
Operating mode
Code of contact operation mode
Ukraine
Travel switch
C R US LISTED USA Improved product

Rated operational voltage AC 380V DC220V
4
Mechanical equipments Food, agriculture, textile, Power-drive

Packing Machine Assembling
Model for construction and timber, lumber, industry, mounting &
machine tool machine
public facilities machine dimounting machine
YBLX-CK/J Not often utilized Not often utilized Not often utilized Utilizable Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized
YBLX-CK/S Not often utilized Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized Not often utilized Not often utilized Not often utilized
YBLX-CK/M Most frequently utilized Utilizable Most frequently utilized Utilizable Utilizable Most frequently utilized
YBLX-CK/P Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized Not often utilized Most frequently utilized Not often utilized
YBLX-CK/T Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized Most frequently utilized Not often utilized Most frequently utilized Not often utilized
Direct- Direct-driven type Direct- driven type Direct-driven type Adjustable rotating Rotating arm Free-directions
Model driven type type round lever
with steel roller with plastic roller with plastic roller arm with roller type type
YBLX-CK/J J161 J167 J10511 J10541 J10559

YBLX-CK/S S101 S102 S131, 139 S141 S159
YBLX-CK/M M110 M102 M121 M115 M106
YBLX-CK/P P110 P102 P121 P118 P145 P155 P106
YBLX-CK/T T110 T102 T118 O
> >> O-42

Travel Switches
YBLX-CK/P 106 YBLX-CK/J 10511 YBLX-CK/J 10541 YBLX-CK/P 102
YBLX-CK/M 106 YBLX-CK/T 121 YBLX-CK/M 102 YBLX-CK/M 115
YBLX-CK/M 121 YBLX-CK/P 121 YBLX-CK/P 110
φ9
21±0.2
4.6×8
78
64
30 32
YBLX-CK/J 167 YBLX-CK/S 102

φ13×3
φ12×4 33×33
30±0.2
30±0.2
108
φ3.2
122
6×8
60±0.4
XCK-J
97
73
60±0.4
76
7
10
6×8 30
φ5.4
40 41 40 36
YBLX-CK/M 110 YBLX-CK/T 110
42±0.2
φ9
40 φ9 22±0.2
4.6×8
6
6
4.6×7
60
61
62
47
14
14
60 30
30
60
O-43 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-P1 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
2P 3P 4P
13 21 22 14
2. Type Designation
YB LX - P 1 □ / □□
Operating mode
Contact composition
Component 80 protection type
Ukraine Design sequence number
C R US LISTED USA
Common type
Travel switch
Improved product
2P component 3P component 4P component
1 1 NO+1 NC 1 NO+2 NC 2NO+2NC
2-pole switch compoment

100 2-pole protective type travel switch (wide type)
120 2-pole protective type travel switch (narrow type)
Model Substitution model

Operating mode
(recommended) (production stopped)
YBLX-P1/120/1B Direct-driven YBLX-P1/120/0B

YBLX-P1/120/1C Direct-driven, buffering YBLX-P1/120/0C
YBLX-P1/120/1D Direct driven, with single roller YBLX-P1/120/0D
YBLX-P1/120/1E Direct-driven with single roller, buffering YBLX-P1/120/0E
YBLX-P1/120/1F Lever, with single roller YBLX-P1/120/0F
YBLX-P1/120/1H
Angle of rotating arm YBLX-P1/120/1J YBLX-P1/120/1K
YBLX-P1/120/1G YBLX-P1/120/0H
adjustable, with single roller
YBLX-P1/120/0G
YBLX-P1/120/0J YBLX-P1/120/0K O
> >> O-44

Travel Switches

Operating mode
YBLX-P1/120/1V
Length of iron lever adjustable, YBLX-P1/120/1W YBLX-P1/120/1Q
YBLX-P1/120/1P YBLX-P1/120/0V
damping YBLX-P1/120/0W YBLX-P1/120/0Q
YBLX-P1/120/0P
YBLX-P1/120/1R Free-directions type YBLX-P1/120/0R
YBLX-P1/120/1T No self-reset of roller YBLX-P1/120/0T
Length of single lever adjustable,
YBLX-P1/120/1U YBLX-P1/120/0U YBLX-P1/120/0N YBLX-P1/120/0N
with single roller
YBLX-P1/100/1E Direct-driven with single roller, buffering YBLX-P1/100/0E
YBLX-P1/100/1F Lever, with single roller YBLX-P1/100/0F
YBLX-P1/100/1H
Angle of rotating arm adjustable, YBLX-P1/100/1J YBLX-P1/100/1K
with single roller YBLX-P1/100/0J YBLX-P1/100/0K
YBLX-P1/100/0G
YBLX-P1/100/1V
YBLX-P1/100/0P
YBLX-P1/100/1T YBLX-P1/100/0T
with single roller
YBLX-P1/100/1U Direct-driven YBLX-P1/100/0U YBLX-P1/100/0N YBLX-P1/100/0N
YBLX-P1/303/1B Direct-driven, buffering YBLX-P1/303/0B
YBLX-P1/303/1C Direct driven, with single roller YBLX-P1/303/0C
YBLX-P1/303/1D Direct-driven with single roller, buffering YBLX-P1/303/0D
YBLX-P1/303/1E Lever, with single roller YBLX-P1/303/0E
Angle of rotating arm adjustable,
YBLX-P1/303/1F YBLX-P1/303/0F
with single roller
YBLX-P1/303/1H
Length of single lever adjustable, YBLX-P1/303/1J YBLX-P1/303/1K
YBLX-P1/303/0G
YBLX-P1/303/1V
YBLX-P1/303/0P
Length of single lever adjustable, YBLX-P1/303/0U
YBLX-P1/303/1U
with single roller
O-45 > >>

Travel Switches

Operating mode
YBLX-P1/404/1E Direct-driven with single roller, buffering YBLX-P1/404/0E YBLX-P1/120/1W YBLX-P1/120/1Q

YBLX-P1/404/1F Lever, with single roller YBLX-P1/404/0F YBLX-P1/120/0W YBLX-P1/120/0Q
YBLX-P1/404/1H
Length of single lever adjustable, YBLX-P1/404/1J YBLX-P1/404/1K
YBLX-P1/404/0G
YBLX-P1/404/1V
YBLX-P1/404/0P
YBLX-P1/404/1U YBLX-P1/404/0U
with single roller
Rated operational voltage (V) AC380V DC220V

Rated current AC5A DC0.15A
4
4
Ie= 5A/AC-15: 30×10
Electric life (operations)
4
Ie= 0.15A/DC-13: 20×10
Altitude ≤2000m
Automatic control, limitation operation, operation of transmission mechanism
Application
and program control of machine tool.
YBLX-P1//120/1R YBLX-P1/100/1R YBLX-P1/120/1U(1N) YBLX-P1/120/1E YBLX-P1/120/1G(H,J,K)
YBLX-P1/100/1G(H,J,K) YBLX-P1/100/1E YBLX-P1/120/1C YBLX-P1/120/1D YBLX-P1/120/1F
> >> O-46

Travel Switches
Unlocking type
22
φ5 10
22 22
φ5 10 φ5 10
21
4
21
21
φ4.3 8
10
10
4
4
φ4.3
94.5
φ4.3
3 4
48.5
67.4
81
66
48
8
1 2
3 4 1 2
30.2 25 30.2 25
6
30 25
Protective cover
YBLX-P1/100 series YBLX-P1/120 series
16
6.5
16
6.5
φ5.3
4
60
76.5
93×53
67.5
7.5
7.3×5.3
56 M20×15 40
30
M20×15 40
40
YBLX-P1/303 series YBLX-P1/404 series
42
40 16
40 16
6.5
4 6.5
12.5
4
6 7.5
7.5
93×53
110
91
125
M20×15
φ4.3
φ5.3
56 M20×15 40 40 5
56 40
Driven head style & data

Type B Type C
V U
φ6 φ10
V U
≥27.5 ≥20
β α
β α
≥19 ≥20
≤29.5
17.5
≤20.5
30.3
11.5
20
YBLX-P1/100/B αmax=30° YBLX-P1/100/C αmax=30°

YBLX-P1/120/B βmax=30° YBLX-P1/120/C βmax=30°
YBLX-P1/303/B V max=0.5m/s YBLX-P1/303/C V max=0.5m/s
YBLX-P1/404/B U max=1.5m/s YBLX-P1/404/C U max=1.5m/s
O-47 > >>

Travel Switches
Type D Type E
φ22 9
V U V
13 5 V U
≥20
α r β
27
≥20
β α
47.5
≤48
≥46
≤42.5
≥40.5
43
18
35
19
αmax=30°
αmax=30° YBLX-P1/100/E V max=1.0m/s
YBLX-P1/100/D
βmax=30° YBLX-P1/120/E Y max=45°
YBLX-P1/120/D
V max=1.0m/s YBLX-P1/303/E βmax=45°
YBLX-P1/303/D
U max=1.5m/s YBLX-P1/404/E V max=2.5m/s
YBLX-P1/404/D
U max=1.5m/s
Type F Type G、H、J、K
V
≤
Iv 7
44 9 56 ≥ 0°
α 10 45
φ19 °
≥20
7 β α
φ22
r
.5
Iu
21
49
≤53
≥42
30
56
β
18
≥23.5 ≥20
19 62.5
αmax=30°
YBLX-P1/100/F V max=1.0m/s YBLX-P1/100/G,J,H,K,
YBLX-P1/120/F Y max=45° YBLX-P1/120/G,J,H,K, αmax=30°
YBLX-P1/303/F βmax=45° YBLX-P1/303/G,J,H,K, βmax=30°
YBLX-P1/404/F V max=2.5m/s YBLX-P1/404/G,J,H,K, V max=3.0m/s
Type R Type T
Acuating range 13°

φ7 V
Min angle for reliable working 55.5
30
30
7
30
φ19
Rated working angle 10
13°
138.5
≥46
30
36
100
≤45
≥40
63
YBLX-P1/100/R YBLX-P1/100/T
YBLX-P1/120/R YBLX-P1/120/T V max=3m/s
YBLX-P1/303/R YBLX-P1/303/T
V max=1m/s
Type U、N Type P、Q、W、V
10 V
≤7 φ6
° 40°
V ≥4 0° 40
5°
22
A
47.5 130.5
≥20
β α
142
9
64.5 B ≤
≤7 ≥ 70°
45
≥4 0° °
200
5°
≥82
≥130
52.5
200
9
52.5
YBLX-P1/100/U,N
YBLX-P1/100/P,Q,W,V
YBLX-P1/120/U,N αmax=30°
YBLX-P1/120/P,Q,W,V
YBLX-P1/303/U,N βmax=30°
YBLX-P1/303/P,Q,W,V
YBLX-P1/404/U,N V max=3.0m/s YBLX-P1/404/P,Q,W,V V max=3.0m/s
> >> O-48

Travel Switches
YBLX-K1 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NC) 2(NC)
2. Type Designation
YB LX-K 1/□ 1 1□
Derivative code: M: enclosed type
1 NC contact
1 NO contact
Ukraine 1: single roller

2: double rollers
C R US LISTED USA 3: plunger type
4: plunger type with roller
5: free-directions type
6: Rear mounting of single roller
7: Rear mounting of double roller
Fast operation
Travel switch
Improved product
Model Mode Substitution model (production stopped)
YBLX-K1/111 Automatic reset of single roller

YBLX-K1/211 Non-automatic reset of double rollers
YBLX-K1/311 Automatic reset of plunger YBLX-25/311S YBLX-25/311
YBLX-K1/411 Automatic reset of plunger roller YBLX-25/411S YBLX-25/411
YBLX-K1/511 Automatic reset of free-directions type YBLX-25/511S YBLX-25/511
YBLX-K1/611 Self-reset of rear mounted single roller YBLX-25/611S YBLX-25/611
YBLX-K1/711 Non-self-reset of rear mounted single roller YBLX-25/711S YBLX-25/711

Rated voltage AC 380V DC220V
Rated current4 AC 5A DC0.15A
Operating frequency
20
(operations/minute)
Lasting ratio of electrification 40%
4
Mechanical life (opertions) 60x10
Electric life (opertions) 30x104
O-49 > >>

Travel Switches

Relative humidity ≤85%(20℃)
Altitude level ≤2000m
Voltage withstands Between electrified components and earth (1890V)
Application range Automatic control of machine tool, restriction of operating structure
operation or control of procedure
Standards IEC60947-5-1
Model
Operating YBLX-K1-111 YBLX-K1-211 YBLX-K1-311 YBLX-K1-411
performances
OF(max) 10N 25N 20N 20N

PT(max) ≤45° ≤70° ≤5mm ≤5mm
OT(min) ≥15° - ≥1mm ≥1mm
YBLX-K1/111 YBLX-K1/211 YBLX-K1/411 YBLX-K1/K YBLX-K1/611
YBLX-K1/511 YBLX-K1/711 YBLX-K1/311
Travel Switch 13.5 φ10

9
2-φ4.5+0.5
98max
65±0.37
2-M5
10
G1/2
5 35±0.31
16
44max
45max
> >> O-50

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
2. Type Designation
YB LX-K 2/□ □ □
1 NC contact
1 NO contact
Ukraine 1: with single roller

2: with double roller
C R US LISTED USA 3: plunger type
4: plunger type with roller
Fast operation
Travel switch
Improved product
Conventional heating current (A) 5A

Rated voltage (V) AC 380V DC 220V
Rated current AC 0.8A DC 0.16A
Operating frequency
30
(operations/minute)
Altitude ≤2000m
Between electrified components and the earth (1890V)
Voltage withstand
Between electrified components of the same polarity (1140V)
Application range Travel control and limitation protection in control circuits (2500V)
Operating Model YBLX-K2/001 YBLX-K2/101 YBLX-K2/111、131

performances
OF(max) 6N 7N 7N
RF(min) ≥1.5N ≥1.5N ≥2N
PT(max) 2±0.7mm 5±0.7mm 15°±7°
MD(max) ≤1.5mm ≤1.5mm ≤1.5mm
OT(min) ≥2mm ≥2mm ≥15°
O-51 > >>

Travel Switches
Model (recommended) Operating mode Substitution type (production stopped)
YBLX-K2/111 Self-reset of single roller YBLX-K2/121 YBLX-K2/131

YBLX-K2/211 Non-self-reset of single roller
YBLX-K2/311 Self-reset of plunger type YBLX-K2/001
YBLX-K2/411 Non-self-reset of plunger roller type YBLX-K2/101
YBLX-K2/111 YBLX-K2/211 YBLX-K2
YBLX-K2/101、YBLX-K2/411 YBLX-K2/001、YBLX-K2/311
33max
47max
14
24
82max
52.5±0.25
1
4-φ4.5 M16X1.5
38±0.25
16
> >> O-52

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
4(NO) 3(NO)
(S) (H)
1(NC) 2(NC) 1(NC) 2(NC)
2. Type Designation
YB LX-K 3/2 0 □/□
Operating mode. As for code explanation,

please refer to table below
Protective case type; K: no protective case,
unlocking type
S: vertical protective case, with an outlet wire
Ukraine orifice in bottom
H: horizontal protective case, with an outlet
C R US LISTED USA wire orifice in bottom and each side
Contact assembly type
Pair number of contact

Fast operation
Travel switch
Improved product
Symbol Definition
Z Plunger type
L Plunger with roller type
B Rotating arm with roller type
T Adjustable rotating arm with roller type
D Flexible rocker type
J Adjustable metal rocker type
H1 Fork type with 2 rollers at same direction
H2 Fork type with the left roller forwardly and the right roller backwardly mounted
H3 Fork type with the right roller forwardly and the left roller backwardly mounted
W Free-directions type
S S
S YBLX-K3/20H /B YBLX-K3/20 H/H1
Model YBLX-K3/20H /Z S S
Operating YBLX-K3/20H /T YBLX-K3/20HS /D YBLX-K3/20 H/H2 YBLX-K3/20 HS /W
YBLX-K3/20HS /L
performances YBLX-K3/20HS /J YBLX-K3/20 S /H3
H
OF(max) 30N 0.3Nm 0.3Nm 0.2Nm 0.038Nm

RF(min) 5N 0.06Nm 0.03Nm - 0.015Nm
PT(max) 3mm 30° 30° 80° 30°
MD(max) 1.2mm 15° 20° 60° 15°
TTP(max) 6.0mm 60° 50° 90° -
O-53 > >>

Travel Switches

Rated voltage (V) AC 380V DC220V
Rated current AC 5A DC0.15A
Operating frequency
20
(operations/minute)
4
Z 60X10
Mechanical life (operations)
H1 60X104
4
Electric life (operations) 30X10

Altitude ≤2000m
Voltage withstand
Between electrified components and earth (1890V)
Manipulation, control, limit, signal, interlock in control circuits and auxiliary
Application range
circuits. Its typical purpose is to control the AC and DC electromagnetic.
YBLX-K3/20S/Z YBLX-K3/20H/D YBLX-K3/20S/W YBLX-K3/20S/B

63
57.5
41.5
φ18
54.5
133
2.75×5.5 60±0.31
2-φ5.5
30±0.31 15.5 M20×1.5

40
41
YBLX-K3/20S/T YBLX-K3/20S/H1, H2, H3
68±3
63
62
57.5
φ18
φ18
60-120
54.5
130-199±2.5
133
2.75×5.5
60±0.31
2.75×5.5
60±0.31
2-φ5.5
2-φ5.5
30±0.31 15.5 30±0.31 15.5 M20×1.5
M20×1.5
40 40
41 41
> >> O-54

Travel Switches
YBLX-1 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
2. Type Designation
YB LX - 1/1 1□
K: Unlocking type
Number. of NC contact
Number. of NO contact
C R US LISTED USA Travel switch

Improved product

Rated current AC 0.53A DC0.23A
Operating frequency(operations/minute) 3
4
Mechanical life (operations) 50x10
Electric life (operations) 30x104
Altitude ≤2000m
Operating travel 7±2mm
Over Travel ≥1mm
Operating force ≤30N
To control travel of operating structure of which speed is no less
Application range
than 0.1ms or to change its operating direction and speed
O-55 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-1/01K YBLX-1/02K YBLX-1/11K
YBLX-1/11H
42.5±2
122.5max
63±0.25
2-φ5.5
26±0.25 41max
> >> O-56

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
2. Type Designation
YB LX - 2/□ □ □
1: automatic reset
2: non-automatic reset
Ukraine
C R US LISTED USA
1: roller mounted in interior part
"2" roller mounted in the middle part
"3" roller mounted in exterior part
1: single roller; 2: double rollers.
Travel switch
Improvect product

Rated voltage AC 380V
Rated current AC 2A
Mechanical life 50x104
4
Electric life 20x10
Altitude ≤2000m
Operating travel ≤20°
Over Travel ≥3°
Control travel of operating mechanism or change its
Application range
moving direction or speed
O-57 > >>

Travel Switches
Model Structure and mounting of transmission
YBLX-2/111 1 roller mounted inside of "一" shape handspike

YBLX-2/121 1 roller mounted inside of the groove of "一" handspike
YBLX-2/131 1 roller mounted outside of "一" shape handspike
YBLX-2/222 2 roller mounted inside of "人" shape handspike
YBLX-2/232 2 rollers mounted on "人" shape handspike, with one inside and the other outside
YBLX-2/111 YBLX-2/131 YBLX-2/212、222、232
YBLX-2/121
60±1.5
45°
42±1.5 5
12° ±2°
6.2±0.7
62±3
4-6.5×8
146max
62±0.2
G1/2
68max
72±0.2
91max
> >> O-58

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NC NO NO NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX-3/1 1 □
H: protection
K: non-protection
No. of NC contact
Ukraine No. of NO contact
C R US LISTED USA
Design sequence number.
Travel switch
Improved product

4
Mechanical life(operations) 60x10
4
Electric life(operations) 30x10
Altitude ≤2000m
Operating travel ≤15mm
Over Travel 1mm
To control travel of operating structure of which speed is no less than 0.1
Application range
meter/min, or to change operating direction or speed.
YBLX-3/11K YBLX-3/11H
52max
48±0.23 24±1.6
27±2
120max
85±0.25
3-φ6.5
81max 6±0.4
O-59 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NO
NO
2. Type Designation
YB LX- 4/□ □ □
S: with enclosure ring
Number. of controlled circuits
Ukraine Operating mode, refer to table below

for definition of number
Travel switch
Improved product

Operating frequency(operations/minute) 2.5
Altitude ≤2000m
Digital code Operating mode Applicable occasions
1 Operation of single arm with roller Translating mechanism with normal inertial travel distance
2 Actuate 2 rotating positions of fork arm with roller Translating units with large inertial travel distance
3 Actuate lever on-load with balanced hammer Lifting units
4 Actuate 3 position-change-over devices with trinacri form arm Translating units with 3 actuating positions
6 Actuate 2 position-change-over devices with roller-equipped double arms Translating units with fast speed
YBLX-4/11, YBLX-4/21S, YBLX-4/21, YBLX-4/31, YBLX-4/11,

YBLX-4/12 YBLX-4/22S YBLX-4/22 YBLX-4/32 YBLX-4/12
116 48
99
30°
260±1.05
285max
30°
O
R1
25
φ35×10
90±0.7 142max
160max
> >> O-60

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX - 5/□ □ □ □
Number of switch components

mounted inside the case
Y: connection through bolt,

Ukraine blank: connection through welding slice
C R US LISTED USA Transmission mode. Refer to the aside

table for definition of letters
Number. of NC contact
Number. of NO contact
Travel switch
Improved produet
Letter Designation
D Projecting button type

Q Protective type
H With buffering spring type
G1 Short lever transmission type
G2 Long lever transmission type
N1 Short lever with roller type
N2 Long lever with roller type
Blank: the common type

Rated voltage (A) AC 380V DC 220V
4
4
Environ mental temperature -5℃~+40℃
Altitude ≤2000m
Between electrified components and earth (1890V)
Voltage withstands
Between electrified components of different polarity (1140V)
Application range Applied in control circuits to control the travel
O-61 > >>

Travel Switches
Model OF RF OT
YBLX-5/11 ≤10N ≥1N ≥0.2mm
YBLX-5/11D ≤10N ≥1N ≥1mm
YBLX-5/11H ≤10N ≥1N ≥2mm
YBLX-5/11N1 ≤7N ≥0.5N ≥2mm
YBLX-5/11N2 ≤7N ≥0.5N ≥2mm
YBLX-5/11G1 ≤4N ≥0.5N ≥1mm
YBLX-5/11G2 ≤3N ≥0.5N ≥0.5mm
YBLX-5/11Q/1 ≤25N ≥5N ≥1mm
YBLX-5/11D YBLX-5/11N YBLX-5/11 YBLX-5/11N1 YBLX-5/11N2
YBLX-5/11Q1 YBLX-5/11H
35
5 37 5
φ9
44max
54max
9
φ4.2
86±0.4
5
74
LX5-11Q/1
95
42
25±0.36 20max
54max
13
50
> >> O-62

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NO NO
YBLX-6/10 YBLX-6/01
2. Type Designation
YB LX- 6/□ □ □ □
Derivative code "CP" means long arm

Derivative code "Q" means dust-proof
Ukraine Number of normal close contact
Number of normal open contact

C R US LISTED USA
Travel switch
Improved product
Protect degree IP42

Rated voltage AC 380V DC 220V
Operating frequency 10 times/Minute
Application range Control operating structure of machine tool and mechanism
Standards IEC 60947-5-1
YBLX-6/10Q、YBLX-6/01Q YBLX-6/10QCP、YBLX-6/01QCP
34
R25
120±0.7
130max
100
φ24×6
6 3-φ6.4 40±0.5
48max 56max
O-63 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NC
NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX-7/□ □
1,2: No. of circuits

C R US LISTED USA Travel switch

Improved product

Transmission ratio 1: 50
LX7-1, LX7-1S 1
Number of circuits
LX7-2, LX7-2S 2
Application range Limitation on lifting mechanism travel of crane, terminal switch of
automatic system or electric dragging device
YBLX-7/2、YBLX-7/2S YBLX-7/1、YBLX-7/1S
50 130 105max
35
166max
4
116
φ14
148±0.7 4-φ6.6 54±0.5

170max
> >> O-64

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
Ukraine
C R US LISTED USA
Protect degree IP52

Rated breaking current 20A
Rated current AC 1000VA DC200W
Standard IEC 60947-5-1
YBLX-8/1，2，3，4 With coil device

YBLX-8/5 Without coil device
YBLX-8/5
2-φ6.4
144max
54±0.6
126
34
60±0.6 54max
80max
O-65 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NO NO
NC NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX 10 /□ □ □
Ukraine Number of controlled circuit
C R US LISTED USA Operating mode (refer to table below)
Travel switch
Improved product
Number code Operating mode
1 Operating arm with single roller

2 Fork type operating arm with double rollers
3 Operating arm through on-load hammer
4 Trinacriform operating arm

Operating frequency(operations/munite) 6
Application range Terminal protection of mechanism travel in control circuits
> >> O-66

Travel Switches
Model Purpose
YBLX-10/11、12、11S、12S For transmission mechanism with large inertial travel distance

YBLX-10/21、22、21S、22S For transmission mechanism with large inertial travel distance
YBLX-10/31、32、31S、32S For limit the travel of lifting mechanism
YBLX-10/41、42、41S、42S For transmission mechanism with 3 operating positions
YBLX-10/11、YBLX-10/12
12X16
65
100max
φ24X9
R8
2
195max
168±0.7
36 118max
YBLX-10/11S、YBLX-10/12S YBLX-10/21、YBLX-10/22 YBLX-10/31、YBLX-10/32
O-67 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NO NC COM COM NC NO
2. Type Designation
YB LX -12 /□
2: Number. of circuit
Ukraine
Travel switch
Improved product
C R US LISTED USA
Rated voltage 380V

PT ≤7mm
OT ≥1mm
OF ≤16N
RF ≥2.45N
YBLX-12/2 YBLX-12/2(Long lever)
φ10X2.5
28
LX12-2 travel switch

36max
65±0.6 2-5X10
76max
6
15
28max
> >> O-68

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 1(NC) 2(NC) 3(NO)
2. Type Designation
YB LX-19/□/□ □ □
1: automatic reset; 2: non-automatic reset
0: direct-driven type
Ukraine 1: roller mounted inside the transmission lever
2: roller mounted outside the transmission lever
3: two rollers, with one inside groove of
C US LISTED USA
transmission lever, the other outside the groove
R
0: without roller
1 with 1 roller
2: with 2 rollers
K: un-locking type
Travel switch
Improved product
Protechion degree Ip52

Operating frequency(operations minute) 20
Lasting ratio of electrification 40%
4
Mechanical life (operations) 60x10
Electric life (operations) 30x104
Relative humidity ≤90%(20℃)
It is applied to control travel of operating mechanism, or to
Application range
change its moving direction and speed
O-69 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-19/111 YBLX-19/212
Model
Operating YBLX-19/K YBLX-19/001 YBLX-19/121 YBLX-19/222
performances YBLX-19/131 YBLX-19/232
OF(max) 10N 16N 20N 25N

RF(min) 1N 1.5N 2.5N
PT(max) 5mm 7mm 45° 80°
MD(max) 3mm 3.5mm 25°
OT(min) 0.6mm 2mm 15° -
YBLX-19/K YBLX-19/001
88max
65±0.6
76max
4-φ4.2 35±0.5
45max 35max
52max
YBLX-19/111 YBLX-19/121 YBLX-19/131 YBLX-19/212、222、232
> >> O-70

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NO NO
NC NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX-22 /□
Operating mode, refer to aside code

for definition

Ukraine
Travel switch
1 Single arm with roller

2 "Fork" type arm with double rollers
3 Hammer type

Altitude ≤2000m
Application range Limit travel of lift and all kinds of machinery
Model Purpose
YBLX-22/1 Single arm with roller, for transmission mechanism with normal inertial travel distance
YBLX-22/2 Fork type arm with double rollers, for transmission mechanism with large inertial travel distance
YBLX-22/3 Hammer type, for lifting mechanism
YBLX-22/2 YBLX-22/3 YBLX-22/1

φ20×7.5
30° 30°
75°
R85 75°
90max
46
105±0.925
63±0.6
94max
81.5
4-φ9
202max
O-71 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
2. Type Designation
YB LX-29 /□ □/□
Number code
1: down-lead of connection board,

2: short lever,
3: long lever, 4: front mounting,
5: mounting on board
Ukraine Auxsliary code: "Q" dust-proof, "H" buffer
Number code
C R US LISTED USA
Operating mode, refer to aside table
for designations

Travel switch
Improved product
1 Plunger type
2 Single arm with roller
3 Two sections roller type
4 High plunger type
5 Roller plunger type
6 Lever type
7 Roller lever type
YBLX-29/2Q/4 YBLX-29/5Q
18
74max
2-φ4.2
42
25max
25.4±0.1
92max
O
> >> O-72

Travel Switches
YBLX-29/1/1 YBLX-29/1H
φ6.4
37
30
22.8
25.4±0.1 18
50max
YBLX-29/5/5 YBLX-29/7/2 YBLX-29/7/3 YBLX-29/4S/4 YBLX-29/2S
Model Mode OF RF PT OT MT
YBLX-29/1，YBLX-29/1/1 Plunger type ≤8 ≥6N ≤2mm ≥0.1mm ≤1.5mm
YBLX-29/1H，YBLX-29/1H/1 Plunger type, buffering ≤8 ≥6N ≤2mm ≥0.1mm ≤0.15mm
YBLX-29/2Q，YBLX-29/2Q/4 Single arm with roller, dustproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.4mm
YBLX-29/2S，YBLX-29/2S/4 Single arm with roller, waterproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.4mm
YBLX-29/3Q，YBLX-29/3Q/4 With two sections of roller, dustproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.4mm
YBLX-29/3S，YBLX-29/3S/4 With two sections of roller, waterproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.4mm
YBLX-29/4Q，YBLX-29/4Q/4 Projecting plunger type, dustproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.15mm
YBLX-29/4S，YBLX-29/4S/4 Projecting plunger type, waterproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.3mm
YBLX-29/4/5，YBLX-29/4/5 Projecting plunger type ≤8 ≥6N ≤5mm ≥2mm ≤0.15mm
YBLX-29/5Q，YBLX-29/5Q/4 Plunger with roller, dustproof ≤16 ≥5N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤0.15mm
YBLX-29/5/5，YBLX-29/5/5 Plunger with roller ≤8 ≥6N ≤5mm ≥2mm ≤0.15mm
YBLX-29/6/2，YBLX-29/6/2 Short lever type ≤8 ≥6N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤1.2mm
YBLX-29/6/3，YBLX-29/6/3 Long lever type ≤6 ≥4N ≤10mm ≥2mm ≤2.4mm
YBLX-29/7/2，YBLX-29/7/2 Short lever with roller ≤8 ≥6N ≤7mm ≥2mm ≤1.2mm
YBLX-29/7/3，YBLX-29/7/3 Long lever with roller ≤6 ≥4N ≤10mm ≥2mm ≤2.4mm
O-73 > >>

Travel Switches
1. General
Contacting types
NC NC NO NO
2. Type Designation
YB LX-33/□ □
Number. of controlled circuits
Operating mode: 1:lever type,

Ukraine
2: fork type,
3: hammer type
Travel switch
Improved product
Protecion degree IP44

4
Travel limitation and terminal protect of lift's horizontal moving
Application range
mechanism and rising moving in control circuits
YBLX-33/11、YBLX-33/12
B
φ30
60° max 60°max

R110
(160)
125
35
4-φ9
160
185
80
175max
O
> >> O-74

Travel Switches
YBLX-44 Breaking Limitator
1. General
Contacting types
(2 assemblies)
2. Type Designation
YB L X -44/□

Ukraine Limitation
C R US LISTED USA Master switch

Improdved product
Protecion degree IP42

Rated operational voltage AC 380V DC220V
Altitude ≤2000m
CD1, MD1 type of 0.5~10 ton normally apply on cable type electric block to realize
Application range
limitation protection of lifting & falling movement, and can direct break the main circuit.
Rated operational Max. Power of Allowable

Model current controllable motor OT OT OP
YBLX-44/3 3A 1.5kW ≤8mm ≥1mm ≤15N

YBLX-44/10 10A 4.5kW 6~8mm ≤3mm ≤30N
YBLX-44/20 20A 7.5kW 8~10mm ≤3mm ≤50N
YBLX-44/40 40A 13kW 12~14mm ≤3mm ≤100N
YBLX-44/10 YBLX-44/20 YBLX-44/40

4-φ5.4
34 54 23 44
6 3
74±0.2
110max
φ10
φ5
98max 130max
O-75 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-JW2、JBLW-JW2B Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
13 21 22 14
2. Type Designation
YB LX-JW 2 □/1 1 □/□
3,5: number of component

Operating mode, refer to table below
for definitions
1 NO contact
Ukraine 1 NC contact
C R US LISTED USA
A: special derivative code
Micro-gap type
Travel switch
Improved product
Letter code Operating mode

W1 Drive of roller
W2 Horizontally-driven type
L Roller direct driven type
G Roller & lever transmission type
Z Combination type
H Protection type
B Simple protection type

4
Mechanical life 60X10
4
(operations) 30X10
Electric life(operations) 30X104
Operating frequency AC 40
(operations/minute) DC 20
Altitude ≤2500m
Voltage withstand Between electrified components and the earth (1890V) O
Between electrified components of the same polarity (1140V)
Application range Between electrified components of the different polarity (2500V)
Control travel of operating mechanism or change its direction & speed
> >> O-76

Travel Switches
Model YBLX-JW2/11 YBLX-JW2/11Z/3 YBLX-JW2/11Z/5 YBLX-JW2/11B

Operating performances
OF(max) 3.5N 7N 7N 7N
RF(min) ≥0.8N ≥35N ≥35N ≥35N
PT(max) 2±1kg 3±1kg 3±1kg 3±1kg
MD(max) ≤2mm ≤3mm ≤3mm ≤3mm
OT min) ≥0.5mm ≥2mm ≥2mm ≥2mm
Open-distance of contact ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm
YBLX- YBLX- YBLX- YBLX- YBLX-

Model
Operating performances JW2A/11 JW2A/11H/W2 JW2A/11H/W1 JW2A/11H/G JW2A/11H/L
OF(max) 3.5N 10N 10N 8N 10N

RF(min) ≥0.8N ≥3N ≥3N ≥1N ≥3N
PT(max) 2±1kg ≤5kg ≤5kg ≤6kg ≤5kg
MD(max) ≤2mm ≤4mm ≤4mm ≤5mm ≤4mm
OT min) ≥0.5mm ≥1.2mm ≥2mm ≥2mm ≥2mm
Open-distance of contact ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm ≥0.6mm
YBLX-JW2/11B YBLX-JW2/11
2-φ 3.1±0.10
39max
12max
13
18±0.28
30max
YBLX-JW2/11H/G YBLX-JW2/11H/W1
47±1.6
2-4.2×6
83max
50±0.5 28max
59max
YBLX-JW2/11H/W2 YBLX-JW2/11Z/3 YBLX-JW2/11Z/5 YBLX-JW2/11H/LTH
O-77 > >>

Travel Switches
YBLX-X2 Travel Switch
1. General
Contacting types
COM COM
NO NC NC NO
2. Type Designation
YB LX-X 2/□
N: with rotating roller

Blank: straight driven type
Ukraine
Travel switch

Rated voltage (V) AC 380V Ie 2A
Number of NO contact 2 pairs
Number of NC contact 2 pairs
Altitude ≤2000m
Environment temperature -5℃~+40℃
4
Contacts exchange time ≤40ms
Application range Travel control and limitation
> >> O-78

Travel Switches
Model YBLX-X2 YBLX-X2-N

OF(max) ≤16N ≤16N

PT(max) ≤10mm ≤10mm
OT (mm) ≥1mm ≥1mm
YBLX-X2/N YBLX-X2
28±0.3
9min
2-φ3.5
15±1
60max
18±0.3
46max
30max
O-79 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-2 Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NO) 2(NO)
2. Type Designation
YB LX W-2/ 1 1
No. of NC contact
No. of NO contact

Micro-gap
C US LISTED USA
Travel switch
R
Improved product

AC 0.79A
Rated current
DC 0.14A
Rated control capacity AC 300VA DC 30W
4
Electric life(operations) 30×104
Operating frequency(operations minute) 40
Relative humidity ≤90% (20℃)
Altitude ≤2000m
Electric clearance ≥2.5mm
Creepage distance ≥3mm
Voltage withstands Between electrified components and the earth (1890V)
Between electrified components of different polarity (1140V)
Operating travel 2.5mm
OT ≥0.2mm
MD ≥1.6mm
OF ≤5N
RF ≤0.7N
Application range Travel control, limitation protection, etc O
Standard IEC 60947-5-1
> >> O-80

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-2/11
3.2 5
3.8
φ3.2
16±0.2
22.6
11.6
11±0.2 15.8
32
O-81 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-3 Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
YBLXW-3 YBLXW-3/N
18±0.2
φ8×1.6
5
φ4.2
58.6
40
36
30
LXW3
27 28
> >> O-82

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-5/11 Micro-gap Switch

1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX W-5/1 1 □/□
L: with large current

FL: protective type with large current e
Operating mode; refer to aside table for

definition of the code
1 NC contact
1 NO contact
Micro-gap
Travel switch
Improved product

4
Operating frequency Mechanical: 240
(operations/minute) Electric: 20
AC 380V 0.79A
Normal type
DC 220V 0.14A
Load
AC 660V 1.5A
Large current type
DC 220V 0.45A
Operating speed 0.1mm/s~0.5mm/s
Insulathon resistance ≥1MΩ
Contacting resistence 100mΩ
Altitude ≤2000m
Voltage withstands
Between electrified metal components and the earth (1890V)
Between terminals and un-electrified components (2500V)
Application range Travel control, limitation protection, and interlocking of various
equipments of mechanic, textile, and electric apparatus.
O-83 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
Model Operating mode

YBLXW-5/11Z Plunger type with handspike
YBLXW-5/11N1 Compression handspike type
YBLXW-5/GL2 Roller compression columnar type
YBLXW-5/11GS Thin handspike columnar type
YBLXW-5/11D1 Short spring plunger type
YBLXW-5/11M Panel mounted plunger type
YBLXW-5/11Q1 Panel mounted plunger type with roller
YBLXW-5/11Q2 Panel mounted plunger type with horizontal roller
YBLXW-5/11N1 Gemel lever type
YBLXW-5/11G1 Gemel long lever type with roller
YBLXW-5/11G2277 Gemel long lever with one-way roller
YBLXW-5/11G2 Gemel lever type with roller
Current
Incandescence Screw coil loading of
Voltage Heater loading lamp loading motor and relay
Breaking Making Breaking Making Breaking Making

127V 15A 15A 1.5A 3.0A 15A 15A
220V 15A 15A 1.25A 2.5A 15A 15A
AC
380V 3A 3A 0.75A 1.0A 2.5A 2.5A
660V 2A 2A 0.50A 0.8A 1.5A 1.5A
24V 10A 10A 1.5A 3.0A 10A 10A
DC 110V 0.6A 0.6A 0.6A 0.6A 0.1A 0.1A
220V 0.3A 0.3A 0.3A 0.3A 0.05A 0.05A
YBLXW-5/11Z YBLXW-5/11D1 YBLXW-5/11M YBLXW-5/11Q1 YBLXW-5/11Q2

Model
YBLXW-5/11Z/F YBLXW-5/11D1/F YBLXW-5/11M/F YBLXW-5/11Q1F YBLXW-5/11Q2/F
YBLXW-5/11Z/L YBLXW-5/11D1/L YBLXW-5/11M/L YBLXW-5/11Q1/L YBLXW-5/11Q2/L
Operating YBLXW-5/11Z/FL YBLXW-5/11D1/FL YBLXW-5/11M/FL YBLXW-5/11Q1/FL YBLXW-5/11Q2/FL
performances Z-15G Z-15GD Z-15GQ Z-15GQ22 Z-15GQ21
OF (max) 10N 10N 10N 10N 10N

RF (Max) 1N 1N 1N 1N 1N
Repeat precision error ±0.03mm ±0.05mm ±0.05mm ±0.05mm ±0.03mm
PT (Operating travel) ≤2.5mm ≤3.5mm ≤3.5mm ≤3.5mm ≤3.5mm
OT ≥0.2mm ≥0.5mm ≥0.5mm ≥0.5mm ≥0.5mm
Model YBLXW-5/11N YBLXW-5/11N2 YBLXW-5/11G1 YBLXW-5/11G2

YBLXW-5/11G3
YBLXW-5/11N1/F YBLXW-5/11N2/F YBLXW-5/11G1/F YBLXW-5/11G2F
YBLXW-5/11G3/F
YBLXW-5/11N1/L YBLXW-5/11N2/L YBLXW-5/11M/L YBLXW-5/11G2/L
Operating YBLXW-5/11G3/L
YBLXW-5/11N1/FL YBLXW-5/11N2/FL YBLXW-5/11G1/FL YBLXW-5/11G2/FL
performances YBLXW-5/11G3/FL
Z-15GW Z-15GL Z-15GW22 Z-15GW2
OF (max) 6N 7N 6N 7N 6N
RF(Max) 0.15N 0.25N 0.15N 0.25N 0.2N
Repeat precision error ±0.05mm ±0.05mm ±0.05mm ±0.05mm ±0.03mm
PT (Operating travel) ≤13mm ≤10mm ≤11mm ≤7mm ≤8.5mm
OT ≥3mm ≥2mm ≥3mm ≥2mm ≥2.5mm O
> >> O-84

Fuses
YBLXW-5/11Z、YBLXW-5/11Z/L
φ2.3
R2.3
5.5 2- R2.1
27
32
24.2
9.2
25.4±0.26 17.54±0.2
50
YBLXW-5/11N2、YBLXW-5/11N2/L
4.8
5.5 2- R2.1
33
35
23.8
9.2
25.4± 0.26
50 17.45±0.2
YBLXW-5/11G3、YBLXW-5/11G3/L
φ9.5×4
51
5.5 2-R2.1
33
23.8
9.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50 17.45±0.2
YBLXW-5/11D1、YBLXW-5/11D1/L
φ12.3
φ10
φ7.15
5.5 2-R2.1
35
27
24.2
9.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50
17.45±0.2
O-85 > >>

Fuses
YBLXW-5/11M、YBLXW-5/11M/L
M 12
φ8.35
M12 P=1
52
5.5 2-R2.1
27
9.2
17.45±0.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50
YBLXW-5/11Q1、YBLXW-5/11Q1/L
12.7×4.8
M12 P=1
61
5.5 2-R2.1
27
9.2
17.45±0.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50
YBLXW-5/11Q2、YBLXW-5/11Q2/L
φ12.7×4.8
M12 P=1
61
5.5 2-R2.1
27
9.2
17.45±0.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50
YBLXW-5/11N1、YBLXW-5/11N1/L
4.9
42
5.5 2-R2.1
33
9.2
25.4 ± 0.26
17.45±0.2
50
72
> >> O-86

Micro-gap Switches
φ9.5×4
46
5.5 2-R2.1
33
9.2
25.4 ± 0.26 17.45±0.2
50
φ9.5×4
48
5.5 2-R2.1
33
9.2
17.45±0.2
25.4 ± 0.26
50
YBLXW-5/11G2277
26.2
φ9.5×4
t=1
R31.9
.1
R11
FP
OP
34.1
20.2
16.9
13.9
9.2
+0.075 +0.075
4.2 -0.025 φ4.2 -0.025
+0.1 17.45±0.2
φ4.36 -0.05
11.9
25.4±0.1
49.2
YBLXW-5/11GS
φ5.2
23.3±0.25
PT
φ4
+0.075
φ4.2 -0.025
OP
φ9
24.2
9.2
+0.075
4.2 -0.025
+0.1 17.45±0.2
φ4.36 -0.05
11.9
25.4±0.1
49.2
O-87 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-6/11(ZL15G、D4MC)
Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NC NO COM
2. Type Designation
YB LX W-6/1 1□
Operating mode
1 NC contact
1 NO contact
Micro-gap
Travel switch
Improved product
Model Substituted Model

(recommended) Operating mode (production stopped)
YBLXW-6/11 Components -ZL/15G10

YBLXW-6/11BZ Panel mounted plunger type -AZ/7310 -TZ/7310 -MN/5310 -ZL/15G03 -D4MC/5000
YBLXW-6/11CA Long button type
YBLXW-6/11DA Short button I type -AZ/7110 -TZ/7110 -MN/5110 -ZL/15G01
YBLXW-6/11DA2 Short button II type -AZ/7100 -TZ/7100 -MN/5100
YBLXW-6/11CG Long horizontal lever type -AZ/7120 -TZ/7120 -MN/5120 -ZL/15G060 -D4MC/1000
YBLXW-6/11DG Short horizontal lever type -AZ/7140 -TZ/7140 -MN/5140 -ZL/15G06 -D4MC/1020
YBLXW-6/11CL Long lever with roller type -AZ/7121 -TZ/7121 -MN/5121 -ZL/15G07 -D4MC/2000
YBLXW-6/11DL Short lever type with roller -AZ/7141 -TZ/7141 -MN/5141 -ZL/15G09 -D4MC/2020
YBLXW-6/11CDL Long lever type with one-way roller -AZ/7124 -TZ/7124 -MN/5124
YBLXW-6/11DDL Short lever type with one-way roller -AZ/7144 -TZ/7144 -MN/5144 -ZL/15G070 -D4MC/3030
YBLXW-6/11HL Horizontal mounted roller type -AZ/7312 -TZ/7312 -MN/5312 -ZL/15G031 -D4MC/5040
YBLXW-6/11ZL Vertical mounted roller type -AZ/7311 -TZ/7311 -MN/5311 -ZL/15G030 -D4MC/5020
YBLXW-6/11W1 Free directions type I -AZ/7161 -TZ/7161 -MN/5161
YBLXW-6/11W2 Free directions type II -AZ/7166 -TZ/7166 -MN/5166
YBLXW-6/11W3 Free directions type III -AZ/7169 -TZ/7169 -MN/5169
> >> O-88

Micro-gap Switches

Operating speed 0.1mm/s~0.5mm/s
Altitude ≤2000m
Between terminals of the same polarity (AC 1140V)
Voltage withstands Between electrified metal components and the earth (AC 1890V)
Between terminals and un-electrified metal components (AC 2500V)
Automatic control, operation limitation, operation or procedure
Application range
control of transmission mechanism of machine tool and machines.
Model OF Therefore PT OT MD FP
max min max min max max OP
YBLXW-6/11BZ 8N 1N 3.5mm 3mm 1.2mm - 21.8±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11CA 8N 1N 3.5mm 2.5mm 1.2mm - 21.8±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DA 8N 1N 3.5mm 2mm 1.2mm - 44±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DA2 8N 1N 3.5mm 1mm 0.8mm - 30±1mm
YBLXW-6/11CG 5N 0.25N 12mm 4mm 3mm 36mm 25±1mm
YBLXW-6/11DG 6N 0.35N 10mm 2mm 1.5mm 32mm 25±1mm
YBLXW-6/11CL 6N 0.4N 12mm 4mm 2.4mm 51mm 40±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DL 6N 0.4N 10mm 2mm 1.5mm 47mm 40±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11CDL 6N 0.4N 12mm 4mm 2.4mm 57mm 50±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DDL 5N 0.4N 10mm 2mm 1.5mm 55mm 50±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11HL 8N 1N 3.5mm 2mm 1.2mm - 33.4±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11ZL 8N 1N 3.5mm 3mm 1.2mm - 33.4±1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11W1 2N - 30° - - - -
YBLXW-6/11W2 2N - 30° - - - -
YBLXW-6/11W3 2N - 30° - - - -
YBLXW-6/11DA2 YBLXW-6/11CDL
O-89 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-6/11W1 YBLXW-6/11W2 YBLXW-6/11W3
YBLXW-6/11DG
R=50
21max
4
62max
φ
×
2
75max
18
25.5 ±0 .2
YBLXW-6/11HL
80max
21max
4
φ
×
2
70max
18
25.5 ± 0.2
YBLXW-6/11BZ
21max
68max
4
φ
×
2
70max
18
25.5 ± 0.2
YBLXW-6/11CG
R=67
4
58max
21max
φ
×
O
2
75max
18
25.5 ± 0.2
> >> O-90

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-6/11CL
R=5
4
70max
4
21max
φ
×
2
75max
18
25.5 ± 0.2
YBLXW-6/11DL
R=
43
67max
21max
4
φ
×
2
75max
25.5 ± 0.2 18
YBLXW-6/11ZL
80max
21max
φ
×
2
18
70max
25.5 ± 0.2
YBLXW-6/11DDL
Action direction
φ12.7×7.5
No action direction
Vibration angle max 90°
8
R4
10
t=1
FP
OP
16.5
YBLXW-6/11 YBLXW-6/11DA YBLXW-6/11CA
O-91 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-18 Arc-extinguishing
Micro-gap Switch
1. General Contacting types
COM NO NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX W-18/11 □/□
Derivative specification codes: "A" short lever

"B" short roller "C" long lever
"CQ" long lever light action "D" long roller
"E-R" type lever
"Z" straight driven "CZ" long straight driven
Auxiliary specification code: M-DC type
Basic specification code: 11 indicate a pair of

conversion contact
Micro-gap
Master travel switch
Improved product
YBLXW-18/11/B 、YBLXW-18/11M/B
Protection degree IP62 φ10×4.4

8
R2
Rated operational voltage AC 380V DC 220V

Rated power AC720VA DC138W
46
4
Mechanical life(operations) 100×10 φ4.2
25
4
9
Between different polarities (1140V) 25.4±0.2 12

17.5
Voltage withstands 50
Toward the earth (1890V)
YBLXW-18/11ND、
YBLXW-18/11MND YBLXW-18/11/Z、
YBLXW-18/11M/Z YBLXW-18/11/A、
YBLXW-18/11M/A
YBLXW-18/11/C、
YBLXW-18/11M/C YBLXW-18/11/CQ、
YBLXW-18/11M/CQ YBLXW-18/11/D、
YBLXW-18/11M/D
> >> O-92

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-028、028A、029、029A
Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX W-02 □ □
A: in need of time for changeover

8: lever with roller
9: lever without roller
Micro-gap
Travel switch
New product code

4
4
Altitude ≤2000mm
Between electrified components and the earth (AC 1890V)
Voltage withstands
Between open distance of the contacts (AC 1140V)
Automatic control and operation limitation of machine tools and machines,
Application range
operation or procedure control of transmission mechanism.
O-93 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-028、YBLXW-028A YBLXW-029、YBLXW-029A
44max
2-φ3.5+0.3 26±0.25
19max
Model
Operating YBLXW-028 YBLXW-028A YBLXW-029 YBLXW-029A
performances
OF 0.8~1.4N 0.8~1.4N 0.2~0.4N 0.2~0.4N

PT 1~3.5mm 1~3.5mm 2~5mm 2~5mm
OT ≥1mm ≥1mm ≥0.8mm ≥0.8mm
MD ≤0.7mm ≤0.7mm ≤0.7mm ≤0.7mm
Time for contact changeover - ≤0.04s - ≤0.04s
> >> O-94

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-JLXK1/11 Micro-gap Switch

1. General
Contacting types
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NC) 2(NC)
YBLXW-JLXK1/11
40
12.7
φ2.4
18
15
9.4
19
13.8
33
48
O-95 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-N/A(D2F) Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC

Rated loading AC 60VA DC 10W
Contacting resistance ≤100mΩ
4
4
Operating force(OF) ≤0.8N
YBLXW-N/A
5.5
3
1
1.2
5
NC NO C
6
φ2
0.6
6.5 1
5.8
5 5
12.8
> >> O-96

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-N/B Micro-gap Switch

1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC

4
4
YBLXW-N/B
20
2.6
8.5
3
2.3
8.5
11.5
11.2 5.6
7.7
O-97 > >>

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-N/C Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
COM NO NC

4
YBLXW-N/C
20
7.2 3.2
10.8
NO NC
2.8
3.2
9.5
φ2.4
8.8 7.2 6.4
> >> O-98

Micro-gap Switches
YBLXW-N/D Boat-shaped
Micro-gap Switch
1. General
Contacting types
YBLXW-N/D101 YBLXW-N/D103
COM NO NC COM NO NC

Rated operational power AC 76VA DC 28W
Electric life(operation) 30×104
YBLXW-N/D101 YBLXW-N/D103
15
15
3.5
3.5
21 10
21 10
2
2
13
13
1A 1 10 1A 1 10
7 7
7 4.8 4.8
7.2
7.2
20.6 12
12
20.6
O-99 > >>

Limit Switches
YBLX-11/2 Dual-Circuits
Limit Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NC COM NC
YBLX-11/2
65 16
φ6.2
16
LX11-2
96
limit switch
66 33
95±0.4
110
> >> O-100

Foot Pedal Switches

YBLT-1 Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NO NO
NC NC
Rated voltage: 380V Conventional heating current: 5A Material of the case: cast iron YBLT-1/11
80±0.6 96max
4-φ8.6
210±0.925
192
310max
28
34
185
O-101 > >>

Foot Pedal Switches

YBLT-2, YBLT-3, YBLT-4
Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
Rated voltage: 380V Conventional heathing current: 3A Material of the case: Armor plate of 1mm thickness YBLT-2
64 52
50±0.5
4-φ5.8
120±0.7
132
YBLT-3 YBLT-4
100
80
86±0.2 3-φ5.4
188±0.4
200
100
≈50
135
O
> >> O-102

Foot Pedal Switches

YBLT-EKW/5A/B Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
Rated voltage: AC 380V, DC 220V Conventional heathing current: 5A Switch components: YBLX-19/K
Material of the case: cast aluminum alloy
YBLT-EKW/5A/B
66
48
50±0.5
3-φ5.2
120±0.7
132
114
O-103 > >>

Foot Pedal Switches

YBLT-YDT1/11, YBLT-YDT1/14
Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NO NC NC NO
2. Type Designation
YBLT-YDT1 / □
11: 1NO+1NC contact;

14: 2NO+2NC contact
Foot pedal switch
Improved product
Rated voltage: AC 380V, DC 220V Conventional heathing current: 5A

Switch components: YBLX-19K Material of the case: cast iron
YBLT-YDT1/14 YBLT-YDT1/11
106
15
72±0.6
3-φ6.6
216±0.925
250
56
140
132
> >> O-104

Foot Pedal Switches

YBLT-FS/1, YBLT-FS/2, YBLT-FS/3
Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NO NC NC NO
YBLT-FS/1
104
21
70
28
YBLT-FS/2 YBLT-FS/3
50±0.4
65
50
60
φ5.2 42
76±0.4
116
124
70
56 4 52 4
22 22
O-105 > >>

Foot Pedal Switches
YBLT-JDK Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NC NO NO NC
Rated voltage: AC 380V, DC 220V Conventional heathing current: 5A Switch components: YBLX-3/11K
Material of the case: cast aluminum alloy YBLT-JDK/11
70
66 70
44
6
120
8
186
32
86
> >> O-106

Foot Pedal Switches
YBLT-FS Foot Pedal Switch
1. General
Contacting types
NO NC NC NO
YBLT-FS/201
82 32
82
74 22
O-107 > >>

Pull-cord Switches
YBLX-KLT2/Ⅱ Pull-cord Switch

1. General
Contacting types
NO NO NC NC
2. Type Designation
YB LX-KL T2-□
Restoration mode:
Ⅰ－automatic
Ⅱ－manual
Dual-directims operation
Pendant pull switch
Master electric appliance
Improved prodvct
Rated current 2A
Rated voltage 380V
Number of Normal Open contact 1 pair
Number of Normal Close contact 1 pair
Altitude ≤2000m
4
4
Electric life 30×10
YBLX-KLT2/Ⅱ
230 74
152 42
192
φ142
YBLX-KLT2/11
130
86
12
2-φ12 100
120±0.4
> >> O-108

Universal Change-over Switches

LW2B Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, AC 380V, DC 220V;
1.2 Application: applied for control and change-over in the
circuit. in addition, it also can be used in various electric
meters and service motor as change-over switch;
1.3 Standard: IEC60947-5-1.
2. Type Designation
LW 2 B-□ □/□ □-□ □ □
Non-standard model (A)
Limit device: limit device-equipped

(mark with "X"); no limit device (no mark)
Orientation angle: 45°positioning

(mark with "8"); 90°positioning
(no mark)
Knob type: having model 1, 4, 6, 7

and 8(1-indicator light type,4-setting
type, 6-selfreset type, 7-key type,
8-setting self reset type
Panel type: Square type

(indicate with "F")
Round type (indicate with "O")
Contactor type(model 1, 1a, 2, 4, 5,

6, 6a, 7, 8, 10, 20 and 40, which
can be freely combined.)
Structure form;
Setting type (blank); self restoration type (W);
setting self reset type (Z) indicator light position
type with handle (Y);
indicator light self reset type with handle (YZ);
setting type with key handle (H);
Code refers to how many times has adopted the standards
Universal change-over switch
3. Technical Data
AC-15 DC-13
Items Double Single Double Single
breaking points breaking point breaking points breaking point
operational voltage (V) 380 220 220 220

operational current (A) 2 1 1 0.5
Insulation voltage (V) 550 550 550 550
Heating current (A) 10 10 10 10
Electric life (operations) 10000 10000 6050 6050
Mechanical life (operations) 20000 20000 20000 20000
Operating frequency (operations/h) 120 120 120 120
O-109 > >>


4. Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram of LW2B Universal Change-over Switch and
Transmission and distribution division & control switch
Type LW2B-1.1/F4-X Type LW2B-2.2/F4-8X
1 1 2 2
2 1 6 5 2 1 6 5
3 4 7 8 3 4 7 8
Handle direction Grip angle Handle direction Grip angle
0° 1-3 5-7 -45° 2-4 6-8
90° 2-4 6-8 0°
45° 1-3 5-7
Type LW2B-5.5/F4-X Type LW2B-W.6.6.6/F6

5 5 6 6 6
2 1 6 5 2 1 6 5 10 9
3 4 7 8 3 4 7 8 11 12
Handle direction Grip angle Handle direction Grip angle
-90° 2-3 6-7 -45° 1-2 5-6 9-10
0° 1-2 5-6 0° 1-4 5-8 9-12
90° 1-4 5-8 45° 1-4 5-8 9-12
Type LW2B-Z.1a.4.20/F8
1a 4 20
Closing 6 5 10 9
2 1
Breaking
7 8 11 12
Panel indicates Handle direction Grip angle 3 4
After closing 0° 1-3 9-11

Prepare breaking -90° 2-4 9-10
Breaking -135° 6-7 10-12
After breaking -90° 10-12
2-4
Prepare closing 0° 9-10
1-3
Closing 45° 5-8 9-11
Type LW2B-Z.1a.4.6a.40.20/F8
1a 4 6a 40 20
Closing
2 1 6 5 10 9 14 13 18 17
Breaking
7 8 11 12 15 16 19 20
Panel indicates Handle direction Grip angle 3 4
After closing 0° 1-3 9-10 13-16 17-19

Prepare breaking -90° 2-4 10-11 13-14 17-18
Breaking -135° 6-7 10-11 14-15 18-20
After breaking -90° 2-4 10-11 14-15 18-20
Prepare closing 0° 1-3 9-10 13-14 17-18
Closing 45° 5-8 9-12 13-16 17-19
> >> O-110


Type LW2B-H.7.7/F4-X 1a 1 2 4
1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1 6 5
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Handle direction Grip angle 3 4 7 8
0° 1-3 5-7
-90° 2-4 6-8
5 7 6 6a 8 10 20 40
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4

74
84
Lmax
64
Self-reset type：Lmax=130+18n
Other types：Lmax=141+18n In the formula, n stands for section number of contacting system
Dimensions of LW2B-Z mounting holes Mounting holes dimension of other type
φ19 2-φ8.5 2-φ8.5 φ19
44 44
O-111 > >>


LW5D Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, AC 500V/DC 440V;
1.2 Application: applied for change-over of circuit. In addition,
it also can be used to directly control 5.5kW three-phase
squirrel-cage motor;
2. Type Designation
2.1 Type applied for master control
LW 5 D-16 □ □/□
Section number of contacting system

Series number of operating diagram
Feature code (see in table below)
Conventional heating current value
Code refers to how many times has adopted

the standards
2.2 Type used for direct control of electromotor
LW 5 D - 16/5.5 □ / □

(1~16 sections)
Purpose code:Q1: Direct starting
Q2: Motor starting N: Reversing transfer
S: double speed motor change
Sn: double speed motor change, reversible;
Max. Capacity of controlled electromotor
Conventional heating current
Code refers to how many times

has adopted standards

3. Technical Data
Items AC-15 DC-13 AC-15 AC-3

Ue(V) 500 380 220 440 220 110 110 380 500
Ie(A) 2.0 2.6 4.6 0.14 0.27 0.55 0.82 12 11
Electric life 20×104 20×104 19.5×104
Operating frequency (operations/h) 300
4
Insulation voltage (V) 550V
Heating current (A) 16A
O
> >> O-112


4. Classifications of operating mode and operating machine position combination
Utilization Code of
operating mode Position of operating handle
classification
。。
A 0 45
Self-locking 。。
B 。 45
45 0
。。
C 0 45
。。。
D 45 0 45
。。。。
E 45 0 45 90
。。。。。
F 90 45 0 45 90
。。。。。。
G 90 45 0 45 90 135
。。。。。。。
H 135 90 45 0 45 90 135
Orientation 。。。。。。。
I 135 90 45 。 45 90 135 180
type 0
。。。。。。。。。
J 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120
。。。。。。。。。。
K 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。
L 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。
M 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
。。
N 45 45
。。。
P 90 0 90
5. Classifications
It can be classified into application for master control and direct control over 5.5kW motor according to purposes
Operating modes can be classified into orientation type and self-restoration type.
The Section number of contact system can be classified in to 16 kinds, which are from 1 to 16.
Appearance of operation mechanism can be classified into rotary type and ball headed handle type.
Wiring diagram of LW5D-16 Voltage, switch current

measurement change-over switch and universal control switches
Direct starter motor switch
LW5D-16/YH1/2 0 UA UB UC LW5D-16/Q1/2 0 1
LW112-16/YH1/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW112-16/Q/2 0° 45°
A 1-2 × A 1-2 ×
B 3-4 × B 3-4 M ×
V
C 5-6 C 5-6
× ×
0 7-8
× × ×
Reversible switch
LW5D-16/5.5N/3 1 0 2
LW112-16/5.5N/3 -45° 0° 45°
× ×
A 1-2
3-4 × ×
B 5-6 ×
7-8 ×
C 9-10
M ×
11-12
×
Line voltage switching commutation

LW5D-16/YH2/2 0 UAB UBC UCA LW5D-16/YH3/3 0 UAB UBC UCA
LW112-16/YH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW112-16/YH3/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
A 1-2 × ×
A 1-2
3-4 × ×
V 3-4
B 5-6 × × ×
B 5-6
C 7-8 7-8
V
× × ×
C 9-10
11-12 ×
×
O-113 > >>


Two-speed motor speed switch
LW5D-16/5.5S/4 0° 1 2
LW112-16/5.5S/4 -45° 0° 45°
×
A 1-2 ×
3-4
B 5-6 ×
7-8
×
C 9-10
11-12 ×
13-14
15-16
M ×
×
×
Current commutation switch LW5D-16/LH2/2 0 IA IB IC

LW5D-16/LH1/2 IA IB IC LW112-16/LH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270°
LW112-16/LH1/2 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° A B C
× × × × ×
A B C 1-2
× ×
1-2 3-4 × × × × ×
× × × × A
3-4 5-6
A × × × × ×
5-6 × × 7-8
7-8
× × × × × × × × ×
LW5D-16/LH3/3 0 IA IB IC
LW112-16/LH3/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
A B C × × × × × × ×
1-2
× × ×
3-4
5-6
× × × × × × ×
A
N
7-8 × × × ×
9-10
× × × × × × ×
11-12
× × ×
Two-speed motor variable speed reversible switch

LW5D-16/5.5SN/6 Rapid Stop Slow Stop Slow Stop Rapid Stop
LW112-16/5.5SN/6 -135° -90° -45° 0° 45° 90° 135° 180°
×
A 1-2 ×
3-4 ×
B 5-6
×
7-8
C 9-10 × ×
11-12 × ×
13-14 × ×
15-16
× ×
17-18
M ×
19-20
21-22 ×
23-24
×
×
Current commutation switch

LW5D-16/LH5/4 0 IA IB IC
LW112-16/LH5/4 0° 45° 90° 135° 180° 225° 270° 315°
A B C × × × × × × ×
1-2
× × × × × × ×
3-4
× × × × × × ×
5-6
× × × × × ×
7-8
A × × ×
9-10
11-12 × × × ×
13-14 × × ×
15-16
× × ×
O
> >> O-114


0 1 No. of 0 1 No. of 1 0 2 No. of
Type Grade Type Grade Type Grade
-45° 45° sessions 0° 45° sessions -45° 0° 45° sessions
1-2 × 1-2 × 1-2 ×
LW5D-16 N0296/1 1 LW5D-16 C0071/1 1 LW5D-16 D0083/1 1
3-4 × 3-4 × 3-4 ×
5-6 × 5-6 × 5-6 ×
LW5D-16 N0616/2 2 LW5D-16 C5391/2 2 LW5D-16 D0414/2 2
7-8 × 7-8 × 7-8 ×
9-10 × 9-10 × 9-10 ×
LW5D-16 N0936/3 3 LW5D-16 C5714/3 3 LW5D-16 D0723/3 3
11-12 × 11-12 × 11-12 ×
13-14 × 13-14 × 13-14 ×
LW5D-16 N1255/4 4 LW5D-16 C6031/4 4 LW5D-16 D1050/4 4
15-16 × 15-16 × 15-16 ×
17-18 × 17-18 × 17-18 ×
LW5D-16 N6567/5 5 LW5D-16 C6351/5 5 LW5D-16 D1369/5 5
19-20 × 19-20 × 19-20 ×
21-22 × 21-22 × 21-22 ×
LW5D-16 N6899/6 6 LW5D-16 C6671/6 6 LW5D-16 D1689/6 6
23-24 × 23-24 × 23-24 ×
25-26 × 25-26 × 25-26 ×
LW5D-16 N7217/7 7 LW5D-16 C6991/7 7 LW5D-16 D2001/7 7
27-28 × 27-28 × 27-28 ×
29-30 × 29-30 × 29-30 ×
LW5D-16 N7535/8 8 LW5D-16 C7311/8 8 LW5D-16 D2324/8 8
31-32 × 31-32 × 31-32 ×
33-34 × 33-34 × 33-34 ×
LW5D-16 N7790/9 9 LW5D-16 C7600/9 9 LW5D-16 D7621/9 9
35-36 × 35-36 × 35-36 ×
37-38 × 37-38 × 37-38 ×
LW5D-16 N7891/10 10 LW5D-16 C7892/10 10 LW5D-16 D7901/10 10
39-40 × 39-40 × 39-40 ×
41-42 × 41-42 × 41-42 ×
LW5D-16 N3351/11 11 LW5D-16 C8000/11 11 LW5D-16 D8181/11 11
43-44 × 43-44 × 43-44 ×
45-46 × 45-46 × 45-46 ×
LW5D-16/12.T 12 LW5D-16/12.T 12 LW5D-16/12.T 12
47-48 × 47-48 × 47-48 ×
49-50 × 49-50 × 49-50 ×
LW5D-16/13.T 13 LW5D-16/13.T 13 LW5D-16/13.T 13
51-52 × 51-52 × 51-52 ×
53-54 × 53-54 × 53-54 ×
LW5D-16/14.T 14 LW5D-16/14.T 14 LW5D-16/14.T 14
55-56 × 55-56 × 55-56 ×
57-58 × 57-58 × 57-58 ×
LW5D-16 N9081/15 15 LW5D-16/15.T 15 LW5D-16/15.T 15
59-60 × 59-60 × 59-60 ×
61-62 × 61-62 × 61-62 ×
LW5D-16/16.T 16 LW5D-16/16.T 16 LW5D-16 D4131/16 16
63-64 × 63-64 × 63-64 ×
0 1 2 No. of 0 1 2 3 4 No. of
Type Grade Type Grade
0° -45° -45° sessions 0° 45° 90° 135° 180° sessions
1-2 × unique 1-2 ×
unique 1 1
3-4 × LW5D-16/1 3-4 ×
LW5D-16/2 D111 5-6 × LW5D-16 E5504/2 5-6 ×
2 2
7-8 × LW5D-16 F5514/2 7-8 ×
unique
9-10 × 9-10 ×
LW5D-16/3 D222 3 3
11-12 × 11-12 ×
LW5D-16 F6616/4
13-14 × 13-14 ×
unique 4 4
15-16 × 15-16 ×
LW5D-16/5 D333 17-18 × 17-18 ×
5 5
19-20 × 19-20 ×
unique LW5D-16 F7717/6
21-22 × 21-22 ×
LW5D-16/6 D444 6 6
23-24 × 23-24 ×
25-26 × 25-26 ×
unique 7 7
27-28 × 27-28 ×
LW5D-16/8 D555 LW5D-16 F8818/8
29-30 × 29-30 ×
8 8
31-32 × 31-32 ×
unique
33-34 × 33-34 ×
LW5D-16/9 D666 9 9
35-36 × unique 35-36 ×
37-38 × LW5D-16/10 37-38 ×
unique 10 10
39-40 × 39-40 ×
LW5D-16/11 D777 ×
41-42 41-42 ×
11 11
43-44 × unique 43-44 ×
unique
45-46 × LW5D-16/12 45-46 ×
LW5D-16/12 D888 12 12
47-48 × 47-48 ×
49-50 × 49-50 ×
unique 13 13
51-52 unique 51-52 ×
LW5D-16/14 D999 14
53-54 LW5D-16/14 53-54 ×
14
55-56 ×
Note: the “unique” one is for special switch products,
it should be ordered by the diagram. Note: the “unique” one is for special switch products,
it should be ordered by the diagram.
O-115 > >>


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. of
Type Grade
0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° 330° sessions
1-2 ×
LW5D-16D/1.T 1
3-4 ×
LW5D-16 E5504/2 5-6 ×
2
LW5D-16 F5514/2 7-8 ×
9-10 ×
LW5D-16 H5884/3.T 3
11-12 ×
13-14 ×
LW5D-16 J6217/4.T 4
15-16 ×
17-18 ×
LW5D-16 L6557/5.T 5
19-20 ×
21-22 ×
LW5D-16/6.T 6
23-24
Capacitor main cabinet has zero position, automatic, manual change-over switches
Automatic Stop Manual No. of

Type Grade
45° 0° 45° sessions
1-2 ×
LW5D-16 D0081/1 1
3-4 ×
5-6 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/2 2
7-8 ×
9-10 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/3 3
11-12 ×
13-14 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/4 4
15-16 ×
17-18 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/5 5
19-20 ×
21-22 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/6 6
23-24 ×
25-26 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/7 7
27-28 ×
29-30 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/8 8
31-32 ×
33-34 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/9 9
35-36 ×
37-38 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/10 10
39-40 ×
Capacitor main cabinet has zero position, automatic, manual change-over switches
A B C D E
Type Automatic Stop Manual 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 No. of

Grade Note
sessions
1-2 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
1
3-4 ×
5-6 ×
2
7-8 × × × × × × × × × × × ×
9-10 × × × × × × × × × × × A: capacitor
LW5D-16 TM703/3 3 main cabinet 2 loop
11-12 × × × × × × × × × ×
13-14 × × × × × × × × × B: capacitor
15-16 × × × × × × × ×
17-18 × × × × × × × C: capacitor
19-20 × × × × × ×
21-22 × × × × × D: capacitor
23-24 × × × ×
25-26 × × × E: capacitor
LW5D-16 TM707/7
27-28 × ×
7 main cabinet 10 loop
O
29-30 × × F: capacitor
31-32 ×
> >> O-116


Capacitor and auxiliary switch cabinetA B C D E
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 No. of
Type Grade Note
0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° sessions
1-2 × × × × × × × × × × A: capacitor
LW5D-16 D5088/2 1
3-4 × × × × × × × × × main cabinet 2 loop
LW5D-16 E5514/2 5-6 × × × × × × × × B: capacitor
2
LW5D-16 F5503/3 7-8 × × × × × × × main cabinet 4 loop
LW5D-16 C5855/3 9-10 × × × × × × C: capacitor
3
LW5D-16 H5889/3 11-12 × × × × × main cabinet 6 loop
LW5D-16 I6211/4 13-14 × × × × D: capacitor
4
LW5D-16 I6212/4 15-16 × × × main cabinet 8 loop
Unique LW5D-16/5.T 17-18 × × E: capacitor
5
LW5D-16 L6560/5 19-20 × main cabinet 10 loop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. of
Type Grade
0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180° 210° 240° 270° 300° 330° sessions
1-2 ×
LW5D-16 C02/1 1
3-4 ×
5-6 ×
LW5D-16 D022/2 2
7-8 ×
9-10 ×
LW5D-16 E5949/3 3
11-12 ×
13-14 ×
LW5D-16 E1131/4T 4
15-16 ×
17-18 ×
LW5D-16 G6700/5 5
19-20 ×
21-22 ×
LW5D-16 H6844/6 6
23-24 ×
25-26 ×
LW5D-16 I7228/7 7
27-28 ×
29-30 ×
LW5D-16 J7542/8 8
31-32 ×
33-34 ×
LW5D-16 K0229/9 9
35-36 ×
37-38 ×
LW5D-16 L8067/10 10
39-40 ×
41-42 ×
LW5D-16 M8341/11 11
43-44 ×
The main cabinet switch capacitor

Automatic 1 Stop Manual No. of
Type Grade
0° 30° 0° 45° sessions
1-2 ×
LW5D-16 D0081/1 1
3-4 ×
5-6 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/2 2
7-8 ×
9-10 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/3 3
11-12 ×
13-14 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/4 4
15-16 ×
17-18 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/5 5
19-20 ×
21-22 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/6 6
23-24 ×
25-26 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/7 7
27-28 ×
29-30 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/8 8
31-32 ×
33-34 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/9 9
35-36 ×
37-38 ×
LW5D-16 TD710/10 10
39-40 ×
O-117 > >>


6. Overall figure and installation dimension
22max
4-φ5.5
φ15
1 2
φ70
72
72
L 27max
Orientation type: L=45+16n
1~5 Installation panel thickness
φ55
Self-reset: L=52+16n, in the formula n Orientation and self-reset type

stands for section number of contact system. mounting dimension
> >> O-118


LW6 Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
1.2 Application: applied for change-over of circuits under
various conditions;
2. Type Designation
LW 6-□/□ □
Series number of operating diagram
Feature code of orientation
Number of contact base
3. Technical Data
Items AC-15 DC-13

Operational voltage (V) 380 220
Operational current (A) 5 0.6
Insulation voltage (V) 550 550
Heating current (A) 5 5
4
10×104
Mechanical life (operations) 100×10 4
100×104
Operating frequency (operations/h) 120 120
4. Classifications
4.1 Please refer to table below for contact base classification.
Model Number of contact base Number of contact pairs Collocation form

LW6-1 1 3
LW6-2 2 6
LW6-3 3 9
LW6-4 4 12
Single row
LW6-5 5 15
LW6-6 6 18
LW6-8 8 24
LW6-10 10 30
O-119 > >>

4.2 It can be classified according to orientation feature code, please refer to table below.
Operating mode code Position of operating handle

。。
A 0 30
。。。
B 30 0 30
。。。。
C 30 0 30 60
。。。。。
D 60 30 0 30 60
。。。。。。
E 60 30 0 30 60 90
。。。。。。。
F 90 60 30 0 30 60 90
。。。。。。。。
G 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120
。。。。。。。。。
H 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120
。。。。。。。。。。
I 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。
J 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。。
K 180 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
5. Overall and Mounting Dimension
φ56
37max φ60
L=24.5+13N
Thickness of mounting plate 2~10
46
3-φ4.5
°
4-φ4.5
0
120
12
46
φ10 φ38
φ57
> >> O-120


1. General
1.2 Application: applied for change-over of circuits under various
conditions; In addition, it also can be applied to control
three-phase squirrel-cage motor with small capacity;
2. Type Designation
LW 8-□-□ □/□ □
Panel form: Square (without remark);

round (with Y)
Section number of contact system:
orientation type is of 10 kinds which is
1~10; self-restoration: 1~3
Serial number of operating diagram

Feature code
2.2 Type applied for direct control of motor

LW 8-□·□/□
Max. Capacity of controllable motor
Purpose code: Q1: direct start;

N1: reversible conversion
S1: double speed motor change
3. Technical Data
LW8-10 LW8-20
Items
AC-15 DC-13 AC-3 AC-15 DC-13 AC-3
operational voltage (V) 380 220 380 380 220 380
operational current (A) 2.6 0.27 5 2.6 0.23 12
Insulation voltage (V) 550
Heating current (A) 10A 20A
4
Electric life (operations) 10×10 5
5×10 10×105 5×104
Operating frequency (operations/h) 120
O-121 > >>

Utilization Code of
classification
。
A 0° 30
Self-locking 。
。
B 30 0° 30
。
C 0° 60
。。
D 60 0° 60
。。。。
E 90 30 0° 30 90
。。。。
F 120 60 0° 60 120
。。。。。
G 120 60 0° 60 120 180
。。。
H 30 0° 30 60
。。。
Orientation I 60 。 0° 30 60
30
。。。。
type J 60 。 0° 30 60 90
30
。。。。。
K 90 60 。 0° 30 60 90
30
。。。。。。
L 90 60 。 0° 30 60 90 120
30
。。。。。。。
M 120 90 60 。 0° 30 60 90 120
30
。。
N 30 30
。。
P 90 0° 90
。。。
R 0° 90 180 270
5 Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram of LW8 voltage and current measurement
change-over switch and universal control switch
Phase voltage commutation switch
LW8-10-T.YH1/2 0 UA UB UC LW8-10-T.YH3/2 UA UB UC
LW32-20-T.YH1/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-T.YH3/2 -90° 0° 90°
A 1-2 × A 1-2 ×
B 3-4 × B 3-4 ×
V V
5-6 5-6
C × C ×
7-8 7-8
N × × × N × × ×
LW8-10-T.YH1/3 0 UA UB UC LW8-10-T.YH2/2 0 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20-T.YH1/3 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-T.YH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270°
A 1-2 × A 1-2 ×
B 3-4 × 3-4 ×
5-6 V
C V × B 5-6 × ×
N 9-10 C 7-8
× × × × ×
LW8-10-T.YH4/2 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20-T.YH4/2 90° 180° 270°
A 1-2 × ×
3-4 × ×
V
B 5-6 ×
C 7-8
×
Line voltage commutation switch

LW8-10-YH2/3 0 UAB UBC UCA LW8-10-YH3/3 0 UAB UBC UCA
LW32-20-YH2/3 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-YH3/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
× × ×
B 1-2 A 1-2
3-4
×
× O
A 3-4 × B 5-6
V V
7-8 × 7-8
×
C 9-10
C 9-10 11-12 ×
× × ×
> >> O-122


Three-phase line voltage and phase voltage
three-phase commutation switch
LW8-10-YH5/4 UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN LW8-10-YH5/3 UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN
LW32-20-YH5/4 -135° -90° -45° 0° -45° 90° 135° LW32-20-YH5/3 -135° -90° -45° 0° -45° 90° 135°
× × × ×
C 1-2 × × C 1-2
B 3-4 3-4
× × ×
5-6
7-8 V × B 5-6
V
9-10 × × 7-8
A 11-12 9-10
× × A × ×
N 13-14
15-16 × N 11-12 × × ×
× × × ×
Current measurement change-over switch

LW8-10LH2/2 0 IA IB IC LW8-10LH2/4 0 IA IB IC
LW32-20LH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20LH2/4 0° 90° 180° 270°
ABC × × × × ×
1-2 A BC N
× × × × ×
3-4 A 1-2
5-6 × × × × ×
3-4
7-8
× × 5-6 × × ×
7-8 A
9-10 ×
11-12
13-14
×
15-16 ×
×
LW8-10LH3/4 0 IA IB IC
LW32-20LH3/4 0° 90° 180° 270°
× × ×
A BC
1-2
× × ×
5-6
× × ×
7-8
9-10 ×
A
13-14
15-16 ×
×
Direct starting, running carve off Forward and reverse direct starting, operating off
LW8-10/Q1/2.2 0 1 LW8-10/N1/2.2 1 0 2
LW8-20/Q1/5.5 LW8-20/N1/5.5
LW32-20/Q1 0° 60° LW32-20/N1 60° 0° 60°
Panel A 1-2
× Panel C 1-2 ×
B 3-4 A
× 3-4 ×
5-6
C 5-6 × M ×
7-8
A 7-8
×
B 9-10
11-12 × ×
× ×
Two-speed motor variable speed reversible switch

LW8-10/S1/2.2 1 0 2
LW8-20/S1/5.5
LW32-20/S1 60° 0° 60°
1-2
×
A 3-4 × ×
5-6 ×
B 7-8
×
9-10 M ×
11-12
13-14
×
C ×
15-16
O-123 > >>


1~3 Mounting plate
0
1 2
50
26.5
31～33 L=18x10n(LW8-10)
50
L=28x13n(LW8-20)
1~5 Mounting plate
18.5~22.5 L=35+10n φ39
4-φ4.5
φ10
5
33
36
φ30.5
36
> >> O-124


LW112 (LW12)
Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
various conditions; In addition, it also can be applied to
control three-phase squirrel-cage motor with small capacity;
2. Type Designation
LW 112-16 □ /□ □ □
Section number of contact system:

(1~12 sections)
Change-over code: 3: 30°; 4: 45°;
6: 60°; 9: 90°;
Operation mode: Z: Self-reset
Blank: Orientation
D: Orientation & self-reset

LW 112-16/5.5 □-□
Section number of contact system
Q1: direct start; (two sections)
Q2: Direct start (three sections)
N: reversible conversion
S: double speed motor change
Sn: double speed motor change,
reversible
Max. Power of controlled three-
phase cage-squirrel
Conductive motor
Design code
3. Technical Data
Operational voltage (V) 380 220 380 380
Operational current (A) 2.6 0.27 5 12
Heating current (A) 16
4
20×104 19.5×104 0.5×10
4
4
Operating frequency (operations/h) 300 operations/h (Under the condition of AC-4, the value is 120 operations/h)

50
1~6 Thickness of mounting plate
2-φ4.5 φ8
50
30
I L
L=31+13.5 n (Orientation type) L=43+13.5n (self-reset type, orientation self reset type)
L=58+13.2 (Orientation self reset type with free travel contact), I=33~46
O-125 > >>


LW15-16
Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
2. Type Designation
LW 15-16-□ □/□-□
Tropical products code (TH)

Section number of contacting system:
Orientation type: 1~12 sections, in all 12
kinds Self-restoration type: 1~6 type, in
all 6 kinds
Feature code

LW 15-□/□ □/□

Purpose code : Q1: direct start; N: reversible conversion
S: double speed motor change Sn: double speed motor change, reversible
Rated power of controllable AC three-phase electromotor
3. Technical Data
Operational voltage (V) 380 220 380 380
Operational current (A) 2.6 0.27 12 10
Power (kw) 5.5 4.5
Heating current (A) 16
4 4
Electric life (operations) 20×104 6×10 3×10 1×104
4
Operating frequency (operations/h) 300 (AC-4, 120)
> >> O-126


Utilization Code of
Position of operating handle
classification operating mode
。。
A 0 45
Self-reset 。
B 。。 45
45 0
。。
C 0 45
。。。
D 45 0 45
。。。。
E 45 0 45 90
。。。。。
F 90 45 0 45 90
。。。。。。
G 90 45 0 45 90 135
。。。。。。。
H 135 90 45 0 45 90 135
。。。。。。。。
Orientation I 135 90 30 0 45 90 135 180
。。。。。。。。。
type J 120 90 60 30 30 60 90 120
0
。。。。。。。。。。。
K 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。
L 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。
M 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
。。
N 45 45
。。。
P 90 0 90
。。。。
R 0 90 180 270
Self-reset type 31.5+13n

Orientation type 35+13n 30~35
36
2-φ3.5
51
16
36
φ8
4-φ4.5
48
O-127 > >>


1. General
2. Type Designation
LW 32-□ □ □ □/□

Feature code
Transferring angle code / Specification code
Note: Transferring angle code: 30°(3)45°(4)60°(6)90°
(9)Self-reset 60° orientation (36) 45°self-reset 90°
orientation (49)

LW 32-□/□ □ □

Purpose code
Rated power of controllable AC three-phase motor

Note: When purpose code is Q, S, N , 60° change-over should be
taken; when purpose code is SN, 45°change-over should be taken.
2.3 Change-over switch applied for main circuit

LW 32-□/□
Poles 2=2P; 3=3P, 4=4P

Rated operational current of change-over switch
Note: 60°change-over for change-over switch for main circuit
application
Purpose code Purposes

Q Direct starting O
N Reversing conversion
S Double speed electromotor changing
SN Double speed electromotor changing, reversing
EU
> >> O-128


3. Technical Data
AC-21A AC-22A AC-23A AC-2A AC-3A AC-4A AC-15A DC-13A
Ue(V)
Ie(A) Ie(A) Ie(A) P(kW) Ie(A) P(kW) Ie(A) P(kW) Ie(A) P(kW) Ie(A) Ie(A)
440 20 20 15 7.5 15 7.5 11 5.5 3.5 1.5 2.4

240 0.27
120 5
Off-load 8500 Electric life/operations

Operating 20×104 6×104
cycles On-load 1500
Mechanical life/operations
Total 10000 60×10
4
4. Classifications
Divided into main circuit switch application, motor direct control and master control applic ation according to purpose.
Divided into setting type, self reset type and setting self reset type according to operation mode.
Divided into setting type 1-12 sections, self reset type 1-3 sections and motor direct control 1-6 sections according to the section
number of contact system.
Divided into 30°, 45°, 60°and 90°according to operation angle.
Divided into four kinds below according to panel shape and scale.
Large rectangle panel Large square panel Small rectangle panel Small square panel
Length Width Length Width Length Width Length Width
80 64 64 64 60 48 48 48
Utilization Code of
classification
。。。。
A 0 30 0 45
Self-reset type 。。。。。。
B 30 0 30 45 0 45
。。。。。。。。
C 0 90 0 30 0 45 0 60
。。。。。。。。。。。。
D 90 0 90 30 0 30 45 0 45 60 0 60
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
E 90 0 90 180。 30 0 30 60 45 0 45 90 90 30 30 60
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
F 60 30 0 30 60 90 45 0 45 90 90 30 30 90 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
G 60 30 0 30 60 90 90 45 0 45 90 135 150 90 30 30 90 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
Orientation H 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 135 90 45 0 45 90 135
type I 。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 135 90 45 0 45 90 135 180
。。。。。。。。。
J 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120
K 。。。。。。。。。。
120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。
L 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150
。。。。。。。。。。。。
M 150 120 90 60 30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
。。。。
N 45 45 30 30
Orientation & 。。。。。。
30 0 60 90 0 45
Z 。。。。
self-reset type 135 90 0 45
O-129 > >>


Wiring diagram of LW32 voltage and current measurement
change-over switch and universal control switch
Phase voltage commutation switch
LW8-10-T.YH1/2 0 UA UB UC LW8-10-T.YH3/2 UA UB UC
LW32-20-T.YH1/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-T.YH3/2 -90° 0° 90°
A 1-2 × A 1-2 ×
B 3-4 × B 3-4 ×
V V
C 5-6 C 5-6
× ×
N 7-8 N 7-8
× × × × × ×
LW8-10-T.YH1/3 0 UA UB UC LW8-10-T.YH2/2 0 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20-T.YH1/3 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-T.YH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270°
A 1-2 × A 1-2 ×
B 3-4 × 3-4 ×
5-6 V
C V × B 5-6 × ×
N 9-10 C 7-8
× × × × ×
LW8-10-T.YH4/2 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20-T.YH4/2 90° 180° 270°
A 1-2 × ×
3-4 × ×
V
B 5-6 ×
C 7-8
×
Line voltage commutation switch

LW8-10-YH2/3 0 UAB UBC UCA LW8-10-YH3/3 0 UAB UBC UCA
LW32-20-YH2/3 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20-YH3/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
× × ×
B 1-2 A 1-2 ×
3-4
A 3-4 × B 5-6 ×
V V
7-8 × 7-8 ×
C 9-10
C 9-10 11-12 ×
× × ×
Three-phase line voltage and phase voltage

three-phase commutation switch
LW8-10-YH5/4 UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN LW8-10-YH5/3 UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN
LW32-20-YH5/4 -135° -90° -45° 0° -45° 90° 135° LW32-20-YH5/3 -135° -90° -45° 0° -45° 90° 135°
× × × ×
C 1-2 × × C 1-2
B 3-4 3-4
× × ×
5-6
7-8 V × B 5-6
V
9-10 × × 7-8
A 11-12 × × 9-10 ×
A ×
N 13-14
15-16 × N 11-12 × × ×
× × × ×
Current measurement change-over switch
LW8-10LH2/2 0 IA IB IC LW8-10LH2/4 0 IA IB IC
LW32-20LH2/2 0° 90° 180° 270° LW32-20LH2/4 0° 90° 180° 270°
ABC × × × × ×
1-2 A BC N
× × × × ×
3-4 A 1-2
5-6 × × × × ×
3-4
7-8
× × 5-6 × × ×
7-8 A
9-10 ×
11-12
×
13-14
15-16 ×
× O
> >> O-130


a
φ43
a
36
L Thickness of Mounting plate ~5
Small plate adopted L=22+9.6n a=48×48
Big plate adopted L=25+9.6n a=64～64
Mounting dimension of big plate Mounting dimension of small plate
4-φ4.5
4-φ4.5
φ8
φ8
48
36
36
48
7. Handle type can be divided in to below 8 kinds

Handle color can be divided in to four kinds: black, red, white, and grey.
R type I type F type S type L type P type B type K type
O-131 > >>

HZ5 Combination Switch
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, voltage up to 380V;
1.2 Application: Controller of power supply switch and cage-
squirrel inductive motor starting, conversion, and speed
change switching, In addition, it can be applied to be
connection of control circuits;
1.3 Standard: IEC60947-3.
2. Type Designation
Type applied for master control
HZ 5-□/□ □ □
Serial number of connection coil

Orientation feature code L:0° 60°M:-60°0° 60°
Power of control electromotor
Conventional heating current: 10A,20A,40A,63A
Combination switch
3. Technical Data
Ith Ui Ue Ie Rated control AC-22A Operation cycle times AC-4 Operating

Model (A) (V) (V) (A) power(kW) electric life frequency
Off-load On-load Total (operations/hour)
HZ5-10 10 380 380 10 1.7
4 4 4 4
HZ5-20 20 380 380 20 4 51×10 9×10 60×10 20×10 120
4
HZ5-40 40 380 380 40 7.5 15×10 120
HZ5-63 63 380 380 63 10 6×104 4×104 10×104 10×10
4
120
4. Classifications
Classified according to purposes:
Power supply switch and motor starting switch: double poles L01; triple poles L02; quadrupoles L03
Two types of voltage change-over switch: double poles M04; triple poles M06;
Motor reversible change-over switch: M05;
Y-△ starting switch: M07
Multi-speed motor speed-varying switch: Dual-speed M08; tri-speed M16
5. Diagraam for switch connection
L01 L02 L03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M08E

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 0 Y △ 0 1 2 0 1 2
1 —2 × × × × × × × × × ×
3 —4 × × × × × × × × ×
5 —6 × × × × × × × ×
7 —8 × × × × × × × ×
9 — 10 × × × × × × O
11 — 12 Note: "X" means "on" × × × × ×
13 — 14 × × ×
15 — 16 × × ×
> >> O-132

Model Lmax Lmax a Note

HZ5-10 36+14n 38 60
HZ5-20 37+13n 38 60 n: section number of
HZ5-40 47+16n 38 72 contacting system
HZ5-63 44+26.5n 50 90
0
1 2
a
Lmax Lmax
HZ5-10 HZ5-20
2-φ3.5 4-φ5
3-φ4.5
0°
φ52 φ8 φ10
12
12
φ58
0°
φ40
45
34
45
4-φ5
45 45
HZ5-40 HZ5-63
4-φ5
3-φ4.5 4-φ5
0°
φ72 φ10 φ87

12
12
0°
69±0.5
φ54
60
69±0.5
60
O-133 > >>

HZ5B Combination Switch
1. General
1.2 Application: Start, stop, conversion and speed change of
motor;
2. Type Designation
HZ 5 B-□ □/□ □ □
Serial number of connection diagram

Feature code
Section number of contact system:1~8,
10 section, in all 9 kinds
Code when the switch is self-restoration type
Modified strvcture code
Combination switch
3. Technical Data
Rated voltage (V) AC 50Hz，380V

Rated current (A) 10A、20A
Control capacity (kW) 3kW
4
4 3
Electric life(operations) AC-22: 30×10 ，AC-3: 15×10
Operating frequency(operations /h) AC-22: 30 ，AC-3: 120
4. Classifications
Divided into application for circuits change-over and direct switch on and off circuits according to purposes.
Divided into 9 kinds according to operating mode and operating mechanism position, see in table below:
Operating mode code Position of operating handle Limiting angle

A 0° 45° 45°
Self-reset type
B 45° 0° 45° 90°
C 0° 45° 45°
D 45° 0° 45° 90°
E 45° 0° 45° 90° 135°
Orientation type F 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 180°
I 135° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135° No
P 90° 0° 90° 180°
Q 90° 0° 90° 180° No
> >> O-134

5. Diagram for switch connection
HZ5B-10Z/1 HZ5B-10/1
A001 B001 C001 C002 D001 D002 D003 D004
0° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 °
1 2 × × × × × × × × × × ×
3 4 × × × × × × × × × ×
LW5 A0002 B0011 C0071 C5071 D0081 D0084 D5081 D5090
HZ5B-10Z/2 HZ5B-10/2
A002 A003 B002 B003 B004 C003 C004 C005 D005
0° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 °
1 2 × × × × × × × × × ×
3 4 × × × × × × × × ×
5 6 × × × × × × × × × ×
7 8 × × × × × × × × ×
LW5 A0321 B0337 B0344 B0345 C5391 C0392 D0414
HZ5B-10/2
D006 D007 D008 D009 E001 E002
45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 90 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 90 °
1 2 × × × × × × ×
3 4 × × × × × ×
5 6 × × × × × × × × × ×
7 8 × × × × × × ×
LW5 D0415 D0407 D0404 (YH1) (YH2)
HZ5B-10Z/3 HZ5B-10/3
A004 B005 B006 C006 C007 D010 D011 D012
0° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 45 ° 0° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 ° 45 ° 0 ° 45 °
1 2 × × × × × × × ×
3 4 × × × × × × × ×
5 6 × × × × × × × ×
7 8 × × × × × × × × ×
9 10 × × × × × × × × × ×
11 12 × × × × × × ×
LW5 A5641 B0653 C5714 C5712 D0723 D0727

1～7 Mounting plate
4-φ4.5
2-φ4.3
φ44max
φ41.5
50
36
φ15
30
36
Lmax 30
Model Lmax Note

HZ5B-10 24+15n n: Section number of contaciing system
HZ5B-20 28+12n
O-135 > >>

1. General
1.2 Application: to manually make or break circuits, convert
power supply or load, In addition, it can be applied to
control motor with small capacity;
2. Type Designation
HZ 10□ - □□/□
Number.of poles
Application code
Cover code: Blank: Without cover: IP00
M: White cover: IP56
H: Black cover: IP30
L: Alumnium cover: IP56
Combination switch
3. Technical Data
AC-22A DC-21A AC-3

Model Ith(A) Ui(V)
Ue(V) Ie(A) Ue(V) Ie(A) Ue(V) Ie(A)
HZ10-10 10 10 10 380 3
HZ10-25 25 25 25 380 6.3
HZ10-40 40 40 40
HZ10-60 60 380 380 60 220 60
HZ10-60/E119 60 60 60
HZ10-100 100 100 100
HZ10-100/E119 100 100 100
Note: Under the condition that AC voltage is 380V, ie value of single switch will reduce to 60% of the original value.
4. Classifications
According to purpose: single power switch; double power or double circuit transition switch (code P); triple circuit transition
switch (code S); quadruple circuit transition switch (code G); small-volume motor controlling switch (code N); electric welding
machine switch (code E119); airtight anti-dirt anti-splash switch (code M);
According to mounting mode: front connection and rear connection
According to number of poles: 1 pole, 2 poles, 3 poles, 4 poles
According to section number: 1 section, 2 sections, 3 sections, 4 sections, 5 sections, 6 sections
Operating cycle operations and electric life:
> >> O-136

Number of Single power Dual power Three circuits Four circuits
poles supply switch supply switch change-over switch change-over switch
1L1
1L1 1L1
2L1
1P C1 1L1 C1 C1 2L1 C1
2L1 3L1
3L1
4L1
1L2
1L2 1L2
2L2
2P C2 1L2 C2 C2 2L2 C2
2L2 3L2
3L2
4L2
1L3
1L3 1L3
2L3
3P C3 1L3 C3 C3 2L3 C3
2L3 3L3
3L3
4L3
1L4
1L4 1L4
2L4
4P C4 1L4 C4 C4 2L4 C4
2L4 3L4
3L4
4L4
AC-22A, DC-21 cycle operations Electric Operating

Model life (AC-3) frequency (operations/h)
Off-loading On-loading Total operations
HZ10-10 10000 10000 20000 5000
HZ10-25 5000 15000 20000 5000
HZ10-40 5000 15000 20000
HZ10-60 10000 10000 20000 120
HZ10-60/E119 5000 5000 10000
HZ10-100 10000 10000 20000
HZ10-100/E119 5000 5000 10000

Front connection Rear connection of 10A, 25A, 40A switch
φ φ
H
B1 A2
A1 B2
C
C
S
O-137 > >>

Rear connection of 60A, 100A switch Mounting dimension of cover
H φ
A2
B2 E
F
S
G
C
Dimensions of switch without cover
Ith Overall dimension Mounting dimension

A Remerk
A1 A2 H φ C B1 B2 S J K
10 65 86 60+6n 6 58 55 74 5 - 29+6n
25 100 114 78+10n 8 92 90 100 6 - 38+6n “n”number of poles
40 100 114 78+20n 8 92 90 100 6 - - For switch of wehtoy
60 142 153 102+15n 9 132 128 139 7 13 47+6n machine n=6
100 142 153 104+17n 9 132 128 139 7 13 -
Dimensions of switch without
Type of Ith Number of Overall dimensions(max) Mounting dimension

cover A connection ways
L W H E F G
2 120 102 88
10 60 80 φ7.8
4 136 102 95
2 165 142 130
White cover 25、40 100 100 φ6.8
4 190 142 130
2 220 195 160
60、100 126 126 φ9.8
4 250 195 160
Black cover 10 - 78 78 100 64.5 64.5 φ5.5
Alumnivm cover 10 2 152 105 100 60 79 φ7
> >> O-138

1. General
1.2 Application: It can be applied to start and stop AC motor;
2. Type Designation
HZ 12-□/□-□
Padlock (built-in type lock)

Length code
Mode code
Combination switch
3. Technical Data
Mechanical life Electric life Operating frequency

Model Ith(A) Ui(V) Ue(V) Ie(A)
(operations) (operations) (operations/h)
380 10
HZ12-16 16 550
550 6
380 25 4 4
HZ12-25 25 550 3×10 1×10 300
550 12
380 40
HZ12-40 40 550
550 16
Note: Life of the lock is 0.1×104 operationg
4. Classifications
Divided into three kinds of 16A, 25A, 40A according to conventional heating current.
Divisions according to purpose and structure type, see in table below.
Type Name Purpose
HZ12-□/01 Basic type power supply disconnection switch Applied for making-breaking branch circuits and normal circuits
HZ12-□/03 Padlock type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12-□/05 Built-in lock type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12-□/07.1-5 Padlock type power supply disconnection switch
Used in machine tool general power supply, it can lock interlock
HZ12-□/09.1-5 Built-in lock type power supply disconnection switch
switch's unit that interlocks with the door of machine cabinet when
HZ12-□/02 Basic type power supply disconnection switch
switched off (i.e. switch to ""0" position).
HZ12-□/04 Emergency stop padlock type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12-□/06 Emergency stop built-in lock type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12-□/08.1~5 Emergency stop padlock type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12-□/10.1~5 Emergency stop built-in lock type power supply disconnection switch
Note: HZ12-□/15 and HZ12-□/16 are suitable for the left-open door.
O-139 > >>

As for interlocking bength of inter locking type power supply switch, See in table below.
Model Lmax L Code

HZ12-16/01 HZ12-16/02 HZ12-16/03 HZ12-16/04 84 A
HZ12-25/01 HZ12-25/02 HZ12-25/03 HZ12-25/04 87 B
HZ12-40/01 HZ12-40/02 HZ12-40/03 HZ12-40/04 87 B
HZ12-□/07.1 HZ12-□/08.1 145-149 C
HZ12-□/07.2 HZ12-□/08.2 170-174 D
HZ12-□/07.3 HZ12-□/08.3 195-199 E
HZ12-□/07.4 HZ12-□/08.4 220-224 F
HZ12-□/07.5 HZ12-□/08.5 245-249 G
Note: Different values of L correspond to power supply with rotated axis of different lengths.

Overall dimension of fundamental type power supply switch Mounting dimension of fundamental and basic type switch
φ70
73
45°
4-φ5.5
φ15
□73
90 Lmax 35
1~6(Thickness of mounting plate) φ55
Overall dimension of interlocking type power supply switch Mounting dimension of interlocking power suppy switch
4-φ6.5 4-φ6.5
φ70
73
45°
55
50
φ10
□73
Lmax 35
90 55
85
1~6(Installation panel thickness)
Overall dimension of interlocking type power supply switch
7 Switch body Operating part
A
15
50
A
12
85±0.5
L 35
102±0.57
1~6(Installation panel thickness)
A-A
200mm
55±0.37
4-M6
73±0.5
O
Door of electric cabinet Axis
55±0.37
73±0.5
> >> O-140

HZ12A Combination Switch
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, voltage 380/660V;
1.2 Application: it is applied to make and break the power
supply in electric control circuit of machin tool; In addition,
it can also be used as power supply general switch and
direct start means of switch gear;
2. Type Designation
HZ 12 A -□ / □
Mode code
Rated current
Combination switch
3. Technical Data
Model HZ12A-25 HZ12A-32 Mechanical Electric Operating

Life life Frequency
Rated voltage 220 380 660 220 380 660
For power distribution Power (kW) 7.2 12.5 21.6 9.2 16 27.5 4 4
3×10 1×10 300
apparatusP/AC1/AC21 Rated current (A) 25 25 25 32 32 32
Application Control motor Power (kW) 4.5 12.5 21.6 6.8 12 12 4

3×10 1×104 300
classes P/AC3/AC23 Rated current (A) 16.5 16.5 16.5 25 25 25
For Y-△ starting motor Power (kW) 5.5 11 11 7.5 12 12 4 4

3×10 1×10 300
P/AC3/AC23 Rated current (A) 25 25 25 32 32 32
4. Classifications
Model Classification
HZ12A-□/01 Basic panel type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12A-□/02 Open-door disconnection type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12A-□/03 Basic panel type Y-△ transfer switch
HZ12A-□/04 Open-door disconnection Y-△ transfer switch
HZ12A-□/05 Basic panel type inverted transfer switch
HZ12A-□/06 Open-door disconnection type inverted transfer switch
HZ12A-□/07 Common panel type power supply disconnection switch
HZ12A-□/08 Common panel type double-speed transfer switch
O-141 > >>

overall dimension of HZ12A-□/07
δ 1～ 6
0
1
B
A C D
overall dimension of HZ12A-□/01
δ 1～ 6
OFF
1
0
ON
A C D
Dimension of HZ12A-25/01 type, 32/01 mounting holes
Front connection Rear connection
4-φ4.5 4-φ4.5
φ10 φ60
57.5
2-φ3.5
32.5
57.5
> >> O-142

Overall dimension of HZ12A-□/02
1
OFF
B
0
ON
C
A L D
Inside installation box(cabinet)door of HZ12A-25/02 type and 32/02 type's installation boring size box(cabinet)
8-φ4.5
φ26
57.5
57.5 57.5
Model A B C D
HZ12A-25/01 72 72 58 36
HZ12A-32/01 72 72 58 36
Overall and mounting dimension of HZ12A-□/02.
Model A B C D L
HZ12A-25/02 72 72 114 36 146
HZ12A-32/02 72 72 114 36 146
O-143 > >>

Two-directions Switch
HY23 Two-directions Switch
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, voltage up to 380V;
1.2 Application: control of motor with control operation
frequency less than 300 operations/h; and other
applications.
2. Type Designation
HY 23-□ □ □
Serial number
Section number of tub wheel
Handle type
Design sequence number, group code
Two-directions switch
3. Technical Data
Model Rated current (A) Conirol motor(kW)

HY23-131 20 220V 380V
HY23-132 20
HY23-133 20 2.2 3
HY23-134 20
4. Classifications
Model Structure form Cover Panel Purpose

HY23-131 Standard Yes - Power supply input switch controls motor's start, stop
HY23-132 Standard Yes - Power supply input switch controls motor's inversion, sequence and stop
HY23-133 Standard - - Power supply input switch controls motor's inversion, sequence and stop
HY23-134 Standard - - Control of power supply switch through seperated phases
5. Circuits parameters of operating performance testing
Making & breaking conditions Operating frequency

Utilization
category Making & Interral
Ic/Ie Ur/Ue cosφ breaking time time Off-load On-load Total
AC-22 1 1 0.8 0.05s 30s 8500 1500 10000

AC-3 2 1.05 0.45 0.05s 10s 4900
1000 6000
AC-4 6 1.05 0.45 0.05s 20s 1100
A1) When switch of 10, 20A respectively control squirrel-cage inductive electromotor, which the capacitor is less than 1.1KW,
and 2.2KW, rated current values of the switches are 3, 6A.
HY23-131 wiring diagram HY23-132、HY23-133 wiring diagram
L3 L2 L1
Run Stop Run L3 L2 L1 Positive Stop Reversed
1/L1 2/T1
1/L1 2/T1
D1
3/L2 4/T2
D1
D2
Motor
3/L2 4/T2 D2
Motor O
D3
D3
6/T3 5/T3
5/L3 6/T3
> >> O-144

Two-directions Switch
HY23-134 wiring diagram
Left middle Right D1 D2 D3

L3 L2 L1
1/L1 2/T 1
3/L2 4/T2
HY23-134 on & off
Left middle Right

5/L3 6/T3 1/L1-2/T1 × ×
×
3/L2-4/T2
×
5/L3-6/T3
138max
70max 104±0.1
32 80±0.3
°
4-φ6
45
Nameplate
85±0.3
106max
45
°
O-145 > >>


KDH Switch for Welding Machine
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, voltage up to 380V, current up
to 200A;
1.2 Application: applied to welding machines (Chint model:
BX3) and arc-welding machine.
2. Type Designation
KDH-□

Switch for welding machine
3. Technical Data
Operating
Off-loading operating Electric
Model Ith(A) Ui(V) frequency
cycles life
(operations/hour)
KDH-25 25 380 1×104 120 1×104
4 4
KDH-40 40 380 1×10 120 1×10
4
KDH-63 63 380 1×10 120 1×104
4 4
KDH-125 125 380 1×10 120 1×10
KDH-160 160 380 1×10
4
120 1×10
4
KDH-200 200 380 1×10

4
120 1×10
4
4. Overall and Mounting Dimensions & Wiring diagram

KDH-25
65±0.25
4-φ5
75±0.25
65±0.25
Lmax
φ72±0.43 75±0.25
O
> >> O-146


KDH-40
68±0.25
6
84±0.25
68±0.25
Lmax
φ80±0.43
84±0.25
KDH-63
75±0.25
4-φ6
94±0.25
75±0.25
Lmax
φ86±0.43
94±0.25
KDH-125A
φ9
120
170
112
142
Ⅰ Ⅱ
KDH-160A, KDH-200A
φ10
194(KDH-200)
190(KDH-160)
142
142
155
0 0
0 7 3 4
8
Ⅰ Ⅱ
9 1 6 2 5
Model Lmax Note

KDH-25 63+13n
KDH-40 70+13.5n n stands for sessions
KDH-63 72+17n
O-147 > >>

CZ0 DC Contactor
CZ0 DC contactor
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: DC440V, 600A;
1.2 Application: making & breaking DC circuits and control
DC motors;
1.3 Standards: IEC60947-4-1
2. Type Designation
CZ 0-□/□ □
NC main contact parameters
NO main contact parameters
DC contactor
3. Technical Data
3.1 Breaking capacity of contact under rated voltage
Number of Number of main Number of main Breaking Number of auxiliary Number of Arcing
Model poles contact contact current (A) contact NC contactor distance (mm)
CZ0-40C 2P 2 -- 100 -- -- 50
CZ0-40CA 2P 2 -- 160 2 2 50
CZ0-40/20 2P 2 -- 160 2 2 50
CZ0-40/02 - -- 2 160 2 2 50
CZ0-100/10 1P 1 -- 400 2 2 70
CZ0-100/01 - -- 1 250 2 2 70
CZ0-100/20 2P 2 -- 400 2 2 70
CZ0-150/10 1P 1 -- 600 2 2 100
CZ0-150/01 - - 1 375 2 2 100
CZ0-150/20 2P 2 -- 600 2 2 100
CZ0-250/10 1P 1 -- 1000 3 3 120
CZ0-250/20 2P 2 -- 1000 3 3 120
CZ0-400/10 1P 1 -- 1600 3 3 150
CZ0-400/20 2P 2 -- 1600 3 3 150
CZ0-600/10 1P 1 -- 2400 3 3 180
> >> O-148

CZ0 DC Contactor
3.2 Making & breaking capacity and electromotion, thermal stability of main contact
Making & Making Breaking Electro-

breaking Electrification Testing Making & motion Thermal
capacity Time Time time interval breaking stability stability
Model of constant/ constant/ (ms) (s) times (multiple) (multiple)
I/Ie U/Ue I/Ie U/Ue
main contact T±15%ms T±15%ms
NO main contact 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15

NC main contact 2.5 1.05 7.5 2.5 1.05 7.5 7Ie
＞47 5~10 20 20Ie
Critical making & breaking 10s
0.2 1.05 7.5 0.2 1.05 7.5
capacity of NO, NC contacts
Note：CZ0-100/01 critical making & breaking capacity is 0.3Ie
4. Classification
The contactor is divided into six types of 40A, 100A, 150A, 250A, 400A, 600A according to conventional heating current.
5. Selection principle of DC contactor
Type of circuit Load Type of selected contactor Contactor capacity

DC-1, DC-3 Contactor with 2NO or As per rated operational current
Main circuit
DC-5 2NC main contact As per 30~50% of rated operational current
Power consumption circuit DC-3,DC-5 Contactor with 1NC main contact As per rated operational current
Start-up circuit DC-3,DC-5 Contactor with 1NO main contact As per rated operational current
Breaking circuit AC-2~AC-4 Contactor with 2NO main contact As per rated operational current
Circuit with high inductance Electro-magnet Contactor with 2NO main contact As per the current bigger than current of the circuit
Note: For derating, operational current of the circuit must be =30% of contactor rated operational current

CZ0-40~150/20 double poles contactor
C
2-φ
D
A
O-149 > >>

CZ0 DC Contactor
CZ0-250E~600E/10 single pole contactor
D
2-φ
A
H2
C
B
CZ0-250E~400E/20 double poles contactor
C 2-φ
A
B
Overall dimension Installation dimension

Type
A B C D C Mounting dimertion
+0.5
CZ0-40C 192 114 162 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-40CA 192 114 162 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-40/20 192 114 162 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-40/02 192 114 162 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-100/10 180 150 168 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-100/01 180 150 168 146±1.2 φ7 0 M6
+0.5
CZ0-100/20 240 150 175 170±1.2 φ7 0 M8
+0.5
CZ0-150/10 215 165 178 170±1.2 φ7 0 M8
+0.5
CZ0-150/01 215 165 178 170±1.2 φ7 0 M8
+0.5
CZ0-150/20 288 165 200 200±1.2 φ9 0 M8
CZ0-250/10 327 100 265 290±1.6 φ 11 +0.7
0 M8
CZ0-250/01 327 100 265 325±1.8 φ 11 +0.7
0 M8
CZ0-250/20 360 205 310 320±1.8 φ 13 +0.7
0 M10
CZ0-400/10 375 100 310 320±1.8 φ 13 +0.7
0 M10
CZ0-400/20 400 225 340 340±1.8 φ 17 +0.7
0 M12
CZ0-600/10 445 130 340 380±1.8 φ 17 +0.7
0 M12
> >> O-150

JF5 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, 660V, DC440V;
1.2 Specification of connected conductor: cross section area
of 0.5~25mm, conductor of round shape;
1.3 Easy-to-connect combination screw matched with TU,
TO tap, and G mounting rail;
JF5-10/2 JF5-10/3 JF5-10/5 JF5-2.5RD JF5-2.5S1、2.5S3
JF5-1.5/2 JF5-1.5/3 JF5-1.5/5

H
JF5-2.5/2 JF5-2.5/3 JF5-2.5/5
JF5-25/2
C
A A
O-151 > >>

Serial Overall dimension Mounting
Model
number B C H rail
1 JF5-1.5/1 30 8 28.5 G
2 JF5-1.5/10 30 130 35 G
3 JF5-1.5/2 30 19.5 28 G
4 JF5-1.5/3 30 28.5 28 G
5 JF5-1.5/5 30 46.5 28 G
6 JF5-1.5/2L 18.5 17 11 G
7 JF5-1.5/3L 27.5 17 10 G
8 JF5-2.5/1 35 11 31 G
9 JF5-2.5/10 35 161 36 G
10 JF5-2.5/2 35 24.5 31 G
11 JF5-2.5/3 35 36 31 G
12 JF5-2.5/5 35 59 31 G
13 JF5-2.5/2L 19.5 18 10 G
14 JF5-2.5/3L 30 20 10 G
15 JF5-2.5S1/1 60.5 10.5 54 G
16 JF5-2.5S1/10 60 155 61 G
17
18 JF5-2.5S3/1 60.5 10.5 54 G
19 JF5-2.5S3/10 60 155 61 G
20 JF5-2.5RD/1 46 20 51.5 G
21 JF5-2.5RD/10 46 250 58 G
22 JF5-6/1 45 15 41 G
23 JF5-6/10 45 195 47 G
24 JF5-6/2 44 33 42 G
25 JF5-6/3 44 59 41 G
26 JF5-6/5 46 80 44 G
27 JF5-10/1 50 17 47.5 G
28 JF5-10/10 50 225 54 G
29 JF5-10/2 50 38 48 G
30 JF5-10/5 50 91 48 G
31 JF5-25/1 59 21.5 50 G
32 JF5-25/10 59 26.5 55 G
33 JF5-25/2 59.5 50 50 G
34 JF5-1.5B 31 11 30 G
JF5-2.5B 36.5 11 52 G
> >> O-152

Connecion Terminals
SAK Connecion Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: 660V;
1.2 Specification of connected conductor: 0.75~70mm2;
1.3 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
SAK-2.5 SAK-2.5RD SAK-4 SAK-6 SAK-10
SAK-16 SAK-35 SAK-70 EK-2.5 EK-4
EK-35 EK-6 EK-10 EK-16 SAK-B
C
H
O-153 > >>

Connecion Terminals
Serial Product Specification Rated cross-section
number name code area(mm2)
1 Connection terminals SAK-2.5 0.5~2.5
2 Connection terminals SAK-4 0.5~4
5 Connection terminals SAK-16 4~16
8 Connection terminals EK-2.5 0.5~2.5
9 Connection terminals EK-4 0.5~4
12 Connection terminals EK-16 4~16
13 Connection terminals EK-35 6~35
14 Fuse terminals SAK-2.5RD 0.5~4
15 Fixing parts EW-35
16 Mini baffle SAK-4G
17 Baffle AP 4, 6, 10 Thickness 1.5
18 Baffle AP 2.5 Thickness 1.5
19 Baffle AP 16 Thickness 1.5
20 Baffle AP 35 Thickness 1.5
21 Baffle AP 70 Thickness 2
22 Baffle for separation application ATW 4，6，10 Thickness 1.5
23 Central connection part 2, 5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 35, 70
24 Horizontal prints of marking numbers DEK 5(1……10)
> >> O-154

JXB Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC690V/660V;
1.2 Specification of connected conductor: 0.5~70mm2;
JXB-2.5 JXB-2.5RD JXB-2.5S JXB-4 JXB-4S、4SL
JXB-6 JXB-10 JXB-16 JXB-35 JXB-70
EK-2.5 EK-4 EK-6 EK-10 EK-16
EK-35 JXB-B
C
H
O-155 > >>

Model
number B C H rail
1 JXB-2.5 39.5 6 40 TH35(G32)
2 JXB-2.5S 65 8 48.5 TH35(G32)
3 JXB-4 40 6.5 48.5 TH35(G32)
4 JXB-4S 55 6.7 61 TH35(G32)
5 JXB-4SL 55 6.7 61 TH35(G32)
6 JXB-20RD 59 8.5 43 TH35(G32)
7 JXB-6 40 8 44 TH35(G32)
8 JXB-10 40.5 10 45 TH35(G32)
9 JXB-16 51 12 51.5 TH35(G32)
10 JXB-35 59 18.5 61.5 TH35(G32)
11 JXB-70 75 22 79 TH35(G32)
12 EK-2.5 57 6 39 TH35
13 EK-4 57 7 42 TH35
14 EK-6 57 8 42 TH35
15 EK-10 57 10 42 TH35
16 EK-16 57 13.5 47 TH35
17 EK-35 59 16 56 TH35
18 EW35(GD35、fixing parts) 47 8 61
> >> O-156

JCUK Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electri ratings: Voltgae up to 690V;
2
1.2 Rated cross section area of conductor: 150mm .
1.3 Standard: IEC60947-7-1
JCUK-16N JCUK-2.5N
JCUK-35N JCUK-50H JCUK-150H JCUK-95H JCUK-5N
JCUK-6N JCUK-10RD JCUK-3N JCUK/DK4 JCUK-5RD
JCUK/K5 JCUK-3JD JCUK-5JD JCUK-10JD JCUK-10JD
JCUK-35JD JCUK/S JCUK-10N

H
B
C
O-157 > >>

Model
number B C H rail
1 JUCK-2.5N 43 6.2 41 TH35/G32
2 JUCK-3N 43 5.2 46 TH35/G32
3 JUCK-5N 43 6.2 46 TH35/G32
4 JUCK-6N 43 8.2 47 TH35/G32
5 JUCK-10N 43 10.2 47 TH35/G32
6 JUCK-16N 42.5 12 46 TH35/G32
7 JUCK-35N 51 15.2 61 TH35/G32
8 JUCK-50H 72.5 21 74 TH35/G32
9 JUCK-95H 85 25.2 91 TH35/G32
10 JUCK-150H 101.5 31 112 TH35/G32
11 JUCK/S 61 8.2 58.5 TH35/G32
12 JUCK/K5 57 6.2 62 TH35/G32
13 JUCK/DK4 63.5 6.2 47 TH35/G32
14 JUCK-3JD 42.5 5.2 42 TH35/G32
15 JUCK-5JD 42.5 6.2 47 TH35/G32
16 JUCK-10JD 42.5 8.2 47 TH35/G32
17 JUCK-16JD 42.5 12.2 52 TH35/G32
18 JUCK-35JD 42.5 15 47 TH35/G32
19 JUCK-5RD 72.5 8.2 56.5 TH35/G32
20 JUCK-10RD 64 12 51.5 TH35/G32
21 JUCK/GD TH35/G32
22 JUCK/BJ
23 JUCK/DB As per product specifications
> >> O-158

JH1 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC690V(660V)/DC440V;
1.2 Rated cross section area conductor: 35mm2;
2. Features
Compact socket structure and the connection adopts
combined screw, which is easy for connection and
maintenance.
JH1-1.5 JH1-1.5L JH1-2.5 JH1-2.5L JH1-2.5RD
JH1-2.5S JH1-2.5SL JH1-6 JH1-10 JH1-16
JH1-25 JH1-35
B
C
H
O-159 > >>

Model
number B C H rail
1 JH1-1.5 42 8 37 G
2 JH1-1.5L 42 8 37 G
3 JH1-2.5 44.5 10 40 G
4 JH1-2.5L 44.5 10 40 G
5 JH1-2.5RD 43 16.3 48.5 G
6 JH1-2.5S 54 12 54 G
7 JH1-2.5SL 54 12 54 G
8 JH1-2.5G 44.5 2 40 G
9 JH1-2.5SG 54 2 54 G
10 JH1-6 50 14 42 G
11 JH1-6L 50 14 42 G
12 JH1-6G 50 1.5 42 G
13 JH1-25 58 20.5 51 G
14 JH1-25L 58 20.5 51 G
15 JH1-25G 58 2 51 G
16 JH1-35 64 26 47.3 G
> >> O-160

1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC690V (660V);
1.2 Rated cross section area of conductor: 35mm2;
JH5-10 JH5-25
JH5-1.5 JH5-2.5 JH5-2.5SL JH5-10

number Model rail
B C H
1 JH5-1.5 38.5 8.4 45.5 G
2 JH5-1.5L 38.5 8.4 45.5 G
3 JH5-1.5S 38 10 45.5 G
4 JH5-1.5SL 38 10 45.5 G
5 JH5-2.5 44 10.3 51 G
6 JH5-2.5L 44 10.3 51 G
7 JH5-6 55.7 13 57.5 G
8 JH5-10 59.7 15.5 61.5 G
9 JH5-25 64.7 18.2 67 G
10 JH5-1.5B 35.5 10 42.5 G
11 JH5-2.5B 43.3 10 50 G
B C
H
O-161 > >>

1. General
1.1 By adoption of special connection structure, the product
can realize firm-fixing and loosening-proof connection;
JH6-B JH6-35 JH6-1.5 JH6-2.5 JH6-2.5RD1
JH6-2.5S、2.5SL JH6-4 JH6-6 JH6-10 JH6-16

Model
number B C H rail
1 JH6-1.5 30 6 42 G
2 JH6-1.5L 30 6 43 G
3 JH6-2.5 37 6 48 G
4 JH6-2.5L 37 6 48 G
5 JH6-2.5RD1 60 17 68 G
6 JH6-2.5S 56 10 53 G
7 JH6-2.5SL 56 10 53 G
8 JH6-4 40 7 53 G
9 JH6-4L 40 7 53 G
10 JH6-6 40 8 53 G
11 JH6-6L 40 8 53 G
12 JH6-10 40 10 53 G
13 JH6-10L 40 10 53 G
14 JH6-16 51 12 58 G O
15 JH6-16L 51 12 58 G
16 JH6-35 59 16 69 G
17 JH6-35L 59 16 69 G
18 JH6-B 37 10 45 G
> >> O-162

TD, JH9 Connection Terminal
1. General of TD series
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC690V (660V), 200A;
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
2. General of JH9 series

2.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC660V;
2
2.2 Rated cross section area of conductior: 25mm ;
TD-15 TD-20 TD-30 TD-60 TD-100
JH9-1.5 JH9-2.5 JH9-6 JH9-10 JH9-25
TD-150-200
A-A
H
A A
C
O-163 > >>

number Model
B C H rail
1 JH9-1.5 30.2 8 24.2 C
2 TD-15A 30.2 8 24.2 C
3 JH9-1.5G 30.2 2 24.2 C
4 TD-15AG 30.2 2 24.2 C
5 JH9-1.5AG 30.2 2 24.2 C
6 TD-20A 39 12.5 24.5 C
7 JH9-2.5G 39 2 24.5 C
8 TD-20AG 39 2 24.5 C
9 JH9-6 43 14.5 38 C
10 TD-30A 43 14.5 38 C
11 JH9-6G 43 2 38 C
12 TD-30AG 43 2 38 C
13 JH9-10 52 18.3 45 C
14 TD-60A 52 18.3 45 C
15 JH9-10ZG 52 2 45 C
16 TD-60AG 52 2 45 C
17 JH9-25 60 22 43.5 C
18 TD-100A 60 22 43.5 C
19 JH9-25ZG 60 2 43.5 C
20 TD-100AG 60 2 41.5 C
21 TD-200/1 68 27.8 51 C
> >> O-164

JH10 Connection Terminals
1. General
1.1 Certificates: CCC;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC690V (660V), 15~60A;
JH10-60 JH10-60L JH10-60S、60SL

Model
number B C H rail
1 JH10-15-60 53.5 10 37 G
2 JH10-15-60L 53.5 10 37 G
3 JH10-15-60S 50.6 10 55.5 G
4 JH10-15-60SL 50.6 10 55.5 G
O-165 > >>

NJD Connection Terminal
1. General
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
NJD-7L NJD-7S NJD-7P NJD-7P-1 NJD-10D

Model
number B C H rail
1 NJD-7P-1 62 10 42 G
2 NJD-7P 62 10 42 G
3 NJD-7L 62 10 42 G
4 NJD-7S 62 12 50 G
5 NJD-10D 62 10 42.5 G
6 NJD-7G 62 10 37.5 G
B
C
H
> >> O-166

TK Connection Terminal
1. General
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
TK-010 TK-020 TK-030 TK-040 TK-060
TK-100
Serial Overall dimension

Model
number A B C D E
1 TK-010 M3 10A 38 35 8.8 7
2 TK-020 M4 20A 38 35 10.7 8
3 TK-030 M4 30A 38 35 13 10
4 TK-040 M5 40A 38 35 15 12
5 TK-060 M6 60A 50 43 16 17
6 TK-100 100A
O-167 > >>

TB Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50Hz, AC600V, 100A;
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
TB-1510 TB-10004 TB-1512 TB-1503
TB-2510 TB-1504 TB-2512 TB-6004
TB-4512 TB-6003 TB-10003 TB-1505 TB-1506
TB-2503 TB-2504 TB-2505 TB-2506
TB-4503 TB-4504 TB-4505 TB-4506
> >> O-168

φF
φG
D
L1 E
L

Model Specifications
number L L1 D E F G rail
1 TB-1503 15A 3 46.5 34 22 17 4.7 7.8 Direct Mounting
2 TB-1504 15A 4 54 44 22 17 4.7 7.8 Direct Mounting
6 TB-2503 25A 3 55 44.5 30 20 5 8 Direct Mounting
7 TB-2504 25A 4 68 56 30 20 5 7.8 Direct Mounting
8 TB-2506 25A 6 92 80.5 30 20 4.3 8 Direct Mounting
13 TB-4506 45A 6 120 109 38 25 5 8 Direct Mounting
14 TB-4512 45A 12 222 212.5 38 25 4.7 7.8 Direct Mounting
17 TB-10003 100A 3 86.5 75.5 43.5 35 5.2 7.8 Direct Mounting
18 TB-10004 100A 4 108 97 43.5 35 5.2 7.8 Direct Mounting
O-169 > >>

TC Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, 600V, 600A;
TC-604 TC-1003
TC-1503 TC-1504
TC-2003 TC-3003 TC-3004 TB-4004 TC-6003 TC-6004
φC
φC
φF
φF
D
D
L1 L1 L1
E E
L L

Model Specifications
number L L1 D E F G rail
1 TC-603 60A 3 87 28 42 30 5 10 Direct Mounting
2 TC-604 60A 4 115 28 43 30 5 10 Direct Mounting
3 TC-1003 100A 3 103 34 55 37 5.5 9.5 Direct Mounting
4 TC-1004 100A 4 137.5 34 55 35 5.5 9.5 Direct Mounting
5 TC-1503 150A 3 115 39 66.5 41 7.8 11 Direct Mounting
6 TC-1504 150A 4 153 38 66.5 41 7.8 11 Direct Mounting
7 TC-2003 200A 3 133 44 72.5 45 8 11.5 Direct Mounting
8 TC-2004 200A 4 177 44 72.5 45 8 11.5 Direct Mounting
9 TC-3003 300A 3 164 55 90 51 8 11.5 Direct Mounting
10 TC-3004 300A 4 218 55 90 51 7.5 11.5 Direct Mounting
12
13
TC-4004
TC-6003
400A
600A
4
3
218
216
55
69
90
100
55
73
8
8
11.5
11.5
Direct Mounting
Direct Mounting
O
> >> O-170

TZ1 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC500V, 100A;
TZ1-10
O-171 > >>

D1 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, 500V, 150A;
D1-10
36.5
25
35.5
7
D1-10
> >> O-172

JX2 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC500V, 100A
1.2 Adopting insulated base and hard-link screw serial
connection.
1.3 Standard: IEC 60947-7-1.
JX2-10 JX2-30
JX2-60 JX2-100

Model
number B C H rail
1 JX2-1010 35 202 33 Direct Mounting
2 JX2-101 35 16.3 33 Direct Mounting
3 JX2-2510 43.5 230 40 Direct Mounting
4 JX2-251 43.5 18.7 40 Direct Mounting
8 JX2-1001 60 28.5 44 Direct Mounting
O-173 > >>

JD0 Connection Terminal
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: AC400V/380V, 60A;
JD0-10
JD0-25
JD0-60
MJ mini busbar
MJ1
> >> O-174

Panel Meters
Digital Panel Meters
Certificates and
General Information
Page P-01
P□7777
Digital panel
meter
Page P-04
P□6666
Digital panel
meter
Page P-08
Analog Panel Meters
NP
Analog Panel
Meters
Page P-11
42,6
Analog Panel
Meters
Page P-13
Maximum
Analog Panel
Meters
Page P-15
Panel Meters
P-01 > >>

Panel Meters
1 General
1.1 Applicable range
P series digital panel meters are mainly used for measuring various electrical parameters, such as AC/DC voltage, AC/DC current,
frequency,single/three phase active power, single/three phase power factor, etc. in power station, electrical switchgear and the variety
measurement of electrical equipment or indicating circuit. It has the features of high measurement accuracy, clear reading, convenience,
no perspective errors, optional installation angle, anti-seismic, anti-magnetic field interference, etc., which is the ideal substitute of
pointer meter.
1.2 Meter type
1.2.1 This series meter can be divided into several types below according to the difference in additional features:
Normal digital display meters (only display 1 electrical parameter or 3 electrical parameters in the same type. For example: 3 phase
voltage)Programmable digital meter (RS-485 communication, alarm for upper and lower limits, analog quantitative output, etc.
functions are added base on the display meter)Muti-functional digital meters (the function of displaying all the electrical parameters or
several different types of electrical parameters is added base on the display meter and programmable meter)
1.3 Function features
1.3.1 Used in the real-time measurement on all the electrical parameters in power circuits. It can also measure and display single
parameter or several parameters at the same time according to the needs.
1.3.2 The variety specification is complete, a variety of external dimensions and series product.
1.3.3 All the meters are designed according to the standard size. High compatibility, convenient replace and maintain.
1.3.4 adopting new cassette installation method, which makes the installation simple, convenient and tight.
1.3.5 SMT production technology, software production calibration.
1.3.6 Intelligent and modularized design method. The multiplying factor of transformer can be set freely; the functional modules can be
combined freely, so that it can improve the operation flexibility of the users.
1.3.7 Network design can be docked with all kinds of electric network remote monitoring system easily.
2 Type designation
The model of meter is comprised of 8 parts. The content from Part 1~Part 4 and Part 8 should be filled in, others can be chosen according
to needs.
P□ □-□□□ □ □
Measure range, input specfcation,ratio,etc. information

Auxiliary code: AC220V or AC/DC86~264V
Additional function
No: no additional functions
K: 1-way relay contact, upper and lower limit alarm output
B: analog transmitting output
T: RS485 communication output
N: two or more functions are combined determined by the clients
The type of signal input
No: single phase AC D:DC signal input
S: 3 phase 3 wire signal input
Y: 3 phase 4 wire signal input
External size of the meter
1: 96mm×48mm 2: 72mm×72mm 3: 96mm×96mm
5: 120mm×60mm 6: 80mm×80mm
7: 160mm×80mm 8: 120mm×120mm
Design code
666: only has the measuring function
7777: programmable intelligent meter
The type of the meter

A: Ammeter Z:Voltmeter P: Frequency meter H: Power factor meter
S: Active power meter Q: Reactive power meter D: Muti-function meter
The product code of digital panel meters
> >> P-02

Panel Meters
Analog Panel Meters
NP Series panel meter
1 Summary
This meter is widely used as direct acting analog
indicator electrical measuring instrument, it is used for
measuring various electrical parameters, such as voltage,
current, power, frequency, power factor, etc. in DC/AC
circuit. The advantage of the analog panel meter is, it can
show the trend of the measured electrical parameters. It’s
mainly used in mining enterprises, metallurgy, chemical,
electricity, complete equipment and all kinds of electronic
control devices. The appearance is simple and elegant.
The influence of vibration and impact Common type

Installation position Applicable vertical installation, ±5°gradient is allowed unless otherwise specified
Storage temperature -40℃~+70℃
Damping time Less than 5s
Reference temperature is 23℃±2℃relative temperature is 40~85%,the working temperature limit is
Working condition
-20℃~+55℃,relative humidity should be less than 95%,without dust and corrosive gas in the air
Insulating strength Can stand withstand voltage test with 50Hz sine wave AC 2kV voltage lasting 1min
Insulation resistance More than 20MΩ/DC500V
2 Main structure and work principle
The models of NP series mounted panel meters are mainly NP48、NP72、NP96.

NP series square panel meters are electromagnetic type, adopting repulsive construction. The meters are consist of measuring
mechanism and indicating device., with casing adopted by flame-retardant ABS engineering plastics, safe measure terminals, high-
efficiency connection type, and adopted by printing dial & transparent glass cover. The whole looks beautiful and provides an open view.
P-11 > >>

Panel Meters
Analog Panel Meters
3 Main technical parameters
Product name Specification Measuring range Accuracy class

50µA~20A(direct)20A~10kA/60mV
DC Ammeter NP48-A DC,NP72-A DC,NP96-A DC
or /75mV(external device) Class 1.5
(NP48-V DC
5V~750V(direct)450V~450kV/1mA
DC Voltmeter NP48-V DC,NP72-V DC,NP96-V DC is class 2.5)
or /5mA(external device)
500mA~100A(direct)NP48 is 500mA~30A(direct) <=30A Class 1.5 >30A Class 2.5
AC Ammeter NP48-A,NP72-A,NP96-A
5A~10kA/5A or /1A(external device) NP48-A is lass 2.5
15V~600V(direct) Class 1.5 NP48-V
AC Voltmeter NP48-V,NP72-V,NP96-V
380V~450kV/100V(external device) is Class 2.5
45~55Hz, 45~65Hz,55~65Hz,etc.
Frequency meter NP48-Hz,NP72-Hz, NP96-Hz Class 1.0
Rated voltage: 100V,220V,380V
Power meter 100V,220V,380V~380kV/100V
NP72-W/var,NP96-W/var Class 2.5
Varmeter 5A, 5A~10kA/5A(external device)
3-phase power 0.5C~1~0.5L
NP72- cosΦ,NP96- cosΦ Class 2.5
factor meter 100V 5A,380V 5A
NP96 series
92
5 □90
□96 66.5 92
NP72 series
68
5 □66
□72
66.5 68
NP48 series
45
5 □44
□48 45
67
> >> P-12

English MASTER Catalogue-Low Voltage With Detaied Technical Information PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

English MASTER Catalogue-Low Voltage With Detaied Technical Information PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Low Voltage Master Catalogue

ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD.

Zhejiang CHINT Electrics Co.,Ltd. (public company, SHA:601877) is

With its worldwide presence of distrbution network,

CHINT is consistently committed to developing itself into a world-class electric

Europe America CIS Region West Asia & Africa Asia-Pacific

Public Cable Net

Automatic Meter Reading System

Hydraulic power station

HV Power Factor Compensation HV Power Factor Compensation

HV Power Capicitor HV Power Transformer

Wind Power station Power Factor Compensation(Outdoor)

Surge Arrester Insulator Reactor

Solar power station KWH Meter

AC Contactor Control Transformer Thermal overload Relay

Motor Starter Motor Protection Device

A Modular DIN Rail Product A-01~A-124

E Over-load Relay E-01~E-20

H Inverter, Soft-starter H-01~H-12

L Automatic Voltage Regulator L-01~L-15

M Switch Disconnector M-01~M-53

N Switch and Socket-outlet M-01~M-53

O Fuse and Muti-function Switch M-01~M-53

P Panel Meter M-01~M-53

Page A-01 Page A-07

Page A-09 Page A-13

Page A-45 Page A-47

Page A-49 Page A-51

Page A-23 Page A-53

RCBO Switch Disconnector

NB1L NB7LE NH2 NH4

Page A-25 Page A-29 Page A-55 Page A-57

Page A-33 Page A-35 Page A-59

NP9 ND9 Busbar for DIN rail

Page A-93 Page A-93

Consumer Unit Change-over Switch

Page A-75 Page A-77

Page A-80 Page A-83

Wall Mounting Enclosure

Bus Bar / Din Rail

MCB shield Busbar for

Page A-91 Page A-92

NB1 Miniature Circuit Breaker

Color coded contact position indicator

Line and load side terminals accept bus bar

3 Breaking capacity up to 10000A 7 Extendable DIN-rail holder for easy installation

A-01 > >>

1.3 Approvals and certificates

> >> A-02

0.05 0.05 0.05

t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 9.6-14.4In

DC operation B curve DC operation C curve

Let-through I 2t/A 2S I2t

A-03 > >>

> >> A-04

In Power supply side: RT36-00 (fuse)

(A) 20 25 36 50 63 80 100 125 160

In Power supply side: NM8-100S/H/R

2.4 Backup protection

In Power supply side: RT16 series

(A) 40 50 63 80 100 125 160

In Power supply side: NM8

(A) NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R